{"1": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2859", "width": "1904", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "Class\\nBook\\n^_-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "GEAMMAE OF THE FEENCH LANGUAGE.\\nPART I.\\nFOE BEGINNERS.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "GRAMMAR\\nFRENCH LANGUAGE.\\nM. SCHELE PE VEKE, LL.D.\\ni\\nOF THE TTNT/ErSr: I OF VIRGINIA.\\nNEW YORK:\\nUNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY,\\n4 BOND STREET,\\n1870.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "Rutered Mending to Act of Confjre in tin- jmr 1*17,\\nBt ruhardscn COMPANY,\\nt;ierk Office of the l i\u00c2\u00abtn- 1 Oonrl l tin- lintel Sinlen for Hid\\nSouthern District of New York.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "TABLE OF CONTENTS.\\nON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nPAGH\\nI. Pronunciation. 9\\nThe Alphabet 9\\nVowels 10\\nSounds of the Vowels 10\\nAccents Re 10\\nForm of Accents 10\\nPurposes of Accents 11\\nEffect of Accents 11\\nNasal Sounds 12\\nDiphthongs 14\\nCompound Sounds 14\\nThree Vowels 16\\nFour Vowels 17\\nT 17\\nConsonants 18\\nFinal Consonants 18\\nSounds of the Consonants 18\\nPronunciation in Beading and Speaking 29\\nChanges of Sounds 29\\nII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Elision 32\\nIII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Syllabication 34\\nIV. Quantity 35\\nWords with double meaning 36\\nV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Punctuation 37\\nVI. List op Abbreviations 38", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "4 CONTENTS.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nNOTJX8.\\nPAOB\\nDitinon of Nouns 39\\nProper Names 39\\nCommon Nouns 39\\nCollective Nouns 40\\nGender of Nouns 40\\nDetermined by Signification 40\\nDetermined by Termination 42\\nList of Masculine Nouns in mute e 43\\nHJfimber f Nouns 52\\nRules on Formation of the Plural 52\\nIrregular Plurals 5;$\\ntoe 54\\nCHAPTER II.\\nARTICLES.\\nTii. Tkm Artirl,* 54\\n1. Definite Article 54\\nDeclension of Definite Article 58\\nIndefinite Article 50\\nDi olension of Indefinite Article 56\\nExercise H\\nDeclension of Proper Names 57\\nPot 57\\nExercise 57\\n1. Partitive Article 58\\nExercise N\\nChanges of Partitive Article 59\\nExercise 59\\nCHAPTER III.\\nADJECTIVES.\\nAdjectives agree with their Nouns 60\\nParticiples 60\\nFormation of the Feminine 60\\nExercise 62", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS. 5\\nPAOB\\nAdjectives in eur 62\\nIrregular Feminities 63\\nDouble forms for Masculine 63\\nExercise 64\\nFormation of the Plural 64\\nExercise 64\\nFormation of the Comparative Degrees 65\\nComparative of Superiority 65\\nInferiority 65\\nEquality 65\\nIrregular Comparative forms, 66\\nExercise 66\\nRelative Superlative 66\\nAbsolute 67\\nExercise 67\\nPlace of Adjectives 67\\nExercise 68\\nNumeral Adjectives 69\\nCardinal Numbers 69\\nRules on use of Cardinal Numbers 70\\nExercise 71\\nOrdinal Numbers 72\\nRules on the use of Ordinal Numbers 73\\nExercise 73\\nCHAPTER IY.\\nPRONOUNS.\\ni of Pronouns 74\\nPersonal Pronouns. 74\\nConjunctive Personal Pronouns 74\\nRelation to Verbs 75\\nRules of ascertaining it 76\\nElision of Pronouns 77\\nPlace of Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 78\\nExercise 78\\nAbsolute Personal Pronouns 79\\nExercise 80\\nPossessive Pronouns 80", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "6 CONTENTS.\\nPAGX\\nConjunctive Possessive Pronouns 80\\nAgreement with Noun 81\\nDeclension 81\\nExercise 82\\nAbsolute Possessive Pronouns 82\\nExercise 83\\nDemonstrative Pronouns 83\\nConjunctive Demonstrative Pronouns 83\\nAgreement with Noun 84\\nExercise 84\\nAbsolute Demonstrative Pronouns 84\\nExercise 85\\nRelative Pronouns 85\\n86\\n87\\nExenaae 87\\nInterrogative Pronoun 88\\nPrepositions belonging t them 88\\nExercise 89\\nLnite Pmnouns 89\\nOn 89\\nHow-: 89\\nExercise 90\\nCII A I TKIl V.\\nVERBS.\\nP nr pOBW Of HM Verb 90\\nAuxiliary V.rl s HI\\nto have .i I\\nM\\n.1 negatively M\\nA Interrogatively 98\\nInterrogatively and negatively 100\\n102\\nnegatively 103\\nratively 100\\nv.-iv and negatively 106\\nBxerdae 106\\nrcise 107", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS. 7\\nFACIE\\nEire, to be 10?\\nEire, negatively 110\\nEtre, interrogatively 114\\nEtre, interrogatively and negatively 116\\nExercise 118\\nExercise 118\\nExercise 119\\nEules on use of Verbs 119\\nFour Conjugations 120\\nFormation of Tenses and Persons, tbat are uniform 120\\nModes of Verbs 121\\nTenses of Verbs 122\\nSimple Tenses 122\\nCompound Tenses 123\\nTable of Terminations of Verbs 124\\nFirst Conjugation, parler 128\\nRemarks on Verbs of First Conjugation 139\\nSecond Conjugation, finir 144\\nThird Conjugation, recevoir 156\\nRemarks on the Verbs of Third Conjugation 167\\nFourth Conjugation, vendre 169\\nDifferent kinds of Verbs 180\\nActive Verbs 180\\nNeuter Verbs 180\\nList of Neuter Verbs, conjugated with etre 181\\nPassive Verbs 182\\nPronominal Verbs 183\\nReflexive 183\\nReciprocal 183\\nPronominal Proper 184\\nImpersonal Verbs 184\\nReflexive Verb se lever 184\\nSenaUer 196\\nIrregular Verbs 203\\nOf First Conjugation 204\\nOf Second Conjugation 205\\nOf Third Conjugation 220\\nOfFourth Conjugation 230\\nExercises on Verbs, [13] 258", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS.\\nFAOB\\nParticiples 264\\nUse of Participles 264\\nExercise 205\\nCHAPTER VI.\\nADVERBS.\\nFormation of Adverbs 266\\nSimple Adverbs 266\\nDerivative Adverbs 266\\nExercise 266\\nCompound Adverbs 2C.7\\nAdverbs of Quantity 867\\nExercise 207\\nive Adverbs 207\\nExercise 207\\nComparativ. Adverbs 268\\nExercise 208\\nCUAPTER VII.\\nrKi.i-. -nioNS.\\nFarm of Prepositions 260\\nSimple Prepositions 260\\nCompound Prepositions S68\\nd, and par 868\\nPrepositions 270\\n270\\nCII A PT SB VIII.\\nrumrnoRS.\\nUse of Conjunctions 271\\nExercise 272\\nCHAPTER IX.\\ni i i UK IP ins.\\nDm f Interjections 272", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "FRENCH GRAMMAR\\nON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 PRONUNCIATION.\\nThe pronunciation of a foreign language cannot be satisfac-\\ntorily learned by comparing it witb that of our own. Such\\ncomparisons lead invariably to incorrectness. The teacher\\nought, therefore, in all cases to begin by pronouncing himself,\\nclearly and distinctly, the sound of each letter and combination\\nof letters, and then make his pupils repeat them one by one.\\nThe latter cannot be expected to be able to pronounce well,\\nuntil their ear has, by practice, been accustomed to the sound\\nonly when they are perfectly familiar with it, will they succeed\\nin repeating it correctly by themselves. When the sound is\\nonce acquired, then the teacher may suggest the resemblance\\nto some similar sound in the pupils native tongue, in order to\\nassist their memory.\\nThe French Alphabet contains the following letters\\nA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S,\\nT, U, V, X, Y, Z.\\nThe majority of these letters are taken from the Roman Alphabet.\\nK is only found in foreign words. Q is always accompanied by u, and\\nhas the same sound as hard c and k. W is not used in French except\\nin writing foreign words, like whig, and then pronounced like v. X\\nis a compound letter, consisting of e and s, or g and Yia called\\ni grec, because it was taken from the Greek.\\nI*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "10 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nFive of these letters are called Voioels, from a word which\\noriginally suggested that they were produced by a simple utter-\\nance of the voice, without the aid of other letters; whilst Con-\\nsonants were so called, because they cannot be sounded without\\nthe assistance of another sound (con-sono).\\nA has but one sound, which resembles that of a in father.\\nEx. la, the ma, my ta, thy sa, her annales, annals carte,\\ncard.\\nE has the sound of e in ell, but accents change it slightly,\\nas will be explained under the head of Accents.\\nEx. mor telle, mortal; href, brief: sept, seven.\\nlias the sound of ee in eel.\\nEx. fie, file; minime, smallest; cirl, heaven vie, life.\\nhas the two sounds which we give to o in the word post-\\noffice, the former close, the latter open.\\nEx. (close) apdtre, apostle; repos, repose sitdt, so soon,\\n(open) choc, shock social soldat, soldier.\\nU has no corresponding sound in English. It is pronounced\\nby pointing the lips aa if preparing for a whistle. It must be\\nheard to l e imitated, and then requires, like all the sounds, prac-\\ntice to become perfectly correct.\\nEx. seen; fatr, Bate; minute, minute; unt, plain.\\nThese Vowels, however, suffer certain changes under the\\ninfluence of three causes: the addition of Accents, their com-\\nbination with in and n, and their combination with other\\nvowels. Y. as a vowel, will be mentioned hereafter.\\n1. When they arc accented\\nThe French has three accents, viz. the three signs\\nand which are placed over the vowels for different pur-\\nposes", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "PRONUNCIATION. 11\\nThe Acute Accent, (accent aigu) is placed over the let-\\nter e only, and gives it an acute or sharp sound.\\nEx. cafe, coffee celebre, celebrated necessite.\\nThe Grave Accent, (accent grave) is placed over the\\nvowels a and e and the diphthong ou, and gives them not dif-\\nferent sounds but makes them long or broad.\\nEx. la, there pere, father oil, where.\\nThe Circumflex Accent, A (accent circonflexe) is placed over\\nall five vowels and gives them a very long or broad sound.\\nJt generally indicates the loss of a letter next to the accented\\nTowel.\\nEx. hate, haste; hdte, host; meme, self; stir, sure.\\nThe purposes for which the accents are used, are\\nTo mark certain inflections, as e. g., the participles past of\\nv irbs\\nEx. Sieve, elevated ferme, closed.\\nTo distinguish two similar words of different meanings\\nEx. la, the, and la, there ou, or, and oil, where des, of the,\\nand des, since a, has, and a, to notre, our, and le ndtre, ours\\nsur, upon, and stir, sure du, of the, and dti, due.\\nTo indicate the loss of a letter\\nEx. mere, from mater pdtre, from pastor hdte, from hostis\\nstir, from securus; epltre, from epistola.\\nThe effect of the accents on the vowel e is shown in five dif-\\nferent ways. The Acute Accent gives it a sharp sound\\nEx. celebre, celebrated severite, severity.\\nThe vowel e has the same sound as if it were thus accented, when,\\nin final syllables, it is followed by a silent consonant\\nEx. nez, nose placet, petition parler, to speak,\\nexcept in tu es, thou art, and il est, he is, where it has a grave 01\\nbroad sound.\\nThe Grave Accent gives it a broad sound\\nEx. frire, brother prods, process des, since.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "12 ON LETTERS AJN T I) SYLLABLES.\\nThe Circumflex Accent gives it a very broad sound.\\nEx. tele, head meme, same.\\nThe absence of any accent produces in monosyllables the so-\\ncalled indefinite sound of e.\\nEx. me, me te, thee se, one s self; que, that le, it ne, not.\\nThe absence of any accent on final e in other words, not\\nmonosyllables, leaves it perfectly silent.\\nEx. vie, life terre, earth lane, moon.\\nIt retains its silent character even, when in the pural an s is added.\\nEx. DM, Pt B, lives; hi:,,s, moons armeS, arms.\\nThe letters 1.1 and ent, in the final syllables of verbs, arealways silent.\\nEx. tout ititet, yon Bay Q fluent, they said.\\nA is also unite in h u above eft Mora, below rest spring, and\\nall words beginning \u00e2\u0096\u00a0with rets; in depr\u00c2\u00ab, degree; denier, farthing;\\n/r. dangerons; so meat, barking; paiement, payment;\\ntutoiement, calling others then, and rentemerU, abjuration.\\nA mote can never begin a word bnt it can l e found in the first\\nsyllable, in the middle nnd at the end of a word.\\nEx. tt Ir, to hold Bamedi, Saturday table, table.\\nIn the very rare cases, when two or three syllables, each having a\\nmuie i, follow each other, the first one, when there are two snob\\nand the fir-t two, when there are three, are given the Bo-called indefi-\\nnite sound aa in monosyllables.\\nEx. retenir, to detain; reeewnV, to receive; becuma\\nIn all other words the rule prevails thai no two mute s can follow\\neach oth r in sue\u00c2\u00a9 asion at the end of a word and when this should\\nhappen as the edict of inflection, e. g., In conjugating verbs, certain\\northogzaphica] remedies are prescribed, which will l\u00c2\u00ab- mentioned In\\ntheir appropriate place.\\nVowels Buffer certain Ibanges of pronanciation,\\n2. When they are followed by n or w, in which case they h.-ive\\na nasal sound, inherited by the French from the Latin.\\ntroll-known thai the Romans gave t.. the final syllables itM,\\nMM and others, u nasal sound, which led to their frequent sup-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "PRONUNCIATION. 13\\npression, as was the case always in poetry, where these syllables\\nremained altogether silent, when they were followed by a vowel.\\nThis nasal sound is the same before n and m, so that am is\\npronounced like an, and is produced in the following combina-\\ntions\\nam ambre, amber. em empire, empire,\\nan roman, novel. en encre, ink.\\nim impoli, impolite. om ombre, shade.\\nin enfin, at last. on salon, parlor.\\num parfum, perfume.\\nun brun, brown.\\nThe nasal sound is not given to these syllables:\\na. When they are followed by a vowel or a second m or n.\\nEx. imiter, to imitate inutile, useless amener, to bring\\nomettre, to omit uni, united flamme, flame dilemme, dilem-\\nma; ennemi, enemy immobile, immovable; inne, innate dom-\\nmaye, damage bonne, good.\\nExcept when emm and enn begin a word.\\nEx. emmener, to carry off (pronounced as if spelt an-mener) ennui,\\nweariness ennoblir, to ennoble.\\nb. When they are found in words taken from foreign\\nlanguages.\\nEx. Ainmon, Emmanuel, commotidi, Jerusalem, amen, Am-\\nsterdam.\\nExcept in the words Adam, Joachim, Quidam, GheruMn and Sera-\\nphin, which have the nasal sound, being thoroughly naturalized.\\nc. AVhen in precedes the letter k, which is always silent.\\nEx. inhumain, inhuman.\\nThe syllable en, on the contrary, remains nasal before h, because it\\nonly occurs before an aspirate h.\\nEx. enhardir, to embolden.\\nd. When ent forms the last syllable of the third person\\nplural of the verb, when it is altogether silent.\\nEx. Us parlent, they speak Us viennent, they come.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "14 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nThe following words are irregular in their pronunciation\\nenitrer, to intoxicate, pronounced an-ivrer.\\nenorgueillir, to make proud, pronounced an-orgueillir.\\nennemi, enemy, en-nemi (not nasal).\\ni, nay, nan-ni.\\nhennir, to neigh, an-nir,\\nsolennel, solemn, solanel.\\nfemme, woman, fam (not nasal).\\nfaon, fawn, fan (nasal).\\npaon, peacock, pan (nasal).\\nLoon (city of), Lan (nasal*.\\n1 (city of), Can (nasal).\\n(river of), Sone.\\nmonsieur, sir, or Mr. mosienr.\\nVowels Buffer certain changes of pronunciation.\\n3. When they an j nn l to other vowels.\\nIn French, when two vowels arc combined, they may eithei\\nproduce together a simple Bound, different from that which they\\nproduce Beparately, or they may form one syllable, in whi.-h,\\nhowever, each rowel preserves its proper sound. The latter\\ncombination alone produces diphtho\\na. The following vowels, when joined, produce compound\\nsounds\\nhave tic sound of French sharp or broad, like or e,\\nI bave; ji nn, affair; pat re, pair; peine, pain;\\nvein.\\n.1/ and el, followed by m or have the sound f i/i. Hence pain,\\nbread, and pin, pine-tree, sound alike; so do/aim, hunger, and fin,\\nend deeeein, design, and destin, draw\\n.1/ i- pronounced like (i being Bilent) in Montaigne, a proper\\nname.\\n\\\\i has the\\nEl. I m. .How jiii irrc, poor; mhl.tcr, boldness.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "PEONUKCIATION. 15\\nOu has the sound of oo.\\nEx. clou, nail sou, cent outil, tool boule, bowi.\\nEu has a sound resembling that of u in spur, but it is always\\nlong.\\nEx. peu, little; seul, alone; meunier, miller.\\nIt has the sound of u (e heing silent) in certain forms of the verb\\navoir.\\nEx. eu, had feus, I had que feusse, that I might have.\\nThe same is the case in djeun, fasting.\\n(Eu has the same sound as eu.\\nEx. ceuf, egg vceu, vow.\\nOi, has the sound of French oua.\\nEx. moi, me roi, king gloire, glory oie, goose.\\nOi before n is sounded as if it were spelt ouin.\\nEx. foin, hay loin, far soin, care.\\nOi is somewhat like o (i being silent) in oignon, onion encoignure,\\ncorner angle poignard, poniard poignee, handful, and a few others.\\nIf these combinations of vowels have a circumflex accent over the\\nsecond vowel, the souud is lengthened considerably.\\nEx. maitre, master voute, vault croitre, to grow.\\nIf it is desirable, for etymological purposes, to preserve the original\\nsound of each vowel separately, a diaeresis is placed over the second\\nvowel.\\nEx. Saul, Saul naif, artless Mo ise, Moses bdionnette, bayonet.\\nThe same effect is produced when the first vowel of ei and eu is\\naccented.\\nEx. dbeir, to obey reussir, to succeed.\\nN. B. Oi was formerly used in many nouns, and always in the im-\\nperfect and conditional tenses of verbs, instead of the modern form ai,\\nintroduced by Voltaire. It had the same sound as ai, which requires\\nattention, as many works still retain the former spelling.\\nb. All other combinations of vowels produce diphthongs,\\nforming either one or two syllables.\\nIf e should be the first of two such vowels and unaccented, it is\\nsilent.\\nEx. Jean, John flageolet, flageolet geolier, jailer.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "16 ON LETTEES AND SYLLABLES.\\nIf u be the first, it is also silent, when it follows g and q merely\\nfor the purposes of pronunciation, and does not form part of the sub-\\nstance of the word.\\nEx. bague, ring gxurir, to cure guide, guide qui, who quand,\\nwhen.\\nTlie pronunciation of diphthongs and the division into syl-\\nlables may be practised in the following words\\na- -ri-en, ethereal. mi l, mi-el, honey.\\nUnnaS, fo-ma-Sl, [shmaeiL client, client, client.\\nchaos, cha-os, chaos. o-ri ent, orient.\\ni, Pha-ra-on, Pharaoh. union, u-ni- n, anion.\\nborSal, bo-rfi-al, northern. vi-o-lon, violin.\\nbeatitude, b\u00c2\u00a3*-ti-tu-de, beatitude, reU r, re-li-er, bind.\\n6-0 !i en, eolian. sd ore, sawdust.\\nm t ore, meteor. tu-ant, killing,\\nft-an-cee, betrothed. Ba-la-er, saint.-.\\npoet bruit, bruit, noise.\\nmade, kick. rite, si-nu-o sit. sinuosity.\\nhen. onfidenoe.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2.v//- iiii-i tu( si-tr, impet- tirieux, Bl-ri-eux, Berious.\\nunity.\\nWhen tl i-ir voweh are combined, two of these will always\\nform B iponod vow.], rach as oi, at, Ott, and oh; the\\nthird eowel, which either precedes or follows this combination,\\nia then pronounced by itael\u00c2\u00a3 If all three form but one syllable,\\nthe combination is again called a diphtho\\nIt be the Bral of three vowels, or the last, and unaccented, it le-\\nnient\\nLandsome; Mat, jackdaw j rota, stripe; aria, Bilk.\\nTin- pronunciation of three vowel-, thus combined, and the\\nI in the following worda\\nKniaire, li txi aire, linear. noui, aon-e\\\\ knotted.\\nbiait, bt-ais, elope. DS bon-ln, baboon", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "PRONUNCIATION 17\\nDieu, Di-eu, God. Gor notiaille, Cor-nou-aille, (Jorn-\\nlueur, lu-eur, light. wallis.\\nmiauler, mi-au-ler, mew. fouetter, fou-et-ter, to whip.\\nrouage, rou-age, carriage.\\nThe following words containing respectively two and three vowels,\\nare pronounced anomalously\\naout, pronounced ou, August.\\nlingual, lin-gou-al, lingual.\\njoaillicr, jou-a-lier, jeweller.\\nceil, with liquid I pronounced euil, eye.\\n(Billet, euil-let, pink.\\necueil, e-ceuil, shoal.\\naccueil, ac-ceuil, reception.\\ncercueil, cer-ceuil, cofiin.\\ncueillir, ceuil-lir, gather.\\norgueil, or-geuil, pride.\\nWhen four vowels are combined, two form one compound\\nvowel, and two, another, which two succeed each other; they\\nare pronounced separately in two syllables.\\nEx. je jouai, jou-ai, I played.\\nnoueux, nou-eux, knotty.\\njoueur, jou-eur, gambler.\\nbouee, bou-e, buoy.\\nThe letter y, which in English serves sometimes as a vowel,\\nas in paymaster, and at other times as a consonant, as in yes, is\\nin French always a vowel, but its pronunciation changes some-\\nwhat, according to its position in a word.\\nWhen it begins a word, or when it is placed between two\\nconsonants, it has the sound of i.\\nEx. yeux, eyes systime, system sybarite, sybarite.\\nIt becomes nasal, like i, before m and n.\\nEx. symbole, symbol syntaxe, syntax.\\nWhen it succeeds another vowel, it it pronounced like two\\nsuccessive i s, the former combining with the vowel that pre-\\ncedes it, and the second pronounced by itself, unless it also", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "18 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nshould combine with a folfowing vowel, to form a compound\\nvowel.\\nEx. ]xiys, pai-i, country.\\nmoycn, moi-ien, means.\\nroyal, roi-ial, royal.\\njoyeux, joi-ieux, joyeux.\\nIn the following proper names, y is pronounced like t\\nBayard, Bayonne, Cayenne, Mayence and Mayenne.\\nCONSONANTS.\\nFinal consonant* are silent, except r, I and r, which are\\nsometimes sounded and n and m are nasal, as has been fully\\nexplained.\\nKx. chee, at; brevet, brevet; toil, roof; fois, time; avocat,\\nadvocal mass, but; awe, \\\\sith chef, chief; canal, canal; stfrvtr,\\nto Berve.\\ntiro final cottsowints, the first is sounded, but the second\\nis silent.\\nEx. canard, dnck tori, fate; sata^ saint\\nOf three final consonants, the first is sounded, and the last\\ntwo arc silent\\nEx. remords, remorse; prompt prompt; tempt, tune.\\nB haa the same Bonnd :is in English.\\nEx. Babylone, Babylon; bouU, ball; eaoafe, cabal.\\nl inal o is pronoonced in the proper namei STooft, J .7^ Jacob,\\nand in rUfflO, point f the Ofimpaw. Sttd radouk, refitting.\\nDoable b is proaoaneed like a single b.\\ntabbat, sabbath; rabbin rabbi; abbe, abbot.\\nC has two sounds, according to the letter that immediately\\nfollows.\\nIt is hard, like the English k, before the vowels a, o and\\nand before consonants.\\nCologne; cart*, pastor; climal,\\nclimate; aetif, active era l a, cravat", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "CONSONANTS. 19\\nWhen it is desirable, for etymological purposes, to give to e a soft\\nsound (tLat of s in English) before a, o and u, a cedilla (c) is added.\\nEx. face, facade house-front leeon, lesson recevoir reeu, re-\\nceived.\\nIt is soft, like the English s, before the vowels e, i and y.\\nEx. cedre, cedar Cecile, Caecilia cypres, cypress.\\nWhen it is desirable, for etymological purposes, to give the hard\\nsound of k to e before these vowels, c is changed rinto qu, but u re-\\nmains silent.\\nEx. vaincre vous vainquez, you conquer puNie, publique, public.\\nC, before a, o and u, and before qu has the sound of k.\\nEx. accabler, to overwhelm accomplir, to accomplish ac-\\ncuser, to accuse acquerir, to acquire.\\nBoth c s are heard mpeccavi, repentance, and the derivatives of the\\nLatin verb peccare.\\nC, before e, i and y, is pronounced as in English.\\nEx. succes, success Occident, west acces, attack.\\nC is commonly pronounced at the end of words.\\nEx. bee, beak aqueduc, acqueduct Turc, Turk.\\nG is silent, however, although final, in these words: estoma-c,\\nstomach echecs, chess jonc, reed banc, bench tronc, trunk aecroc,\\nrent pore, pork tabac, tobacco, and a few others. C has the sound\\nof g in second, second, and its derivatives. C has the sound of ch in\\nthe Italian words violoncelle, termicelle.\\nCh has the sound of English sh.\\nEx. chat, cat cher, dear chose, thing chute, fall.\\nIt is sounded like k, however, in words of Greek or Oriental\\norigin.\\nEx. archange, archangel echo, echo chaos, chaos choeur,\\nchorus; orchestre, orchestra; patriarchal.\\nWhen these words have become perfectly naturalized, the sound\\nof sh is substituted for that of Jc.\\nEx. patriarclie archeveque, archbishop bachique, bacchic.\\nHence the difference between archeohgique (k sound) and chirurgien", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0096\u00a020 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\n(s7i sound) Ohaldee (Jc sound) and AcJiilh (sh sound). Machiavelli is\\npronounced soft, as Machiavel, but Michele Angelo hard, as Michel-\\nAnge.\\nIt is sounded like k also, wherever it precedes a consonant\\nEx. Chretien, Christian; technique, technical; Utrecht.\\nIt is silent in almanack.\\nIn words ending in ct, both consonants are commonly sounded.\\nEx. exact, err* ct, direct.\\nC only is sounded in aspect, respect, and circoiispcct and c and t arc\\nboth silent in instinct and amid, amice.\\nJ) baa the same sound as in English.\\nEx. David; Adam; redoubler, to redouble; admirable.\\nFinal is silent, except in some proper names, as David,\\nJoady Talmud, snd in eud, south.\\nIt takes the sound of t, when it ends a word connected in meaning\\nwith the next word, and this begins with a vowel.\\nEx. gra d homme, great man prqfond abUne, deep abyss enU ntW,\\ndocs In- hear\\nDd is Bounded like single K except in addition and its de-\\nrivatives, and in reddition, where both s are heard.\\nF lias the same sound as in English.\\nEx.Jini, finished a/En, in order bref in short.\\nFinal /is generally pronounced.\\nEx. chief; vif, lively; baeuf, beef.\\nBui it is silent in r key; in neuf, nine; an/, egg; l\u00c2\u00bbnij\\\\ beef\\n(when followed by s consonant), and in the three plurals,\\nnerves; aufii and bauje, and in the compounds of ew^, as crf-culint,\\nkite. I wskin, the last only is heard.\\nlike c, h la, according to the letter that imme-\\ndiately follows it.\\nIt is A rrrf, like the English g in good, before the vowels a, o,\\nand and before consonants.\\nEx. garde, guard swell guttural; gloire, glory;\\ng ..able.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "CONSONANTS. 21\\nWhen it is desirable, for etymological purposes, to give to g a soft\\nsound before a, o and u r a silent e is inserted between g and the next\\nvowel.\\nEx. dbligeant, obliging geole, jail gageure, bet.\\nIt is soft, like the English s in pleasure, before the vowels e,\\ni and y.\\nEx. general gingembre, ginger gymnaste.\\nWhen it is desirable, for etymological purposes, to give the hard\\nsoimd to g before the vowels e and i, a silent u is inserted between g\\nand the vowel.\\nEx. guerre, war guide, guide vague, wave gueux, beggarly.\\nIn the following words, however, u and i are pronounced separately,\\nas a genuine diphthong aiguille, needle aiguiser, to sharpen aiguil-\\nlon, sting; linguiste, linguist; inextinguible, inextinguishable, and\\nthe proper names, Guise, le Guide (Guido Beni), and Guizot.\\nWhen it is desirable to pronounce this u, on account of its import-\\nance as part of the word, the following e is written with a diaeresis.\\nEx. cigue, ci-gue, hemlock aigue, ai-gue, acute.\\nIn the words ambiguite, arguer, u is pronounced distinctly.\\nFinal g is silent, except in joug, yoke, zig-zag, and in a few\\nforeign names, as Agag. It has a hard sound in bourg, borough,\\nand in bourgmestre, burgomaster.\\nGl is pronounced like the 11 in brilliant, by pronouncing the.\\nI first, and giving to g the sound of English y in yes.\\nEx. imbroglio, im-brol-yee-o Broglie, Brol-yee.\\nGg is pronounced like a single g, except before e, when the\\nfirst g is hard and the second soft.\\nEx. suggerer, to suggest suggestion.\\nGn, like gl, is pronounced as if n was written first and fol-\\nlowed by a y, with the sound of the English y in yes.\\nEx. ignorant, in-yo-ran signal, sin-yal digne, worthy;\\nagneau, lamb gagner, to gain compagnie, company.\\nIn the beginning of words, and when the syllables divide between\\ng and n, gn has the same sound as in English.\\nEx. gnome gnostique, gnostic agnation, st ignation, etc.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "22 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nGs and gl are silent in legs, legacy doigt, and vingt,\\ntwenty.\\n(7 itself is silent in signet, tassel, and the proper names Clugny,\\nBegnaud, Begnard, whilst the first g in gangrene has the sound of k.\\niaTis either aspirate or silent.\\nWhen it is aspirate, it has not the sound of an English A,\\nbut produces simply the effect of a slight pause, or a hiatus.\\nAs it cannot be seen when h is aspirate and when mute, the\\nformer is always marked by some sign in dictionaries. The\\nrules, however, by which to distinguish the two, are easy to\\nthose who are familiar with other languages. It is this (a).\\nWords, beginning with h, which arc derived from Latin, have a\\nsilent it being preserved only for etymological purposes.\\nEx. honneur, honor homme, homo; histoire, historia.\\nThe words hint, hen harpid, harpy hennir, to neigh, and hnru\\nt, r, to haunt, are exceptions to this rule, having an aspirated\\nb. In all other words h is aspirate.], viz.\\nIn words derived from the German.\\nEx. hache, axe; htraut, herald; hibou, owl; houx, holly;\\nhurUr, to howL\\nIn words where h is placed between two vowels.\\nEx. cohue, crowd ahan.\\nIn the names of countries and cities.\\nEx. I Hongr%$, Hungary; la Hollande, Hamboura.\\nFrequent oae haflj however, removed the aspiration in some of these\\nnames, where they an used as adjectives.\\nK\\\\. V d li Dutch linen ftomage oTHbUomde, Dutch\\ncheese Hun J irj water.\\nIt will be si .11, hereafter, that the effect of the aspirated h \\\\a to\\npxevent elision hence, le ho nard, the lobster la houttk the coaL\\nJ has the sound of s in pleasure, corresponding to the soft\\nBound of g.\\nEx. j im tis, ever; JCsus; joujou, plaything; jurer, to swear.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "CONSONANTS. 23\\nK, which occurs only in words of foreign origin, has the\\nsound of the English k.\\nEx. kermesse, a festival kiosquc, kiosk kilometre, a measure.\\nL simple is pronounced as in English.\\nEx. laurier, laurel livre, book loge, box lune, moon.\\nFinal is ordinarily pronounced.\\nEx. mal, ill del, heaven fol, mad.\\nBut it is silent in baril, barrel chenil, kennel coutil, ticking cul,\\nseat fournil, bakehouse fusil, gun gr il, gridiron gentil, gentle\\nnombril outil, tool persil, parsley saoul, drunk sourcil, eyebrow.\\nIn pouls, pulse, both final consonants are silent, as also in aulx,\\ngarlic. Fits, son, is pronounced without the I, but the s is heard, to\\ndistinguish it from fil, thread, in which the I is heard.\\nL preceded by i has a liquid sound, which has to be learned\\nfrom the teacher s lips it approaches that of the English word\\nbrilliant.\\nEx. travail, labor; orgueil, pride; sommeil, sleep.\\nFrom this rule are excepted il, he or it fil, thread mil, thousand\\nall adjectives in il, and those words above mentioned, in which\\nis silent.\\nLI, preceded by i, has generally the same liquid sound.\\nEx. fille, daughter; oreille, ear; feuille, sheet; tailleur,\\ntailor.\\nFrom this rule are excepted mile, town mille, thousand and its\\nderivatives, and all words beginning with ill, as illustre, illustrious,\\nillegitime, illegitimate illusion, etc. Excepted are also the cities of\\nLille and Seville, the name of Achille and few others.\\nBoth l in 11 are heard in alleger, to allege allegorie, allusion, belli\\ngerant, collaborateur; colloque, colloquy constellation, ellebore, gallican,\\ngallicanisme, hellenisme, intelligent; libeller, to libel rebellion, solliciter,\\nveUeite, and some of their derivatives.\\nLI is pronounced like single I in college and collation.\\nLh is pronounced like single I, except in proper names, as\\nMilhaud and Sardailhac, where it is liquid.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "24 OX LETTERS AXD SYLLABLES.\\nM has the same sound as in English, except when final, in\\nwhich case it has a nasal sound, as mentioned above, and docs\\nnot differ from n.\\nIt has also the sound of n, when it precedes m, b or p.\\nEx. emmener, to carry off; combler, to overwhelm comparer.\\nMm is generally pronounced like single m.\\nEx. grammuire commix, clerk; dilemme, dilemma.\\nN lias the same sound as in English, except when final, in\\nwhich case it has a nasal sound, as mentioned above.\\nAfter both m and n, final consonants become silent.\\nEx. tf /////.v. time\\nExcept in the following words, in which all consonants are sounded\\nc ns. census (when nut followed by commuri) distinct,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a24, larynx, lynx, tfihynx; and tine, zinc, n is silent in the proper\\nname of Reams.\\nbaa the Bame Bound as in English.\\nEx. dang pommade, pomatnm.\\nTt is Bllenl in bapt m baptism, and Beveral of its derivatives damp-\\ntir, ti Miii.: r, to carve sept, seven, and\\nits deiival\\nIt is pronoonoed in bo. wre and exemption,\\nrally in the middle f a word.\\nFinal is silent) except in cap, cape; jalap, jalap julep,\\njalap; W-/ and in proper names. Both of the final consonants\\nare heard in laps, interval relaps, relapse, and rapt, rape.\\nI ll U pronounced I i k\\nEx. phare, lighthoose; phosphore, phosphorus; philosopke.\\nI ji is Bounded like sing\\nEx. i} i\u00c2\u00bbl i\\\\ a-pe-ler, t call frapp r, fra-per, to strike.\\nQ is always followed by n and pronounced like k-.\\nEx. quart, fourth gui, who; quotidien, daily queue, tail.\\nit has ii u bock cinq, five n \u00c2\u00bbr in piq re, pricking,\\nti. avoid", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "CONSONANTS. 25\\nIt is pronounced like kou before a in the following words\\naquatile, aquarelle, aqUatique; equateur, equator liquation, loqua-\\ncite, quadruple, and words of the same root, except quadrille,\\nwhere it has the sound of k, quartz and quaere, quaker.\\nBoth letters q and u are heard distinctly, like qu in equestre,\\nequestrian equilateral and all mathematical words beginning\\nwith equi liquefaction; questeur, questor quiet, and its deriv-\\natives quiproquo, quolibet, quinconce and all words in which\\nquin stands for five, except quincailler, ironmonger, and its\\nderivatives.\\nIt has the sound of k in Quinte-Curce, Quintus-Curtius, and Quin-\\ntilien.\\nBoth sounds of k and of kou are heard in succession in words like\\nquinquagesime and quinquagenaire, a man of fifty.\\nR has the same sound as in English, but it is more strongly\\nmarked and rolled, as it is commonly called.\\nEx. ragout; regie, rule; rivage, bank; rouge, red; ordre,\\norder; trace vendre, to sell.\\nFinal r is silent after e, which is pronounced like e.\\nEx. dernier, last parler, to speak officier, officer.\\nExcept in cher, dear mer, sea amer, bitter Mer, yesterday\\navant-hier, before yesterday cuiller, spoon ether, ether fer, iron\\nenfer, hell Jiiver, winter lucifer, magister outremer, ultramarine\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2pater, Lord s prayer ver, worm, and some proper names, as Jupiter,\\nEsther, Niger.\\nFinal r is pronounced after the vowels a, i, o and u.\\nEx. char, car; or, gold servir, to serve; erreur, error.\\nExcept in monsieur, sir, where it is always silent.\\nR is silent in notre, our, and voire, your, before a consonant.\\nEx. notre maison not maison) voire sceur (vof soeur), your sister.\\nRr is pronounced like a single r.\\nEx. parrain, godfather carrosse, carriage guerre, war.\\n2", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "26 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nExcept in aberration; concurrence; abhorrer, to abhor; errata;\\nerrer, to err, and its derivatives; horreur, horror Iiorrible inter-\\nregnc, interregnum: narration; terreur, terror torrent; terrifier\\nin most -words beginning with ir, as iirreguHer, and in the future and\\nconditional of verbs, like acquerir, to acquire mourir, to die, aud\\nceurir, to run, as will be seen in the chapter of verbs.\\nRh is pronounced like r alone.\\nEx. rhume, cold; rt/ihme, rhythmus\\nAll final consonants are silent after r.\\nEx. inert, death; serf, fate; regard, glance.\\nExcept man, March ours, bear; pare, park, where both are heard.\\nS lias a sharp sound like 88 in English and a soft sound like\\nEnglish t.\\nIt is hard at the beginning of words, when followed by a\\nvowel or a consonant.\\nour, stay; ton, sound; suae, sugar; scan-\\ndal, scorpion; ntotnae, Btomacfa squelette, skeleton,\\nWhen iii the middle of a word it is preceded or followed by\\n:;ant.\\nEx. absoltt, absolute; converter, to converse; loraque when.\\nAnd when it i- double.\\nEx. coueein, cushion; baese, base; ro\u00c2\u00bb*e jade; Rueee, Rus-\\nsian poisxon, tish.\\nThese words must be carefully distinguished from cousin, cousin\\nbase, base; oison, and ruse, cunning, win-re the s\\nIt i so/V, when single and standing between two vowels or\\nfollowed by hva\\nEx. maieon, housi shave; dishonneur, dishonor.\\n1 cept that it is hard in compound words, where e was original!?\\nInitial, as in likely In a few words\\nof fori Ign origin, ai (J and resorption, and in the ten\\nthe verb ^Mr, BO lie.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "CONSONANTS. 27\\nIt is soft in Jersey, Alsace balsamine, balsam presbytere, and like\\nderivatives, when followed by b, and in tbe syllable trans, as in trans-\\naction; but not in transir, to chill.\\nIt is silent in the proper name Duguesclin.\\nSee and sci are pronounced like ce and ci.\\nEx. seine, stage science scelerat, rascal.\\nSt is sounded in est, east; ouest, west; lest, ballast; Chris*\\n(except in Jesus- Christ, when it is silent); in antichrist, test,\\nand the name of the city of Brest.\\nFinal s is generally silent, as in the plural of nouns and the\\nverbs; but is is pronounced in fils, son; aloes as, ace; atlas;\\nblocus, blockade cens, census dervis, dervish en sus, beside\\niris jadis, formerly lis, lily ma is, maize mars, March\\nmetis, mongrel mceurs, manners tous, all (when a pronoun)\\nours, bear plus, more (when final) vis, screw in foreign\\nwords, as gratis, tetanos, etc., and in some proper names, as in\\nRheims, Brutus, Gil Bias, etc., although it is silent in Mathias,\\nJudas, Thomas.\\nT has two sounds: one like the English t in to; the other\\nlike the French sound of c before i.\\nIt is hard at the beginning and in the middle of words.\\nEx. tabac, tobacco tenebres, darkness torrent, tumulte, ana-\\ntomie entamer, to touch baton, stick.\\nIt is soft, in the final syllable tion.\\nEx. satisfaction; petition, pe-ti-ci-on patience, pa-ci-ence.\\nAnd in the following words argutie, cavil initier, to ini-\\ntiate balbutier, to stammer; calvitie, baldness; facetie, jest;\\ninertie, inertness imperitie, want of experience patient and\\npatience minutie, trifle peripetie, change of fortune pro-\\nphelie satiete, satiety aristocratie, and all words ending in\\natie and their derivations, and in some proper names, as Dio-\\ncletien, and Venitien.\\nIt retains its hard sound in all combinations of tie.\\nEx. tien, thine; tiers, third; amitie, friendship; entier, entire.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "28 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nTt is somewhat like a single t, except in attique, attic; atti-\\ncisme, guttural and pittoresque, picturesque, where both are heard.\\nFinal t is generally silent.\\nEx. mot, word; rat, rat; est (pronounced is.\\nExcept in admit, aconite brut, rough; chut, hush; cobalt,\\ncomput, accessit dot, dowry; deficit fat, coxcomb fret,\\nfreight granit in sept, seven, and kuit, eight (when they are\\nnot followed by a consonant); in indult lut, lute; malt;\\nmat, impolished net, neat; opiat occiput; pat, stale mate;\\nt rapt, rape rit, rite, and in all Latin words.\\nIt is always silent in ct, and in ent, the termination of the third per-\\nson plural of verbs, which is altogether silent,\\nTIi is pronounced like a single it being a mere etymo-\\nlogical sign of Greek, Hebrew, and foreign words generally.\\nEx. (hi, tea; t Intke; than, tunnyfish.\\nIt is altogether silent in asthms, pronounced\\nV baa th Mi.\\nempty; voleur, thief veuve, widow.\\nH\\\\ whirh occurs only in foreign words, with the educated\\nretains the Bound it baa at borne.\\nEx. N Washington, Westphalie,\\nWith the mass f the people, it is apt to be sounded like\\nand the name of the Scotchman Law i pronounced Lasse.\\nA which also occurs principally in foreign words only, has\\ninds.\\nIt is pronounced like k\u00c2\u00bb in the middle words.\\nluxe, luxun\\nIt is pronounced like gs at the beginning of proper n\\nEx. X iphon.\\nAnd in the words beginning with ex, followed by a vowel.\\nheat favorably.\\nIt is pronounced like in six, six dix, ten; eoisante, sixty,\\nand in the proper nan, \\\\erre, Auxoi telles.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "PRONUNCIATION IN READING AND SPEAKING. 29\\nIt is pronounced like z in the derivatives of deux, two as\\ndeuxicme, second of six, as sixieme, sixth of dix, as dixieme,\\ntenth and their compounds, as dix-se.pt, seventeen.\\nFinal x is silent, except in proper names, where it is sounded\\nlike ks.\\nEx. Ajax, Phenix.\\nIn cocatrix, cochatrice prefix, and Aix la-Chapelle, and in\\nwords derived from Latin or Greek, as in lynx, sphynx, index\\netc.\\nZ is pronounced as the English z in zest.\\nEx. zone, Zacharie, zephyr.\\nFinal z is sounded only in foreign names, as Suez, Cortez, and\\nin Metz.\\nPRONUNCIATION IN READING AND SPEAKING.\\nThe consonants have besides the sound which is given to them\\nin the word to which they belong, often another or an ad-\\nditional sound, when they occur in connected sentences, which\\nare read or spoken. The two principal rules on this subjet are\\n1. Final consonants, preceding a word that begins with a\\nvowel or h mute, are generally pronounced as if they were the\\ninitial letter of the second word, provided the two words, thus\\nto be connected in sound, are also connected in meaning, as\\nadjectives before nouns or pronouns before verbs.\\nEx. mon ami, mo-nami petit enfant, peti-tenfant nous\\navons, nou-zavons Us ont, il-zont.\\n2. When a word ending in e mute is followed by one begin-\\nning with a vow T el or h mute, the last consonant of the first is\\nin the same manner pronounced as if it formed the initial of the\\nsecond word.\\nEx. la France entiere, la Fran-cen-ti-ere Vhonnete homme,\\n1 honne-tomme.\\nThe following words are excepted from this rule, and treated", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "oO OX LETTEE3 AND SYLLABLES.\\nas if they began with a consonant, so that no connection takes\\nplace between them and the preceding word\\nEt, aud oui, yes onze, eleven, with its derivatives uniema,\\nfirst; yacht, yatayan; yole, yawl; ouest, west, and the interjec-\\ntions beginning with a vowel, as ah oh ouf! etc.\\nFinal consonants, when thus transferred, as it were, to the\\nnext word, change their sounds slightly. This is done in the\\nfollowing manner\\nC becomes k.\\nEx. franc-arbitre, free will pore-epic, porcupine.\\nD becomes\\nEx. un grand-homme, a great man pied-h-terre, a place to\\nalight; line grande-ama, a great heart.\\nThe following words ending In d t donotonite with the next word:\\nfjh il. warm oold rd. edge gland, B corn gond, hinge;\\nnid, except in compounds.\\nF becom.\\nEx. neuf ana, aea-vana, nine years; vxf amour, vi-vamour,\\nwarm love.\\nbecomes i.\\nEx. l rang rang, from rank to rank; un lony acces, a\\nlong attack.\\nis never connected with the next word, except when it is\\nBounded already in a single woid. Otherwise, it retains its\\nsound.\\nEx. eat, he his; il y there was.\\nTlie word ntiZ changes tie- f into a. liquid sound before vowels, ns\\nin nn gantO enfant, s pretty child. This does uol apply, however, to\\nthe plural.\\nX, when nasal, changes into the sound of nn, of which the\\nfir.st is nasal and the second united with the next word.\\nEx. nun ami, my friend; son konnaur, his honor.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "PKONUJsrciATioisr iisr heading and speaking. 31\\nIf nasal n should end a noun, it retains its original sound and is not\\nconnected with the next word.\\nEx. une passion aveugle, a blind passion.\\nIf n should be followed by a final consonant, the latter alone\\nis transferred to the next word, unless it be c or p, which remain\\nsilent.\\nEx. un savant artiste, a learned artist. But un champ ensemence,\\na sowed field.\\nThe letter t of the syllable ent in verbs, which is silent, is\\nnevertheless connected with the next word.\\nEx. lis parlaient ensemble, they spoke together Us sont ici,\\nthey are here.\\nP is connected with the next word only in the words coup,\\nblow trop, too much, and beaucoup, much.\\nEx. II a trop aime, he has loved too much un coup atrocc,\\na fearful blow.\\nQ becomes k.\\nEx. cinq ans, five years coq-a-Vane, cock and bull story.\\nR remains silent in the infinitives in er, except in poetry, and\\nin monsieur. In other cases, it is connected with the next\\nword.\\nWhen r is followed by a final consonant, the latter remains silent,\\nand r alone is connected with the next word c, however, is always\\nsounded.\\nEx. un sort agreable, a plaisant fate; un tort enorme, grievous\\nwrong arc-en-ciel, rainbow.\\nS becomes z.\\nEx. vous avez, you have elles avaient, they had.\\nFinal s in the inflections of the verb is carried only in poetry.\\nT at the end of nouns is not carried to the next word,\\nexcept in but, end, unless it was already previously pronounced,\\nas in fat, coxcomb. All final s, however, are sounded in\\npoetry, except in et, and.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "32 ON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nT is carried in fort, when it means very, but r only, when it means\\nstrong.\\nEx. i\u00c2\u00a3 erf aimable, he is very good. But\\nI? /or\u00c2\u00a3 e\u00c2\u00a3 grand, he is strong and tall.\\nT is always carried in est, is, hut never sounded in et, and.\\nEx. 11 est excellent, he is excellent elle est lieureuse, she is\\nhappy.\\nX becomes z.\\nEx. aux enfants, to the children sit hommes, six men.\\nZ is carried only in dignified style and poetry; ordinarily it\\nis heard only in the second person plural of verbs.\\nEx. vous avez eu, you have had; vous a :it~ etc, you had\\nbeen.\\nIT.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ELISION.\\nThe three vowels and i are, nnder certain circumstance*,\\nsuppressed or elided, and this process is called Elision. It is\\nalways indicated by .-i sign I called an Apostrophe, which\\ntakes the place of the elided vowel. The effect of elision is\\nthai the two words, that which h;is lost its final vowel and the\\nin- v t word, which begins with a vowel or h unite, are pro-\\nnounced as one word.\\nthe man; Vhonneur, loncur, the honor.\\nThe vowel j is elided only in the word si, if, when it pre-\\ncedes the two prononni il, he, and Us, they.\\nEx. (si il) s U vient, if he comes; (si vulent, if\\nthey will.\\nThe vowel is elided only in the feminine of the article hi,\\nthe, and the feminine of the personal pronoun her, but\\nall vowels and before h n\\namis, the friend; (la habitude), flu/H-\\nthe babil je (la aime) taime, 1 love her; il (la usurpe)\\nTusurpe, he osnrps il il (la honore) F honors, he\\nher.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "ELISION. 83\\nThe vowel e is elided, when it is unaccented, at the end of a\\nmonosyllabic word or of some compounds with que, that, before\\nall vowels and h mute.\\nEx. (je aspire) f aspire, I aspire; elle (me adore) nC adore,\\nshe worships me Us (le honorent) Vhonorent, they honor\\nhim on (se habille) sliabille, they are dressing fy cours, I\\nrun there; (ce est) c est bon, that is right; quoiqu il vienne,\\nalthough he come parce qu elle lit, because she reads.\\nE ntre elides its final e before reciprocal verbs, with wliicli it forma\\na compound.\\nEx. s entr aider (se entre aider), to help each other s entr ouvrir\\n(se entre ouvrir), to commune with each other; s entr accuser, to\\naccuse each other.\\nJusque elides its e before a, au, aux and ici.\\nEx. jusqu d Borne, as far as Rome jusqu au del, up to heaven\\njusqu aux nues, to the clouds jusqu iei, until now.\\nPidsque and quoique elide their e only when followed by il, Us, elle,\\nelles, on, un and une, or a word with which they are indissolubly\\nconnected.\\nEx. puisqu ainsi est, since it is so puisqu elle lejoeut, since she willa\\nit so quoiqu on soit, although they be.\\nBut we must write quoique etranger, although a stranger puisqm\\ninvisible, since invisible.\\nQuelque elides its e only before un, une, quelqu un, quelqu une, and\\nin quel qu il soit and quelle qu elle soit. Hence we must say quelque\\nHe, some island, and quelque espoir, some hope. Quelqu autre is used\\nby some authors.\\nPresque elides its e only in presqu ile, peninsula.\\nNo elision tabes place when there is no mental connection\\nbetween the two words, which would otherwise be subject to\\nthese rules. Hence, e. g., when le, la and other pronouns are\\nplaced after their verbs, they are not elided, although they may\\nbe followed by a vowel, because they belong to the verb and\\nnot to the next word.\\nEx. Menez-le a Paris, take him to Paris prenez-la avec vous,\\ntake it with you.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "3 J OX LETTEES AND SYLLABLES.\\nNor will any elision take place before those exceptional\\nwords, which, although beginning with a vowel or h mute, aio\\ntreated as if their initial letter were a consonant.\\nEx. le huitibne, the eighth le onzieme, the eleventh lea out\\net non, the ayes and noes.\\nAn anomalous elision takes place in the word grands, which loses\\nits final e before certain nouns beginning with a consonant, with\\nwhich it forms a kind of compound noun.\\nEx. grand mire, grandmother grand meese, high mass grand cvtte,\\nmainmast, etc.\\nIt must not be forgotten that no elision takes place before aspi-\\nratod h.\\nEx. le Jiamcau, the hamlet l Tliros, the hero.\\nIII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 SYLLABICATION.\\nFrench words are, like English words, divided into syllables,\\nbut the maimer of dividing them differs in the two languages.\\nThe following rales have to be observed in French\\n1. A consonant between t\\\\\\\\ vowels goes with the secondj\\nand not, h, with the first vowel.\\nEx. Hti-ri, husband; phi-hsophe, philosopher.\\nThis rule i all the more important as it affects, of course, the\\npronnnoiation also. The pronounce med-icine, the\\nFrench mide^dntj they say pol-itics, the French aj\\nHque.\\n2. Two (.us, .Hants between two vowels divide so that\\none goes with the the other with the following\\nrowel\\nEx. j-ar-ti, party; froo-per, to Btrike; er-reur, error,\\ntwo consonants can be produced by one utterance,\\nsach as in; ,r, and others. These combinations are the same\\nin French as in English, and here the two consonants\\nwith the second vowel.\\nEx. o-ori, shelter )i -c/ain puff; ro-mw, sugar-dish.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "QUANTITY. 35\\n3. With three consonants, the syllables divide between the\\nsecond and third.\\nEx. obs-cur, obscure arc-tique, arctic,\\nunless the three consonants also can be pronounced in one im-\\npulse of the voice, when the division is made after the first con-\\nsonant.\\nEx. at-tri-but, attribute ac-trice, actress.\\n4. With four consonants, two go with the first and two with\\nthe second syllable.\\nEx. obs-tructif, obstructive abs-trait, abstruse.\\n5. When two or more vowels meet, the manner of dividing\\nthem depends on the rules given before, which state when they\\nform one or more syllables, and examples have been given there\\nas to the proper division.\\nIV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 QUANTITY.\\nQuantity means in French simply the longer or shorter time\\nwhich is given to the pronunciation of a syllable. It has no-\\nthing to do with the accent of the voice, which raises or lowers\\nthe latter, but does not lengthen or shorten the word. The\\nFrench has very minute and strict rules on this part of pronun-\\nciation, of which the following are the most important\\n1. Every syllable ending in a consonant (except s and z) is\\nshort.\\nEx. sac, sack; nectar; fU, thread; pot, pot; but, en d.\\n2. Every masculine syllable becomes long in the plural.\\nEx. sacs sels, salts pots.\\n3. Every masculine singular, ending in s, x or z, is long.\\nEx. temps, time riez, nose volx, voice.\\n4. Nasal vowels followed by consonants (except m and n) arc\\nlong.\\nEx. jambe, leg; crainte, fear; humble tomber, to fall\\nbut followed by m and n, they are short.\\nEx. epigramme personne, somebody premie, take.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "36\\nON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\n5. Every syllable ending in r and not followed by r, is short.\\nEx. barbe, beard berceau, cradle infirme, ordre,\\nbut if followed by r, it is long.\\nEx. arre% sentence bkarre, odd tonnerre, thunder.\\n6. Placed between two vowels, of which the second is mute,\\ns and z lenghthen the first.\\nEx. Inltt basis bttisr, blunder epouse, wife.\\nling another consonant shortens the syllable be-\\nfore it.\\nEx. masque, mask astre, star burlesque.\\nSnal mute e lengthens the vowel preceding it.\\nEx. pensee, thought; jb iljoue, he plays, rue, street.\\nEvery other vowel following another vowel renders it\\nshort\\n1a. cri created ac on hah; t hate titer, to kill.\\nIn th following wmds which arc Bounded alike, quantity\\nbermines the meaning, hut only the more important\\nwords and t ordinarily have been given.\\n::iri\\ntool.\\n~;id.lle.\\nb~ \u00e2\u0080\u009ell. 1\\nchair, i\\ntSte, ri!\\nr corse.\\nI lie foam\\n.Mini it. file feast.\\n8UOHT.\\nacre, acre ol land).\\nbreath.\\nIvent\\nto rent.\\nb ata\\nhe limps,\\nod.\\nr!,: r, ilar.\\ntiire, clerk.\\nin.\\n00U numerical murk.\\nBid,\\nKlir.\\ncn ir, leather.\\nddn, gift.\\nfaUe, done (pari pnst).", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "PUNCTUATION.\\n37\\nfaix, burden. j\\nfais (tu), tlioa doest. j\\nforet, forest.\\nfumes (nous), we were.\\ngram, grave.\\nhale, burning air.\\njais,jet.\\njeune, fasting.\\nlegs, legacy.\\nlaisse (je), I let\\nmatin, dog.\\nmuis, month.\\nmunt, mountain.\\nmur, ripe.\\nmasse, end of cue.\\npecher, to sin.\\npene, part of lock.\\npleine, plain.\\nsaut, leap.\\nsaint, saint.\\nscene, scene.\\ncene, Lord s supper.\\nsaine, sound.\\ntache, task.\\ntres, very.\\nvaine, vain.\\nvivres, victuals.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ooix, voice.\\n\u00c2\u00aboZer, to steal.\\nfait (il), he does.\\n/oref, borer.\\nfume (je), I smoke.\\ngrave (il), be engraves.\\n/taZfo, ball.\\njet, throw.\\njeune, young.\\nilai, layman.\\nlaid, uglay.\\nlait, milk.\\nlaisse, leash.\\nmatin, morning.\\nmm, me.\\nmdn, my.\\nmwr, wall.\\nmasse, mass.\\npecher, to fish.\\npeine, pain.\\npleine, full.\\nsctf, fool.\\ncem\u00c2\u00a3, girt.\\nsem#, signature.\\njSeme, (river).\\n\u00c2\u00a3acAe, spot.\\ntrait, feature.\\nmine, vein.\\newre, to live.\\nvent, (il), he se\\nvdler, to fly.\\nV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 PUNCTUATION.\\nThe marks of Punctuation are the same in French as in Eng-\\nlish, with the addition of a few peculiar to French. They are\\nthe following", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "38\\nON LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.\\nComma.\\nSemicolon,\\nColon,\\nPeriod,\\nNote of exclamation,\\nNote of interrogation,\\nParenthesis,\\nDash,\\nQuotation mark,\\nCedilla,\\nHyphen,\\nApostroohr,\\ncalied in French Virgule.\\nPoint it cirgule.\\nDeux points.\\nPoint.\\nPoint (P exclamation\\nPoint d interrogation\\nParenthese.\\nTin t.\\nGu emets.\\nCediBe.\\nTremo,\\nTrait d union.\\nApostrophe.\\nA LIST OK THK MOST COMMON ABBREVIATIONS IN* FRENCH.\\nA. P. d protest* r, to be protest* d.\\nA. s. P. a ac-\\noepted withoul protest\\nA. B.F\\nxpte.\\nbaron.\\nironne, ban i\\nI r, knight.\\nml\\nci urn toss.\\ni). m Deo Optimo Maximo.\\nodor.\\nD m or D. M. doctor of Medi-\\ncine.\\nI.I, A A. II.\\nt, Their [mperial High-\\nDest\\nI.:., a BB .1\\nlee, Their Royal Highi\\nLi, Em Leurt Eminences, Their\\nEmm\\nLL. l. Ueneee, Their\\nBzeelli\\nM miss.\\nMgr.\\nmarques.\\nId marchioness.\\nMM. s, MesBTB.\\nM 11, mad Mrs.\\nMat. manuscrit, MS.\\nB.\\nN l Mir I.ady.\\ni. wholesale me*\\nnumber, No.\\nN.-S. A ur Lord.\\nN.-S. J.\u00c2\u00bb\\\\ X,S.J,-x\u00e2\u0080\u009ex.\\ne per \u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2nt.\\nP. s. post seriptum, P. S.\\nK P, Se\\\\ r. nd Pere, Revd Father.\\nS. A. I His\\n[mperial Highness.\\nS A I: His Royal\\nHighi\\nB.A.S. 8 A IliuSe\\nnno lIL huusi", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "NOUN S.\\n39\\nLL. HH. Lews Hautesses, Their\\nHighnesses.\\nLL. MM. Leurs Majestes, Their\\nMajesties.\\nLL. MM. II. LL. MM. Imp r tales,\\nTheir Imperial Majesties.\\nLL. MM. RR. LL. MM. Royales,\\nTheir Royal Majesties.\\nM. or M r monsieur, Mr.\\nM. A. maison assuree, insured.\\nM. A. C. I. M. A. contre Vincendie,\\ninsured against fire.\\nM d mwrcliand, merchant.\\nS. E. Son Eminence.\\nS. M. Sa Mqjeste, His or Her Maj-\\nesty.\\nS. M. B. S. M. Britannique, His\\nBritannic Majesty.\\nS. M. C. S. M. Gatholique, His Ca-\\ntholic Majesty.\\nS. M. I. S. M. Imperiale, His Im-\\nperial Majesty.\\nS. M. T. C. S. M. Tres Ghretienne,\\nHis Most Christian Majesty.\\nS. P. Saint-Pere, Holy Father.\\nS. S. Sa Saintete, His Holiness.\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nAccording to established usage, the words of the French\\nlanguage are divided into nine classes. These are 1. Nouns,\\n2. Articles; 3. Adjectives; 4. Pronouns; 5. Verbs; 6. Adverbs;\\n7. Prepositions 8. Conjunctions 9. Interjections.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nNouns are simply the names of persons or things.\\nEx. Pierre, Peter Londres, London Autriche, Austria\\nterre, earth soleil, sun vertu, virtue.\\nProper Nouns belong to one man or one object only, and\\nhence their name.\\nEx. Cesar, Caesar; Louis, Lewis Russie, Russia Vesuve,\\nVesuvius.\\nCommon Nouns are the names which are common to a whole\\nclass of objects.\\nEx. homme, man; arbre, tree; oiseau, bird.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "4:0 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCollective Nouns are the names which are common to a cer-\\ntain number, a collection of persons or things, and hence under\\na singular form represent a plural meaning.\\nEx. armee t army Joule, crowd quanlite, quantity moilie,\\nhalf.\\nThere are two important points to be considered in connec-\\ntion with nouns: Gender and Number.\\nGENDER OF NOl XS.\\nFrench nouns bave two genders Masculine and Feminine.\\nAs there is no Neuter in French, all English nouns of that\\ngender must be it. Fren h either masculine or feminine.\\nWe ascertain the gender of a French word 1. by its signi-\\nand by its termination.\\nTO BH NIFICATIOK.\\n1. Mate l\\\\ e, are the nouns which designate male beingB, and\\nBuch as we are accustomed to consider as male.\\nEx. komme, man /ton, lion Renins,\\nrnate female beings,\\nand Bach m we art I to consider as female.\\nins which rapresenl qualities belonging to men and to\\nwomen, change their gender accordingly.\\nEx. m., the foreigner; ntrangire, f., the foreign\\nlady.\\ni. Masculine, are the names of days, months and seasons;\\nof tre meaa-\\nimhers and fractions, weight\\n(March; le printempt, spring;\\niron; U granit, granite; It Fra\\nthe meti U quart, the fourth A\\nthe hundredth.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "NOUNS. 41\\nOne tree, yev.se, an oak, is feminine and a few shrubs, as epine,\\nthorn rcmce, brier vigne, vine, etc.\\nCollective numbers also are feminine, as la douzccine, dozen la moi-\\ntie, half.\\n5. Masculine, are tne names of mountains and winds, and\\nthose of countries and rivers which do not end in e mute.\\nEx. le Caucase, Caucasus le Vesuve, Vesuvius le JVord,\\nNorth wind le Piemont, Piedmont le Danemarck, Denmark\\nle Tage, Tagus.\\nExcept the names of mountains used only in the plural, as les AU\\npes and les Pyrenees and of winds the following la arise, breeze la\\nbise, N. E. wind la tramontane, N. wind.\\nThe names of rivers ending in e mute are masculine or feminine,\\naccording to their derivation hence le RMne, from Khodanus and\\nla Seine, from Sequana.\\n6. Feminine, are the names of virtues, qualities and festivals.\\nEx. la vertu, virtue la bonte, goodness la haine, hatred la\\nSaint- Jean, St. John s day.\\nExcept Noel, Christmas and Pdques, when it means Easter Sun-\\nday and courage and merite, all of which are masculine.\\n7. The gender of Compound Nouns depends upon the na-\\nture of their composition, which will be explained hereafter.\\nNo general rule, applying to all cases, can here be given,\\nthough it may be learned that when they contain a noun and\\nan adjective, the noun determines the gender.\\nEx. eau-forte, aqua-fortis, fem. because eau is feminine es-\\nprit-fort, great wit, masc. because esprit is masculine.\\nAnd when they consist of two nouns, the principal noun\\ndetermines the gender.\\nEx. arc-en-ciel, rainbow, masc. arriere-boutique, back shop,\\nfem.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "J2\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nGENDER OF NOUNS ACCORDING TO THEIR TERMINATION.\\nThe rules which determine the Gender of Nouns by their\\nform, depend maiuly upon the fact that these nouns are gen-\\nerally derived from the Latin, and retain the gender which tliey\\nhad in that language. Hence we obtain the following rules,\\nwhich are the most important\\n1. Feminine, are nouns end- except the Masculines\\nin r in\\neton, as gueoum.\\nHon, as utt. ntion.\\nIflasion.\\ni uion.\\nbastion and scion.\\nrUionti, Christianity.\\naside a rr t,\\neomte, oounty\\npie; predpitS, ji\\nf i. ur, (avor.\\nresolution:\\nsuinin.T;\\nprecipitate\\ncommittee ctiti, Bide\\ntraitS, treaty tin tea.\\nb n/t ur, happiness chaw,\\nchorus; caur, lu svrt dSnomina-\\nlishonor rfiri-\\nnii/r. divisor; jnat, ur, equator;\\nhonm ur, honor intS-\\nlabor; maUmur,\\nmisfortune;\\ntr\u00c2\u00bb, tears rigutar\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0f, ur.\\nblasoo buton,\\nbuzzard gaaon, turf;\\nlyard poiton,\\npoison oiaon, gosling; titon, fire-\\nbrand pinpon, tugon, -tc\\n\\\\fascuIno arc D0QD8 -n ling 10\\nn i ud.\\nron, as baron,\\nout, as rajout, stew.\\nand\\nbJon.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "NOUNS.\\n43\\nment, as jugement, judgment.\\nau, an vuyau, pipe, (except eau, water, and peau, skin).\\nin, as bassin, basin, (except fin, end, and main, hand).\\net, as brevet, (except foret, forest).\\not, as gigot, leg, (except dot, dowry).\\n3. Nouns ending in mute e may be considered as feminine.\\nHence, the names of most countries and all cities are of this\\ngender, when ending in mute e.\\nEx. la France, France la Syrie, Syria la Rochelle.\\nSome names of countries ending in mute e aro masculine U Ben-\\ngale, Bengal le Mexique, Mexico Ic Peloponese.\\nBut among the nouns ending in mute e, many classes are\\nmasculine, of which we mention here the most numerous and\\nimportant only.\\nexcept the Feminines\\nMasculine, are those end-\\ning in\\nslavery.\\n{cage, cage image nage, swim-\\nming page, page of a book\\nplage, beach rage, rage.\\nalarme ame, soul amertume,\\nire, as\\nitre, chapter.\\narme, weapon cou-\\ntume, custom creme, cream ecu-\\nme, foam enigme, epigramme es-\\ntime, esteem ferme, farm flam-\\nme, flame forme gomme, gum\\nlame, blade larme, tear lime,\\nfile maxime plume, pen pom-\\nme, apple rame, oar reforme\\nrime, rhyme somme, sum victi-\\nme cime, summit dime, tithe\\nenclume, anvil escrime, fencing\\ngamme, gamut prime, premium\\nframe, web, and a few others\\nrarely used.\\nchartre, constitution fenetre,\\ni window guetre, gaiter liuitre,\\nUre, letter montre,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "44\\nON THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nf watch; piastre; potttre, beam,\\nJ rencontre, meeting titre, pane\\niepitre, epistle; mitre, and a few\\nothers.\\naffaire aire, area claire, re-\\nfined ashes glaire, slime gram-\\nmaire haire, hair-cloth j i-\\npaire, pair, and all names\\nof plants wilding in aire.\\ndecrottoire, shoe-brash; Seritoure,\\ninkstand; histoire, history.\\nt ir, victory.\\navari\\ndelight epia Bpice immondice,\\nfilth j lists\\nmilitia imtir,\\noffto pantry\\nfiretlin vnrix.\\ncambrio;\\nj office petti plague pitt track\\njacket\\nCl IJ hilr,\\nbile etoile, star; file, row; hu e,\\npile; A\\nlinen; futfe, tile;\\nsail.\\nl.aru-\\ndStatU,\\nJbreakii\\nbnncle i manacles\\nBcra]\\nGhreekor Latin;\\nrith the names of In\\ni\\ntre, as chapltre, chapter.\\ndirt, as statuaire, sculptor.\\ntoire, bb purgatoire, purgatory.\\nire, as i\\ndt as artiste, artiste.\\ni", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "NOUNS.\\n45\\nThe following list of nouns ending in mute e, which are\\nmasculine for various reasons not mentioned above, is inserted\\nhere mainly for purposes of reference other words which\\nare purely technical or of rare occurence, have been omitted.\\nabaque\\nabacus\\nare (and com\\n{unity in the new\\nsystem of measure\\naccessoire\\naccessory\\npounds)\\nacide\\nacid\\naromate\\naromatic\\nacre\\nacre\\nascaride\\nascarides\\nacrosticlie\\nacrostic\\naspbalte\\nasphalt\\nacte\\nact\\naspre\\nasper\\nadininicule\\nslight proof\\nasterisque\\nasterisk\\nadverbe\\nadverb\\nastragale\\nastragal\\naigle\\neagle\\nastrolabe\\nastrolabe\\naise\\nease\\natbenee\\nathenceum\\nalbatre\\nalabaster\\naugure\\naugury\\nallege\\nligMer\\nautomate\\nautomaton\\nalveole\\nj a cell in a honey\\ncomb\\naxe\\naxis, axle-tree\\nbabeurre\\nbuttermilk\\nambages pi.\\nambages\\nbagne\\nbagnio\\nambe\\n(two together)\\nbarbe\\na Barbary horse\\namble\\namble\\nbarde\\nslice of bacon\\nainbre\\namber\\nbarege\\nbarege\\namiante\\namianthus\\nbasalte\\nbasalt\\namulette\\namulet\\nbecarre\\nnatural\\n(in music)\\naualectes pi.\\nanalects\\nandante\\nandante\\nbejaune\\nbooby\\nandrogyne\\nandrogyne\\nberce\\nrobin redbreast\\nangle (and com-\\nangle\\nbeurre\\nbutter\\npounds)\\nbievre\\nbeaver\\nanimalcule\\nanimalcule\\nbogue\\nboga\\nantidote\\nantidote\\nBospnore\\nBosphorus\\nantipode\\nantipode\\nbouge\\na small room\\napkelie\\naphelion\\nbranle\\njogging\\napocalypse\\napocalypse\\ncable\\ncable\\napogee\\napogeon\\ncadavre\\ncorpse\\napograpbe\\napographum\\ncadre\\nframe\\napologue\\napologue\\ncaducee\\nmercury s wand\\narbre\\ntree\\ncalibre\\nbore, size, sort", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "4G\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\ncaique\\ncounter drawing\\ncode\\ncode\\ncamee\\ncameo\\ncodicille\\ncodicU\\ncamphre\\ncamphire\\ncoffre\\nchest\\ncancre\\ncrab-fish\\ncollege\\ncollege\\ncandelabre\\nehandi V r\\ncolloque\\ncolloquy\\ncantique\\ncanticle\\ncollyre\\ncolly Hum\\ncapitole\\ncapital\\ncolosse\\ncolossus\\ncapitule\\ncapitule\\ncolyst e\\ncoliseum\\ncapre\\nprirntr, r\\ncomble\\ntop\\ncapricoxne\\nCapricorn\\ncomestible\\neatables\\ncaroube\\ncordb bean\\ncommerce\\ncom mi rre\\ncarougo\\ncommingo\\ncoarse mortar\\ncarpe\\ncompte\\nbill, account\\ncarosse\\noompnlsolre\\nant\\ncartouche\\nscroll\\noondliabale\\nnticte\\nh hm t\\noonclaye\\neonel\\ncatafalque\\ni qne\\noonoombre\\ncucumber\\ncatalogue\\nc6ne\\ncatarrhs\\nrrh\\ncongre\\nconger\\ncaostiqae\\nca\\neonte\\ntale\\nI ll-\\ntaph\\noontr le\\ncontrol\\nearne\\nrin j i\\neonventicnle\\nnticte\\ndial.\\neorspuscule\\nrorp iscitle\\nchamliranlo\\nft tin ir\\nchancre\\nc. \u00c2\u00abry\\neoryp\\noothurne\\nbo ski il\\nchaovre\\nOOU\\nchevrefetdlle\\ncouple\\nrliilTr.-\\n(figure)\\ndboire\\nrra/i\\ncidro\\nriil. r\\nskull\\n/i. r\\ncravate\\nrroot\\ndgare\\nerdpe\\ncimcterre\\ntri,\\nBrepUBCUlfl\\ntuOigkt\\ndmeti re\\ncry\\ncrible\\nrim\\ncube\\ndppe\\neulte\\nh ip\\ncirque\\ncloaqoe\\neylindre\\ncyl\\ncocbe\\n1\\nti a Hon\\ntnd", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "JSTOUNS.\\n4\\ndecalogue\\ndecalogue\\nescompte\\ndiscount\\ndecombres pi.\\nrubbish\\nespace\\nspace\\ndecompte\\ndiscount\\neupborbe\\neuphorbium\\ndedale\\nlabyrinth\\nexemple\\nexample\\ndelice sing.\\ndelight\\nexergue\\nexergue\\ndelire\\ndelirium\\nexode\\nexodus\\ndeluge\\ndeluge\\nexorde\\nexordium\\nderuerite\\ndemerit\\nfascicule\\nfascicle\\ndenticule\\ndenticles\\nfaite\\ntop\\nderriere\\nback\\nfeurre\\ncJmff\\ndesordre\\ndisorder\\nfiacre\\nhack\\ndialectp\\ndialect\\nfifre\\nfife\\ndiocese\\ndiocese\\nfiligrane\\nfiligree\\ndisque\\ndisk\\nfinale (in music) finale\\ndissyllabe\\ndissyllable\\nflasque of\\nflask\\ndistique\\ndistich\\ncannon)\\ndithyrainbe\\ndithyrambus\\nfleuve\\nlarge river\\ndivideude\\ndividend\\nfluide\\nfluid\\ndivorce\\ndivorce\\nfoie\\nliver\\ndogue\\nbull-dog\\nfollicule (in an-} #i7I)Vi--#7\\ndomaine\\ndomain\\natomy)\\nr J UW0VU/1/\\ndouble\\ndouble\\nfonticule\\nfonticulus\\ndoute\\ndoubt\\nfoudre\\nlarge tun\\necbange\\nexchange\\ngenie\\ngenius\\nellebore\\nhellebore\\ngenievre\\ngin\\neloge\\nencomium\\ngenre\\ngender\\nelysee\\nelysium\\ngingembre\\nginger\\nemetique\\nemetic\\ngirofle\\ncloves\\nempire\\nempire\\ngite\\nlodging\\nempire e\\nempyrean\\ngivre\\nhoar-frost\\nencombre\\nencumbrance\\nglaive\\nsword\\nensemble\\nwhole\\nglobe\\nglobe\\nephemerides\\nephemerides\\nglobule\\nglobtde\\nepilogue\\nepilogue\\ngoberge\\na sort of eodfis t\\nepisode\\nepisode\\ngolfe\\ngulf\\nequilibre\\nequilibrium\\ngone\\na sort of worm\\nequinoxe\\nequinox\\ngoufire\\nabyss\\nerysipele\\nerysipelas\\ngrabuge\\nsquabble\\nesclandre\\nuproar\\ngrade\\ndegree\\neBclavage\\nslavery\\ngreffe\\nregister s office\\n47", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "43\\nON THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\ngnmoire\\nconjuror s book\\nlexique\\nlexicon\\ngroupe\\ngroup\\nlibelle\\nlibel\\nguide\\nguide, director\\nliege\\ncork\\ngueule\\ngules in heraldry lievre\\nhare\\ngymnase\\ngymnasium\\nlimbe\\nlimb (edge)\\ngyneceo\\ngyncecium\\nlinge\\nlinen, clothes\\nhale\\nsuubur/iixg\\nliquide\\nliquid\\nhiivre\\nhaven\\nlitigo\\nlitigation\\nhecatombe\\nhecatomb\\nlivre\\nbook\\nheliotrope\\nturnsol\\nlobe\\nlobe\\nhemisphere\\nh misphere\\nlobule\\nlobule\\nln mi.-ticho\\nlicmiMich\\nlogogryphe\\nlogography\\nhieroglypha\\nhit yphic\\nlombes\\nhombre\\nombt r\\nLnuvn-\\npalace\\nhoroscope\\nhorot\\nlucre\\nlucre\\nhymenee\\nwedlock\\nluxe\\nlu.rury\\nliyiiuii-\\nhym \\\\v\\ntyoewn\\nbypoooodrc\\nhypochondria*\\nmadrepore\\nmadrepora\\niambe\\nmalgre\\nli an\\nimmeuble\\nreal\\nHialaiM\\nwneasinem\\nin.-.ii.li,-\\neonflagration\\nIiialic-hr\\nhandle\\nindiculo\\nslight indication\\nman ige\\nriding-school\\nhilu~uirr8\\nfnfutory Worms\\nmfinea\\nmanipnle\\nmandpU\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2gnia\\nmanque\\nleant\\ntanerUgne\\ninterline\\nmarbre\\nmarble\\nIntermeda\\nintt i\\nmart ti\\nmartyrdom\\nJDttTI.\\nintern ign\\nmartj rologe\\nmartyrologff\\ninti-rvulle\\nintt red\\nmannnn\\nmask\\nacre\\nma.*\\nJade\\njade\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0MMMoMe\\nmausoktnm\\njaspo\\njasper\\nup a nilro\\nmaiider\\nJe ne\\nfiut\\nnn cpinpte\\nin it n rlcon ing\\nkiopque\\nkiosk\\nHi lunge\\nmixture\\nlul rinthe\\niabyr\\nmembra\\nmember, limb\\nmeadsKng detkee mfcnoiw\\nbill\\nlaqoe\\nChina varnish\\nnn iiisque\\nmeniscus\\noffing\\nmensonge\\nxf ry)\\nlearn\\nhurt\\nmercure\\nmercury\\nK-viuquo\\nUciticus\\nmerle\\nb ackbird", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "merite\\nmerit\\nU IN Q.\\nopuscule\\nsmall composition\\nmesaise\\ndistress\\norbe\\norb\\nmetailo ide\\nmetalloid\\nordre\\norder\\nineteore\\nmeteor\\norgan\\norgan\\nmeuble\\npiece of furniture orgue, when\\norgan, an instru-\\nment\\nnolle\\nmile\\nsingular\\nmode\\nmood\\novale\\noval\\nmodele\\nmodel\\nove\\nonolo\\nmodule\\nmodule\\noxyde\\noxyd\\nmole\\npier\\npact\\npact\\nmonde\\nworld\\npampre\\nleafy nine branch\\nmonocorde\\nmonochord\\npanache\\nbunch of feathers\\nmonologue\\nmonologue\\npanegyrique\\npanegyric\\nmonopole\\nmonopoly\\npantographe\\npantograph\\nmonosyllabe\\nmonosyllables\\npaque\\neasier\\nmonticule\\nhillock\\nparadoxe\\nparadox\\nMorne\\nhillock\\nparagraphe\\nparagraph\\nnioufle\\npulley\\nparallele\\ncomparison\\nmoule\\nmould\\nparafe or paxaphe flourishinsinging\\nmufle\\nmuzzle\\nparapluie\\numbrella\\nmurmure\\nmurmw\\nparjure\\nperjury\\nmusee\\nmuseum\\nparterre\\nSpit {in a theatre)\\nniyrthe\\nmyrtle\\nflower garden\\nnaplite\\nnaphtha\\nparticipe\\nparticiple\\nnarcisse\\ndaffodil\\nparachute\\nparachute\\nnavire\\nship\\npatrimoine\\npatrimony\\nnecrologe\\na register vf the\\ndead\\npavie\\npecule\\nnectarine\\npeculium\\nnegoce\\ntrade\\npedicule\\npedicle\\nnimbe\\nglory, in painting pedoncule\\nthe principal stern\\nnombre\\nnumber, quantity peigne\\ncomb\\nobelisque\\nobelisk\\npenates\\npenates\\n038opbage\\noesophagus\\npendule\\npendulum\\nceuvre\\nmusical work\\npene\\nbolt of a lock\\nolympe\\nolympus\\npentacorde\\npentechord\\nombre\\na game of cards\\npentateuque\\npentateuch\\nomoplate\\nomoplate\\npericarde\\npericardium\\nongle\\nnail\\npericarpe\\npericarpium\\nopercule\\noperculum\\npericrane\\npericranium\\nopprobre\\ndisgrace\\nperigee\\nperigee", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "50\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nperihelie\\nperiode\\nperitoiue\\nperpendicule\\npersonne\\npetale\\npetiole\\npetrole\\npeuple\\npbalene\\nphare\\npht nomrne\\npll M|lll\\nphosphora\\nI\\npique\\nplyolne\\nplanisphere\\npl6biscfte\\nplelge\\npoflo\\nl* il\u00c2\u00ab-\\npole\\npolype\\npolypode\\npolyeyllabe\\nponche\\npoarahe\\npore\\nparphyre\\nJtort. t rMillc\\nportiqae\\npoaoe\\npourpre\\nr. :imltule\\npreohe\\nperihelium\\ntJu highest j)itch\\nperitonaeum\\nperpendicvbum\\np tal\\nl Hole\\npetiroU (in\\nUghth\\nphi re\\nit u in\\n1 I l r\\ndium\\nthumb\\ni\\ni ing\\nprelude\\nprestige\\nprfitexte\\nprincipe\\nprivilege\\nprodigue\\nprologue\\nprone\\npropylee\\nprotocols\\nproverbe\\nprytanee\\npygmee\\npylore\\nqoadrige\\nquadrille\\nquaterne\\nquinoonce\\nrable\\nrale\\nreobange\\nregale\\nrelfiche\\nr.iiii di\\nremise\\nrenne\\nrepere\\nreproehe\\nrotable\\nr. ticuli-\\nreve\\nreverbere\\nrhombo\\nridicule\\nrieble\\nrisque\\nrite\\nprelude\\nprestige\\npr text\\nprinciple\\nprivilege\\nprodigy\\nprologue\\nshort sermon\\npropylaswm\\nprotocol\\nproverb\\nprytanemm\\npylorus\\nquadriga\\ng me tt rards\\nrue\\nunx\\nre niton\\ni; I nl ns\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0fi n\\nmi ill/\\nmark\\nr, proaeh\\ni ieee\\nreetteula\\ndream\\nLi ht i rn\\nridiouk\\ngram\\nrisk\\nrite", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "NOUNS.\\n51\\nr61e\\nroll\\nstockfiche\\ndried codfish\\nrosace\\nhollyJiock\\nstore\\nsmall blinds\\nrosage\\nrose-bay\\nstygmate\\nstigma\\nrouable\\nrake for an oven\\nstylobate\\nstylobatum\\nrouble\\nRussian coin\\nsubterfuge\\nsubterfuge\\nsable\\nsable\\nsubside\\nsubsidy\\nsabre\\nsabre\\nSucre\\nsugar\\nsacerdoce\\nsacerdoce\\nsymbole\\nsymbol\\nsacre\\nconsecration\\nsynod e\\nsynod\\nsacrilege\\nsacrilege\\ntarse\\ntarsus\\nsarigue\\noposum\\ntemple\\ntemple\\nscandale\\npublic offence\\ntentacule\\ntentacle\\nscarabee\\nsearabceus\\nterne\\nterne\\nscolie\\nscolium\\nteste\\ntext\\nscrupule\\nscruple\\nthyrse\\nthyrsus\\nseigle\\nrye\\ntimbre\\nstamp\\nsepulcre\\nsepulchre\\ntintamarre\\ngreat noist\\nsexe\\nsex\\ntonnerre\\nthunder\\nsexte\\nsextus\\ntopique\\ntopic\\nsigne\\nsign\\ntorse\\ntrunk of a etatue\\nsilence\\nsilence\\ntoxique\\npoison\\nsille\\nsillus\\ntrapeze\\ntrapezium\\nsimple\\nmedicinal herb\\ntrefle\\ntrefoil\\nsimulacre\\nsimulacre\\ntriomphe\\ntriumph\\nsinge\\nape\\ntrisyllabe\\ntrisyllable\\nsite\\nsite\\ntrocbisque\\npill\\nsocque\\novershoe, sandal\\ntrochee\\ntrochee\\nsolde\\nbalance of abill\\ntroene\\nprivet\\nsoliloque\\nsoliloquy\\ntroglodite\\nwren\\nsonge\\ndream\\ntrombone\\ntrombone\\nsouffle\\nbreath\\ntrone\\nthrone\\nsoufre\\nsulphur\\ntrope\\ntrope\\nsourire\\nsmile\\ntropb.ee\\ntrophy\\nsiadllle\\nspadille\\ntropique\\ntropic\\nspJcifique\\nspecific\\ntrouble\\ntrouble\\nspondee\\nspondee\\ntube\\ntube\\nsquelette\\nskeleton\\ntubercule\\ntubsrcle\\nsquirre\\nscirrhus\\ntumulte\\ntumult\\netade\\nstadium\\ntype (and comp\\ntype\\nslalle\\nstall\\nulcere\\nulcer", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "52\\nOK THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nvague\\nvague\\nvestige\\ntrack\\nvase\\nvase, rassd\\nviatique\\nviaticum\\niballud, a short\\ncomedy\\nvide\\nvacuum\\nvaudeville\\nignoble\\nvineyard\\nvehicule\\nvehicle\\nvinaigre\\nvinegar\\nventricals\\nventricle\\nvioloncello\\nvioloncello\\nvepre\\ndusk,\\nviscere\\nintestines\\nverbe\\nverb\\nvivres pi.\\nvictual*\\nvennicelle\\nn rtniedU\\nvote\\nverre\\ngiau\\nzMe\\nzeal\\nvertige\\ndizziness\\nzodiaque\\nzodiac\\nvestibule\\nentry\\nNUMBER OF NOUNS.\\nFrench nouns have two numbers, singular and plural, accord-\\ning as they designate one object only or a number of them.\\nThis applies only to common nouns, as proper names are the\\nexclusive property of one person or one object, and cannot\\nhence be applied to many, as long as they are used as genuine\\nproper nam\\nThe ringular ia given by the form of the noun itself.\\nThe plural ia invariably made by the addition of for even\\nwhen plnraU are found to end in or x, it must be borne in\\nmind, that a is but a combination of d and and x of c and\\nThe manner of forming the plural of nouns ia Bubject to the\\ning rules\\nl. All nouns not ending in or add a anal t.\\ntabU, p. tool 7 P\u00c2\u00ab slls\\ngun a, ni p. nid*\\\\ neat\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0_\u00e2\u0080\u00a2. Nouns ending in a, a or x remain unchanged, as they end\\nalready in\\nEx. a. fit*, p. fiky s. son a. m p no, nose a croiz, p croc*\\ncross j p. ra/ivrJs. remorse.\\ntiding in on (eon), ra (o\u00c2\u00bbu), and some in m, add\\nu final x.\\nEx. a. (tau, p. Hams, vice; a. 6a/eau, p. bateaux, boat;", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "N0U1TS. 53\\ns. feu, p. feux, fire s. voeu, p. vceux, vow s. genou, p. genoux,\\nknee.\\n4. Nouns ending in al, and some in ail, change these syl-\\nlables into aux.\\nEx. s. mal, p. maux, evil; s. ckeval, p. chevaux, horse; s. CO\\nrail, p. coraux, coral s. travail, p. travaux, labor.\\nThe following nouns ending in aZ make the plural by adding s, and\\nnot by changing al into aux\\nBal, ball col, callosity car naval, carnival ceremonial chacal,\\njackal narval, narwal regal, treat sandal, sandalwood, and a few\\nnames of animals of rare occurrence. Formerly it was the fashion to\\nmake the plural of nouns ending in ant or ent by omitting the letter\\nt, so as to make them end in ans or ens; this is not done now-a-days.\\nEx. s. enfant, p. enfants, children s. serpent, p. serpents, serpents.\\n5. Some nouns have an irregular plural, the most important\\nof which are the following\\nAieul, grandfather, becomes a ieux, when it means ancestors\\nbut aieuls, when is means grandfathers.\\nAil, garlic, in botanical language, makes ails; in ordinary life,\\naulx, though gousses (Tail, cloves of garlic, is generally sub-\\nstituted.\\nBetail, cattle, becomes bediaux.\\ndel, sky or heaven, becomes cieux but when ft is used fig-\\nuratively, it makes dels.\\nEx. dels-de-lit, top of bedsteads dels de tableau, skies in a\\npainting.\\nCEil, eye, becomes yeux in its primary meaning; but it\\nmakes ceils when used figuratively.\\nEx. ceils-de-bceuf, bull s eyes (in architecture) ceils-de-chat,\\ncat s eyes (in mineralogy.)\\nExcept in yeux dupain, yeux du frontage, the open spaces in bread\\nand cheese and yeux du bouillon, the round spots of fat swimming\\non broth.\\nUniversel, universal (in logic) becomes universaux.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "54 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\noise.\\nChildren. Parents. Friends. Animals. Enemies. Virtues. Vi-\\nces. Years. Days. Evils. Misfortunes. Horses. Corals. Vicis-\\nsitudes. Horrors. Kings. Queens. Crosses. Vases. Noses. Eyes*\\nMonths. Nephews. Nieces. Brothers. S.ms. Daughters. Col-\\nonels. Nanvals. Nails. Screws. Hammers. Arsenals. Capitals.\\nResidences. Villages. Altars. Partridges. Avowals. Cabbages.\\nKnees. Hands. Heads. Canals. Laws. Fires. Waters. Troubles.\\nVoices. Cattle. Skies. Horns. Feet, Pebbles.\\nCHAPTBB II.\\nARIICLES.\\nArticles arc words place. 1 before nouns or other parts of\\nfor the purpose of defining their mean-\\ning in various ways.\\nlanguage baa two articles: the Definite th* and\\nthe Iu.f finite i or on.\\nThe French language htm three articles.\\nThe Definite the.\\nThe [nd( ting to\\nThe Partiti rhich baa no corresponding form in\\nEnglish.\\n1. The bas the following three forms\\nbefore maacuJ beginning with consonant or\\naspirated /i.\\nKx. It atari, the bnaband; U hiroa, the hero.\\nfeminine nouns beginning with a consonant or\\naspirated h.\\nEx. wife la h tint, the hatred.\\nbefore masculine r feminine nouna beginning with a\\nK\\\\. r in--, the friend; fife, the island; Thomme, the man;\\nwr, the bistorj.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES.\\n55\\nIts plural form is les before all nouns without distinction.\\nEx. les rois, the kings les amis, the friends les honneurs,\\nthe honors les reines, the queens les habitudes, the habits.\\nIt is declined, as all words are declined in French, by means\\nof the preposition de (of), and d (to), but suffers certain con-\\ntractions, which produce the following forms\\nSINGULAR.\\nMasculine\\nFeminine.\\nBefore vowels or h mute.\\nNominative\\nU\\nla-\\nV\\nGenitive.\\n{de le) die\\nde la\\ndel\\nDative.\\n(d le) au\\na la\\ndV\\nAccusative.\\nU\\nla\\nPLURAL.\\nFor all Nouns.\\nNom.\\nles\\nV\\nGen. {de les) des\\nDat. {d les)\\naux\\nAce.\\nles\\nThis gives, with a noun, the following forms\\nSINGULAR. PLURAL.\\nMasculine Noun.\\nNom. le roi, the king. les rois, the kings.\\nGen. du roi, of the king. des rois, of the kings.\\nDat. au roi, to the king. aux rois, to the kings.\\nAce. le roi, the king. les rois, the kings.\\nFeminine Noun\\nNom. la reine, the queen. les reines, the queens.\\nGen. de la reine, of the queen. des reines, of the queens.\\nDat. a la reine, to the queen. aux reines, to the queens.\\nAce. la reine, the queen. les reines, the queens.\\nMasculine, beginning with a vowel.\\nNom. Vami, the friend. les amis, the friends.\\nGen. de Vami, of the friend. des amis, of the friends.\\nDat. a Vami, to the friend. aux amis, to the friends.\\nAce. Vami, the friend. lei amis, the friends.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "56 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nFeminine, beginning with a vowel.\\nNom. Tome, the soul. les times, the souls.\\nGen. de I dme, of the soul. dea dim 8, of the Bonis.\\nDat. d I dme, to the soul. a i.r times, to the souls.\\nAce. I dme, the soul. lea times, the souls.\\nMasculine, beginning with mute h.\\nNom. Vh/xbit, the coat. its, the coats.\\nGen. d Vhabit, of the coat. dea habits, of the coats.\\nDat. llni nt, to the ooat. rt /.r habits, to the coats.\\nAce. I /oibit. the ooat Km Ao to, the coats.\\nline, beginning with aspirated A.\\nNom. tin- hcn les hiros, the heroes.\\nGen. dta aJrot, of the hero. w, of the heroea\\nl\u00c2\u00bb;it. to the hero. o /j Wro\u00c2\u00bb, to the heroea\\nAce. V hint, the hero. the heroes.\\n2, Tbe U Articlt baa the following tonus:\\nUn before all maSCOline nouns.\\nbefore all feminine nouns.\\nIt is declined bj means of the same preposition, thus:\\nsiv.n.u:\\niiiin-. Feminine.\\nNom. vn me\\nSen. {de un) dun (de unt) d une\\nDai i MM) 4 MM\\nIt has DO plural, KM being the same as the numeral KM, one.\\niu ISB.\\n(ix-arn tin- rerb Atetr, to have.)\\nWe have the flowers of the garden you have the fruits of the\\nonhaid. He has a daughter andason. We had the doctor in tho\\nhense. They will have the friend of the brother, and we will have\\nthe nu of the Mend. The children of the ancle ami the paranui of", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "Nom.\\nCesar,\\nAndre,\\nGen.\\nde Cesar,\\nd Andre,\\nDat.\\nd Cesar,\\nd Andre,\\nAce.\\nCesar.\\nAndre.\\nAKTICLES. 57\\nthe enemy. To the king of the English, and to the emperor of the\\nFrench. They had a book of the library. You shal. have the pies\\nand the cakes. She had a bouquet. To the lover of the chase. The\\nend of the action and the causes of the retreat. The value of the\\ngold and of the silver of the country. They have had a speech in\\nthe church, and they had the ministers of the church in the building.\\nThe epistles of the friends to the man in the mask. The gifts of the\\nambassador to the empress. 1 1- hall have the money or the goods.\\nThe surgeons in the hospital, and the doctors at the hotel. The\\nhorses of the men, and the swords of the officers. To an aunt of\\nthe boys, and to an uncle of the girls.\\nThe declension of Proper Names is made by the preposi-\\ntions only, without an article, in which case de elides its e be-\\nfore vowels and mute\\nAnne, Londres,\\nd Anne, de Londres,\\nd Anne, d Londres,\\nAnne. Londres.\\nPreposition and article must both be repeated before every\\nnoun which they qualify, and agree with it in gender and\\nnumber.\\nEx. Le Jlls de Louis et d Anne. L histoire des Romains et\\ndes Grecs. Fidele au roi et a la reine.\\nThere is no Possessive Case in French. The noun so used\\nin English must be placed after the noun on which it depends,\\nin the genitive case. Paul s book thus becomes the book of\\nPaul the brother s hat becomes the hat of the brother.\\nEx. le livre de Paul, Paul s book le chapeau du frere, the\\n.rother s hat; le courage d un heros, a hero s courage.\\nExercise.\\nI have the letters of Voltaire to Frederick the Great. He had the\\nphilosopher in the palace of Potsdam. The letters to the king had a\\nsuccess. She had a sister s love for the friend of the brother. They\\nhad not the measures of the depth of the well. We have an attor-\\nney s autnority, and you have a lawyer s certificate. They would\\nhave had tn^ President s Message, but they had not the time, nor the\\n3*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "58 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\napace in the journal. We have not the partridges of Europe. We\\nhad a plan of the city of London and a drawing of the towns of the\\ndistrict. To the friends of the negroes. We bad a storm during the\\nnight, and we shall have a rain in the day. The winds and the\\nwaves. You have the dedication to the wife of the author. The\\nbeginning of the history of the war of Independence. The queens\\nof England and Scotland. To the master of workmen and appren-\\ntices. The; had a horse and chaise. The address of the c omm a nder\\nto the soldiers of the Empire.\\n3. The Partitive 4 that not the whole, bat\\nonly a part or a certain quantity is spoken of. The English ex-\\npress this either by I n, of the article, as when wo\\nBay: [have bread, or by the oae of tome in affirmative and\\nany in the interrog itive sentences, g. He has\\nsome bread. Have you any apples I bave not any friends.\\nThe partitive arti\\ntbined with the definite article,\\nand thus d :;i\\n\\\\K.\\nI ,111. Before vowels and h mute.\\nV\\npain, torn cream dt /V\\nlaws;\\nvi-\\nal 1 Nouns.)\\n:ie pOtfr\\nand in Dtp\\nKv bad ad-\\nIt must in mind that a- the pari\\nwith nouns,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 50\\nthe meaning of which precludes the idea of division. Some\\ntea, means a portion of the whole quantity, and some friend*,\\na fraction of the whole number but when we say I look for\\nsome house to suit me, we do not mean a portion of a house,\\nand hence, here, some cannot be translated by the partitive\\narticle.\\nExercise.\\n(Learn the verb Avoir interrogatively.)\\nI have bread and water, and you shall have wine and cakes. Has\\nhe any friends in the city I had some pens and some ink, but I\\nhave not any paper. We shall have oil with the salad, and vinegar\\nwith the beets. Had you any ideas Has she the end of the list, and\\nsome hope of the return of the printer Meat and vegetables, coffee\\nand tea, bread and butter. I have cream in the tea, and milk in the\\ncoffee. Have you no (not any) sugar I have had sugar, and she has\\nhad molasses. Friends and enemies, soldiers and citizens. Would\\nyou have a friend s advice, or an enemy s warning Have they any\\ntragedies and comedies in the literature of the age To the friends\\nof the monarch. Have they had any apples They had an apple\\nand some apricots, but they had not any peaches. I have pencils and\\ncrayons, but I have not any colors.\\nWhen the verb is both interrogative and negative, the part-\\nitive article resumes its full form, du, de la, de V and des.\\nEx. Wavez-vous pas des livres Have you not any books\\nExercise.\\n(Learn the verb Avoir interrogatively and negatively.)\\nWe had some bread and cheese, but we had no wine and no meat.\\nHad you any dinner or supper to-day I have some hope. We shall\\nhave some friends and some relations at the feast of St. John. Will\\nyou not have some guests at the house He shall have some plea-\\nsures and some games, but we shall not have any guests. We had\\nsome rye, but we had no oats, affd now we shall have no baker s\\nbread The porter s lodge, and the cry for workmen. He had tears\\nand sighs. You shall have some rewards. Have they not had some\\ndifficulties with some soldiers 1 They have not had any medicine,\\nbecause they had no phial.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "GO ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCHAPTER III.\\nADJECTIVES.\\nAdjectives express permanent or accidental qualities as at-\\ntributed to nouns. As they do not designate a person or a\\nthing, but only something thai belongs to them, they show de-\\npendence by always agreeing with the nonn which they quality,\\nin gender and number. It matters not, whether they stand by\\nthis noun, a in the good man, the handsome woman, or are\\nrated from it by other parts of the sentence, as in The\\nman the house is good the woman who was here is hand-\\nsome. They still agree in the aame way.\\nt and past, when not used as parts \u00c2\u00bbf the\\nbnl employed t qualifiy noons, are treated, in all res]\\nI agree alto in gender and nnmber with their\\nthey are invariably placed after their noons.\\nIATIOB K Til K KKMIMXK K AP.I E I 1 V I.S.\\nmake their ftmimm invariably by adding a mute\\nmasculine.\\nK\\\\. m. in. eharmantf f. cAarmoali,\\ncharming t poftt, po-\\nlite, ran harp.\\nThere are, however, besides this general method, certain\\nother changes taking place in the process of forming the femi-\\nnine, which lead t tin- following rul\\nl. Adjectives endis% in mnte t remain nnchanged in tho\\nfeminine, as it woold add another mnte a\\nEx. n faithful; m. habile, t habile, skilful;\\nia. rir tOffttSf red.\\nand OR, bubidcb adding\\nmute f, also double the final OOOtOUDt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES.\\nEx. m. eternel,\\nf. Uemelle,\\neternal.\\nmuet,\\nmuette,\\nmute.\\npareil,\\npareille,\\nequal.\\nancien,\\nancienne,\\nancient.\\nbon,\\nbonne,\\ngood.\\nCI\\nThe following Adjectives, ending in et, also take mute e, but instead\\nof doubling the final consonant, they place a grave accent over the e\\nthat precedes the t.\\ncomplet,\\nf. complete.\\nm. inquiet,\\nf. inquiete.\\nconcret,\\nconcrete.\\nincornplet,\\nincomplete.\\ndiscret,\\ndiscrete.\\nreplet,\\nreplete.\\nindiscret,\\nindiscrete.\\nsecret,\\nsecrete.\\n3. Adjectives ending in er, besides adding mute e, place a\\ngrave accent over the e preceding r.\\nm. fier,\\nsingulier,\\nf. fiere,\\nproud,\\nsingular.\\nEx. m. neuf, f. neuve, new.\\nbref, breve, brief.\\n4. Adjectives ending in and or, besides adding mute e,\\nchange their final letters into v and s.\\nm. Tieureux, f. fieureuse, happy.\\njaloux, jalouse, jealous.\\nThe following Adjectives ending in x, change it differently in the\\nfeminine\\nEx. m. doux, f. douce, sweet. m. prefix, f. prefixe, prefixed.\\nfaux, fausse, false. ronx, rousse, reddish.\\n5. The following Adjectives, besides adding mute e, double\\nthe final consonant, without belonging to the class mentioned\\nunder 2\\nm. bas, f. basse, low.\\nbellot, bellotte, pretty.\\ngras, grasse, fat.\\nlas, lasse, weary.\\nepais, epaisse, thick.\\nexpres, expresse, express.\\ngros, grosse, big.\\nm. sot,\\nnul,\\nf. sotte, foolish.\\nnulle, null.\\ngentille, nice.\\npaysan, paysanne, peasant.\\nprofes, professe, professed.\\nvieillot, vieillotte, oldish", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "62 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nExekci.se.\\n(Learn the verb Etre, to be.)\\nlam prudent ami she is indiscreet. We shall be polite but coM\\nto the gentleman of the house. She was angry and we were hupar\\nti.nt. He will be respected, but Bhe will be hated. Mary s friend lias\\nwhims: Bhe is pretty well dresBed, but she is not amiable. They will\\nat. We were content with the brother s account of the story.\\nHe had excellent recommendations and letter- from the great men of\\nthe country. .at and Mary s ribbons are silk. He is the\\nminister of an Episcopal church in the pretty village of the vail -y.\\nThe i high and the rivers are rapid, but the houa\\nlow and dark and the men are not healthy. children aro\\nyoung and pretty; Bhe has a i and her month is large.\\n1 1 have not any money. He has singular habits\\nand she is Dot proud of the husband. Rome is an ancient city and\\nbanco autiful churches. The wounds of the officer were\\nmortal, and the (ever of the child is di atous of the\\nfriend of the husband, and the sisters are ashamed she has had a\\nnew robe, short l h r, an I ai pondence.\\n0. j in ear make their feminine by changing\\nr into v, when they are derived from the participle present of\\nI\\ntO lie\\npt the f.-ll .v.\\nin. i e nch a n ti n g.\\np,;-;,, BbafuL\\nmttng.\\nmake the feminine by changing the last\\noding in tor.\\nprotecdng.\\ncreative,\\notlng,\\nmake the feminine regularly, when they are derived\\nfrom the Latin oompara!", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES.\\n63\\nm. majeur,\\nmineur,\\nmeilUur,\\nsuperieur,\\nanterieur,\\ninferieur,\\nf. majeure,\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0min cure,\\nmeilleure,\\nsuperieure,\\nanterieure,\\ninferieur e,\\nof age.\\nunder age.\\nbetter.\\nsuperior.\\nanterior.\\ninferior.\\nf I. The following Adjectives form their feminine irregularly\\nm. blanc, f. blanche,\\nfranc,\\nsec,\\nfrais,\\npublic,\\ncaduc,\\nture,\\ngrec,\\nbenin,\\nfranche,\\nseche,\\nfraiche,\\noblongue, oblong.\\ncoite,\\nfavorite,\\nquiet,\\nfavorite.\\nturque,\\ngrecque,\\nwhite. m. long, f. longue, long,\\nfrank.\\ndry.\\nfresh.\\npublic.\\nfrail.\\nTurkish.\\nGreek.\\nbenign.\\nmalignant\\noblong,\\ncoi,\\nfavori,\\nmuscat,\\njumeau,\\ntiers,\\ntors,\\ntraitre,\\nmuscade, muscat.\\njumelle,\\ntierce,\\ntorse,\\ntwin,\\nthird,\\ntwisted.\\ntraitresse, treacherous.\\n8. Adjectives ending in u place a diaeresis over the mute\\nwhich they add to preserve the sound of u.\\nEx.\\nm. aigu,\\ncontigu,\\nf. aigue,\\ncontigue,\\nsharp,\\ncontiguous.\\nSeveral adjectives have no feminine.\\nEx. dispos, nimble fat, foppish.\\nThe following Adjectives have two forms for the masculine\\nthe first, ending in a vowel (except vieux) is used before nouns\\nbeginning with a consonant or aspirated h the second, end-\\ning in I, before nouns beginning with a vowel or mute A. The\\nfeminine is made from the latter, by adding mute e and doubling\\nthe final consonant.\\nSINGULAR.\\nPLURAL.\\nm. beau and bel,\\nf. belle,\\nm. beaux,\\nf. belles, handsome.\\nfou and/o\u00c2\u00a3,\\nfolle,\\nfous,\\nfolles, mad.\\nmou and mol,\\nmolle,\\nmous,\\nmolles, soft.\\nnouveau and nouvel,\\nnouvelle,\\nnouveaux,\\nnouvelles, new.\\nvieux and vieil,\\nvieitte,\\nvieux,\\nvieilles, old.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "6\u00c2\u00b1 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nExKRCISB.\\nThe sister is talkative, but the brothers are silent, and two cousins\\nare mute. She has been an enchanting beauty, but now she is ugly.\\nThe pen is spoiled, and the ink is thick the letter is unlucky. Have\\nyou any ink I have some ink, and it is better. The old woman is\\nindustrious, but the sister is too talkative. She is of age, but the\\nbrothers are under age. The handsome man and the handsome\\nwoman were husband and wife; they have no children. A superior\\neducation and an interior soul. The better history is in the library of\\nthe mad man. A Dew friend is better than an old enemy. The new\\nand beautiful dresses of the young la. lies are in the big box. Bhe has\\nwhite hands and fresh cheeks, with blue eyes and a benign expression.\\nShe is a malignant woman and very revengeful. A Turkish custom\\nand a Sleek custom are different things. The while robe is not dry.\\nThe Rnglish tongue i discreet* and the French tongue a favorite in\\nrl 1.\\nrOBMATZOB K Tin: PLUBAX OF A.DJE0TOYB8.\\ntheir plural generally according to the same\\nroles as mums, viz. by adding i to the singular, x when they\\nrod by changing into aux.\\nEx. a p. p. beaux, handsome\\nprincip m r, principal.\\nbowever, makes its plural bleus, and tout changes into\\nThe followii ling in do nol change it into\\ni\\nMai, fatalj final, frugal\\nil, initial, n itinal, early rising; nasal, naval;\\npascal, paschal pinalf ,wil.\\nAnotfa tiding in from tlu-ir signiic\\niral form for the masculine.\\nEx. a\\\\ mental, labial, lingual, palatal, todiacal t\\nand paroitsial, parochial.\\nExsroxbc\\n-a the v. rb sly.)\\nThe dress i.- gTSl n, t .ie trimming* are reddish, and the belt id blue;", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 6\u00c2\u00bb\\nthe gloves also are blue. The hands are small, but the feet are colos-\\nsal. The true opinions of the members of the Senate were not the\\nprincipal motives. The marital rights of the general are secured,\\nand the final action will be seen. They had the special orders of the\\ngeneral, but we had the emperor s general orders. We had some\\npleasure from the amusements of the festival, but the special objects\\nwere not secured. The native land to the children of the soil. They\\nhave the accounts of the naval operations of Jean Bart and Ruyter.\\nThe four cardinal points are North, South, East and West. Were\\nthey not the cardinals of the holy college Ney was the commander\\nof the army during the fatal days of the war of Russia. The Jesuits\\nhave a mental reservation. This was a grievous insult to the friend\\nof the host it will be an eternal disgrace. His immortal renown is\\nsuperior to the fame of Caesar.\\nFORMATION OF COMPARATIVE DEGREES.\\nThe meaning of adjectives may be expressed in different\\nways, according to the result of a comparison between various\\npersons or objects, to whom the same qualities are attributed.\\n1. If the result of the comparison is the superiority of one\\nover others, this is called the Comparative of Superiority,\\nwhich is formed by placing plus (more) before the adjective.\\nEx. fin, comp. plus fin, finer magnifique, comp. plus ma-\\ngnifique, more magnificent.\\n2. If the result is the inferiority of one to others, this is\\ncalled the Comparative of Inferiority, which is formed by pla-\\ncing moins (less) before the adjective.\\nEx. beau, comp. moins beau, less handsome.\\n3. If the result of the comparison is the equality of one to\\nthe other, this is called the Comparative of Equality, which is\\nformed by placing aussi before the adjective in affirmative, and\\nsi in negative sentences.\\nEx. grand, comp. aussi grand, as tall pas si grand que vous,\\nnot as tall as you.\\nThe English conjunctions than and as, which serve to connect\\nthe two terms of the comparison, are translated alike by que.\\nEx. plus petit que le frere, smaller than the brother; moins", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "06 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nbrlle que la soeur, \\\\ess handsome than the sister; aussi savant\\nque le pcre, as learned as the lather.\\nThe following adjectives have irregular comparative forms\\nBon, good, makes meilleur, better; mauvais, bad, makes\\npire, worse and petit, small, makes moindre, smaller.\\nExekcise.\\nShe wafl richi-r than tlie sister, but the cousins are richer than all\\nth membera of the family. I am less familiar with the details of the\\nv. She is a better friend than the brother, but he is more oaa-\\ni than she. The apples ar^ nol the pears, but the\\nplum- r than the other fruits. The father is as kind as\\n:i. bnt he is aot as polite as Charles. Lucy is taller and more\\ner and sweeter Who is less imperious\\nthan the ruler of the country, and who is prouder than the son of the\\ntion The garden\\nnl the bouse is taller than the garden. Ho\\n1 iya will be longer and hottet\\nsummer, hut in tin- winter they are shorter and colder. He is\\nbnt he has been better than the other sick nun.\\noparison is that one person or object\\ndl others, this is called the superlative. This d\\ntwofold nature.\\nI ll degree of the\\ni/.. to a Dumber\\nor a class of similar persona or objects. It is formed by pre-\\nthe definite article r the posseesire pronouns to the\\ncomp\\nroper. U plus grand, the greatest\\nsnper. the least handsome\\nluper,\\nWhen the adjecti I r the Dotm,\\nrlatire\\nfrom the compel I before the adjective,\\nwhether the Boon have a pronoun or an article befop", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. $7\\nEx. la personne la plus aimable, the most amiable person\\nmes vceux les plus sinceres, my most sincere wishes.\\nThe Absolute Superlative expresses the highest degree of the\\nmeaning of the adjective absolutely, i. e., without any coinpar\\nison with others. It is formed by prefixing an adverb, expres-\\nsive of the highest degree, to the adjective, such as ires, fort\\nand bien, very; extremement, extremely; le plus, the most; le\\nmoms, the least le mieux, the best.\\nEx. Paris est Men beau, Paris is handsome indeed il est fort\\ndrole, he is very odd elle est extremSment savante, she is ex-\\ntremely learned.\\nExercise.\\nThe uncle is the richest man of the country, but he is not well in-\\nformed. A man is most discreet when he has not any secrets. The\\nhandsome sister is the most charming of the two, but she is too talk-\\native the other is less beautiful but more attractive. Father of\\nall creatures, Thou art infinitely good and merciful Who is as good\\nas he She was the best woman of all, and her daughters will be as\\ncharming as she was. I have a letter for the Eight Eeverend Arch-\\nbishop he is the wisest man in the church, and most esteemed of all\\ndignitaries. He has not been very strong, but he is the most skilful\\nof the artisans of the city and does the best work. To the handsomest\\nyoung lady. To the bravest defenders of the country. I have had\\nthe most interesting letter from my dearest friend. My brothers are\\nthe worst correspondents I have not had any letters since their\\ndeparture. My brother s wife has the smallest child it is smaller\\nthan the little girl of my sister. The smartest children are not\\nalways the best, and the dullest children are not always the worst.\\nPLACE OF ADJECTIVES.\\nThe place of adjectives varies in French, while in English it\\nstands invariably before the noun they qualify.\\nThe manner in which the place is determined, depends\\n1. On Emphasis An adjective which is strongly accented, is\\nplaced before its noun, all other rules notwithstanding.\\nEx. cet infortune roi, that unfortunate king cette abominable\\nchose, that abominable thing.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "6S ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n2. On Size Long adjectives are placed after short nouns and\\nshort adjectives before longer nouns.\\nEx. une affaire extraordinaire, an extraordinary affair un\\nlong sejour, a long residence.\\n3. Ou Special Rules, by which certain classes of adjectives are\\nalways placed before, and others after their nouns.\\nThe principal rules on this subject are the following\\nbefore the ROUfl are always placed\\na. Numeral adjectives, both cardinal and ordinal.\\nK\\\\. vingt hommeSy twenty men; la premiere chose, the first\\nthing.\\nb. The following adjectives, autre, other J Iran, handsome;\\nbon, good; digne, worthy (unless followed by a regime) grand,\\ngreat; oro\u00c2\u00bb t big; jeune, young; joli, pretty; mauvais, bad;\\nmichant, wicked; meilleur, better m6W, ame; moimfre, less\\npetit, small; \u00c2\u00bbh, and w u.r, old. /.o,,,/ is generally\\nplaced before the noun.\\no noun are placed by special rule\\na. All participles, like tuivant, following; satis/ait, satisfied.\\n1 Adjectives conveying an impression made upon the sentem,\\nr blane, white; noir, black of taste dour,\\niut, loud has, low of touch chaud,\\nwarm rond, round, etc.\\nof nationality, like I nnicais, French\\nAmerican,\\nd. Adjectives ending in al, like giniral^ fatal.\\nTlir adjectives draft, right gauehs, left new; ess, dry, are\\nai^ placed afterthe noon dw next, with lavs of\\nthe week.\\nlast Monday; mardi prarhain, next Tuesday.\\nEXBBOIBB.\\nHe hai B good voice, We have a round table and a handsome\\nroom. She is n worthy old lady, imd he is a wicked old man. I have\\na big sum, and you shall have a Biuall Bum. The pretty girl of tho", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 69\\nancle is a bad child. Twenty men on the first day, and forty men on\\nthe third day. She will have a white dress and a pink bonnet you\\nwill have a black dress and a purple shawl. They have warm cloaks\\nin these cold days. My French grammar, and my German diction-\\nary. Where is the American fleet It is in a Spanish harbor. This\\nis a general law, but that is a special exception. Where is the blind\\nwoman I have a new coat. They will be here next Sunday. I\\nwas there last Friday.\\nNUMERICAL ADJECTIVES.\\nThe numerals are treated in French as adjectives, and must,\\ntherefore, as far as their forms permit it, agree with the noun\\nthey qualify, in gender and number.\\nEx. cinq cents hommes, five hundred men la premiere his-\\ntoire, the first history.\\nThe two principal classes, which alone will be explained here,\\nare the Cardinal Numbers, which express numbers simply and\\nabsolutely, as deux, two trois, three, etc. and the Ordinal\\nNumbers, which express them with regard to order, as second,\\nsecond troisieme, third, etc.\\nCARDINAL NUMBERS.\\n1 un, une 18 dix-huit\\n2 deux 19 dix-neuf\\n3 trois 20 vingt\\n4 quatre 21 vingt-un\\n5 cinq 22 vingt-deux\\n6 six 23 vingt-trois\\n7 sept 24 vingt-quatre\\n8 huit 25 mngt-cinq\\n9 neuf 26 mngt-six\\n10 dix 27 mngt-sept\\n11 onze 28 mngt-Tiuit\\n12 douze 29 vingt-neuf\\n13 treize 30 trente\\n14 quatorse 31 trente-un\\n15 quinze 40 quarante\\n16 seize 41 quarante-un\\n17 dix-sept 50 cinqucmte", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "70\\nON THE PAHTS OF SPEECH.\\nGO soir\\n95 qvatr?-rin jt-q i:\\\\ze\\nmt dix\\n90 v tee\\n97 q ititre-vingt-ilix-scpt\\nI\\nOS quaire-vingt-di/x-h nit\\n99 quatre-vingt-dix-TU tf\\ni torae\\n100 \u00c2\u00abn*\\n101 nt-nn, une\\n102\\n200 (/t .r r\\nknit\\n300 fo 0M\\nf\\n1000\\nE\\n1001 pimBi m/w\\nt-nn\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2Jill 111\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0dif\\nlllDDii\\nldl\\n1000000\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2jui mi ion em\\nI Jar linal N i indeclinable, except the folio*\\nI like tin- indefinite article.\\nwoman,\\nimpound form q\\nhundred, take the sign of tin plural\\nvlnii they stand immediately before :i noun.\\nBut i: the plural, or il\\n;n by another numeral, they remain\\nunchai\\nx I have hundred dollars;\\ni cinquanti\\nMill* by adding and\\nwritten mil.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 71\\nIn stating numbe v s, the French omit both the word a or one,\\nbefore hundred and thousand, and the conjunction and, in com-\\npound numbers, which are used in English.\\nEx. a hundred men, cent homines one thousand years,\\nmille ans eighteen hundred and sixty-seven, mil huit cent\\nsoixante-sept.\\nThe Cardinal Numbers cannot be inverted as in English, i. e.\\nwe cannot say in French five and twenty instead of twenty five\\nbut the smaller number invariably follows the larger.\\nEx. vingt-cinq, five and twenty.\\nThe Cardinal Numbers from dix-sept, seventeen, upwards to\\nquatre-vingt-dix-neuf, ninety-nine, are connected with each\\nother by hyphens; in other combinations the hyphen is\\nomitted.\\nEx. soixanle-dix-huit, seventy-eight cent vingt, hundred and\\ntwenty.\\nOnze is treated as if its initial letter was a consonant.\\nEx. le onze Aout, the eleventh of August.\\nExercise.\\nI have given one hundred dollars for the best hook in the library\\niry books cost three dollars each. He paid to-day three hundred\\nfrancs to the friends of his brother, and five hundred and ninety-\\nthree to his landlord. Have you been in the two stores I was in\\nthe city of Paris in eighteen hundred and twenty-three, when it had\\nmore than six hundred thousand inhabitants. Eighty men fell in the\\nbattle, and two hundred and fifty were in the hospital. He left two\\nmillions of dollars, and each child had eight hundred thousand dollars\\nfor his share. I counted seventeen hundred volumes in the president s\\nlibrary, but the library of his son is larger. He had a thousand ex-\\ncuses. I have spoken of the adventure a hundred times, and he has\\nrelated a better story a thousand times. The greatest merchant of\\nthe city has not seventy clerks in his store, and you think that he\\nhas a hundred and twenty. You counted seventy- seven, but you did\\nnot count the twenty horses in the stable. In the month of March\\none thousand seven hundred and sixty-three he had spent more than\\nfive hundred pounds at the game of whist.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "72\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nORDINAL NUMBERS.\\n1st premier or unieme\\n25tli riiif/t-einqi/ieme\\n2d aeeond 01 deuxieme\\n30th trentieme\\n3d troiaieme\\n31st Prente-unieme\\n4th quatrieme\\n32d trente-deuxieme\\noth riruprieme\\n40th quarantumc\\nOth si.ri, i//r\\n41st q i,trante- iniiine\\n7th tepti TM\\n50th ctnguonti M\\n8th\\n60th soixantieme\\nptifiM\\n7 th 80ixa,7lti diaiiaU\\n10th\\n71st soiaante-oneieme\\n(MflM\\n72d s^ix thti-iloiizii ino\\nIStb tloiizume\\n?:M 8oixante4re%ei2m6\\n18th (n\\n80th quatre-vingti me\\n14th I i it- iznme\\n81st quatrt vingt-uniime\\n16th 7\\n90th v tli. i. me\\n!M~t yutrtj i\\nlTtli\\n100th\\n18th\\nIOIbJ r, /,t\\n19th d\\n200th U3 /iti. mo\\n80th\\n800th trois-centi tM\\n1000th mOUitru\\nIm*\\nJIM mil, \u00e2\u0080\u009e.r mi li. me\\nM WW\\n10000th\\n1800000th\\nThe difference between prewiw and umVmi is this, that tlio\\nformer i- need only f.. r the first of a Beriea, the latter in com-\\npoand nuiuhcrfi.\\nMM, the first volutin- A* rin it uu u inr vo-\\ntwridy-first volutin\\nThe difference between .vwo7, (prononnoed v and rirnxie-\\nv r, is thai both \u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2an I 1 used promiscuously for the second of a\\nscrirs. bnt deuxieme alone can form compound Dnmbera.\\nEx. la meande or 2a deuxiimefoia, the second time trente-\\nfepon, the thirty-second le\\nOrdinal Numbers are all declined, bntjwvnMr and afeoml", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 73\\nalone add mute e in the feminine, as the others end already in\\nmute e all take s in the plural.\\nEx. la premiere annee, the first year; la cinquiime fois, the\\nfifth time; les centiemes parties, the hundredth parts.\\nThe Ordinal Numbers are placed before their noun, except\\nwhen chapters, articles, pages of a book and the like are\\nquoted, in which case they may be placed after the noun, as in\\nEnglish.\\nEx. le dixieme volume, the tenth volume chapitre septieme,\\nchapter the seventh article premier, article the first.\\nExercise.\\nMy pretty sister is the first in my affections, and you are the last,\\nfor you are the least dear. I lent to the doctor the twenty-third vol-\\nume of the edition of Voltaire s work. The third chapter is better\\nthan the second, but the best of all is the twenty-first. You will find\\nthe sentiments of the author in the first volume of the work, chapter\\nseventh, page hundred and seventh. He arranged the men in three\\nranks, and he gave lances to the first, pistols to the second and mus-\\nkets to the third. The thirteenth and the nineteenth are sound the\\ntwelfth and the twenty-first are spoilt. He placed the governor in\\nthe first seat on the platform, the second was given to the secretary.\\nThe eighth company and the first were the best of the regiment, but\\nthe officer who commanded the second, was the bravest man of the\\narmy. (The) first in war, (the) first in peace, (the) first in the hearts\\nof his countrymen.\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nPRONOUNS.\\nPronouns are words which take the place of nouns, in order\\nto avoid repetition. Instead of saying John and John 1 s friend,\\nwe therefore say, John and his friend and instead of Peter\\ncame and Peter said, simply Peter came and he said.\\n4", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "7i ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nThey are divided into the following classes:\\n1. Personal Pronouns, like I; tu, thou; i7, he.\\n2. Possessive Pronouns, like mon, my (on, thy son, his.\\n3. Demonstrative Pronouns, like ce, this; celui-ci, this one.\\n4. Relative Pronouns, like qui, who Icquel, who.\\n5. Interrogative Pronouns, like qui, who I leguel, which\\n6 Indefinite Pronouns, like on; quiconque, whoever; tout,\\nall.\\nPERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nPersonal Pronouns, like all classes of pronouns in French,\\nare divided into two classes\\nConjunctive, such as are invariably used in immediate connec-\\ntion with the verb, and\\nAbsolute, Buch as arc never need with the verb, hut only\\nstanding by themselves or with prepositions.\\nConjunctive Personal Pronouns stand in various relatione to\\nthe veil.. Tiny may be its tubjeet, in which case they arc said\\nto be in the nominative.\\nEx. parte, I speak; ntnu allons, we go; on dit, they\\nsay.\\n\u00c2\u00bbr they may be its direct object, in which case they arc said\\nto be in the accusative.\\nKx. Vhomnu me wait, the man sees me; It \u00c2\u00bbt m lc le hail, the\\nworld bates him.\\nr they may be its indirect 1,j,ct, in which case they are\\npaid to be iii tli- dative or genitive.\\nKv. Pom* lui parte, the friend speaks to him; lr vice lew\\nunit, vice injur, s th. in; docteur me parte, the doctor speaks\\nto me.\\npert n parte, the father speaks of it lafilleen itait mm,\\nthe daughter was one of tie tin.\\nFor these various relations the French language has the fol-\\nlowing forma", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS.\\n75\\no s\\nII\\n.11\\nII\\nI sill\\nO O O\\ns$\\nJ3\\nCO n", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "Y6 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nIn order to ascertain readily the nature of the relation of the pro-\\nnoun to the verb, it is well to remember the manner in which the\\nsubject aud object in a sentence are determined.\\n1. In order to ascertain the subject, we ask by the aid of the verb:\\nWho or what does The answer gives the subject, which is always\\nin the nominative.\\nEx. PUrretst vain. Who has come? Ans. Peter. P.frr is the\\nBubject\\njut ki. Who was here? Ans. She. She to the subject.\\nLa guerre a eommeneS. What has begun 1 Ans. War. War is\\nthe subject.\\n2. In order to ascertain the MrecL ctyect, we ask in the same man-\\nnei Whom as what does the subject The answer gives the direct\\nobject, which is always the accusative.\\nEx. J ii\u00e2\u0080\u009e\u00e2\u0080\u009e- b frere. Whom do I love? Ans. The brother.\\nBrother is the direct object\\nWhom does she love 1 Ans. Mr. Me to the direct\\nobject.\\nVovelevoyee, Whaftd Ans. It. R to the direct object\\nWhom I- they deceive? Ans. rhnns.-lv.-s.\\n.j. et\\nI [a order to ascertain 1 we aek In the earn\u00c2\u00a9 maoa-\\nn.-r: To whom on I i ibjecl The answer gives the\\nwhich is always in the dative.\\nTo whom do I spaa] the Mend\\n;,,-t.\\nTo whom does it belong 1 ana. To bar. To\\nI Po whom does he give 1 Ans. To them. To them\\nft, what do they add 1 ans. To It To it to the in-\\ndlred\\nAll three may oeeni in the same sentence.\\nWho Ans. The\\nBV \u00c2\u00bbhaiid subject In the nominative. What d\\nThe preaenl the aired object in the ac\\nro the wife. to the\\nIndirect object in the da1\\nWho present*? ana th.-snb.\\nB the nominative. Wht does she Ut e WDt 1 Ans. Them. Let", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 77\\nis the direct object in the accusative. To whom does she present\\nthem Ans. To them* Leur is the indirect object in the dative.\\nThis rule is all the more important as the difference between the\\ndirect and the indirect object, between the accusative and the dative,\\nis not always perceptible in English. In the sentence He gives the\\nbook, the book is the direct object, in the accusative. In the sentence\\nHe gives the hook its due, the book, without any change of form, is the\\nindirect object in the dative. Thus, when we say, I gave it my atten-\\ntion, we ask\\nWho gave? Ans. I. I is t lie subject, nominative.\\nWhat gave I Ans. My attention. Attention is the direct object,\\naccusative.\\nTo what gave I Ans. To it. It, therefore, is the indirect object,\\ndative.\\nConsequently, if we have to translate\\nI gave it to the friend it is the accusative and we will say Je le\\ndonnai a I ami.\\nBut in I gave it my attention it is the dative, and must be trans-\\nlated Je ltd donnai mon attention, or J y donnai mon attention.\\nIf we have to translate\\nYou gave him back to his friends him is the direct object, in the\\naccusative, and we say Vous le rendites a sesamis; but in You gave\\nhim your friendship him is the indirect object in the dative, and we\\nsay Vous lui donndtes votre amitie.\\nIt will be seen from this, that the omission of the preposition to,\\nbefore nouns and pronouns in English, must be carefully observed in\\ntranslating into French.\\nJe, I, is not written with a capital initial as in English, except\\nwhen it commences a sentence.\\nJe, I me, me or to me te, thee or to thee le, him or it\\nla, her or it se, one s self or to one s self, etc., elide their e or\\na when they are placed before a verb beginning with a vowel\\nor mute h.\\nEx. (Je aime) j aime, I love (il me embrasse) il mSembrasse,\\nhe kisses me elle fadore, she adores thee il V amine, he brings\\nhim il Vexcusent, they excuse her on s habitue, they accus-\\ntom themselves.\\nThese pronouns do not suffer elision when placed after their", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "78 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nverb even though they precede a word beginning with a vowel\\nor mute k.\\nEx. Voyez-le ici, see it here prenez-la avec vous, take it with\\nyou.\\nPLACE OF CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nThe Conjunctive Personal Pronouns have their place rigor-\\nously assigned to them in their connection with the verb.\\nAs subject, they stand, as in English, before the verb, except\\nin questions, when they are placed after it and connected with\\nit by a hyphen.\\nEx. Je veux, I will tu paries, thou Bpeakest it aime, he loves;\\nvoulez-votuf will you vient-il? does he come attone-runuf shall\\nwe go\\nAs object*, th.v stand immediately before the verb, and in\\nCompound re the auxiliary verb (not before the\\nparticiple).\\nK\\\\. me soft, he sees me; to tui die, thou sayesl to htm U\\ntot parte, he speaks to her; now let atmon*, we love them; mnm\\nIn eoi I know her; its they saw us; 7\\nbe has seen me; lui i ln, she has pleased him.\\nExcept in the affirmative imperative, when they are placed\\nafter the verb, and connected with it by a hyphen.\\n1a. Voyet-te, see him j irl s-fat, Bpeak to her; ditee-moi, tell\\nme go to it preiws m, take of it\\nWhen the imperative is negative, the pronoun is placed again\\nbefore the rerb.\\nK\\\\. Ni me parlt pat, don l speak to me; n en prvnes /xu, don*t\\ntake of it; toi risi rim, tell him nothing.\\nthe Second Conjugation.)\\nI minli if nml give it to your friend; he will Speak of it to ydiu\\nv my l\u00c2\u00abK\u00c2\u00bbki i her, and Bhe gave her gloves to me. Slio\\nyou, iodshe will shot* you her sincerity, If yon love her as", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "PKONOUNS. 79\\nwell. He has spoken to her, but she has not treated him with the\\nsame courtesy. Take two of them I gave one of them to your friend.\\nWhy did you place her in that school Because I love her dearly.\\nThey paid them two hundred dollars, and they have spent half of\\nthem. They deceive themselves if they think of it seriously. My son\\nis in the country I sent him to the farm, because he was sick. I sent\\nhim his books. We met them in the road they saluted us and passed\\nus. Do not thank me, I do not deserve it. You will oblige me, if you\\nlend me a thousand dollars. I will give you so much, but I cannot\\ngive them as much. Speak to them and give them my compliments.\\nHave you met them recently, or have you not carried them with you\\nto the country I have given him my watch, and he has given it to\\nhis sister.\\n(It must be remembered that the French has no neuter gender, and\\nthat, therefore, the English it, has to be translated by le or la, accord-\\ning to the gender of the noun which it represents).\\nABSOLUTE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nAbsolute Personal Pronouns stand only by themselves,\\nentirely unconnected with any verb, or they are joined to prep-\\nositions. They have, therefore, to be translated according to\\nthe use made of them in French.\\n1st person singular Moi, I, or me.\\nEx. Moi, je le veux, I, will it.\\n11 m aime, moi, He loves me, me.\\nVenez avec moi, Come with me.\\n2d person singular Toi, thou, or thee.\\nEx. Toi, tu te trompes, Thou, art deceived.\\n11 t aime, toi, He loves tliee.\\nC est a toi, It belongs to thee.\\n3d person singular Lui, he, or him.\\nEx. Lui B est ici, He He is here.\\nQui est Id? Elle, Who is there She.\\nVous irez sans elle, You will go without her.\\n1st person plural Nous, we, or us.\\nEx. Nous I avons, nous, We have it, we.\\nPour nous il a souffert, For us he lias suffered.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "80 OX THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\n2d person plural Vous, you.\\nEx. Vous y etes vous t You arc there, you.\\n11 est centre vous, He is against you.\\nj Eur, th( y or them (ui.)\\nP e S 1 elles, they or them (f.)\\nEx. Qui voycz-viiust Eur? Whom do you see? Them?\\nIt est parmi UX, He is among them.\\nJJne entn i One among them.\\nReflexive Pronoun Soi, one s self.\\nEx. On rue trap d soi, One thinks too much of one s self.\\nE.VKl.\\n(Learn the Verba of the Third Conjugation.)\\nWho was in the honael Be and she. Weretheynot also In the\\nWho ur.- theyl I i* nk of the friends f the family. For\\nme, I n. receive nay guests, but you, who are young und\\nhealthy, yon can do it f r li-r. 1 will buy these books for them, if\\noanpay me. When 1 k isaid: Whoisth\\nIt is 1. They did nol bear me, and at last he came, 11.\\nDo yon speak of the owner 1 Fee, it was he and oot Bhe, who opened\\ntin- door for me. With whom s with him and with\\nher, Without them I cannol live. Bpeak to them, they art- friends,\\nbut be, he is a Berce enemy. These ladies bad among them s great\\nbeanty, who spoke to all oar friends, bm ss to us, she did nol notice\\nus. Oame with me and 1 will go with thee to the end of the world.\\nPOSSI\\n.n-, wl icfa qualify nouna by mean of refer*\\nence to the possessor, are, like all pronouns, divided into Con-\\njunctive and Absolute,\\nthose which are inva\\nin immediate connection with s conn, which they\\n,o. They correspond to those in English, which an\\na*ed .-ui} like my, thy t our, and pour. I\\nbave I g Jonas:", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS.\\nsingular.\\nPLURAL.\\nMasc.\\nFern.\\n(For\\nboth Genders.)\\n1. mon, my.\\nma.\\nmes.\\n2. ton, thy.\\nta.\\nto.\\n3. son, Ms, her, its.\\nsa.\\nsea.\\n1. notre, our.\\nnotre.\\nnos.\\n2. wtre, your.\\nvoire.\\nvos.\\n3. leur, their.\\nleur.\\nleurs.\\n81\\nThese Pronouns, which, in English agree with the noun\\nwhich they represent, agree in French in gender and number\\nwith the noun which they qualify.\\nThus we say in English\\nThe man and his daughter his agreeing with man, in English.\\nVhomme et sa ftlle sa agreeing with fille, in French.\\nThe mother and her son her agreeing with mother, in English.\\nLa mere et son fils son agreeing with fils, in French.\\nThe three feminine forms ma, ta and sa, when they come to\\nstand before a noun beginning with a vowel or mute h, are ex-\\nchanged for the masculine forms mon, ton and son, to avoid the\\nhiatus.\\nEx. (ma amide), mon amitie, my friendship.\\n(ta histoire), ton histoire, thy history.\\n(sa haleine), son haleine, his breath.\\nThese Possessive Pronouns are declined, like all other words\\nin French, by means of the prepositions de (of), for the genitive,\\nand a (to) for the dative. This gives the following forms\\nSINGULAR.\\nNom. mon Uvre, my book.\\nGen. de mon Uvre, of my book.\\nDat. d mon Uvre, to my book.\\nAce. mon Uvre, my book.\\nNom. mafemme, my wife.\\nGen. de mafemme, of my wife.\\nDat. a ma femme, to my wife.\\nAce mafemme, my wife.\\nPLURAL.\\nmes livres, my books.\\nde mes litres, of my books.\\nd mes livres, to my books.\\nmes livres, my books.\\nses enfants, his children.\\nde ses enfants, of his children.\\na ses enfants, to his children.\\nses enfants, his children.\\n9*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "82 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nTSfotre and voire before nouns beginning with a consonant are pro\\nnounced as if they were written ad and wt only.\\nEx. notre mauon, out house wtfrsjpere, your lather.\\nThe Possessive Pronouns and their prepositions must be repeated\\nbefore every noun which they qualify.\\nEx. To my father and mother, d mon pire et a ma mere; of youi\\nbrothers and sisters, de DOSjrSreB t d voss xurs.\\nEzSRCISE.\\n(Learn the Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation.)\\nHifl friend and my frie d were cousins. Your brother will speak\\nto my uncle, when he sees him in the city. Tell your sister the\\nsecret, but do not tell it to your brother, for men are not B8 discreet as\\nwomen. My wit will jive it toh ir brothers and sifters, and i orhaps\\nth.v will i..- satisfied with He had forgotten his hat, ease\\nand ranis he is v.ry absent minded. Give me my letters anil I will\\ngive 70a your papers. Are these your children 1 Where is hie His-\\ntory of the Republic! This is my history. Your cousin is a beautiful\\nla.ly, but the i- leSB Charming than her -ister. My aunt and her two\\npons are with us your aunt i- still absent in Europe They will be\\nhere in the Bummar with their children and their tutor. His hatred\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ma the cause of his terrible rengeance; he will expiate his crimes\\non the mflbld Oar actions do not always have their effects in this\\nworld.\\nare those which are used with-\\nout a 11. -uii, a- substitute* for :i n.-un, like our English mine and\\nthine, by tin side of my and thy.\\nThey ate always accompanied by the article, and present the\\nng forms\\n1 1 \\\\H.\\nv\\\\ ikai,.\\n1 m.\\nM:ive\\nFern.\\n1.\\nmine.\\nl t mit\\nhs\\nI.s 111 runs.\\nB.\\nthine.\\nii ttt\\nl.s\\nIi ti num.\\nhis.\\nhi r-.\\nits.\\nlet\\nMM\\n1.\\nfa ntort\\nhx 1 n t re*.\\nyours.\\nhs rt tn*.\\n1).\\ntheir*.\\nIn bur.\\ntart,\\niri.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. bj\\nIt must be noticed that the conjunctive forms notre and voire\\nhave no accent, and are pronounced with a short o, whilst the\\nabsolute forms lendtre and levotrehave a circumflex accent, and\\nare pronounced with a long o.\\nThese pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun\\nwhich they represent, thus\\nMon pire et le vdtre, my father and yours.\\nVoire mere et la mienne, your mother and mine.\\nTes enfauts et les siens, thy children and his.\\nSes filles et les leurs, her daughters and theirs.\\nExercise.\\nI see my horses, where are yours? His sons and his daughters are\\nolder than mine, hut they are younger than yours. I like his pictures\\nand yours, but I prefer ours. My children and theirs play every day\\nin the same garden. Where is your hat this is mine. He gave me\\na ring, and said Is it yours or mine 1 Show him these young\\nhorses, they are mine. My farm is small but productive after my\\ndeath it will be his, and he will make it still more fertile. Have you\\nfound your friends No, but I have seen yours. My country and\\nhis have had a long war his is exhausted, mine is es great as it was\\nbefore. Bring me his exercises and hers, I will correct them together.\\nOur friends are Protestants, hers are Catholics. I confided this secret\\nto my friends and to theirs.\\nDEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.\\nDemonstrative Pronouns, which qualify nouns by designating\\ntheir relation to time or place, are Conjunctive and Absolute.\\nConjunctive Demonstrative Pronouns are those which are in-\\nvariably used in immediate connection with a noun or the verb\\netre, to be. They have the following forms\\nCe, this or that, before masculine nouns beginning with a\\nconsonant or aspirated h, and such forms of the verb itre as\\nbegin with consonants.\\nEx. ce livre, this book ce heros, that hero ce fut lui, this\\nwas he cc sera demain, that will be to-morrow.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "Si ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCet, before nouns beginning with a vowel or mute h.\\nEx. cet ami, ihis friend cet komme, that man.\\nC\\\\ before such forms of the verb etre as begin with a\\nvowel.\\nEx. c\\\\ st moi, this is I c etait hier, that was yesterday.\\nCette, before all feminine nouns.\\nEx. cette femme, this woman cette affaire, that affair; cette\\nkabittlde, that habit.\\nthese or those, before all plural nouns.\\nEx. ces rots, these kings; cet dames, these ladies; ccs amis,\\nthese friend these souls; ccs habits, these coats;\\ntea harengt, those herrii\\nThese Demonstrative forms agree in gender and number with\\nthe Donn which they qualify, and most be repeated before\\neven noun to which they are applied.\\nEx. This man and woman, cet homme et cette femme these\\nand papers, cet Uvret it cet papiers.\\nExKRCISE.\\nThis young man is my ooosin, and that young lady is my Mend.\\nI have seen thai great man and those excellent paintings of his hand.\\nThey are better than those works f ait in the Museum. Then\\ngrapes come from tlii- garden and from our farm. Grant ilmt t a\\\\..r\\nt this 111:111 are better than those pencils. This woman\\nil with t Ij children she suffers poverty. This\\nintrepid sailor ventured on thai adventure with these two men. That\\natl. i r was painful t.. those nun in thai country. Give these Bowers\\nt that .ami tell her that if that man ask- her, I will\\ncome t. her aid. I would live in that house with your friends, if I\\nhad that garden.\\nAieoluU Demonstrative Pronouns are those which are 1\\nwith a n. .mi ot a verb, but always stand by tin msclves as\\nsubstitutes for a noun,\\nThey arc form mbination of the Conjunctiva Pip-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "PKONouisrs. 85\\nnoun ce, with the Absolute Personal Pronoun, and produce the\\nfollowing forms\\nMasc. ce and lui make celui, this or that one.\\nFem. ce elle celle,\\nMasc. ce eux ceux, these or those.\\nFem. ce ettes cedes,\\nBesides which, there are the two compounds\\nCe and id make ceci, this (for things.)\\nCe Id cela, that\\nThe first four, celui, celle, ceux and celles, are always made to\\nagree in gender and number with the noun which they represent.\\nEx. This general and that of the enemy, ce general et celui\\nde Vennemi my wife and that of my friend, ma femme et celle\\nde man ami these children and those of my uncle, ces enfants\\net ceux de mon oncle our ladies and those of the neighbor,\\nnos dames et celles du voisin.\\nExercise.\\nMy children and those of my sister are the prettiest in the city.\\nThese soldiers with their chief were as proud as those of the younger\\ngeneral. These rivers are deep, those are shallow, but these have a\\nshort course and those are the longest in the world. Give me these\\ndrawings and send those to the bookseller I will keep this and give\\nthat to your friend. Examine these flowers which will you have,\\nthis or that I prefer these volumes, which are complete those,\\nwdiich are disfigured, are for him. Of those ladies, I like those who\\nare modest these, which you see here, are too talkative. This house\\nIs handsome that, at the corner, is larger but less comfortable. I\\nspoke to him of these amusements he said that he loved those\\nwhich were more quiet. Where is that noise Is it this cock which\\nmakes it, or those hens in the yard When I was here before, I saw\\nthese, but those were not in the gallery.\\nRELATIVE PRONOUNS.\\nRelative Pronouns are those which relate to a preceding\\nnoun, which is called Antecedent.\\nThere are two Relative Pronouns in French, which have", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "86 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nprecisely the same meaning, and differ only in the use which\\nis made of them. They correspond both to our English who,\\nwhat, that, which, etc.\\nThe first of these is qui, which has the following forms\\nNum. Qui, who, that or which.\\nEx. Vhomme qui est ici, the man who is here le livre qui i\\nparu, the book which has appeared la maison qui est au com,\\nthe house that is at the corner.\\nGen. Doni (for pereonsor things), fwhoni| of\\nqui for persons onlv J\\nEx. uoldat doni je por/c, the soldier of whom I speak;\\na J,,,,/!/ eausait, that of which he was speaking; rami dsquijs\\nIt fens, the friend from whom I have it; eelui dequi UJU men-\\nof whom he made mention.\\n1 at A to whom.\\ni; v the neighbor to whom I write;\\nshe to whom it belongs.\\nwhom, Which or what.\\nv f the beggar whom I saw; la chose\\noubliai, the thing whion I foi Irsa qu U krivait,\\nthe letters that be s\\ni 1 \u00c2\u00abJ\u00c2\u00abT|- l.| wjl (lsitinns\\nwhat, wlnrli (for things\\nA those (br whom 1 have done it,\\nv wife to whom I presented\\nhim; a h quo* i/sert, that tor which it is good BMcgwoitl\\nten all With which (wh.i. with) he went away.\\nThe pronoun qui with its various forms serves for both gen-\\nii, r~ and for both numbers alike\\nUhc is bat\\nthe woman, j\\nt IJlZ f^eboj, l whomyomiNk\\nque tout o y z.\\nIts fiU I K rlN", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 87\\nThe second Demonstrative Pronoun is lequel, which is de\\nclined in both of its parts, in le and quel, and thus produces the\\nfollowing forms\\nMasc.\\nFem.\\nMas.\\nFem.\\nNom.\\nlequel,\\nlaquette.\\nlesquels,\\nlesqueUe.\\nGen.\\nduquel,\\nde laquelle.\\ndesquels,\\ndesqueUes.\\nDat.\\nauquel,\\na laquelle.\\nauxquels,\\nauxquelles.\\nAce.\\nlequel,\\nlaquelle.\\nlesquels,\\nlesqueUe.\\nIt has the same meanings as the first, but as it shows so\\nmuch more clearly gender and number by its various forms,\\nit is frequently substituted for qui to avoid ambiguity, and it\\nmust always be used when the relative pronoun is dependent\\non a preposition. It must agree in gender and number with\\nthe noun to which it relates.\\nEx. My friend, without ivhom I cannot live, mon ami, sans\\nlequel je ne saurais vivre the books for which you paid, les\\nlivres pour lequels vous payates the difficulties through which\\nwe have passed, les difficultes par lesquelles nous avons passe.\\nExercise.\\nThe person who spoke was not the lady whom you admired. This\\nwoman is the same of whom I received a letter, when I was in that\\ncity, in which you also have been recently. The pictures for which I\\npaid this high price, are worse than those among which you found\\nyour Madonna. I like the man to whom she gave the flowers he was\\none of those for whom I feel sympathy. The friend whose advice\\nwas so good is my friend also he is a man of whom much has been\\nsaid. The daughter of the soldier, with whom you came is very\\npretty, but her cousin, for whom I feel an admiration, is prettier. The\\nthing to which you refer is a trifle, but the sums which you owe to\\nthat man are a serious affair. That of which I spoke and that of which\\nI wrote are two different things the principal subject is that mar-\\nriage, in which you are so much interested.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "Nom.\\nqui,\\nGen.\\nI de qui,\\nDat.\\nI a qui,\\nI a ij toi,\\nt\\nAce.\\n88 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nINTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.\\nInterrogative Pronouns are those which enable us to ask\\nquestions without a constant repetition of the noun. They are\\nthe same in French as the relative, with the exception of don t,\\nwhich can never be used interrogatively.\\nThe first, qui, presents the following forms:\\nwho?\\nof whom\\nof what\\nto whom\\nto what\\nwhom\\nwhat?\\nwhat (when standing alone.)\\nIt must be noticed that the prepositions connected with tho\\ninterrogative as well as with the relative pronoun are, in\\nEnglish, frequent from the pronoun and placed at\\nIn French the preposition must\\nalways retain it- pi i be pronoun.\\nk of?\\nWi\\nlUST\\nQui\\nu hat did be treat\\nbom did -1\\nThr has the same forma a- th\\nem only be used rhea it has the moaning o*\\nwhich I\\nI imea eonnoi Which\\no: the dU des saura est\\nWhich of thi\\nA third interrogative Pronoun is quel, which has the mean-\\nwhat kind of! and i- declined like lequel, but can only\\nonn.\\nEx. Quel i What kind of man is he I QutUt*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 89\\ntortes de marchandises What kind of goods? Quelle est cette\\nfemme? What kind of woman is she?\\nExercise.\\nWho has written this hook The same author for whom you pro-\\nfessed a great admiration. See tlie four pens which one do you\\nprefer What did he speak of, when he made that great speech,\\nwith which he ended his career Whom do you take me for What\\ndo you want of me I will tell you who he is and for whom he ap-\\npears here. Which of the four seasons do you like hest I do not\\nknow for which I shall decide, I like them all. With whom did she\\ngo to Europe, and with what will she occupy her time at Eome\\nWhat did he devote himself to during that year, and what has he\\nwritten I know whom you speak of. What did he write about in\\nhis last letter Which of these ladies is your sister, and to which\\nmust I speak Who is this soldier, and what does he say 1 What\\nkind of watch have you bought I have heard what kind of statues\\nhe makes, but I have forgotten it.\\nINDEFINITE PRONOUNS.\\nIndefinite Pronouns are those which refer, not to any one\\nperson or object definitely, but to some one vaguely or gener-\\nally. They are generally the same as in English, e. g., some,\\nquelque none, per sonne all, tout but there is one of them\\nof very great importance, which alone will be mentioned here.\\nThis is on, a Personal Indefinite Pronoun, inasmuch as it is a\\nPronoun, standing instead of a noun Personal, because it can\\nonly represent persons, and Indefinite, because it never desig-\\nnates persons individually, but only generally. It has no equiv-\\nalent in English, and is, therefore, translated in various ways.\\nIt can only be used as subject of a sentence, in the nominative\\ncase, with the third person singular of the verb, and referring to\\nmen, i. e., neither to agencies above nor below him. We add\\nthe principal ways by which it is rendered into English.\\nOn pense trop a soi-meme. People think too much of them-\\nselves.\\nOupeut-on etre mieux qu au sein Where can one he happier than in\\nde safamille the bosom of one s family?", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "90 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nOn dit que la guerre est finie. It is acrid the war is over.\\nOn n est peis toujour* buns amis. Men are not always good friends.\\nOn travaiUe jour it nuit. They work night and day.\\nOn se trampe, madame. You are mistaken, madame.\\nOn Pa repute partout. It has been repeated everywhere.\\nOn acquiert V experience avec le We acquire experience with time.\\ntemps.\\nExercise.\\nThey say that he has left his family a large fortune. What did\\npeople do when the news was brought People said that it was very-\\nsad, but they added, that the punishment was well deserved. Can\\none lodge in this bote] One is not always young and pretty. One\\nis not always happy, when one is very rich, for (the) happiness is in\\nthe heart. It i repeated to-day thai the emperor has declared war,\\nand it is believed in all circlea Was it said which of these persons\\nbnahend of the lady who perished in the shipwreck It was\\nnot known, when I left the ship, but it will be known when the Jour-\\nnals of tin- day are brought\\nCHAPTER V.\\nVerbs are that part f speech which servos to express action,\\nand therefore is used to saj something of a person -r an object\\nThe) have a great rarietj of forma in order to express the\\nwlm i the sgent of the Verb: the first, second or\\nthird,\\nor more singular r plural,\\nof the action present, past or future,\\ne action Indicative (po.sitr.\\njuncture (contingent), Imperative and Conditional,\\nXatnr, of the Verb itself: Active, I I ronomi-\\nnal and Impersonal,\\nall of which varieties will be explained in their proper place.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "VEKBS.\\n91\\nAUXILIARY VERBS.\\nAuxiliary Verbs sro called those which, besides being used\\nby themselves, are also employed to form the so-called Cora-\\npound Tenses of other verbs. There are two in French\\nAvoir, to have, which serves to form the compound tenses of\\nActive and some Neuter Verbs, and\\nEtre, to be, which serves to form the compound tenses of\\nNeuter and Pronominal Verbs, and the passive of Active Verbs.\\nAVOIR.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 TO HAVE.\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPARTICIPLE.\\nAvoir, to have.\\nayant, having.\\navoir eu, to have had. ayant eu, having had.\\neu, had.\\nSimple Tenses.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nTai\\nI have, I do have, I am having\\ntu as\\nthou hast\\nil or elle a\\nhe or she has\\nnous avons\\nwe have\\nvous avez\\nyou have\\nUs or eUes ont\\nthey have\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntTavais\\nI had, I did have, I was having\\ntu amis\\nthou hadst\\nil or elle amit\\nhe ox she had\\nnous avions\\nwe had\\nvous aviez\\nyou had\\nUs or dies a/oaient\\nthey had\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJ eus\\nI had, I did have, I was having\\ntu eus\\nthou hadst\\nU or elle eut\\nhe or she had\\nnous eumes\\nwe had\\nvous elites\\nyou had\\nUs or dies eurent\\nthey had", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "92\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\ntTaurai\\nPi auras\\nU or eUe aura\\nnous aurons\\nrous ann-\\nils or elics auront\\nTaurais\\nt i auarari\\nn trait\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0i-n/s\\ntout aurim\\nUs or cU-s 1 1 ur aunt\\nait\\nI n/ ns\\n5\\nI\\ngu t? n\\nHJ0M\\nFUTURE.\\nI shall or will have\\nthou shalt have\\nhe or she shall have\\nwe shall have\\nyou shall have\\nthey shall have\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nI should or would have\\nthou shouldst have\\nhe or she should have\\nwe should have\\nyou should have\\ntiny should have\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nnot i\\nThat I may have\\nthou mayest havo\\nthat he Or Bhe may have\\nthat we m:iy havo\\nthat you may have\\nthat they may ha\\\\ B\\ni di i acrra,\\nThat 1 might hav-\\nthat thou mightest have\\nthat he sin- might have\\nthat we might ha\\\\ o\\nthat you might have\\nthat they might have\\na eu\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ns eu\\nCoin, ICtf.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPlfllMT IM I 1 1MTK.\\nI hav. hail\\nthou hast had\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0he hai had\\nwe have had\\nbare had\\ntiny have had", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "VEKB3.\\n03\\nJ avals eu\\ntu avals eu\\nU or elle avalt eu\\nnous avians eu\\nvous avlez eu\\nUs or dies avalent eu\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nI had had\\nthou hadst had\\nhe or she had had\\nwe had had\\nyou had had\\nthey had had\\nJ eus eu\\ntu eus eu\\n11 or elle eut eu\\nnous eumes eu\\nvous eutes eu\\nUs or elles eurent eu\\nPBETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nI had had\\nthou hadst had\\nhe or she had had\\nwe had had\\nyou had had\\nthey had had\\ntTaurai eu\\ntu auras eu\\nit or elle aura eu\\nnous aurons eu\\nvous aurez eu\\nUs or elles auront eu\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nI shall or will have had\\nthou shalt have had\\nhe or she shall have had\\nwe shall have had\\nyou shall have had\\nthey shall have had\\ntPaurals eu\\ntu aurals eu\\nII or eUe auralt eu\\nnous aurlons eu\\nvous auriez eu\\nUs or elles auralent eu\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\nI should or would have had\\nthou shouldst have had\\nhe or she should have had\\nwe should have had\\nyou should have had\\nthey should have had\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nQue j ale eu\\nque tu ales eu\\nqu U or qu elle ait eu\\nque nous ayons eu\\nque vous ayez eu\\nqu Us or qu elles alent eu\\nthat I may have had\\nthat thou mayest have had\\nthat he or she may have had\\nthat we may have had\\nthat you may have had\\nthat they may have had", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "94 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nQue fame eu that I might have had\\n(n ensues cu that thou mighteet have had\\nqu il or qn dle efit eu that he or she might have had\\ngut notU i lt88iOTU m that we might have had\\nqn, tout UMMB i that you might have had\\nqu Us or qu dLs eussent eu that they might have had\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nAte have [thou]\\nqui or gtftBfl a\u00c2\u00bb* let him or her have\\nOffOHt let as have\\nhave [you]\\nyu ito or qu dUs aient let thorn have\\nExercise.\\nI have the same book that you have had. We desired that he might\\nhare speedy end, for be has had a terrible disease. Let bin have all\\nthe money thai he derives we have had ur share. Ymi should bare\\nhad patJenoa. I hope that be may have letters from his friends to-\\nday JTOU had your- J BSterdaj. Y r OO WOUld have a large estate, and y iu\\nWill have a large fortune ptill. Thou hadst a better memory tlian I,\\nhut thou will liave to learn more. He will liave had two warnings.\\npatience with them, and let them have a desire to do\\ntheir duty. He hopes that aha may have friends, and we hope that\\nshe may haven husband, hut she has had enemies. They had had a\\nmeeting, and they will have had six in one month, she would have\\nhad n if hfl had been present\\nAvoir (Neyativtly.)\\n1 N l l N I T i v I\\nNe pas nr. ir not to have\\nno! to have had", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n05\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nN ay ant pas not having\\nCOMPOUND OP THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nB ayant pas eu not having had\\nSimple Tenses.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nI Lave not\\nthou hast no\\nhe has not\\nwe have not\\nyou have not\\nthey have not\\nIMPERFECT.\\nI had not\\nthou hadst not\\nhe had not\\nwe had not\\nyou had not\\nthey had not\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI had not\\nthou hadst not\\nhe had not\\nwe had not\\nyou had not\\nthey had not\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nI shall or will not have\\nthou shalt not have\\nhe shall not have\\nwe shall not have\\nyou shall not have\\nthey shall not have\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nI should or would not have\\nthou shouldst not have\\nJe n ai pas\\ntu n as pas\\nil n a pas\\nnous n avons pas\\nvotes n avez pus\\nUs n ont pas\\nJe n avals pax\\ntu n avois pas\\nil n avait pas\\nnous n avions pas\\nvous n aviez pa s\\nUs n amient pas\\nJe n eus pas\\ntu n eus pas\\nil n eut pas\\nnous n e umes pas\\nvous n eutes pas\\nUs n eurent pas\\nJe n aurai pas\\ntu n auras pas\\nil n aura pas\\nnous n aurom pas\\nvous n aurez pas\\nUs n auront pas\\nje n aurais pas\\ntu n aurais paa", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "JQ\\nON THE FABTS OF SPEECH.\\nU n aurait pas\\nnous n aurions pas\\nvous n auricz pas\\nUs n auraicrd pas\\nhe should not have\\nwe should not have\\nyou should not have\\nthey should not have\\nJe n ai pas eu\\ntu n as pas u\\nU n apcu u\\nawns pas eu\\nvous n avet pan u\\nUs h ont pas eu.\\nJt n aoauptu tu\\ntu\\nU n n\\nU* a a i\\nCompound Tenses.\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nI have not had\\nthou hast not had\\nhe has not had\\nwe have not had\\nyou have not had\\nthey have not had\\nrouraBFB t.\\nI had not had\\ntlmu hadst not had\\nbe had not had\\nwe had not had\\nyou had not had\\nth -y had not had\\nion.\\nJ l had M t had\\nthou hadst not had\\nhe had not had\\nwe had not had\\n\u00c2\u00abw\u00c2\u00bb\u00c2\u00bbm voti had not had\\nUs n l had not had\\nJ,- n .iunn p\\ni a ow\\nU n a ira pat\\nton* n .i in: p\\nUs n auro.U pas eu\\nMOB.\\nI \u00e2\u0096\u00a0ball or will not lmvo had\\nthou shalt not have had\\nbe shall not hare had\\nwe shall not hare hud\\n\\\\.ill 11. haw had\\nt i y shall not have had\\n(ONTJITTONAT. VNTI\\nti n nuraiA pas eu\\nI should Of would not have had\\nthOD \u00e2\u0096\u00a0hOOldal QOt have hud", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "VETtBS.\\n97\\nil n awrait pas eu\\nnous n aurions pas eu\\nvous n auriez pas eu\\nUs n auraient pas eu\\nQue je n aie pas\\nque tu n aies pas\\nqu il n ait pas\\nque nous n ayons pas\\nque vous n ayez pas\\nqu ils n aient pas\\nhe should not have had\\nwe should not have had\\nyou should not have had\\nthey should not have had\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nthat I may not have\\nthat thou mayest not have\\nthat he may not have\\nthat we may not have\\nthat you may not have\\nthat they may not have\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nQueje n aie pas eu\\nque tu n aies pas eu\\nqu il n ait pas eu\\nque nous n ayons pas eu\\nque vous n ayezpas eu\\nqu ils n aient pas eu\\nQueje neusse pas\\nque tu n eusses pas\\nqu il n eut pas\\nque nous n eussions pas\\nque vous n eussiezpas\\nqu ils n eussent pas\\nthat I may not have had\\nthat thou mayest not have had\\nthat he may not have had\\nthat we may not have had\\nthat you may not have had\\nthat they may not have had\\nIMPERFECT.\\nthat I might not have\\nthat thou mightest not have\\nthat he might not have\\nthat we might not have\\nthat you might not have\\nthat they might not have\\nQueje n eusse pas eu\\nque tu n eusses pas eu\\nqu il n eut pas eu\\nque notes n eussions pas eu\\nque vous n eussiez pas eu\\nqu ils n eussent pas eu\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might not have had\\n^that thou mightest not have had\\nthat he might not have had\\nthat we might not have had\\nthat you might not have had\\nthat they might not have had\\nN aie pas\\nqu il n ait pas\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nhave not [thou]\\nlet him not have\\n5", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "93\\nOX TIIE TARTS OF SFEECH.\\nn ayoHs p as\\nn ayee pat\\nqri ils n akid pan\\nlet us not have\\nhave not [you]\\nlet them not have\\nAvoir\\nTo Have (Tntcrropatin\\nINDI C A T 1 V E\\nran\\nAi-je\\na-til\\nLast tllOU\\nLas lie\\nhave we\\nyon\\nr.HT B\\nhad I\\nthou\\nhad he\\nhud wo\\nMb\\nhad they\\ntllOU\\ni ho\\nira\\nt-U*\\nhad v.ni\\nhad they\\ni i i\\nA u r i\\nauront\\nout\\nawout-ils\\nnhall will I have\\nBhalt thou have\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0hall 1m- Ihivc-\\nhlinll we have\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0hall thi have", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n9?\\naurais-tu\\naurait-il\\naurions-nous\\nauriez-vous\\nauraient-ils\\nAi-je eu\\nas-tu eu\\na-t-il eu\\navons-nous eu\\navez-vous eu\\nont-ils eu\\nAvais-je eu\\navais-tu eu\\navait-il eu\\navions-nous eu\\naviez-vous eu\\navaient-ils eu\\nEus-je eu\\neus-tu eu\\neut-il eu\\neumes-nous eu\\neutes-vous eu\\neurent-ils eu\\nAurai-je eu\\nauras-tu eu\\naura-t-il eu\\naurons-nous eu\\naurez-vous eu\\nauront-ils eu\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT.\\nshould or would I have\\nshouldst thou have\\nshould he Have\\nshould we have\\nshould you ha e\\nshould they have\\nCompound Tenses.\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nhave I had\\nhast thou had\\nhas he had\\nhave Ave had\\nhave you had\\nhave they had\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nhad I had\\nhadst thou had\\nhad he had\\nhad we had\\nhad you had\\nhad they had\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad I had\\nhadst thou had\\nhad he had\\nhad we had\\nhad you had\\nhad they had\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nshall or will I have had\\nshalt thou have Lad\\nshall he have had\\nshall we have had\\nshall you have had\\nshall they have had\\ntore.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "100\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\nshould or would, could, or might I\\niWW W have had\\naurafct Idst thou have had\\nfl\u00c2\u00abr-/i should he have had\\n-\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0096\u00a0(-no!/* cw should we have had\\nshould you have had\\nshould they have had\\nAvoir\\nTo Have {Negatively and Interrogatively?)\\nIN DICATIVB.\\npas\\npa*\\nI\\nn aura*4u pas\\nI KI -T.NT.\\nhave I not\\nbast thou not\\nhas b\\nliavi- W8 not\\nmrEK\\nh.-i Ul tlmu nut\\nhad I\\nhad v\\nl lint\\nhad they not\\nhad I n t\\nlia.lst tlmii not\\nhad\\nha I\\nhad j\\nhad tl\\n9T will I no! luvo\\nhhalt thou not have", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 101\\nriaura-Hl pas shall he not have\\nriauroiis-nouspas shall we not have\\nn aurez-vous pas shall you not have\\nriauront-Us pas shall they not hav\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT.\\nN aurais-je pas should or would I not have\\nn aurais-tu pas shouldst thou not ha% e\\nn aurait-il pas should he not have\\nri aurions-nous pas should we not have\\nriauriez-vous pas should you not have\\nriauraient-ils pas should they not have\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nN ai-je pas eu have I not had\\nn as-tu pas eu hast thou not had\\nn a-t-il pas eu has he not had\\nriavons-nous pas eu have we not had\\nn avez-vous pas eu have you not had\\nriont-ils pas eu have they not had\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nN avais-je pas eu had I not had\\nriavais-tu pas eu hadst thou not had\\nriavait-il pas eu had he not had\\nriadons-nous pas eu had we not had\\nn aviez-vous pas eu had you not had\\nri amient-ils pas eu had they not had\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nUTeus-je %)as eu had I not had\\nrieus-tu pas eu hadst thou not had\\nrieut-il pas eu had he not had\\nri etlmes-nous pas eu had we not had\\nrieutes-vous pas eu had you not had\\nrieurent-ils pas eu had they not had\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nIPaurai-je pas eu shall or will I not have had\\nriauras-tu pas eu shalt thou not have had", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "102\\nON THE TARTS OF SPEECH.\\nn aura-til prist en\\nn cnwee-wuB pas eu\\nitauroitt-ih pas eu\\nshall he not hare had\\nshall we not have had\\nshall you not have had\\nshall they not have had\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\nITaiurai\\nn tturaia-tu pcu u\\nn aurittMwnu pas eu\\nn awraitnt I pas eu\\nBhonld or would I not have liad\\nshouldst thou not have had\\nI be aol have had\\nwe not have had\\nu aol have had\\ni iuy not have had\\nV won:\\nThere To Be\\nI X F IN1TIVE.\\n(Affirmatively.}\\nth. re i havr been\\nU y a\\nI\\nP i/ am-.i\\nPAK1\\nOOMPOCHD\\nthen\\n[NDICATIVJ\\nth. are\\nIMI I B\\nthen were\\nI\\ntil. were\\nbe", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 103\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT.\\nU y aurait there would be\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\n11 y a eu there has been or there have been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nH y avait eu there had been\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nIt y eut eu there had been\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nJR y aura eu there will have been\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\nIt y aurait eu there would have been\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nQu il y ait that there may be\\nIMPERFECT.\\nQu il y e t that there might be\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nQu il y ait eu that there may have been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nQu il y efit eu that there might have been.\\nY Avoir There To Be {Negatively)\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nNe pas y wtoir not there to be\\nPAST.\\nNe pas y avoir eu not there to have been", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "104 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\n2Py ayant pas there not being\\nCOMPOUND OP THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\n2Ty ayant pas eu there not having been\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nII n y a pas there is not or there are not\\nIMPERFECT.\\nJl n y avail pas there was not or there were not\\nFltETEUIT PKflNlTE.\\n11 n y at pas there was not or there were not\\nBTJTOBB ABSOLUTE.\\nJl n y aura there will not be\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nJl n y iiurait pas there would not be\\nI RETEHIT IM-llIM 1 I..\\nBn gapat tin -re has not been\\nri.i im\\nJl n y acail pas eu then had not btt B\\nri:i I l.i:ir IB n.!;!..|i.\\nJl j there had not lteen\\nnri 1:1. ami num.\\nthen will not huve beta\\nuumrriuflAi urxHBiaB.\\nJl ft jf ensrattpat CU there would not have been\\nSURHNCTIVK.\\nQii il n y nit pas thai there may not be\\ntun eu\\nQu U n y pat that there might not be", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n105\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\ntii il n y ait pas eu that there may not have been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nQu U n y eut pas eu that there might not have been\\nY Avoir\\nYa4-U\\nYavait-il\\nYettt-il\\nY aura-t4l\\nY auraU-il\\nYa-t-tt eu\\nY avait-U eu\\nYeut4l eu\\nY aura-Ul eu\\nThere To Be {Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE.\\nis there or are there\\nIMPERFECT.\\nwas there or were there\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nwas there or were there\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nwill there be\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nwould there be\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nhas there been or have there been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nhad there been\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad there been\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nwill there have been\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\nY aurait-il eu would there have been\\n5*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "106 ON THE PARTS Or SPEECH.\\nY Avoir There To L, ly and Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE.\\nBBHT.\\nN y a-t-il pas is there not or are there not\\nDfFER]\\nJTy atait-il pas -re not or were there not\\nITE.\\n2fy cut il \u00c2\u00bbt r wore there not\\n_Y y cm ra will there not be\\nONAL,\\nN y aurait-U pas would there not be\\nFBI i\\nire not been\\nX y cm cmH ;*w en had than not been\\n.MR.\\ni/ 1 had there n t been\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0TO tOB.\\njtaseu will there oot ham\\nwould there not have been\\nShe baa hi nta. H* wfcjhed,\\nwhen be left u*. that be i iword and pistol be arid that\\nhe bad eonrage En tea, the R vei t\\\\\\\\ Ice, I shall n-.\\ni, merl Bhonld I not bare\\nhadaemoch aahel la hare health and a long\\nl i f Bad jron kwi aba \u00c2\u00bbl net\\nparty 1 I hoped, that aha Bright have had it. when I was there, bat", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n101\\nshe had had one a week before my arrival. To have had an accident\\n]ike that Who could have had an idea of this affair? Would not\\nthev have had more friends, if they had had more discretion\\nLet them have their desire, and they might not have had it. Will\\nhe have money, when he shall have had a great success Would\\nwe not have the same master, if we had had the same training\\nShould we have good wines, and should we have water for our meals\\nI thought that we had had the greatest misfortunes, but she has had\\neven greater. Has she not much wit She has had it, but she has it\\nnot now that she is old. When we shall have had all, we shall have\\nhad little after all. Has he many friends, and has she many relations\\nin that city Thou hast had thy will, now let them have theirs. You\\nhad riches and you have power now. Which would you have, if you\\nhad the choice\\nEtke\\nEire\\nAvoir\\nTo Be\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nti\\nPAST.\\n(Affirmatively.)\\nto have been\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nEtant being\\nCOMPOUND OP THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nAyant ete having been\\nPARTICIPLE PAST.\\nEte\\nbeen\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nJe suis\\nI am\\ntu es\\nthou art\\nil est\\nhe is\\nnous sommes\\nwe are\\nvous etes\\nyou are\\nUs sont\\nthey are", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "108\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJ Ctais I was\\ntu Ctnis thou wast\\nil Stmt he was\\nnous etions we were\\nvoustti Z you wire\\niisitau/it they were\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe fus I waa\\nu fui thou wast\\nhe was\\nwe wen\\nvous you were\\nils fart nt they were\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nI shall or will 1*\\ntu ft r is thou Bhalt bo\\nhfl shall be\\nrons wo shall bo\\nyou Shall bfl\\nthey shall bo\\nCONDITIONAL\\nvous ft\\nI r would bo\\nthou \u00e2\u0096\u00a0hooldst bo\\nhe should i e\\nild Ixi\\nV !l ^li\u00c2\u00ab .11 1*1 lw\u00c2\u00bb\\nthey should bo\\nTRETEIUT IMMIIIM I I..\\n1 hn\\\\\\ntlimi I;\\nli. has boa\\n\\\\w li:i\\\\ 1...U\\nI Hi i have i\u00c2\u00bb- ii\\nilsotU Hi they ha", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "T EKBS.\\n109\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nJ amis ete\\nI had been\\ntu avais ete\\nthou hadst been\\nil acait ete\\nhe had been\\nnous avions eta\\nwe had been\\nvous aviez ete\\nyou bad been\\nUs avaient ete\\nthey had been\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nJ eus ete\\nI had been\\ntu eus ete\\nthou hadst been\\nU eut ete\\nhe had been\\nnous eumes ete\\nwe had been\\nvous eiites ete\\nyou had been\\nUs eurent ete\\nthey had been\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nJaurai ete\\nI shall or will have been\\ntu auras ete\\nthou shalt have been\\nil aura ete\\nhe shall have been\\nnous aurons Ut\\nwe shall have been\\nvous aurez ete\\nyou shall have been\\nUs auront ete\\nthey shall have been\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\ntTaurais ete\\nI should or would have been\\ntu aurais ete\\nthou shouldst have been\\nU aurait ete\\nhe should have been\\nnous aurions ete\\nwe should have been\\nvous auriez etS\\nyou should have been\\nUs auraient ete\\nthey should have been\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nBois\\nbe [thou]\\nqu il soit\\nlet him be\\nsoyons\\nlet us be\\ngoyez\\nbe [you]\\nqu ils soient\\nlet them be\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nQue je sois\\nthat I may be\\nque tu sois\\nthat thou mayeat be", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "110\\nON THE TARTS OF SPEECH.\\nqu il suit\\nque no s\\nsoyez\\nau Ua i\\nfusse\\nnisses\\nqn J f lt\\nI\\nqn,- tuai\\nthat he may be\\nthat we may ho\\nthat y. u may be\\nthat they may ho\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might be\\nthat thou mightest be\\nthat he aright be\\nthat we might be\\nthai you might be\\nthat they might be\\nPKHTBKTI iMM.iiMTK.\\nthat I may haw been\\nthat thou mayest have hern\\nthat he may have been\\nthat we may haw been\\nthat you may have been\\nthat th y may have bei a\\n1\\nI-I.i PI EU I T.\\nthat 1 might haw been\\ntlmt thon Brightest bays been\\nthat in might have been\\nthat we might haw been\\nthat ynii mi^lit haw U l n\\nthat they might have been\\nTo Bt (A\\nINTIMTIVK.\\nnot tn be\\nnot tn have been\\nnot being", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nm\\nCOMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nN ayant pas We not having been\\nINDICATIVE.\\nJe ne suis pas\\ntu n es pas\\nil n est pas\\nnous ne sommes pas\\nvous rtetes pas\\nUs ne sont pas\\nJe n etais pas\\ntu n etais pas\\nU n etait pas\\nnous n etions pas\\nUs n etaient\\nI am not\\nthou art not\\nhe is not\\nwe are not\\nyou are not\\nthey are not\\nIMPERFECT.\\nI was not\\nthou wast not\\nhe was not\\nwe were not\\nyou were not\\nthey were not\\nTRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe ne fus pas I was not\\ntu ne fus pas thou wast not\\nU ne fut pas he was not\\nnous ne fumes pas we were not\\nvous ne fates pas you were not\\nUs ne furent pas they were not\\nFUTURE.\\nJe ne serai pas\\ntu ne seras pas\\nii ne sera pas\\nnous ne serous pas\\nvous ne serez pets\\nUs ne seront pas\\nJe ne serais pas\\ntu ne serais pas\\nI shall or will not be\\nthou shalt not be\\nhe shall not be\\nwe shall not be\\nyou shall not be\\nthey shall not be\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT,\\nI should or would not be\\nthou shouldst not be", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "112 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nU ne serait pas he should not be\\nnous ne serious pas we should not be\\nnous ne sericz pas you should not be\\nUs ne seraieut pas they should not be\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nJe n ai pas ete I have not been\\ntu n as pas Hi thou hast not been\\nii n ii he has not been\\nturns n dtxmt pus iii we have not been\\ncons it n nee p you have not been\\nUs no at pas Cti they have not been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nI had not been\\ntu n thou hadat not been\\nho had not been\\nnous we had not been\\nvous it yon bad noi been\\nthey bad not born\\npreterit anterior.\\nJe PI had BOi been\\ntu n tiis pas Hi thoa hadst aol been\\nn he bad not i n\\nHi we had aol been\\nyon ha d t li --n\\nthey had not been\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2wuju aramon,\\nI shall or will not have been\\ntli. .11 shall nut hare been\\nbe thai! aol have been\\nI ,i iri nx pas Hi we -hall not bave 1 n\\nY..U shall ri t hav.\\nUs n n tneyahall aol have boea\\nI ehoold would not haw been\\nthoa ihouldsi aol have been\\nbeen", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n113\\nnous n aunons pas et\\nvous n auriez pas ete\\nU n auraient pas ete\\nwe should not have been\\nyou should not have been\\nthey should not have been\\nNe sois pas\\nqu il ne soitpas\\nne soyons pas\\nne soyez pas\\nqu ils ne soient pas\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nbe not [thou]\\nlet him not be\\nlet us not be\\nbe not [you]\\nlet them not be\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nQue je ne sois pas\\nque tu ne sois pas\\nqu il ne soit pas\\nque nous ne soyons pas\\nque vovs ne soyez pas\\nqu ils ne soient pas\\nQue je ne fusse pas\\nque tu ne fusses pas\\nqu il ne fat pas\\nque nous ne fussions pas\\nque vous nefussiez pas\\nqu ils ne fussent pas\\nthat I may not be\\nthat thou mayest not be\\nthat he may not be\\nthat we may not be\\nthat you may not be\\nthat they may not be\\nIMPERFECT.\\nthat I might not be\\nthat thou mightest not be\\nthat he might not be\\nthat we might not be\\nthat you might not be\\nthat they might not be\\nPRETERIT Of PAST.\\nQuejen aiepas lie\\nque tu n aies pas ilte\\nqu il n ait pas ete\\nque nous n ayons pas ete\\nque vous n ayez pas ete\\nqu ils n aient pas ete,\\nthat I may not have been\\nthat thou mayest not have been\\nthat he may not have been\\nthat we may not have been\\nthat you may not have been\\nthat they may not have been\\nQueje n eussepas ete\\nque tu n eusses pas ete\\nqu il n eut pas ete\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might not have been\\nthat thou mightest not have been\\nthat he might not have been", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "1H\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nque nous ri eusaiona pas etc\\nque co us n eussies pas eti\\nqu ile n eusscnt pas Ste\\nthat we might not have been\\nthat you might not have been\\nthat they might not have been\\nEtri\\nTo Be {Interrogatively.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nFBBSffirr.\\nam I\\nart thou\\nis he\\nnous\\nare we\\nyou\\nSOIlt-US\\nare they\\nIMl l\\nllii U\\nttait tt\\nlie\\nus\\nm r\\nyon\\nt Us\\nwere they\\nMTl\\nthou\\nho\\nnu\\nwe\\nynll\\nt Ms\\nm N iln-y\\nshall or will I be\\nthou l\\nshall he be\\nvre be\\nshall yoa 8", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nn,\\nCONDITIONAL\\nSerais-je\\nshould or would I bo\\nserais-tu\\nshouldst thou be\\nserait-il\\nshould he be\\nserions-nozo8\\nshould we be\\nseriez-vous\\nshould you be\\nseraient Us\\nshould they be\\nPIIETERIT INDEFINTE.\\nAv-je ete\\nhave I been\\nas-tu ete\\nhast thou been\\na-t-il ete\\nhas he been\\navons-nous ete\\nhave we been\\navez-vous ete\\nhave you been\\nont-ils ete\\nhave they been\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nAvais-je Ue\\nhad I been\\navais-tu ete\\nhadst thou been\\navait-U ete\\nhad he been\\navions-nous ete\\nhad we been\\naviez-vous ete\\nhad you been\\navaient-ils ete\\nhad they been\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nEus-je ete\\nhad I been\\neus-tu ete\\nhadst thou been\\neut-il ete\\nhad he been\\neHmes-nous ite\\nhad we been\\neutes-vous ete\\nhad you been\\neurent-ils ete\\nhad they been\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nAurai-je ete\\nshall or will I have been\\nauras-tu tie\\nshalt thou have been\\naura-t-il ete\\nshall he have been\\naurons-nous ete\\nshall we have been\\naurez-vous ete\\nsball you have been\\nauront-ils ete\\nshall they have been", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "116\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\ni ete should or would I have been\\nauraU-tn tte shouldst tliou have beeD\\naurnit-il ete should he have been\\nawrionfrnow He should we have been\\nanri\u00e2\u0082\u00acz-C H* Cte should you have been\\nauraknt-ila ete shotild they have been\\nEtre To Be (Negatively and Interrogatively^\\nINDICATIVE.\\nNe 8iti*-jc pas\\npat\\nTie sont i\\nrtc fust\\nJ\\nIll\\nl KKSKXT.\\nam I not\\nart thou not\\nis he not\\nare we not\\nan- you not\\nutv thoy not\\nDOTBV\u00c2\u00bb T.\\nwas I not\\nwaM thou not\\nwaa be n t\\nwan wa not\\nireia jrou not\\nware they not\\ni I lriNm:.\\nwas I not\\nwast thou not\\nU M he not\\nwan we not\\nwere 70a not\\nt h\u00c2\u00bb-y not\\nFUTl Ki:.\\nnhall or will 1 not l*\\nhliait I In m D\\nIn- not be", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n117\\nne serons-nous pas\\nne serez-wus pas\\nne seront-ils pas\\niT serais-je pas\\nne serais-tu pas\\nne serait-il pas\\nne serions-nous pas\\nne seriez-vous pas\\nne seraient-ils pas\\nshall we not be\\nshall you not be\\nshall they not be\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nshould or would I not he\\nshouldst thou not be\\nshould he not he\\nshould we not he\\nshould you not be\\nshould they not be\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nN airje pas ete have I not been\\nn as-tu pas ete hast thou not been\\nn a-t-ilpas ete has he not been\\nn avons-nous pas ete have we not been\\nn avez-vous pas ete have you not been\\nn ont-ils pas ete have they not been\\nITavais-je pas ete\\nn avais-tu pas ete\\nn avait-il pas ete\\nn avions-nous pas el\\nn aviez-vous pas ete\\nn avaient-ils pas ete\\nIf eus-je pas ete\\nn eus-tu pas ete\\nn eut-il pas ete\\nn eumes-nous pas ete\\nn eutes-vous pas ete\\nn eurent-ils pas ete\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nhad I not been\\nhadst thou not been\\nhad he not been\\ne had we not been\\nhad you not been\\nhad they not been\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad I not been\\nhadst thou not been\\nhad he not been\\nhad we not been\\nhad you not been\\nhad they not been\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nN aurai-je pas ete\\nn aurav-tu pns He\\nshall or will I not Lave been\\nshalt thou not have bean", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "US OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nn aura-tH pas cte shall lie not have been\\nn aurons-nous pasete shall we not have been\\nn aun zoous pas cte shall you not have been\\ntlfawronPiU p shall they not have been\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\n(should I not have been, or would\\nJfTmratoje pas ete j r might 1 QQt have w\\nn avrais-tu pas tte shouhlst thou not have been\\nn aun should he not have been\\nshould we not have been\\nshould you not have been\\n7i \\\\i s ftt should they not have been\\nEZKROISX.\\nlie is my friend and ho was yours why is he now your enemy T\\na in ili-- house with me, whilst you have been in the\\ngarden. Wherehave they been? Were you content with yonr lot,\\niuld you be happier elsewhere 1 know that I would be most\\nni;!i yon. Be hoped that die might have been wiser, but she\\n.-ty, and thai waa her misfortune here were you, when\\nchurch We were all in the open square, where there\\nmy. Bad they been in the country, when they were\\nwith j uciently attentive. Vmi would\\nbeen more fortunate if you had been leas bold In your speeu*\\ndd have been hen before this,\\n-..TV weak.\\nWhat n great man he would have been, if he hud been as wise as\\nShall I not have been too severe with my young\\nfriendi Id have been leas surprised if they had had\\nbeautiful in her youth? Shall\\nsr, and will he not have had amusement um oui\\ni,,,,,.,- bad n-i been long in this country, when ha\\n1, \u00e2\u0080\u009e1 ear. Who has bad it yesterday V\\nhave I I\\nLet them eot be angry it wi I. who did it.an I I am sorry\\nLet herb ne ia", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "verbs 1 9\\nNote. When the subject of a question is a noun, it is placed at the\\nbead of the sentence, and the verb in the interrogative form after it.\\nEx. This man, has lie courage Get homme o t-il da courage\\nExercise.\\nWas this woman with you here, or were you alone Would not\\nthe judge be very severe if he were president of the court? Were\\nthose girls idle or were they tired They have been the one and\\nthe otber. Will this week have been a happy (one) for you? It\\nwould have been better, if it had been shorter. Had these soldiers\\nbeen absent from the army They had been on furlough. Were the\\napples ripe You have been very polite, but I wished that you might\\nhave been more circumspect. I hope that you may be happy. Was\\nnot your birthday yesterday? Where had these three men been\\nduring the night\\nThe verb to do, when used as an auxiliary verb in\\nis not translated into French, but rendered by the simple form\\nof the verb itself.\\nEx. I do speak: I speak, je parle. Do I speak? parle-je?\\nHe did come he came, il venait. Did he come? venait-il?\\nYou did say: you said, vous dites. Did you say, dites-vous\\nIn like manner the verb to be, when used as an auxiliary\\nin English with the Participle Present, is not translated into\\nFrench, but rendered by the simple verb.\\nEx. I was reading I read, je lisais. She was walking she\\nwalked, elle se promenait. You were snoring you snored, vous\\nronfliez.\\nIn the Interrogative form of all verbs the third person singu-\\nlar requires, when it ends in a vowel, the insertion of the letter\\nt, preceded and followed by a hyphen, to prevent the hiatus\\nwith the initial vowels of il, elle and on.\\nEx. a-t-il, has he a t-elle, has she a-t-on, have they parle-t-il,\\ndoes he speak? songe-t-elle, does she dream\\nIn the Negative form of the verb, the negative invariably", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "120 OX THE PAHT8 OF SPEECH.\\nconsists of two parts, the Negative Adverb pan, point, etc., and\\nthe particle ne. The verb is placed between the two, so that\\nne stands before it in compound tenses the auxiliary is the\\nverb, not the participle.\\nEx. je parte, I speak je ne parte pas, I speak not elle est\\nla, elle ttest pas la, she is not there; nous am/us 7 nous\\niti we have not been; elle eut cu, elle n? sut pat eu,\\nshe had not had.\\nThe Conjunctive Pronouns are, however, placed between the\\nverb and standing Dearest to the verb.\\nEx. ji pom,/* m pom pas, je ne le vois pas, I see it not;\\nvous avez cu, votu n atw u ne Care- pas eu, you have\\nnot bad it; fai ffaipas iU,je n y at j as iti, 1 have not\\nbeen I\\nIn the Infinitive both ne and pas may be placed before the\\nverb.\\nEx. M pat ill r, DOt to\\nThe mjngated according to four conjugations,\\nwhich arc distinguished by the termination of the lnfini-\\nn en la in er t like parler, to speak.\\nla in i like servir, to Berve.\\nThird Con] la in \u00c2\u00abr, like recevoir, to re-\\nThe Fourth CoDJugatioD eoda in re\\\\ like vendre, to sell.\\nAfter catting off the Infinitive termination, there remains\\nwhat is called the root ofthe?erb,e.o\\\\jwW t strt t recev and\\nttaio terminations, which constituto\\nthe coDJogatioo of the verb. Borne of these are uniform.\\nThe PartidpU I I in ant, added to the root\\nof the \\\\cil-, or in the second conjugation, to the first person\\nriant, speaking finmant, finishing reccvant, receiving;\\ni it, -lling.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 121\\nThe Imperfect ends always in ais, added to the root of the\\nverb, or in the second conjugation, to the first person present.\\nEx. je parlais, I spoke je fiaissais, I finished je recevais, I\\nreceived je vendais, I sold.\\nThe Future ends always in rai, and is made from the Infinitive.\\nEx. je parlerai, I shall speak je seruirai, I shall serve je\\nrecevrai, I shall receive; je vend rai, I shall sell.\\nThe Conditional ends always in rais, and is made by adding\\n3 to the Future.\\nEx. je parlerais, I should speak je servirais, I shall serve\\nje recevrais, I should receive; je vendrais, I should sell.\\nThe First Person Plural ends always in ons, except in the\\nPreterit Definite, when it always ends in silent mes.\\nEx. nous parlons, we speak nous parlions, we spoke nous\\nparlerons, we shall speak; nous parlerions, we should speak;\\nbut nous parlames, we did speak.\\nThe Second Person Plural ends always in ez, except in the\\nPreterit Definite, where it always ends in silent t s.\\nEx. vous servez, you serve vous serviez, you served vous ser-\\nvirez, you will serve vous serviriez, you would serve but vous\\nservitea, you did serve.\\nThe Third Person Plural ends always in silent ent, except in\\nthe Future, where it always ends in out.\\nEx. Us recoivent they receive; Us recevaient, they received;\\nUs rccurent, they received Us recevraient, they would receive\\nbut Us recevront, they will receive.\\nThe Moods of the French Verb are the following:\\n1. The Infinitive is simply the name of the verb, and has\\nneither person nor number.\\nEx. chanter, to sing perdrc, to lose.\\n2. The Indicative states the action of the verb positively, and\\nmay do so in the past, present, or future.\\nEx. je chanle, I sing; je perdais, I lost; je recus, I received;\\nfirai, I shall go.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "123 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n3. The Subjunctive states the action of the verb contingently,\\nc. subject to some other verb. Hence it is always preceded\\nby the conjunction que, which connects it, with the verb on\\nwhich it depends. This conjunction (that) may be omitte l in\\nEnglish, but must always be added in French.\\nEx. Je desire quil vienne, I wish that he conu; il voulait\\n(jne je le fisse, he wished (that) I should do it plat a Dieu\\ngu ellefUt id, would to God that she were here.\\n4. The Conditional states the action of the verb as likely to\\nhappen under a condition, so that if, is always understood,\\nif not i\\nEx. J n- iis sijepouvais, I would go if I could; scriezvoiu\\ncant* m f would yon be satisfied (if. vous auric.-: des amis, you\\nwould haw tiiends.\\n11 s tin action the verb in the tone\\nof command, entreaty, wish or permission.\\nlet him come alluns let lis go\\n/assent s ito r.n/.nt, let them do it if they wish.\\nIt will be seen that the English Imperative requires, in most esses,\\nthe auxiliary verb Cat, which is not translated in French, the Im-\\nperative in 1 already OX] C lniiKiiil or permission.\\nThe Tei f the Verb are either Simple, when they are\\nmade of tin- verb itself, or Compound, when they are formed\\nby the aid of the auxiliary and Eire.\\nThe Simpi.i. Tkksbs are the following:\\nINDICATIVE Moon.\\n1. Th ends in r, or z,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2j. The Imperfect^ which a waya enda in ais, expresses a past\\naction, continued or frequently repeated.\\nThe Ebgttsh employa tor th- same purpose tin auxiliary I vued to,\\nwhieh la aol Into French, as tin- Imported\\naln-n ly gives tliis m\\nY.\\\\. 1 used to sleep: I slept, J* dormaii. 11 Dead to ni ke: he\\nsmoked, il fum-iit.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 123\\n3. The Preterit Definite, which ends in the first conjugation\\nin ai, in the second in is, in the third in us, and in the fourth\\nin is, expresses a past action which took place but once, and at a\\ndefinite period. It is, therefore, the historical tense of the French.\\nEx. je parlai, I spoke il servit alors, he served then je\\nrecus hier, I received yesterday nous vendimes lundi, we sold\\nout on Monday le rot mourut sur Vechafaud, the king died on\\nthe scaffold.\\n4. The Future, which always ends in rai.\\nEx. je parlerai, I shall speak; firai, I shall go.\\n5. The Conditional, which always ends in rais.\\nEx. je vermis, I would see je rirais, I would laugh.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\n1. The Present, which always ends in a silent e, and is made\\nfrom the Present Indicative.\\nEx. j ai que j aie, that I have je recois que je recoive,\\nthat I receive.\\n2. The Past, which always ends in sse, and is made from the\\nPreterit Definite, by changing ai of the first conjugation into\\nasse, and by adding in the other three conjugations se to the\\nIndicative.\\nEx. je parlai que je parlasse, that I might speak.\\nje servis que je servisse, that I might serve.\\nje recus que je recusse, that I might receive.\\nje vendis que je vendisse, that I might sell.\\nThe Compound Tenses are the following\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\n1. The Preterit Indefinite, made from the Present of the\\nauxiliary verbs Avoir or Eire, with the Participle Past.\\nEx. fai parle, I have spoken je suis alle, I have gone.\\n2. The Pluperfect, made from the Imperfect of the auxiliary\\nverbs with the Participle Past.\\nEx. j avais parle, I had spoken j etais alle, I had gone.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "124 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n3. The Preterit Anterior, made from the Preterit Definite\\n:f the auxiliary verbs with the Participle Past.\\nEx. feus parte, I had spoken je fus alle, I had gone.\\n4. The Future Anterior, made from the Future of the aux-\\niliary verbs with the Participle Past.\\nEx. faurai jmrle, I shall have spoken je serai alle, I shall\\nhave gone.\\n5. The Conditional Anterior, made from the Conditional of\\nthe auxiliary verbs, with the Participle Past\\nEx. faurais parte, I would have spoken je serais alle, I\\nwould have gone.\\nsrnjrxcTiVE mood.\\n1. The Prtterii Indefinite, made from the Subjunctive of\\nthe Present of the auxiliary verbs with the Participle Past.\\nEx. que fait parli, that I mav have Bpoken que je sois alle,\\nthat I may have gone.\\nJ. 11 r, male from the Subjunctive of the\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2in- auxiliary verbs with the Participle l ast.\\nEx. q bat might have spoken que je /asm\\nat I might have u\\nIn the following tables f Verbs the termination is separal\\nthe root, in order t show mors clearly i!i manner of c mjagating\\nverbs; such a si-|iunitinn does not take place, of course, in ordinary\\nwriting, when verb unl root am written in one word.\\nTABLB OF THE T .ILAIl VEKBS.\\nT\\nINTIMTIVK MOOD.\\nnan r,\\nIstConj n. 2.1 nnj. 8d C onj. 4th OonJ.\\npari er fin ir ret svotf id re\\nPABTS rii\\npart ant evant I ant\\nl-AKir nil. r\\\\sr.\\npart e fin i r u rend n", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nJe\\npari\\ne\\nfin is\\nrec\\nois\\nvend s\\ntu\\nes\\nis\\nois\\n8\\nil or elk\\ne\\nit\\noit\\nvend\\nnous\\nons\\nissons\\nevons\\nons\\nvous\\nez\\nissez\\nevez\\nez\\nUs or elles\\nent\\nissent\\nIMPERFECT.\\noivent\\nent\\nJe\\npari\\nais\\nfin issais\\nree\\nevais\\nvend ais\\ntu\\nais\\nissais\\nevais\\nais\\nil or eUe\\nait\\nissait\\nevait\\nait.\\nnous\\nions\\nissions\\nevions\\nions\\nvous\\niez\\nissiez\\neviez\\niez\\nUs or elles\\naient\\nissaient\\nevaient\\naient\\n125\\nJe\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\npari ai fin is\\nrec us\\nvend is\\nil or elle\\na\\nnous\\names\\nvous\\nates\\nUs or elles\\nerent\\nJe\\npari\\nFT\\nerai\\ntu\\neras\\nil or elle\\nera\\nnous\\nerons\\nvous\\nerez\\nUs or elles\\neront\\nirent\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nfin irai rec evrai\\niras\\nira\\nirons\\nirez\\niront\\nut\\nit\\numes\\nimes\\nutes\\nites\\nurent\\nirent\\nevras\\nras\\nevra\\nra\\nevrons\\nrona\\nevrez\\nrez\\nevront\\nront\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT\\nJe\\npari\\nerais\\nfin irais\\nree\\nevrais\\nvend\\nrais\\ntu\\nerais\\nirais\\nevrai s\\nrais\\nil or elle\\nerait\\nirait\\nevrait\\nrait\\nnous\\nerions\\nirions\\nevrions\\nrions\\nvous\\neriez\\niriez\\nevriez\\nriez\\nUs or elles\\neraient\\niraient\\nevrai ent\\nraier.t", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "120\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH,\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\npari e fin is re$ ois\\nqu il or qu elle\\ng i ils or qu eUes\\nent\\nlESons\\nissez\\nissent\\nevez\\noiveut\\nQueje\\nque tn\\nqu il or 5\\ny\u00c2\u00ab or\\nj; jrJ e\\nSUBJUNCTIVE Mool)\\nPRESENT.\\nKKQfl\\niez\\neut\\nLsse\\nissiona\\nissdea\\niasent\\nIMl l\\npari asse _/?/- i-~\\nasses I\\nqu il r g At it\\nqu, nous\\noive\\noivea\\n(UVB\\nevions\\neviex\\noivent\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ccnd s\\nions\\nies\\ncut\\nasses\\nfit\\nossiong\\nassiea\\nit\\nissiona\\nissicz\\n[\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Bent\\nIN I IN IT I I! Mho I).\\nIgtOonj. BdOonj. BdConj.\\nJhi i\\n\\\\troi m\u00c2\u00bb i mi PABTS iim.i-..\\nINIH ATI V B MOOD.\\nPRB1 I Kl I !M I MM I I\\nIt H \\\\mj.\\ntend u\\nnd\\nu", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n127\\nnouSavons\\npari\\nI e\\nreg\\nu\\nvend u\\nwas avez\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nUs or dies ont\\n6\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nJ avail\\npari\\ne\\nfin\\ni\\nrec\\nu\\nvend u\\ntu avais\\ne\\ni\\n11\\nu\\nil or elk avait\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0nous avions\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nvous aviez\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nUs or elks avaient\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nPRETERIT\\nANTERIOR.\\nfeus\\npari\\ne\\nfin\\ni\\nre$\\nu\\nvend u\\ntu eus\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nil or elk eut\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nnous eumes\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nvous elites\\ne\\ni\\nXL\\nu\\nUs or elks eurent\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nFUTURE\\nANTERIOR.\\nJaurai\\npari\\ne\\nfin\\ni\\nreg\\nu\\nvend u\\ntu auras\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nil or elk aura\\ne\\ni\\nU\\nu\\nnous aurons\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nvotes aurez\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nUs or elks auront\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nCONDITIONAL ANTERIOR.\\ntPaurais\\npari\\ne\\nfin\\ni\\nrec\\nu\\nvend a\\ntu aurais\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nil\\nil or elk aurait\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nnous aurions\\ne\\ni\\nII\\nu\\nvous auriez\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nUs or elks auraient\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nSUBJUNCTIVE\\nMOOD.\\nPRETERIT.\\nQue fate\\np-wl\\ne\\nfin\\ni\\nree\\nu\\nvend n\\nque tu aies\\ne\\ni\\nu\\nu\\nqu il or qu elk ait\\ne\\ni\\nu\\na", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "128\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nque nous ayons\\nque vous ayez\\nqu Us or qu eUes aienl\\npari e fin i\\nPRETERIT AXTEKIOR.\\nQuefeusse\\nque tu cusses\\nqu il or qu elle cut\\nque nous eussions\\nque vous eussiez\\nqu ils or qu elks eussent\\npari ti fin\\nrec u\\nAY U\\ni\\\\/ d 1\\nu\\nVERBS OF THE FIRST COXJCGATION.\\n{Affirmatively.)\\nParler To Speak\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRE.sr.NT.\\nParler to apeak\\nTAST.\\nAvoir pari to have spoken\\nparth in i. FBI D\\nPari ant king\\nOOMFOOHB Of Tin. PASTS [PI pki i.nt.\\nA;/int p irl i having spoken\\nPARIS mm I PACT.\\nP.irf I ken\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nII: I\\nk, do speak, w an ipeaking\\nthou speal\\nhe spaaka\\nJe p irl e\\nU0U$ pari at\\nr. /.i p.ir\\nWe speak\\ny.iu speak", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nTJD\\nJe pari ais\\ntu pari ais\\nil pari ait\\nnous pari ions\\nw tt\u00c2\u00ab pari iez\\ntfoparZaient\\nJe #ar\u00c2\u00a3 ai\\ntu pari a8\\npari a\\nnous pari ames\\n\u00c2\u00bbcws aW ates\\nilparl erent\\nJe _parZ erai\\n*w parJ eras\\nil pari era\\nnews wZ\\nvousparl erez\\nt #fiwZ eront\\nJe pari eraia\\nf\u00c2\u00ab ^gwZ erais\\nil pari erait\\nntras pari erions\\nwus pari eriez\\nUs pari eraient\\nJai pari e\\ntu as pari e\\na pari e\\nwows awns pari e\\nvous avez pari e\\nt7s wi\u00c2\u00a3 parZ e\\nI spoke, did speak, or was speaking\\ntliou spokest\\nhe spoke\\nwe spoke\\nyou spoke\\nthey spoke\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI spoke or did speak\\nthou spokest\\nhe spoke\\nwe spoke\\nyou spoke\\nthey spoke\\nFUTURE.\\nI shall or will speak\\nthou shalt speak\\nhe shall speak\\nwe shall speak\\nyou shall speak\\nthey shall speak\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\n(I should, would, could or might\\nthou shouldst speak\\nhe should speak\\nwe should speak\\nyou should speak\\nthey should speak\\nINDEFINITE.\\nI have spoken, did speak or have\\nbeen speaking\\nthou hast spoken\\nhe has spoken\\nwe have spoken\\nyou have spoken\\nthey have spoken", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "130\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJ amis pari e\\ntu (boom pari e\\nil avait pad e\\nnou6 oBtompari 6\\nvtnu avieepari e\\nUs ataient pari e\\nJ eus pari e\\ntu MM\\nnous cu n, x purl 6\\n\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00abn rUp il\\nI\\ntu tlU in*\\nnous ounmt\\nvous aunz purl G\\nUs au,\\nFLUPERFB* T.\\nI had spoken or had been speaking\\nthou kadst spoken\\nhe had spoken\\nwe had spoken\\nyon had spoken\\nthey ha.l spoken\\nPRETEKIT ANTERIOR.\\nI had spoken\\ntlioti hadst spoken\\nhe had spoken\\n\\\\v had spoken\\nj ni had Bpoken\\nthey had Bpoken\\nEUOB.\\nI shuU will have sj okcn\\nthou shah have Bpoken\\nhe Bhall have spoken\\nwe shall have Bpoken\\nyon Bhall have Bpoken\\nthey Bhall have Bpoken\\nJ* a u rait\\nNnnioN.vi\\nI Bhould, won]\\nnotaottrioiu pur!\\nri z j url t\\nUs mtraitni\\nOOnld or\\nthon Bhooldst have Bpoken\\noken\\nild have spoken\\nMm should have Bpoken\\nken\\nmight\\npari e\\ntu j\\nI\\nsriurNvnvK MOOD.\\nPBJ E\\nlliat I niav\\nthat thou in i\\\\. si\\ntliat hf ma]\\nthat we mi j ipi ak\\nthat yon may speak\\nthai peak", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nV A\\nQue je pari asse\\nque tu pari asses\\nqu il pari at\\nque nous pari i\\nque vous pari assiez\\nqu ilsparl assent\\nQue j aie pari e\\nque tu aies pari e\\nqu il ait pari e\\ngwe nous ayons pari e\\ngwe vous ayez pari e\\ngw j fe aient pari e\\nQue feusse pari e\\ngwg iw ewsses par? e\\nqu il eut pari e\\ngwe nous eussions pari e\\ngwe vous eussiez pari e\\ngu ifc eussent pari e\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntliat I might speak\\nthat thou raightest speak\\nthat he might speak\\nthat we might speak\\nthat you might speak\\nthat they might speak\\nPAST.\\nthat I may have spoken\\nthat thou mayest have spoken\\nthat he may have spoken\\nthat we may have spoken\\nthat you may have spoken\\nthat they may have spoken\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might have spoken\\nthat thou mightest have spoke\\nthat he might have spoken\\nthat we might have spoken\\nthat you might have spoken\\nthat they might have spoken\\nIMPEKATIVE MOOD.\\nspeak or do speak [thou]\\nlet him speak\\nlet us speak\\nspeak or do speak [you]\\nlet them speak\\nPari e\\nqu^il pari e\\npari ons\\npari ez\\nqu ils pari ent\\nParler To Spealc.\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nNe pas pari er not to speak\\nPAST.\\nN avoir pas pari e not to have spoken\\nPARTIdPLE PRESENT.\\nNr- pari ant pas not speaking\\n{Negatively.)", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "132\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCOMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nN ay ant pas pari e not having spoken\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nI speak not, do not speak or am\\nJe ne pari e pas\\ntu ne pari es pas\\ntrie pas\\nnous ne purl ons pas\\nBOttf TU jiarl cz pas\\npari ent pas\\nirl ais pas\\nir ais pas\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0r ait pat\\nnoun ne par! irms/ a.t\\nI\\n:.t pat\\nnot speaking\\nthou speakest not\\nhe Bpeaks not\\nwe speak not\\nyou speak not\\nthey Bpeak not\\nlilPKKl 1( T.\\n1 1 spoke not, did not speak or wan\\ndo! speaking\\nthou spokest not\\nhe spoke not\\nwe Bpoke oot\\nyou spoke not\\nke not\\nPRBTERIT DEFINITE.\\n1/ it. pari a\\nrent pas\\nI sj okr imt or did not speak\\nthou spoked not\\nIn- s[K,k,- not\\nW6 s|\u00c2\u00abik. not\\nyou spoke not\\nthey spoke not\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nJ i -a\\\\ pa*\\nI\\nre* pat\\ntat pas\\nI shall \u00c2\u00bbr will nut Bpeak\\nthou shalt nnt sjM-ak\\nI n .t Bpeak\\nWe shall li t Bpeak\\nyou shall in t Bpeak\\nthey shall not -:ik\\nJc n t pari era is pat\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPHI\\nI BhouJ would, could or might", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n133\\ntu ne pari erais pas\\nil ne pari erait pas\\nnous ne pari enomipas\\nvous ne pari eriez pas\\nUs ne pari eraient pas\\nthou sliouldst not speak\\nlie should not speak\\nwe sliould not speak\\nyou should not speak\\nthey should not speak\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nJe n ai pas pari e\\ntu n as pas pari e\\nil n a pas pari e\\nnous n avons pas pari e\\nvous n avez pas pari e\\nUs n ont pas pari e\\nI have not spoken, did not speak,\\nor have not been speaking\\nthou hast not spoken\\nhe has not spoken\\nwe have not spoken\\nyou have not spoken\\nthey have not spoken\\nJe ri avals pas pari e\\ntu n avais pas pari e\\nil n avait pas pari e\\nnous n avions pas pari e\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0oous n aviez pas pari e\\nUs n avaient pas pari e\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nI had not spoken or had not been\\nthou hadst not spoken\\nhe had not spoken\\nwe had not spoken\\nyou had not spoken\\nthey had not spoken\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nJe n eus pas pari e\\ntu n eus pas pari e\\nil n eut pas pari e\\nnous n eitmes pas pari e\\nvous n eiiles pas pari e\\nUs n eurent pas pari e\\nI had not spoken\\nthou hadst not spoken\\nhe had not spoken\\nwe had not spoken\\nyou had not spoken\\nthey had not spoken\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nJe n aurai pas pari e\\ntu n auras pas pari e\\nU n aura pas pari e\\nnous n aurons pas pari e,\\nvous n aurez pas pari e\\nUs n auront pas pari e\\nI shall or will not have spob^-u\\nthou shalt not have spoken\\nhe shall not have spoken\\nwe shall not have spoken\\nyou shall not have spoken\\nthey shall not have spokes", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "134\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJen aurais pas pari e\\ntu n aurais pas pari e\\nil it aurait pas pad e\\nri His p,is purl e\\nixnis n auritz pas purl e\\nils n auraient pas pari e\\ne pas\\nque tu iir pari i\\nqn il TU\\nfj,ir nous n, pari ionsjMH\\npitrl iez P ts\\nPAST.\\nI should, would, could or might not\\n1 have spoken\\nthou shouldst not have spoken\\nhe should not have spoken\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0we should not have sjwken\\nyon should not have spoken\\nthey should not have spoken\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nI KI.-l I.\\nthat I may not speak\\nthat thou mayest not speak\\nthat he may not Bpeak\\nthat we may not speak\\nthat yon may not speak\\nthat they may not Bpeak\\nb pat\\n5\\nqu Ue n pari assent\\nj hirl t\\ni;\\nwri:i;iT.i r.\\nthat I might not speak\\nthat thon mightest not speak\\nthat lie might not speak\\nthat we might t t speak\\nthat yon might not Bpeak\\nthat they might not speak\\neABT.\\nthat I may not ha v.- spoken\\nthat thon mayest not have spoken\\nthat he may not have Bpokea\\nthat we may not have spoken\\nthat you may not have spoken\\nthat they may not have spoken\\nout tun\\nri 4\\nPLUPERl\\nthat I ml ht not have spoken\\nthat thon mightest not have spoken\\nthat he mij b not bave spoken\\nthat we mighl not have\\nthat y\u00c2\u00ab ii might not have spoken\\nmight not have", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n135\\nJTe pari e pas\\ngu il ne pari e pas\\nne pari ons pas\\nne pari ez pas\\nqu ils ne pari ent pas\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nspeak not or do not speak [thou]\\nlet him not speak\\nlet us not speak\\nspeak not or do not speak [you]\\nlet tliem not speak\\nParler To Speak [Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPari e-je\\npari e -tu\\npari e-t-U\\npari oriB-nous\\npari ez-vous\\npari ent-ils\\ndo I speak or am I speaking\\ndost thou speak\\ndoes he speak\\ndo we speak\\ndo you speak\\ndo they speak\\nPari ais-je\\npari aia-tu\\npari ait-i\\npari ions-nous\\npari iez-vous\\npari aient-i7s\\nPari ai-je\\npari s-tu\\npari a-t-il\\npari simes-nous\\npari ates-vous\\npari erent-ils\\nPari evol-je\\npari eras-ta\\npari exa-t-il\\narl erons-nous\\ndid I speak or was I speaking\\ndidst thou speak\\ndid he speak\\ndid we speak\\ndid you speak\\ndid they speak\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndid I speak\\ndidst thou speak\\ndid he speak\\ndid we speak\\ndid you speak\\ndid they speak\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nshall or will I speak\\nshalt thou speak\\nshall he speak\\nshall we speak", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "136\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\npari erez-vous\\npari eiont-ils\\nshall you speak\\nshall they speak\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPari erais-Je\\npari ersis-tu\\npari erait-tf\\npari cnons-tioiu\\npari erii i\\neraient-tfo\\niii c\\ntrl\\ni\\npari c\\nni u\\ntit pari 6\\ni paH\\nI pari e\\npari c\\nt Should, would, could, or might 1\\nspeak\\nshouldst thou speak\\nshould he speak\\nshould we Bpeak\\nshould you speak\\nshould they Bpeak\\nPIIETEKIT INDKIIN1 Ii:.\\nhave I spoken or did I speak\\nhast tlioii Bpokeo\\nbas he spoken\\nhave wv Spoken\\nhave yon spoken\\nbare they b\\nrLun.Ki\\n(had I spoken or hai\\nin-\\nhadsl tbou Bpokeo\\nbad he ki n\\nhad we b\\\\ i\\nbad yon Bpokea\\nhad they spoken\\nPRETERIT ANTKUlolt.\\nhad I spoken\\nhadsl thon\\nhad ha niM.k.n\\nliad we spoktfll\\nhad yon spoken\\nhad they spoken\\nI ANT! RlOn.\\nshall i will I liave\\nI been sj cak", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "137\\nuuva-t-il pari e\\naurons-nous pari i\\naurez-vous pari e\\nauront-ils pari e\\nAurais-je pari e\\naurais-tu pari e\\naurait-il pari e\\naitrions-novs pari e\\nauriez-vous pari e\\nauraient-ils pari e\\nsliall lie have spoken\\nshall we have spoken\\nshall you have spoken\\nshall they have spoken\\nPAST.\\nj should, would, could, or might\\nhave spoken\\nshouldst thou have spoken\\nshould be have spoken\\nshould we have spoken\\nshould you have spoken\\nshould they have spoken\\nParler To Speak {Negatively and Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE.\\nNe pari e-je pas\\nne pari es-tu pas\\nne pari e-t-il pas\\nne pari ons-nous pas\\nne pari ez-vous pas\\nne pari ent-ils pas\\nNe pari ais-je pas\\nne pari ais4?f pas\\nne pari axt-il pas\\nne pari ions-nous pas\\nne pari iez-vous pas\\nne pari a.ient-ils pas\\nNe pari el-je pas\\nne pari as,-tu pas\\nne pari a-tilpas\\nj do I not speak or am I not speak-\\nhig\\ndost thou not speak\\ndoes he not speak\\ndo we not speak\\ndo yo\\\\i not speak\\ndo they not speak\\nIMPERFECT.\\nj did I not speak or was I not speak-\\nt ing\\ndidst thou not speak\\ndid he not speak\\ndid we not speak\\ndid you not speak\\ndid tliey not speak\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndid I not speak\\ndidst thou not\\ndid he not speak", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "138\\nOX THE TARTS OF SPEECH.\\nne pari HmeB-nous pas\\nm purl SteB-wms pas\\nne pari eient-to pas\\ndid we not speak\\ndid you not speak\\ndid they not speak\\nJV7 pari ersl-je pas\\n7iq pari eras-tu pas\\nI er -t-il pas\\n7 pari erons-/(- pas\\nm pari etea^wus pat\\ntu pari eront-tfs pas\\nFUTURE ABSOLUTE.\\nshall or will\\nnot speak\\nshalt thou not Bpeak\\nshall he not Bpeak\\nshall we not speak\\nshall vim not speak\\nshall they not Bpeak\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nra tu pat\\nshould, would, could, or might I\\nI nol Bpeak\\n1st thou not speak\\nslii old he not Bpeak\\nshould we nol Bpeak\\nBhould you ii Bpeak\\nBhould they not B]\\niki.ii kit iM-i.i im i\\nri 6\\n(have I u Bpoken, did I oot speak,\\nI or have I do! I n speaking\\np \u00e2\u0080\u00a2k ii\\nhave we M t spokon\\nnol Bpoken\\nhave they not Bpoken\\nplup: i\\n(had I ii Bpoken or had I not bm\\nhadst thou not Bpoken\\nhad he i. A spoken\\nhad they cot spoken", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n139\\nIT us-je pas pari e\\nn eus-tu pas pari e\\nn eut-il pas pari e\\nn edmes-nous pas pari e\\nri eutes-vous pas pari e\\nn eurent-ils pas pari e\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad I not spoken\\nhadst thou not spoken\\nhad he not spoken\\nhad we not spoken\\nhad you not spoken\\nhad they not spoken\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nN aurai-je pas pari e\\nn auras-tu pas pari e\\nn aura-t-il pas pari e\\nn aurons-nous pas pari e\\nn aurcz-wus pas pari e\\nn auront-ils pas pari e\\nshall or will I not have spckL-n\\nshalt thou not have spoken\\nshall he not have spoken\\nshall we not have spoken\\nshall you not have spoken\\nshall they not have spoken\\nft aurais-je pas pari e\\nn aurais-tu pas pari e\\nn aurait-il pas pari e\\nn aurions-nous pas pari t\\nn auriez-vous pas pari e\\nn auraient-ils pas pari e\\nj should, would, could, or might I\\nnot have spoken\\nshouldst thou not have spoken\\nshould he not have spoken\\nshould we not have spoken\\nshould you not haA^e spoken\\nshould they not have spoken\\nREMARKS OK VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.\\nThere are several general principles applied in French to all\\nverbs, which seriously affect their orthography.\\nThe first is The pronunciation of the root of a verb in the\\nInfinitive must be preserved throughout its conjugation.\\nConsequently the verb, when conjugated, will have to be so\\nspelt as to produce the sound of the Infinitive, whatever may\\nbe the termination that is added to the root. The verb percer,\\ne. g. pronounces its root perc in the Infinitive with a soft c,\\nbecause it is followed by e in forming the Present Participle,\\nthe syllable ant has to be added to the. root. Thus the vowel a\\nwould follow c, perc-ani, and as c before a has the sound of k,", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "140 OiS THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nthe Participle would sound differently from the Infinitive. This\\nis not admissible, and, to avoid it, the orthography of the verb\\nmust be so changed, as to produce before ant also the soft r,\\nwhich, in this case, is done by adding a cedilla and writing the\\nParticiple per^ant. Hence the following roles\\n1. Verbs ending in eer in the Infinitive add a cedilla to c,\\nwhenever, in the course of the conjugation, it comes to stand\\nbefore a or o.\\nEx. annonccr\\nQGPEBFBI T.\\nJ an nnn poft\\nt t an\\nil annonfaU\\nnous annonciona (no cedilla Deeded before i.)\\ntout\\nmongaUmt\\nI El i l l.i: ntBBEHT.\\nI i in r it.i imte.\\nJ nii\\ntit Of!\\n%1 hi.\\nils on no oedilla Deeded U-foid e.)\\nBTO.M N( TIM-.\\nQui- etc.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2j. V( rba ending in \u00c2\u00a3*r in the Infinitive, insert mote i After\\no, whenever it comei to Btaod before a or o.\\nEx. ntglt gtr\\nFBI si.nt.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "VEKI3S.\\nm\\nnous negligeons (e inserted)\\nvous negligez\\nUs negligent\\nIMPERFECT.\\nJe negligeais\\ntu negligeais\\nil negligeait\\nnous\\nvous\\nUs nigligeaient\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT,\\n(no e needed before i)\\nA second general principle of this kind, which finds its\\napplication here, and influences the orthography of the verb, is\\nthis:\\nTwo mute e s cannot follow each other in successive syllables.\\nHence the following rules\\nVerbs which have a mute e in the penultimate svllable of\\nthe Infinitive, change their spelling whenever the termination\\ncontains also a mute e, in two ways\\n1. Some verbs double the consonant between the two e s.\\nEx. jeter.\\nPresent.\\nFuture.\\nEs. appeler.\\nJe jette\\ntu jettes\\nil jette\\nnous jetons no double t is required, because no mute\\nvous jetez S\\nUs jettent\\nJe jetterai\\ntu jetteras\\nil jettera\\nnous jetterons\\nvous jetterez\\nUs jetteront\\nPresent.\\nis added.\\nCond. Je jetterais\\ntu jetterais\\nil jetterait\\nnous jetterions\\nvous jetteriez\\nUs jetteraient\\nJappeMe\\ntu appclles", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "U2\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nil appelle\\nnous appclons (no double I required\\nFuture.\\nTons appckz\\nnt\\ni\\nuppilleras\\n4 ra\\npeBaree\\nCond. J appelleraU\\nt t a/ppdk rais\\nU appeUt rait\\nnousappi\\nri\\nBa appellerait nt\\nier verba of this class place a Grave Accent over the\\nfirst mute whenever it ie followed by a Becond mute t,\\nEx. a\\nPrbbkht.\\n,-7,\\ntout a\\nUtaoh\\nBi M\\nn o accent required.)\\nSi v.j. I m-\\nij n tu acti\\nque nous acheti\\n7 i7.i aeh tcni\\nnt required.)\\nCOND.\\nVerba wbicfa b :ent on the is the pen-\\nnltimate bj llafa\\nwhenever t taiun a mnt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "VEEES.\\nEx. esperer.\\nPresext.\\nJespere\\ntu esperes\\nil espere\\nnous esperons (no change of accent.)\\nvous esperez\\nUs esperent\\nFuture.\\nJespererai\\nCond.\\nJ espererais\\n143\\nSubj. Pres. Que j espere\\nEx.\\nPresent. Je revile\\nFuture, Je revelerai\\nCond. Je revelerais\\nSubj. Pres. Queje revele\\nThis same principle, that two mute e s cannot follow each other\\nIn successive syllables, has also this effect, that when the first person\\nof the Present ends in mute e and is followed in the Interrogative\\nconstruction by je, which has also a mute e, the final e of the verb\\ntakes an accute accent.\\nEx. je parle: parle-jef do I speak? j espere: espere-je? do I hope?\\nA third general principle of this kind, which influences the\\northography of the verb, is this\\nThe letter j cannot be placed before mute e. Hence the fol-\\nlowing rule\\nVerbs which end in yer (ayer, eyer, oyer and uyer) change\\ny into i, whenever it conies to stand before a mute e.\\nEx. essayer.\\nPresent. Jessaie\\ntu essaies\\nil essaie\\nnous essayons (no change needed.)\\nvous essayez\\nUs essaient\\nFuture. Jessaierai nous essaierons\\ntu essaieras vous essaierez\\nU essaiera Us essaiermt", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "U4\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCoxb. JTessaurais\\ntu essaieraU\\nU essaie rait\\nLUPERATIYE.\\nEx. cmpln/ T.\\nPasEsrr\\nnous essaierums\\nnaus essaieriez\\nUs essaieraient\\nEssaie\\ngu il essaie\\nessayons\\nexsaycz\\nqu ils essaient\\nTemphAe\\ntu einploies\\nil em.\\nmployoru (no chango needed.)\\nrous empl i/cz\\nttt mi l i tit\\nFuture. J aitplvurui Oond. JTempMerak\\nSiiu. Pbbb. QpaftmpM*\\nFinally, verba ending in iter require r\\\\ diaeresis over tlic\\nwhich ni.iy be added to the conjugation, in order to\\npreserve the separate Bound of the two vowels.\\nEx.\\nlMru:ii T. ITou* mMont Bubj. Pres. Que notu ealulUnu\\nVOUS I ryi/,\\nTlic Irregular Verb* of the Firs! Conjugation are only two,\\nr\\\\z. alter, to g nd w wo yer, to send, which will l o given\\nhereafter.\\nVERBS OF Tin: BIOOVC OONJUOATIOV.\\nFinir To Finish {Affirmatively.)\\nINFINiTIVK MOOD.\\nI BH1T\\nFin ir to finish\\nPAST.\\nAvoir fin 1 to have fisdahed", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nU5\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nFin issant finishing\\nCOMPOUND OP THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nAyant fin i having finished\\nPARTICIPLE PAST,\\nfinished\\nJe fin is\\ntu fin is\\nUfin it\\nnous fin issons\\nvous fin issez\\nUs fin issent\\nJe fin issais\\ntu fin issais\\nil fin issait\\nnous fin\\nvous fin\\nUs fin issaient\\nJe fin is\\ntu fin is\\nUfin it\\nnous fin imes\\nww^ ./En. ites\\niEs ./E/i irent\\nJe fin irai\\n\u00c2\u00a3w fin iras\\n\u00c2\u00a3E,/in. ira\\nnous fin irons\\nras ,/Eti irez\\ntfe./iTi iront\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nI finish, do finish or am finishing\\nthou finishest\\nhe finishes\\nwe finish\\nyou finish\\nthey finish\\nIMPERFECT.\\nI finished, did finish, or was finishing\\nthou finishedst\\nhe finished\\nwe finished\\nyou finished\\nthey finished\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI finished or did finish\\nthou finishedst\\nhe finished\\nwe finished\\nyou finished\\nthey finished\\nFUTURE.\\nI shall or will finish\\nthou shait finish\\nhe shall finish\\nwe shall finish\\nyou shall finish\\nthey shall finish", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "146\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe fin irais\\ntii fin irais\\nil fin irnit\\n7? fin irions\\nto(/\u00c2\u00ab ^?n iriea\\nils fin iraient\\nJai fin i\\nt i tu fin i\\nQ a fin i\\nMM ,/fn i\\nB9IM\\n/i i\\ntV ii ri tit fin i\\nnujlfl i\\nif^N i\\nfin i\\nf a* fin l\\nn i\\nMfjlfl i\\nils eurent fin i\\nJ~tiurai fin\\n(a aunt* fin i\\nfin i\\nn /iM auronsfin I\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT.\\nj I should, would, could, or might\\nfinish\\nthou shouldst finish\\nhe should finish\\nwe should finish\\nyou should finish\\nthey should finish\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\n(I have finished, did finish, or have\\nheen finishing\\nthou hast finished\\nhe has finished\\nwe have Blushed\\nyou have finished\\nthey hu .f ii.\\npi. i IFKBF1 K r\\nI had finished or had bees finishing\\nthou liailst finished\\nhe had finished\\nwe had fin\\njoa had finished\\nthey llu l finished\\nrur.Ti.urr wti RIOB.\\nI hail fuii-h d\\nthou had-t finished\\nhe had finished\\nwe bad finlahed\\ny.m had finished\\nthey bad finished\\nFUTUItE ANTI BBXOB.\\nI shall or will have finished\\nthou s1k.1i have I m\\nhe shall have finished\\nwu shall have finished", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n147\\nvous aurez fin i\\nUs auront fin i\\nJ aurais fin i\\ntu aurais fin i\\nil aurait fin i\\nnous aurionsfin J\\nvous auriez fin i\\nUs auraient fin i\\nQue jefin iase\\nque tu fin isses\\nqu il fin isse\\nque nous fin issions\\nque vous fin issiez\\nqu Us fin issent\\nQue jefin isse\\nque tu fin issea\\ngw iY fin it\\nque vous fin issiez\\nqu Us fin issent\\nQue f aie fin i\\nque tu aies fin i\\nqu il ait fin i\\ngwe nous ayonsfin i\\ngwe flows ayezfin i\\ngu fe aientfin i\\nQuej eussefini\\nque tu eusses fin i\\ngu i7 ew\u00c2\u00a3 ./m i\\nyou shall have finished\\nthey shall have finished\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\n1 should, would, could, or t ight\\nhave finished\\nthou shouldst have finished\\nhe should have finished\\nwe should have finished\\nyou should have finished\\nthey should have finished\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nthat I may finish\\nthat thou mayest finish\\nthat he may finish\\nthat we may finish\\nthat you may finish\\nthat they may finish\\nIMPERFECT.\\nthat I might finish\\nthat thou mightest finish\\nthat he might finish\\nthat we might finish\\nthat you might finish\\nthat they might finish\\nPAST.\\nthat I may have finished\\nthat thou mayest have finished\\nthat he may have finished\\nthat we may have finished\\nthat you may have finished\\nthat they may have finished\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might have finished\\nthat thou mightest have finished\\nthat he might have finished", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "148\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nque nous eussions fin i\\nque vous eussiezfin i\\nquits eussent fin i\\nFin is\\njsse\\nfin issons\\nfin issez\\nni ils fin issent\\nthat we might have finished\\nthat you might have finished\\nthat they might have finished\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nfinish [thou]\\nlet him finish\\nlet us finish\\nfinish [you]\\nlet them finish\\nFlXIR\\nX pat Jin ir\\nfin i\\n_\\\\\\n0OXFO1 N\\ni\\nJ, in- fin \\\\spcu\\ntu nefin\\nt Hi fin\\niu ne fin iaBftll\\nTo Finish {Negatively)\\nINFINITIVE.\\nl ];i i.vr.\\nn\u00c2\u00ab a to finish\\nPAOP.\\nnot t.. have finished\\nPABTK in i: PB1 BED i.\\nli.n finishing\\nI) Tin: PARI I ni.r. n:r.-i vi.\\ni) i t hu\\\\ ing finished\\nINDIOATTVEL\\nFBI\\nI finish not, do iint finish, nin\\nI not finishing\\nthou finishesl not\\nhe finishes not\\nwe finish not\\nfinish not\\nfinish not\\nI finished not, ili l not fiuish, or\\ni w.i- qoi finishing\\nthou Rnishedst not", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "VERES.\\n149\\nU ne fin issait pas\\nnous ne Jin issions pas\\nvous ne fin issiez pas\\nUs ne fin issaient pas\\nJe ne fin is pas\\ntu nefin is pas\\nil ne fin it pas\\nnous ne fin imes pas\\nvous ne fin ices pas\\nUs m fin irent pas\\nhe finished not\\nwe finished not\\nyou finished not\\nthey finished not\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI finished not or did not finish\\nthou finishedst not\\nhe finished not\\nwe finished not\\nyou finished not\\nthey finished not\\nJe ne fin irai pas\\ntu ne fin iras pas\\nU ne fin ira pas\\nnous nefin irons pas\\nvous ne fin irez pas\\nUs ne fin iront pas\\nI shall or will not finish\\nthou shalt not finish\\nhe shall not finish\\nwe shall not finish\\nyou shall not finish\\nthey shall not finish\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nJe ne fin irais pas\\ntu ne fin irais pas\\nil ne fin irait pas\\nnous ne fin irions pas\\nvous ne fin iriez pas\\nUs ne fin iraient pas\\nI should, would, could, or might\\nI not finish\\nthou shouldst not finish\\nhe should not finish\\nwe should not finish\\nyou should not finish\\nthey should not finish\\nPKETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe n ai pas fir\\ntu nas pas fin i\\nil n a pas fin i\\nnous n avons pas fin i\\nvous 11 avez pas fin i\\nUs n ont pas fin i\\nj I have not finished, did not finish,\\nor have not been finishing\\nthou hast not finished\\nhe has not finished\\nwe have not finished\\nyou have not finished\\nthey have not finished", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "150\\nON THE PAKTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe n avals pas fin i\\ntu n avals pas fin i\\nf. n avaitpaa fin i\\nus /I acions pas fin\\nnous n aviee pas fin i\\nUs. n ataiontpasfin i\\nx pas fin i\\n-v pas fin i\\nnow\\ntxnu n\\nFLUPERFFr\\n1 1 had not finished, t had not lwt n\\nfinishing\\nthou hadst not finished\\nhe had not finished\\nwe had not finished\\nyou had not finished\\nthey had not finished\\nPKKTERIT ANTERIOR.\\nI had not finished\\nthou hadst not finished\\nhe had not finished\\nwe had not finished\\nyon had not finished\\nthey had not finished\\nit pis fin i\\nto n au\\n1 1 fin i\\nHi n\\\\i i\\n-fin i\\nt l ll il l r\\nil it n a r\\nnous n a\\nI rriKi. aBTEBIOB.\\nI shall or will not have finished\\nthon shall not have finished\\nhe shall not have finished\\nwe -had no) have finished\\nyon shall not have finished\\nthey shall not have tin.\\nocerornm u. past.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2old, would, c raid, or might\\nnot have finished\\nthou bave finished\\nfinished\\nwe should nut have finishe 1\\nd bave finic\\nthe]\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nQ ic je nr fin isso\\nq i il in\\nPKB81\\nthat I may not finish\\nthat thon mayest Dot I nish\\nwe may not finish", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n151\\nque vous nefin issiez pas\\nqu Us ne fin issent pas\\nQueje nefin isse pas\\nque tu nefin isses pas\\nqu U nefin it pas\\nque nous ne fin issions pas\\nque vous nefin issiez pas\\nqu Us ne fin issent pas\\nQueje n aie pas fin i\\nque tu n aies pas fin i\\nqu U n ait pas fin i\\nque nous n ayons pasfin i\\nque vous n ayez pas fin i\\nqu ils n aient pas fin i\\nQueje n eusse pas fin i\\nque tu n eusses pas fin i\\nqu U n eut pas fin i\\nque nous n eussions pas fin i\\nque vous n eussiez pas fin i\\nqu ils n eussent\\nN~e fin is pas\\nqu U ne fin isse pas\\nne fin issons pas\\nnefin issez pas\\nqu ils ne fin issent pas\\nthat you may not finish\\nthat they may not finish\\nIMPERFECT.\\nthat I might not finish\\nthat thou mightest not finish\\nthat he might not finish\\nthat we might not finish\\nthat you might not finish\\nthat they might not finish\\nPAST.\\nthat I may not have finished\\nthat thou mayest not have finished\\nthat he may not have finished\\nthat we may not have finished\\nthat you may not have finished\\nthat they may not have finished\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might not have finished\\nthat thou mightest not have finish\\n1 ed\\nthat he might not have finished\\nthat we might not have finished\\nthat you might not have finished\\nthat they might not have finished\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nfinisii not or do not finish [thou]\\nlet him not finish\\nlet us not finish\\nfinish not or do not finish [you]\\nlet them not finish\\nFlNIR\\nTo Finish (Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE.\\nFin Ss-je\\nfin xa-tu\\ndo I finish or am I finishing\\ndost thou finish", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "152\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nfin St-il\\nfin issons-.now*\\nfiu-issez-vous\\nfiu issent-ifo\\nFin iBBaaaje\\nfin issais -tu\\nfin issait-i7\\nna-nou.i\\n/.-rout\\nfin Lsaaient-tZi\\nFin is-je\\nfin Is4u\\nfin \\\\nu-s-hout\\nfin ttee\\nJin irrntj/.t\\nFin i r\\njin Irat\\nfin Ires\\nmt-A\\n:ri7\\n/?/i Irioi\\ntil nt-j/j\\nAtjtfin i\\nostufin 1\\ndoes lie finish\\ndo we finish\\ndo you finish\\ndo they finish\\nlill EKFFXT.\\ndid I finish or was I finishing\\ndidst thou finish\\ndid he finish\\ndid we finish\\ndid you finish\\ndid they finish\\nFltETElUT DKJUJBUTH.\\ndi.l I finish\\ndidst thou finish\\ndid hfi finish\\ndid we finish\\ndid ymi finish\\ndid they finish\\nFt Tt \u00e2\u0080\u00a2i:i:.\\nshall or will I finish\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2halt tlnm finish\\nshall he finish\\nshall we finish\\nshall you finish\\nshall tiny finish\\nHDITIONAL.\\nnan bt.\\nI would, oonld, or might I\\nfin\\nshooldsl thou finish\\nshould he finish\\nI we finish\\nshould you finish\\nshould they finish\\nMUBHHn iM i iimi i:.\\nhave I finished or did finish\\nha-t thou oished", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n153\\na-t-il fin i\\nawns-nous jin i\\navez-vous fin i\\nont-ils fin i\\nlias he finished\\nhave we finished\\nhave you finished\\nhave they finished\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nAvais-je fin i\\navais-tu fin i\\namit-ilfini\\namons-nous fin i\\naviez-vous fin i\\navaient-ils fin i\\n(had I finished or had I been\\nfinishing\\nhadst thou finished\\nhad he finished\\nhad we finished\\nhad you finished\\nhad they finished\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nEus-je fin i\\neus-tu fin i\\neut-il fin i\\netimes-nous fin i\\neutes-vous fin i\\newrent-ils fin i\\nhad I finished\\nhadst thou finished\\nhad he finished\\nhad we finished\\nhad you finished\\nhad they finished\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nAurai-je fin i\\nauras-tu fin i\\naura-t-ilfin\\\\\\naurons-nous fin i\\naurez-vous fin i\\nauront-ils fin i\\nshall or will I have finished\\nshalt thou have finished\\nshall he have finished\\nshall we have finished\\nshall you have finished\\nshall they have finished\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nAurais-jefini\\naurais-tu fin i\\naurait-il fin i\\naurions-nous fin i\\nauriez-vous fin i\\nauraient-ils fin i\\nj should, would, could, or might I\\nhave finished\\nshouldst thou have finished\\nshould he have finished\\nshould we have finished\\nshould you have finished\\nshould they have finished\\n7*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "154\\nOX THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nFinir To Finish (Negatively and Interrogatively?)\\nINDICATIVE.\\n--je pas\\nhi fin \\\\SrtU P (3\\nh, fin it-//\\nm fin issons-/\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00bb/.y JXM\\nlie Jin \\\\mez~rou$ pas\\nJY- fin issaisjf p\\nin fn in\\nMjfa issirz ri i.i ]i u\\nJfi fin\\n7-- -Jin\\n111 I ll I\\n7/ Jtfl ll\\n7i y//i ini i\\nfin in-/. r,,i/j\u00c2\u00bb pa9\\nr. _/i;/ ir..\\ndo I not finish or am I not fiuishinj\\ndost thou not linish\\ndoes he not finish\\ndo we not finish\\ndo you not linish\\ndo they not linish\\nIMPKRFI .CT.\\nj did I not finish or was 1 not\\nfinishing\\ndidst thou not finish\\ndid he not finish\\ndid we not finish\\ndid yon nol finish\\ndid they not finish\\nPBETHRXT hi.KiM n:.\\ndid I not linish\\ndiilst thou not linish\\ndid he sot finish\\ndid we Dot finish\\ndid yon nol finish\\ndid they sot finish\\nshall or will I not finish\\nShalt thou not finish\\nshall he not finish\\nBhall we not finish\\nshall you not finish\\nshall they not Be\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nm s ght I not\\ni finish\\nshould?) thou not finish", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n155\\nne fin vc ii-il pas\\nTie fin irions-/i ?\u00c2\u00ab5 pas\\nne fin iviez-vous pas\\nne fin iraient-^s pas\\nsliould lie no finish\\nshould we not finish\\nshould you not finish\\nshould they not finisii\\nPRETERIT IXDEFUN ITE.\\nN ai-jepasfini\\nn as-tu pas fin i\\nn a-t-il pas fin i\\nn avons-nous pas fin i\\nn avez-vous pas fin i\\nn ont-ils pas fin i\\nShave I not finished, did I not\\nfinish, or have I not been finish-\\ning,\\nhast thou not finished\\nhas he not finished\\nhave we not finished\\nhave you not finished\\nhave they not finished\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nITavais-pas fin i\\nn amis-tu pas fin i\\nn avait-il pas fin i\\nn acions-nous pas fin i\\nn aviez-vous pas fin i\\nn avaient-Hs pas fin i\\nj had I not finished or liad J not\\nbeen finishing\\nhadst thou not finished\\nhad he not finished\\nhad we not finished\\nhad you not finished\\nhad they not finished\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nN^eus-je pas fin i\\nn eus-tu pas fin i\\nn eut-ilpasfin i\\nn eumes-nous pas fin i\\nn eutes-vous pas fin i\\nM eurent-ils pas fin i\\nhad I not finished\\nhadst thou not finished\\nhad he not finished\\nhad we not finished\\nhad you not finished\\nhad they not finished\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nN aurai-je pas fin i\\nn auras-t i pas fin i\\nn aura-t-il pas fin i\\nn aurons-nous pas fin i\\nn aurez-vous pas fin i\\nn auront-ils pas fin i\\nshall or will I not have finished\\nshalt thou not have finished\\nshall he not have finished\\nshall we not have finished\\nshall you not have finished\\nshall they not have finished", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "156 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nPAST.\\nJTauraisjepas fin i should woald could or nii S ht X\\ni not have finished\\nn awrafatu pas fin i Bhooldst thou not have finished\\nn awraitil pas fin i should he not have finished\\nn auriona-notu pa* fin i should we not have finished\\nn auru z-rous pat fin i should you not have finished\\nn auraunt-il* pas fin i should they not have finished.\\nREMARKS ON VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.\\nThe majority of those verbs are regular and follow the ter-\\nminations of finir. The Irregular Verbs of this conjugation,\\nwhich are very numerous, arc given elsewhere.\\nIII. VERHS OF THE THIRD CONJCG ATIO N.\\nvon; To l; {Affirmatively.)\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPB1 BBS P.\\ni: t.. n reive\\nrtf u to have received\\nPABT1 i.i PRBBBHT.\\nant receiving\\nfUHD Of Tin: PAW tl iri.i: PSBBBXT,\\nAyaut havij\\nI M. in 1 1 i i PAW.\\nreceived\\n[JUDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPBBfl\\ni\u00c2\u00bb I reeeive.don Lve,oran r.\\nis tlmu reo\\nfl reg it l],- r.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n157\\nnous rec evons\\nwus rec evez\\nUs rec oivent\\nwe receive\\nyou receive\\nthey receive\\nJe rec evais\\ntu rec evais\\nil rec evait\\nnous rec evions\\nwus rec eviez\\nUs rec evaient\\nIMPERFECT.\\nj I received, did receive, or was re\\nceiving\\nthou receivedst\\nlie received\\nwe received\\nyou received\\nthey received\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe rec us\\ntu rec us\\nil rec ut\\nnous rec linies\\nwus rec utes\\nUs reg ureut\\nI received or did receive\\nthou receivedst\\nhe received\\nwe received\\nyou received\\nthey received\\nJe rec evrai\\ntu rec evras\\nil rec evra\\nnous rec evrons\\nvous rec evrez\\nUs rec evront\\nI shall or will receive\\nthou shalt receive\\nhe shall receive\\nwe shall receive\\nyou shall receive\\nthey shall receive\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nJe rec evrais\\ntu rec evrais\\nil rec evrait\\nnous rec evrions\\nwus rec evriez\\nUs rec evraient\\nI should, would, could, or might\\nI receive\\nthou shouldst receive\\nhe should receive\\nwe should receive\\nyou should receive\\nthey should receive", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "158\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJai re? u\\ntu as reg u\\nil l Tir u\\nnova aions rer u\\nvoua avee req u\\nils out rtf u\\nJ ltvn x rrr u\\nI U\\nU atait req u\\nnew i\\na nap u\\nf r v u\\nfi ut raj 11\\nI D\\nI fl u\\ntT.i /riii n i n\\nfa 0tfftM\\nR0tM m r\\ntotuaurm\\nI\\nfaurait\\ntu ourou\\ntf\u00c2\u00bb a ur ii..i,t u\\nfketep.it i ~defe\\\\~ite.\\njl have received, did receive, or\\nLave been receiving\\nthou Last received\\nlie has received\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0we have received\\nyou have received\\nthey have received\\nFLUTERFEC T.\\nI had received or had been receiving\\nthou hadsl r\\nhe had received\\nwe had received\\nyon had received\\ntiny had received\\nPBEEKBIT ANTERXOB,\\n1 had received\\nthou ha lal re dved\\nhe had received\\nwe liail received\\nyon had received\\ntiny had r c\\n1 shall or will have received\\nthou Bhalt have received\\nhe 1 1 ;i 1 1 have received\\nwe shall have received\\nvon shall have received\\ntlnv shall have received\\n\\\\i m oral\\ny I Bhonld, would, could, or might\\nhave n\\nthon shonldsl ha\\\\\\nhe should liave received\\nwe sh uld 1 nve r oeived\\nc Ived", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n159\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT\\nQueje reg oive\\nque tu reg oives\\nqu il reg oWe\\nque nous rec evions\\nque vous rec eviez\\nqu ils reg oivent\\nthat I may receive\\nthat tliou mayest receive\\nthat he may receive\\nthat we may receive\\nthat you may receive\\nthat they may receive\\nIMPERFECT.\\nQueje reg usse\\nque tu reg usses\\nqu il reg ut\\nque nous reg ussions\\nque vous reg ussiez\\nqu ils reg ussent\\nthat I might receive\\nthat thou mightest receive\\nthat he might receive\\nthat we might receive\\nthat you might receive\\nthat they might receiv\\nQue j aie reg u\\nque tu aies reg u\\nqu il ait reg u\\nque nous ayons reg u\\nque vous ayez reg u\\nqu ils aient reg u\\nQue j eusse reg u\\nque tu eusses reg u\\nqu il eut reg u\\nque nous eussions reg u\\nque vous eussiez reg u\\nqu ils eusscnt reg u\\nthat I may have received\\nthat thou mayest have received\\nthat he may have received\\nthat we may have received\\nthat you may have received\\nthat they may have received\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might have received\\nthat thou mightest have received\\nthat he might have received\\nthat we might have received\\nthat you might have received\\nthat thev might have received\\nReg ois\\nqu il reg oive\\nree evons\\nrec evez\\nqu ils reg oivent\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD..\\nreceive [thou]\\nlet him receive\\nlet lis receive\\nreceive [you]\\nlet them receive", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "160\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nRecevoiii\\nIfe pas rec evoir\\npas re$ u\\nXf 6 rec evant pas\\nH ay ant pas rec u\\nrec ois pas\\nn .is poj\\npas\\nI\\nevions U\\npen\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2Is m n\\ntu nc r uvr^\\nTo Receive (Negatively)\\nINFINITIVE.\\nnot to receive\\nPAST.\\nnot to have received\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nnot receiving\\nCOMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE.\\nnot having received\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPRESENT.\\nS I receive not, do not receive, or am\\nnot receiving\\ntli .u receivest not\\nhe receives not\\nwe receive d t\\nvon receive not\\nthey receive not\\nIMl KIU T.( T.\\n(I received not, did not receive,**\\nwus not receiving\\nthou receivedst not\\nlie received not\\nire received not\\nyon received not\\nthey received not\\nl ki.iimii:.\\n1 received not or 1M not t\\nt .ui p odvedsl not\\nhe received not\\nwv received not\\nI not\\ni not\\nI ulinil or will not receive", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n101\\nU ne rec evra pas\\nnous ne rec evrons pas\\nvous ne rec evrez pas\\nUs ne rec evront pas\\nhe shall not receive\\nwe shall not receive\\nyou shall not receive\\nthey shall not receive\\nJe ne rec evrais pas\\ntu ne rec evrais pas\\nil ne rec evrait pas\\nnous ne rec evrions pas\\nvous ne rec evriez pas\\nils ne rec evraient pas\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\njl should, would, could, or might\\n1 not receive\\nthou shouldst not receive\\nhe should not receive\\nwe should not receive\\nyou should not receive\\nthey should not receive\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nJe n ai pas rec u\\ntu n as pas rec u\\nil n a pas rec u\\nnous n avojis pas rec u\\nvous n avez pas rec u\\nils n ont pas rec u\\nj I have not received, did not receive,\\nor have not been receiving\\nthou hast not received\\nhe has not received\\nwe have not received\\nyou have not received\\nthey have not received\\nJe navais pas rec u\\ntu n avals pas rec u\\nil n avait pas rec u\\nnous n avians pas rec u\\nvous n aviez pas rec u\\nils n avaient pas rec u\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nj I had not received, or had not been\\nt receiving\\nthou hadst not received\\nhe had not received\\nwe had not received\\nyou had not received\\nthey had not receivcu\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nJe n eus pas rec u I had not received\\ntu n eus pas rec u thou hadst not received\\nil n eut pas rec u he had not received\\nnous n eumes pas rec u we had not received\\nvous n eutes pas rec u you had not received\\nils n eurent pas rec u they had not received", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "162\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe riaurai pas rcr u\\nas pas rcr u\\nU n aura pas r p a\\nrumt n uurons pas rcc u\\ntout n auree pas reg u\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a02s u aiiront pus nc u\\nJc h a trais pas re? u\\ntn n avrais pat r a\\nu* Huuniniit J\\nFUTURE AXTEBTOK.\\nI shall or will not have received\\ntliou shalt not have received\\nhe shall not have received\\nwe shall not have received\\nyon shall not have received\\nthey shall not have received\\nCONDITIONAL IWsT.\\nI should, would, could, or might\\nnot have received\\nthou Bhouldst not have received\\nhe should not have received\\nwe Bhould not have received\\nyou should not have received\\nthey should not have received\\nrpi il M\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0.vent pat\\nqa tl\\np-u\\nQ\\nqur (it\\nqui! ii\\n14 rtr u\\nque ton* Ji a\\nqu Us n aient pas rej\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nFBI -INT.\\ntliat I may not receive\\nthat t In .ii mayeel not receive\\nthat he may not r\\nthai we may not p\\nthat you may nol r\u00c2\u00bb o Ive\\nthat they may not receive\\nDCFKBJ\\nthat I mlghl not r\\nthat thou mightest not r\\nthat be might not i\\nthat we inL ht not\\ntha yon might not receive\\nthat they might d\\nthat I may not have ree\\nthat thon mayeel ti have received\\nthat he may not have received\\nmay not have r. c\\nthat you may not have n\\nthat ihey may ii t have r", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n163\\nQueje n eusse pas rec u\\nque tu n cusses pas rec u\\nPI/UrEEFECT.\\nthat I might not have received\\n(that thou mightest not have re\\nI ceived\\nqu il n eut pas rec u\\nque nous n exissions pas rec u\\nque vous n eussiez pas rec u\\nqu Us n eussent pas rec u\\nthat he might not have received\\nthat we might not have received\\nthat you might not have received\\nthat they might not have received\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nNe rec ois pas receive not or do not receive [thou]\\nqu il ne rec oive pas let him not receive\\nne rec evons pas let us not receive\\nne rec evez pas receive not or do not receive [you]\\nqu Us ne rec oivent pas let them not receive\\nKecevoir\\nBee om-je\\nrec ois-tu\\nrec oxt-il\\nrec evons-nous\\nrec evez-vous\\nrec oivent-ils\\nBee ey is-je\\nrec evais-fat\\nrec evait-#\\nrec eyions-nous\\nrec eviez-vous\\nrec evaient-z7s\\nBee -as-je\\nrec us-tu\\nrec utU\\nTo Receive (Interrogatively?)\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\ndo I receive or am I receiving\\ndost thou receive\\ndoes he receive\\ndo we receive\\ndo you receive\\ndo they receive\\nIMPERFECT.\\ndid I receive\\ndidst thou receive\\ndid he receive\\ndid we receive\\ndid you receive\\ndid they receive\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndid I receive\\ndidst thou receive\\ndid he receive", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "164\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nreg urnes-nous\\nrec ules-vou*\\nrec urent-t\\nRec evrai-je\\nret evns-tn\\nrec evra.-til\\nrec evTons-nous\\nrec exrez-rous\\nrec evront-jY*\\nRrr cvrais-jd\\nrec Brads-fa\\nnil fl\\ni\\ndid we receive\\ndid vera receive\\ndid they receive\\nFUTURE.\\nshall or will I receive\\n6lialt thou receive\\nshall he receive\\nshall we receive\\nshall you receive\\nshall they receive\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nPRESENT.\\nshould, would, could, or might I\\nreceive\\nehouldst thou receive\\nshould be receive\\nshould we receive\\nslmuM y\u00c2\u00ab u receive\\nshould they receive\\n.int i r u\\ntut rer u\\ni ne u\\nAtat\u00c2\u00bbJ6 rer u\\nciT.iixtu rrr u\\nrrr u\\n\u00c2\u00abU ree u\\nrrr u\\nree u\\nfuj^u r^f u\\nTKI.TIKIT IM I IIMI\\nhave 1 received or did 1 receive\\nluu\u00c2\u00abt thou r. C\\nhas he r -i-rivi d\\nhave \u00c2\u00bbv received\\nhave j\\nhave ihrv r\\nI MT! Bl I I T\\n(had I received or had I heen re-\\ntving\\nhadet thou r\\nhad h reoeived\\nhad we reoeived\\nlmd J\\nhad t\\nrnETEIUT AJRTUUOB.\\nhad I receivi d\\nhad?t thou reed", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n165\\neut-il reg u\\nXmes-nous reg v\\neutes-vous reg u\\neurent-ils reg u\\nAurai-je reg u\\nauras-tu reg vl\\naura-t-il reg u\\naurons-nous reg n\\naurez-vous reg u\\nauront-ils reg u\\nAurais-je reg n\\naurais-tu reg u\\naurait-il reg u\\naurions-nous reg a\\nauriez-vous reg u\\nauraient-ils reg u\\nhad lie received\\nLad we received\\nhad you received\\nhad they received\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nshall or will I have received\\nshalt thou have received\\nshall he have received\\nshall we have received\\nshall you have received\\nshall they have received\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nj should, would, could or might I\\nhave received\\nshouldst thou have received\\nshould he have received\\nshould we have received\\nshould you have received\\nshould they have received\\nRec :vom T Receive [Negatively and Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nJfe reg ois-je pas\\nne reg ois-tu pas\\nne reg oit-il pas\\nne rec evons-nous pa\\nne rec evez-vous pas\\nne reg oivent-its pas\\nSfe ree ev is-je pas\\nne rez ev is-tu pas\\n716 rec evait- pas\\nj do I not receive or am I not re-\\nceiving\\ndost thou not receive\\ndoes he not receive\\ndo we not receive\\ndo you not receive\\ndo they not receive\\nIMPERFECT.\\ndid I not receive or was I not re-\\nceiving\\ndidst thou not receive\\ndid he not receive", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "166\\n0:N~ THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\n-ve rec evions-?;ow5 pas\\nne rec eviez-iws i^as\\nne rec evaient-iYs pas\\nNe rec v -je pas\\nne rec ns-tii pas\\nne rer ut-il pas\\nne rer umes-7ious pas\\nne rer fLte vous p s\\nne n urent-iVs pas\\ndid we not receive\\ndid you not receive,\\ndid they not receive\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndid I not receive\\ndidst tliou not receive\\ndid he not receive\\ndid we not receive\\ndid you not receive\\ndid they not receive\\nNe rec evrai-j* pas\\nne rec evras-fu pat\\nevra til pas\\nne rec evront-Us pas\\nshall or will I not receivo\\neliiilt thou not re viv\u00e2\u0080\u009e\\nshall he not receive\\nshall we not receive\\nshall yon not r. CP VW\\nBhall they not receive\\nUTIONAL MOOD.\\nJft n i\\npat\\na\\nM\\ni\\n[should, would, could, or might 1\\nnot -ec-ive\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0houldsl thou do! r ivo\\nshould he not receive\\nshould we nol re\u00c2\u00a9 Ive\\nshould yoa nol receive\\nshould they n it receive\\niMlETEIll f IMHIIMIT.\\nITaije pas r\\ni. .i 1 u n n\\ni\\nn out i\\nhave I not received, did I not ro-\\nr ive, or have I not been re-\\nceiving\\nh:i t thou not r.\\nhafl he not received\\nqoI received\\nft4", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nlo7\\nN amis-je pas reg u\\nn avais-tu pas reg u\\nn avait-il pas reg u\\nn avions-nous pas reg u\\nn amez-vous pas reg u\\nn avaient-Us pas reg u\\nN eus-je pas reg u\\nn eics-tu pas ret;, u\\nn eut-il pas reg u\\nn eumcs-nous pas reg u\\nn eutes-vous pas reg u\\nn eurent-ils pas reg u\\nN auraije pas reg u\\nn auras4u pas reg u\\nn aura-til pas reg u\\nn aurons-nous pas reg u\\nn aurez-vous pas reg u\\nn auront-Us pas reg u\\nJpaurais-je pas reg u\\nn aurais-tu po$ reg u\\nn aurait-il pus reg u\\naurions-nous pas reg\\nn auriez-vous pas reg u\\nn auraient-ils pas reg u\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nj had I not received or iiad I not\\nbeen receiving\\nhadst tliou not received\\nhad he not received\\nhad we not received\\nhad you not received\\nhad they not received\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad I not received\\nhadst thou not received\\nhad he not received\\nhad we not received\\nhad you not received\\nhad they not received\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nshall or will I not have received\\nshalt thou not have received\\nshall he not have received\\nshall we not have received\\nshall you not have received\\nshall they not have received\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nj should, would, could, or mLjht I\\nnot have received\\nshouldst thou not have receive 1\\nshould he not have received\\nshould we not have received\\nshould you not have received\\nshould they not have received\\nREMARKS ON VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.\\nThe following Verbs, all ending in evoir, are conjugated like\\nrecevoir\\nApercevoir,\\ncoTicevoir,\\nto perceive,\\nto conceive.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "lb 8 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\ndecevoir, to deceive.\\npercevoir, to collect.\\ndevoir, to owe.\\nredevoir, to owe again.\\nWhenever the verbs ending in cevoir, in the course of conju-\\ngation have to place o,oor\u00c2\u00ab after the c of the root, a cedilla\\nmust be added to c in order to preserve the pronunciation of\\nthe Infinitive.\\nEx. apcrccvn r.\\nPresent. J ap rfoia\\ntu npi rgoit\\ni! cj\u00c2\u00bb rgoit\\nnous apereewmt (no cedilla needed.)\\nvotts iipi n-citz\\nHo ap tfotomi\\nSubj. Pris Q\\nIJ I t I .III!\\nqu ti i i\u00c2\u00bb n-oire\\nions (no cedilla neededj\\nrcetiet\\nijx rfowent\\nPabt. Pact, -i y\\nPbSBBBT. BUBJ. PBXa Qhc je r^, y-e\\nPabt. Past. Bapu\\nThe Participle Tast of d which is /ii, requires the Cir-\\ncumfl d order to distinguish it from the Genitive of\\nMasculine Article No accent i- given tu the Feminine\\nthere i-* do ambiguity here.\\nAll the other Verb! of this Conjugation arc irregular and\\nwill be given hereafter", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "VEKBS.\\n160\\nIV. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.\\nVendre To Sell (Affirmatively.)\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nVend re to sell\\nAvoir vend u\\nVend ant\\nto have sold\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT,\\nselling\\nCOMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nAyant vend u having sold\\nVendu\\nJe vend s\\ntu vend s\\nU vend\\nnous vend ons\\nvous vend ez\\nUs vend ent\\nJe vend ais\\ntu vend ais\\nil vend ait\\nnous vend ions\\nvous vend iez\\nUs vend aient\\nJe vend is\\ntu vend is\\nil vend it\\nPARTICIPLE PAST.\\nsold\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nI sell, do sell, or am selling\\nthou sellest\\nhe sells\\nwe sell\\nyou sell\\nthey sell\\nIMPERFECT.\\nI sold, did sell, or was selling\\nthou soldest\\nhe sold\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0we sold\\nyou sold\\nthey sold\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI sold or did sel\\nthou soldest\\nhe sold\\n8", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "170\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nnom vend imes\\nvous vend ites\\nUs vend ircnt\\nJe vend rni\\ntu vend ras\\nil vend ra\\nnous vend rons\\nVOtU r iid rez\\nits vend rout\\nJd rend rais\\nrais\\nI rait\\nl lionfl\\nD01M Mnd riez\\nrelent\\n,d u\\nQ n\\nr/ avo I i\\nwe sold\\nyou sold\\nthey sold\\nFUTUKE.\\nI shall or -will sell\\nthou sbalt sell\\nhe shall sell\\nwe shall sell\\nyou shall sell\\nthey shall sell\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD\\nPBS3KKT.\\nI should, would, could, or mi^bt 6ell\\nthou Bhouldsl Bell\\nhe should Bell\\nwe should sell\\nyou should sill\\nthey should sell\\nrKl.TI.KIT IMT.I IMTK.\\nI have sold, did sdl, or have been\\nJ Belling\\nthou hast\\nhe has sold\\nwe have Bold\\nyou have sold\\ntiny have sold\\ni\\nill a rad n( vend u\\nrmrEKii i t\\nI had sold Of had been sidling\\nthou hadst sold\\nh had sold\\nwr had sold\\njoo had sold\\ntb\u00c2\u00aby had M ld\\nl Ki.ii.inr aHTERIOB.\\n1 had sold\\nthou budM Bold", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n171\\nU l ut vend u\\nnous edmes vend u\\nvous eutes vend u\\nils eurent vend u\\nhe had sold\\nwe had sold\\nyou had sold\\nthey had sold\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nTaurai vend u I shall or will have sold\\ntu auras vend u thou shalt have sold\\nil aura vend u he shall have sold\\nnous aurons vend u we shall have sold\\nvous aurez vend u you shall have sold\\nils auront vend u they shall have sold\\nCONDITIONAL, PAST.\\nTaurais vend u\\ntu aurais vend u\\nil aurait vend u\\nnous aurions vend u\\nvous auriez vend u\\nils auraient vend u\\n(I should, would, could, or niigh\\nhave sold\\nthou shouldst have sold\\nhe should have sold\\nwe should have sold\\nyou should have sold\\nthey should have sold\\nQueje vend e\\nque tu vend es\\nqu il vend e\\nque nous vend ions\\nque vous vend iez\\nqu ils vend ent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nthat I may sell\\nthat thou mayest sell\\nthat he may sell\\nthat we may sell\\nthat you may sell\\nthat they may sell\\nQueje vend isse\\nque tu vend isses\\nqu il vend it\\nque nous vend issions\\nque vous vend issiez\\nqu ils vsnd\\nQuefaie vendu\\nque tu aies vend u\\nIMPERFECT.\\nthat I might sell\\nthat thou mightest have sold\\nthat he might sell\\nthat we might sell\\nthat you might sell\\nthat they might sell\\nPAST.\\nthat I may have sold\\nthat thou mayest have sold", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "172\\nON THE PAKTS \\\\.tT SPEECH.\\nqu il ait vend u\\nque nous ayons vend u\\nque vous ai/ez tend u\\nqu ils aient vend a\\nQuej eusse vend u\\nque tu eusses vend u\\nqu il eut vend u\\nque nous eussions vend u\\nque vous eusriez n nd u\\nyu fo eusscnt vend u\\nthat lie may have sold\\nthat we may have sold\\ntliat you may have Bold\\nthat they may have sold\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might have sold\\nthat thou mightest have sold\\nthat he might have sold\\nthat we might have sold\\nthat you might have sold\\nthat they might have sold\\nqu il rend e\\nr. nd ona\\nvend ez\\nqu ils\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nBOH [thou]\\nlet him sell\\nlet us sell\\nsell [you]\\nlet them sell\\nnd ro\\nJTatoir p t.s Mad B\\nTo Sdl {Negatively)\\nINFIX III VE MOOD.\\nntESKNT.\\nnot to sell\\nPAST.\\nnot to have sold\\nRABID Ti l.K P8BSHNT.\\nd ant pas BOt selling\\n00HPO1 ETD 0* Tin: PASTS r i i.i: niF.SEHT.\\nnot having sold\\nINDiCATlVK MOOD.\\nPBBBEHT.\\nc I s. 11 not, do nut Bell, or am not\\ns pat\\ntu M r.nd 8 pas\\nselling\\nthou sellest not", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n173\\nil ne vend pas\\nnous ne vend ons pas\\nvous tie vend ez pas\\nUs ne vend ent pas\\nhe sells not\\nwe sell not\\nyou sell not\\nthey sell not\\nIMPERFECT.\\nJe ne vend ais pas\\ntu ne vend ais pas\\nil ne vend ait pas\\nnous ne vend ions pas\\nvous ne vend iez pas\\nUs ne vend aient pas\\nj I sold not, did not sell, or was not\\nselling\\nthou soldest not\\nhe sold not\\nwe sold not\\nyou sold not\\nthey sold not\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe ne vend is pas\\ntu ne vend is pas\\nil ne vend it pas\\nnous ne vend imes pas\\nvous ne vend ites pas\\nUs ne vend irent pas\\nI sold not or did not sell\\nthou soldest not\\nhe sold not\\nwe sold not\\nyou sold not\\nthey sold not\\nJe ne vend rai pas\\nlu ne vend ras pas\\nil ne vend ra pas\\nnous ne vend rons pas\\nvous ne vend rez pas\\nUs ne vend ront pas\\nI shall or will not sell\\nthou shalt not sell\\nhe shall not sell\\nwe shall not sell\\nyou shall not sell\\nthey shall not sell\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nJe ne vend rais pas\\ntu ne vend rais pas\\nil ne vend rait pas\\nnous ne vend rions pas\\nvous ne vend riez pas\\nils ne \u00c2\u00ab6/ic?,-raient pas\\nfl should, would, could, or might\\nnot sell\\nthou shouldst not sell\\nhe should not sell\\nwe should not sell\\nyou should not sell\\nthey should not sell", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "174\\nOX TH\u00c2\u00a3 PAKTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe n ai pas vend u\\ntu n aspas vend u\\nil ri a pas tend u\\n7)/ ns n avons pas vend u\\nvous n avcz pas rend u\\nUs n ont pas vend u\\nPRETERIT rNDEFIXTTE.\\n$1 have not sold ^id not sell, or\\nhave not been selling\\nthou hast not sold\\nhe has not sold\\nwe have not sold\\nyou have not sold\\nthey have not sold\\nJe n tnau pas vend a\\nr! a\\nU n awrit pas ,,d a\\nnous\\nvous u\\nUs n ar id a\\nVhVVF.llYFXT.\\nI had not sold or had not been selling\\nthou hadst not sold\\nhe had not sold\\nwe had not sold\\nyon had not sold\\nthey had not sold\\nPBBTEBZI\\nJ, (MM\\nftf pOI IN id\\ni? n aid pa* Dend u\\nu\\nd u\\nANTERIOR.\\nI had not sold\\nthou liadst not sold\\nhe had not Bold\\nwe had ool Bold\\nyon had n A s iid\\nthey had QOt Sold\\nRE ANTERIOR.\\nH0VI I\\nI u\\nI shall or wiD not have sold\\nthou shah not have sold\\nhe -hall not have sold\\nwe shall ool have sold\\ny.ni shall n it have sold\\nall QOl have sold\\nJ\\nI u\\nTOU4 id U\\nid a\\nr\\\\sr.\\ny 1 should, would, could, or might\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2il 1 li t liav-\\ngold\\nyon sfa sold", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 175\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nQue je ne vend e pas that I may not sell\\nque tu ne vend es pas that thou mayest not sell\\nqu il ne vend e pas that he may not sell\\nque nous ne vend ions pas that we may not sell\\nque vous ne vend iez pas that you may not sell\\nqu ils ne vend ent pas that they may not sell\\nIMPERFECT.\\nQueje ne vend isse pas that I might not sell\\nque tu ne vend isses pas that thou mightest not sell\\nqu il ne vend it pas that he might not sell\\nque nous ne vend issions pas that we might not sell\\nque votes ne vend issiez pas that you might not sell\\nqu ils ne vend issent pas that they might not sell\\nQueje n aie pas vend u that I may not have sold\\nque tu n aiespas vend u that thou mayest not have sold\\nqu il n ait pas vend u that he may not have sold\\nque nous n ayons pas vend u that we may not have sold\\nque vous n ayez pas vend U that you may not have sold\\nqu ils n aient pas vend u that they may not have sold\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nQueje n eussepas vend u that I might not have sold\\nque tu n eusses pas vend u that thou mightest not have sold\\nqu il n eilt pas vend u that he might not have sold\\nque nous n eussions pas vend u that we might not have sold\\nque vous n eussiez pas vend u that you might not have sold\\nqu ils n eussent pas vend u that they might not have sold\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nNe vend s pas sell not or do not sell [thou]\\n\u00c2\u00a7u il ne vend e pas let him not sell\\nne vend ons pas let us not sell\\nne vend ez pas sell not or do not sell [you]\\nqu ils ne vend ent pas let them not sell", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nTenure\\nTo Sell\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\n(Interrogatively.)\\nEst-ce queje vend s\\nvend s-tu\\nvend-il\\nvend ons-noua\\nvend ez-rous\\nvend eut-ils\\nVend tds-je\\nvend a.\\\\s-tu\\nr, nd ait-fZ\\nn nd ions-notM\\nr nd i i\\nrc /c/ uient-tZ*\\n1 is-j\u00c2\u00ab\\nr ii\\nrend imes-fuwi\\ntend ir -ut-i7\u00c2\u00ab\\ni\\ntend raa-fu\\nn til\\nint-tZi\\nPRESENT.\\ndo I sell or am I selling\\ndost tliou sell\\ndoes he sell\\ndo we sell\\ndo you sel\\ndo they sell\\nIMPERFECT.\\ndill I sell or was I selling\\ndidst thou sell\\ndid he sell\\ndid we sell\\ndid you sell\\ndid they Bell\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndid I sell\\ndidst thou sell\\ndid lie sell\\ndi l we s.ll\\ndid y m sell\\ndiil they b\u00c2\u00abdl\\nFUTl I.E.\\nsliull 0T will I sell\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0halt thou sell\\nbIirII he Ball\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0hall we Bell\\nshall you\\nshall (hay h.-II\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nFBI D\\nndt^f should, would, could, or might I sell\\nBhonldsl thou bbQ\\nMtld rait il M he sell", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "VERB5.\\n177\\nvend Tiom-nous\\nvend viez-vous\\nvend vaiont-ils\\nAi-je vend u\\nas-tu vend u\\nd-t-il vend u\\navons-nous vend u\\navez-vous vend u\\nont-ils vend u\\nAvais-je vend u\\navais-tu vend u\\navait-il vend u\\navions-nous vend u\\naviez-vous vend u\\navaient4ls vend u\\nshould we sell\\nshould you sell\\nshould they sell\\nPKETSKIT INDEFINITE.\\nhave I sold or did I sell\\nhast thou sold\\nhas he sold\\nhave we sold\\nhave you sold\\nhave they sold\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nhad I sold or had I been selling\\nhadst thou sold\\nhad he sold\\nhad we sold\\nhad you sold\\nhad they sold\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nEus-je vend u had I sold\\neus-tu vend u hadst thou sold\\neut-il vend u had he sold\\neumes-nous vend u had we sold\\neutes-vous vend u had you sold\\neurent-ils vend u had they sold\\nAurai-je vend u\\nauras-tu vend u\\nauro t-il vend u\\naurons-nous vend u\\navrez-vous vend u\\nauront-ils vend u\\nAurais-je vend u\\naurais-tu vend u\\nauraitil vend u\\nFDTORE ANTERIOR.\\nshall or wi l I have sold\\nshalt thou have sold\\nshall he have sold\\nshall we have sold\\nshall you have sold\\nshall they have sold\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nshould, would, could, or might J\\nhave sold\\nshouldst thou have sold\\nshould he have sold\\n8*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "ITS\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\naurions-nous vend u\\nauriez-vous tend u\\nauraient-ils vend u\\nshould we have sold\\nshould you have sold\\nshould thev have sold\\nVeni\\nTo Sell [Negatively and Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nEeUee queje ne tend s pas\\nid B4u pas\\nne vend 4\\nooB-iunu pat\\nJi tS\\ndo I not sell or am I not selling\\ndost thou not sell\\ndoes he not sell\\ndo we not s 11\\ndo you nol Bell\\ndo they not sell\\niMiT.r.ir.cT.\\nait Jul*\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ne tend icz-rous pat\\nI aient i s pas\\ndid I not sell or was I not selling\\ndi.lst thou not sell\\ndid be Dot sell\\ndid we not sell\\ndi l you not sell\\ndid tlirv not sell\\nPRETERIT I r.l-TSITE.\\nX pas\\nne tend I\\ndid I not s.-ll\\ndidst tliou not sell\\ndid he not si-11\\nI .i-l we i.\\nnot II\\ndid tliev not soil\\nd rni-/ pi t\\nne tend rcz-rous pas\\nne oiu! Kmtdb pas\\nshall Of ill 1 I\\nelialt thou not nil\\nshall h no;\\nshall We not Sill\\nm doI -ill", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "YEKBS.\\n179\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nNe vend rais-je pas\\nne vendnds-tu pas\\nne vend mit-il pt\\\\~\\nne vend vions-nous pas\\nne vend riez-voi/s pas\\nne vend laient-ils pas\\nt should, would, could, or might I\\nnot sell\\nshouldst thou not sell\\nshould he not sell\\nshould we not sell\\nshould you not sell\\nshould they not sell\\nN ai-je pas vend u\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nj have I not sold, did I not sell or\\nhave I not b\u00c2\u00aben selling\\nn as-tu pas vend u hast thou not sold\\nn a-t-il pas vend u has he not sold\\nn av ns-nous pas vend u have we not sold\\nn avez-vous pas vend u have you not sold\\nn ont Us pas vend u have they not sold\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nN avais-je pas vend u\\nn avais-tu pas vend u\\nn avait-il pas vend u\\nn avions-nous pas vend u\\nn avicz-vous pas vend u\\nn awient-ils pas vend u\\nj had I not sold, or had I not been\\nselling\\nhadst thou not sold\\nhad he not sold\\nhad we not sold\\nhad you not sold\\nhad they not sold\\nN exts-je pas vend u\\nn eus-tu pas vend u\\nn eut-il pas vend u\\nn eumes-nous pas vend u\\nn eutes-vous pas vend u\\nn eurent-ils pas vend u\\nUTaurai-je pas vend u\\nn auras-tupas vend u\\nn aura-t-il pas vend u\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nhad I not sold\\nhadst thou not sold\\nhad he not sold\\nhad we not sold\\nhad you not sold\\nhad they not sold\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nshall or will I not have sold\\nshalt thou not have sold\\nshall he not have sold\\nn aurons-nouspas vend u\\nshall we not have sold", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "180 OX THE PA I ITS OF SPEECH\\nn aurez-vous pas vend u 6liall you not Lave sold\\nn auront-ils pas tend u shall they not have sold\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nshould, would, could, or might I\\nA aurais-je pas vend u\\nnot have sold\\nn aurais-tn pus vend u shouldst thou not have sold\\nn auradt-il pan vend u should he not have sold\\nn aurions-nous pas vend u should we not have sold\\nn auriez-rous pus vend u should you not have sold\\nn auraient-Us pas vend u should they not have sold\\nTHE DIFFF.KENT KINDS OF VKRBS.\\nAfter having thus shown the manner in which the verbs arc\\nconjugated according to the tour conjugations, it becomes ne-\\nBsary to learn that French verbs differ not in Conn only, but\\nin nature also. We find accordingly,\\n1. At. iii.-h express an action directed upon an\\nimmediate object. They are often called Transitive Verbs, as it\\nwere becaui over (transire) upon the obr\\nject, which is their lir -t object, and consequently always in the\\naccusative case. To Rod out if a verb is an active verb in\\nh, take tin- first person, and it the words personne, some-\\nbody, r quel que chose, something, can be added, the verbis\\nit not, it is neuter,\\nEx. fni],j r: s I strike somebody. Active.\\n.1 read something. Active.\\n(somebody\\nmarcher: je march I walk\\nV- i ithing\\ncannot be said, hence i iter.\\nnponnd tens.-. i, v meana of tin\\nAuxiliary Verb avoir.\\nEx. I have struck\\nI have read\\n2. X ther an action that boa no", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "181\\ndirect object, or no action at all, but merely a state or a condi-\\ntion. They are also called Intransitive Verbs.\\nEx. enlrer, to enter, can only be used with in entrer dans lo\\nsalon, to enter into the parlor; emhellir, to grow handsome, ex-\\npresses no action, but merely a condition.\\nNeuter Verbs make their compound .enses by means of the\\nAuxiliary avoir or etre, according to established usage a few\\ntake either avoir or etre, changing in signification accordingly.\\nThe following neuter verbs are conjugated with ttre, all otbers\\nwith avoir\\naborder*\\naccoucher\\naccourvr*\\naccroitre*\\naller\\napparai re*\\narriver\\naugmenter*\\navenir or adve-\\ntdr\\nbaisser*\\ncesser* (1)\\nchanger* (2)\\nchoir\\nconvenir\\nto land\\nia verb used in\\nsurgery\\nto run to\\nto increase\\nto go\\nto appear\\nto arrive\\nto increase\\nto happen\\nto fall, to decrease\\nto cease\\nto change\\nto fall\\nto agree\\ncroitre*\\ndiborder*\\ndt camper*\\ndecider\\ndechoir*\\ndecroitre*\\ndegenerer*\\ndemeurer*\\ndescendre* (3)\\ndevenir\\ndiminuer\\ndisconvenir\\ndisparaitre*\\nechapper* (4)\\nechoir*\\nechouer*\\nto grow\\nto overflow\\nto decamp\\nto die\\nto decay-\\nto decrease\\nto degenerate\\nto stay or remain\\nto go down\\nto become\\nto decrease\\nto deny or disown\\nto disappear\\nto escape\\nto become due\\nto run aground\\n(1) Cesser takes etre when there is no expectation of a return.\\n(2) Changer, applied to persons takes etre, when used to express a change\\nin the physiognomy, and avoir when it alludes to a moral change.\\n(S) It is very easy to distinguish with all these verbs, which auxiliary\\nmust be selected for it is customary in English, to substitute the verb to\\ne tor to go, when the action has entirely ceased. This substitution cannot\\ntake place in French thus, he has gone down, as it implies that he is still\\ndown, must be translated by il est descendu, while he has ler-.n down, will\\nbe translated by il a descendu, etc.\\n(4) Echapper signifies to pass unperceived, and then takes avoir it has\\nbesides the meaning of to let slip, -vh^n it takes etre.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "182\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nembdlir*\\nempire?*\\nentrer* (3)\\nexpir, r* (5)\\ngrandir*\\nmonter* (3)\\nmourir\\nnaitre\\npartir*\\nparvi i ir\\npasser* (G)\\npCrir* (7)\\nto blow\\nto grow handsome\\nto grow worse\\nto enter\\nto expire\\nto grow tall\\nto intervene\\nto go up\\nto die\\nto be born\\nto set out\\nto attain\\nto pass away\\nto perish\\nto come from\\now jronng\\n(3) to go down again\\nredevenir\\nremonter* (3)\\nrentrer*\\nrepattir*\\nressortir* (3)\\nrester*\\nrcsulkr*\\nretomber\\nretoumer\\nsonner* (8)\\nsortir* (3)\\nturvenir\\ncm UUr\\nto become again\\nto go up again\\nto come in again\\nto set out again\\nto go out again\\nto stay\\nto result\\nto fall again\\nto return\\nto come back\\nto ring\\nto go out\\ntO befall\\nto fall\\nto come\\nto grow old\\n8. Fieri which express an action, which the subject\\n(nominative) of the verb Buffers From an agent, which may be\\nUs fun lit butt us pur leu-\\nI am persecuted Qty Bomebody.)\\nthey wen- beaten by the enemy.\\nVerbs Consist of the auxiliary verb itr* with tho\\nparticiple past, which must agree in gender and number with\\nthe BUl\\nI\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2prise\\nthey were wounded\\nI\\nMid Urt when it mentis to ctata\\nI par, Mil menus,\\nd wixh prrir. when tl i I to; uroir, whet\\ni hen it is in rtain nlntiot\\nthe riugiug at I other mentioned in ths", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 1S3\\n4. Pronominal Verbs are so called in French, because they\\nare always accompanied in the infinitive by the pronoun se, and\\nthroughout their conjugation by two personal pronouns.\\nEx. se promener, to walk.\\nPresent. Je me promene\\ntu te promenes\\nil se promene\\nnous nous promenons\\nvous voit-s promenez\\nUs se prominent\\nThey are divided into three classes, according to their\\nmeaning\\na. Reflexive Verbs, which express an action that is reflected\\nupon the subject of the verb. The pronoun se in the infinitive\\nis here translated by one s self, and the second pronoun in the\\ncourse of conjugation by myself] thyself, himself, etc.\\nEx. se tromper, to deceive one s self.\\nPRESENT.\\nJe me trompe I deceive myself\\ntu te trompes thou deceivest thyself\\nil se trompe he deceives himself\\nnous nous trompons we deceive ourselves\\ntous vous trompez you deceive yourselves\\nUs se trompent they deceive themselves\\nb. Reciprocal Verbs, which express an action that is mutually\\naffecting two or more persons. The pronoun se in the infin\\nitive is here translated by each other or one another, and the\\nsecond pronoun in the course of conjugation by the same\\nwords.\\nEx. s entr aimer, to love each other.\\nPRESENT.\\nKous nous entfaimons we love each other\\nvous vous entr aitnes you love each other\\nils s entr aiment they love each other", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "184 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nc. Pronominal Verbs Proper are such as are peculiar to the\\nFrench language and are not so used in English. The pronoun\\nse in the infinitive, and the second pronoun in the course of\\nconjugation, are here not translated at all, because their use is\\npeculiar to French and not required iu English.\\nEx. se lever, to rise.\\nPRESENT.\\nJe me live\\nI rise\\ntu te I\\nthou risest\\nil se tice\\nhe rises\\nnous nous letons\\nwe rise\\nyou rise\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Lilt\\nthey rise\\nAll pronominal Verbs are conjugated by means of the aux\\ni .iarv verb lire.\\n5. Impersonal Vnhs, which express an action performed, not\\nby a person, bul by some ether agency. They are used only\\nin the third person singular.\\nEx. il j l, nl, it rains; il ghU, it freezes; il arrive, it happens;\\nil ii i, there is il convient, it is proper.\\nThese various kinds of verbs are conjugated like the regular\\nverba of the four conjugations, except the numerous class 01\\nPronominal verba, which require the adclitit.ii of personal pro-\\nnouns, and of irhich therefore, one is here given in full.\\nSk Li.vku To h {Affirmatively.)\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\ner t- rise\\nIn 6 to have risen\\nPASTS ifi.i: i Ki:-i.NT.\\n8cktia.nl rising", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n185\\nCOMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nS etant lev e Laving risen\\nLev e\\nPARTICIPLE PAST\\nrisen\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nJe me lev e\\ntu te lev es\\nil se lev e\\nnous nous lev ons\\nvous vous lev ez\\nUs se lev ent\\nI rise, do rise, or am rising\\nthou risest\\nlie rises\\nwe rise\\nyou rise\\nthey rise\\nJe me lev ais\\ntu te lev ais\\nil se lev ait\\nnous nous lev ions\\nvous vous lev iez\\nUs se lev aient\\nI rose, did rise,\\nthou rosest\\nhe rose\\nwe rose\\nyou rose\\nthey rose\\nor was rising\\nJe me lev ai\\ntu te lev as\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2U se lev a\\nnous nous lev ames\\nvous vous lev ates\\nUs se lev erent\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI rose or did rise\\nthou rosest\\nhe rose\\nwe rose\\nyou rose\\nthey rose\\nJe me lev erai\\ntu te lev eras\\nil se Uv era\\nnous nous lev erons\\nwus vous lev erez\\nUs se lev eront\\nI shall or will rise\\nthou shalt rise\\nhe shall rise\\nwe shall rise\\nyou shall rise\\nthey shall rise", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "186\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nJe me lev erais\\ntil te lev erais\\nU se lev erait\\nnous nous lev erions\\nnous vous lev eriez\\nUs se lev eraient\\nPRESENT.\\nI should, would, could, or might\\nrise\\nthou shouldst rise\\nhe should rise\\nwe should rise\\nyou should rise\\nthey should rise\\nJe me suis lev e\\nmETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nI have risen, did rise, or have been\\nrising\\ntu fes lev e\\nUsse tout I, c t s\\nt i f oit\\nil s ti\\n7/.\\nthou l a t risen\\nhe lias risen\\ni we have risen\\nyou have r ie n\\ntiny have risen\\nrLCTEKi r\u00c2\u00bb r.\\nI had risen or had been rising\\nthou hadst risen\\nlie had risen\\nwe had risen\\nhad ris. n\\nthe; had r\\n771\\ntU f\\nr AMI RIOB,\\nI ha\\nthon ha\\nwe lm.i\\nyon had ri en\\nthe; had risen\\nI Bhall or will 1 1 i\\nBhalt hare i\\nhave risen\\nnous nous serous h", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n187\\nvous vous serez lev is\\nUs se seront lev es\\nJe me serais lev e\\ntu te serais lev e\\nil se serait lev e\\nnous nous serious lev es\\nvous vous seriez lev es\\nUs se seraient lev es\\nyou shall have risen\\nthey shall have risen\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nI should, would, could or might,\\nhave risen\\nthou shouldst have risen\\nhe should have risen\\nwe should have risen\\nyou should have risen\\nthey should have risen\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nQue je me lev e\\nque tu te lev es\\nqu il se lev e\\nque nous nous foe- ions\\nque vous vous lev iez\\nqu ils se lev ent\\nQue je me lev asse\\nque tu te lev asses\\nqu il se lev at\\nque nous nous lev assions\\nque vous vous lev assiez\\nqu ils se i\\nthat I may rise\\nthat thou mayest rise\\nthat he may rise\\nthat we may rise\\nthat you may rise\\nthat they may rise\\nIMPEKFECT.\\nthat I might rise\\nthat thou mightest rise\\nthat he might rise\\nthat we might rise\\nthat you might rise\\nthat they might rise\\nQue je me sois lev e\\nque tu te sois lev e\\nqu il se soit lev e\\nque nous nous soyons lev es\\nque vous vous soyez lev es\\nqu ils se soient lev es\\nPAST.\\nthat I may have risen\\nthat thou mayest have risen\\nthat he may have risen\\nthat we may have risen\\nthat you may have risen\\nthat they may have risen\\nQue je me fusse lev e\\nque tu te fusses lev 6\\nqu il se fffl lev 4\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nthat I might have risen\\nthat thou mightest have risen\\nthat he might have risen", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "188\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nque nous nous fussions lev es\\nque rous vous fussiez lev es\\nqu tts se fussent lev es\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nLev e-toi rise [thou]\\nqu il se lev e let him rise\\nlev ons-nous let us rise\\nlev ezrvous rise [you]\\nqu tts se tiv ent let them rise\\nthat we might have risen\\nthat you might have risen\\nthat they might have risen\\nRe Lever\\nNe pas se lev er\\nJfi pat fftrt let 6\\nNe se lev ant\\nTo Rise\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nnot to rise\\nr.vsT.\\nnot to have risen\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nnot rising\\n(Negatively.)\\nCOMPOUND OF Tin: PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nNe s itant pat\\nnot having risen\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nJe nt me let c pat\\ntu in- U Ur es pas\\nil ne M lit 6\\nnous ne r ons pas\\nr,,\u00c2\u00bbM M I\\nUs ne se Uc ent pas\\ntu m U Uv his pas\\npresent.\\nI rise not, do not rise, or am not\\nrising\\nthou risest not\\nhe rises not\\nwe rise not\\njroa rise not\\nthey ri\\nDOT\\nI rose nut. did not rise, or was not\\nr\\nthou rotect not", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 189\\nU ne se lev ait pas he rose not\\nnous ne nous lev ions pas we rose not\\nvous ne vous lev iez pas you rose not\\nUs ne se lev aient pas they rose not\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe ne me lev ai pas I rose not or did not rise\\ntu ne te lev as pas thou rosest not\\nU ne se lev a pas he rose not\\nnotes ne nous lev ames pas we rose not\\nvous ne vous lev ates pas you rose not\\nUsnese lev erent pas they rose not\\nJe ne me lev erai pas I shall or will not rise\\ntu ne te lev eras pas thou shalt not rise\\nU ne se lev era pas he shall not rise\\nnous ne nous lev erons pas we shall not rise\\nvous ne vous lev erez pas you shall not rise\\nUs ne se lev eront pas they shall not rise\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nJe ne me lev erais pas\\nI should, would, could, or might\\nnot rise\\ntu ne te Uv erais pas thou shouldst not rise\\nU ne se lev erait pas he should not rise\\nnous ne nous lev erions pas we should not rise\\nvous ne vous lev eriez pas you should not rise\\nUs ne se lev eraient pas they should not rise\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nT (I have not risen, did not rise, 01\\nJe ne me suis pas lev e i\\nhave not been rising\\ntu ne t es pas lev e thou hast not risen\\nil ne s est pas lev e he has not risen\\nnous ne nous sommes pas lev es we have not risen\\nvous ne vous etes pas lev es you have not risen\\nUs ne se sont pas lev es they have not risen", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "100\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe tie m ctaispas lev e\\ntu ne t etais pas lev e\\nU ne s itait pas lev e\\nnousne nous Stums pas lev C\\ntons ne vous etiez pas lev es\\nUs ne s ctaknt pas lev es\\nPLUPERFECT.\\n(I had not risen or had not been.\\nrising\\nthou hadst not risen\\nhe had not risen\\n5 we had not risen\\nyou had not risen\\nthey had not risen\\nJc ne me fas pas let e\\ntu ne tefuspas lev e\\nil ne sefut pat\\nnous c\\nIS h B s\\nih ne sef tinit jiris let 6s\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nI had not risen\\nthou hadst not risen\\nhe had not risen\\nwe had not risen\\nyou had not risen\\nthev had not risen\\nPTJTUHH\\nM pas lev e\\ntn m I\\nU m m n ra pas lev e\\nnous n now\\nil* ne H\\nANTERIOR.\\nI shall or will not have risen\\nthou shalt not have risen\\nho shall not have risen\\nwe shall nut have risen\\nyOU shall not have ri-en\\nthey Bhall nol have risen\\ni [ON \\\\i. PAST.\\njt m dm terait pas\\ntu a r tr rats pas\\nUs ne se seraientpat\\n1 should, would, could, or might\\nnot have risen\\nthou shoulds not have risen\\nhe should not have risen\\nold no have risen\\nyou should not have risen\\nthey should not have risen\\nSUIUr.NCTIVK MOOR\\nem -i rt.\\ne pas\\nflM on?\\nthat I may not rise\\nthat thou mayesl not rise\\nthai be may not ri e\\nfi.Ht we may nor ri-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 191\\nque vous ne vous lev iez pas that you may not rise\\nqu ils ne se lev ent pas that they may not rise\\nIMPERFECT.\\nQueje ne me lev asse^as that I might not rise\\nque tu ne te lev asses pas that thou mightest not rise\\nqu il ne se lev sit pas that he might not rise\\nque nous ne nous lev assions pas that we might not rise\\nque vous ne vous lev assiez pas that you might not rise\\nqu ils ne se lev assent pas that they might not rise\\nPAST.\\nQueje ne rue sois pas lev e that I may not have risen\\nque tu ne te sois pas lev e that thou mayest not have risen\\nqu il ne se soitpas lev e that he may not have risen\\nque nous ne nous soyons pas lev es that we may not have risen\\nque wus ne vous soyez pas lev es that you may not have risen\\nqu ils ne se soient pas lev es that they may not have risen\\nPLUPERFECT\\nQueje ne me fusse pas lev e that I might not have risen\\nque tu ne te fusses pas lev e that thou mightest not have risen\\nqu il ne se fut pas lev e that he might not have risen\\nque nous ne nous fussions pas lev es that we might not have risen\\nque vous ne vousfussiez pas lev es that you might not have risen\\nqu ils ne sefussent pas lev es that they might not have risen\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nNe te lev e pas rise not or do not rise [thou]\\nqu il roe se lev e pas let him not rise\\nne nous lev ons pas let us not rise\\nne vous lev ez pas rise not or do not rise [you]\\nqu ils ne se lev ent pas let them not rise\\nSe Lever To Rise (Interrogatively.)\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nMe lev e-je do I rise or am I rising\\nte lev es-ta dost thou rise", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "192\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nse lev e-t-il\\nnous lev ons-nous\\ntous lev ez-vous\\nse lev ent-ils\\nMe lev ais-je\\nte lev is-tu\\nse lev ait-il\\nnous lev ions-nous\\nnous lev ie eotu\\nse lev aient-tfs\\nMe lev ai-je\\nte lev as-tu\\nse lev aAU\\nRJUes-nOUl\\nc utcs-cou*\\nmils\\nr:\\\\\\\\jf\\nru til\\nI\\nrait il\\nnous U\\ntout lev Brim B9MI\\nm i- r .TiiH nt A\\nMit tuU\\nfet tu Isv e\\ndoes lie rise\\ndo we rise\\ndo you rise\\ndo they rise\\nIMPERFECT.\\ndid I rise or was I rising\\ndidst thou rise\\ndid he rise\\ndid we rise\\ndid you rise\\ndid they rise\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ndill I rise\\ndidst thou rise\\ndid he rise\\ndid we rise\\ndid you rise\\ndid they rise\\nshall or will I rise\\nshall thoa rise\\nshall he rise\\nshall \\\\v ri^ 1\\nU rise\\nshall they rise\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPHI. SI NT\\nshould, would, onld, nr might I rise\\nBhouldsl thou\\nshould lie rise\\nshould ire rise\\nshould you riso\\nshould tiny rise\\nPKETKKIT INlU.riMTK.\\nhave 1 risi-n or did I risn\\nliast thou ri* ii", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n193\\ns est-il lev e\\nnous sommes-nous lev es\\ndous etes-vous lev es\\nse sont-ils lev es\\nlias he risen\\nhave we risen\\nhad you risen\\nhad they risen\\nPLUPERFECT\\nM etais-je lev e\\nt etais-tu lev e\\ns etait-il lev e\\nnous etions-nous lev es\\nvous etiez-vous lev es\\ns etaient-ils lev es\\nhad I risen or had I been rising\\nhadst thou risen\\nhad he risen\\nhad we risen\\nhad you risen\\nhad they risen\\nMe fus-je lev e\\nte fus-tu lev e\\nse fut-il lev e\\nnous fames-nous lev es\\nvous futes-vous lev es\\nse furent-ils lev es\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR\\nhad I risen\\nhadst thou risen\\nhad he risen\\nhad we risen\\nhad you risen\\nhad they risen\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nMe s rai-je lev e\\nte serastu lev e\\nse sera-t-il lev e\\nnous serons-nous lev es\\nvous serez-vous lev es\\nse seront-ils lev es\\nshall or will I have risen\\nshalt thou have risen\\nshall he have risen\\nshall we have risen\\nshall you have risen\\nshall theyhave risen\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nMe serais-je iet e\\nte serais-tu lev e\\nse serait-il lev e\\nnous serions-nous lev es\\nvous seriez-vous lev es\\nse seraient-ils lev es\\nj should, would, could, or mia;ht I\\nhave risen\\nshouldst thou have risen\\nshould he have risen\\nshould we have risen\\nshould you have risen\\nshould they have risen\\n9", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "194\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nSe Lever To Rise (Xegatively and Interrogatively.)\\nindicative MOOD.\\nNe me let e-je pas\\nne te lev es-tu pat\\nne se lev e-t-il pas\\nne nous lev ons-nous pas\\nne vous lev ez-r\\nne se lev ent-ils pas\\nNeme Uv ais-je pas\\nne tr hv ai^-t i pat\\nr ait-iV\\ntw runtt I, laaa-nout pas\\nne 90UM\\nne se h r aient-tfa pat\\ndo I not rise or am I not rising\\ndost thou not rise\\ndoes he not rise\\ndo we not rise\\ndo you not rise\\ndo they not rise\\nIMPERFECT.\\ndid I not rise or was I not rising\\ndidst thou not rise\\ndid he not rise\\ndid we not rise\\ndid you doI rise\\ndid they not rise\\nNe me lev ai- pas\\nlie t V\\nne se\\nne\\nne te lev ferent\\nim Ti 1:1 1 DSFXHTTB.\\ndid I not rise\\ndidst thou ii. it rise\\ndid In- not rise\\ndid we nut rise\\ndid you DOl rise\\ndid they not rise\\nNe me U\\nI\\nne n\u00c2\u00bb\u00c2\u00ab \\\\tt pas\\nne to\\nidiall Of will I n .t rise\\nslmlt tlinii not rise\\nshall he not rise\\nshall WS not ri*-\\nshall ymi not rise\\nshall they not ris\u00c2\u00ab-\\nCONDITIONAL M\u00c2\u00ab 1\\nne te Uc fie III p u\\nPRK8KNT.\\n(should, would, could, or might I\\nnut rise\\nshouldst thou QOi", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n195\\nne se lev exslt-il pas\\nne nous lev enions-nous pas\\nne vous lev enez-vous pas\\nne, se lev er ient-ils pas\\nshould lie not rise\\nshould we not rise\\nshould you not rise\\nshould they not rise\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nNe me suis-je pas lev e\\nne t es-tu pas lev e\\nne s est-il pas lev e\\nne nous sommes-nous pas lev es\\nne vous etes-vous pas lev es\\nne se sont-ils pas lev es\\nj have I not risen, did I not rise, or\\nhave I not been rising\\nhast thou not risen\\nhas he not risen\\nhave we not risen\\nhave you not risen\\nhave they not risen\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nNe m etais-je pas lev e\\nne fetais-tu pas lev e\\nne s etait-il pas lev e\\nne nous etions-nous pas lev es\\nne vous etiez-vous pas lev es\\nne s etaient-ils pas lev es\\nj had I not risen or had I not been\\nrising\\nhad st thou not risen\\nhad he not risen\\nhad we not risen\\nhad you not risen\\nhad they not risen\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nWe me fus-je pas lev e\\nne te fus-tu pas lev e\\nne se fut-il pas lev e\\nne nous fames-nous pas lev es\\nne vous futes-vous pas lev es\\nr.-e se furent-ils pas lev es\\nhad I not risen\\nhadst thou not risen\\nhad he not risen\\nhad we not risen\\nhad you not risen\\nhad they not risen\\nFUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nNe me serai-je pas lev e\\nne te seras-tu pas lev e\\nne se sera-t-il pas lev e\\nne nous serons-nous pas lev i\\nne vous serez-vous pas lev es\\nne se seront-ils pas lev es\\nshall or will I not have risen\\nshalt thou not have risen\\nshall he not have risen\\nshall we not have risen\\nshall you not have risen\\nshall they not have risen", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "196 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCONDITIONAL PAST.\\nshould, would, could, or niijjht I\\nNe me serais-je pas let e j\\nl not have risen\\nne te serais-tu pas let) e shouldst thou not have risen\\nne se serait-il pas b b should he not have risen\\nne jums serions-noua pas lev es should we not have risen\\nne vous seriez-vous pas lee es should you not have risen\\nne se seraient-ils pas h r ea should they not have risen\\nFor the purpose of practising Pronominal Verbs, s en aller\\nwhich contains the pronoun en, is lure added,\\nCONJUGATION OF THE VERB b bN ALLBR.\\nS kn Ai.i.ku To Affirmatively.)\\n1MTMTIVK MOOD.\\nriu.-EXT.\\nbr to go away\\nS en it.-, to have gone away\\nTARTU DPI\\nlOoni away\\nI HFOinn) Of Tin: iwnric in.r. PR]\\ny,n Uant alii having gone away\\nPASTD 1 1 -i .1. PAOT.\\nEn alii away\\nINK ATI vi; MOOD.\\naway, do ^o nwnv. oj am\\nvan\\naway\\ntho\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0way\\niUicntont Any go away", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n107\\nJe m en allais\\ntu t en allais\\nil s en allait\\nnous nous en allions\\nvous vous en alliez\\nUs s en allaient\\nJe m en allai\\ntu ten alias\\nil s en alia\\nnous nous en alldmes\\nvous vous en alldtes\\nUs s en allerent\\nIMPERFECT.\\nI went away, did go away, or was\\ngoing away\\nthou wentest away\\nlie went away\\nwe went away\\nyou went away\\nthey went away\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nI went away or did go away\\nthou wentest away\\nhe went away\\nwe went away\\nyou went away\\nthey went away\\nJe m en irai\\ntu t en iras\\nil s en ira\\nnous nous en irons\\nvous vous en ires\\nUs s en iront\\nI shall or will go away\\nthou shalt go away\\nhe shall go away\\nwe shall go away\\nyou shall go away\\nthey shall go away\\nJe m en irais\\ntu t en irais\\nil s en irait\\nnous nous en irions\\nvous vous en iriez\\nUs s en iraient\\nJe m en suis alle\\ntu t en es alle\\nil s en est alle\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\n^1 should, would, could, or might\\ngo away\\nthou shouldst go away\\nhe should go away\\nwe should go away\\nyou should go away\\nthey should go away\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\n1 1 went away, did go away, or have\\ngone away\\nthou hast gone away\\nhe has gone away", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "198\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nnous nous en sommes alles\\ntons tous en etis altis\\nUs s en sont alles\\nJe m en etais alle\\ntu fen etais alle\\nil s en etait alle\\niuxis nous en etiojis alles\\ntous vous en ttkz alles\\ntta (ten etoimt altts\\nJ, in a fus alle\\nt i t i n fus alle\\nAMM fumes alle*.\\ntous vous en fiit es alles\\nwe have gone away\\nyou have gone away\\nthey have gone away\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nI had gone away\\nthou hadst gone away\\nlie had gone away\\nwe had gone away\\nyou had gone away\\nthey had gone away\\nTERIT ANTERIOR.\\nI had gone away\\ntin ni hadst gone away\\nhe had gone away\\nwe had gone away\\nymi had gone away\\nin away\\ntu ten terasaBS\\nT ll* I\\nIs ille\\nnous nous\\nil* 8 en x,\\nI BhaU will have gone awny\\ntlnui shall have gone away\\nB (H y\\nwe BhaU have gone away\\ny.,u BhaU i me away\\nthey sbaU have gone away\\niixniii\\nli;i\\nway\\n\\\\m- should away\\nshould have one a\\nth-y Bhould have gone away\\nqiu- In\\nBway\\nj", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "190\\nqu il s en aille\\nque nous nous en allions\\nque vous vous en alliez\\nqu ils s en aillent\\nthat he may go away\\nthat we may go away\\nthat you may go away\\nthat they may go away\\nQueje m en allasse\\nque tu ten allasscs\\nqu il s en allot\\nque nous nous en allassions\\nque vous vous en allassiez\\nqu ils s en allassent\\nthat I might go away\\nthat thou nrightest go away\\nthat he might go away\\nthat we might go away\\nthat you might go away\\nthat they might go away\\nQue je m en sois alle\\nque tu t en sois alle\\nqu il s en soit alle\\nque nous nous en soyons alles\\nque vous vous en soyez alles\\nqu ils s en soient alles\\nthat I may have gone away\\nthat thou mayest have gone away\\nthat he may have gone away\\nthat we may have gone away\\nthat you may have gone away\\nthat they may have gone away\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nQue je m enfusse alle\\nque tu t en fusses alle\\nqu il s en filt alle\\nque nous nous enfussions alles\\nque vous vous enfussiez alles\\nqu ils s en fussent alles\\nthat I might have gone away\\nthat thou inightest have gone away\\nthat he might have gone away\\nthat we might have gone away\\nthat you might have gone away\\nthat they might have gone away\\nVa-t en\\nqu il s en aille\\nallons-nous-en\\nallez-vous-en\\nqu ils s en aillent\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\ngo away [thou]\\nlet him go away\\nlet us go away\\ngo away [you]\\nlet them go away", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "200 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nS en Aller Tu Go Away [Negatively?)\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nNe pas s en alUr not to go away\\nPAST.\\nNe pas s en itre alle not to have gone away\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nNe s en allant pas not going away\\nuiMI iivnd OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nNe s en (taut not having gone away\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nJ I do nol go away or am not eroiuar\\nJe ne men raw ni*\\naway\\ntu nt fin i i* pas thou dost n\u00c2\u00abU go away\\nhe does not go away\\ni a it go away\\nI pat you do not go away\\nUs ne s en njnt pas a ay\\nI did not go away or was not going\\naway\\nt hull (I l.lM lint go\\nii ne s t he did not go away\\nw,iix ru i pas we did not go away\\nyon iii l n t go away\\niU nr *V. tiny did not go away\\ni-ui.ti;hit m IIMTE.\\nii pas I li l not go away\\ntu a, f-ii tiiltispas thou dldal not go away\\nhe li l nol go away\\nwe l 1 ti t go away\\nyon lid not go away\\n,t pat thay did not go away", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n201\\nJe ne m en iraipas\\ntune fen iras pas\\nil ne s en ira pas\\nnous ne nous en irons pas\\nvous ne vous en irez pas\\nUs ne s en iront pas\\nI shall or will not go away\\ntliou shaty not go away\\nhe shall not go away\\nwe shall not go away\\nyou shall not go away\\nthey shall not go away\\nJe ne m en irais pas\\ntu ne fen irais pas\\nil ne s en irait pas\\nnous ne nous en irions pas\\nvous ne vous en iriez pas\\nUs ne s en iraient pas\\nCONDITIONAL MOOD.\\nPRESENT.\\nj I should, would, could, or might\\nnot go away\\nthou shouldst not go away\\nhe should not go away\\nwe should not go away\\nyou should not go away\\nthey should not go away\\nJe ne m en suis pas alle\\nPRETERIT INDEFINITE.\\nj I did not go away or have not gone\\naway\\ntu ne fen es pas aUe thou hast not gone away\\nil ne s en est pas alle he has not gone away\\nnous ne nous en sommes pas alles we have not gone away\\nvous ne vous en etes pas alles you have not gone away\\nUs ne s en sont pas alles they have not gone away\\nJe ne m en etais pas alle\\ntu ne fen etais pas alle\\nil ne s en etait pas alle\\nnous ne nous en eiions pas alles\\nvous ne vous en etiez pas alles\\nUs ne s en etaient pas alles\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nI had not gone away\\nthou hadst not gone away\\nhe had not gone away\\nwe had not gone away\\nyou had not gone away\\nthey had not gone away\\nPRETERIT ANTERIOR.\\nJe ne m enfus pas alle I had not gone away\\ntu ne fen f us pas alle thou hadst not gone away\\nU ne s en fut pas alle he had not gone away\\nnous ne nous en fumes pas alles we had not gone away\\n9*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "203\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\ntijij.-i ue I ous en fates pas allis\\nUs ne s en fare id pas alles\\nyou had not gone away\\nthey had not gone away\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2FUTURE ANTERIOR.\\nJe ne m en serai pas alle\\ntn ne t en sera* pus aUe\\nU ne s en sera p\\nnous ne nous en serons pas\\nvow ne tous en serez pecs a\\nils ne s en seront pas attes\\nI shall or will not have gone away\\nthon phalt not have gone away\\nhe shall nor Lave gone away\\nwe shall not have gone away\\nyou shall not have gone away\\nthey shall not have gone away\\nJe ne\\nr lis p I*\\ntn\\nil ne ft t tile\\nvous ne tous\\nCONDITIONAL PAST\\nj I should\\nwould, couM, or\\nnot have gone away\\nthou Bhooldst not have gone away\\nhe should not have gone away\\nJd not have gone away\\nlid not. have gone away\\nhave gone away\\nqn,\\nqu iU ne s en aQUmt pas\\nBUBJUNCTD\\njo away\\nthat thou mayeel not go away\\naway\\naway\\nthat y.. away\\nthat thi\\nam\\nI away\\ni]n. i that thou i! jo away\\nthai he mi away\\n(J thai We DO -way\\no away\\naway\\nqnr tn\\nqu H m\\nmay not have gone away\\nthat thoumaj oneaway\\nthat he may not haw gone away", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 203\\nque nousne nous en soyons pas (dies that we may not have gone away\\nque vous ne vous en soyezpas alles that you may not have gone away\\nqu ils ne s en soient pas alles that they may not have gone away\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nQueje ne m enfiisse pas alle that I might not have gone away\\nthat thou mightest not have gone\\nque tu ne ten fusses pas (die\\nJ away\\nqu il ne s en f tit pas alle that he might not have gone away\\nque nous ne nous en fussions pas\\nV that we might not have gone away\\nque vous ne vous enfussiezpas alles that you might not have gone away\\nqu ils ne s en fussent jws alles that they might not have gone away\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\nNe fen va pas do not go away [thou]\\nqu il ne s en aille pas let him not go away\\nne nous en allons pas let us not go away\\nne vous en aliez pas do not go away [you]\\nqu ils ne s en aillent pas let them not go\\nIRREGULAR VERBS.\\nIrregular Verbs are those which differ in their conjugation\\nfrom the models which have been given heretofore, and which\\nregulate those that are called Regular Verbs. The difference\\ncan, of course, only apply to the simple tenses, as the compound\\ntenses of all verbs are made alike.\\nVarious methods have been attempted to arrange the very\\nconsiderable number of Irregular Verbs in certain classes, but\\nexperience has proven that after all the student benefits more\\nby learning them singly, as he will soon obtain a sufficient\\nknowledge of the nature of the irregularities to feel where to\\nexpect them, and to know what they are likely to be.\\nThe principal Irregular Verbs are given here, omitting\\nthose that are of rare use, and with the understanding that\\nderivatives follow the irregularities of those verbs, from which,\\nthey are derived.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "201\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n-FIRST CONJUGATION.\\nAller\\nInf. Aller\\nJe vuis\\nnous aHona\\nJ allais\\nallions\\nJ allai\\nnous all aines\\nJ irai\\n.I irais\\numiuj irions\\ndQe\\naHiona\\nTo Go\\nPart. pres. allant\\nPART, past, all\\nTRESKNT.\\ntu vas\\nil va\\nvous allez\\nils vont\\nMFEBFBCT.\\ntu allais\\nil allait\\nvous alliez\\nils allaient\\nKIT DEFINITE\\ntu alias\\nil alia\\nvous a.;\\nils allerent\\nFrTiKi:.\\ntu iras\\nilira\\nvous irez\\nils iront\\nBBTSVBBAL.\\ntu irais\\nil brail\\nliia\\nil.-. irai. Ut\\nim;-i.k\\\\tiyi:.\\nV.i\\nqui] ailla\\nall./.\\nqu ila aillent\\n-i mi nvi: i-i.i\\nqoe tu \u00e2\u0096\u00a0iHei qui]\\nSfllll N. I I. Pi\\nque tu allossea\\nI it\\nInk. BBVoyoC P.\\\\kt I m Knvovnnt\\nrni. ~i. nt.\\nPesvoie tu n\\nOjaat vous eiivoye*\\nqu fl all it\\nqu ill allasscnt\\nTo S\\nPart. Past, Ekivqpfl\\nil IllVnir\\nUa tan", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n205\\nJ envoyais\\nnous envoyions\\nJ envoyai\\nnous envoy times\\nJ enverrai\\nnous enverrons\\nJ enverrais\\nnous enverrions\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu envoyais\\nvous envoyiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu envoyas\\nvous envoyiltes\\nFUTURE.\\ntu enverras\\nvous enverrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu enverrais\\nvous enverriez\\nil envoyait\\nils envoyaient\\nil envoya\\nils envoyerent\\nil enverra\\nils enverront\\nil enverrait\\nUs enverraient\\nenvoyons\\nQue j envoie\\nque nous envoyions\\nQue j envoyasse\\nque nous envoyassions\\nConjugate after the\\nThe compound\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nenvoie qu il envoie\\nenvoyez qu ils envoient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu envoies qu il envoie\\nque vous envoyiez qu ils envoient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST,\\nque tu envoyasses qu il envoyat\\nque vous envoyassiez qu ils envoyassent\\nsame manner, renvoyer, to send back,\\nare conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nII. SECOND CONJUGATION.\\nAcquerir To Acquire.\\nInf. Acquerir Part. Pres. Acquerant Part. Past, Acquis\\nJ acquiers\\nnous acquerons\\nJ acquerais\\nnous acquarions\\ntu acquiers\\nvous acquerez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu acquerais\\nvous acqueriez\\nil acquiert\\nils acquierent\\nil acquerait\\nils acqueraient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "200\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJ acquia\\nnous aequimes\\nJ acquerrai\\nnous acquerrona\\nJ acquerrais\\nnous acquerrions\\nacqut rons\\nQuej acquiere\\nque noa.- acqoerions\\nTKETERIT DEFENTITE.\\ntu acquis il acquit\\nvous acquires\\nFUTURE.\\ntu acquerras\\nvous acquerrez\\nCONDITIONAL\\ntu acquerrais\\nvous acquerriez\\nIMPERATIVE\\nacquiera\\nacquire/.\\nI KEBENT.\\nque tu\\nr .cz\\ni. PAST.\\nUs acquirent\\nil acquerra\\nils acquerront\\nil acqut^rrait\\nrraii-nt\\nqu il acquiere\\nqu ils acquiereat\\nqu il acquiere\\nqu il.-i acqui rent\\nque tu acmisses\\naoquiaaionfl que\\nhave.\\nmanner:\\ninlre toiaqnira\\nraw to (etch\\nI fective) only used in the present of ibo\\nInfinitive, in the pi te, in the imperfect the subjunctive,\\nun l in tin- comp oun d t. d\\nled, rx -.q t in the\\nInfinitive, an 1 In 1 1 1 c impoond I\\nqu il acquit\\nASSAII.I.IR\\n1 V!\\nTo UMtt/J\\nI Mir. Past\\nisaillea\\naille", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "207\\nJ assaillais\\nnous assaillions\\nnous assaillimes\\nJ assaillirai\\nnous assaillirons\\nnous assaillirions\\nassaillons\\nQue j assaille\\nque nous assaillions\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu assaillais\\nvous\\nilliez\\nil assaillait\\nils assaillaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu assaillis il assaillit\\nvous assaillites ils assaillirent\\nFUTURE.\\ntu assailliras\\nvous assaillirez\\nil assaillira\\nils assailliront\\nCONDITIONAL,\\ntu assaillirais il assaillirait\\nvous assailliriez ils assailliraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nqu il assaille\\nqu ils assaillent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu assailles qu il assaille\\nque vous assailliez qu ils assaillent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue j assail! isse que tu assaillisses qu il assaillit\\nque nous assaillissions que vous assaillissiez qu ils assaillissent\\nConjugate after the same manner, tressaillir, to start.\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nBOUILLIR\\nTnf. Bouillir\\nJe bous\\nnous bouillons\\nJe bouillais\\nnous bouillions\\nPart. Pres. Bouillant\\nPRESENT.\\ntu bous\\nvous bouillez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu bouillais\\nvous bouilliez\\nTo Boil\\nPart. Past, Bouilli\\nil bout\\nils bouillent\\nil bouillait\\nils bouillaient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "208\\nON THE TARTS OF SPEECH.\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe bouillis\\ntu bouillis\\nil bouillit\\nnous bouillimes\\nvous bouillites\\nFUTURE.\\nils bouillhent\\nJe bouillirai\\ntu bouilliras\\nil bouillira\\nnous bouillirons\\nvous bouillirez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils bouilliront\\nJe bouillirai s\\ntu bnuillirais\\nil bouillirait\\nnous bouillirions\\nvous bouilliriez\\nIMI KUUIYI.\\nils bouilliraient\\nbous\\nqu il bouille\\nbouillons\\nbouilles\\nqu ils bouillont\\nBDBJl -V iivi: PBBBBNT.\\nQue je bouille\\nque tu bouQlea\\nqu il bouille\\nque uous bouillons\\nque vous bouilliea\\nqu ils bouillont\\nscan tli n\\\\ H PAST.\\nQueje Imuillisse qno tn boniTHmnn qu il bouillit\\nque nous boul qu ils bouilliat\\ni boil iiway rebouOir\\nt\u00c2\u00ab i\u00c2\u00bb il again.\\nmpound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to bam\\nCon\\nI burir\\nPakt. PBI iirant\\nPart. Past, uru\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2I urs\\nlurona\\ntu coure\\nam\\nil court\\nils oo urent\\nJe ooui\\nnous couri ns\\nrais\\niirii-z\\nil ooanit\\nlie con\\nirus\\n1 rr i .i iimi\\ntu\\nintrant", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n209\\nFUTURE.\\nJe courrai\\ntu courras\\nil courra\\nnous courrons\\nvous courrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils courront\\nJe courrai s\\ntu courrais\\nil courrait\\nnous courrions\\nvous courriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils courraient\\ncours\\nqu il coure\\ncourons\\ncourez\\nqu ils courent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je coure\\nque tu coures\\nqu il coure\\nque nous courions\\nque vous couriez\\nqu ils courent\\nqu il couriit\\nqu ils courussent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je courusse que tu courusses\\nque nous courussions que vous courussiez\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nAccourir, to run to. Encourir,\\nConcourir, to concur. Parcourir,\\nDiscourir, to discourse. Recourir,\\nSecourir, to succor, to help.\\nThe compound tenses of the above verbs are conjugated with\\nAvoir, to have those of accourir, to run to, are also sometimes con-\\njugated with Eire, to be.\\nto incur.\\nto run over.\\nto nave recourse.\\nCukillir To Gather\\nInf. Cueillir Part. Pres. Cueillant Part. Past, Cueilli\\nJe cueille\\nnous cueillons\\nPRESENT.\\ntu cueilles\\nvous cueillez\\nil cueille\\nils cueillent\\nJe cueillais\\nnous cueillions\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu cueillais\\nvous cueilliez\\nil cueillait\\nils cueillaient\\nJe cueillis\\nnous cueillimes\\nPRETERIT DEFTNTTE.\\ntu cueillis il cueillit\\nvous cueillites\\nils cueiliirent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "210\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe cucillerai\\nuous cueillerons\\nJe cueillerais\\nnous cueillerion8\\ncueillons\\nQue je c\\nque doub caeiHions\\nteilli se\\nFUTURE,\\ntu cueilleras\\nvous cucillerez\\nCOXDITIOXAL.\\ntu cueillerais\\nvous cueilleriez\\nTMPKliATIVE.\\ncueille\\nciuillez\\nBTJBJTJN Tivk FBBSBNT.\\nque tu cueillea\\nque vous cueilliez\\nST7BJ1 N( Ti\\\\ r. PAST.\\nil cueillera\\nils cueilleront\\nil cueillerait\\nils cueilleraient\\nqu il cueille\\nqu ils cueillent\\nqu il cueille\\nqu ils cueillent\\nqui tu cueilliBses qu il eueillit\\nque ooufi cueillissions que vous cueillissiez qu ils cueillissent\\nated wiili Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the Baroe manner:\\nto gather, to n-ap.\\nDORMIB\\nI-.iv I \u00c2\u00bbrm i r\\nnousd\\nPabt, Pbb8 Dormanl\\ntu don\\ni T.\\nvous dormiee\\nT\u00c2\u00ab Sleep.\\nPabt. Past, Dormi\\nil ilort\\nUs donnent\\nil dormail\\nUs dormaient\\nJe dormiral\\normlrona\\nPBI i Rl i DJBKLN1TJG.\\ntu 1 il dormlt\\ntu dorm!\\nils dormlrent\\nil donnin\\nMs dormiroct", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n211\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nJe dormirais\\ntu dormirais\\nil dormixait\\nnous dorinirions\\nvous dormiriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils dormiraieut\\ndors\\nqu il dorme\\ndormons\\ndormez\\nqu ils dorment\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nqueje dorme\\nque tu dormes\\nqu il dorme\\nque nous dormions\\nque vous dormiez\\nqu ils dorment\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQueje dormisse que tu dormisses qu il dormit\\nque nous dormissions que vous dormissiez qu ils dormissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nEndormir, to lull asleep. Redormir, to sleep again.\\nS endormir, to fall asleep. Se r endormir, to fall asleep again.\\nThe compound tenses of s endormir, and se rendormir, are conju-\\ngated with Eire, to be, as all pronominal verbs are.\\nFaillir To Fail\\nInf. Faillir Part. Pres. Faillant Part. Past, Failli\\npresent.\\nJe faiUis tu faillis il faillit\\nnous faillimes vous faillites ils faillirent\\nThis verb is defective, and only used in the above tenses, and in all\\nthe compound tenses, which are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nFleurir To blossom, to flourish.\\nThis verb is regular and conjugated like finir, when speaking of\\nplants and flowers but when speaking of the prosperity of a king-\\ndom, or of a town, the participle present is florissant, and the im-\\nperfect of the indicative, je florissais, tu florissais, etc.\\nBefleurir, to blossom, or to flourish again, follows the same rule.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "212\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nIxf. Fuir\\nPart. Pkes. Fuyant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past, I\\nJe fiiis\\ntu fuis\\nilfuit\\nnous fuyona\\nvous fuyez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nUs fuient\\nJe fuyais\\ntu fuyais\\nil fuyait\\nnous fuyions\\nvous fuyiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nils fuyaient\\nJe fuis\\ntu fuis\\nil fuit\\nnous fuimes\\nvous fuites\\nFITURE.\\nils fuirent\\nJe (bind\\ntu fuiras\\nil fuira\\nnous fuirons\\nvous fuirez\\nCONIHTI NAI,.\\nQfl tu i rout\\nJe fuirais\\ntu fuirais\\nil fuirait\\nji u UnoM\\nvous fuiriez\\nWBATm\\nils fuiraient\\nfuis\\nqu*il fuie\\nhjoni\\nfllVeZ\\nqu ils fuient\\nbcrjiv tivi: rt:\\nQneje ftde\\nquo tu\\n(juil fuie\\nque nous fayioni\\nqu.- rang fuvi.-z\\nMJJWUJU rivr. PACT.\\nin ils fuieut\\nQneje\\nque tu fuisees\\nqn il fuit\\nque nous fbJaekxta\\nque voni (U\\nquHfl fuissent\\nIfce compo u nd tent -/r, to have.\\nConjugate nft.T the same manner, x fifiiir, to run away.\\nGkmk To Lie\\nThis verb (defective), wfaleh formerly signified to ho lyinir doWB a is\\nno l !iu r, T i dm WBj however, nay sometime*, ttgU c jft, hero lien,\\nootninon form i\u00c2\u00bby wiiich an epitaph bagtiif,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n213\\nHair\\nTo Hate\\nThis verb is regular, and conjugated like finir, except in tlie first\\nthree persons singular of the present of the indicative, je hats, I hate\\nt u liais, thou hatest U Tiait, he hates and in the second person\\nsingular of the imperative, Jmis, hate.\\nA diteresis is required over the in all tenses and person?\\nexcept in those above-mentioned this dseresis is to cause the a and i\\nto be pronounced as two syllables.\\nInf. Mourir\\nPart. Pees. Mourant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past,\\nJe meurs\\ntu meurs\\nil meurt\\nnous mourons\\nvous mourez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils meurent\\nJe mourais\\ntu mourais\\nil mourait\\nnous mourions\\nvous mouriez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nils mouraient\\nJe rnourus\\ntu mourus\\nil mourut\\nnous mourumes\\nvous mourutea\\nFUTURE.\\nils mourui-ent\\nJe mourrai\\ntu mourras\\nil mourra\\nnous mourrons\\nvous mourrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils mourront\\nJe mourrais\\ntu mourrais\\nil mourrait\\nnous mourrions\\nvous mourriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils mourraient\\nmeurs\\nqu il meure\\nmourons\\nmourez\\nquil meurent\\nQue je meure\\nque nous mourions\\nsubjunctive present.\\nque tu meures qu il meure\\nque vous mouriez qu ils meurent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "214\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nSUBjrXCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je rnourusse que tu mourusses qu il mourut\\nque nous mourussions que vous mourussiez qu ils raourussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be.\\nConjugate after the same manner, 86 mourir, to be dying.\\nOUIR\\nTo Hear.\\nThis verb (defective) can only be used in the present of the infin-\\nitive, oulr, to hear in the preterit definite, j outs, I heard il ouit,\\nhe heard in the imperfect of the subjunctive, que j oui886, that 1\\nmight hear qu il ouit, that he might hear and in its compound\\ntenses, which are formed with the simple tenses of Avoir, to have, and\\nits past participle ou i, asj ai u i, tu at u t, etc.\\nI N I Oiiv rir\\nOuVBXR To Open.\\nPABT.FBBB. OuvranJ Paut. Pasx Ouv ert\\nJ oav re\\nJ OUV\\nJ ouv ril\\nuoui ovn\\nJ oav rirai\\nJ ouv riraii\\nPBBssarr.\\ntu ouv rM\\nvous ouv m I\\nDfFEBFB r.\\ntu ouv rail\\nVOU8 Oll\\\\\\nPRRTKBl r i !i imti:.\\nil ouv re\\nils ouv rm\\nTl ouv rait\\nils ouv ratal\\ntu ouv rM\\nVOOfl ouv .1\\nl i ii iti:\\ntu ouv rifM\\nV0UB OUV\\ni Mi nos M..\\ntu ouv riraii\\nil uv ru\\nils ouv\\nil ouv rira\\nils ouv riraai\\nil ouv rvraA\\n[Is OUV riraii nt\\nIMTI R\\nqu il ouv r\\nqu ila ouv rwtf", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n215\\nQu ouv re\\nque nous ouv rions\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu ouv res qu il ouv re\\nque vous ouv riez qu ils ouv rent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQuq j ouv risse que tu ouv risses qu il ouv rit\\nqua nous ouv fissions que vous ouv rissiez qu ils ouv rissent\\nCompound tenses are conjugated witli Avoir, to have.\\nConj ugate after the same manner\\nBouvrir, to open again. Decouvrir, to discover.\\nEntr ouvrir, to half open. Offrir, to offer.\\nCouvrir, to cover. Misoffrir, to underbid.\\nRecouvrir, to cover again. Souffrir, to suffer.\\nInf. Sen for\\nSentir ^o Feel.\\nPart. Pres. Sen tan.\u00c2\u00a3 Pakt. Past, Sen ti\\nJe sen s\\nnous sen forcs\\nJe sen tais\\nnous sen tions\\nJe sen fos\\nnous sen times\\nJe sen forai\\nnouo sen tirons\\nJe sen tirais\\nnous sen iirions\\nPRESENT.\\ntu sen s\\nil sen t\\nvous sen tez\\nils sen tent\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu sen tais\\nil sen tait\\nvous sen tiez\\nils sen taient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\ntu sen Us\\nii sen fo\\nvous sen tites\\nils sen tirent\\nFUTURE.\\ntu sen tiras\\nil sen tira\\nvous sen tirez\\nils sen fo nmf\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu sen tirais\\nil sen tirait\\nvous sen tiriez\\nils sen tvraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nsen s\\nqu il sen fe\\nsen tez\\nqu ils sen tent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "i;16\\nOX THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nQue je sen te\\nque nous sen tioiia\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu sen tes\\nqua vous sen tkz\\nqu il sen te\\nqu ils sen te/ii\\nSUBJUNCTIVE FAST.\\nQue je sen tisae que tu sen hisses qu ils sen tit\\nque nous sen fissions que vous sen tissit z qu ils sen tissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with J.r n to have.\\nConjug te affe r ;he same manner:\\nat, to agree, Repartir,\\nBessenUr, to resent* to fee] tp$ntir,\\nto lie. Ttir,\\nto give the lie, to be- 7? p f 7/r,\\nlie, to contradict. Sortir,\\nMmtir,\\nto reply,\\nto feel still.\\nto repent.\\nto Bet out.\\nat again.\\n-lit.\\ntir, to go out again.\\nmpound tenses of the first six of the above verbs, are con-\\njugated with At ir, to have,\\nThose I tir and M r 1 pronominal verbs,\\nan conjugated with 2 an I those of partir, r ep art i r sortir,\\nmetunea w nh Eire.\\nSk.kvm; To Serve.\\nPAST. PW I\\\\\\\\ki\\\\ Past, Ser w\\ntu ser s\\nVOW BBC M\\nDwl\\nml MM\\nnous ser tiuns\\nl.Ml l.Kl i:cT.\\ntu mt\\nvous ser vita\\ntit\\nils Ber rnicnt\\nl III 1 BRIT I KllMTB.\\nil ser r/7", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n217\\nFUTURE.\\nJe ser virai\\ntu ser viras\\nil ser vira\\nnous ser virons\\nvous ser virez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils ser viront\\nJe ser virais\\ntu ser virais\\nil ser virait\\nnous ser virions\\nvous ser viriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils ser viraient\\nser s\\nqu il ser we\\nser wns\\nser vez\\nqu ils ser vent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je serwe\\nque tu ser ves\\nqu il ser we\\nque nous ser vions\\nque vous serviez\\nqu ils eer vent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je ser visse que tu ser visses qu il ser vit\\nque nous ser vissions que vous ser vissiez qu ils ser visscnt\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nDesservir, to clear the table, to do an ill office to somebody.\\nSe servir, to make use, to use.\\nThe compound tenses of servir and desservir, are conjugated with\\nAvoir those of se servir, with Etre.\\nAsservir, to subject, is regular, and conjugated lUkefinir.\\nInf. T envr\\nTenir To Hold.\\nPart. Pres. T enant Part. Past, T enu\\nJe t iens\\nnoiis t enons\\nJe t enais\\nnous t enions\\nJe tww\\nnous t inmes\\ntu t iens\\nil t ient\\nVOUS t 67162\\nils t iennent\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu t enais\\nil t e\u00c2\u00ab,a#\\nvous t eniez\\nils t enaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntutins\\nil t m\u00c2\u00a3\\nvous t intes\\nils tinrent\\n1", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "213\\nON THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nFUTURE.\\nJe tiendrai\\ntu t iendras\\nil t iendra\\nnous t iendrons\\nvous t icndrcz\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils t kndront\\nJe t icndrais\\ntu t nndrais\\nil t iendrait\\nnous 1 i :,drions\\nvous tu hdriiZ\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils Xhndraient\\nt iens\\nqu il t fams\\ntenons\\nqu ils tic intent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je 1\\nque tu t if lines\\nqu*il t \u00c2\u00ab7)\\nque nous i\\nque vous 1 1\\nB1 r.irx. 1\\nqu ils t ft n|\\nQue je t\\nque tn t i\\nqae vous t\\nqu il t\\nqu ils I\\nThe oompoui bo have\\nConjugate after the Bamo manner:\\nentertain.\\nto Inten\\n*Mainienir, t maintain.\\nsucceed ill.\\nMain.\\nto proc i (ram.\\ni prevent, t inf. rru.\\nto Wain.\\nto sustain, to support.\\nIn r. cnllort.\\ni) r.iiKinbcr.\\n*s d r, nir, tu relieve,\\nto aiotain. i come unexpectedly,\\nme.\\nThose of the above verhe, which are marked with un asterlak\\nted in their compound ten I and tho\\nto happen.\\nto circumvent\\ni. tain.\\ni contravene.\\n*Depr vmir, to un prepossess.\\n:r, to\\nLain.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n219\\nAdvenir, to happen, is only used in the third person singular of the\\npresent of the indicative, as s il adcient, if it happens.\\nProvenir, to proceed from, is only employed in its third persons sin-\\ngular and plural.\\nInf. Vet ir\\nPart. Pres. Vet awrf\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Pas\\nJe vet s\\nnous vet ons\\ntu vet S\\nvous vet ez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nil vet\\nils vet ent\\nJe vet aia\\nnous vet ions\\ntu vet ais\\nvous vet iez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nil vet ait\\nils vet aient\\nJe vet is\\nnous vet hues\\ntu vet is\\nvous vet ites\\nFUTURE.\\nil vet it\\nils vet irent\\nJe vet irai\\nnous vet irons\\ntu vet iras\\nvous vet irez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nil vet ira\\nils vet i\u00c2\u00ab ft\u00c2\u00a3\\nJe vet irais\\nnous vet irions\\ntu vet irais\\nvous vet iriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nil vet irait\\nils vet ir aient\\nvet ores\\nvet s\\nvet ez\\nqu il vet\\nqu ils vet ent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je vet e\\nque nous vet ions\\nque tu vet es\\nque vous vet iez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nqu il vet\\nqu ils vet ent\\nQue je vet isse\\nque nous vet issions\\nque tu vet isses\\nque vous vet issiez\\nqu il vet it\\nqu ils vet me?j\u00c2\u00a3\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "220\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\n11 cttir, to clothe. Se velir, to dress, or clothe one s self.\\nDevetir, to strip, to undress. Si deoetir, to divest one s self.\\nThe compound tenses of se dCcetlr, are conjugated with Eire, to be.\\nas all pronominal verbs are.\\nIII. TI1IUD CONJUGATION\\nS asseoir To Sit doxon.\\nInf. S asaeoir Pabt. Pbes. S asseyant Past. Past.\\nsiadfl\\nUuus nous a.-\\nJe in\\nPBB8BNT.\\ntu t aaE\\nvous vous asst yez\\nDOT\\ntu t asseyata\\nrui.i ,:i i imi i:.\\nI\\nVOUfl\\nsded\\nilss asseyent\\nor ils b asseient\\nyait\\naoyaieat\\n1 1\\nor je m aneiera] tu t a\\nor je tu t ;t\\nor ootua ooufl M--i -rona voua\\nil s asscvcra\\ndera\\nViTDUt\\nlieront\\nBieroat\\norjfl\\ndittos \\\\i..\\nil B aflseyenil\\nil B n\u00e2\u0080\u0094 oinrnH\\nrairiit\\ntenuent\\nrairut", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 221\\nIMPERATIVE.\\n-toi qu il s asseye\\nor qu il s asseic\\nasseyons-nous asseyez-vous qu ils s asseyent\\nor qu ils s asseient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je m asseye que tu t asseyes qu il s asseye\\nor que je m asseie or que tu t asseies or qu il s asseic\\nque nous nous asseyions que vous vous asseyiez qu ils s asseyent\\nor qu ils s asseient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je m assisse que tu t assisses qu il s assit\\nque nous nous assissions que vous vous assissiez qu ils s assissent\\nConjugate after the same manner, se rasseoir, to sit down again.\\nThe compound tenses of these two verbs are conjugated with Etre,\\nto be, as all pronominal verbs are.\\nConjugate after the same manner, without the second pronoun me,\\nte, se, etc., asseoir, to sit down.\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to havo.\\nChoir To Fall.\\nThis verb is not used except in the present of the infinitive.\\nDechoir To Decay.\\nThis verb is seldom used, except in the present of the infinitive\\nand in its compound tenses, which are conjugated sometimes with\\nEtre, sometimes with Avoir.\\nEchoir To fall, to exjrire, to be due, to fall due.\\nThis verb is only used in the third person of the indicative, il echoit,\\nsometimes pronounced il echet in il ecliut, in il echerra, in il\\neclierrait, in qu il echut, etc., in echoir, in echeant, in ecliu, and in the\\ncompound tenses, which are conjugated sometimes with Avoir, some-\\ntimes with Etre.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "222\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nFalloir\\n11 faut\\nH fallait\\nJ? fallut\\ndra\\n11 faudrait\\nTo be necessary.\\nPKESENT.\\nit is necessary\\nIMPERFECT.\\nit was necessary\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nit was necessary\\nFUTURE.\\nit shall or will be necessary\\nCONDITIONAL.\\n(it should, would, or might be\\nnecessary\\nSUClUNi in i. PRESENT.\\nfaille that it may be neo\\nB PAST.\\nill it that it might be necessary\\nThe compound tenses of this verb, I unip irsonal and defective) are\\nI by the addition of its partidpl to tin- third person\\niias been necessary. e:r.\\nft, f/OU must, they must, etc.,\\nadered by it mutt it I\u00e2\u0080\u0094 it mutt that If. etc the verb which\\nfollows is (nit in the subjunctive mood, and in the person indicated\\nby the personal pronoun, which is before mutt in English, as I\\ntnu-t write, you must drink, il faut que tout\\nTo M\\nuvoir\\ntvsia\\nmvioni\\nI \\\\kt. I lii.s. Moiivant\\nFBI -int.\\nto DO\\nv. iis niouvez\\nIMl I\\ntu niouvnis\\nlouvlei\\nPart. Pa jt, Mu\\nil meat\\nils nieuvcni.\\nil moavait\\nils nioiivaient", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "Je mus\\nnous miimes\\nJ e mouvrai\\nnous mouvrons\\nJe ruouvrais\\nnous mouvrions\\nmouvons\\nQue je meuve\\nque nous mouvions\\nQue je niusse\\nque nous mussions\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu mus\\nvous mutes\\nFUTURE.\\ntu mouvras\\nvous mouvrez\\nCONDITIONAL,\\ntu mouvrais\\nvous mouvriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nil mut\\nils murent\\nil mouvra\\nils mouvront\\nil mouvrait\\nils mouvraient\\nmouvez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESEN\\nque tu meuves\\nque vous mouviez\\nqu il meuve\\nqu ils meuvent\\nqu il meuve\\nqu ils meuvent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque tu musses qu il mut\\nque vous mussiez qu ils mussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nEmouvoir, to move. Promouvoir, to promote.\\nS emouvoir, to be concerned.\\nThe compound tenses of s emouvoir are conjugated with Etre.\\nPromouvoir, is only used in the present of the infinitive and in the\\ncompound tenses.\\nPleuvoir\\nTo Rain.\\nPlewcoii\\nPleuvant\\nPlu\\nINFINITIVE.\\nto rain\\nPARTICIPLE PRESENT.\\nraining\\nPARTICIPLE PAST\\nrained", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "22-t\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nBpleut\\nIlpUuzait\\nBplut\\nB pie u era\\nPRESENT.\\nit rains, does rain, or is raining\\nIMPERFECT.\\nit rained, did rain, or was raining\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nit rained, or did rain.\\nFUTURE.\\nit will rain\\nCONDITIONAL,.\\nit would rain\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nthat it may nun\\nstrut nvtiyk r\\nthat it might rain\\nQui\\nimpound tenses of the above unipersonal verb are formed by\\n[on f its participle passive, plu, to the third person ningnlai\\nof the simple t n it has rained, etc\\n1 ocnvom\\nF i\\nInf. I ourv.iir\\nI rvois\\nuoua ponrvoyons\\nJ. ponn\\nJ.- pour? us\\nnous pourvumes\\nPabt. Pbb Poarvoyant Part. Past. Pmirvu\\nI ki.-i.n r.\\ntu pom\\nMP]\\ntu poor!\\nFBI i i.Kil DKVUUTH.\\nii po or vo i t\\nirvoieut\\ntu |-uirvus\\nil ponrvoyait\\nils ponn\\nil poorvot\\nils ponrvnreat\\nJs ponrvoini\\nirvoirons\\ntu ponn\\nunrobes\\nil ponrvoira\\nil poarvoiront", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n225\\nJe pourvoirais\\nnous pourvoirions\\npourvoyons\\nQue je pourvoie\\nque nous pourvoyions\\nQue je pourvusse\\nque nous pourvussions\\nThe compound\\nil pourvoirait\\nils pourvoiraient\\nqu il pourvoie\\nqu ils pourvoient\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu pourvoirais\\nvous pourvoiriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\npourvois\\npourvoyez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu pourvoies qu il pourvoie\\nque vous pourvoyiez qu ils pourvoient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST,\\nque tu pourvusses qu il pourvut\\nque vous pourvussiez qu ils pourvussent\\nare conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nPouvoir To be able.\\nInf. Pouvoir Part. Pres. Pouvant Part. Past, Pu\\npresent.\\nJe puis or je peux\\ntu peux\\nil peut\\nnous pouvons\\nvous pouvez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils peuvent\\nJe pouvais\\ntu pouvais\\nil pouvait\\nnous pouvions\\nvous pouviez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils pouvaient\\nJe pus\\ntupus\\nil put\\nnous p times\\nvous piites\\nFUTURE.\\nils purent\\nJe pourrai\\ntu pourras\\nil pourra\\nnous pourrons\\nvous pourrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils pourront\\nJe pourrais\\ntu pourrais\\nil pourrait\\nnous pourrions\\nvous pourriez\\nils pourraient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je puisse\\nque tu puisss\\nqu il puisse\\nque nous puissions\\nque vous puissiez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nqu ils puissent\\nQue je pusse\\nque tu pusses\\nqu il put\\nque nous pussions\\nque vous pussiez\\nqu ils pussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugate! with Avoir, to have.\\n10*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nInf. Savoir\\nPart. Pres. Sachant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past.\\nJe saia\\ntu sais\\nil sait\\nnous savons\\nvous savez\\nIMFEKFECT.\\nils savent\\nJe 6avais\\ntu savais\\nil savait\\nnous savions\\nvous saviez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils savaient\\nJe sua\\ntu sua\\nil snt\\nnous sumcs\\nvous sutes\\nFUTURE.\\nils surent\\nJe saurai\\ntu sauraa\\nil saura\\nnous still mns\\nvous saurez\\nl nM.riln.VAL.\\nils sauront\\nJe sau mis\\ntu aurais\\nil saurait\\nnous sauriuiis\\nvous sau rii-z\\nIMIM.KATlVi;.\\nils saura unt\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Ufa\\nqu il sache\\nsacbons\\nsachcz\\nqu ils sacbent\\nN 1 IVK I Kl\\nQuoje sache\\nOJM tu saches\\nj n i I sache\\nquo nous sachions\\nque vous Mchlfli\\nSUBJUNCTIVE TAST.\\nqu ils sachent\\nque tu susses\\nqu*B sut\\nquo nous suasions\\nque root ni\\nqu ils Bussent\\nThe compound tenses are OOnjngftted with Avoir, to have.\\nS irt ir, to know, must not l e con foun ded with .\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0096\u00a0nnitrr, to know.\\nC liwutre is mostly osed in tlie Dense of t be nrquainted with; and\\ntmtkr, to know ly heart.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n2,27\\nInf. Seoir\\nII sied\\nSeoir To Jit, to become, to Jit well.\\nPakt. Pres. Seyant Part. Past, Sis\\n11 seyait it fitted\\n11 siera it will fit\\nmit it would\\nPRESENT.\\nits sieent\\nIMPERFECT.\\nUs seyaient\\nFUTURE.\\nUs sieront\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nUs sieraient\\nthey fit\\nthey fitted\\nthey will fit.\\nthey would fit\\nthat they may fit\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\ntyu U siee that it may fit qu Us sieent\\nThis verb, which is only employed in the third person of the singu-\\nlar, and of the plural of some tenses, has no compound tenses.\\nSurseoir To reprieve, to put off\\nThis verb is seldom used, except in the present of the infinitive.\\nInf. Valoir\\nPart. Pres. Valant\\nPRESENT\\nPart. Past\\nJe vaus\\ntu vaux\\nil vaut\\nnous valons\\nvous valez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils valent\\nJe valais\\ntu valais\\nil valait\\nnous valions\\nvous valiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils valaieut\\nJe valus\\ntu valus\\nil valut\\nnous valumes\\nvous valutes\\nils valurent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "228\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nFUTCKE.\\nJe vaadrai\\n1u vaudras\\nil vaudra\\nnous vaudrons\\nvous vaudrcz\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils vaudront\\n%Te vaudraig\\ntu vaudrais\\nil vaudrait\\nnous vaudrions\\nvous vaudriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils vaudraient\\nvaux\\nqu il Yaffle\\nvalons\\nvales\\nqu ils vaillent\\nPCBJENCTIVE TKESENT.\\nQui- je raffle\\nquo tu vailles\\nqu il vaille\\nque nous valions\\nalioz\\nqu ils vaillent\\nBCTUi \\\\nrvi: iwst.\\nQue je valusse que tu vain qu il valut\\nratusaiei qu ils valussent\\nTin- oompoui I ited with .1 to have.\\nionjugate after\\nretorn like for like. to be equivalent.\\nir, t.. prevaJL\\nque tu pr, rale8\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ilt, que nougpr r.i i iif, q if torn\\nInk ...r\\nPast. Pbbs. Voyant\\nPart Pabi\\nJe vojs\\ntU\\nil vuit\\nnous voyons\\nIM1-1\\nlent\\nv-nais\\nt 1\\nil voyalt\\nvions\\ni-ui.Ti:i:n Q]\\nils voynient\\nJe vii\\ntu rlfl\\nil fit\\nnous vimea\\nvous\\nlis vir.-nt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n229\\nFUTURE,\\ntu verras il verra\\nvous verrez ils verront\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu verrais il verrait\\nvous verriez ils verraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nvois qu il voie\\nvoyez qu ils voient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu voies qu il voie\\nque vous voyiez qu ils voient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque tu visses qu il vit\\nque vous vissiez qu ils vissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nRevoir, to see again. Entrevoir, to have a glimpse of.\\nJe verrai\\nnous verrons\\nJe verrais\\nnous verrions\\nvoyons\\nQue je voie\\nque nous voyions\\nQue je visse\\nque nous vissions\\nPrevoir To Foresee.\\nThis verb is conjugated like Voir, to see, except in the future and\\nin the present of the conditional.\\nFUTURE.\\nJe prevoirai tu prevoiras il prevoira\\nnous prevoirons vous prevoirez ils prevoiront\\nconditional.\\nJe prevoirais tu prevoirais il prevoirait\\nnous prevoirions vous prevoiriez ils prevoiraient\\nVouloir\\nTo be willing.\\nInf. Vouloir\\nJe veux\\nnous voulons\\nJe voulais\\nnous voulions\\nPart. Pres. Voulant\\nPRESENT.\\ntu veux\\nvous voulez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu voulais\\nvous vouliez\\nPart. Pasv Voulu\\nII veut\\nils veulent\\nil voulait\\nils voulaient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "230\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe voulus\\nnous voulurnes\\nJe voudrai\\nnous voiulrons\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu voulus\\nvous voulutes\\nFUTURE,\\ntu voudras\\nvous voudrez\\nil voulut\\nils voulurent\\nil voudra\\nils voudront\\nJe voudrais\\nnous voudrions\\nCONDITIONAL,\\ntu voudrais il voudrait\\nvous voudricz ils voudxaient\\nIMKERATIVE.\\nveuillt (is the only person used)\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je veuillc\\nque tu venilles\\nqu il veuille\\nque nous voulions\\nque vous vouliez\\n8UBJCN Tivi: PAST.\\nqu ils vtmillent\\nque tu too!\\niu il voulut\\nque nous roulaqsious que vous touIube\\n(lu ils voulaaBent\\nCompound leasee with A\\nIV. FOURTH OOHJUa \\\\:I0N.\\nB \\\\ttki:\\nTo Beat.\\nInk. Bsttre\\nPart. I ki I .-tant\\nl Kl\\nPabt. Past, Battu\\ntu\\nil l\u00c2\u00bbnt\\nDDOB buttons\\nTOUS\\nDCPSB] m r.\\nils batten!\\nJe l attais\\ntu 1\\nil l attait\\ni n3\\nrow 1\\ni i;i i i BIX D\\nils Ivattaii-nt\\nJe battle\\ntu 1\\nil hattit\\nnone bettl\\nroue\\nI.K.\\nils battirent\\nJe i ttnJ\\ntu b\\nil l.attra\\nit rone\\nMttn-z\\nils battront", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n231\\nJe battrais\\nnous battrions\\nbattons\\nQue je batte\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu battrais\\nil battrait\\nvous battriez\\nUs battraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nbats\\nqu il batte\\nbattez\\nqu ils battent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu battes\\nqu il batte\\nque nous battions que vous battiez\\nqu ils battent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je battisse que tu battisses qu il battit\\nque nous battissions que vous battissiez qu ils battissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nAbattre, to pull down. Bebattre, to beat again.\\nCombative, to fight. S ebattre, to make or be merry.\\nDebattre, to debate. Se debattre, to struggle.\\nBabattre, to pull down again, to abate.\\nThe compound tenses of s ebattre and se debattre, are conjugated\\nwith Eire, to be.\\nBoiftE\\nTo Drink.\\nInf. Boire\\nPart. Pres. Buvant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past, By\\nJe bois\\ntu bois\\nil boit\\nnous buvons\\nvous buvez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils boivent\\nJe buvais\\ntu buvais\\nil buvait\\nnous buvions\\nvous buviez\\nils buvaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe bus\\ntu bus\\nilbut\\nnous biimes\\nvous biites\\nFUTURE.\\nils burent\\nJe boirai\\ntu boiras\\nii boira\\nnous boirons\\nvous boirez\\nils boiront", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "232\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nCOXDITIONAL.\\nJe boirais\\ntu boirais\\nil boirait\\nnous boixions\\nvous boiriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils boiraient\\nbois\\nqu il boive\\nbuvons\\nbuvoz\\nqu ils boivent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je boive\\nque tu boives\\nqu il boive\\nque nous buvions\\nque vous buries\\nBURJIUICUVJH PAST.\\nqu ils boivent\\nQue je busse\\nque tu boss\\nqu il but\\nque Qoafl i:ii\u00e2\u0080\u0094 i 11-\\nque VOUS busdes\\nqu ils bussent\\nI ll.- compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate aft.-r the Bame manner, reboire, to drink again.\\nJe clos\\n.irons\\ntu clos\\nl ii ORB.\\nvous\\nTo I\\nPART. Past, Clos\\nil clot\\nil don\\nUs cloront\\nJe d I tu c] il \u00c2\u00ab-1 r:i i t\\norions il.- oloraient\\nonly ii-.-. l in the above few i.\\nn.l in all tli compound tenses, which an- formed with\\nbare\\nConjugate after 1 to inclose.\\ni i.i: To onclude.\\nadore Pars I m-. Conduant Past. Past, Couclu\\nnous coucluons\\nl\\nil oonclut\\nlu. -at", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n233\\nJe concluais\\nnous conclui ons\\nJe conclus\\nnous eonclumes\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu concluais\\nvous conclui ez\\nPEETEEIT DEFINITE.\\ntu conclus\\nvous concludes\\nil concluait\\nils concluaient\\nil conclut\\nils conclurent\\nJe conclurai\\nnous conclurons\\nFUTUBE.\\ntu concluras\\nvous conclurez\\nil conclura\\nils concluront\\nJe conclurais\\nnous conclurions\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu conclurais\\nvous concluriez\\nil conclurait\\nils concluraient\\nconcluons\\nQue je conclue\\nque nous conclui ons\\nQue je conclusse\\nIMPKEATIVE.\\nconclus\\nconcluez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PEESENT.\\nque tu conclues\\nque vous conclui ez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nqu il conclue\\nqu ils concluent\\nqu il conclue\\nqu ils concluent\\nque tu conciusses qu il conclut\\nque nous conclussions que vous conclussiez qu ils conclussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConj ugate after the same manner, exclure, to exclude.\\nCONFIRE\\nTo Pickle.\\nInf. Conf ire\\nPart. Pees. Conf isant\\nPaht. Past, Conf it\\nJe conf is\\nnous conf isons\\nJe conf isais\\nnous conf\\nPEESENT.\\ntu conf is\\nvous conf isez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu conf isais\\nvous conf isiez\\nil conf it\\nils conf ient\\nil conf isait\\nils conf isaient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "234\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe conf is\\nnous conf imes\\nJe conf irai\\nnous conf irons\\nJe conf trots\\nnous conf irions\\nconf isons\\nQue jo c\\nque nous eon!\\nPRETERIT DEFIX]\\ntu conf is\\nvous conf ites\\nFUTURE.\\ntu conf iras\\nvous conf in 2\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu conf irais\\nvous conf ii-iz\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nconf is\\nil conf it\\nils conf ircnt\\nil conf ira\\nils conf iront\\nil conf iraii\\nils conf indent\\nqu il conf ise\\nqu ils conf fa nt\\nSUB.irMin k PBB8KNT.\\nque tu conf UM qu il conf fa]\\nque vous coni fa! a qu ils conf famt\\n8tTn.ir.win k past.\\nQue je conf isse qu il conf 7\\nf i qu ils conf issent\\nimpound tensee are conju jal id with 4wir, to have,\\noner\\nJSuj/irc, to i circumciae\\nI.NK. C\\nJe couds\\nnous cousons\\nluatona\\n1\\n7 S\\nPart. P\\nRBI\\nlUdfl\\nvous e\\nDOT\\nluaiea\\nPart. Past, Coubu\\nil ooud\\nil oousait\\nils COUslli. lit\\nJe cougia\\nnous o\\nER] 1 IM I 1..\\nil cuusit\\nHe oousirent", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n235\\nFUTCEE.\\nJe coudrai\\ntu coudras\\nil coudra\\nnous coudrons\\nvous coudrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils coudront\\nJe coudrais\\ntu coudrais\\nil coudrait\\nnous coudrioDg\\nvous coudriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils coudraient\\ncouds\\nqu il couse\\ncousona\\ncousez\\nqu ils cousent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque je cou3e\\nque tu couses\\nqu il couse\\nque nous cousions\\nque vous cousiez\\nqu ils cousent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque je cousisse que tu cousisses qu il cousit\\nque nous cousissions que vous cousissiez qu ils cousissent.\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nDccoudre, to rip. Recoudre, to sew again.\\nInf. Croire\\nJe crois\\nnous croyons\\nJe croyais\\nnous croyions\\nJe crus\\nnous crdmes\\nJe croirai\\nnous croirons\\nCroipvE To Believe.\\nPart. Pees. Croyant Part. Past, Cru\\nPEESENT.\\ntu crois\\nvous croyez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu croyais\\nvous croyiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu crus\\nvous criites\\nFUTURE.\\ntu croiras\\nvous croirez\\nil croit\\nils croient\\nil croyait\\nils croyaient\\nil crut\\nils crurent\\nil croira\\nils croiront", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "236\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe croirais\\nnous croirions\\ncroyons\\nQueje croic\\nque nous crovi us\\nQue je crusse\\nque nous missions\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu croirais\\nvous croiriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\ncrois\\ncroyez\\nil croirait\\niis croiraient\\nqu il croie\\nqu ils croient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu CTCdee\\nque vous croyiez\\nBUBJUNCTIVK PAST.\\nque tu crusses\\nque vous crussiez\\nqu il croie\\nqu ils croient\\nqu il criit\\nqu ils croBBent\\nCkoitke\\nTo Grow.\\nInt. t roitre\\nPart. Pres. Croissant\\nPBBSKBT.\\nPart. Pa\\nJe crois\\ntu crois\\nil croit\\nnous croiasons\\nvous croisscz\\nIMITIM-I-CT.\\nUs eraisBent\\ntu en\\nil croissait\\nnous croissions\\nVii\\nTRET:\\nils croia\\ntU ITU8\\nil .-rut\\nDOW Tumea\\nvons i\\nKIT\\niis crQrent\\nJe ipiitrai\\ntU CT-\\nil croitra\\nnous cr\\nvnus croltrei\\nDITiaXAX.\\nils croi trout\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2r:iis\\ntu eroltraifl\\nil rnrtrait\\nnous croitri me\\nvouscn itrii/.\\nII\\\\ K.\\nils croitraii-nt\\ncroie\\ni[u i! en\\ncroisst-z\\nqu ils", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n237\\nQue je croisse\\nque nous croissions\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PP.ESENT.\\nque tu croisses\\nque vous croissiez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nqu il coisse\\nqu ils croissent\\nquejecriisse que tu crusses qu il crut\\nque nous criissions que vous crdssiez qu ils crussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated sometimes with Avoir, some-\\ntimes with Etre with Avoir, when it expresses the action of grow-\\ning, and with Etre, when it denotes the state in which one is.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nAccroitre, to increase. DecroUrc, to decrease.\\nInf. Dire\\nJe dis\\nnous\\nJe disais\\nnous disions\\nJe dis\\nnous dimes\\nJe dirai\\nnous dirons\\nJe dirais\\nnous dirions\\ndisons\\nQue jedise\\nque nous disions\\nDire To Say.\\nPart. Pees. Disant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past, Dit\\ntu dis\\nildit\\nvous dites\\nils disent\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu disais\\nil disait\\nvous disiez\\nils disaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu dis\\nildit\\nvous dites\\nils dirent\\nFUTURE.\\ntu diras\\nil dira\\nvous direz\\nils diront\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu dirais\\nil dirait\\nvous diriez\\nils diraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\ndis\\nqu il dise\\ndites\\nqu ils disent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu discs qu il dise\\nque vous disie?. qu ils disent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "238 OX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque je disse que tu dieses qu il dit\\nque nous dissions que vous dissiez qu*ils disseat\\nTlie compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to hare.\\nConjugate after the same manner, redire, to say agaiu,\\nThe following verhs,\\nContredire, to contradict. Medire, to slander,\\nDedi to disown, Predire, to foretell,\\nInterdire, to interdict, Se d dire, to recant,\\nMaudire, to curse,\\narc also conjugated like- dire, except in the second person plural of the\\nindicative present, an 1 the imperative, in which they make\\nMi\\nDid PrSd\\nDi\\nM\\nMaudire, takes two te In mtmdmani in the three persons plural\\nt, r m i n:i in all the persons\\nfee.; in the third person singular, of qu il ma\\\\\\nand also in the three persons plural, of di tti o n efeOj\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2!n-r persons and tenses it is oonjugated like dire.\\nEclork To p to open.\\nInf. l lore PABT. Past. pAdoe\\n11 riot\\ni!- ecloseaJ\\nlo\\\\\\\\T,\\niis gcloronl\\nII riorait loraienf\\nhave.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "VEEBS.\\n239\\nE.crire To Write.\\nInf. Ecr ire Part. Pres. Ecr ivant Part. Past, Ecr it\\nJ ecr is\\nnous ecr i\\nJ ecr ivais\\nnous ecr iviom\\nJ ecr iuw\\nnous ecr ivimes\\nPRESENT.\\ntu ecr is\\nvous ecr ioez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu ecr ivais\\nvous ecr iviez\\nil ecr it\\nils ecr\\nil ecr z\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00a3\\nils ecr ivaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu ecr ivis il ecr ivit\\nvous ecr ivites\\nils ecr icirent\\nJ ecr ira*\\nnous ecr irons\\nFUTURE.\\ntu ecr iras\\nvous ecr ires\\nil ecr ira\\nils ecr \u00c2\u00a3ron\u00c2\u00a3\\nJ ecr irais\\nnous ecr m ??w\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu ecr irais\\nvous ecr iriez\\nil ecr i ra#\\nils ecr iraient\\necr iwras\\nQue j ecr ive\\nque nous ecr iz i0?is\\nIMPERATIVE.\\necr is\\necr tofij\\nqu il ecr ive\\nqu ils ecr ivent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu ecr iws qu il ecr ive\\nque vous ecr iviez qu ils ecr ivent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue j ecr ivisse que tu ecr ivisses qu il ecr ivit\\nque nous ecr ivissions que vous ecr ivissisz qu ils ecr idssent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nCirconscrire, to circumscribe. Proscrire, to proscribe.\\nDecrire, to describe. Recrire, to -write again.\\nInscrire, to inscribe. Souscrire, to subscribe.\\nPrescrire, to prescribe. Transcrire, to transcribe.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "240\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nLn F. Faire\\nFaire To ?nuke, to do, to cause.\\nPart. Pees. Faisaut Part. Past, Fait\\nJe fais\\nnous faisons\\nJ j faisais\\nnous t aisions\\nJe fis\\nnous firnea\\nJe feral\\nuiru^ l l-rnns\\nJo fcrais\\nbisons\\n(Same\\nPRESENT.\\ntu fais\\nilfait\\nvous faites\\nils font\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu faisais\\nil faisait\\nvous faisiez\\nils faisaienl\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE,\\ntu fis i! fit\\nvous fitcs Us firent\\nFUTURK.\\ntu ferns\\nU fera\\nvous fore/.\\nils fcront\\nNPITMN\\nfl ferait\\nvous feriea\\nils feraient\\nIMI KKA 11 Vi:.\\nfais\\n(pi il fosse\\nqu ils faonont\\nsrniiN. rivr. PBB8BHT.\\nque tu quU fasse\\nquill fassent\\nBCRii i\\\\ i: PAST.\\niju il fit\\nque vous Usedi i\u00c2\u00abi ils finest\\nhave.\\nMiner:\\nJ to undo,\\nto undo i\\nRtftire, to do again.\\nto s.itisfy.\\no moon", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0248.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "VEKBS.\\n241\\nInf. Frire\\nFkirb\\nTo Ft\\nPart. Past, Frit\\nJefris\\nJe frirai\\nnous frirons\\nJe Mrais\\nnous fririons\\nilfrit\\nil frira\\nils friront\\nil frirait\\nils friraient\\ntufris\\nFUTURE,\\ntu friras\\nvous frirez\\nCONDITIONAL,\\ntu frirais\\nvous fririez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nMs\\nThis verb, (defective) is only used in the above few persons and ten-\\nses, and in all the compound tenses, which are formed with Avoir.\\nTo supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, the different\\ntenses oifaire, to make, with the infinitive present of frire, are used;\\nas, nous faisons frire, eous fadtes frire, ils font frire, etc\\nJoindre To Join.\\nInf. Joi noire Part. Pres. Joi gnant Part. Past, Joi nt\\nJe joi ns\\ntujoi ns\\nil joint\\nnous joi gnons\\nvous joi gnez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils joi gnent\\nJe joi gnais\\ntujoi gncds\\nil joi gnait\\nnous joi gnions\\nvous joi gniez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils joi gnaient\\nJe joi gnis\\ntujoi gnis\\nil joi gnit\\nnous joi gnimes\\nvous joi griites\\nFUTURE,\\nils joi gnirent\\nJe Joi ndrai\\ntu joi ndras\\nil joi ndra\\nnous joi ndrons\\nvous joi ndrez\\n11\\nils joi ndront", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0249.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "242\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nJe joi ndrais\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu joi ndrais\\nil joi ndrait\\nnousjoj ndrions\\nvous joi ndricz\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils joi ndraient\\njoi ns\\nqu il joi #n\u00c2\u00ab\\nioi gnona\\njoi gncz\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT\\nqu ilsjoi 7tf\\nQue je joi gne\\nque tu joi gnat\\nqu il joi jr\u00c2\u00abe\\nque nous joi gniona\\nque vous joi gniea\\nqu ilsjoi y//i7/\\nSUBJUNCTIVE FAST.\\nQuej. quetujoip qu il joi gn d\\nque nous joi gnissiotu que voue joi ^iwmu b qu ils joi gidsscnt\\nCompound b uses are conjugated with .1. to lave.\\nConjugate, after the same manner, all verbs whose present of the\\nInfinitive ends\\nas drr, to f ar.\\nas Pei to paint.\\nas iV to dawn.\\ni,iii,ilrr\\nloindn as\\nAttn i\\novertake.\\nimlrr. to gbd.\\nto constrain,\\nEteindre, to put out, to extinguish.\\nto feign, to pretend.\\nv. to pity.\\nto r. strain.\\n2fi indre, to dye.\\nIni\\\\ Lire\\nJe lis\\nnous lisons\\n.Tp linaia\\nnous lisions\\nLtbi To h\\nI akt. l ni.s. [isanl I mjt. Past,\\ntu lis\\nil lit\\nils lisrnt\\ntu Usais\\nil li^.it\\nVOUS 1\\nils lisaleni", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0250.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n243\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ne lus\\ntulus\\nillut\\nnous lumes\\nvous lutes\\nFUTURE.\\nlis lurent\\nJe lirai\\ntu liras\\njllira\\nnous lirons\\nvous lirez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils liront\\nJe lirais\\ntu lirais\\nil lirait\\nnous lirions\\nvous liriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils liraient\\nlis\\nqu il lise\\nlisons\\nlisez\\nqu ils lisent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je lise\\nque tu lises\\nqu il lise\\nque nous lisions\\nque vous lisiez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nqu ils lisent\\nQue je lusse\\nque tulusses\\nqu il lut\\nque nous lussions\\nque vous lussiez\\nqu ils .ssent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConj agate after the same manner\\nBelire, to read again. Mire, to elect.\\nMettre To Put.\\nInf. Mettre Part. Pres. Mettant Part. Past, Mis\\nJe mets\\nnous mettons\\nJe mettais\\nnous mettions\\nJe mis\\nnous mimes\\nPRESENT.\\ntu mets\\nvous mettez\\nIMPERFECT,\\ntu mettais\\nil met\\nils mettent\\nil mettait\\nvous mettiez ils mettaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu mis il mit\\nvous mites ils mirent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0251.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "214\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH..\\nTXTCKE.\\nJe mettrai\\ntu mettras\\nil mettra\\nnous niettrons\\nvous mettrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils mettront\\nJe mettrais\\ntu mettrais\\nil mettrait\\nnous mettrions\\nvous mettriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nUs mettraient\\nmets\\nqu il mette\\nmettons\\nmettez\\nqu ils mettent\\n8CBJVNCTIYE PRESENT.\\nQue je mette\\nque tu mettcs\\nqu il mette\\nque nous mettions\\nque vous mettiez\\nBERJrNCTrVE PAST.\\nqu ils mettent\\nQue je niisae\\nque tu mi\\nqu il mit\\nque nous missions\\nque vous KUBBiea\\nqu ils missent\\nCompo un d teasel ue oonjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the kdn mannm\\nAd m e tt r e, to admit. Promtttre, to promise.\\ntbmmettre, toeommii Bemettre, to pat again, to set again,\\nto replace.\\nDtmettrt, to disjoint, to put out. Otume ttr e, to submit.\\nOiii ttn. to unit. Tranviuttrc, to transmit.\\nPinu ttr to permit u,t(rr, to resign.\\nS thtrfm ttrr, t Inter]\\nTlu- two last havo their compound tenses conjugated with .E(r\u00c2\u00ab.\\nM Hdre To Grind.\\nIxp. Moudre Part. Pre*. Moulant Part. Past, Moulu\\nJe moods\\nnous moulone\\ntn mouds\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00bcous moulc-z\\nil moud\\nils moulent\\nJe ITl illais\\nnous moulioos\\nikpei:fi:(T.\\ntn moulnis\\nvous mouHcz\\nil moulait\\nils mouluiv-ct", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0252.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n245\\nJe moulus\\nnous moulumes\\nJe moudrai\\nnous moudrons\\nJe moudrais\\nnous moudrions\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu moulus il moulut\\nvous mouliites ils moulurent\\nmoulons\\nQue je moule\\nque nous moulions\\nFUTURE,\\ntu moudras\\nvous moudrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu moudrais\\nvous moudriez\\nIMPERATIVE,\\nmouds\\nmoulez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nil moudra\\nils moudront\\nil moudrait\\nils moudraient\\nqu il moule\\nqu ils moulent\\nque tu moules\\nque vous mouliez\\nqu il moule\\nqu*ils moulent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je moulusse, que tu moulusses qu il moulut\\nque nous moulussions que vous moulussiez qu ils moulussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nRemoudre, to grind again. Emoudre, to grind, to whet.\\nInf. Naitre\\nJe nais\\nnous naissons\\nJe naissais\\nnous naissions\\nJe naquis\\nnous naquimes\\nNaitre To be born.\\nPart. Pres. Naissant Part. Past, Ne\\nPRESENT.\\ntu nais\\nvous naissez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu naissais\\nvous naissiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE,\\ntu naquis\\nvous naquites\\nil nait\\nils naissent\\nil naissait\\nils naissaient\\nil naquit\\nils naquirent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0253.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "246\\nOX THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nJe naitrai\\nnous naitrons\\nJe naitrais\\nnous naitrions\\nJTUIUJCUS.\\ntu naitras\\nil naltra\\nvous naitrez\\nils naitront\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu naitrais\\nil naitrait\\nvous naitriez\\nils naitraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nnais\\nqu il naisse\\nnaissez\\nqu ils naissent\\nsuiurNcrcvE present.\\nQaeje naisse que tu naif qu il naisse\\nque nous naissiona que vous naissiez qu ils naissent\\n8tT5.ii H( ri i: r.vsT.\\nQuej naquiase que tu oaquisBee qu il nnquit\\nque nana aaquisBlona que tous naquissiea qu ils naquieeenl\\nThe coiiij.\u00c2\u00abjuiul tecseaare conjugated with Etre to be.\\nConjugate after tli Bame man]\\nt revive.\\n1.M-. Paitre\\nJe ptia\\nDOOfl i\\n1 a h re To Graze.\\nPast. Pr.r.s. Paiasant Past. Past, Pu\\nPBBBBHT.\\ntu pall\\nil pall\\nDa palwanl\\nJe paiaaaia\\nll iis J \u00e2\u0096\u00a0n t-\\ntil :L!--;iis\\nTtUl-i\\nil palaaaii\\nils paiaaaient\\n.rai\\nOOUa I aitrons\\nDOU\\ntu pa\\na tr z\\nMuiimn \\\\i..\\ntu aitra i\\npaitriea\\nil paltra\\nils paitroni\\nil i n trait\\n::ii nt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0254.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nU\\\\\\nIMPERATIVE.\\npais\\nqu il paisse\\nqu ils paissent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue jo paisse, quetupaisses qu il paisse\\nque nous paissions que vous paissiez qu ils paissent\\nConj ugate after the same manner\\nRepaitre, to feed. Se repaitre, to feed one s self.\\nThese last two verbs have a preterit definite, and an imperfect of\\nthe subjunctive.\\nJe repus tu repus il reput\\nnous repumes vous reputes ils repurent\\nQue je repusse que tu repusses qu il reput\\nque nous repussions que vous repussiez qu ils repussent\\nThe compound tenses of repaitre, are conjugated with Avoir, and\\nthose of se repaitre, with Eire.\\nParaitre To Appear.\\nInf. Par aitre Part. Pres. Par aissant Part. Past. Par u\\nJe par ais\\nnous par aissons\\nJe par aissais\\nnous par aissions\\nJe par us\\nnous par umes\\ntu par ais\\nvous par aissez\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu par aissais\\nvous par aissiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu par us\\nvous par vies\\nil par ait\\nils par aissent\\nil par aissait\\nils par aissaient\\nil par ut\\nils par urent\\nJe par aitrai\\nnous par aitrons\\nJe par aitrais\\nnous par aitrions\\ntu par aitras\\nvous par aitrez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu par aitrais\\nvous par aitriez\\nil par attra\\nils par aitront\\nil par aitrait\\nils par aitraient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0255.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "248\\nOS THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\npar cis qu il par aisse\\npar aissons\\npar uissez qu ils par aissent\\n6UBJUXCTIYE PRESENT.\\nQue je par aisse\\nque tu par aisses qu il par aisse\\nque nous par\\naissions\\nque vous pur aissiez qu ils par aissent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je par UBSt que tu par USS6S qu il par ut\\nque nous par uszions que vous par ussicz qu ils par assent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner:\\ni lr, t appear. litre, to recognize, to know\\nto appear.\\nI know. irattre, to appear again.\\npar. S \u00e2\u0080\u009e/iy to forget one s self.\\naltn to mistake, to forget, to neglect.\\nThe com pound ten.-es ate conjugated with A7/v.\\n[hf. n air*\\nPi.airb To Please.\\nTaut. PBX8. PI maoitf Part. Past, PI u\\nJe pi Ut\\n1 li/TU**\\n\u00c2\u00bbV7l\\ntu pi a is\\nVnll- pi\\nIMP\\ntu pi a\\nVOOfl pi\\nii pi all\\nDa pi aiscnt\\nil pi m s it\\nlis pi ai.ntit/it\\nran i I\\nll pi wf\\nl i i u:K.\\ntu pi\\nils uiritt\\nil 1 nv.i\\nUb pi a", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0256.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nJe pi airais\\nnous pi airions\\npi aisons\\nQue je pi aise\\nque nous pi aisions\\ntu pi airais\\nvous pi airiee\\nIMPERATIVE.\\npi ais\\npi aisez\\nil pi air ait\\nils pi airaient\\nqu il pi aise\\nqu ilspl aisent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu pi aises qu il pi aise\\nque vous pi aisiez qu ils pi aisent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je pi usse que tu pi usses qu il pi fit\\nque nous pi ussions que vous pi ussiez qu ils pi ussent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner:\\nComplaire, to humor, to please. Se taire, to forbear talking, to be\\nDeplaire, to displease. silent, to hold one s tongue.\\nTaire, to conceal, to keep secret.\\nThe compound tenses of se taire are conjugated with Eire, to be\\nPoindre To shoot forth, to dawn.\\nPoindre il poin t il poindra.\\nPrendre To Take.\\nInf. Prendre Part. Pres. Prenant Part. Past, Pris\\nJe prends\\ntu prends\\nil prend\\nnous prenons\\nvous prenez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils prennent\\nJe prenais\\ntu prenais\\nil prenait\\nnous prenions\\nvous preniez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils prenaient\\nJe pris\\ntu pris\\nil prit\\nnous primes\\nvous pr tes\\n11*\\nils prirent", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0257.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "250\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nFUTURE.\\nJc prendrai\\ntu prendraa\\nil prend ra-\\nnous prendrons\\nvous prendrez\\nCONDITIONAL,.\\nils prendront\\nJe prcndrais\\ntu prendrais\\nil prenilrait\\nnous prendrions\\nvous preudriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nUs prendraient\\nprends\\nqu il prenne\\nprenons\\nprencz\\nqu ils prennent\\nQue je prenne\\nque noofl prenionfl\\nSUBJCNCTIVE TRESEXT.\\nque tu prennea qu il prcnno\\nque vous preniez qu ils preunont\\nBUailM I1VE PAST.\\nQui- j prisse que tu prisses qu il prit\\nque nous prissions que vous prissiea qu ils prissent\\nI ll. oompoand tenses an conjugated with Avoir, to have,\\nConjugate alter the name manni r:\\nndre, to learn ngain.\\nmdrs, to comprehend, to Reprmdre, to take again, to re-\\nunderstand.\\nto loosen, t dieen- Surprendre, to surprise, to de-\\ngage.\\nto unlearn.\\nto undertake\\ncava.\\nndre, to mistake,\\n\\\\dre, to be smitten.\\nTin- o omp oand tenant of*,- mt pratdn and rtjprsndrs, are conju-\\ngal- d will, t i 1..- iprt I is used only in the participle past,\\nami in all the oompoand\\nInk. K. dui rt\\n.1.- r. lui a\\nnous n -dui $on8\\nJe riduJ Hi\\nnoai rfeo\\nI aki\\ntu rMui\\nimim ,;i r.\\ntu rt\\nv Of\\nTaut. Past, RYdul i\\nil rMui t\\nred i\\ni r d i", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0258.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "251\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nJe redid sis\\ntu redui sis\\nil redui sit\\nnous redui simes\\nvous redui siles\\nFUTURE.\\nils redui sirent\\nJe redui rai\\ntu redui ras\\nil redui ra\\nnous redui rons\\nvous redui rez\\nCONDITIONAL.\\nils redui ront\\nJe redui rais\\ntu redui rais\\nil redui rait\\nnous redui rions\\nvous redui riez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nils redui raient\\nredui s\\nqu il redui se\\nredui sons\\nredui sez\\nqu ils redui serc\u00c2\u00a3\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je redui se\\nque tu redui ses\\nqu il redui se\\nque nous redui sions\\nque vous redui siez\\nqu ils redui sent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je redui sisse que tu redui sisses qu il redui sit\\nque nous redui sissions que vous redui sissiez qu ils redui sissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate in the same manner:\\nConduire, to conduct, to lead.\\nGonstruire, to construct.\\nCuire, to bake.\\nDeduire, to deduct, to take from.\\nDiitruire, to destroy.\\nEconduire, to discard in polite\\nmanner.\\nEnduire, to plaster.\\nEntreluire, to shine a little, to\\nglow a little.\\nInduire, to induce.\\nInstruire, to instruct.\\nIntroduire, to introduce.\\nLuire, to shine, to glow.\\nWaive, to hurt.\\nProduire, to produce.\\nBeconduire, to reconduct, to lead\\nback.\\nReconstruire, to construct again.\\nReeuire, to bake again.\\nRelidre, to shine, to glow.\\nRenduire, to plaster again.\\nReproduire, to reproduce.\\nSeduire, to seduce.\\nTraduire, to translate.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0259.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "252\\nON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nResoudre To Dissolve, to Resolve.\\nInf. Resoudre Part. Pres. Rt solvant Part. Past, Resolu or resotis\\nJe re sous\\nnous re solvons\\nJe re solvais\\nnous re 6olvions\\nJe re solus\\nnous re sol iimes\\nidrai\\nnous re soudrons\\nJe i soodraia\\nludrioni\\nre* solvous\\nQoeje rf v Ivb\\nII t xilvions\\ntu re sous\\nvous re solvez\\nIMPERFECT,\\ntu re solvais\\nvous re Bolvies\\nil re sout\\nils re solvent\\nil re solvait\\nils re solvaient\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu iv solus il re solut\\nvous re solutes ils n solurent\\nFUTURE.\\nin ti Boudraa\\nvous re so ml rex\\nI MM noXAI..\\nin re s ii Irais\\nIriei\\niMi i.i:\\\\ 1 1\\\\ B.\\nI\\nil re soudra\\nils re soudront\\nil re Boodrait\\nils re soudraient\\nqu il rt solve\\nqu ila re* solvent\\nsum H rr. H PBBffl\\n(|u i i ti BOlvefl qu U re solve\\nBOlvia qu ila n .sol vent\\ni\\\\ 1: PAST.\\nQoeje r ius8o que I qu il re aolftt\\nia cim- v.Mis i qu ila r BOloOHDt\\nThe oompoond tens ue e mju pate l with Avoir, to have.\\nThe above verb dab two pai Iciplee past .W is and when\\nwhin employed\\nIre, toal Diftmidre, to dissolve.\\nThese two last verba have no preterit definite, nor imperfect of the\\n6U1 JU11", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0260.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n253\\nInf. Eire\\nJe ris\\nnous rions\\nJe riais\\nnous riions\\nKike To Laugh.\\nPart. Pres. Eiaut Part. Past. Ri\\nPRESENT.\\ntu ris\\nilrit\\nvous riez\\nils rient\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu riais\\nil riait\\nvous riiez\\nils riaient\\nJe ris\\nnous rimes\\nJe rirai\\nnous rirons\\nJe rirais\\nnous ririons\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\ntu ris il rit\\nvous rites\\nils rirent\\nFUTURE.\\ntu riras\\nil rira\\nvous rirez\\nils riront\\nCONDITIONAL.\\ntu rirais\\nil rirait\\nvous ririez\\nils riraient\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nris\\nqu il rie\\nriez\\nqu ils rient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu ries\\nqu il rie\\nque vous riiez\\nqu ils rient\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque tu risses\\nqu il rit\\nque vous rissiez\\nqu ils rissent\\nQueje rie\\nque nous riions\\nQueje risse\\nque nous rissions\\nCompound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConj ugate after the same manner\\nSourire, to smile. Se rire de, to laugh at.\\nThe compound tenses of se rire de, are conjugated with Eire.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0261.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "254\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nIxf. Rompre\\nRomprb To Break.\\nPart. Pees. Rompant Part. Past, Rompu\\nTe romps\\nnous rompons\\nJe rompais\\nnous rompinns\\nJ. rompis\\nD\\nJe rompraJ\\nimprons\\nJe rompraie\\n:ipli\u00c2\u00ab us\\nr iiii|\u00c2\u00abni3\\nmns\\ntu romps\\nvous rompez\\nEVIPERFECT.\\ntu rompais\\nvous rompiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nil rompt\\nUs rompeut\\nil rompait\\nils ronipakmt\\ntu ton\\nvous rompites\\nFUTURE.\\ntu romprae\\nroue roi\\nITOHA1\\ntu ran\\nvmi.- romprlez\\nIMI I.KATIVE.\\nI\\nil rompit\\nils rompirent\\nil n-mpra\\nils. rampraat\\nil romprait\\npraient\\nqu il mmpo\\nquiis rompeut\\nque tu r\u00c2\u00bb\\nque root roi\\nBUBJ1 M i n\\nqa il rompe\\nqu ils n\\nque hi ram] qn il romptt\\nqu ila rompii\\ni\\nrropfc Ii.: to interrupt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0262.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "VEJIBS.\\n255\\nInf. Suivre P.\\nhit. Pres. Suivant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past, i\\nJe suia\\ntu suis\\nil suit\\nnous suivons\\nvous suivez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils suivent\\nJe suivais\\ntu suivais\\nil suivait\\nnous suivions\\nvous suiviez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE\\nils suivaient\\nJe suivis\\ntu suivis\\nil suivit\\nnous suivimes\\nvous suivites\\nFUTURE.\\nils suivirent\\nJe suivrai\\ntu suivras\\nil suivra\\nnous suivrons\\nvous suivrez\\nCONDITIONAL\\nils suivront\\nJe suivrais\\ntu suivrais\\nil sufvrait\\nnous suivrions\\nvous suivriez\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nil suivraient\\nsuis\\nqu il suive\\nsuivons\\nsuivez\\nqu ils suivent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nQue je suive\\nque tu suives\\nqu il suive\\nque nous suivions\\nque vous suiviez\\nqu ils suivent\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nQue je suivisse que tu suivisses qu il suivit\\nque nous suivissions que vous suivissiez qu ils suivissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConj ugate after the same manner\\nPoursuivre, to pursue, to prosecute. S en suivre, to follow, to result.\\nThe last verb is only used in the third person singular of every\\ntense,", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0263.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "256\\nOX THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nInf. Traire\\nJe trais\\nnous trayons\\nJe trayais\\nnous trayions\\nJe trairai\\nnous trairons\\nJe trairais\\nnous trairions\\ntrayons\\nTraire To Milk.\\nPart. Pres. Trayant Part. Past, Trait\\nPRESENT.\\ntu trais\\nil trait\\nvous trayez\\nils traient\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu trayais\\nil trayait\\nvous trayiez\\nils trayaient\\nFUTURE.\\ntu trairas\\nil traira\\nvous trairez\\nils trairont\\nCONDITIONAL\\ntu trairais\\nil trairait\\nvous trairez\\nils trairaient\\nIMI l RATI YE.\\ntrais\\nqu il traie\\ntrayea\\nqu ils traient\\ntraie\\ni\\nBERT.\\nque tu I (|u il traie\\nqnevoua trayiei qu*i]s traient\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Awir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner:\\nabstract. liintmirr, to fine draw.\\nAtlrai redeem an estate.\\nl)Litr\u00c2\u00ab\\\\r.-, to distinct, to divert to substraet, to hide, tc\\nJ- rtriii;- C on ceal, tO take a\\\\vay.\\ni] e, to withdraw one s self from.\\nBe be.\\nYaincre T vanquithy in conquer.\\nPast. Pbbb. 7ainquant Part. Past, Vaincn\\nJ i tu raincs il vaine\\nnou\u00c2\u00bb vain. pons vous vainqiiez jueut", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0264.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "VERBS.\\n257\\nJe vainquais\\nnous vainquions\\nJe vainquis\\nnous vainquimes\\nJe vaincrai\\nnous vaincrons\\nJe vaincraia\\nnous vaincrions\\nvamquons\\nQue je vainque\\nque nous vainquions\\nIMPERFECT.\\ntu vainquaia\\nvous vainquiez\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE,\\ntu vainquis\\nvous vainquites\\nFUTURE,\\ntu vaincras\\nvous vaincrez\\nCONDITIONAL,\\ntu vaincrais\\nvous vaincriez\\nil vainquait\\nils vainquaient\\nil vainquit\\nils vainquirent\\nil vaincra\\nils vaincront\\nil vaincrait\\nils vaincraient\\nIMPERATIVE,\\nvaincs\\nvainquez\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.\\nque tu vainques qu il vainque\\nque vous vainquiez qu ils vainque\\nSUBJUNCTIVE PAST.\\nque tu vainquisses qu il vainquit\\nqu il vainque\\nqu ils vainquent\\nQue je vainquisse\\nque nous vainquissions que vous vainquissiez qu ils vainquissent\\nThe compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have.\\nConjugate after the same manner\\nConvaincre, to convince.\\nInf Vivre\\nPart. Pres. Vivant\\nPRESENT.\\nPart. Past\\nJe vis\\ntu vis\\nilvit\\nnous vivons\\nvous vivez\\nIMPERFECT.\\nils vivenfc\\nJe vivais\\ntu vivais\\nil vivait\\nnous vivions\\nvous viviez\\nils vivaient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0265.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "25S\\nOX THE PAET3 OF SPEECH.\\nPRETERIT DEFINITE.\\nTe vt cus\\ntu v cus\\nil vecut\\nlous w carues\\nvous VLcites\\nFUTURE.\\nils vt-cuient\\nJo vivrai\\ntu vivras\\nil vivra\\nnous vivrons\\nvous vivrcz\\nconditional.\\nils vivront\\nJe vivraia\\ntu vivraia\\nil vivrait\\nnuus vivriona\\nvous vivriez\\nDCFEBATIVS.\\nUs vivraiont\\nvis\\nqu U vive\\nvivons\\nvivos\\nqu ils viv. nt\\nsubjuni tivi: pbi\\nQneje viva\\njm- t\\nqu il vive\\nDOS viv mna\\nque VOUS vivicz\\nqu ils vivcnt\\nque vousi\\nPAST.\\nDU tu v (ju il VCCUl\\nque v qu ila vecussent\\nid With .1 kO have.\\nme manner:\\niv.\\\\ S irrirn\\\\ to survive.\\nEXERCISES ON THE VERBS.\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 n LTIOK.\\nire, If you would hide it. lie\\nprefert i -lut l m I wished that he might rather prefer\\ni( i r ri *:i t.- thi man he is drunk, and _v u\\nliiii propose a i \u00c2\u00ab-i t -r plan, I have\\nour friends let as think more\\nof t!i J Imlred h.-r. bat I loved her.\\nWe won] bat -h refased nr sympathy.\\nor did you not rather w\\nthe most Importai I an I they wil]\\nBupport any r.-mdi-\\ndase, ..r by whom Is b wi Bsl ing in the strosni", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0266.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "VERES. 259\\nwhen he caught that big fish. He awoke late and found that all his\\nfriends had gone in the morning. Would you not have flown to her\\nassistance, if she had cried He ate too much, and now he has dined\\na second time. I wish that you may remain here for a week I will\\nstay with you. That he should oblige my brother and offend his own,\\nwas a great surprise to all. He warned me that I should not copy his\\nexample. We expected that they would have burnt the ship.\\nII. SECOND CONJUGATION.\\nChoose your seat and do not leave for an hour. Warn your friends\\nthat they convert themselves or it will be too late. They served him\\nwell, but they slept too much. Did not the enemies invade an im-\\nmense country, and did they not invest several fortresses He softened\\nhis father by his submission, and I foresaw that he might succeed if\\nhe came back in time. I wished that you would not sully your glory\\nby these mean deeds. He obtains all Ms money from his wife she\\nretains nothing, and thus she suffers frequently but he blemishes his\\nreputation. Let us finish this work he will punish us if we are not\\nready. They predicted that we would disobey the laws and that we\\nwould weaken the strength of onr party. Hold this sword and do not\\nlet it fall. He left this morning, and we shall leave to-morrow when\\nwill you leave Let him maintain himself by his labor and all will\\nhonor hju.\\nIII. THIRD CONJUGATION.\\nHe receives a large salary, bat he owes large sums of money.\\nWhen he owed jie a hundred dollars, I feared that he would not pay\\nme, bat he has ialfllled his [jomise. Let them conceive these ideas\\nand they will perceive soon their errors. We perceived the house\\nfrom the top of the mountain, kut they did not perceive us. We shall\\nconceive hopes of her recovery if she suffers less to-night than yester-\\nday the doctor said that he perceived good symptoms. He told us\\nthat we should not receive vhis officer with too much politeness,\\nbecause he was not a friend of our nation, but that we should be\\npolite to those who come to our house.\\nIV. FOURTH CONJUGATION.\\nWe knew him well when he sold goods in this city, but he did\\nnot know us, for we lived in another part of the city. Let them be\\nsilent or they will render themselves hateful to the enemy. We lost\\nall our money, and you would lose yours if you sold your paintings", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0267.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "260 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nnow. Did this dog bite you or had you been bitten before? He\\ndid not please by his manners but by his conduct. Pity us, my\\nfriends, for we have pitied you when you were unfortunate. You\\nfear an idle threat, why did you not fear the real danger He con-\\nsoled me, that I might not melt in tears. I would recognize him\\nwhere, but he will not recognize his own brother. I said it that\\nyou might hear the opinion of an honest man, but you heard only\\nthe half of my speech. They appeared surprised, but it surprised\\nthem not. for they had heard it yesterday. Let us take patience and\\nlet us seem contented with our lot, if we cannot be so. He expected\\nus at the gate and we heard his voice, but he seemed (to be) angry.\\nThat he may depend on me and on my friends, is my sincere wish.\\nT. PIIONOMINAL TORB\\nThey walked for several hours in the garden, and when they had\\nwalked enough, they proposed to each other to withdraw into the\\nhouse. Why did Bhe not prepare herself for this event, she knew\\nthat it might come s..,,n We have mined ourselves In this enter-\\nand yon would ruin yourself if you engaged In the same.\\napplauded themselves, bnl they were mistaken they had\\ny.-t l o not forget yourselves when you are in his\\ntold she betray herself by her tears, or should she\\nsol rather control herself and hide her sorrow? They Ibnga* each\\nother all thai day, and when evening came they withdrew to their\\ncamp. Let as not reproach ourselves with (de) faults of others; wo\\nhave eoou rh to do with nr own faults. You would degrade yourself\\nIf yon were not deceived; they have loved each other all their life.\\nWill not that man Bubmit to BOJUBt a law. She will dishonor her-\\nself, if he He grew rich by tin- misfortunes of\\nand now hanee ha- reduced him to poverty. Do not expose\\nand we made our-\\nYL PASBTVl 7SBB\\nHe I by ill his friends, but now he is hated and de-\\nlf they were stronger, I\\nwish that tb Ince yester-\\nday, will have been discovered, and the\\nauthor, no doubt, has b My father was respected and\\nmy m Lred, although thoy", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0268.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 261\\nwere recognized. He performed with so much ability that he was\\napplauded universally. Would he have been praised, as he was, if\\nhe had been less modest He is known by nobody, but, still, he is\\nvery happy. How many countries, unknown to the ancients, have\\nbeen discovered in our days\\nVII. IMPERSONAL VERBS.\\nDoes it rain this morning or does it freeze It did not snow during\\nthe winter, but it snows this morning. When did it hail in your\\ncity Do you think (that) it will freeze again to-morrow It hap-\\npened that I was present at that remarkable adventure, and it appears\\nnow that I was the only witness. Would it be proper that I should\\nspeak to her, or would it appear presumptuous It thundered twice\\nwhen I was absent has it thundered again It will lighten after\\nseveral seconds.\\nvm. ON THE verb By a.\\nThere was a great difference of age between these two persons.\\nWas there a great crowd at the theatre I wish there could be a law\\nto prevent this there has been too much of it. What has there\\nbeen better than this in the history of our country There being so\\nmany difficulties, the affair has been abandoned. There was one\\nwoman in the company, but there were a hundred men, and there\\nwould have been many children also, if it had been permitted. There\\nhas been a festival every day, and there will be a solemn feast to-mor-\\nrow. 1 v.Lli that there might be a larger crowd.\\nIX. ON THE VERB B faut.\\n[All expressions implying necessity, duty, obligation, or want, are in\\nFrench expressed by falloir, followed by que with the verb in the Sub-\\njunctive. I must remain; it is necessary that I remain: il faut que je\\nteste. He had to work it was necessary that he worked il fallait quHl\\ntravallldt.]\\nYou must speak to him about this affair, and he must answer you\\npolitely or there will be a difficulty. We were obliged to set out yes-\\nterday, for we had to be in the city before Thursday. What must I\\ndo in order to please you You must do your duty faithfully and\\nyou will please everybody. What does he want He wants something\\nto eat and something to drink. I had to abandon all hope of seeing\\nhim again. You must not forget that you promised me a letter you\\nmust, on the contrary, remember your promise and write very often", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0269.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "262 ON THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nI do lot think that it is necessary to be a magician, to yuess your\\nseereU. You ought to ask pardon for your faults, and they will be\\nreadily forgiven.\\nX. OX TUE IRREGULAR YERRS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.\\nne will go this evening into the country will you go with him\\nI will go when you go lor I would have gone yesterday, if I had not\\npreferred to go with you. Well, let us go at once, for if we go later\\nit will he too hot. Let him go with us, he is a pleasant companion,\\nand if we go together we shall have a pleasant walk. When will\\nyon send those flowers to your sister, or have you sent them already?\\nNo, 1 would have sent them this morning, hut the gardener had given\\nthem to a friend 1 shall send my bouquet this evening. 1 would not\\nBend them BO late, she will not heat home then. Did you send tho\\nSee I sent all by the servant. 1 wish that\\nyou would Bend me a little money, 1 have none.\\nXI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 iki:i: ;i-i.\\\\k VERBS OT mi; SECOND CONJUGATION.\\nbe the man who has converted so many heathens! The\\nlourished at Ath na in he tun.- of Periclea They\\n(1 d from the battle-field, and 1 fled with them you Baw us. perhaps,\\nin our Bight we acted not with prudence and care, lor we were\\ni ormoua force, and when\\nCOUld. Would he not hate\\nthat man, if he knew all He hat. d him h. fore, hut now he will de-\\ni| and i orade of worldly\\ngreatn obI They discoui aother life, and that\\nwe .should not run alter shadows. He is very sick, and his strength\\nhim i v. -r.v day more he came near dj How did\\nI have Inquired after it and requested his\\nit ii. Would you dress your\\nchildren bett r if you could collect your moi nly? Let us\\nh i.i with be ill receive as well when wet\\nantry.\\nxn.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ransom \\\\k conj\\nII \u00c2\u00bbw did ho tall into poverty, and why ha- he fa) nly in\\npublic? He baa put in th lottery, and he b\\ndm. 1 did i ii a- net\\nlor is.\\nr you would havo", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0270.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 263\\nhad to pay much more hereafter. Shall we see you to-night? I\\nwould see you again, if I could, and I hope that I shall he able to\\ncome. We moved him by our prayers to tears, and he promised that\\nhe would promote our interests. It will not rain to-day, for it rained\\nyesterday, and it is rare that it rains two days one after the other..\\nLet us sit down here you, madam, seat yourself in a chair, and I\\nwill sit on the turf. We sat where we could, and when the usher\\nsaid Sit down, gentlemen, we were much embarrassed. To conclude\\nthis business it would be necessary that they should see each other at\\nonce I foresaw this, and provided for the interview. One ounce of\\ngold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of silver what would ten ounces\\nbe equivalent to? Doubt not that truth and justice will prevail in\\nthe end. If she is willing, we are willing, too. He says that he can\\ndo what he will do, because men will do nothing more than what they\\ncan do, if they are wise.\\nXIII. IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.\\nThese substances resolve themselves into ashes when they are\\nburnt but this matter does not resolve itself at all. Who would\\nabsolve him if he should commit a great crime Have they resolved\\non war or peace My sister sewed all the day, and yet, when the\\nevening came, the dress was not sewed, and some pieces which were\\nfinished have to be sewed over again. Let him take his share; I\\ntook mine yesterday, and you have taken yours before us. What\\nnews have you learnt I learnt that the city was taken, and that\\nthe enemy would live at the expense of the inhabitants for a month.\\nWould you undertake this business if I placed it in your hands You\\nreproved him too sharply bad company has corrupted him, perhaps,\\nbut he is not wicked by nature. They followed us for two days, but\\nthen they pursued us no longer, and we escaped. They fought with\\nfury, and after they had beaten the enemy and vanquished their fa-\\nmous generals, they made a triumphal procession. He did his best,\\nyou did not so well, and they would have done better if they had\\nwished it. Could it be possible that we should make such a mistake?\\nHe must make a better use of his talents. They satisfied themselves\\nthat they would do mischief if they went. He was born in this city,\\nwhere his parents were born also. They wrote their letters this\\nmorning I shall write mine now will you not write yours also Did\\nyou think me capable of a crime, when you made that remark I\\nwould not bvlieve it of you, even if somebody said so.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0271.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "2G4 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nParticiples derive tbeir name from the fact that they partake\\nof the nature of the verbs from which they derive their origin\\nand meaning, and of the adjective, which they resemble in form\\nand use.\\nThe verb has two participles\\nA participle jiresent, which invariably ends in ant, has its\\nfeminine in a/ttr, and its two plural forms in ants and antes,\\nEx. charmant unefemme charmante, a charming woman\\nifants charmants, charming children: deux histoires char-\\ntwo charming Btories.\\nA participle past, which ends in the first conjugation in k\\nsecond in i (ie, is, ies), in the third and\\nfourth in (i\\na concealed man lebrte,\\na oelebi desperate people.\\nBoth participles are declined like adjectives, and have to\\nonn they qualify, whenever they arc not used\\na mere par i of the \\\\oil bat have the meaning of adjectives.\\nThe e will easily determine in what capacity they\\nd.\\n1, They are j arts of the verb when they express an action,\\nand consequently have an object. In this ease they remain\\nunchanged\\nP\\\\. Je harmani tout le monde, I have seen her\\ncharming (who charm lonnant let\\nmba sur ux, my friend, astonishing the bystanders,\\nfeh upon them.\\n_. I when they t an aetion,\\nbat a quality. Then they agree with the noun which they\\nqualify.\\nY.\\\\. I n, iii in? charmante, she is a charming woman;\\nquelle what surprising Qewal", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0272.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 205\\nIt must be remembered, that as adjectives, they are invariably\\nplaced after the noun, contrary to the usage in English.\\n3. The Participle Past agrees, besides, with the subject of\\nthe verb, whenever it is used with the auxiliary etre.\\nEx. JSlle est etonnee, she is astonished; ils se sont battus, they\\nhave fought elles s elaient promenees, they had walked.\\n4. The Participle Past, when used with the auxiliary avoir,\\nagrees with the direct object, when this object precedes it.\\nEx. Quelle femme avez-vous vue? which woman have\\nyou seen? combien des hommes a-t-il tues? how many of the\\nmen lias he killed je Vai rencontree, I have met her les\\nckoses que fai oubliees, the things I have forgotten.\\nExercise.\\nThese ladies are charming they have entertained us for an hour\\nbut now they will not stay, for you have frightened them. I left them\\nin an embarrassing situation, and even his consoling words had no\\neffect. This was one of the ladies whom we had obliged, and yet she\\nhas ill-treated and deceived us. Your sen-ant has washed your plates,\\nbut he has not wiped them they are spoilt. She had spoken to us,\\nbut she has not saluted us with her usual kindness. This amusing\\nstory is not true it has been invented by a celebrated novelist. He\\ntold us several instances of amazing bravery they have astonished\\nus beyond measure. How many of them has he seen himself? He\\nhas seen all those which he related to us.\\nCHAPTER VI.\\nAdverbs are words so called because they principally serve\\nto qualify verbs they may, however, qualify adjectives and\\nother adverbs also. But, whatever may be their uses, they\\nalways remain unchanged.\\nEx. Vous avez fait bien, you have done well elle est Men\\nbelle, she is very handsome vous ecrivez bien negligemmenty\\nyou write very negligently.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0273.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "26G OK THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nThere are four different kinds of adverbs, according to theii\\nmanner of formation\\n1. Simjile Adverbs, or such as are nothing but adverbs, and are\\nnot derived from other parts of speech. Such are ties, fort,\\nand lien, very peu, little mal, ill ici, here la, there tot,\\nsoon tard, late.\\n2. Derivative Adverbs, or such as are derived from adjectives.\\nThis is done by the addition of ment (the Latin ablative of\\nmens, mente.)\\na. To the adjective simply, when it ends in a vowel.\\nEx. riche ric/iement, richly; poli poliment, politely in-\\ngenu ing wbment, ingenuously.\\nTo the feminine of the Adjective, if the masculine ends\\nin a consonant\\ngrandly franc franekement, frank-\\nly i oil, artlessly; Ira is fratchement^ freshly;\\ni no iri il no nt, newly.\\ni-. By i chai ge of the final syllables ant and ent into ammant\\nand eminent, which are both pronounced like the first\\nEx. constant: oonstammenL, constantly; eloquent: iioqutm-\\nment, eloquently.\\nI x i t i, wl ntement, slowly; and gritent, which\\nprSeentement, presently.\\nTin- following Adverbs accent tin- final of the Adject ve,\\nwhen adding meni\\nnt Ht, blindly. rmiment, enormously.\\ncumi, mmodiously. opini triment, obstinately.\\nmt m nt, conformably.\\nBxsbi\\nThis orator apoke Tory eloquently*bul he 1 1 1 nol touch tlm lioart\\nhis sentiments were not delivered ingenuously. He entered blindly\\nIntothi oons Iracy and suffered severely. 1 will tell you frankly thai\\nahumiuutiy all our punishments, tor you h..\\\\.-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0274.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 20 7\\nacted wickedly, and the judge has treated you after all very leniently.\\nShe endured her sufferings patiently, and gave us a good example.\\nHe was one of the best writers of the last century he thought deeply\\nand wrote nobly. The battle was fought conformably to his orders,\\nand all went well, but instantly after his death every thing was in\\nconfusion.\\n3. Compound Adverbs, or such as consist of a noun or a\\npreposition, as d abord, at first or at once en effet, indeed\\npar force, forcibly; a present, now; apres demain, after to-mor-\\nrow.\\nAdverbs of Quantity, when followed by nouns, must be con-\\nnected with them by the preposition de, of; which is not used\\nin English.\\nEx. beaucoup de peine, much trouble; peu d* argent, little\\nmoney trop de zele, too much zeal inoins de bruit, less noise.\\nExcept only lien, very much, a great deal, which is not followed by\\nde, but by the partitive article.\\nEx. bien de la peine, very much trouble Men des amis, very many\\nfriends.\\nExercise.\\nMuch money and little wisdom are less desirable than much wis-\\ndom and little money. He has as many friends as I, but he has more\\nenemies. I had not enough patience with this child perhaps she\\nhad too many faults. How many dollars have you in your purse 1 I\\nhave not enough to pay him. Few men learn by experience. Give\\nme a little attention and I will tell you more secrets than your wife.\\nHd did it with less hesitation than his brother, who has more pru-\\ndence. Too much zeal is almost as bad as too little, but no zeal at all\\nis fatal to any enterprise.\\nNegative Adverbs, used with the verb, require, as has already\\nbeen stated, the addition of ne before the verb, whether they\\nprecede or follow the verb.\\nEx. Je rCai vu rien, I have seen nothing rien ne pent etre\\nmieux, nothing can be better il rCy est jamais, he is never\\nthere jamais de ma vie n ai-je vu le pareil, never in my life\\nhave I seen the like.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0275.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "268 ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.\\nI have not seen him this week he has never been absent so long,\\nand nothing is more probable than his death. She said nothing to\\nme, and I said nothing to her have you ever heard of two more\\nsilent persons Nobody came to her party, and she had invited all.\\nI know nobody in this city, for I have never been here before. We\\nhave no more time to give you, and we have only ODe room in which\\nwe live. Nothing will persuade me that he is not dishonest I have\\nnever seen a more wicked face.\\nCOMPARATIVE DEGREES.\\nAdverbs form their Comparatives and Superlatives in prc-\\nthe Bame manner as Adjecth\\nEx. plus riehement, more richly; moins abondanvment, less\\nabundantly le plus gaimeru\\\\ most gaily le mains prompte-\\nleast promptly.\\nTiic irregnlar comparatives of Adjectives have their corres-\\nponding irregular comparatives of Adverbs, and both are ben\\nfor the better comparison.\\nOKPAB vi I BXJP1 RXATTVB.\\ni tter l tin ur, best\\nbetter le mi, ur, best,\\nle fire, worst,\\nworse l pie, wont\\nsmaller; moindre, smallest\\nine, less; lemoine, least\\nIt will be seen that in English adjectives and adverbs fre-\\nquently look a th better and woi\\nbeat and worst; whilst in French the two parts of speech differ\\nessentially. This requires, therefore, careful attention.\\nHe di.l it mom promptly than i I. He behaved mosl\\nhandsomely, although he was the least Informed of all. I like him\\nbetter every dav but his brother Is the better man of the two. Hnvo\\nAdj.\\nadv.\\nwell;\\nAdj.\\nbad;\\nAdv.\\nill;\\nAdj.\\nsmall\\nAdv.\\nlittle", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0276.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 2G9\\nyou seen a worse child than Mary? No but Anna is the worst of all\\nthe children. Is she worse to-day or better She was worse yester-\\nday, and the doctor said that to-morrow will be the worst day of her\\nillness. I have drunk a better wine, but I have never seen a worse\\ncook. He does it well, but she does it badly.\\nCHAPTER VII.\\nPREPOSITIONS.\\nPrepositions placed before nouns, pronouns, and verbs, show\\ntheir relation to each other in the same sentence.\\nAccording to their uses they are either\\nSimple prepositions, which are placed immediately before\\nthe nouns\\nEx. le fruit de Varbre, the fruit of the tree la mort de Cesar,\\nthe death of Caesar tue par lid, killed by him or,\\nCompound prepositions, which require an additional prepo-\\nsition, de or a, to connect them with the noun.\\nEx. quant a vous, concerning you vis-a-vis de la maison,\\nopposite the house jusqiCa midi, until noon pres de Geneve,\\nnear Geneva.\\nThe three Prepositions which occur most frequently are de,\\na and par.\\nDe coi responds to all the meanings of the English of or\\nfrom, and in passive constructions to by.\\nEx. un homme de genie, a man of genius je viens de Rome,\\nI come from Rome elle est aimee de ses parents, she is beloved\\nby her parents.\\nA corresponds to the English to; with names of cities, to at\\nor in, and generally expresses purpose or intention.\\nEx. tTai beauconp a faire, I have much to do donnez-la a\\nJean, give it to John il est a Londres, he is in London cela", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0277.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "270 OS THE PAKTS OF SPEECH.\\narrlva a Paris, that happened at Paris est-il bon a manger, is\\nit good to eat (for the purpose of eating)\\nPar corresponds to the English through, and in passive con-\\nstructions to by, when a physical agency is referred to, while de\\nis used when the agency is moral or mental.\\nEx. Passezpar ma chambre, go through my chamber; il fat\\ntui par mi Iat, he was killed by a soldier; elle Va fail par\\npilie, she did it from (through) pity.\\nVans and rn both mean in, but with this distinction, that\\ndans always means within and into, and is accompanied by the\\narticle, whilst en lias no such meaning and is used only when\\nthe Noun has no Article.\\nEx. i dans la w Ce, he entered into the city; eUe n\\\\\\\\ t\\npas dans la matron, she is not inside the house.\\nnee, he is in France il faut lefaire en hdw, it\\nmust be done in h\\nWhen Pre] I b fore Verbs they require to be\\nd by the Infinitive (instead of the Participle Present\\nj ish).\\nW ;t ii\u00c2\u00ab ut saying a word, sans dire mot he whs scolded\\nfor having od for\\neating, il est l\u00c2\u00bb t\\nwhich is followed by tho\\nPart, l r\\nI he fell while coming down; oil\\nVapprenden Vetm I by studying it.\\nI snail nr leave yon wtthonl explaining to yon my motirea\\nnot found nil book while looking for the other things 1 sin- will have\\n...a well by giving j yon noi oontenl\\nwith hundred dollars 1 I for the winter, but it in\\nnot nool enough for the Bummer. He was not found In the suburbs,\\nlmt they discovered him within Parla I went there before them, and\\ntliu- the concert we \u00c2\u00ablis-\\n..ut wr did d any thing. Did j", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0278.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "CONJUNCTIONS. 271\\nvb Mil wlicn you passed through that country, or did you return with-\\nout having met them He was punished because he said the laws\\nwere good to punish but not to prevent crime. As for me, I know\\nnothing of it but as for you, you know every thing. He lives oppo-\\nsite us, and we see him often fall asleep while reading.\\nCHAPTER VIII.\\nCONJUNCTIONS.\\nConjunctions serve to connect words in the same sentence,\\nor sentences and parts of sentences with each other.\\nEx. Pierre et Paul, Peter and Paul je le vis et je le saluai,\\nI saw him and spoke to him il fa fait et elle ne Va pas fait,\\nhe has done it and she has not done it.\\nEt besides meaning and, is also repeated, and then corres-\\nponds to the English as well as, or both.\\nEx. Je Vai et vu et admire, I have both seen and admired him\\non a pris et le pere et lefts, they have caught the father as\\nwell as the son.\\nOu, meaning or, may also be repeated, and then corresponds\\nto the English either or.\\nEx. On le roi ou le ministre va parler, either the king or\\nthe minister will speak ou il s est trompe ou il nous a depus,\\nhe has either been mistaken or he has deceived us.\\nThe negative alternative is expressed by ni ni, which\\nrequires, like all negative expressions, the additional use ot ne\\nbefore the verb.\\nEx. Ni le roi ni le ministre ne parlera, neither the king nor\\nthe minister will speak je ne Vai ni vu ni salue, I have neither\\nseen him nor greeted him ni Vun ni V autre, neither the one\\nnor the other.\\nQue corresponds to the English that and loses its e before\\nwords beginning with a vowel or mute h it cannot be omitted in", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0279.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "272 OX THE PAETS OF SPEECH.\\nFrench as in English, but must be used (and supplied) when-\\never two verbs are connected with each other.\\nEx. I know he is here, je sals quil est ici I hope von will\\ncome, fespere que vous viendiez he said he would go, V dit\\nquil irait.\\nSi, when it corresponds to the English conditional if, can\\nin French be followed only by two tenses of the Verb; by the\\nPresent Indicative, for the English Present and Future; and\\nby the [mperfect Indicative, for any other Tenses or Moods\\nthat may be used in English\\nEx. If he comes, tfil vient if he will say yes, s il dit qu oui\\nif he should come to-morrow, s il venait demain if she were\\nlit h YlOUVeaU.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2hi:.\\nI have pvrn him both my love and my esteem, and I shall with-\\ndraw I ne DOT tin- other lor all your arguments. I saw ho\\n1 did not wish tit make matters worse or to\\nIf in the quarrel, I weal away. Either you or lie must\\nhas to he d I as he will Miller\\nIther your friend nor his wife when 1 met\\nTOO an II TOT to pardon me for it. I cannot say other-\\nthis morning, tell him I will be there certainly,\\nhe \u00c2\u00abiil wait, my library is open if he should refuse to wait,\\nVOU must lo k tie- would not sing last night because sho\\ns she will BUlg today. since bl.e says she is quito\\n_\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 ain.\\nCHAPTER IX\\nI IONS.\\nInterjections are short, indeclinable words which serve to\\nthe sodden emotions of man. They are, of course, ai\\n.1 as the latter. The following are the", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0280.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "INTERJECTIONS. 273\\nmost familiar, whilst others are either of rare occurrence, as\\ne. only in poets, or of objectionable nature\\nAh, ai, ouf of pain helas, alas Ji, fi done, fie gare, hem,\\nhold, ho of warning bravo, viual of applause ouais\\nof surprise hola, hem, ho, eh of calling chut, hush\\nUons, alerte, vile of encouragement liens look, look here\\n12*", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0281.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0282.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "GBAMMAK OF THE FBMCH LANGUAGE.\\nPART II.\\nFOE ADVANCED SCHOLAES.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0283.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "In the First Part of this Grammar the different parts of speech\\nhave been considered simply with B view to their form and ordi-\\nnary meaning.\\nIn the Second Part they will be treated as forming part of a\\nwith a view t their relatione to each other. The\\neame order will observed as in the First Part, ami the Btndent\\nMnally t.. refer to the elementary explanations\\nwhich will not be repealed.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0284.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "TABLE OF CONTENTS.\\nPAGE\\nPkeface\\nCHAPTER I.\\nNOUNS.\\nGender of Nouns 9\\nBy Signification 10\\nBy Termination 12\\nExercise 17\\nNumber of Nouns 18\\nExercise 20\\nPlural of Proper Names. 21\\nExercise 22\\nPlural of Compound Nouns 22\\nExercise 25\\nPlural of Abstract Nouns 26\\nCHAPTER II.\\nARTICLES.\\nFormation 26\\nPlace of the Article 28\\nRepetition of the Article 28\\nUse of the Article 29\\nUse of the Definite Article 30\\nUse of the Indefinite Article 30\\nExercise 31\\nUse of the Partitive Article 32\\nExercise 32\\nExercise 33", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0285.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "4 CONTENTS.\\nThe Article with Proper Names 34\\nExercise 35\\nThe Article with Names of Countries, etc 36\\nExercise 37\\nThe Article with Names of Mouths, etc 3t\\nExercise\\nThe Article with Nouns in Apposition 39\\nExercise 39\\nExercise 40\\nThe Article with Names of Measure 41\\nExercise 41\\nExercise 42\\ndon of the Article 42\\nExercise 43\\nExercise 48\\ntpoand Nonas in French 45\\nExercise 47\\n48\\n52\\nCHAPTER III.\\na i i arm i\\nl.t Of lj !ivrs 53\\n53\\niba 56\\n56\\n66\\nNoons 67\\n58\\nThe Place of Adjectives 58\\nit li doable meaning 58\\n68\\n68\\nl!5\\n07\\n09", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0286.jp2"}, "287": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS. 5\\nPAOR\\nList of Adjectives and their Prepositions 70\\nExercise 72\\nAdjectives of Measure 72\\nExercise 4\\nAdjectives of Number 74\\nCardinal Numbers 74\\nDefinitions of Time 75\\nExercise 78\\nOrdinal Numbers and other Numerals 79\\nExercise 81\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nPRONOUNS.\\nPersonal Pronouns 82\\nConjunctive Personal Pronouns 84\\nSubjects (as nominatives) 84\\nDirect Object (accusative) 87\\nExercise 90\\nIndirect Object (Dative) 90\\nExercise 93\\nIndirect Object (Genitive) 93\\nMeaning and use of en 93\\nExercise 96\\nPlace of Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 97\\nAs Subject 97\\nExercise r. 99\\nAs Object 99\\nExercise 100\\nRepetition of Personal Pronouns 101\\nExercise 102\\nPersonal Pronouns for Possessive Pronouns 102\\nExercise 104\\nHow to tra nslate it 1 04\\nExercise 106\\nPersonal Pronouns with Neuter Verbs 106\\nReflexive Personal Pronouns 107\\nAbsolute Personal Pronouns 108\\nExercise 109\\nExercise HI", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0287.jp2"}, "288": {"fulltext": "b CORTES j S.\\nPAGB\\nThe Pronoun soi Ill\\nExercise 112\\nPo*$cmce Pronouns 113\\nExercise 114\\nWith Articles, etc 114\\nExercise 116\\nDemonstrative Pronouns 110\\nExercise 118\\nAbsolute forms 119\\nExercise 120\\nWith et and hi 120\\nExercise 122\\n9 188\\nExercise 196\\nQuoi and oh 120\\n127\\nAbsol rogatite Pronouns 127\\n12!)\\n188\\n181\\nL81\\nlone i::i\\n184\\nwith Noma 1 10\\n1 1 1\\nUsed with ir without Nouns 1 12\\n145\\n148\\nL50\\nFollow. .1 l.v ftn L51\\ni 52\\nCII A PTBR V.\\nv I ED\\n154\\nand Mb Bobject 167\\nl r", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0288.jp2"}, "289": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS. 7\\nPAQR\\nThe Verb and Collective Nouns 1G0\\nExercise 101\\nThe Place of the Subject 102\\nExercise 104\\nThe Place of the Object 1G4\\nExercise 167\\nThe Tenses and Moods of the Verb 107\\nThe Infinitive 107\\nExercise 171\\nThe Present 172\\nExercise 173\\nThe Past Tenses 173\\nExercise 176\\nThe Compound Past Tenses 177\\nExercise 179\\nThe Future. 179\\nExercise 181\\nThe Conditional 181\\nExercise 182\\nThe Imperative 182\\nThe Subjunctive Mood 183\\nThe Sequence of Tenses 184\\nThe Use of the Subjunctive 185\\nFour Exercises 192\\nThe Participle Present 194\\nExercise 195\\nThe Participle Past 196\\nExercise 199\\nSpecial Eules on the same subject 200\\nExercise 202\\nThe English Auxiliary Verbs in French 202\\nPouvoir 202\\nExercise 204\\nVouloir 205\\nExercise 206\\nDevoir 207\\nExercise 208\\nLamer 209\\nExercise 210", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0289.jp2"}, "290": {"fulltext": "8 CONTENTS.\\nPAGE\\nFalloir 210\\nExercise 212\\nIdiomatic Use of Verbs 212\\nAvoir and y avoir 212\\nExercise 212\\nKir. 217\\n220\\nExercise 222\\nAil i. r and Venir 22:!\\nExercise 224\\nCB A PTER VI.\\nAl i.r.r.s.\\n1 of Advert* 227\\ntiftant, and atttant 238\\n.rose 229\\nad lit it 229\\nInterrogative Adverbs 281\\nse 888\\nrerbs ;i:\\nCHAPTER VII.\\n889\\nBame cnbjecl continued 2 12\\ni v. rbs with tli- IrP\\nlee 848\\nCH PT ER VIII.\\nc ii i-ii: i; i x.\\n881", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0290.jp2"}, "291": {"fulltext": "FRENCH GRAMMAR.\\nPART II.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nThe two most important relations, which influence the form\\nof French Nouns in a sentence, and through them affect all words\\nconnected with them, are their Gender and their Number, the\\nmanner in which they convey the idea of sex, and that of a\\nsingular or plural number.\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 GENDER OF NOUNS.\\nThe idea of sex is expressed by the Gender of Nouns, which\\nin French is double Masculine and Feminine. The Neuter\\nGender of the Latin language, from which most French Nouns\\nare derived, has been lost at a time when all Latin termina-\\ntions were lost and hence, to the eye and to the ear, the dis-\\ntinction between Masculine and Neuter ceased to be clear.\\nHence, Nouns which were Neuter in Latin, are either Masculine\\nor Feminine in French, though the majority belong to the\\nformer class. Hence, also, Nouns which are Neuter in English,\\nare either Masculine or Feminine in French.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0291.jp2"}, "292": {"fulltext": "10 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThe Gender, in French, is determined\\na. By the Meaning of the nouns. This gives the following\\nrules\\nMasculine are:\\n1. The names of male beings.\\nEx. Alexandre; Cesar cheval, horse; elephant, elephant.\\nExcept the following words, which, for etymological reasons,\\nare feminine, although they designate men scntindie, sentinel\\nmounted sentinel, and vigie, lookout\\na *:casionlly used as a masculine.\\n2. The names of beings generally considered as male.\\nEx angel; genie, genius centaure, centaur.\\nThis includes all diminutive names of animals, even when\\ntlii- original i mine.\\nEx. a young lion u, a young mouse;\\nI nan of days, m.\\nEg. dime 9 summer.\\nbare la fit*\\nJ ohn fl day All Saints l :iy.\\n4. The nl of decimal nomenclature,\\nThe oam of metal* and BO-called elementary h\\niron Iphate,\\n0. T: and shrubs.\\nhawthorn; bourdaine, alder,\\n7.\\nEx. fi West M North.\\nmonsoon.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0292.jp2"}, "293": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF NOUNS. 1 L\\n8. The names of mountains.\\nEx. Chimboraso Cents Liban, Lebanon Etna.\\nExcept those used only in the plural Alpes, Pyrenees, Cordil\\nUres and Vosges.\\n9. The names of cities, towns and villages.\\nEx. Londres, Paris, Berlin, Vienne.\\nExcept those derived from a Latin feminine, as Eoma:\\nRome Mantua Mantoue and those which are used with a fem-\\ninine article, as La BocJielle, La Nouvelle Orleans.\\nWhen towns are personified, they are always addressed as\\nfeminines.\\nEx. Oh malheureuse Tyr! dans-quelles mains es-tu tombeef\\nOh, unhappy Tyre, in whose hands art thou fallen\\n10. The names of countries which do not end in mute e.\\nEx. Danemarck, Denmark; Piemont, Piedmont.\\n11. All other parts of speech, like numerals, verbs, adjectives,\\nprepositions, etc., when used as nouns.\\nEx. le manger, eating le pourquoi, the wherefore un si,\\nan if; le tiers, the third le noir, the black.\\nExcept la moitie, half and technical terms like une parallele, a\\nparallel (ligne being understood).\\n.Feminine are\\n1. The names of female beings.\\nEx. Venus decsse, goddess nymphe femme, woman.\\n2. The names of virtues and qualities.\\nEx. la bonte, kindness Vopiniatrete, obstinacy.\\nExcept courage and merite.\\nb. By the Termination of the noun. This gives the follow-\\ning rule\\nNouns ending in mute e are generally feminine, and all others\\ngenerally masculine.\\nThis rule is, however, subject to numerous exception*.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0293.jp2"}, "294": {"fulltext": "12 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nmost of which have been given in the First Part of this Gram\\nmar. They arise mainly from these two considerations, which\\nwill guide the educated foreigner better in ascertaining the\\ngender of French nouns than a multitude of rules\\n1st. The meaning of a noun prevails over the mere form.\\n2d. The derivation of a noun from a Latin word aids in so\\nmuch, as the original gender is generally preserved, the neuter,\\nof course, being excepted.\\nIt must be borne in mind, also, that these and other rules in\\nFrench are Bubject to the influence of fashion and caprice. Thus\\naffaire and rencontre were formerly both masculine, the latter as\\nlate as the date of J. B. Rousseau they are now feminine.\\nIimUte, Age and art have changed their gender in more recent\\ntimes. Garrosse t formerly a feminine noun, became masculine,\\nise Louis XIV., aa a boy, forgot its gender, and called tor\\nThis uncertainty oi genders has led to the fact,\\nthat many no d now of both genders.\\nAn important class ^i nouns are those which have to bo\\napplied to both sexes. We observe here the following rules:\\n1. When they end in mute they remain unchanged:\\ncygnt\\\\ Bwan; csclave, slave; taut\\nExcept d i aruide, Fern, thrviiemt.\\nir, dt\u00c2\u00bb*6. i tn,\\\\ kro\u00c2\u00a7\\nnana pa /-iin-retse.\\nti jnssc.\\n2. Some have a different termination tor the feminine:\\nE*. l j Fern. daim, Fen data*\\nch,rr uil,\\noomp bicfalittc.\\nJam\\nI", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0294.jp2"}, "295": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF NOUNS.\\n13\\n3. The following nouns retain their gender as well as their\\nform, whether applied to man or woman\\nAgresseur,\\nmasc.\\naggressor.\\nguide,\\nmasc.\\nguide.\\namateur,\\nmasc.\\namateur.\\nmonstre,\\nmasc.\\nmonster.\\nange,\\nmasc.\\nangel.\\norateur,\\nmasc.\\norator.\\nappui,\\nmasc.\\nsupport.\\npartisan,\\nmasc.\\npartisan.\\nartisan,\\nmasc.\\ntradesman.\\nphilosophe,\\nmasc.\\nphilosopher.\\nartiste,\\nmasc.\\nartist.\\npersonne,\\nfern.\\nperson.\\nassassin,\\nauteur,\\nmasc.\\nmasc.\\nmurderer.\\nl author.\\n1 authoress.\\npoete,\\npratique,\\nmasc.\\nfern.\\njpoet.\\n1 poetess,\\ncustomer.\\nbete,\\nfern.\\nfool.\\nprecepteur,\\nmasc.\\npreceptor.\\nbotaniste,\\nmasc.\\nbotanist.\\npredecesseur, masc.\\npredecessor.\\nbourreau,\\nmasc.\\ntormentor.\\nprofesseur,\\nmasc.\\nprofessor.\\ncaution,\\nfern.\\nsecurity.\\nprosateur,\\nmasc.\\nproser.\\ncenseur,\\ncharlatan,\\nmasc.\\nmasc.\\ncensor,\\nquack.\\nredacteur,\\nmasc.\\nwriter in\\n1 newspapers.\\nchef,\\nmasc.\\nchief.\\nsecretaire,\\nmasc.\\nsecretary.\\ncoramis,\\nmasc.\\nclerk.\\nsouscHptew.\\nr, masc.\\nsubscriber.\\nconnaissancefem.\\ndiable, mas\\nacquaintance, successeur, masc. successor.\\nj a passionate person, or one who succeeds in diffi\\ncult undertakings.\\ndefenseur,\\nmasc.\\ndefender.\\ntemoin,\\nmasc.\\nwitness.\\ndetracteur,\\nmasc.\\nslanderer.\\ntraducteur,\\nmasc.\\ntranslator.\\ndisciple,\\nmasc.\\ndisciple.\\ntyran,\\nmasc.\\ntyrant.\\ndupe,\\nfem.\\ndupe.\\nvainqueur,\\nmasc.\\nvanquisher.\\necrivain,\\nmasc.\\nwriter.\\nversificateur.\\nmasc.\\nversifier.\\ngage,\\nmasc.\\npledge.\\nvictime,\\nfem.\\nvictim.\\nEnfant, child, also is invariable, but takes the feminine article\\nwhen applied to a girl, as la pauvre enfant, the poor little girl.\\n4. The following nouns occur both as masculine and as femi-\\nnine, without any change of meaning\\nAmour, which is masculine in the singular and feminine in\\nthe plural, unless it designates little amours.\\nEx. Un vif amour, warm love il rcest point d elernelles\\namours, there is no everlasting love.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0295.jp2"}, "296": {"fulltext": "14 OX THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nAutomne is masculine wheu the adjective stands before it,\\nand feminine when it follows it.\\nEx. El toi, riant automne and thou, smiling autumn! une\\nautomne nouvelle, a new autumn.\\nCouhur, color, is feminine, except when it designates any\\nparticular color. It then becomes masculine.\\nEx. Une belle coulenr, a fine color un bean couleur rose, a\\npretty pink-color.\\nCouple, couple, is masculine when it designates the union of\\na man and a woman in marriage and friendship, and feminine\\nwhen it merely Berves to express the number two.\\nEx couple I what a handsome couple Bonncz-\\nme a couple (two) of\\nWhen two of the Bame kind go together by n/r is\\nBubetitut.-.i\\nEx. I a pair of gloi both*,*\\ntin original, the peculiarity of being\\ngular and feminine in the plural.\\nEx perfect delight craianea s s\\nichorous charms,\\nit gives the femi-\\nhich innii. diat l\\\\ precede it.\\niple; inttruiU\\ntai _iit by ex*\\nmn, is feminii e when used to I bristian\\n1 1 inii and masculine in all othei cases.\\nbelles hymnu eh Luther, [el us dog those\\nbeautiful hymns by Luther ta hymn a Vinut, a\\nh) urn to Venus.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0296.jp2"}, "297": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF NOUNS.\\n15\\nOrge, barley, is feminine as long as it means barley stand-\\ning, and becomes masculine when barley is prepared for use.\\nEx. Voila de belles orges, that is fine barley Forge monde,\\npealed barley.\\nOrgue, organ, is, like delice, masculine in the singular and\\nfeminine in the plural.\\nEx. Get orgue est excellent, this organ is excellent y a-t-il de\\nbonnes orgues are there fine organs there\\n(Euvre, work, is feminine when it means any one great work\\nof art, etc., and masculine when it has the sense of deed or\\ncreation. In the plural, where it means the works of an\\nauthor, it is always feminine.\\nEx. Cest une ceuvre brillante, cet opera, this opera is a bril-\\nliant work. Les ceuvres completes de Voltaire, Voltaire s com-\\nplete works.\\n5. The following nouns occur, also, as masculines and as femi-\\nnines, but they change their meaning with their gender\\nMASCULINE.\\nFEMININE.\\nAide\\naid, adjutant\\naide\\nassistance\\nAigle\\nj eagle, a reading\\ndesk (at church)\\naigle\\nj the Eoman stand-\\nard\\nbarbs\\na Barbary horse\\nbarbe\\nbeard\\nberce\\nredbreast\\nberce\\ncow-parsnip\\ncapre\\nprivateer\\ncapre\\ncaper\\ncarpe\\nwrist (in anatomy)\\ncarpe\\ncarp\\ncartouche\\nscroll\\ncartouche\\ncartridge\\ncloaque\\nsink\\ncloaque\\nancient aqueduct\\nr stage-coach, or\\nnotch\\neoche\\npacket-boat on\\na river.\\ncoclte\\nfat sow\\ncravate\\nCroat\\ncravate\\ncravat\\ncrepe\\ncrape\\ncrepe\\npancake\\nespace\\nspace\\nespace\\nspace (in printing)\\nfollicule\\nfollicle\\nfollicule\\npod\\nforet\\ndrill\\nforet\\nforest", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0297.jp2"}, "298": {"fulltext": "16\\nOX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nfoudre\\ngure\\ngreffe\\nheliotrope\\nft\\nlout re\\nmhnoire\\ntnvufie\\nmoule\\noffice\\nombre\\nlarge tun, thun-\\n3 derbolt (in ele-\\nvated style)\\nhoar-frost\\nregister s office\\nguide\\ngales, in heraldry\\nturnsoll (.flower)\\ninterline\\nrainbow\\nChina varnish\\nlily\\nbook\\n(bat or muff of\\nhair\\nhandle\\n1 i II\\nthanks\\nmole, pier\\nof pulleys\\nmould\\noffice, 1\\n(a game at ranis,\\na Bab\\nJam\\nIP\\ni| bice)\\npper\\nI\\nfoudre\\ngure\\ngreffe\\nguide\\ngueule\\ninterligne\\nIm or Ljft\\nlie re\\nin, hi dri-\\nll, rci\\nmotile\\njiique\\nFEMININE.\\nthunderbolt (lite-\\nrally)\\nsnake (in her-\\naldry)\\ngraft\\nrein\\nmouth of animals\\n(heliotrope, (pre-\\ncious stone)\\nlead (in printing)\\nBprig-crystal\\ngum-lac\\n1 .ys a river)\\npound\\notter\\n-.the British\\nGbannel\\nmemory\\nmere;\\nfashion\\nword)\\n(muscle (a shell-\\nGab)\\npantry, larder\\nshade\\nparallel\\nclock\\npoh .p, P\\nperiod\\npiqne, grudge\\npeony (a Bower)\\ni tool)\\nFrying-pan\\nlaying cd", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0298.jp2"}, "299": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF NOUNS.\\n17\\nMASCDMNB.\\nFEMtNINE.\\nposte\\npost\\nposte\\nletter or horse\\npost\\npourpre\\npurple, a color,\\npourpre\\npurple, a fabric\\npretexts\\npretext\\nprctexte\\nEonian virile robe\\nreclame\\ncalling back a\\nhawk\\nreclame\\nj catch word (in\\nprinting)\\nreldche\\nrelaxation\\nreldche\\nshelter (for a ship)\\nremise\\nlivery coacli\\nremise\\ncoach-house\\nserpentaire\\nSerpentarius\\nserpentaire\\nsnake -root\\nsexte\\nsextus\\nsexte\\nsexte (in theology)\\nsolde\\nj balance of an ac-\\ncount\\nsolde\\np\u00c2\u00bby\\nsomme\\nnap, slumber\\nsomme\\nsum, load\\nsouris\\nsmile\\nsouris\\nmouse\\ntour\\nturn, trick\\ntour\\ntower\\ntriomplie\\ntriumph\\ntriomphe\\ntrumps (in cards)\\nirompette\\ntrumpeter\\ntrompelte\\ntrumpet\\nvague\\nvague, airy plains\\nvague\\nwave, surge\\nVKS 1\\nvase\\nvase\\nmud, slime\\nvigogne\\nj cloth of Vigone\\nhair\\nvigogne\\nLlama\\nvoile\\nveil\\nvoile\\nsail\\nExercise.\\nThis great singer was a beautiful lady she was a stranger here, but\\nyour cousin and her husband had seen her before. There was hoar-\\nfrost this morning, and later it rained; this will spoil the wheat and\\nthe barley. Mme. de Genlis was the governess of one of the kings of\\nFrance and the author of several books. Her collected works have\\nbeen published. Has your neighbor, the grocer, many customers now\\nHe has lost many who have gone to my other neighbor, the corporal s\\nwidow. When I was in that country I admired the excellent organs\\nfor which Holland is famous. He has paid for that book one pound\\nsterling, and he thinks it cheap. She has played us a bad trick and\\ndeserves to be punished. That tower is very old it was probably\\nbuilt by the Romans. Our guide was a peasant woman, and when I\\nlost the reins of my horse she helped me better than a man would\\nhave done. The trumpeter sounded his trumpet and summoned them", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0299.jp2"}, "300": {"fulltext": "18 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nto surrender. We were all in the boat, when the wind tore the sail\\nand my sister s veil was carried off.\\nII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 NUMBER OF NOUNS.\\nCommon Nouns can represent one person or object, or several\\npersons or objects, and, having a form for each, arc said to be\\nin the singular or plural.\\nProper Names, designating but one person or object, can\\ntherefore have no plural as long as they are used as genuine\\npp. per names. It will be Been, hereafter, that they are fre-\\nquently used as Common Nouns, and that they then occur in\\nthe plural also.\\nThe rules on the formation o( the plural have been fully given\\nin tin First Tart this dammar.\\ne no plural iii French\\n1. The names of metals and Bo-called elements, when used in\\ntheir general meaning.\\nEx. gold la mercury.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2j. The names of virtues and vices, and certain conditions of\\nman, being used a* abstract nouns.\\nEx. Vara\\\\ \u00c2\u00bbr, eeal la faith fa youth U l n-\\nmarriage.\\n.i mri, truth.\\n4. D8I 1 a- tiMlins.\\nEx. It i j nid retiring; ledormir, sleeping.\\nI wh ii :h i bj an sdjeedve,\\nEx. Us boi. ironical\\nlaughs.\\ni orda take a plural form when they have become\\nfully naturalized; a are considered as genuine\\nonl) in th 1 1 follow*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0300.jp2"}, "301": {"fulltext": "NUMBER OF NOUNS.\\n10\\ning words of such origin appear to have been naturalized, and\\noccur in the plural form in standard authors\\npanorama\\npanorama,\\nlady\\nlady,\\nopera\\nopera,\\ndeficit\\ndeficit,\\nimpromptu\\nimpromptu,\\nexamen\\nexamination,\\ndebet\\nbalance\\nimbroglio\\ndimculty,\\nduo\\nduo,\\nincognito\\nincognito,\\necho\\necho,\\nmacaroni\\nmacaroni,\\nalinea\\nparagraph,\\nwhig\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0whig,\\naparte\\naside,\\nnumero\\nnumber,\\nbravo\\nbravo,\\npiano\\npiano,\\nzero\\nzero,\\npensum\\ntask,\\nquolibet\\nquodlibet,\\nrecepisse\\nreceipt.\\nplacet\\npetition,\\n6. Other parts of speech, used for the occasion as nouns.\\nEx. Trois un de suite, three ones in succession les oui et les\\nnous, the ayes and noes.\\nThe following nouns are singular in French and plural in\\nEno-lish\\navoine\\noats,\\nmetaphysique\\nmetaphysics,\\ncompensation\\namends,\\noptique\\noptics,\\ncresson\\ncresses,\\npolitique\\npolitics,\\nfraisil\\ncinders,\\npneumatique\\npneumatics,\\nlie\\ndregs,\\npourpre\\npurples (a fever),\\nlinge\\nclothes,\\nrougeole\\nmeasles.\\nmorale\\nethics, morals,\\nThe following nouns are\\nplural in French\\nand singular i:\\nInglish\\nPLTXBAIi.\\nSmGTJLAK.\\nELUKAL.\\nSmGTJLAE.\\naccordailles\\nmarriage (articles).\\nconfins\\nboundary,\\nalentours\\nneighborhood,\\nconnaissances knowledge,\\narmoiries\\ncoat of arms,\\ndecombres\\nrubbish,\\nassistants\\naudience,\\ndepens\\nexpense,\\natours\\ndress,\\nepinards\\nspinach,\\nbroussaillcs\\nthicket,\\nerrements\\ntracks,\\nbroutUles\\nbrushwood,\\nfiangailles\\nbetrothal.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0301.jp2"}, "302": {"fulltext": "20\\nOX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nPZiUBAIi.\\nSINGULAR.\\nPLCRAL.\\nSINGULAR.\\nhaptcme)\\nfont (baptis\\nmaJ),\\nmeuUes\\nfurniture,\\nfnt is\\nexpense,\\n(small wearing\\napparel,\\nimmeiMa\\nreal estate,\\n11 tppes\\ndiet s\\nfilth,\\ndbseques\\nfuneral,\\nentreaty,\\nte/u brcs\\ndarkness,\\nbuu miary,\\nvergettes\\nbrush.\\nghost,\\nThe following nouns have both numbers in Fiench and are\\nused in only one in English\\nPLURAL.\\nAN!) PLUB. SINGULAR\\nSING. AND PLCR.\\nAlius\\nProperty\\nbien, biena,\\nkindness\\nbonte,\\nf ndre, a ndres,\\nhair\\nadvice\\npeopl\\nfrogria, progrto,\\npoetry\\nWho bore th .i- enterprise? Burke s most\\nfain itiful and the Sublime.\\nboondaryhi I thi war hash gun. Wben did his\\nbetrothal I will the wedding follow soon i It ii\\ng f illowed irame-\\nthe precious privili\\nwho e wise. 1\\no the widow. My know\\niliil:i\\nlaw II re noble, but I have\\nliis father, who need I the forests and\\ni .r fuel. We stayed with her until dark when tl ey brought\\nwe I. ii her. Wbl I", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0302.jp2"}, "303": {"fulltext": "NUMBEK OF NOUNS. 21\\nPLURAL OF PROPER NAMES.\\nProper Names, as has been mentioned before, do not form a\\nplural as long as they serve to designate but one person or\\nobject. Thus they remain unchanged even when they repre-\\nsent two or more members of the same family, without forming\\na class of them.\\nEx. Les deux Corneille se sont distingues, both Corneilles have\\nbeen distinguished VEspagne aproduit les deux Seueque, Spain\\nhas given birth to the two Senecas.\\nThey retain the singular form even before a plural article in\\nelevated style, when their merit is referred to, by using a forci-\\nble ellipsis.\\nEx. Le merite des Homere, des Virgile et des Milton, the merit\\nof (poets like) Homer, Virgil and Milton.\\nProper names, however, are frequently used as common nouns,\\nand then they will appear in the plural form. This is done\\n1. When they are applied to whole classes of men, so that\\nthe individuality is completely sunk in the number.\\nEx. LVnstoire des douze Cesars, the history of the twelve\\nCsesars les Stuarts rHy rentrereni plus, the Stuarts did not\\nreturn there any more; parlous des Pharaons, let us speak of\\nthe Pharaos.\\n2. When they are used to designate character or qualities\\ntaken from the bearer of the proper name.\\nEx. Metne aux Nerons on doit Vobeissance, we must obey\\neven (men like) the Neros. Louis fit des Boilea.ux Auguste\\ndes Virgiles, Louis made (poets like) Boileaus Augustus, Vir-\\ngils.\\n3. When they are used to designate the works of the bearers\\nof these proper names.\\nEx. Ce Musee possede deux Raphaels, that museum possesses\\ntwo (paintings by) Piaphael. Les vrais Elzevirs sont rares,\\ngenuine (editions by the) Elzevirs are scarce.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0303.jp2"}, "304": {"fulltext": "22 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nMy brother Las bought two Horaces, one in Latin and one in Eng-\\nlish I bought for myself a fine Listory of the twelve Caesars, in four\\nvolumes, which are hound like my Virgils and my Juvenals. Great\\ngenerals are forgotten, but the people will never forget the Washingtons\\nand the Lafayettes. The last of the Bourbons, who has yet a throne in\\nEurope, is the Queen of Spain the Stuarts have long ceased to be a\\nreigning family. The Christians taught the pagans to respect their\\nrulers, and that we owe obedience even to men like Nero. It is a\\ncurious fact in the history of French literature that there were two\\nBoileaus and two Racines. The Catos never travelled otherwise,\\nDi ither alone nor with their armies.\\nPLURAL\\nCompound Noons are in Preoch only those which consist ot\\nthree words coooected with each other by a hyphen.\\nEx. J/----- rainbow funny story; iu h-vic,\\nbrandy.\\nIt will that they do not often correspond in\\nh and in English, the latter language having a tendency\\neithei them by a single word, as dandy and castor\\nr t w rite the two component\\nelements in one word, as fireman, pompier, and bookseller,\\nFrench componnd nouns, which are not united by hyphens,\\nbut written in one word, are of coarse Bubject to the elemen\\ntary rales on the formation of the plural, and simply add an i\\nto the\\ni librairtt,\\ni blemi d which n lds n t iM.th parts\\nThe general principles which alone can guide foreigners safely\\nin learning how to form the plural of compound nouns are", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0304.jp2"}, "305": {"fulltext": "NUMBER OF NOUNS. 23\\nf. Only such parts of a compound noun as are declinable\\nwhen standing alone, can take the sign of the plural.\\nEx. desfausses clefs, false keys adjective and noun.\\ndes chefs-lieux, principal towns noun and noun.\\ndes vice-presidents, vice-presidents noun only.\\ndes passe-partout, master keys neither part.\\n2. Those parts only take the sign of the plural, which are\\nused with a plural meaning.\\nEx. des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows del is not plural.\\ndes tete-a-tete, private interview tele is taken in the singu-\\nlar meaning.\\nHence are obtained the fo lowing rules\\nIn compound nouns consisting of a noun and an adjective\\nor a noun and a noun, without preposition, both parts take\\nthe sign of the plural.\\nEx. les francs-ma cons, the free-masons.\\nles basses-cours, the poultry -yards.\\ndes choux-fleurs, cauliflowers.\\nles chefs-lieux, the principal towns.\\nExcept the following\\ndes Uanc-seings, blanks.\\ndes terre-pleins, platforms.\\ndes cJiemu-legers, liglithorse men.\\ndes Jwtels-dieu, hospitals (God s houses),\\nand a few others of rare occurrence.\\nExcept, also, that the Adjective demi remains unchanged in\\ncompound nouns.\\nEx. des demi-7ieures, half-hours les demi-dieux, the demigods.\\nCompound nouns, consisting of nouns connected by a pre-\\nposition, give the sign of the plural to the first only.\\nEx. des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows deux chefs d eeuvre, two master-\\npieces les eaux-de-vie, the brandies des vers-a-soie, silkworms.\\nExcept des coq-d-l dne, idle tales des pied-d-terre, temporarv\\nresidences des tete-d-tete, private interviews", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0305.jp2"}, "306": {"fulltext": "2\u00c2\u00b1 OX THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nCompound nouns consisting partly or wholly of indechna-\\nble parts of speech like adverbs, verbs or prepositions, take\\nthe sign of the plural only where it is admissible or not at all.\\nEx. les porte-huiliers (verb and noun), the castors.\\nles avant-gardes (preposition and noun), the vanguards.\\ndes essuie-mains (verb and noun), the towels.\\ndes cure-dents (verb and noun), the toothpicks.\\ndes passe-partout (verb and preposition), master-keys.\\ndes pour-boin (preposition and verb), servants fees.\\nExcept that when the mi-aning is not plural, even the declina-\\nble parts of such compound nouns will not take the sign of the\\nplural.\\nEx. les n U the night-caps (for m- head only).\\ndes i alarm-clocks (the morning only).\\nconnter-poison (not against many poisons.)\\n1 1.- word garde, of frequent i ccurrence in compound nouns,\\nplural when it is the noun ff trde, a keeper, but it\\nremains anch^nged when it i- the verb irring to a\\nthing.\\nic-ke spera.\\ni-, the screen (preserve-eight).\\n[i ments, remain nn-\\n_ I in the plural.\\n8 i forman).\\nil ions 1 1 ortuguese).\\nitin).\\nA list of certain compound nouns, with their plural appended,\\nkin component parts of rare\\nmeaning\\nI \\\\K. l Ui:\\\\l..\\nmarine aig\\nbutti Uants\\ni ings\\nlint.-t M-K.\\nli hthone I grrs", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0306.jp2"}, "307": {"fulltext": "NUMBER OF NOUNS.\\n25\\nSINGULAR.\\nPLURAL.\\ncontre-danse\\ncotillion\\ncontre-danses\\nepine-vinette\\nraspberry\\nepines-vineties\\ne/x-president (and others\\ncompounded with ex)\\nex-president\\nex presidents\\nfesfte-mathieu\\nmiser\\nfesse-mathieu\\nfier-diras\\nbully\\nfier-diras\\nfranc-alleu\\nfreehold\\nfrancs-atteux\\nfranc-real\\na sort of pear\\nfrancs-reals\\ngomme-gutte\\ngamboge\\ngommes-guttes\\nguet-apens\\nambush\\nguets-apens\\ngrand mere (and all others\\nin which grand is fol-\\ngrandmother\\ngrand mires\\nlowed by an apostrophe)\\nhavre-sac\\nknapsack\\nhavresacs\\nloup-cervier\\nlynx\\nloups-cerviers\\nloup-garou\\nwere-wolf\\nloups-garous\\nmaitre-es-arts and others com- master of arts\\nV bined with s\\nm%-careme or mi mid-lent\\nmaitres-es-arts\\nmi-caremes\\nnerf-ferure\\noverreach\\nnerfs-ferures\\norang-outang\\norang-outang\\norangs-outangs\\npasse-port\\npassport\\npasse-ports\\npore-epic\\nporcupine\\npores-epics\\npie-grieche\\nspeckled magpie\\npies-grieches\\nsemi-ton (and all combined\\nwith semi)\\nsemi-tone\\nsemi-tons\\ntragi-comedie\\ntragi-comedy\\ntragi-comedi-es\\nvice-roi (and all combined\\nwith vice)\\nviceroy\\nnce-rois\\nExercise.\\nHave you ever seen silkworms? they eat more voraciously than\\nany other animals. These young ladies were his granddaughters, and\\nthere were two grandmothers in the house. We have lost the key to\\nour room perhaps you have a master-key, with which we can open\\nthe door. Send the game-keepers and let them come up to-morrow\\nearly I want to go out shooting tell them especially to see if there\\nare any hedgehogs in the garden I have never seen those animals.\\nAfter the polonaise they danced several cotillions, and at last they", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0307.jp2"}, "308": {"fulltext": "26 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nfinished with a reel. Dandies are not contemptible, because they may\\nbe very good men but they are often very ridiculous. Have you\\nheard that the thieves broke last night into the poultry -yards of our\\nneighbors and stole all their fowls The vanguards of the two armies\\nmet when the rearguards were at the distance of twenty miles the\\none from the other. The masons of this country have done a great\\ndeal of good to both parties during the last war.\\nPLURAL OF ABSTRACT NOUNS.\\nAbstract Nouns which designate a quality, virtue or vice, a\\ncondition or a general idea, independent of any connection with\\nactual life, can have no plural as long as they arc strictly used\\nin that sense.\\nEx. La bonle nous rend aimables, kindness makes us agreeable\\nla beauti passs, V esprit rate, beauty fades, wit remains; la re-\\neherehe da bonheur, tlie search after happiness; la chariU cut la\\npra/ticrc d,a vertus, charity is the first virtue.\\nThese same nouns are, however, frequently employed as\\ncommon nouns, t designate Bpecial ads, tbe effects of such\\nqualities r the actual results of general ideas, and then they\\nappear in the plural form.\\nK\\\\. Elk a eombU dc softie s, she has overwhelmed me with\\nkind sets; U j a de% bmtutie d\u00c2\u00bb tout l temps, there arc beauties\\nfor all seasons o bonheun tu l i devons^nout patf\\nhow many momenta of bappinesa we owe him! faitet vo\u00c2\u00bb chart\\ntit m sservf, perform your charities in secret.\\nCHAPTER II\\nART1CI IS.\\nThe three Articles wttch the French language employs for\\nthe purpose of defining accurately the extent of the significa-\\ntion f nouns arc derived from other parts of speech, as the\\nLatin, the original form of the Flench, possessed no such part", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0308.jp2"}, "309": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 27\\nof speech. There, on the contrary, the duty of the modern\\narticle was performed by the great variety of terminations,\\nwhich formed the so-called declensions of Latin nouns. The\\ncomplicated system of these varied and numerous forms was\\naccessible neither to the dull ear of the barbarians, who con-\\nquered the Roman Empire, nor to their uncultivated intellect.\\nHence the total loss of all inflections and the reduction of\\nFrench nouns to one single form. The latter was now no longer\\ncapable of expressing case or number, and yet, as the newly\\nformed language, arising from a mixture of Latin words with\\nGerman forms, regained slowly its former power, a necessity\\narose for expressing the more delicate shades of meaning, and\\nthe relations which nouns had to other words in the same sen-\\ntence. To supply the lost inflections, all the idioms that were\\ndescended from the Latin, the so-called Romance languages,\\nbegan to place certain words before the nouns, which gradually\\nfulfilled the same purpose. These were pronouns or numerals\\nand prepositions. They took uniformly\\n1. The Demonstrative Pronoun, Me, ilia, Mud, and placed it\\nbefore the noun to give it a more definite meaning. By con-\\nstant use it lost part of its substance when thus employed, and\\nsoon nothing was left but the forms now in use,\\nle, la, V and les.\\nBefore these pronouns they placed the two prepositions de,\\nof, and ad, to, which from the same frequency of joined use,\\ncombined and produced the forms\\ndu, de la, de V and des,\\nau, a la, a V and aux.\\nSo that de Vhomme literally means de ille homo, of that man,\\nand a, lafemme, ad ilia femina, to that woman.\\n2. The Numeral Adjective unus, una, unura, to give to the\\nnoun before which it was placed an indefinite meaning. This", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0309.jp2"}, "310": {"fulltext": "28 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nalso lost, with all other words, its termination, retaining onl) for\\nthe feminine a mute e, and thus producing the forms\\nu n, ttne,\\nand with the same prepositions\\n(Tun, (Tune,\\na un, a une,\\nso that cCun homme is literally de units homo, of one man, and\\ndune f inme, de una femina, of one woman.\\nThis is the origin of the forms of the Definite and Indefinite\\nArticle. The Partitive Article consists, as has been shown in\\nthe 1 first Part of this Grammar, simply of the preposition /e or\\nof its combinations with the Definite Article:\\ndu, dc des.\\nPLACE ok tiik Aniici.i:.\\nThe place of the Article is invariably before the noun which\\nit serves to qualify it allows, however, adjectives and the ad-\\nverbs that quality them, to interpose between it and the noun,\\nit qualifies these words together with the noun.\\nEx. raieon vent Futile, reason calls for that which is -use-\\nful. Let petite* miehree, little miseries; le plus affreux ohjri, the-\\nmost frightful object.\\nT ut, all, and the componnd nonna ur, Afonrieur,\\nplace the article after them-\\nEx. T\u00c2\u00bbut If mondt\\\\ the whole world toute tannei, tli\u00c2\u00ab whole\\nvear; Monneur le Prendent^ Mr. President Madame l i Com-\\ntetee, the (ladj krantess.\\nREPETITION or IMF AKTKl.R.\\nTh Article osed to determine the signification of several\\nnouns most be repeated before each noun.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0310.jp2"}, "311": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 29\\nEx. Les lettres, les paquets et Vargent doivent tire affranchix,\\nletters, parcels and money must be prepaid J ai vu le pcre et\\nla mire de at enfant, I have seen the father and mother of this\\nchild.\\nThe article before adjectives is not repeated when both ad-\\njectives qualify the same person or object.\\nEx. Le sage et ineux Fenelon, the wise and pious Fenelon la\\ngrande et magnifique fete du roi, the large and magnificent\\nentertainment of the king.\\nThe article before adjectives must be repeated, if the two\\nadjectives refer to distinct persons or objects.\\nEx. Le premier et le second surintendant, the first and the second\\nsuperintendent (two different persons) Pancien et le nouveau\\ncontinent, the Old and the New World le second et le troisieme\\netage, the second and third story.\\nThe article may be omitted\\nBefore two phiral nouns taken in a general sense\\nEx. Le devouement des peres et meres, the devotion of fathers\\nand mothers.\\nBefore two nouns connected by ou, or, which explain each other\\nEx. Les deputes ou representatifs du peuple, the deputies or\\nrepresentatives of the people les Cesars ou empereurs de\\nBorne, the Caesars or emperors of Rome.\\nUSE OF THE ARTICLES.\\nThe great principle which forms the basis of all the rules\\non the use of articles in French is this\\nEvery noun must be accompanied by an article or its equiv-\\nalent, unless it is so united with another noun, a verb or\\na preposition as to form but one idea with them.\\nThe following classes of words are equivalent to the article,\\nand therefore fulfil the purposes of this fundamental rule as well\\nas the article\\nThe Possessive Adjectives mon, ton, son, etc.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0311.jp2"}, "312": {"fulltext": "30 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThe Demonstrative Adjectives: ce, cette, ces, etc.\\nThe Interrogative Adjectives quel, lequel, etc.\\nThe Cardinal Numbers un, dix, cent, etc.\\nThe Pronominal Adjectives: aucun, no; chaque, every; cer-\\ntain, certain maint, many a mil, no plusieurs, several quelque,\\nsome, ttl, many a, in proverbial expressions, tout in the sense\\nof every.\\nBeing equivalent to the article, these words, of course, can-\\nnot be accompanied by the article.\\nUSE OF DEFINITE AHTICLE.\\nThe Definite Article is placed before common nouns, when\\nit is desired to take their meaning in a general sense to repre-\\nsent the whole class or species, or some definite part of the\\nwhole. The purpose is to give a definite meaning to the nouu.\\nEx. L or est un uutnl, gold is a metal.\\nJ ctutlit l, Frangaitf 1 study French.\\nLet hommet sunt morlais, man is mortal.\\nKlU omm l i mtuigue, she ia fond of music.\\nJit prifire let ehevaux noire, I prefer Mack horses.\\nLa font n esl pat la raieon, force is not reason.\\nLa suite dt ?,the effect ofgreal passions.\\nThis rule applies in like manner to other parts of spech u ed\\nf\u00c2\u00ab r the occasion as nouns.\\nEx. Vavart Ut misinit,!,, misers are unhappy (Adjective).\\nLt manger t l boirt, drinking and eating (Verb).\\nR demand* I j aaka whv (Adverb).\\nU8K OF Till IMiUMIE AICTI. IK.\\nThe Indefinite A: I in French as in English, when-\\never a vague, indefinite meaning is to be given to the noun.\\nEx. ATOM OV0M Ml \u00c2\u00bbu toUat, wr saw a soldier.\\nY a-t-il KM t ylise is there a church there 1", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0312.jp2"}, "313": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 31\\nIt supplies the place of the partitive article, when a quality,\\nvirtue or vice is taken in a partitive sense and qualified by\\nan adjective or other word following it.\\nEx. Get homme a du talent, that man has talent (Partitive\\nArticle).\\nCet homme a un talent remarquable, that man has re-\\nmarkable talent.\\nII montre un grand courage, he shows great courage.\\nIt is used, also, with the meaning of the English a certain\\nhind of, when the noun is accompanied by an adjective.\\nEx. Nous y avons bu un vin delicieux, we drank there a de-\\nlicious (kind of) wine.\\nII fit tin temps atroce, it was horrible weather.\\nExercise.\\nPoverty is often the fruit of vice, but wealth is rarely the result of\\nwisdom. Men are credulous, they believe every story that is told them\\nwith an air of authority. Bad books are often more dangerous than\\nbad men they have subtle poison in their most charming pages.\\nThese laws give encouragement to industry, and agriculture is not\\nneglected. Children are often unhappier than they appear, for griefa\\nand sorrows are not measured by years. Youth is a happy age, but\\nit passes away swifter than all other seasons of our life. Patience is\\none of those virtues which it is most difficult to acquire. Do you like\\nstrawberries I like raspberries better, but I cannot procure any at\\nthis season of the year spring is the only season when we have an\\nabundance of them. The husband teaches mathematics and the wife\\nmusic, but who teaches Latin and Greek Wine is very dear, and\\ntherefore beer is recommended by many physicians, but I like wine\\nbest. If we wish to distinguish truth from falsehood we must be\\nvery prudent, for fiction is often stranger than truth. Weak men are\\ngoverned by their passions, and good men endeavor to follow princi-\\nples but men generally act more by impulse than from conviction.\\nYoung children are exposed to many dangers, yet, how many escape\\nLife is a joy in youth, a duty in later years, and a burden in old age.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0313.jp2"}, "314": {"fulltext": "32 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nUSE OF THE PAKT1T1VE Alt IICLIC.\\nThe Partitive Article serves to designate some part of a\\nspecies, some individuals of a class, or some portions of a whole.\\nAs there is ho such article in English, the end is here obtained\\nby the use of some and any, or by the suppression of the article,\\nleaving some or any to be understood.\\nEx. Tax du pain et du frontage, I have (some) bread and\\ncheese.\\nVoulcz-vous de la crtme will you take (some) cream 1\\nNous n\\\\umcs pas de chevaux, we had uo (not any) horses*\\nII a moittre de la eagesse, he has shown (some) wisdom.\\nAvez-rous du the et da cafe have you any tea and\\ncoffi\\nThe difference between this article and the definite article\\ni- especially striking, when verb- like manger, toea^ooire, to\\ndrink, prendre, to take, I by their object.\\nEx. Prem i-wmt du tl i do yoa take tea I\\nPrensz-vout U titff do you eat suj\\nThe partitive art: adjectives and in\\nuces.\\nEx. H a 6 /j el rses there.\\nde pain, we has.- no bread.\\nITeut-il j id he no reditorel\\nKxEliriSK.\\nBare patience and you \u00e2\u0080\u00a2will overcome all these diffleoHlei\\nme breed and b a tt e r and I want do eake Do yon take tea r uii eel\\nsapper, bal I like tea better than\\ne any Mends with berl I know- thai she lias no\\nfor everybody hues h\u00c2\u00bb\u00c2\u00bbr; but there ore always envi\\nrnv. and I had no i\\nbnl he said he had n\\nbread. Do yoa Bke rmujI wlneal Dome and 1 will give you\\niu order to try my wine. II.- has shown seme courage la this affair,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0314.jp2"}, "315": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 33\\nbat I expected that he would also nave prudence. Are there any\\nslaves in that country 2 There are no slaves there now, they have\\ngiven them their liberty. I have seen men who had never known\\nfear, but I have always doubted their courage. I wish I had pens,\\nink and paper, I would write letters to all my friends I have leisure\\nnow, and to-morrow I shall have work to do during the whole day.\\nThey have shown profound wisdom in the management of their affairs\\nif we had had experience we would have succeeded.\\nThe rule that the partitive article consists of de only before\\nadjectives, does not apply to compound nouns, consisting of\\nan adjective and a noun, because here the former is a part of\\nthe noun itself.\\nEx. Ce sont des petits-maitres, they are dandies.\\nJYous connaissohs des franc macons, we know some frea\\nmasons.\\nNor to adjectives, used as nouns.\\nEx Y a-t-il du nouveau? is there any news\\nMelez du rouge et du bleu, mix some red and blue.\\nThe partitive article is, in a few instances, expressed in\\nEnglish by some of the, all of which is rendered by du, etc.,\\nonly.\\nEx. Donnez-moi du doux, give me some of the sweet (wine).\\nAurez-vous des dores will you have some of tbe gilt 1\\nExercise.\\nWill you not buy good lemons they are fresh and better than\\nlemons are generally. The children are going to have new aprons,\\nand their mother will buy linen for them. He told us long stories\\nabout the war, and wonderful adventures through which he had\\npassed. We received them with hesitation, for although he loves\\nTruth generally, he sometimes tells things which are not strictly true.\\nDo you like novels, or do you think they do harm to young people\\nThis author shows that he has imagination, but he lacks judgment.\\nThat man has bad children and he does not punish them, although", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0315.jp2"}, "316": {"fulltext": "3i ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nlie knows that bad examples are pernicious. Do you not think that\\neven soldiers are tired of long wars The Prussian troops have, bet-\\nter guns than the Austrians, but these have more experienced gen-\\nerals. When he sat down at table he found himself surrounded by\\nchildren and grandchildren, sons-in-law and daughters-in-law.\\nThe partitive article resumes its full form, du, de la, de T,\\nand des after negative verbs, when they arc used interroga-\\ntively at the same time. This is also the case when the nega-\\ntive is not absolute, but only added with regard to the object\\nof the verb.\\nEx. Ne juuez pas dts airs trop lonys, do not play too long\\ntunes.\\nJe ne vous do nne r ai pas da vers, I will give you no verses.\\nN^a-t tl pas du amis qui puissent venir a sou aide? has\\nhe no friends that could come to his aid\\nJPsurent-ellespasdesehapeauxf did they Dot wear bonnets?\\nThe partitive article is altogether suppressed, for the sake of\\neuphony, when it is piece. led by the preposition de.\\nEx. La deposition de {des) tfmoins subomfa\\\\ the evidence of\\nbribed witnesses.\\nOn lui donna du vinaigre au lieu d eau, they gave him\\nvinegar inatead of water.\\nJe dSelars mfaveur c/ biert\\\\ I declare in favor of beer.\\nTHEAKTICLE WITH CERTAIN CLASSES OF NOUN\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 with PBOPXB NAMI.S.\\nProper Names, m has already been seen in the chapter on\\nnouns, take no article us long as they are Deed as genuine\\nproper names.\\nl.\\\\. trop tdt Caesar waa killed too soon.\\n11 rraawwfr/i uu j u a Racine, he resembles Racine some-\\nwhat.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0316.jp2"}, "317": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 35\\nBut when they are used as common nouns, they are sub-\\nject to the same rules as the latter.\\nEx. Les Ratines ei les Molieres sont rares, (men like) Racine\\nand Moliere are rare. Charles XII. etait l Alexandre du Nerd,\\nCharles XII. was the Alexander of the North. Cest tin\\nvrai Caton, he is a real Cato. Donnez-moi le Virgile annote,\\ngive me the (copy of) Virgil with notes. Ou est V Horace de\\nmonjrere where is my brother s Horace Tai vendu le Guide\\nque vous avez vu, I have sold the (painting by) Guido which\\nyou saw.\\nItalian artists and writers are, after the manner of their\\ncountry, spoken of with the article. Female singers also are\\nthus quoted.\\nEx. Le Tasse est VHomere de Vltalie, Tasso is the Homer of\\nItaly. Le Michel Ange n aurait pas mieux/ait, Michael Angelo\\ncould not have done better. La Grisi va reparaitre, Madame\\nGrisi is going to perform again.\\nProper names, preceded by titles, require the article before\\nthe latter, contrary to English usage.\\nEx. Le General Washington et les deputes, General Wash-\\nington and the Representatives. Oil est le docteur N. where is\\nDr. K?\\nThe article is also required before adjectives which qualify\\nproper names, except Saint, which is considered as forming\\npart of the name itself.\\nEx. Allez chercher le jeune Pierre, go and look for young Peter.\\nOUt est done la petite Marie? where is little Mary\\nCest la fete de St. Jean, this is St. John s day.\\nExekcise.\\nMarshal Lannes was the friend of the Emperor Napoleon and received\\nmany favors from his patron. Doctor Johnson was one of the first\\nwriters of England, and one of her most remarkable men. Have you\\nread the history of Cardinal Woolsey, of his brilliant career, and his", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0317.jp2"}, "318": {"fulltext": "36 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nsudden downfall I went to see poor James and his sick brother\\nto-day they were both very sad. King Richard went to the Holy\\nLand, and when he returned he was made prisoner by his enemy, the\\nDuke of Austria. Where is young Lewis now I have not seen him\\nfor many years he and pretty Mary came every day to my house,\\nand brought me a bouquet of flowers.\\nII. WITH THE NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND CITIES.\\nThe names of Countries are used in French with the definite\\narticle.\\na. When the countries are taken as a whole, or in any way\\nindividualized, as by ascribing to them certain qualities or t une-\\ntions.\\nEx. La France est i n empire Jlorietant, France is a flourishing\\nempire. L Italit a dkclan la guerre a FAutriche, Italy has de-\\nclared war against Austria, On ne saurait trop admirer la con*\\nIc I AmjUUrrt, England s conduct cannot be too much*\\nadmired.\\nWhen the countries are situated out of Europe and little\\nknown.\\nEx. t linc poup e, the emperor\\nof China is but a puppet J\\\\ii vicu deux an* au Mexique, 1 have\\nlived tw J MR in M.-x.\\nII in-, all Dion, lee State-Unit, an accon\\npanicd by thf ar\\nKx. J from Maine t T\\nnia and Booth Carolina; (V vitnt d la\\n-.1 Louisiana.\\nThe names of coantri without the article\\na. When ii .v a part, and not the whole, is referred to.\\nE\\\\. r i me, lives in Spain (somewhei\\ncomes from England\\nand ia rod.\\nThe prepositions to and in ar. both irau.slut--d in French i y -/i.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0318.jp2"}, "319": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 37\\nb. When they are used to qualify another noun in the man-\\nner of an adjective.\\nEx. Les rois de France en faisaient de meme, the kings of\\nFrance (French kings) did the same. II pre/ere le tubac d?J\u00c2\u00a3s-\\npagne, he prefers Spanish tobacco. Achetez-vous du colon\\nd Amerique do you buy American cottou\\nThe names of Cities take no article, when they are genuine\\nproper names.\\nEx. Londres est plus grand que Paris, London is larger than\\nParis. II y a leplus beau musee a Dresde, there is a most beautiful\\nmuseum at Dresden. demeure a Vienne, he lives in Vienna.\\nThe prepositions in and at with the names of cities are both\\nrendered, in French by a, unless they have the meaning of within,\\nwhen it is dans.\\nEx. Qui est votre banquier a Paris t who is your banker in Paris\\nII mourut d Naples, he died at Naples. La Revolution etait dans\\nParis, the revolution was in (inside of) Paris.\\nBut when they are made like common nouns, they are ac-\\ncompanied by the arjicle.\\nEx. Le Havre de Grace (harbor of refuge) est un grand port,\\nHavre is a large port. Nous irons a la Nouvelle Orleans, we\\nshall go to New Orleans. La Haye est une grande ville en Hol-\\nlande, The Hague is a large city in Holland.\\nExercise.\\nItaly is truly the garden of Europe, and Norway the most sterile of\\nall countries. Prussia and Austria are old and bitter enemies, but\\nFrance induced them to make war against each other for her own\\nbenefit. The Pyrenees separate France from Spain and the Alps\\nfrom Italy. I had lived ten years in Germany, when I emigrated to\\nthe United States and settled in North Carolina. Michigan is a pen\\ninsula, surrounded by great lakes and traversed by railroads. We\\nlanded at Havre, when we first came to France, and from thence we\\nwent to La Rochelle, where we remained two years after that we\\nlived in Lyons and Marseilles. Have you ever been in New Orleans\\nIt is not the capital of Louisiana. The Bourbons were at one time\\nkings of France, of Spain, and of Naples now the Queen of Spain is", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0319.jp2"}, "320": {"fulltext": "38 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthe only member of that family on a throne. He likes Burgundy\\nwines better than any other \u00e2\u0096\u00a0nines for my part, I prefer Italian\\nwines, and after them, the light French wines. The goldsmiths melt\\ndown Spanish dollars and French crowns.\\nIir. WITH THE NAMES OF MONTHS AND DAYS.\\nThe names of Months in definitions of time are never used\\nwith the article, but accompanied by the preposition en, even\\nwhen there is no preposition used in English.\\nEx. arrivera ici in Aoid procltain, he will reach here next\\nAugust la balaille fat livree en Jain, the battle was fought in\\nJune; nous y resterons jusqu en Avril, we shall stay there till\\nApril.\\nThe names of Days, used as definitions of time, have no\\narticle nor preposition before them.\\nEx. Elk fit ici dimanche, she was here on Sun. lav nous\\nnous reverrotu mereredi prochain, we shall meet again on next\\nWednesday.\\nThe addition of the Definite Article gives the meaning\\neither\\na. Of a definite day of that name.\\nEx II nit prit h Lundi t il eckappa U Mardi, he was taken\\non Monday and escaped on Tuesday; je I ai vu I, Vendredi\\nSaint, 1 saw him Oti Good Friday.\\nOr of every t the name of the day.\\nK\\\\. umrrier arrive U Jeudi, the mail comes on every\\nThursday. A Samedi t le Mercrtdi, we\\nlessom on Satnrdaye and Wednesdays.\\nThe Indefinite Article may be added at in English.\\nE\\\\. Citato uu Dimuncht ti Figlise, it was on a Sunday at\\nchurch.\\nExt ft BE.\\nIK- will iirrive in France in January .r February and Stay them\\nuntil Mason, when be will leuvc lur Denmark. We go to the country", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0320.jp2"}, "321": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 39\\nin July and do not return to town until October. May is the month I like\\nbest of all the months of the year. In that remote neighborhood they\\nhave no mail but on Tuesdays and Thursdays my cousin receives\\nher letters on Saturday. I saw her last Christmas-day she was then\\nin bad health on Tuesday she was taken sick, and on Friday she\\ndied. Sailors have a general superstition that Friday is an unlucky\\nday, and all the efforts made by intelligent captains and others to\\novercome the prejudice, have proved in vain. The laws of this coun-\\ntry do not permit any work to be done on Sundays, but the Jews are\\nexempted, because they do not work on Saturdays.\\nIV. WITH NOUNS IN APPOSITION.\\nTwo nouns are said to be used in apposition to each other\\nwhen one is added to explain the other, so that both designate\\nthe same person or object.\\nThe noun in apposition takes, in French, the article when\\nit serves to distinguish the first from others of its kind, or\\nwhen it is followed by a relative pronoun or other word, which\\nshows its definite character.\\nEx. Votre frere, le capitaine, est la, your brother, the captain,\\nis here. II n eut qu une tpee, son arrne favorite, he only had a\\nsword, his favorite weapon. Musard, Vhomme qui dirigeait,\\nMusard, the man who led.\\nBut when the noun in apposition is used as a mere adjec-\\ntive, it has no article.\\nEx. Le pdon, embleme de Vorgueil, the peacock, emblem of\\npride Marie, divine beaute, Marie, divine beauty Tartafe,\\ncomedie de Moliere, Tartufe, a comedy by Moliere.\\nExercise.\\nI have read in the newspapers that your brother, the sailor, has\\nreturned from abroad is your other brother, the soldier, also at home\\nnow The poet says the butterfly, the perfect model of inconstancy,\\ncaresses all the flowers. Malherbes, a man of extraordinary know-\\nledge, was simple and artless, whilst his adversary, an ignorant man,", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0321.jp2"}, "322": {"fulltext": "40 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nclaimed the highest honors. We were reading Ivanhoe, a novel by Wal\\nter Scott, when she entered the room, and Louisa, the eldest sister, ex-\\nclaimed There comes Mary, the true copy of Rebecca 1 Those gen-\\ntlemen, strangers to our country, were hospitably received, and Kos-\\nsuth, a man of rare genius, went almost in triumph through the\\nNorthern States.\\nNouns may be used in apposition to the verb to be, and\\nother verbs oflike nature, as, to become, to be made, chosen,\\nappointed, etc., in which case they will not be preceded by any\\narticle, although the English uses the indefinite article in\\nsin-]] constructions.\\nEx. Heat musicien, he is a musician on Va nommi president\\nhe baa been appointed president; qui aiU ilu mairet who\\nlia^ been chosen Mayor I il s esi fait moine, he has become a\\nmonk.\\nBat it the noun in apposition mark a distinction from the\\ntii-: or express the character, either 1 a name r a designation\\nit will be accompanied, as in English, by the indefinite or the\\npartitive article.\\nK\\\\. i eti n\u00e2\u0080\u009e ffercttfy that man is a Hercules.\\nI those young ladies\\nare i\\n/./A r pon \\\\Multe t such an answer is an\\ninsult.\\nWith the third person singular odtn the aubjeel is, in such\\ni .i bj a and not bj it.\\ni drunkard. C itltit uurfmnne\\n,i y i, a pen, she was a woman Buch as there ale few\\npraii amit^ they are your true friends,\\nK\\\\ki:i iss,\\n[talian t him, us he is an Italian; it ho\\noriog teee, i could ool do the aune, us I dislike Portugaeafi\\nCsinOenS, the uuilmr of", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0322.jp2"}, "323": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 41\\nthe Lusiades, or you would not say that. Do you see those two\\nladies? They were nuns, but they have escaped from Cosenza, a\\nfamous convent now they are ladies of the great world, without that\\nawkwardness, the effect of long seclusion. He was a man of genius\\nand of great merit, and when he was chosen Governor of the State,\\nthe citizens were rejoiced at it. I thought you were a Spaniard, but I\\nhave learned since that you are a German. That man deserves no\\nrespect he is a gambler and leads a disreputable life. She is an\\nexcellent woman, and I hope that she will earn a livelihood she has\\nbeen appointed governess to the Queen s children. He would have\\nbeen a captain if he had not been a drunkard.\\nV. WITH NOUNS OF MEASURE.\\nThe definite article is used in French with nouns, express-\\ning measurement in weight, time or money, where the English\\nuses the indefinite article or a preposition.\\nEx. Coffee costs twenty cents a pound, le cafe coute vinyt\\nsous la livre.\\nWe pay him ten dollars a week, nous lui payons dix\\ndollars la semalne.\\nFour times a year, quatrefois Van.\\nGive them three francs for each person, donnez-leur trois\\nfrancs la per Sonne.\\nExercise.\\nThese men agreed to work for a dollar a day, but they ask now ten\\ndollars a week, which is nearly two dollars a day. How do you sell\\nyour coffee I can tell you some for thirty cents a pound or for ninety\\ndollars a bag. The mail used to arrive here twice a week now we\\nget it five times a week. I see him twice a day, in the morning at\\nbreakfast and at night before going to bed. I will give you twenty-\\none pounds per barrel, if you can sell me a hundred and twenty each\\nyear. These engravings were very cheap they only cost twelve\\ncents a piece or ten dollars a hundred. There was one pineapple for\\neach person, but several guests did not eat that dangerous fruit.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0323.jp2"}, "324": {"fulltext": "42 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nPer cent, is translated in French by pour cent.\\nEx. I will pay you ten per cent., Je vouapayerai diz pour ant.\\nThe English usage of employing names of relationship, like\\nfather, mother, etc., without any article, is inadmissible in\\nFrench. There the possessive pronoun is used before such words.\\nEx. Father says it is so, monpere dit que e en est ainsi.\\nWhere is uncle gone to voire oncle, ou est-il alle\\nCall sister at once, appdez votre sueur de suite.\\nThe English usage of employing the preposition to in terms\\nexpressive of blood or business relations and the like, is also not\\nfound in French. The preposition de is used in all such cases.\\nEx. He is physician to tlie Queen, r\\\\s( U medecitt de In Rein*.\\nHe was appointed architect to the Institute, on Ca noav\\ni/u urc/uhctc de FZlUtUut,\\nEnBOzax.\\nBrother said he would never consent to the captain s marriage with\\nslater, because she was too young yet It la considered a great honor\\nin England to be appointed physician to the Queen. She is the only\\nheir to iliut iiiiinriisr property, tor the prince, s man of genius, but\\nv.ry miserly, bad acquired vast i states in Spain and in Portugal. What\\ndot mothi r say to this extraordinary Brent\\nTHE OMISSION OF THE ABTICLE,\\nLrticle is omitted before Nouns, contrary to the general\\nprinciple that every noon in French must be preceded l y aa\\narticle \u00c2\u00bbr its equivalent, in the following cases:\\n1. In addressing peaaona r things, by apostrophe.\\nEx, Homme ijui jn tu SOU, man, whoever thou art; jUurt\\nc/uirmni.tis, qui urntz la campujuc charming llowers, adorning\\nthe field*", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0324.jp2"}, "325": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 43\\n2. To give greater energy to animated style, as e. g. in\\nenumerating several persons or objects, in proverbial expres-\\nsions, etc.\\nEx. Je ne trouve par tout que lache fatlerie,\\nQu 1 injustice, interet, trahison, fourberie.\\nEverywhere I meet with nothing but mean flattery,\\nInjustice, selfishness, treachery, dishonesty.\\nPlus fait douceur que violence, we can do more by gentle\\nmeans than by violence.\\nContentement passe richesse, contentedness is better than riches.\\n3T. In giving titles to books and addresses of persons.\\nEx. Preface. Reflexions generales.\\nII demeure rue Piccadilly f Quartier St. James, a Londres.\\nHe lives in Piccadilly, St. James London.\\n4. After the following conjunctions and adverbs: ni, soit,\\njamais and tout, when the nouns following them are used in a\\npartitive sense.\\nEx. Le sage n a ni amour ni haine, wise men know neither\\nlove nor hatred soit inspiration de Dieu, soit erreur de Phomme,\\neither divine inspiration or human error jamais, peut-etre, his-\\ntorien n a ete plus attrayant, never perhaps was a historian more\\nattractive tout est vanite, all is vanity.\\nThe indefinite article used in English after what is omitted in\\nFrench.\\nEx. Quel liomme what a man Quelle aventure what an\\nadventure\\nExercise.\\nMan, whoever thou art, remember, wlien pride tempts thee, that\\nthy existenee was a play of Nature, that life is but a play of Fate,\\nand that thou wilt soon be the play of Death When Flechier spoke\\nof him in his sermon he said Citizens, foreigners, enemies, nations,\\nkings, emperors, weep for him and revere him Nations, praise the\\nLord Why do you not speak, brother John, are you sick He gave\\nme a list of the books, which he had lent you Voltaire s novels, La", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0325.jp2"}, "326": {"fulltext": "44 ON THE PABTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nFontaine s Fables, Boileau s Poems and Flt chier s Funeral Sermons.\\nI saw written on this sheet of paper, French Exercises, but I think it\\nwas a letter. What a beautiful landscape! It is the loveliest I have\\never seen in all my journeyings. He did it unconsciously and his\\nmotive was neither ignorance nor malice. Never has general earned\\na purer renown and never were battles fought more carefully. Every\\nthing was confusion and terror, and never was nation more seriously\\nfrightened.\\nThe Article is omitted also, when a noun forms with another\\npart of speech such :i close union as to represent but one idea.\\nThis is done by joining a Noun\\n1. To another Noun, which it qualifies after the manner of\\nan adjective, thus forming a compound noun. The union ia\\nshed by means of the preposition de or or en, after\\nwhich, then, no articlo is used.\\nEx. nnc cloche (Talarme, an alarm-bell.\\nni,r brone dents, a tooth-brash.\\n:m iron railing.\\ni Verb, with which it forma a new verb.\\nEx, r t afraid.\\nbe thirsty.\\ntake leave.\\nporter lence.\\nTo a Prej oeition, by which union a. Kerbs are made.\\nEi. en rffi t, in\\npar force, fore\\nlife, immedi\\nIf th purpose is nut to form an adverb, but if e. g. thr noaa\\nfrom the preposition by an adjective, the general\\nrnleapi and^tne article must be supplied\\nI bravely aoee grand\\nr. superior\\ntone.\\narticle is, also, emitted for euphony s sake before the two", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0326.jp2"}, "327": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 45\\nadjectives dicers and different, to avoid the immediate repetition\\nof two d s.\\nEx. Nous awns employe differents moyens, we have used differ-\\nent means; diverses personnes me Vont recommande, various\\npeople have recommended him to me.\\nExercise.\\nSoldiers, this day of glory has been crowned with complete success\\ncontinue fb serve your country zealously and courageously and you\\nwill restore peace to your fellow citizens. Let us receive them with\\npoliteness, for Machiavelli, an Italian writer, says we must treat our\\nenemies as if they might become our friends, and our friends as if\\nthey might become our enemies. We were hungry and thirsty, but\\nshe was even more thirsty than the others. Different persons use\\ndifferent words, for some think with rapidity, others with grave con-\\nsideration. Windmills are unknown in this country, but steam-mills\\nare not rare. Have you any coffee-cups or teacups in your sideboard\\nI would like a cup of tea before supper, for I am quite exhausted\\nENGLISH COMPOUND NOUNS IN FRENCH.\\nEnglish Compound Nouns are generally made by uniting\\nsimply two nouns in one and writing them in one word, as\\npenman, nightcap, windmill, c. In French a preposition is\\nrequired to unite the two nouns, and this preposition varies\\naccording to the precise relation in which, according to the\\nmeaning, one noun stands to the other. That noun which\\nqualifies the other is placed after it, and is, as has been stated\\nabove, not preceded by an article, because it forms with the\\nfirst but one idea, that of the new compound.\\nThe prepositions which serve for this purpose are principally\\nen, a and de, which are used in the following manner:\\nThe preposition en expresses the material of which the first\\nnoun is made, and this only in such cases where special atten-\\ntion is called to the substance in ordinary cases de suffices.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0327.jp2"}, "328": {"fulltext": "46 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Cette coupe est en or, et point en argent dore, this cup is of\\ngold, and not of silver gilt.\\nUne grille en bronze cotiterait plus qii une grille en fer, a\\nbronze railing would cost more than an iron railing.\\nUne eglise en pierre taillee, a church built of cut rock.\\nThe preposition a expresses\\n1. The purpose for which the first noun is intended.\\nEx. Une tasse a the et un verre a rin, a teacup and a wine-glass.\\n(Test u\u00c2\u00bb moulin a farine, this is a flour-mill.\\nDes b teaux u vapeur, a voiles, a mines, steamers, sailing-\\nIs, rowboats.\\n2. The main characteristic by which the first noun ia distin-\\nguished from others of the same class.\\nEx. J*ai etc mania par un serpent a sonnettes, I have been\\nbitten by a rattlesnake.\\nii homme /litres, he is a literary man.\\nlis u nniit que des instruments a cordes, they had only\\nstringed instruments.\\nThe preposition expresses all other relations between the\\ntwo parts of a compound noun, n\u00c2\u00ab t conveyed by en and V.\\nEx. They took our watches and gold rings, Us prirent nos\\nmontres 1 1 mot bagues (Tor.\\nI prefer river-fish to sea-fish, j* pri/en Us poissonsdt\\naux paissons\\nWill von take ;i eup of tea or of coffee f Voulet-vou\\nin. Urns the mi de ea/i f\\nIf the second nonn should express something that enters into\\nthe composiuoa of the first) it retains, in its meaning, its inde-\\npendence, and will, then fore, have to be preceded by the arti-\\ncle, siii it does not produce a new idea, nor form a genuine\\nCompound noun.\\nEx. Vbus aura t huttres t omelette aux eon-\\nfitureSf you shall have oyster soup and an omelet with\\nprosenri", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0328.jp2"}, "329": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 47\\nDonnez-moi un pot de pommade au jasmin, give me a box\\nof pojnatum of jasmine.\\nDes tableaux a Vhuile et au pastel, oil paintings and pas-\\ntel paintings.\\nEnglish compound nouns have occasionally a present par-\\nticiple for their first part. According to the rules on the use of\\nprepositions, they can only be followed by the Infinitive, and\\nthis is, therefore, the form that must be given to these par-\\nticiples.\\nEx. He wants a frying-pan, il luifaut un poele afrire.\\nThey are in the dining-room, Us sont dans la salle a\\nmanger.\\nIn English, the words man, woman, boy and girl are often used\\nin compound nouns to designate the vendor of the article\\nexpressed by the first noun. In French, marchand or marchonde\\nare used for this purpose.\\nEx. Here comes the milkman with his bells, voila le marchand\\nde lait avec sa sonnette.\\nThe little apple-girl did not come to-day, la petite mar-\\nckande de pommes n est pas venue aujourdhui.\\nIn English compound nouns the first part is left in the\\nsingular number, although it may have a plural meaning. No\\nsuch anomaly exists in French, where the noun takes its proper\\nform.\\nEx. A five-dollar bill, un billet de cinq dollars.\\nWhere is the ox-stall oil est Vetable a boeufs\\nExercise.\\nIt is strange for so rich a man to wear a silver watch, and especially\\nwhen it is fastened to a costly gold chain. The fashion for this sum-\\nmer is to wear silk dresses, straw bonnets and thread gloves in win-\\nter I prefer buckskin gloves. They stole all our silver spoons, and we\\nwere compelled for some days to use iron spoons, which we found with\\nuur servants. Have you ever drunk goat s milk It is very rich, but", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0329.jp2"}, "330": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0096\u00a0iS OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthe odor is unpleasant. When the enemy entered the town, one man\\nran out with a table-knife, another with a kitchen-knife in his hand\\nbut everybody had a weapon. He has in his store excellent printing-\\npaper, but he has no fine letter-paper. I would like to give you some\\nwine, but I have not a wine-glass nor any glass in the house the\\ndwelling-house was burnt, and this is nothing but a tool-house, which\\nserves me for a week. She hid the note in the dining-room on the\\ntea table under a flower-pot, and we were all looking for it in the\\nsleeping-rooms up stairs. Steamers and screws of every kind cross\\nthe Atlantic during the whole year, and some are iron vessels sailing-\\nships and wooden vessels diminish constantly in number. I saw in\\nVenice two beautiful alabaster columns before the high altar of an old\\nchurch they arc far more beautiful than marble pillars. Are these\\nreally gold chandeliers, r is it only an imitation in silver? I can give\\nyou a ten-dollar bill, if you can repay me to-morrow; I cannot pay\\nmy hill at tl and I owe a one money to the sign-painter.\\nDave you ever heard a charcoal-man in London? his cry is very\\npeculiar.\\nMONBIEl R, MADAME, ETC.\\nWhen it became the custom to address persons by some title\\nexpressive of reverence, the nations tint bad spoken Latin\\nemplo v the wo ler, for that purpose.\\nits full form is in French preserve 1 in the Boftened word seigneur,\\nwhich still holds the preeminence as the Lord by excellence.\\nEx. v S hrist,\\nThis was united to the essive pronoun and formed the\\ntitle Monmgneur, formerly given to the princes of the royal\\nI and still bestowed on very high personages, such us\\nCardinals. however, proved too long and camber-\\nt ..r daily use and soon dwindled down into Sieur, which\\nwu formei it now occurs only in legal docu-\\nr .V. X. fit eiti de pa Mr. N N. u\\nsummoned t a]\\nIhbsMwr again was still farther shortened into wr, which", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0330.jp2"}, "331": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 40\\nalso, once very generally used, is now strictly confined to sover-\\neign rulers.\\nEx. Sire, les sujets de Voire Mujeste la felicilent, Sire, the\\nsubjects of your Majesty congratulate you.\\nThrough the Norman French, finally, this sire became familiar\\nto the English people, by whom it was reduced to its present\\nform of sir, now the universal title given to man.\\nIn like manner was the word domina, lady or mistress, chosen\\nto address women, and with it a spurious diminutive form, do-\\nmicella, little lady. Softened and slightly changed, these words\\nhave become dame and demoiselle, and are in this form used\\ntogether with sieur.\\nAll four words are habitually combined with the possessive pro-\\nnouns mon, ma, and mes, and thus produce the words Monseigneur.\\nand Messeigncurs, Monsieur and Messieurs, Madame and Mes-\\ndames, Mademoiselle and Mesdemoiselles. As the use of these\\nwords is somewhat different from English words of the kind, the\\nfollowing rules will be given\\nMonsieur and Messieurs are used\\n1. Before proper names, like the English Mr. and Messrs.\\nEx. Connaissez-vous Mr. Lefebvre do you know Mr. Le-\\nfebvre\\nCette lettre est adressee a M.M. Blond Vie., this\\nletter is directed to Messrs. Blond Co.\\n2. Without a name, like the English Sir ;ind Gentlemen, in\\naddressing others.\\nEx. Monsieur, je ne vous comprends pas, Sir, I do not under-\\nstand you.\\nMais, Messieurs, vous demandcz trop. but, Gentlemen,\\nyou ask for too much.\\n3. With the article or pronoun, like the English gentleman\\nand gentlemen, to designate persons as such.\\nEx. Ext-ce un monsieur, qui desire me voir? is it a gentler\\nman who wants to see me", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0331.jp2"}, "332": {"fulltext": "50 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\ny eut plus de dames que de messieurs, there were more\\nladies there than gentlemen.\\nCe tnonsieur-la pourrait vous le dire, that gentleman there\\nmight be able to tell you.\\nMonsieur does not express the English gentleman, -when this has\\nany other meaning, but that of man in contrast with child or woman.\\nWhen gentleman is used to express a man of good manners, well-\\ndressed, etc., the French say un hommt cornnu Ufaut, man as he\\nonght to be. When it is used to convey the idea of a man of high\\nprinciples and sterling character, they say un h. nr, a\\nman of honor.\\nMadam* and Mesdetmet are used\\n1. Before proper name?, like the English Mrs. and the\\nplural.\\nEx. Mine. Vieuztemp* oA demeure-t-elle f where does Mrs.\\nVieuxtemps live I\\nVi irdot, that Bchool\\nis kepi by the ladies Viardot\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2_ Without a name, like the English Madam and Ladies in\\naddressing ol\\nEx. 4 bonies, Madam, yon over-\\nwhelm me with kindness,\\nWesdamn please follow me, ladies.\\nThe v. ladies, ased in speaking not t but of\\nthird persons, are rendered by dorm and dames without the\\npronoun,\\nEx. I t que vont-elles /aire just look at\\nthose ladies, w bat ar 1 thej aboul\\nCetU that lady seems to know\\nme.\\nM ds( 1 precisely in the\\nsame way u \\\\ia I ai d bf im, but apply only to unmar-\\nried ladies, without regard t their\\nEx. Vhonm i 1/ /I have the bo\\nof speaking to Miss B", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0332.jp2"}, "333": {"fulltext": "ARTICLES. 51\\nJe ne saurai rim vous refuser, Mademoiselle, I can refuse\\nyou nothing, young lady.\\nThe simple word demoiselle and its plural, are used to desig-\\nnate unmarried ladies.\\nEx. Sa soeur est encore demoiselle, his sister is still unmarried.\\nLes dames attendront id; les mariees de ce cote, les\\ndemoiselles de Vautre, the ladies will wait here the\\nmarried ladies on this side, the unmarried on that.\\nAll three forms, Monsieur, Madame and Mademoiselle, and\\ntheir plurals, are in French prefixed to titles of dignity and of\\nrelationship, the latter, however, only when referring to rela-\\ntives of the person to whom we speak.\\nEx. Monsieur le comte est parti ce matin, the count left this\\nmorning.\\nMadame la baronne est-elle ches elle is the baroness at\\nhome\\nMessieurs les Senateurs se sont rassembles, the Senators\\nhave reassembled.\\nComment se porte Mme, voire mere how is your mother\\nJ ai vu Mesdemoiselles vox soeurs qui viennent de rentrer.\\nI have seen your sisters who have just come back.\\nThe same words are used occasionally instead of the pro-\\nnouns, as expressions of extreme politeness, from motives of\\ngreat courtesy or of bitter irony.\\nEx. Monsieur voudrait-il me rendre ce service could you\\nrender me this service\\nMadame n est-elle pas Francaise are you not French,\\nMadam\\nOn ne saurait rendre trop de graces a Monsieur, we cannot\\nbe too grateful to you, Sir.\\nQue Madame ne sefdche, on s en va de ce pas, do not get\\nangry, Madam, T am going at once.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0333.jp2"}, "334": {"fulltext": "52 OX THE PAET3 OF A SEETTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nI know these ladies, but they do not know me two of them were\\nthe same young ladies we met last night after the opera. lie intro-\\nduced me to two gentlemen from Mexico, who are here on a political\\nin, with a letter from the Cardinal. Here are seats for the ladies,\\nbut where are you going to place the gentlemen A man who\\ncan act thus is not a gentleman, -whatever may be his wealth\\nand his social position. Who was it that rang the bell was it\\na beggar or a gentleman It was your father, Sir. accompanied by\\njrour grandmother. Did y u meet your sisters, Madam they were\\ntaking a walk by the sea-shore. When he had done this, he said in a\\nlow tone: Captain. I am s^rry for it, and I beg your pardon. Doctor,\\n1 wish you would have the kii le and see my daughter;\\nshe is now witli ynur -wife, and awaits your return with impatience,\\nbays met your mother in Paris; the young\\nwell and enjoyed the pleasures of that great audbrilliimt d v.\\nCHAPTER III\\n_ at principle which determines the form under which\\nippcara in a tlii- that the Adjective,\\nbeing, tfa li it in\\nit ii. |j( ctivo or noon stand\\ntide l-v -id\u00c2\u00ab- or are ach other; if in meaning\\ni i:i form.\\nben they are\\nlittle.\\nthat part which i:\\nM.j i\\nhigh.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0334.jp2"}, "335": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 53\\nlis portaient des bus (M.) de sole (F.) blancs (M.), they\\nused to wear white silk stockings.\\nDovtus-moi une brosse (S.) a afente (P.) molle (S.), give\\nme a soft tooth-brush.\\nA few adjectives appear to be exceptions to this fundamental\\nrule, but the exceptions are only apparent, and the non-agree-\\nment of these adjectives with their nouns is easily explained.\\nThey are the following\\n1. JVu, demi and feu, under certain circumstances, remain\\nunchanged before feminine or plural nouns.\\nJ\\\\ ~u, bare, is placed before nouns, connected with them by a\\nhyphen, and forms, then, so far a part of the noun that it re-\\nmains unchanged. If it is placed after a noun, it becomes\\nagain a common adjective, subject to the rule.\\nEx. On Va vu qui marckait nu-tete et nu-pieds, he has been\\nseen walking bare-headed and bare-footed.\\nII avail la tete nue et point de gants, his head was bare and\\nhe had no gloves.\\n2. Demi, half, is in like manner prefixed to nouns, and then\\nforms part of them. When separated, it is declined like all\\nadjectives.\\nEx. Restez ici une demi-keure jicsqu d mon reiour, stay here\\nhalf an hour until I return.\\nUn homme issu d un sang fecond en demi-dieux, a man\\nborn of a race fertile in demigods.\\nLe discours a dure une heure et demie, the speech lasted\\nan hour and a half.\\nDemi may also sometimes be used before adjectives, as demi-\\nmort, half dead, bat generally its place is supplied by a moitie, or d\\ndemi, because in these cases it becomes a genuine adverb. When half\\nis repeated, it is rendered by moitie.\\nEx. Le drapeau est moitie rouge moitie Mane, the flag is half white\\nhalf red.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0335.jp2"}, "336": {"fulltext": "51 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nHalf before a noun is expressed, when not forming-, as demi,\\npart of the noun, by d moitie.\\nEx Apres le drome u est admU J moitie prix, after the drama, ad-\\nmittance at half price.\\nFeu, late, is used either before the article or after it; in\\nthe former case it remains unchanged, in the latter, which\\noccurs when we wish to distinguish a deceased person from a\\nliving one of the same rank or name, it is declined.\\nEx. J ui out dire a feu hat tour, 1 have heard my late sistOI\\nen usaii pas rrr,\u00e2\u0080\u009ei// la Reine actuelle, the\\nlate Queen did Dot act like the present Queen.\\n_ Cfrand, great, in its feminine form, grunde, is occasionally\\nused as part of a compound noun. It is then written orantP\\nand remains nucha!\\nEx. II y aura deux graruTft there will be two\\nil holidays this month.\\nTl ports trots grand? voiles aux grand vergues, she carries\\nthe mainyards,\\nquent expressions of this kind\\ns, grandmother. bard labor.\\n1. ar.\\ninch, Qrand rus, main street\\nbanger. I ball\\nlaid. i Ktreme thirst.\\npostpaid, is used adverbially, and then re-\\nma 08 tin. itlVO it is BUbject to the \u00e2\u0080\u00a2_\\nttres, 1 lia\\\\e\\nyou, prepaid, all y ur lettres.\\n1 ut apporta deux lettres frauche*\\ni mail brought you onl\\\\ two prepaid lctt rs.\\nci-joint, enclosed, y oem-\\ni, although participles, and", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0336.jp2"}, "337": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 55\\nas such subject to the same rules as adjectives, remain un-\\nchanged when they are used as adverbs, before their nouns.\\nEx. Excepte ces cas, il rCy a pas de difference, except in these\\ncases, there is no difference.\\nCes cas sont exceptes, these cases are excepted.\\nVous trouverez ci-joint deux lettres cacketees, you will find\\nenclosed two sealed letters.\\nBeaucoup and peu, being adverbs, cannot be used for many\\nand few as adjectives, but their place is supplied by rare and\\nnombreux.\\nEx. True friends are few, les vrais amis sont rares.\\nThe book is good but its faults are many, le livre est bort,\\nmais les f antes sont nombreuses.\\nA large number of adjectives are used adverbially in French,\\ni. e., without any change of form. They are mainly such as\\nexpress an impression made upon the senses, like haut, loud, bus,\\nlow, bon, good, and mauvais, bad (of odor), vite, quick, lent, slow,\\nand those representing languages, Erancais, French, Anglais,\\nEnglish, etc. Being true adverbs in these cases, where they\\nqualify, not a noun but a verb, they remain unchanged.\\nEx. Elle chante trop bas pour une sulle de concert, she sings\\ntoo low for a concert-room.\\nParies done plus haut, on ne vous entend pas, speak\\nlouder, they do not hear you.\\nr Allez vite chercher le medecin, go quickly for the doctor.\\nII parle Italien, Espagnol, et deux autres langues, he\\nspeaks Italian, Spanish and two other languages.\\nAdjectives of color, finally, are sometimes nothing else but\\nnouns used adverbially. In that case they remain unchanged,,\\nthe expression being evidently elliptical and the words couleur\\nde, color of, supplied in mind.\\nEx. Elle avait une robe rouge et des rubans marron, she had\\non a red dress and chestnut colored ribbons.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0337.jp2"}, "338": {"fulltext": "56 OX THE PARTS OF A BENTBNCE.\\nII parte toujours des gants paille, he always wears straw\\ncolored gloves.\\nExercise.\\nI went to my tailor and told kirn to make me a dress-coat of hit.\\nbust black cloth. St. Louis carried a crown of tliorns, barefooted and\\nbareheaded, from the wood of Vincennes to Xotre-Dame. I waited\\nthere half an hour, and I would have waited an hour and a half, but\\nii after my arrival. Two pounds and a half of meat make\\na very good Boap, especially if you have an abundance of vegetables.\\nwas as well as the late princess of Conti among those who\\nflattered themselves with this hope. He has studied three years and\\na half in some of the German universities. The Spanish flag is half\\nr. d ani half yellow, the French flag is the tricolor. He is much to\\n1h- pitied, for, although thi Lb ruin are many, such cae\\nhonesty as his are few. It is an order of the Gods, that ia\\nnever broken, that they sell as very dear the gifts which they make\\nif you walk fast, y take him, but when yon\\nI r he will nol hoar you. These flowen\\nsmell had I wish you w uld bring me some that smell good.\\nCOMPol NI\u00c2\u00bb 1DJB0TIVX8.\\nound Adjecl I of two adjectives connected,\\nlik compound nouns, by a hyphen. The manner in which\\nwith the noun they qualify depends not on their\\nform but on their meaning.\\n[f both adj both will agree with it.\\n1\\\\. .V des perdrix grisea blanches, we\\nhave in this country white and gray partridges.\\nIf the latter alone is\\ndeclined.\\nthis field has\\nthin. in it.\\ni piupart meurt, of new-born\\nchildren the majority", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0338.jp2"}, "339": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 57\\nIf the two adjectives qualify each other, which is the case in\\nadjectives of color, both remain unchanged.\\nEx. J aime beaucoup la sole bleu-clair, I am very fond of\\nlioditrblue silk.\\nADJECTIVES QUALIFYING SEVERAL NOUNS.\\nThe manner in which adjectives that qualify two or more\\nnouns agree with the kvter, is determined by the following\\nrules\\nAn adjective which qualifies two or more nouns of the same\\ngender is put in the plural and agrees in gender with them.\\nEx. Le riche et Vindigent sont sujets a la mfcme lot, rich and\\npoor are subject to the same law.\\nJ 1 admire sa douceur et son egalite d esprit merveilleuses, I\\nadmire her marvellous gentleness and equanimity.\\nIf the nouns are of different gender, the adjective is put in\\nthe plural masculine, but care is taken to place the masculine\\nnoun nearest to the adjective.\\nEx. avail sa vie el son bonheur attaches au succes, his life\\nand his happiness depended on success.\\nJ\\\\vi trouve ma plume et mon papier gates, I found paper\\nand pen spoilt.\\nAn adjective placed after several nouns which are syno-\\nnyms, agrees with the last only.\\nEx. Touie sa vie iHa ele qii un travail, qiCune occupation con-\\ntinue, all his life has been but one continued work and\\nlabor.\\nLe fer, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prtte, the sword,\\nthe bandage, the pile is quite ready.\\nAn adjective qualifying two nouns, connected by a conjunc-\\ntion so as to exclude one another, appears in the plural mascu-\\nline.\\nEx. II y a un homme ou une femme ages, there is an old man\\nor an old woman.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0339.jp2"}, "340": {"fulltext": "58 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS.\\nMany French adjectives can be used as nouns by the simple\\naddition of the article. Their form will be that of the noun\\nwhich is understood.\\nEx. Le saye (Thomme sage) se sert des fous jyour alter a ses\\nfins, the wise man uses the fool to attain his end.\\nUnecoupable (femme coupable) aimee est bientot iunocente,\\na beloved criminal is easily (thought) innocent\\nLes menteurs les plus grands duent le vrai quelquefois t\\nthe greatest liars tell the truth sometimes.\\nAttention must be had, however, to the fact that in French,\\naa in English, not all adjectives can be used as nouns alike some\\nr\\\\ ate men only, as l riche, the rich, lepauvre, the poor, le notr\\nthen the white man, h sage, the wise man, Vavare^\\nthe miser, while others designate abstract qualities only, as U\\nbeau, the beautiful, U prat, all that is true, le faux, all that is\\nlatter, expressing abstract ideas, cannot take\\nthe plural form.\\nKm RCXBS.\\nYuur brot] ra are present, but your mother has not yet\\nc in how long Hi she ox your father i\u00c2\u00bb- aheent v The \\\\\u00c2\u00bb\u00c2\u00bbn and\\ntin- rich, the Imprudent and the prudent, subject n the tame law,\\nundergo the same G I cj and majestj depicted on the face of\\nppineea of his people. 1!\\nthere, Listening t the sermon, moutb an I eyes or* d and all attention.\\nRome with a sustained gentleness and sweetness.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0v. tl lilt Improper confidence will inak you\\n[ore vour old friends, withoul w inn the\\nfiremen rushed from the house, they bad their faces ami hands burnt\\nun l their clothes and boftte torn t \\\\i ous men are B\\nthe whole world, s] are only their own euemiea. The rich\\nowe help to the i r. but the rich are t t.Mi too lazy to -r:. n t it ami\\nthe poor too proud to accept it We ought alwaj for the\\n.ihior the I", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0340.jp2"}, "341": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 5\u00c2\u00a3J\\nTHE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES.\\nThe general rules on the place of Adjectives have been given\\nin the First Part of this Grammar, and it remains here only to\\nrepeat, that no absolute law exists on the subject, the place\\ndepending more on the peculiar genius of the language and the\\nestablished usage than on any general principle. The adjec-\\ntive placed before the noun is considered as more intimately\\nconnected with it, and as making, by falling first upon the ear of\\nthe listener, a stronger impression. Hence accented adjectives\\nare placed before the noun. In the next place, the laws of\\neuphony forbid long adjectives being placed before monosyllabic\\nnouns; and generally, shorter adjectives precede longer nouns.\\nLes champetres airs, country air des terrestres soins, earthly\\ncares, and the like, are intolerable in French. On the other\\nhand, plural adjectives have to precede nouns beginning with\\na vowel, as de brillants atoms, brilliant surroundings, de cou-\\nrageux amis, bold friends.\\nThe construction of the sentence has its influence on the\\npiace of the adjective in so far as an adjective followed by its\\nregimen must necessarily be placed after the noun, else it would\\nbe separated from its regimen.\\nEx. C est un malheur commun a tous, that is a misfortune\\ncommon to all.\\nQuels sont les fiefs dependants de ce duche? which are\\nthe fiefs that belong to this duchy?\\nThe place of the adjective depends, finally, so completely\\non the genius of the language, that large numbers of these\\nwords actually change their signification with their place,\\nhaving one meaning before and another after the noun. The\\nfollowing are the most important adjectives of this class,\\naccompanied generally by those nouns in connection with\\nwhich alone they have the double meaning\\nUn bon Iiomme un Jwmme bon\\na simple artless man a good, affectionate man.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0341.jp2"}, "342": {"fulltext": "60\\nOX THE PARTS OF A SEXTEXCE.\\ntin brave homme\\nan honest man\\nitne certaixe nonvelle\\nsome sort of news\\nmon cher ami\\nmy dear friend\\nin,, CoMMUXE udx\\na unanimous voice\\nquel cruel, homme\\nwhat a tiresome fellow\\nla derm ere\\nthe last year of any period\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2rde\\nut of tune\\nI Ur\\na bad light\\nin, kiki; pottron\\noward\\nMl n KD\\nnn excessive liar\\nin, i;ai vn r lonnme\\na clever man\\nMM\\nman\\nthe air of high boc\\nii i\\na hanght;\\nan honest man\\nSdpio\\nMM\\nthai contemptible wretch\\nmme\\nn dishonest man\\nM uv US\\nbad appearance\\nB \\\\nt homme\\ntin homme brave\\na brave man.\\nune nouveUe certaixe\\nsure news.\\nun Tiabilkment cher\\nan expensive dress.\\nWl DOME COMMUNE\\nan indifferent voice.\\nquel homrm cruel!\\nwhat a cruel man\\nphi; M HUE\\nlast year.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2i F.Vl SSE\\na false string.\\nunjour faux\\nan ill-painted light.\\nun pottron BIER\\na proud coward.\\ntffl lion FCRIEUX\\na falioilB lion.\\nV\\\\T\\na man who is complaiaant to the\\nnn honum QB \\\\n\u00c2\u00bb\\na tall man.\\n\\\\M\\na noble countenance\\nI I T\\na loud tone\\nvn homr,\\na polite man.\\n\\\\r.\\nSdpio the younger.\\nui, hommt M vi ni:ri:i BUS\\nate.\\nun horn* U vi BOBD\\npolite man.\\ni ran\\nwicked appearance.\\nm, homnu mi ma nt", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0342.jp2"}, "343": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES.\\nm\\na bad man\\nune mechante epigramme\\na miserable epigram\\nun miserable enfant\\nan ill-natured child\\nMORT- 0JS\\nwood of little value, sucli as\\nbrooms, brambles, etc.\\nmorte eau\\nthe lowest tides\\nune mortelle heure\\nan excessively long hour\\nun nouveau livre\\na new boot another book\\nun pauvre auteur\\nan author without merit\\npauvre petit\\npoor child\\nun plaisant homme\\na whimsical, ridiculous man\\nun petit homme\\na small man\\nles propres termes\\nthe same words\\npropres mains\\nown hands\\nSATST-EspHt\\nHoly Ghost\\nfemme sage\\na prudent woman\\nun sexto enfant\\nan only child\\nun simple domestique\\na single servant\\nun trtste homme\\na worthless man\\nunique tableau\\nsingle painting\\nun vilain homme\\nan unpleasant man\\nan ill-thinking man\\nune epigramme mechante.\\na wicked epigram.\\nun enfant miserable\\na destitute child.\\nhois mort\\ndead wood.\\neau morte\\nstanding water.\\ncette vie mortelle\\nthis mortal life.\\nun livre nouveau\\na book lately published.\\nun auteur pauvre\\nan author without fortune.\\nun petit pauvre\\na little beggar.\\nun homme plaisant\\nan agreeable, merry man.\\nun homme petit\\na mean man.\\nles termes propres\\nthe proper words.\\nmains propres\\nclean hands.\\nEsprit saint\\nSpirit of God.\\nsage femme\\na midwife.\\nun enfant seul\\na child alone.\\nun domestique simple\\na foolish servant.\\nun homme triste\\na sad man.\\ntableau unique\\nunparalleled painting.\\nun homme vilain\\na wicked man.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0343.jp2"}, "344": {"fulltext": "62 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nitra yrai conte vu conte thai\\na mere story, a true story.\\nWhen two adjectives quality one noun, they are generally\\nplaced after ii for the same reason which places long adjectives\\nafter short nouns.\\nEx. (Tent un voyage long ct fatigant, that is a long and\\nfatiguing journey.\\nCes tableaux nobles t imposants, these fine and imposing\\npaintings.\\nBut if one or both of these adjectives belong to classes to\\nwhich special rules assign a given place, these rules must be\\nstrictly observed.\\nEx. J n in une grandi table ronde au salon, 1 like a large\\nround table in the parlor.\\ntout dit, this spoilt little child has\\ntold every thing,\\nIShi tlic Btory of a pool\\nyOUDg man.\\nIt ha- already been Btated, in speaking of the use of the\\narticle, that if the tw. adjectives ref r to two different nouns,\\nalthough but on-- may be mentioned, the article must bo\\nrepeal 10I1.\\nEx. L the first and the second\\nme,\\nl.i langw Tta ux to ars, the\\nItalian and Spanish languages are Bisters.\\nix, bappy, is perhaps the only adjective which, in inter*\\none, may placed before article and noun. Otherwise\\nit is only allowed t. poetical license to place sometimes an ad-\\njective before the verb\\nEx Heureux Vkon me qui Bait endurhrf happy the man who\\nknow lure I\\nfi //y touch* sacred thej are\\nm.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0344.jp2"}, "345": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. o6\\nExercise.\\nIf the living frighten us, what have we to fear of the dead? The\\nincomparable author of this great work was hardly known during Ids\\nlifetime. Socrates, at the last hour of his life and surrounded by his\\nfriends and followers, showed that he was a true philosopher. These\\nburglars used false keys in order to open all the doors of houses which\\nhad been left empty by their occupants. Tou shall not touch that\\nbeautiful, new book, if you have not clean hands it is too easily\\nspoilt. A cruel man is an inhuman, miserable person, who loves to\\nmake others suffer or see them suffer. That good old soldier has\\nbeen in all the wars of his country, and he still looks a strong, healthy\\nman. I have not been much at home last year, but I promise you\\nthat that snail have been the last year in which I travel so far. Will\\nyou wear to-night your fine blue dress, or do you prefer the new\\ngreen dress, which you bought recently That rich old miser will\\nleave his immense wealth to a spendthrift nephew, who will spend it\\nall in a few short years. She has bought a large, commodious house,\\nwhere she will entertain all her young, gallant friends. His former\\nglory had passed away, when he, the first man of the Republic, made\\nhimself ruler of his native State.\\nCOMPARATIVE DEGREES.\\nThree Comparative Degrees are generally spoken of: The\\nPositive, which is nothing more than the simple meaning of\\nthe adjective, without any comparison, and therefore not in\\nreality a degree of comparison the Comparative in its three-\\nfold nature as a comparative of superiority, of inferiority and\\nof equality, and the Superlative, relative or absolute.\\nThe simple rules on the formation of the comparatives and\\nsuperlatives have already been given in the First Part of this\\nGrammar. It remains here only to add the rules on the use of\\nthe so-called irregular comparatives.\\nMeilleur (from the Latin melior), better, is the only com-\\nparative of bon, as plus bon is never used; mieux, is the com-\\nparative of Men, instead of plus Men, which also cannot be used.\\nEx. Cest un meilleur resullat gu on. rt avail expecie, that is\\na better result than had been expected.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0345.jp2"}, "346": {"fulltext": "64: O* THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nMeiUeur enters also into the idiomatic expressions de bonne\\nheure, early, and a Ion marcM, cheap.\\nE x jy ire heure que nos wisins, we rise\\nearlier than onr neighbors.\\nII VaacJiete meBleur marcM que7ioiu,kc has bought it\\ncheaper than we.\\nPin (from the Latin pejor), worse, is the comparative of\\nmauvais, by the side of plus mauvais, -which is also used, but\\nwith this distinction, that pin is used to express something\\ni thing, whilst plus mauvais suggests no such\\ncomparison.\\nEx. Sa condition est mauvaise, mats die a etc pin, bis con\\nditiori is bad, but it baa been worse.\\nrCest pas plus mkliant q es, lie is no worse\\nthan the others.\\naf i (from Latin minor), less, is the comparative of\\npetit, small, and is ased, like pin, to compare two objects small\\nin themselves, while plus petit is Bimply smaller than any object,\\nhowever la I 1!1 itself.\\nj.; x moindn g is llr\\nr than this\\nj\u00c2\u00a3H she was not smaller\\nthan I.\\na comparative of Inferiority of\\nthai wine thi\\nferior to the\\nw irthe twop\\nLa he any better this\\nmorali", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0346.jp2"}, "347": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 65\\nJai penr qu il ne se porte pis memc qulder, I fear he is\\neven worse than yesterday.\\n11 m aime moins que tous sesamis, he loves mc less than all\\nhis friends;\\nExercise.\\nHis reasoning is not better than yonrs, hut his style is much clearer\\nand more pleasing. In many cases the remedy is worse than the\\ndisease. Do you rise earlier in summer than in winter? No, we\\nthink it hetter to rise during the whole year at the same hour. I\\ncould have bought these hooks cheaper, hut I did not wish to take\\nadvantage of his distress. Have you seen the Spanish dwarf? They\\nsay he is even smaller than Tom Thumb. This criminal was surely\\nvery wicked, hut I doubt whether he was worse than his brother,\\nwho was pardoned last year. That block of marble weighs a thousand\\npounds, and yet it is smaller than many others in the same building.\\nBad friends are worse than wise enemies we fear our enemies, but\\nwe are deceived by our friends. Shipwreck and death are less fatal\\nto man than the sins he commits. I like him better, not because he\\nis better than his brother, but because we have known each other so\\nmany years.\\nPlus and moins, more and less, are frequently used, not to form\\ncomparative degrees, but as Adverbs of Quantity. Then they\\nmust 1 e followed, like the whole class of those words, by de and\\nn t by que.\\nEx. Ce tableau cofite plus de cent dollars, that painting costs\\nmore than a hundred dollars.\\nCependant j aurais pu I acJieter pour moins de cinquante,\\nyet I might have bought it for less than fifty.\\nIn comparisons of inequality, i. e., superiority and inferiority,\\nthe verb of the second term takes the negative particle ne\\nbefore it, without however becoming negative itself.\\nEx. Elle est moins belle quelle detail il y a deux ans, she is\\nless handsome than she was two years ago.\\nII s est montre meilleur general qiCon rCavait espere, re\\nhas shown himself a better general than was hoped for.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0347.jp2"}, "348": {"fulltext": "C 6 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nWith regard to the construction of the Relative Superlative,\\nthe following rules have to be observed\\n1 If the second term of the comparison consists of a noun,\\ntlie connection with the first term is made in French by tfe, in-\\nstead of any other preposition, unless the latter be emphasized.\\nEx. C cst rhomme le plus savant du pays, he is tlie most\\nlearned man in the country. Elle est toujour* la\\npremiert Fecole, she is always the first in her school.\\nil y a dt mu t .r dans Paris il y en a d autree\\ndehors, this is the best to be bad inside of Paris there\\nare others outside.\\n2. If the Becond term contains a verb, this must be used in\\nthe form of the subjunctive.\\nEx. jrand navire qu on ait jamais eonstruit^ this\\nis the largest vessel that has ever been built\\n\u00c2\u00bbsf l meillsur vin rjue runs puissiez me donmr!\\nWhich is the best wine you can give me?\\nAttention must paid t the form of the article before die\\nsuperlative, especially with regard to the following two points:\\n1. I he definite article being the only mark of distinction\\naid tin 1 superlative, it can neither be\\nomitted nor supplied by the indefinite article, as in English.\\nnv ii is aimable, she is be-\\nll doubt the most lovely woman.\\n1 i i.r A .v plus sincsres, you will\\nhave my best ishes.\\nd\\\\ Pair U plus ajffectueux, she looked .-it\\nme w ith a most affectionate look.\\n2, The art irse, with tho adjective and its\\nnoun, but frequently U plus and V moins are used adverbially\\nad then they remain unchanged.\\nI a no: la is the\\ngaj est ladj 1 ki", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0348.jp2"}, "349": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 67\\nElle a I- air triste, meme quand elle est le plus gate, she\\nlooks sad even when she is most gay.\\nLes arbres les plus hauts sont le 2?lus exposes a lafoudre,\\nthe highest trees are most exposed to lightning.\\nElle est le mieux mise quand elle est le moins paree, she\\nis best dressed when she is least adorned.\\nExercise.\\nThey say she is the best singer in the world now, but I like her\\nthe least of all I have heard, although her voice is the most cultivated\\nI know. That enigma has been given to the most learned men in\\nthe city, and they have not guessed it it is the best I have ever read.\\nI have noticed that, even when she is least attentive to what happens\\naround her, nothing escapes her attention. The first cotton-press\\nthat was introduced in this country is not as old as the oldest man\\nin the State. He said to me, with a most affected manner I cannot\\nimagine that he is a better tailor than mine when I tried him, I\\nfound him less skilful than I had hoped. She is much prettier than\\nwe had thought, but she is the worst educated young lady we have\\never known. The best-established opinions are often overthrown in\\ntimes of revolutions. Of all these musicians, she is the one who\\npleases me best, for she sings more correctly than the best singer I\\nhave ever heard sing;\\nCertain classes of adjectives have no degrees of comparison\\nbut as this arises simply from their signification and not from\\nany peculiarity of form, no rules for their use are required.\\nThey are principally such as express an absolute quality, as\\neternel, eternal mortel, mortal divin, divine supreme, su-\\npreme unique, and negative adjectives, as immortel, immor-\\ntal impuni, unpunished immense, immeasurable, etc. Their\\nmeaning can never be made relative to others, as what is\\nunique or immortal cannot possibly be more or less so, and this\\nis the only reason why they are said to have no comparatives\\nor superlatives.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0349.jp2"}, "350": {"fulltext": "6^ ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThe Absolute Superlative, made by prefixing- an adverb\\nexpressive of ibe highest degree to the adjective, employs for\\nthat purpose most frequently tres, fort and bien, all three of\\nwhich correspond to the English very, with this distinction\\nTres expresses simply a generally admitted opinion, without\\nnny special emphasis.\\nEx. Tres bien, vous pouvez vousen aller, very well, you may go\\nune terre tres fertile, that is very rich soil.\\nFori is stronger in its effect, and is, alone, employed before\\niples past, when it expresses the English very mark.\\nEx. dtaii tin hommefort savant, he was a very learned man.\\nV vous rc\u00c2\u00bbr id, 1 am very much\\nsurprised to see you b\\ni is used to express onr personal conviction, and repre-\\nmuc h indeed, or similar ex\\nble, madam, you are very\\nkind indei\\nnhlait de bontis, he used to\\n1\u00e2\u0080\u009e. extremely civil and loaded me with kindn\\nrj^ when used without an ad-\\nmply by beaua up trhs beaucoup, or any\\nauCOUp is an ad-\\n1 by another adv rb.\\nhim eery much.\\nbeaucoup, his que jt\\nWhy, very raach\\nthan I thought.\\nn French which make\\nlative by addii I formed in imitation of the\\nirdinal Kichelien made,\\nby hi- own will and authority, when he wont to take command\\nof the French army in Italy. The termination cornea, through", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0350.jp2"}, "351": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 69\\nthe Italian, from the Latin issimus, and is confined to adjectives\\nused as titles. They are mainly the following Ulustrissime,\\nmost illustrious revirendissime, most reverend ezceUentisxime,\\nmost excellent eminentissime, most eminent, and serenissime,\\nmost serene (highness). Others, which have occasionally been\\nformed after the same manner, belong exclusively to the familiar\\nor comic style.\\nExercise.\\nThese two brothers were not very much esteemed in spite of their\\nriches, since everybody knew how they gained their wealth. This\\nwine is very good, but after all only an ordinary wine I like some-\\nthing better. I told him that he had been very imprudent indeed,\\nand that his best friends would show him less sympathy than they\\nwould have done if he had been more cautious. She was very much\\ninterested in the proceedings and watched them with a most attentive\\neye she was perhaps the best-informed person in the audience. I\\nam extremely sorry, Madam, if I have said any thing that could give\\nyou a worse opinion of him he is the most excellent man in the\\nworld and the best friend 1 have upon earth. When the ambassador\\napproached, the master of ceremonies said Will your Serene High-\\nness permit me to present the minister of his majesty the king\\nYou are very polite indeed, gentlemen, and I am most sincerely\\nobliged to you for all your kindness.\\nREGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES.\\nCertain adjectives in French, as in English, do not have a\\ncomplete meaning, unless a noun or a verb be added. The word\\n^o added is called their regime, regimen, and is always connected\\nith the adjective by a preposition.\\nEx. Cest une arme peu propre a la guerre, that is a weapon\\nhardly fit for war.\\nLa charrue est V instrument le plus utile a fhomme, the\\nplough is the most useful instrument for man.\\nCet empereur rfHait pas diyne de regner, that emperor\\nwas not worthy to reign.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0351.jp2"}, "352": {"fulltext": "70\\nON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nOther adjectives have no regimen, their signification being\\ncomplete in itself, as intrepide, vertueux, virtuous, inviolable^\\nbrave, sage, etc.\\nStill others may be used with or without a regimen, accord-\\ning to the meaning which they have in the sentence.\\nEx. Un duine vieillard s approcha dc nous, a worthy old man\\ncame near us.\\nC est une fault dipne de la plus severe punition, that\\nfault deserves the severest punishment.\\nThe following adjectives use different prepositions for their\\nconnection with the regimen, from the English. In all other\\ncases the same prepositions are used in both langnag\\nII 869 enfant*,\\nI\\nI de crime,\\nI i di\\ni maun,\\nIneonei\\nI\\nSkilful in profiting.\\nApproaching to truth.\\nGood to his children.\\nMIS.\\nCivil to all.\\nAccomplice in tliis crime.\\nCarious I\\nWho learn.\\n[gnoranl\\nUnacquainted with intrigna,\\nObvioos to oa.\\nSorry for the accident\\nprini lpl s.\\nBaperior in pli\\nWell TV.\\nra/.y\\nat to arrive,\\n[ncompatible with onr mannen\\nI\\ntOSB,\\nIndulgent to his children.\\none of affidra.\\nin. children.\\n[nBenaiblc ahaine,\\nTntoltnt i.\\\\ iiis lather.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0352.jp2"}, "353": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 71\\nIntercast a voire succes, Interested in your success.\\nOccupe a ecrire, Busy writing.\\nParent du roi, Related to the king.\\nParesseux d ecrire, Lazy in, -writing.\\nP avec or en vers les dames, Polite to the ladies.\\nProprea, la guerre, Fit for war.\\n2?.7ri de wms voir, Overjoyed to see you.\\nPeconnaissant de bos Pontes, Grateful for your kindness.\\nRedevaMe de w\u00c2\u00a3re education, Indebted your education.\\nSensible a, \u00c2\u00ab0S bontes, Sensible of your kindness.\\nBourd a ma botsj, Heedless o/my voice.\\nSurpris de Za nouvelle, Surprised at the news.\\nTributaire du grand seigneur, Tributary the grand seigneur.\\nVictime d un prejuge, Victim to a prejudice.\\nSome adjectives are connected by de, when they follow the\\nverb etre, preceded by a personal pronoun, and by a, when etre\\nhas ce for its subject.\\nEx. II est beau de mourir pour la patrie, it is beautiful to die\\nfor one s country.\\nCest beau a, voir, that is pretty to look at.\\nII est doux dejouir de la solitude, it is pleasant to enjoy\\nsolitude.\\nCela est doux au toucher, that is soft to the touch.\\nFacile, followed by a verb preceded by a, gives to the infinitive\\na passive signification.\\nLa fortereefe ne sera pas si facile dreduire, the fortress will not\\nbe so easily reduced.\\nG est facile elf aire, that is easily done.\\nThe same difference is made by some adjectives according\\nas they are followed by a noun, when they take a, or a verb,\\nwhen they take de.\\nEx. 77 est bon de manger du fruit le matin, it is good to eat\\nfruit in the morning.\\nCe fruit n est pas bon a manger, that fruit is not good to\\neat.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0353.jp2"}, "354": {"fulltext": "72 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nest utile de ihabituerau travail, it is useful to get ac-\\ncustomed to work.\\nXous aimons ceux qui soat utiles a (curs con/rent, we like\\nthose who are useful to their brethren.\\nIf a noun should be governed by two adjectives, which\\nrequire different [.repositions, the construction of the sentence\\nmust be so changed as to prevent any incorrectness. Beqoo*-\\nfor instance, requires a before things and envers before\\nhence it cannot be ^\\\\id\\ng x hit a la Pr Dieu, but,\\nVous ties respomable a la Pi ers Dieu^ you\\n1 and to Providence.\\nv.-ry Impatient to Bee us, for they were inconsolable for\\nth, i r loss, ana hoped that we would come and, indulgent to their\\nm in ti,,.,, an ready to avenge him-\\nmost\\nI it themselves. Although my\\nbersj he is\\nof mind, but be hi iabl r r\\n1 thus he of\\nn free from\\nPram h\\nfrom that which is used in English. The differei ism\\nthe\\nIn Ei\\nafter it.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0354.jp2"}, "355": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 73\\nIn French two modes of construction may be employed\\n1. The adjective of measure is placed first, and connected by\\nthe preposition de with the measure itself.\\nEx. Une tour haute de deux cents pieds, a tower two hundred\\nfeet high.\\n2. The more elegant construction, however, is to use the verb\\navoir instead of the English to be, followed by the measure,\\nand then to use either the adjective of measure or the cor-\\nresponding noun.\\nEx. Une tour qui a cent pieds de hauteur, a tower which is\\na hundred feet high.\\nCette riviere a quatre-vingt mitres de largeur, this river\\nis eighty metres wide.\\nLes murs d Alger avaient douze pieds d epaisseur, the\\nwalls of Algiers were twelve feet thick.\\nIn speaking of age the word age is left out, when the verb\\navoir is thus substituted for to be. but not with other verbs.\\nEx. Cette petite fille n a que six ans, this little girl is only six\\nyears old.\\nElle mourutdl dge de soixante-dix, she died at the age of\\nseventy.\\nWhen two measures are mentioned in connection, the\\nEnglish preposition by or the conjunction and, are both trans-\\nlated by sur.\\nEx. Cette chambre a vingt pieds de largeur sur trente de\\nlongueur, this room is twenty feet wide by thirty feet\\nlong.\\nLes murs n ont que trois pieds T epaisseur sur douze de\\nhaut, the walls are only three feet thick and twelve\\nfeet high.\\nWhen two objects are compared by means of measurement\\nof any kind, the English preposition by is translated by de.\\nEx. Elle est plus grande de sa sceur de toute la tete, she is\\ntaller than her sister by a whole head.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0355.jp2"}, "356": {"fulltext": "74. OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nH est plus age que safemme de dit ans, he is older than\\nhis wife by ten years.\\nThe preposition in before noons of measure, is also rendered\\nin French by de.\\nEx. 11 a troispieds de diametre, it is three feet in diameter.\\nExercise.\\nHow many men mil you have to dig the foundations of a\\nhouse, the walls of which are four feet thick I have a ditch in my\\ngarden, to drain it, which is seven feet wide, three feet deep, ami a\\nhundred and twenty let t long. She was only seventeen years of ago\\nwhen she was married, and she died when Bhe was sixty-one years\\nold. That table does not suit me, it is round and has two feet and a\\nhalf in diameter, but it is n arly three feet high, and that is too high\\nby half a t xit. This poor prisoner was confined in a cell, lour feet\\nwide by siz Gael long; the walls were four feet thick, and the little\\nwindow, which pierced them, gave very little light. The Amazon\\nis in that place twenty miles wide, though it is wider than the\\nGanges 1 y\\nADJECTIVES OF MMHKK.\\nThe Cardinal tfumbert are bo called from the Lathi woid\\nipreea, as it were, that upon them depend,\\nas the door hangs on its binges, all other numerals. This is\\nthe aame idea which baa led to the naming of Cardinala in the\\nchurch, of the cardinal points in geography, and the cardinal\\nvirtues prudence, joati I temperance. These nnme-\\ninswei t the qn n. y a-t-ilt bow many an\\nThe tbey Lpvc the\\norder r rank whi-jh persona and things hold among them-\\nfrom the Cardinal\\nNumbers an 1 express, a uuiuher collectively. Such aro ilix-", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0356.jp2"}, "357": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 75\\naine, half a score douzaine, dozen vingtaine, score ccntaine, a\\nhundred.\\nDistributive Numerals express a portion of a whole, such as\\nun demi, a half; un tiers, a third un quart, a fourth.\\nProportional Numerals express the multiplication of the\\ncardinals, le double, le triple, le quadruple le centuple, a hun-\\ndred-fold.*\\nWith regard to the use -which is made of these different\\nclasses of numerals, the following rules are to be observed\\nThe Cardinal Numbers are used in definitions of time some-\\nwhat differently from the English, as will be seen in these\\npoints\\n1. The date of the year is invariably given in cardinal num-\\nbers preceded by en, or, more formally, en Van, in the year,\\nwriting a thousand mil (not mille), and using no conjunction.\\nEx. Nous sommes en Van mil huit cent soixante-sept, we are\\nin the year 1867.\\nII mourut en dix-sept cent quatre-vingt-seize, he died in 1 796.\\n2. The date of the month is given in cardinal numbers, ex-\\ncept the first, which is always le premier, and the second, which\\nmay be le second, though le deux is more frequent. The pre-\\nposition on is never translated.\\nEx. Nous reviendrons le onze de ce mois, we shall return on\\nthe eleventh of this month.\\nLe vingt-cinq du mois prochain i.l y aura une tempete, on\\nthe twenty-fifth of next month there will be a storm.\\nThe preposition of before the names of months is generally\\nomitted.\\nEx. II naquit le treize Avril, il y a trente ans, he was born on\\nthe thirteenth of April, thirty years ago.\\nLa. bataille fut livree le trois Mars, the battle w r as foughf\\non the third of March.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0357.jp2"}, "358": {"fulltext": "70 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\n3. The hour of the dciyh given in cardinal numbers, accord-\\ning to the nature of the question: Quelle heure esl-il what\\ntime is it\\nEx. II est une hcure, it is one o clock.\\nNous y in runs a train hemes, we shall be there at three\\no clock.\\nThe fractions of an hour are simply placed after the numeral\\nthe expressions a quarter to or before half-past two, etc.,\\nbeing unknown to the French.\\nEx. arrioa ici a deux /nuns ct demie, he got here at half-\\npast two o clock.\\nNo m i i owe Inures tt quart, we shall finish at a\\nquarter pasl eleven.\\nII est lent keures trois quarts a ma montre, it is a quarter\\nto nine by my watch.\\nrnps qu ilfttutest huit arcs cinguante-cinq [in inn Its),\\nthe required time is five minutes to nine.\\nTw in the daytime is not douzi heures, but midi,\\nand twi night is minuit.\\n1a. ht it midi ei i minuit, the great\\nbell is rung at noon and at midnight.\\nOn y dine it ini /i ou a midi tt demie, they dine there at\\nor at balf pasl tw\\nThe day, mornin ag are expressed by jour, matin\\nmi l when the th counted, and by journit,\\niradou is to be expressed. The\\nEx. 1 t, I e cams every\\nmorning al six o cl( lv.\\npromener, I have spent the\\nmorning In walking.\\nOil p\\nWhi re wil ning To u\\nBtlO\\nI have\\naim uly twico daring tho whole .ar.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0358.jp2"}, "359": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 77\\nTo-night, when it means this evening, and last night in the\\nsame sense, are translated by ee soir and Mar soir, the noun mat\\nbeing used only for the night proper. The evening or the night\\nbefore is rendered by la veille, as the morning or the day fol-\\ning, by la landemain.\\nEx. Je I ai vu amnt Mer soir et je la raverrai ce soir, I saw\\nhim night before last, and I shall see him again to-\\nnight.\\n11 dormit et la veilh et la lendemain de la oatailla, he\\nslept both on the day before and the day after the\\nbattle.\\n4. The names of Sovereigns are accompanied by the cardinal\\nnumbers without article, except Premier and Second, but these\\nalso have no article.\\nEx. George Trois succeda a George Second, George III. suc-\\nceeded George II.\\nLouis Onze et Louis Quatorze ont fait beaucoup pour la\\nFrance, Louis XI. and Louis XIV. have done much\\nfor France.\\nThe great Emperor Charles V. and the famous Pope Sixtus V.\\nare both quoted as Charles Quint and Sixte Quint.\\nWhen cardinal and ordinal numbers are coupled together, the\\nformer must precede the latter.\\nEx. Les deux premiers jours de ce mois, the first two days of\\nthis month.\\nIf cardinal numbers follow the verb etre, they may be placed\\nimmediately after it, when the noun belonging to the cardinal\\nmay be easily supplied if this is not the case, the words au\\nnombre de, to the number of, must be added.\\nEx. Nous etions cinq au depart nous sommes deux, we were\\nfive of us on starting we are two of us.\\nLes fautes sont trop nombreuses elles sont au nombre de\\nvingt, there are too many mistakes; they are twenty.\\nBoth, when immediately followed by a noun, is translated by\\nles deux.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0359.jp2"}, "360": {"fulltext": "78 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. tPai achele les deux volumes a lafois, I have bought both\\nvolumes at the same time.\\nVoulez-vous les deux chiens ou settlement un? Do you want\\nboth dogs or only one?\\nBut if both is not followed by any noun, it is translated by\\ntous deux, when both are represented as acting together, and by\\ntons Us deux, when acting separately.\\nEx. lis sortirent tous deux, they both went out (together.)\\nlis stmt sortis tuus les deux, both have left (one after\\nanother.)\\nThis great general died on the nineteenth of August, and was buried\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2with much haste on l twenty first his obsequies were noi cele-\\nbrated until the thirteenth of the next month. The physician\\nhad left him apparently in good health at half-past eleven o clock at\\nnight, and at a quarter to ii\\\\ on the next morning he was found dead.\\nThe unfortunate Look the Bixteenth was led to the scaffold on the\\ntwenty-first of June, one thousand seven hundred and ninety-three.\\nShe was Beventy Bt when 1 saw her, and Bll6 had walked\\nthe. whole morning In her garden. Whal time was it when vou saw\\nher? It was last nighl at half-past eight. Charles the Fifth and\\nthe supreme power in Europe it is\\ndifficult to tell which enjoyed the most, l was absent on the fourth\\nof July, r i not return until late at night we had nlea\\nlittle supper, and s few minutes after midnight we all retired. The\\nOral three volumes of this work are far superior to the others, and I\\nthink tweir appeared. There were twenty of us In that\\ncluh. I survived; wears rarely foor of us at table,\\nWhen the noun to which the cardinal number refers is not\\nd i the numeral must be\\nil n cent de\\nof ti\\\\e hundred combatants there were one hundred\\nkilled.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0360.jp2"}, "361": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 79\\nCetaient ses gravures et il iCy en avait que deux de bonnes,\\nthey were his engravings, and there were only two\\ngood ones among them.\\nBat if the noun itself is given after the numeral, de is not\\nadded.\\nEx. II y eut cent hommes tues et deux cent blesses, one hundred\\nmen were killed and two hundred wounded.\\nThe Ordinal Numbers are used in English in all cases where\\nthe difference has not already been stated, and where their\\nplace is not supplied by the cardinal numbers.\\nIt will be remembered that the ordinal numbers are always\\nplaced before their nouns, except wheu volume, chapter or page\\nof a book and the like are quoted.\\nEx. tFai recu le troisieme tome, qui vient de paraitre, I have\\nreceived the third volume, which has just been pub-\\nlished.\\nVous le trouverez, Livre troisieme, chapitre premier, you\\nwill find it, Book third, Chapter first.\\nIt must not be forgotten that le premier and le dernier are con-\\nsidered as superlatives, and hence have the same effect upon\\nthe construction of the sentence as that class of words. Thus\\nthey require the verb to appear in the subjunctive mood.\\nEx. (Test la derniere gravure qvHil ait faite, this is the last\\nengraving he has made.\\nJe suis le premier qui soit venu, I am the first who has\\ncome.\\nThe Collective Nouns are the following\\nUnite,\\ncouple,\\nunit,\\ncouple.\\nquinzaine,\\nabout fifteen, a fort-\\nnight.\\ntrio,\\ndemi-douzaine.\\ntrio, three.\\nhalf a dozen.\\nvingtaine,\\na score, about twen\\n1 ty.\\nhuitaine,\\na week.\\ntrentaine.\\na seore and a half\\nneumine\\nnine days of prayer\\nabout thirty.\\ndizaine,\\ndouzaine,\\nhalf a score,\\ndozen.\\nquarantaine,\\n(two score, about\\nforty.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0361.jp2"}, "362": {"fulltext": "80 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\n(two score and a _. one thousand, about\\ncinquantainc, vn m her,\\nnaif, about nitv. one thousand.\\nsoixantaine,\\nun cent\\ncontains,\\nt three score, about myriade, one myriad.\\nsixty. million, one million.\\n(one hundred, pre- milliard, or) one thousand mil-\\ncisely. billion, lions.\\none hundred, about trillion, trillion.\\none hundred.\\nExcept in commercial transactions, these words do not\\nrepresent the precise number they express, but only a number\\nnearly approaching to it. Thus une vinytaine may be a few\\nmore or less than twenty. As they are nouns, they require the\\npreposition dc to connect them with other nouns.\\nEx. II n ,i vendu une douzaine cTarufs, be has sold me a\\ndozen\\nCcla une dizains de tnille dollars, that will\\ncost you abont $10,000.\\nLe cn,t ilc paille que vou* me fournites, the hundred-\\nbt of straw you furnished me.\\nused to designate the :ige of\\n..Miit any other word.\\nixantaine, tins old man is over\\nsix!;\\nThe Distribute Number* are la moitie, le tiers, Is quart^u*\\nrinquihne, and the ordinal numbers as in English,\\nEx. plus grand* j ir la moitii, two-thirds\\nare more than one-half.\\nOn I u le* quatre ci i profit, they have\\nhim four-tilths of the profit.\\nLe ir the thn e hundredth\\ntroi* CCnti mes, three- hundredths (-j-j,,).\\nIt must be borne in mind that moitic, half, is a noun and\\ninbject to the rules on nouns.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0362.jp2"}, "363": {"fulltext": "ADJECTIVES. 81\\nEx. II a pris la plus grosse moitie, he has taken the largest\\nhalf.\\nLa moitie ne suffirait pus, half of it would not be\\nenough.\\nWhile demi is an adjective, which is always used with a noun,\\nwhether that noun be expressed or understood.\\nEx. Je lui donne une demi-gourde le jour, I give him half a\\ndollar a day.\\nTrois heures et demie (heure) s etaient ecoulees, three and\\na half hours had passed.\\nExercise.\\nDid you not find that sentence in Bacon s Works, Book fifth, Chap-\\nter second, page one hundred and first It was the thirty-second\\nyear after that glorious peace when war broke out again, and inun-\\ndated all Europe with blood. Sixtus the Fifth lived at the same time\\nas Henry the Fourth both were very famous men, but in very dif-\\nferent ways. I have seen both brothers the likeness is indeed so\\ngreat that one can well take the one for the other. There were only\\nthree-hundred, but in spite of their inferiority, they resisted the\\nenemy for several hours they only gave way when they had two\\nhundred killed and about fifty wounded. Has he passed sixty years,\\nor does he look older than he really is Nine-tenths of those who\\nhave heard it will not know the purport of his speech. It lasted\\nthree-quarters of an hour, and half was filled with statistics which\\ninterested nobody. I w T as there half an hour before him, when there\\nwere only about twenty persons in the hall later in the evening,\\nthere were perhaps a hundred. I have bought two hundred-weight\\nof straw for my cows they cost me already more than ninety-three\\ndollars, and this morning the servant told me that they had both run\\naway. He obtained her father s consent on the tenth of July, and he\\nbecame her husband before a fortnight had passed away. The wed-\\nding took place at night in the church, and after that they spent\\nabout twenty days at a friend s house in the country.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0363.jp2"}, "364": {"fulltext": "82 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nCHAPTER IV.\\nPRONOUNS.\\nI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nPersonal Pronoun.?, the forms of which have been given in\\nthe Fir.-t Part of this Grammar, have their name from their\\noriginal purpose, that of supplying the place of names of per-\\nsons, in order to avoid their frequent repetition. Although\\nthis is still their principal duty, their use is by no means con-\\nfined to persons, and they represent not only lifeless objects, as\\nEx. Quant a la maisonje la trouve detestable, as to the house,\\nI think it detestable,\\nbut even whole Bentenees\\nEx. m me salue jamais, et mot je ne Vaperfois jamais, he\\nnever Bpeaka to me, and I never notice it (that he does\\nnot Bpeak i\\nin which cases the Bentence is not nnfrequently represented in a\\ndifferent construction.\\nEx. VouUz-vous que faille vous voir i Oui, je le veux (que\\nii w Mi me i go and Bee yon I\\nS 1 wish it (that yon conn and see me).\\nPersonal IV. nns differ\\n1. A- tar as th three persons, the first, or the\\nd who is Bpeaking, jV, I. nous, the second, or the\\nperson spoken t\u00c2\u00ab-. tu, ti and ibe third, or the person\\ntpok be, she and it; ils,elles, thoj on, some one, etc.\\nie first and second persons are always in sight of each\\nother, then sing their gondcr it is dif-\\nI with the third person, which is absent, and hence the\\npronoun representing it forma for the gondera,\\n2. A- bras they are onlj to I used in\\nimmediate connection with a verb like je, me, tu, te, le, lui, or", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0364.jp2"}, "365": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 83\\nabsolute, i. e., only to be used by themselves, without a verb, or\\nunited to a preposition, like viol, toi, eux, etc.\\nSome pronouns are conjunctive and absolute without change\\nof form Jike elle, she nous, we vous, you elles, they.\\nEx. Elle (conj.) a assez, la maison est d elle (abs.), she has\\nenough, the house belongs to her.\\nSaoegrwus (conj.) qu il l a fait pour vous (abs.), do you know\\nthat he did it for you\\nQuant d dies (abs.) dies (conj.), n ensavent Hen, as for them,\\nthey know nothing of it.\\n3. As far as they represent the subject (nominative) of a\\nverb, like je, tu, il and elle, or the direct object (accusative),\\nlike me, te, le and la, or the indirect object (genitive and dative),\\nlike en, y, lui, leu?; etc.\\nSome pronouns serve for all three purposes\\nNous and vous mean we and you, nom.\\nus and you, ace.\\nto us and to you, dat.\\nEx. Nous (nom.) nous (ace.) aimons et vous (nom.) vous (ace.)\\nflattez, we love ourselves and you flatter yourselves.\\nNous vous (dat.) donnerons ce que vous nous (dat.) donneres,\\nwe will give you what you will give us.\\nMe, te, and se mean me, thee, one s self (ace.)\\nto me, to thee, to one s self (dat.)\\nEx. II me dit d moi ce qu il te dit d toi, he told me what he told\\nthee.\\nII me Jiait car U te prefere, toi, he hates me for he prefers\\nthee.\\nOn se (ace.) trompe toujour s quand on se (dat.) plait trop,\\none always deceives one s self, when one is too well\\npleased with one s self.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0365.jp2"}, "366": {"fulltext": "84 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nPERSONAL PRONOUNS AS SUBJECTS.\\n(Nominative.)\\nJe, not written, as in English, with a capital initial, when it\\ndoes not begin a sentence, suffers elision when immediately\\npreceding a verb, beginning with a vowel or mute h, and has\\nthe gender of the person it represents.\\nEx. Je stiissatisfaitc, dit la reine, de vos services, I am satisfied,\\nsaid the queen, with your services.\\nWhen placed in interrogative sentences, after a verb which\\nends in mute c, it compels the verb to place an acute accent on\\nthis e to avoid two mute s following each other.\\nEx. VeiU an pareil dessein Am I awake!\\nCan I believe Bach a plan I\\nDussS-je en mourir, je Vessaieraiy even if I were to die\\nof it, T will try it.\\nWhen the mi1\u00c2\u00bb in the present is monosyllabic, it is not used\\ninterrogatively with/*, hut the question is asked by means of\\nest-re q\\nEx. E don on csi-cc que jc veillet Am I asleep\\nor am I awake\\nTu, also, i^ of Loth genders aeronling to the person it rep-\\nresent^.\\nBr. 7 r, par mi let /emmet, thou art blessed,\\nMadonna, among women.\\nThe use of to\u00e2\u0080\u0094 which is expressed by the verb tvUn/er\\nguelqu un, to thou a person is not a rare as in English, but\\nstill limited. 7 i\\nIn addressing God\\nEx. Grand Dieuf i enl# eont remplis rPiquite\\\\ Giant\\nGod! thy judgments are full of joe", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0366.jp2"}, "367": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 85\\nIn elevated and poetical style\\nEx. Grand roi, cease de vaincre ou je cesse d ecrire, great king,\\ncease conquering, or I must cease writing.\\nIn addressing very intimate friends, and, generally, members\\nof the same family\\nEx. Mon ami, je ie supplie, ne fais pas cela, my friend, I pray\\nthee, don t do that.\\nTiens, mon enfant, que fais-tu la Why, child, what are\\nyou doing there?\\nTo address inferior persons, servants, etc., by tu, is no\\nlonger usage. Except in remote provinces, it lias been aban-\\ndoned since the Revolution of 1848.\\nIn expressing contempt or intentional insult\\nEx. Connais-tu Vheritier du plus saint des monarques, reine\\nDost thou know the heir of the holiest of monarchs,\\nqueen\\nII and elle, derived, like the definite article, from the Latin\\ndemonstrative pronoun Me, ilia, represent the three pronouns\\nhe, she and it, as the French has no neuter. also represents\\nthe it which is the vague subject of impersonal verbs.\\nEx. 11 chante, il danse, il s amuse ious les jours, he sings, he\\ndances, he amuses himself every day.\\nCe tableau me plait, il est original, I like this painting\\nit is original.\\nCette table est trop petite, elle ne me convient pas, this table\\nis too small, it does not suit me.\\nH neige, ou il va neiger tout-a-Vheure, it snows, or is going\\nto snow directly.\\nNous, we, from the Latin nos, is used for both genders and\\nfor both numbers, according as it represents a masculine or\\nfeminine noun, and as it is used in the plural, or by a figure of\\nspeech, for the singular, as is done by sovereigns, editors, etc.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0367.jp2"}, "368": {"fulltext": "86 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Nbussommes Unites preserves, dirent-elks, we are all here,\\nthey said.\\nNous, George Premier, par la grace de Dieu, etc., we,\\nGeorge the First, by the grace of God, etc.\\nYous, von, from the Latin row, is in like manner used for\\nboth genders and numbers, as it is now-a-days the only pronoun\\nemployed in addi K ns.\\nEx. Votts ties savant, Monsit ur, rout savez tout, you are learned,\\nSir, you know every thing.\\nVous vous trompez, Messieurs, on ne passe pas! You are\\nmistaken, Gentlemen, you cannot pass here!\\nPert j Vites, vous devez lefaire,M you\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2!i\\\\ inced, yon ought to do it.\\nBoth of these pton and w w, arc rarely plaeed\\ndirectly before a noun expressive of character, Btation, or\\noality. In such cases the wor inse r ted be-\\ntu. .n and the noun.\\nsoldiers do not mind it.\\n1 von liil\\nknow that better.\\njg re, we\\nv. t arrived there.\\nIts and rf/ from the Latin Uli and dice, represent the I\\ntiah they in s\\ni; v m soniils retiris dejhf Have tho doctors\\ni y sont seuleS) Bpeak to the ladies,\\nthey are alone there.\\nj-,,, 1 like those\\nthe] i it.\\n0/\u00c2\u00bb,from the which is a I as a subject,\\nwill be mentioned under the head of indefinite pronouns to which\\nit belong-, being the indefinite persona] pronoun of the French.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0368.jp2"}, "369": {"fulltext": "PEOKOUNS. 87\\nPERSONAL PRONOUNS AS DIRECT OBJECT.\\n(Accusative.)\\nMe is the accusative of je, and elides like the latter before a\\nverb beginning with a vowel or mute h.\\nEx. me plaint car il m aime, he pities me, for he loves me.\\nBajazei aujourdhui rrChonore et me caresse, Bajazet now\\nhonors and caresses me.\\nAfter the imperative, me is always exchanged for moi, unless\\nit should be followed by en or y, when it resumes its original\\nform.\\nEx. II me hue louez-moi (not me) done aussi vous, he praises\\nme do you praise me also.\\nSuivez-ni y (not moi), s il vous plait, follow me there, if\\nyou please.\\nTe is the accusative of tu, and used like me.\\nEx. Tu te trompes, mon ami, il est tard, thou art mistaken,\\nfriend, it is late.\\nTe, also, has to be exchanged for tei after the imperative,\\nand like me, resumes its original form before en. It is not used\\nbefore y.\\nEx. Tais-toi (not te) tu fais un fracas enorme, hush thou\\nmakest a terrible noise.\\nVa-t-en (not toi), coquin, que je ne fassomme pas! Be\\noff, rascal, or I shall kill thee\\nLe is the accusative of il, and represents the English him\\nor it.\\nEx. (fest Dieu qui me Va donne, mon mari cheri, it is God who\\nhas given him to me, my beloved husband.\\nCe livre Je le tiens de mon ancien precepteur, this book\\nI received it from my former teacher.\\nLe is the pronoun which is added to all active verbs in order\\nto comply with the rule, that every active verb in French", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0369.jp2"}, "370": {"fulltext": "88 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nmust have its object expressed, which is not the case in\\nEnglish.\\nEx. Is this your house Yes, it is. Est-ce la votre dcmcure\\nOui, ce Pest.\\nWill you do me this favor No, I cannot. Voulez-vous\\nme /aire cette fuveur m le peux pas.\\nDid they do it yesterday Yes, they did. Est-ee quits\\nrunt fait hier? Oai, Us Font fait.\\nLe answers also for the English so, when it can be exchanged\\nfor it and does not mean thus, in this manner.\\nEx. I thought BO, but I did nut i iko to say so, jt le pen mis,\\nr in voulais pas U\\nIt appears bo, and perhaps it is so, il paralt et pevt-Urs\\nil i\\nLa is the accusative of eltt and represents the English her\\nor if.\\nEx. r Ha la dam* jt la eke, there is the lady;\\nI Bee her coming.\\na ii it rend heureux, the Km-\\nperor loves Prance, he makes it (her) bappy.\\nJe it vote, ii ii .1 see it, the house o(\\nmy fill\\nIt is not a v. to decide when the object\\nof ai i i English and t be supplied in\\ntranslated or la r lea.\\nrale is. that when the object is an adjective, A alone is\\nsupplied; when it is a noun, that form of the pronoun is sup-\\nplied which corresponds with the noun in gen ler and number.\\nEx. E iladt Is he sick z*ea,\\naeant) t\\nsince he says we are exacting, let us b", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0370.jp2"}, "371": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS- 89\\nVoire soeur sera-t-elle votre heritidre Oui, die la sera\\n{fheriliere). Will your sister be yuur heir? Yes,\\nshe will.\\nSont-ce la vos robes? Non, ce ne les son I pas (les robes\\nAre those your dresses N o, they are not.\\nHence the difference between\\nEtes-vous mariee Oui, je le suis (adjective). Are you\\nmarried Yes, I am.\\nEtes-vous la mariee Oui, je la suis (noun). Are you\\nthe bride Yes, I am.\\nEven the (English) auxiliary verbs are active verbs in\\nFrench and require the addition of their direct object, like\\nother verbs of this class.\\nEx. Je sais que je le dois, I know I ought.\\nJe le pourrais, s il lefaut, I could if I must\\n11 (Lit qu U le veut t He says he will.\\nJe vous le dlrai, I will tell you.\\nNous, unchanged, is used as accusative of the nominative\\nEx. Nous (nom.) nous apercevons qu on nous (ace.) trompe, we\\nare aware that we are deceived.\\nVous, unchanged, is accusative also of vous.\\nEx. Vous (nom.) etes riche, je vous (ace.) en felicite, you are\\nrich, I congratulate you.\\nLes is the common accusative of Us or elles, and represents\\nthe English them in all three genders.\\nEx. Voyez-vous ces hommes Je les crains. Do you see those\\nmen I am afraid of them.\\n.Les malheurs disparaissent quand on les brave, misfor-\\ntunes vanish if we face them.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0371.jp2"}, "372": {"fulltext": "90 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nIt hails and snows very hard and it is not possible to go out. Come\\nin and stand by the stove, it is warm and comfortable. I offer you\\nmy hand, and I hope you will not refuse it. Help me and I will help\\nyou, but after all it is with God to help us both. You ought to take\\nexercise every day, your health demands it. I know I ought, and\\nthe doctor says so too, but I cannot force myself to do it. Will you\\ncome to-ni ght and take tea with us Yes, I will, with pleasure, if I may\\nbring my sister also Certainly you may, and we shall be very happy\\nto see her. Be silent, and go away, you are in a passion and know not\\nwhat you say. He is not asleep. Yes, be is, and lie will be for an\\nhour, if nobody awakes him. Well, young ladies, are you ready at\\nlast Yes. we an and altogether at your service. Since you say so,\\nlet 08 go and take our walk. She was not veiy amusing to-day, per-\\nahe will more so to-morrow, when there will be more company\\nnt our house. I- your master at Lome v No, sir, be is not be has\\nleft for Europe two days ago. 1 thoughl bo, and would have come\\nsooner, but 1 had not time, and now I am boity for it.\\nINDIRECT OBJKOT.\\ndative a- well a- accusative, like the English nt\u00c2\u00ab, and\\nfor moi.\\nI in-!, t,.us !,s ma I i us, ho\\nrj morning.\\nOn n taurail me reproch tf aimer la tables\\nach me with a fondness for the table.\\nit cannot 1\u00c2\u00bb omitted 1 ad verb, if it should\\nut differ nt objects with the tv. verbs.\\ncannot be said, bat\\nich r*s0 In- repeated with the auxiliary veil,\\nd charmed me.\\nitive, i- changed into mot, after tho\\nimperative, m", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0372.jp2"}, "373": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 91\\nEx. Donnez-moi (a moi) deux, give me two.\\nDonnez-irten deux, give me two of theui.\\nSuivez-m y, follow me there.\\nTe, in like manner, is dative as well as accusative of tu, and\\nmeans to thee and thee.\\nEx. Tais-toi, pendard, hush (thyself), scoundrel.\\nPrends-fen tant que tu voudras, take as much of it as\\nthou wantest.\\n(Such a sentence as this would not be used in French, on\\naccount of it3 unpleasant sound it is added simply as an\\nillustration and a warning with regard to the laws of\\neuphony.)\\nLui is the dative of il and elle, and corresponds to the Eng-\\nlish to him, to her, and to it, standing, as it does, for a lui and\\na elle.\\nEx. Je lui parlais franchement, I spoke frankly to him.\\nOn lui a rendu son mari, they have restored her husband\\nto her.\\nQuand le vaisseau fut lance on lui mit les mats, when\\nthe vessel was launched, they put the masts in (to) it.\\nIf, however, two pronouns representing persons should be\\nconnected with the same verb, lui cannot be used for to him or\\nto her, but its place must be supplied by a lui and a elle.\\nEx. He compares me to him, il me compare a lui.\\nShall I introduce you to her Dois-je vous presenter a\\nelle?\\nHe gave himself entirely up to her, il s adonna entiere-\\nment a elle.\\nY (from the Latin ibi) is also a conjunctive personal pro-\\nnoun, representing as such mainly the indirect object of il or\\nelle, when applied to things. It can be applied to persons only\\nin connection with the two verbs, penser, to think, and se fier,\\nto trust.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0373.jp2"}, "374": {"fulltext": "02 ON THE PAKTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Pensez-vous a votre bien-aimee? Oai, fy pense. jour et\\nnuit. Do you think of }-our lady-love Yes, I think\\nof her day and night.\\nNe vous y fiez pas, elle a des caprices, do not rely on her,\\nshe is fickle.\\nA lui and a elle can, however, be used equally well with\\nthese verbs.\\nApplied to things, y means to it or to them.\\nEx. Ajoulez-y un j cu desucre, s il vous plait, add a little sugar\\nto it, if you pleas\\nII j\\\\t at y donner toute votre attention, you ought to give\\nyour whole attention to it.\\ntoni graves, fuites-y attention, these are grave\\npay attention to them.\\nand rous are used as datives as well as accusatives,\\nand their precise meaning can be ascertained only from the\\nposition in th\\nlat.) fait des compliments,\\nthey praise and compliment\\n,\u00e2\u0080\u00a2/,,_- toujour* a runs [dat.) /aire des amis,\\nyou always try to win (make) friends (for yourselves),\\ndative of the nominative Us and elles, and repre-\\ni them in all gendi\\nmis, on li ur don) ok at inv\\nchildren, they are receiving presi\\navail parli, my dangh*\\nold me that they had Bpoken t them about it.\\ni as a substitute for d tux and a elles, under the\\ncondition, under which it can used for i lui and\\nThose\\nis, do not trust them", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0374.jp2"}, "375": {"fulltext": "PBONOUNS. 93\\nExercise.\\nGive liim all that you Lave and I will give you all I have Who\\nwas it that spoke to her this morning I saw nobody who spoke to\\nher, but I sent a friend to her, who told her that the carriage was\\nwaiting for her. Tell her all of it, or, if you cannot do that, tell me\\nall of it and I will tell her. Go away, thou art too bad and be silent\\nabout it or thou wilt be punished severely. He confided in them and they\\ndeceived him. Add to it a measure of sugar and it will be very good\\nto eat. If you had given to it more attention, you would have suc-\\nceeded better. What has he told you He told me that they would\\ngo away to-morrow, in order to spend a year in Paris, and that he\\nwould go there himself next year. I have heard that news, but I have\\ngiven no credit to it, because he has told me so twice and he has not\\nyet gone there. That was the residence of Voltaire think of it, when\\nyou are on the banks of the lake of Geneva.\\nPERSONAL PRONOUNS AS INDIRECT OBJECT.\\n(Genitive.)\\nThere is but one conjunctive personal pronoun, which repre-\\nsents the genitive case, and that is en (from the Latin inde),\\nwhich is used as a genitive of all the pronouns of the third\\nperson, singular and plural, and hence represents of him, of\\nher, of it, of them, from him, etc., about him, etc.\\nEx. Voila monfrere, je lui en dirai quelque chose, here is my\\nbrother, I will tell him something about it.\\nSi vous avez du the, donnez in en une tasse, if you have\\nany tea, give me a cup of it.\\nII avail dix enfants, mais il en a perdu six, he had ten\\nchildren, but he has lost six of them.\\nLike the pronoun y, en also requires the imperative of verbs,\\nwhich ends in mute e, to add an s in order to avoid the hiatus.\\nEx. Parles-en a ion fere quand il ventre, speak of it to thy\\nfather when he comes in.\\nSois sage, mon enfant, et donnes-en un a ta sosur, be good,\\nmy child, and give one of them to thy sister.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0375.jp2"}, "376": {"fulltext": "9i ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nIt will be remsmbered that en, like y, has also the effect of\\nchanging moi and toi after the imperative into me and te.\\nEx. Ditea-m en tout ce que vous en saccz, tell me all you know\\nabout it.\\nTais4 cn aiec tout le monde, be silent about with everybody.\\nEn is generally used with reference to persons only when\\nthey have been mentioned either in the same sentence, or at\\nleast in the one immediately preceding it.\\nEx. Vou\u00c2\u00bb avez vu man ami, qu en pensez-vous You have\\nseen my friend, what do yon think of him\\nQue dit-tlle de moit Elle t\\\\a dit que J u bien. What\\ndid she say of me She said nothing but what was\\ngood of you.\\nB immediate purposes for which is used as a\\npi reona] pronoun, it Berves to express various other words,\\nwhich have a kindred meaning in English. Of these the fol-\\nlowing are the most important\\nJ. n is used foi when these words are employed\\na\u00c2\u00bb pronouns, and consequently not accompanied by any noun;\\nthe manner of expression being that the French say, e.g,, (live\\ntheml instead of the English, Give me Bomel\\nEx. i give me some, it\\noil lia\\\\ 6\\nat pa$. What a pHyl I have\\nnot any.\\n.r :i trit petit nombre. Friends! I\\nhav ew.\\nin such constructions 1 qualified by an adjective, it\\nrequires, like all pronouns, the addition of the preposition di.\\nEx, I 1 ave somjl very g I, but they are quite dear, /en at\\nXhi that are better,\\nM-d iout bom fen iu de meillev", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0376.jp2"}, "377": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 95\\nEn is also used to express the English words one and ones,\\nwhen they are added to adjectives instead of a noun.\\nEx. This apple is bad, give me a good one, celle pomme est\\nmauvai$e,donnez-m l en une bonne.\\nHave you no better ones I do not like these. iV cn\\navez-vous pas de meilleures Je n aime pas celles-ci.\\nThis can, of course, only apply to adjectives which are\\nobjects of the verb, as it has already been stated that en can\\nnever refer to the subject, the nominative. If one and ones are\\nused with the subject, they remain untranslated in French.\\nEx. A good one would cost twice as mueh, un bon couterait\\ndeux fois plus.\\nGood ones are very rare at this season, les bans sont\\nfort rares a cette saison.\\nEn is used instead of the English it, whenever it becomes the\\nobject of a verb which in French is followed by the preposition\\nde.\\nEx. I will use it, if you will lend it to me,je nCen servirai, si\\nvous voulez me le prefer.\\nJEh is supplied in French to express the whole, of which a\\nquantity, a number, or any measure forms the direct object of a\\nverb in English, without mentioning the whole.\\nEx. How many books have you I have two thousand\\n(books). Combien de livres avez-vous? J y en ai deux\\nmAlle.\\nI gave him half (of my money) and I kept the other\\nhalf, je lui en donna.i la moitie et je gardai V autre.\\nI thought you had given him more, je croyais que vous\\nlui en o.vicz donne plus.\\nUnless this quantity, measure, etc., is preceded by the definite\\narticle or possessive pronoun, in which case it is clearly enough\\ndefined and does not require the addition of en.\\nEx. I gave him half and kept the best part, je lui en donnai\\nla moitie et je gardai la meilleure parlie.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0377.jp2"}, "378": {"fulltext": "96 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nTake six and leave me my share, prenez-en SIX t laisses-\\nmoi ma part.\\nEn is omitted in French, even when of it or of them are used\\nin English, whenever the latter words refer to the indirect object\\nof the verb, accompanied by a preposition.\\nEx. I met several ladies and I spoke to two of them, fai\\nrencontre plusieurs dames et fai parle a u.r.\\nlie was employed for all and only plead for one, il etait\\nUna it H n a plaidoye que pour un.\\nFinally, it must be borne in mind that en cannot be used for\\noftfu ra, etc., or for me or if these words\\nare n aied by verbs, as is a conjunctive personal\\npronoun, ai ntly can be used only in immediate con-\\nnection with a verb. In such cases, the French either repeat\\nthe verb, substitute (Pentre (from amongst) for e\u00c2\u00bb.\\nEx. How many did yoo Bee! Two of them. Combien en\\nn at i u l or deux of\\\\ ntr\\nonly four. I\\nIX cuillers. ai j ris\\nque quatre.\\nI\\nI tomes thai thi* young man will l friend, for von aro\\nalwaji him. I like these men, and I say of then what\\nyour friend told yon I number of them, if you p]\\nmil food ha her, she will make a better use\\nI urn Bony, 1 have\\nnot any, but I win l il not like thai\\nhave trii -l :i smnll quantity an l it is d m me some I\\nTlie sampl. tea la the dty n-.w I ban\\nany, krat I shall I y t li. ivxt i\\nBow many brothen h d \u00c2\u00bbi ono\\nnow. Will y u\\nII. if Vnll\\nbut If I tin 1 ut of", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0378.jp2"}, "379": {"fulltext": "PKONOUNS. 97\\na hundred men that buy lottery tickets, one wins a prize and ninety-\\nnine lose their money. I want a knife, and I want a large one, for I\\nhave lost all the small ones I have ever bought. You have not treated\\nme fairly, you sold me an old one for a new one.\\nPLACE OP CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\na. As Subject.\\nThe elementary rules on the place of personal pronouns have\\nalready been given, and it has been seen that, as nominatives of\\nthe verb, they precede it, except in the interrogative form, when\\nthey are placed, as in English, after the verb.\\nEx. Je Vai salue, pourquoi ne me salue-t-il pas I have bowed\\nto him, why does he not bow to me\\nIt has also been stated that if in questions the subject be a\\nnoun, it must be placed at the head of the sentence, and then\\nrepeated after the verb in the form of the corresponding pro-\\nnoun.\\nEx. U Empereur est-il parti pour Fontainebleau Has the\\nEmperor left for Fontainebleau\\nLes hommes ne seront-ils jamais plus sages qu a present,\\nWill men never be any wiser than they are now\\nTo these general rules must now be added the following,\\nwhich refer to more particular constructions\\nIn English a condition may be expressed by simply giving\\nto the verb the interrogative form, and instead of saying If he\\nhad been here, this would not have happened, we may say\\nHad he only been here, this would not have happened. In\\ngeneral, such constructions are not admissible in French aiW\\nmust be rendered by employing si, if.\\nEx. Should you go there now, it would be too late, sivous y\\nalliez maintenant, il serait trop tard.\\nBut in cases in which great emphasis is laid upon the con-\\ndition, as when we say or can say even if, the French employ", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0379.jp2"}, "380": {"fulltext": "98 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthe interrogative form of the whole of the subjunctive of the\\nverbs avoir, etre and devoir, and the third person singular of the\\nsame tense and mood of all verbs, like the English, for the same\\npurpose.\\nEx. Dmse-je en mourir,je le ferais neanmoins, even if I were\\nto die of it, I would do it nevertheless.\\nFut-il plus riche que Cresus, il ne serait pas heiorur,\\neven if he were richer than Croesus, he would not be\\nhappy.\\nJ$ussent-ils eu six cents canons, Us vc Faitniieni pas\\ntmporti, even if they had had six hundred guns, they\\nwould not have gained the battle.\\nDonnat-il lout xon bien anx pauvres, il ne gagnerait pas le\\ncat, even it he were to give all he has to the poor, ho\\nwould Dot enter into heaven.\\nPersonal pronouns are, also, generally placed after the verb,\\nwhen for the sake of emphasis one of the following adverbs\\nis placed at the beginning of the Bentencc a peii scarcely en\\njoin, in vain; at) memo, at least; encore, yet; toujours, still;\\npeut-itre, perhaps, and several others, expressing a conclusion.\\nEx. -1 fuUU into ijn il Sclata en injures, hardly had\\nhe OOme in, when he broke forth in insults.\\nours sera-t-U suspect a tous ceux qui connu\\nstill lie will be Bnspectod by all who have known him.\\nl i i mieux fuit di vous taire, perhaps\\nyou had done better to keep rilei\\nIt mnal not overlooked that the pronoun i* thai planed utter\\nthe verb only when the above-mentioned adverbs ure planed,\\nme particular purpose and always with a more or Lees [dio\\nmask meaning, at the head of the sentence, instead of their\\nlegitimate plane after tin- verb.\\nIn incidental sentences personal pronouns are invariably\\nplaned after the verb.\\nKx. Eh lmit, i/it-il, fiinssn/i.s-ai, well, he said, let us make an\\nend of it.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0380.jp2"}, "381": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 99\\nExercise.\\nI have seen it often enough, and I do not care to see it again. Was\\nthis man ever one of your friends, or did he merely claim your friend-\\nship to protect himself in his crimes Were he here now, he could\\nnot be admitted, because the general is too much engaged to see any\\none but should you see him in an hour or sooner, you may send him\\nto me and I will tell him when he can succeed. Even if he were the\\nPresident of the United States, he would have no right to prohibit\\nthis. Should I lose my all, I will venture upon this enterprise and\\ncarry it through, even if it were the last tiling I shall do upon earth.\\nNothing in this world, he repeated twice, will induce me to act thus,\\nI value my honor more than all the riches of the earth.\\nb. As Object.\\nPersonal Pronouns which are direct or indirect objects of a\\nverb are placed immediately before it, except in the affirmative\\nimperative, when they are placed after it and connected with\\nit by a hyphen. This rule has already been stated and ex-\\nplained in the First Part of this Grammar. There remains,\\nhowever, to be considered the case in which two such pronouns\\nare connected with the same verb. Their place is, in that case,\\nentirely prescribed by rules\\nIf the two pronouns represent different persons, the first per-\\nson precedes the second, and the second the third.\\nEx. He told it to me before he told it to you, il me le dit\\navant qu il vous le dit.\\nI gave them to you yesterday at the Exchange, je vous\\nles ai donnes hier a la Bourse.\\nYou owe them to me and you shall pay them to me,\\nVous me les devez et vous me les payerez.\\nIf the two pronouns represent the same person, which can,\\nof course, occur only with the third person, the direct object\\nprecedes the indirect.\\nEx. He sejit them to her and she sent them back to him, il\\nlesJAii envoya et elle les lui renvoya.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0381.jp2"}, "382": {"fulltext": "100 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nHe took the purse and gave it to them, with these\\nwords, il prii la bourse et la leur donna avec ccs mots.\\nIf the two pronouns are placed after the imperative, tliat of\\nthe third person is invariably placed first, for the sake of euphony,\\nand both are joined by hyphens to the verb. If they should\\nboth be of the third person, here also the direct object precedes\\nthe indirect.\\nEx. Give it to me at once or I must take it, donnez-le-moi de\\nsuite ou je devrai It prendre.\\nSend him to us and we will take care of him, envoye i*-\\nnous et nous nous thargermu.\\nShow it t him and then give it back to them, montrez-\\nh-l ii it -leur,\\nKit and y will be found, in Accordance with these rules,\\nalwavs nearest to the verb, when before it, and farthest from it.\\nafter the imperati\\nEx. aurmt da AMtff auhtnt, ho OUghl to have\\nTOO |fl many.\\nnl iju tl vudru, give him as much as\\nhe\\ntOlU lex jours I \u00c2\u00bbo J I\\nhim there every\\nCoh .rry us\\nthere and we will be obliged to you.\\nIt linn already been mentioned thai for the sake of euphony y\\nla placed before m (and Invite me to it but\\n\\\\.r_\\\\ ran- occurrence ami ought t be avoided\\nbv I\\nWhen li taw thai I mar, he said to mo I cannot trust\\nvc.u. a nd me a native. When he bed res I the i H.u, he gave it to ma\\nwih tin Jd return it to him to-morrow or I", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0382.jp2"}, "383": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 101\\nday. Did you see that beautiful rose I gathered it this morning in\\nmy garden I presented it to her politely at breakfast she took\\nthe leaves of it and placed them into a vase, where she collects a large\\nquantity of rose-leaves, in order to make a perfume of them. Send\\nher to him, he will know what she can do to it. If you have your\\nbooks here, take this pretty one, add it to them, and they will appear\\ntwice as handsome as before. What did he tell you about it He\\ntold me no more of it than he had told you, but he promised that he\\nwould carry me there and show it to me himself. Take the dol-\\nlar and give it to them, and then take this letter and send it to her\\nshe will read it at once. When you have looked at all the engravings,\\nreturn them to her, and tell her that I wish to see them also, if she\\ncan lend them to me for some time. Sell me a hundred of them and\\nI will give you a good price.\\nREPETITION OF CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nPersonal Pronouns must be repeated before every verb, to\\nwhich they serve as an object. This rule has no exception\\nwith regard to the pronouns of the first and second person.\\nEx. I saw and recognized her before you did^ e la vis etje la\\nreconnus avuni. vous.\\nI will study and learn it by heart to-night, je vais I etudier\\nct Vapprendre par coeur ce soir.\\nThe pronouns of the third person, however, may be used\\nbut once, instead of being repeated, when the two verbs which\\nthey qualify are of the same nature.\\nEx. II vint et dit, he came and said.\\nJe la vis et saluai, I saw and saluted her.\\nBut if the two verbs have different objects, or one is affirma-\\ntive and the other negative, or if they are separated by incidental\\nsentences, the pronouns of the third person also must be\\nEx. Elle voidut et elle ne voulut pus, she would and she would\\nnot.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0383.jp2"}, "384": {"fulltext": "102 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nJe Vai rencontre et je lui ai parle, I Lave met him and\\nspoken to him.\\nII la cassu quandfetais absent, et il ne Fa pas fait raccom-\\nmoder, he broke it when I was away, and has not had\\nit mended.\\nIf the two verbs thus used with the same pronouns are in\\nthe imperative mood, the usage is to repeat the pronoun, but\\nto place it before, instead of after, the second verb.\\nEx. Tcnez ee Kvre lisez-U et le relisez, take this book read\\nand re-read it.\\nNettoyezrlei et Uspolissez tantgue vous pourrez, clean and\\npolish them as well as yon can.\\nExi RCT8K.\\nT Uke tliis young lady as well as yon, but I think yon flatter and\\nplains her too much. He Bpoke to me for half an hour, and did not\\nsay a single word which I had not heard before, sin- wenl ami oama\\nbank ten times; at last sin- mads an efibrl and really went away.\\nSpeak to him or write to him on the Bubject be will give you 1 1 beat\\nand accompany il with a sum of money. I will give you yon*\\nletter; read it and r.-. iad it. it is full of g 1 advice, and\\nyon ought to study and follow it luring your whole life Sin- saw it\\nbut she did not recognize it, and yet it was her own child, I tld\u00c2\u00ab k\\nof it and remember it every day when I come t your house how I\\nloved and cherished it\\npi k-..\\\\ ll proko era si\\narts of the body of the\\nperson Bpeaking or spoken of and to, are not rendered in\\nbv the corresponding words, bnt their place is supplied by\\nthe article before the ntnn, and the indirect object of the proper\\npersona] prononn before the verb. Instead of\\nmal the French sa_\\\\ 1 i.\\naches to him, la ttU lui fait mal.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0384.jp2"}, "385": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 103\\nEx. I washed my facp, je me laved le visage.\\nI will break his head, ye lui casserai la tete.\\nShe has cut her finger, elle s est blesse au doigi.\\nThe verb, to beg pardon, is in French used after the same man-\\nner, substituting the personal for the possessive pronoun.\\nEx. I beg your pardon, je vous demande pardon.\\nWith passive verbs, the nominative of which is a person,\\nthe pronoun is superfluous, as there can arise no ambiguity in\\nsuch a case.\\nEx. I was wounded in my shoulder, jefus blesse a Vepaule.\\nThe general rule of thus substituting one class of pronouns\\nfor another is, however, set aside whenever there could either\\nan ambiguity arise as to the person whose parts are spoken of,\\nor when special emphasis is resting on the possessive pronoun.\\nIn these cases the latter is translated literally.\\nEx. Push your feet (not anybody else s), pousxez vos pieds.\\nShow me your teeth, montrez-moi vos dents.\\nHaving wept so much, their eyes were red, ayant tant\\npleure, leurs yeux etaient rouges.\\nOn the other hand, the article alone suffices to represent the\\npossessive pronoun, without the addition of a personal pronoun,\\nwhen we speak of an action natural to the part of the body\\nreferred to, and when there can be no ambiguity.\\nEx. I opened my mouth, fouvris la bouche\\nShut your eyes, fermez les yeux.\\nIf the noun expressing a part of the body, be accompanied\\nby an adjective, the possessive pronoun must be used.\\nEx. Give me your beautiful hand, donnez-moi votre belle\\nmain.\\nWhat has become of her bright eyes ses yeux brillanls\\nque sont-ils devenus\\nIt must be borne in mind here, that in French the singular of", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0385.jp2"}, "386": {"fulltext": "104 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nnouns expressing a part of the body is used, instead of the Eng-\\nlish plurals, when each person has but one such part.\\nEx. They all lost their ]ive8, 8 perctirmt torn la vie.\\nThe savages cut off their noses and ears, les sau cages\\nleur coupa-i it le net et les oreilles.\\nExercise.\\nYou pull my hair too severely in combing it; take care, or my head\\nwill ache for several hours. He was wounded lightly in the arm,\\nhut he lost his leg. Go into the chamber ami wash your hands and\\nbee. When the robbers had entered his room, they tied his arms and\\nbandaged b bat he could neither Bee nor hear. She said\\nBhe felt a alight pain in hex IV m 1 1 perhaps she has sprained it. Please\\nJ ears, I cannot endure that dreadful noise. Show me your\\nteeth, the di d I will tell yon if it is necessary to draw\\nthem. I opened my month, bat he insisted that he could not ace my\\nteeth yet. Ih will certainly not i nnish you this time, if you go at\\nonce to him and beg his pardon. i*\u00c2\u00ab not put your feet on the cushion;\\nyour boots are not dean, and you will soil the cover. He raised his\\nto heaven and his unbounded astonishment. In his\\niii -t duel hewas vronnded in the shoulder and his adversary Lost his\\nleft h-^ both combatants lost their lives during the war. He cannot\\ns; .ik. of it. En as Boon as he mentions it, the ars come Into his ty as.\\nII w lO Ti: vs- ffOB.\\nThe personal prODOUD either a noun or a whole\\nsentence r a part of In the first ease it is transla-\\nted by der of the noun which it\\nrepresents; in the latter case, before Hre, by cs. An additional\\nteel to know when e ibstitnted for *7, is to see if the\\nEnglish tf can be supplied by that, in which case it is invariably\\nr\u00c2\u00ab adored bj\\nEx. Try this beer, it is excellent, goblet cettt biere, tile\\ni urct 11, i, U", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0386.jp2"}, "387": {"fulltext": "PKONOUNS. 105\\nTry it again it is better already, essay ez de nouveau\\nc est micux dejit.\\nTell me seriously, is it (that) really so Dites-moi serieu-\\nse??ie?it, est-c e vraiment ainsi\\nIt has been the same each time he has come, pV. ete la\\nmenie chose chaquefois qu il est venu.\\nCe is not used before an adjective followed by de.\\nEx. It is useless to go there now, il (not c est) est inutile d?y\\naller maintenant.\\nNor in the familiar exclamation est-il possible But in all\\ndefinitions of time with etre, ce will be required, as in such\\nexpressions that can always be substituted for it.\\nEx. It was in June when I saw him last, c etait en Jain\\nque je Vai vu la dernier e fois.\\nWas it yesterday that he came to your house Est-ce\\nque ce fu,t hier qu il est venu chez vous?\\nCe may be separated from the verb etre in these cases, when\\nthe two verbs pouvoir and devoir are connected with it.\\nEx. It cannot be he, for I have seen him myself, ce ne peut\\npas Ure lui, car je Vai vu moi-mkme.\\nIt must be a queer thing, ce doit etre une drole de\\nchose.\\nAnother peculiarity in this use of ce for it, is that it is fol-\\nlowed by the plural of the verb, when connected with nouns or\\npersonal pronouns of the third person, whilst with all other\\npersons it remains singular.\\nEx. It is they who ought to be blamed for it, ce sont eux\\nqiCon doit blamer.\\nIt was you who told me so, c etait vous qui me Vavez\\ndit.\\nIs it your children or mine whom he wants to see Sonl-\\nce vos enfants ou les miens qiCil veut voir\\nIt must not be forgotten, in this connection, that it may not", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0387.jp2"}, "388": {"fulltext": "106 ON THE PAKTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nonly be the subject (nominative) but also the direct object\\n(accusative) of the verb, in which case it has to be translated\\nby le.\\nEx. Ride out, your health requires it, sortez a cheval, voire\\nsante le demande.\\nDon t do so, you know the master prohibits it, ne le\\nfailes pas, vous savez que le muitre le defend.\\nDo you think this is it Croytz-vous que ce Vest\\nExercise,\\nWhen I hoard it first. I thought it wns not true, but the papers say\\nthat it is surely so, and I fear that it cannot be doubted any longer. It\\nis difficult to understand their reasons for these measures, but it was so\\nlast J ar. and I [immillll it is so in all great crises. He offered me his\\ncredit in t nut eity. and 1 knew thnt it was not small, but 1 madu no\\nuse of it, because [had money enough. It is we whom they blame,\\nand yet yon know very well that it is they Who are the cause of all\\nthese misfortunes, fa it really you, my dear friend, whom I have not-\\nseen for so many yeara It was not difficult to guess what would lie\\ntheCOD I bis manner of living for it was clear that he\\nspent twice as much as he t4\u00c2\u00ab k in. You are mistaken, Sir. it cannot\\nbe sh.- irhom you saw, for she was at my house at thai hour, and slm\\nfa there now. [1 was balf-pasl ten when 1 saw her, and 1 am sure it\\nwas bin It baa been so in all revolutions: success is the only test i y\\nwhich rights are ded led It was s very cunning trick, and it will not\\neven hereafter, V Ksotly how it was dons Is it\\nhave committed such a blunder, and\\nyou speak of it as If it were a mere trifle i Do yon not know that it\\nwill be a cans i of great loss and much regret to you and your family i\\nOVAI run mi v, wiru mitkii VERBS,\\n.-ire some neuter verbs iii French followed by the\\npreposition the meaning of which is such as not to i\\nwith their object; hence the conjunctive form of the\\npersonal pronouns cannot be used with them, but they require", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0388.jp2"}, "389": {"fulltext": "PBONOUNS. 1 \u00c2\u00bb7\\nthe preposition a to be expressed, and the proper form of the\\n(absolute) personal pronoun to be used after them. These\\nverbs are principally aller a, to go to boire a, to drink to ttre\\na, to belong to penser a, to think of (and other verbs express-\\ning thoughts, like mediter a, etc.) recourir a, to have recourse\\nto, and viser a, to aim at.\\nEx. I went to him and told him what I wanted, fallai a\\nlui etje lui dis ce quHl me fullait.\\nThink of me when you are in Venice, pensez a moi\\nquand vous serez a Venise.\\nThis belongs to him, for he has bought it, c est a lui,\\ncar il Va achete.\\nREFLEXIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nThe conjunctive reflexive pronoun of the French is se, which\\nrepresents all English forms of the third person, himself, herself,\\nitself, themselves and one s self, without translating the word\\nself, which is only used when there is an emphasis resting on it.\\nEx. She deceives herself if she thinks so, elle se trompe, si\\ndie le pense.\\nThey love themselves too well and others too little, Us\\nRaiment trop et les autres trop peu.\\nHe has killed himself in a moment of rage, il s est tue\\ndans un moment de rage.\\nSe is the only pronoun which can be used to represent the\\nnominative on, in the oblique cases.\\nEx. On se trouve en danger quand on y pense le moins, we\\nfind ourselves in danger, when we least think of it.\\nIt has already been stated in the First Part of this Grammar that\\nthis conjunctive pronoun se is used with all pronominal verbs in\\nFrench alike, but that it is differently translated into English\\naccording to the special nature of these verbs, viz. in reflexivo\\nverbs by one s self, in reciprocal verbs by each other, and in pro-\\nnominal verbs proper not at all.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0389.jp2"}, "390": {"fulltext": "108 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. On peut Hre savant et se t romper neanmotns, one may-\\nbe learned and yet be mistaken.\\nlis allaient se titer tout de bon, they were about to kill each\\nother in good earnest.\\nII faitdra se lever de bonne heure domain, we will have to rise\\nearly to-morrow.\\nII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ABSOLUTE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\nPersonal pronouns are called absolute, when they have no\\nconnection with the verb, but stand either entirely alone or are\\ndependent on a preposition.\\nEx. Who is there I It is T, who come to sec you, gut est\\nl,i f (Teat 1 vous voir.\\nBe, who had been my friend, abandoned mo, fat, qui\\nii ami, m aband*\\n(in with them, they will show you the way, allez avee\\nmx, \\\\U voni vous mtrer la r ite.\\nIn these examples, and he arc used without connection\\nwith any verb, and them depends on the preposition with.\\nThe forms of the absolute personal pronouns arc\\nl-t person, singular mot, I or me.\\n2d tot, thou or thee.\\nfat, he i- him.\\nshe or her.\\n1st person, plural m M, we or us.\\n2d M you.\\nor them.\\nth. j in.) or thru).\\nAlthough tl nsed in connection\\nwith a verb, they may be added to th. conjunctive form\\nl-t. In order to express i m\\\\\\nEx. I, I saw it. and I assure you it Is bo, moi,je Vai m it je", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0390.jp2"}, "391": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 109\\nI do not see hi m, whom I wished most to see, je ne le\\nvols pus lui, que je desirais voir le plus.\\n2. Tii order to express distinction between several persons.\\nEx. He was here, but she was absent, lui, il fat ici mais\\nelle, ellefut absente.\\nI have seen him and her, but they have forgotten me,je\\nles ai vus, lui et elle, mais Us m ont oublie.\\n3. In order to couple a pronoun with a noun, both being\\nsubject or object of the same verb.\\nEx. I know them and their neighbor, je les connais, eux et\\nleur voisin.\\nShe and her brother live together, elle et son frere\\nUs demeurent ensemble.\\nYou and I who were there know it well, vous et moi qui\\netions la, nous le savons Men.\\nIt will be seen from these examples, that whenever pronouns\\nare the subject or object of a verb, the conjunctive form must be\\nused in the first place and can never be omitted and the\\nabsolute form is only superadded afterwards for such specific\\npurposes as have been mentioned.\\nEx. nous invita vous et moi, he invited (us), you and me.\\nJe vous parlai a vous et a elle, I spoke (to you), to you\\nand to her.\\nNous les recevrons lui et sa femme, we will receive\\n(them), him and his wife.\\nExercise.\\nx, whose reputation he tries to ruin, I have never done him any-\\nthing but good services. You and I are content with our fate, hut 1\\nbelieve that is a rare exception. Speak for me, if you can find an\\nopportuni ty, and I will speak for you whenever I can. He went away\\nwith them and he came back with them, but he did not think of them\\nafter they had parted. These ladies and I were together at the theatre\\nlast night they like the opera, but I, I was tired and nearly fell asleep.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0391.jp2"}, "392": {"fulltext": "110 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nYou an 1 jour brother will see that I was right when I told you that\\nyou ventured too much. I know him and her, for I have known their\\nwhole family since I have been in this country he is a nice fellow, but\\n6he is a shrew. We had invited her and her sisters, but only she an I\\none of her brothers came, the others were sick. You may tall him\\nthis secret to-morrow, but you cannot tell her any thing of it until the\\naffair is over. Did she not receive you and her very well, when she\\ndiscovered who you were V Yes, she was very kind to me, and so were\\nher parents, and I thanked both her and them.\\nThe absolute forms of the personal pronouns are, moreover,\\nused whenever they are followed by a relative pronoun, because\\nthe latter separates the personal pronoun from its verb, and\\npermits it thus no longer to be conjunctive.\\nEx. ifoi, qui suit snu fi/s.jr U declare coupuble, I, who am\\nhis son, 1 declare him guilty.\\nQucstcc que c ett In i ii nous traite si indianement f\\nWho i- be, who treats us so badly\\nJBuz qui nut net/ calculi, devraienl payer, they who\\nhave calculated wrong ought to pay.\\nThe absolute forms are, also, used whenever the pronoun is\\nseparated from tin- rerb bj a noun r an adjective, because\\nthen also to be trulj conjunctive.\\nI..v I mourut, 1 alone saw him as\\nbe died.\\nJ. in, L him., pouvait-il a oublier ri triatemenl} lie, the\\nhero, Badly I\\nforms are, finally, placed by ellip is Ixfore the\\ninfinitivi at emphasis i the\\nexpression.\\nEx. J/w, trahir U tmiet 1 (should) betray\\nthe hot of 1 1 1 li\\nLnt, fain um t il lacketi ti n malt IT:\\n(could) act ao meanly and conduct himself SO bally", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0392.jp2"}, "393": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 11 L\\nEXER(\\nShe who takes such good care of lier health when she is well, is\\nvery imprudent when she is the least indisposed. I know him and\\nher, both have been my. friends for many years he is almost a brother\\n*o me, and she will be my wife next week. They should have forgot-\\nten so far all that we have done for them, and repay us with such\\ningratitude I cannot and will not believe it, for they have ever been\\nmy best friends. He who is your brother would not lend you this\\nsmall sum, and I whom you have hardly known am willing to give\\nyou all you may want. It is she who is always complaining of her\\nhealth and not he, for he is never sick and both he and she will live\\nyet many years. Yes, I shall punish him and no one else, for he alone\\nis guilty and the others who were caught with him,were not his\\naccomplices but his victims. He was on horseback and I was on foot,\\nnevertheless I was first at the rendezvous, and when the seconds came\\nwe saw that it was they who had given him false directions.\\nTHE PRONOUN SOI.\\nSoi is the absolute form of the reflexive pronoun, which, from\\nthe nature of its meaning, can never occur by itself, but is only-\\nused in connection with prepositions or the. conjunction que,\\nwhere it has, of course, all the various meanings that have been\\nmentioned in the explanation of the conjunctive form se.\\nEx. On pense tovjours plus a soi qu a autrui, we always\\nthink more of ourselves than of others.\\nII est facile d etre riche quand on n a que soi, it is easy\\nto be rich when one has only one s self.\\nHeureux qui vit chez soi Happy he who has a home 1\\nGenerally the use of soi is avoided, except after on, and lui or\\nelle are used instead still, in cases in which an ambiguity\\nmight arise, soi must be employed to mark the person of the\\nsubject in contradistinction to that of a third person spoken of.\\nEx. II ne parle que de soi, or better, que de lui-mime, ho\\nonly speaks of himself.\\nISavare qui a un fils prodigue rCamasse ni pour soi m", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0393.jp2"}, "394": {"fulltext": "113 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\npour lui. The miser who has a prodigal son, hoards\\nneither for himself nor for hiin.\\nWhen aoi is joined to meme, it loses its pronominal character\\nand may be used like a noun.\\nEx. Un lei ami est tin autre soi-mdmc. Such .a friend is\\nanother self [alter ego.)\\nOu man amour me trumpe ou Zaire aujourJltui pour\\nVelever a sot, descendrait jusqu a lui. If my passion\\ndoes not deceive me, Zaire would now, in order to\\nraise him up to herself, lower herself to him.\\nSoi is also very generally used in reference to lifeLss objects.\\nEx. J. limablt n sot, virtue is attractive ,n itself.\\nLa/ranchim est bonne de soi, mats elle a ses \u00c2\u00bbrcc\u00c2\u00ab, frank-\\n3C is goou in itself, but it may ^o too lai\\nWhen one speake neighbor, hi rinst himself.\\nthink i muchol and rely too much mi them*\\nhence tiny are n i red himself\\nwith disgrace, and ashamed when he thinks of himself.\\nHe n he can do without the\\nIn order to nauBt e in\\nwith God, with our n ighb m and w These things uro\\nimportance.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2tain meanness, which it is nol\\n.il from un observant eye. This young man. v-hile doing\\nthe \u00c2\u00abill of his lather, works tot himself.\\nIt will be reooUeeted that thi and Un take\\nthe pit\\nkey should I\\ntruth.\\nIti\\nhare said too much already.\\nme mud\\nas you", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0394.jp2"}, "395": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 113\\nMoi, however, is placed after y, contrary to general rules, fur\\nthe sake of euphony.\\nEx. Tu vas d I opera, menes-y-moi, you are going to the opera,\\ntake me with you.\\nIn familiar language moi is sometimes added to the imperative,\\nas a mere expletive, to give, as it were, greater force to tha\\nexpression\\nEx. Faites-moi taire cesgens-ld! Make those people keep silence\\nthere\\nFrappez-le moi un peu sur le dos, strike him a little on the\\nback.\\nIT.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.\\nPossessive Pronouns have their name from the fact that they\\ngenerally qualify nouns by means of their relation to the owner\\nor possessor. It will be seen, however, that in French this\\noriginal purpose is by no means accomplished by the use ot\\npossessive pronouns, except in a few limited cases.\\nThese pronouns are, like all others, divided into conjunctive,\\nor such as are invariably used in close connection with a noun,\\nand absolute, or such as stand instead of a noun and are conse-\\nquently always accompanied by an article.\\nThe elementary rules on the use of both classes have already\\nbeen given in the First Part of this Grammar. It will be borne\\nin mind that the conjunctive agree with the noun which they\\nqualify, while the absolute agree with the noun which they\\nrepresent.\\nEx. Gette homme parla a sa mere et a la mienne, this man\\nspoke to his mother and to mine.\\nC etait sa fille et point la votre, this was his daughter and\\nnot yours.\\nS il prend ma bague, je prendrai la sienne, if he takes my\\nring, I ll take his.\\nPossession is in French expressed, not by means of the pos-\\nsessive pronouns as in English, but by meuns of the verb etre,", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0395.jp2"}, "396": {"fulltext": "114 ON THE PARIS OF A SENTENCE.\\nin the signification of, to belong, followed by a and the absolute\\nform of the personal pronoun.\\nEx. This house is mine, but it will be yours, cette maison est a\\nmoi, mais elle sera a vous.\\nWhose watch was it It was hers. Cette montre a qui\\nfut-elle? Elle etait a elle.\\nThe only exception to this rule applies to the cases in which\\npossessive pronouns are used, not to express possession itself,\\nbut rather distinction between two objects by means of pos-\\nsession.\\nEx. N t pitnes pus ce chapeau, c est le mien, do not take that\\nhat, that is mine.\\nLagvelle a-t-il perdue, la vdtre ou la leur Which has\\nhe lost, yours 01 theirs I\\nE!xxb\\nThis Is my brother s sentiment and mini 1 I hope yours is not dif-\\nferent from oura I have returned you your books, what have you\\nThe booh which 1 lost yesterday was not mine\\nl.ui my wife s; sip loss bitterly. Here are all the jewels\\nyou have ever given nn-: now Bay, which are to be yours and which\\nmine? Your servants and ours are frequently quarrelling j we shall\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2n all, or there will l\u00c2\u00bb no peace for you or me, This\\nif you wish to see mine you musl go to the stable,\\nvi it!i y, ii. but I Bhould like to Bee youra, they aro\\nfamous in the whole town. Whose cottage is this My dear friendi\\nmine, bul UMnorrow it may be yours, for I mean to leave\\nit to you uft. r my death. Why, my friend, do uol speak so, tor your\\nlife may be longer than mine, She Bhall noi have then bracelets; L\\nhex mine, but I \u00c2\u00abiil never give her tl\\nIn English, ronouna may be placed, by moans of\\nthe prep in which thtfy qualify, and the\\nlatter can, in ompanied by an indefinite article\\nor demonstrative pronoun, as in A friend of mine, ur These", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0396.jp2"}, "397": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 115\\nbooks of his. Both modes of expression are not known to the\\nFrench, and when they have to be translated, a choice must be\\nmade between the demonstrative and the possessive pronouns,\\nas only one can be used. The less important will be omitted,\\nand we will say either These books, or His books. For A\\nfriend of mine, we say, One of my friends.\\nEx. Un de mes amis, a friend of mine.\\nCes livres or vos livres, those books of yours.\\nTake these pictures of mine and sell them at auction,\\nprenez ces tableaux et vendez-les a Vencan.\\nWas that a friend of yours Est-ce que c etait un de vos\\namis\\nThe possessive pronouns its and theirs, when referring to life-\\nless objects, are not translated by le sien, etc., but by en, unless\\nthe objects are personified by having some quality or action\\napplied to them.\\nEx. Voyez cet arbre les fruits en sont excellents, look at this\\ntree its fruit is excellent.\\nEst-ce que man cheval a deja mange sonavoine Has my\\nhor^e eaten its oats already\\nThe possessive pronouns are not used before nouns followed\\nby a relative pronoun, but are exchanged, in that case, for the\\ndefinite article.\\nEx. J ai recu la (not votre) lettre que vous m avez ecrite, I\\nhave received your letter which you have written me.\\nTenez les (not vos) promesses que vous m avez faites, keep\\nyour promises which you have made me.\\nLe mien, le tien, and occasionally le sici, are used to express\\nray, thy, his or her property, and treated as nouns.\\nEx. Le mien et le tien, sont la source de toutes les querelles,\\nwhat is mine and what is thine, this is the source of\\nall troubles.\\nII a mange tout le sien, he has spent all his property.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0397.jp2"}, "398": {"fulltext": "116 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nLes miens, les vdtres and all the plurals are used to express\\ntuy parents, friends, adherents, etc., and treated as nouns.\\nEx. Les miens ne ni ont pas secouru dans ce danger, my friends\\nhave not stood by me in this danger.\\nII faut amener Mmc. voire epouse et tous les vdtres, you\\nmust bring your wife and all your family.\\nExercise.\\nA clerk of his has defrauded him largely and brought about his\\nfailure by his dishonesty. Was this man ever a friend of yours, or did\\nhe only pretend to be acquainted withyou? I am surprised at your\\na man like him never could be a friend of mine. These\\nand very fast, but they are not\\nsound, they will not live long, especially if you do not change that\\ngroom of yours, who treats them badly. A neighbor of yours heard\\nthe noise the b 8 in breaking the kitchen window, and\\nthis aid of his, the whole\\ni, stripped of every thing valuable and we would\\nhave lost all our property. When this news read es our country, what\\nwill ur ml it Yiui and yours will alwa\\nat my bouse, and 1 -had ever l delighted to e you there.\\nm\u00e2\u0080\u0094 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOl\\niy been explained in the Firsl Part of ibis Gram\\nmar that tbe demonstrative pr\u00c2\u00bb i are divided into two\\nonnected with\\na noan r the verb itre, and absolute, or such as stand alone\\nand represent theme j. The former were represented\\nlatti r by compounds of a with\\netc. It\\nii the two I\\nbis and That, bad t l\\nfrom id) and Ut t either to the\\nor to tlio", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0398.jp2"}, "399": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 117\\nllouns preceded by these pronouns, as cet homme-ci, this man,\\nand cet homme-la, that man.\\nThe conjunctive forms agree, of course, with the noun which\\nthey qualify, the absolute with that which they represent.\\nEx. Cet homme et cette femme ne sont pas maries, this man\\nand this woman are not married.\\nCette maison et celle que vons m avez vendue, this house\\nand that which you have sold me.\\nMes filles et cellesde noire voisin, my daughters and those\\nof our neighbors.\\nCe is conjunctive to the verb Ure only, although in familiar\\nconversation a few other verbs occur with it, as ce me semble, it\\nseems to me. It has the peculiarity of leaving the verb in the\\nsingular, even when referring to a plural, unless the latter\\nshould be a pronoun of the third person plural, or a word pre-\\nceded by a preposition. In these two cases the verb is used in\\nthe plural.\\nEx. Ce sera nous tons qui lui en seront redevables, we all of\\nus will be obliged to him for it.\\nCest vous qui etes cherts, it is you who are beloved.\\nCe sont eux qui ont ordonne tout, it is they who havo\\narranged all.\\nQuoi c est a ces dieux que vous sacrifiez What is it\\nthese gods you worship\\nWhenever ce and etre are followed by a noun or pronoun\\npreceded by a preposition, they must be connected by que with\\nthe following verb.\\nEx. Cest a vous que je parle, it is to you I speak.\\nCe it est pas de cela qriiliagit aujourdhui, that is not the\\nquestion to-day.\\nWhen ce is followed by a relative pronoun, ce must be\\nrepeated before the next verb, of which it forms the subject.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0399.jp2"}, "400": {"fulltext": "118 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Ce que je crains c est d etre surpris, what I fear is to be\\ntaken in.\\nCe que faime le mieux Jest de vous voir ici, what I like\\nbest, is to see you here.\\nCe must be supplied in French before etre, when the subject\\nof the latter verb is the preceding part of the sentence.\\nEx. Le mieux dans ces cas Jest de se taire, the best in such\\ncases is to be quiet.\\nVtvre lout s ul c est trop triste, to live quite alone is too Bad.\\nAlthough many classic authors omit the ce when etre is fol-\\nlowed by the nominative, as\\nEx. Venfer dt ift mmes est Li vieillesse, old age is the hell of\\nwomen.\\nExBROISX.\\ns to me that this wine is not s good as that in Hie cask.\\nThai la not possible, for this is much older and more costly, and the\\nother is a wine of very little value. It Is the Dumber of people and\\nthe abundance of food which make the true strength and the true\\nwealth of a country. It Is indifferent works that one ought to\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2t would be an act of injustice to shorten a work of great\\nmerit It la they who have done all this, and now they have th\\nImpudent we who are responsible fox the result, It\\nis aeitherihe arts n r the handicrafts that can degrade man: it is\\nthat .-.in do that. The trui- praise r poet hi to retain his\\ni to bear them recited In the streets The only way t m-\\n]m-i men to s; .:ik weD f n is t- act welL n hare done great\\nthings but -..nt th truth, It la hardly by yon that they have bet n\\naccomplished. What] have told you la the simple truth you may\\nbehave it or n t, as yon choose. What we endure with hast patience,\\nare calumnies and treachi I\\nThe afcaofai ive nol only the genera]\\nmeaning of English demonstrative pronouns, but are used,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0400.jp2"}, "401": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 1 i 9\\nbesides, to render various other expressions, of which the follow-\\ning are the most important\\nThey represent the one, when followed by a relative pronoun.\\nEx. The one for whom I work, is a better master, celui pour\\nqui je travaille, moi, est un meilleur mattre.\\nThis is not the one whom I love best, ce n est pas celle\\nque faime le mieux.\\nThey represent, also, the English personal pronoun, when it\\nis employed in a general sense and followed by a relative pronoun.\\nEx. He who weeps will be consoled, celui qui pleure sera\\nconsole.\\nHe who will not labor must suffer, ceux qui ne veulent\\npas travailler doivent souffrir.\\nBut when the personal pronoun refers to an individual, it ia\\nliterally translated.\\nEx. He, who was rich, has lost every thing, lui, qui etait riche\\na perdu tout.\\nThey represent, also, the English one, followed by a relative\\npronoun.\\nEx. I do not like one who tells stories, je rfo.ime pas ceux qui\\nfont des contes.\\nOne who knows so well ought not to say that, celui qui\\nle sait si bien ne devrait pas le dire.\\nThey represent, finally, the English which, when it has the\\nsignification of whichever.\\nEx. Take which of these papers you prefer, prenez celui de ces\\njournaux que vous preferez.\\nCelui, etc., must be supplied in French when in English the\\nnominative of a possessive case is omitted idiomatically.\\nEx. These horses and my father s (horses) are alike, ces che-\\nvaux et ceux de mon pere sont pareils.\\nI will send you yours and your wife s, je vous enverrai les\\nvdtres et ceux de votre femrne", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0401.jp2"}, "402": {"fulltext": "120 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nHe who wishes to be happy in this world is not always so, because\\nwe rarely know what makes our true happiness. You can read which\\nof these books you choose, only put them back again in their places\\nin the library. He who says so is either mistaken or he says delib-\\nerately what is not true you may take your choice. There is an old\\nproverb in various languages which says He to whom fortune pipes,\\ndances well. Will you please show me your picture, I mean the one\\nwhich you bought a year ago, when you were in Italy. I cannot show\\nyou that, because it is in the hands of an artist, but I can show you\\nthe one I brought from Italy when I was there before. He who wants\\nto reap where he lias not sowed, is a dishonest man. They who talk\\nwill be punished, and the one who is first discovered will be punished\\nvery severely. Do you think yon ever could love one who has done\\nsuch on act Do you reooQecl the young lady I wanted to introduce\\nthe one with the auburn hair and tin majestic figure? Well\\n1 am sorry for it, but sin- has married ami Id our city.\\nceluirlh and tin- other absolute forms connecte\\nwith and A lose by that combination their general characto\\nand are used to point out more individually and directly, those\\nwith ci representing tin- English this one, those with In the\\nEnglish thai one, and kindred expressions.\\nKx. lui give me this one\\nand t i k- thai\\nthese\\nare worth nothing.\\n;t and its various forms represent the English the latter,\\nb^ being nearer the momei j, and cefo\u00c2\u00bb-/ etc., the\\nformer, as being n*\\nEx. D inrn, lf i, of\\nth. former i* old, the hitter unknown.\\npronoun in their cotnper\\nonly. The\\nlatter i in familiar oom", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0402.jp2"}, "403": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 121\\nEx. Ccci me plait, et je vous dis cela tout franckement, I like\\nthat, and I tell you that quite openly.\\nBonjour, Monsieur, comment ca va-t-il Good-morning,\\nSir how are you\\nHence also the first words of the revolutionary song, Ca ira, etc.\\nIn very familiar conversation cela occasionally answers to repre-\\nsent persons only, but this rare use of cela is not to be imitated.\\nThus, upon seeing children at play, one may say\\nCela at heureux, cela ne fait quejouer, are they happy, they\\nhave nothing to do but to play\\nCela is used for the English it, when that pronoun repre-\\nsents not a noun, but a whole sentence, and is not the nomina-\\ntive of the verb to be (in which case it would be translated by\\nce simply.)\\nEx. iV y allez pas, puisque cela lui deplairait fort, do not\\ngo there, since it would displease him much.\\nCela me plait qiCil V a fait lui-mSme, it pleases me that\\nhe has done it himself.\\nThe English demonstrative pronouns this and that, where\\nfollowed by the verb to be, are frequently expressed in French,\\nby the two words void and voila, which thus serve, in a manner,\\nas demonstrative pronouns. They consist of the imperative of\\nthe verb voir, vois, see or behold, and the words id and la.\\nHence they can only be used for objects virtually in sight, and\\nare not admissible in interrogative sentences. Their verbal origin\\nproduces, moreover, the peculiar effect, that whilst nouns, which\\nare the object, are placed after them, pronouns under the same\\ncircumstances are placed before them.\\nEx. Void rues enfants, ou sont les votres? Here or these are\\nmy children, where are yours\\nVoila mon ami qui arrive enfin, there is my friend\\ncoming at last.\\nSonl-ce la vos enfants ou les miens Are those your\\nchildren or mine\\nLes voici,je Pavais bien dit quails ne nous manqueraient", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0403.jp2"}, "404": {"fulltext": "122 ON THE PA11TS OF A SENTENCE.\\npas There they are had I not said that they would\\nnot disappoint us\\nVoid and voila may be followed by an adjective or an adverb.\\nEx. Nous voila sauves pour cette fois, now we are safe for\\nthis time.\\nLes voila a Vendroil meme ou nous les attemlions, there\\nthey are, at the very spot where we expected them.\\nBut they cannot, as in English, be followed by a participle\\npresent, which must be rendered in French by qui and the\\nproper tense of the verb.\\nEx. Li voila qui vicnt a noire rencontre, there she is, coming\\nto meet us.\\nWhen the two words are followed by an expression of quan-\\ntity, they require to l\u00c2\u00bb; used before them.\\nEx. En voilh tin, ri j m m trompt pas, there is one of\\nthem, if I am nut mistaken.\\nThere is virtually n difference of meaning between void and\\nPOttt, except that voila refers to what has been mentioned\\no what ia coming after.\\nEx. Vo a t il j \u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0096\u00a0_ 101, that\\nis what he proposed, and this IS what 1 want.\\nIn familiar style voilh ly used interrogatively.\\nEx. En voila-t-tl tout t Is that all\\ni-i:.\\nA faithful magistrate and a brave officer are equally worthy of\\ni the (tanner makes war span enemies al home, the latter apoa\\nn.-nm-s abroad. This machine is BBOVed by aprillga end is very\\nImperfeet, th and is quite new. When be\\nearns Into the r N.in he exclaimed What do I bos ia tbii mj son, oc\\ndo my eyea deceive me I u- k the boy by the ban I, and leading him\\nlather, I said: Tarn la your s..n, whom you though! loaf ;and\\nthia is your daughter, whom yon have aererseen. These appl\\notter tlian inv neighbor s; where mv those yen ha i this\\naeotniagl Ho la twice great, who having graal na eeaka", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0404.jp2"}, "405": {"fulltext": "PKONOUNS. 123-\\nof tliem, but leaves that to others. I do not say that, but I assure you.\\nthat I will not permit you to repeat it. That is easy enough, but you\\nought to try to work better than any of your rivals, and then you\\nwould succeed beyond. doubt. How do you do, Madam? Thank you,\\nSir, I am well, but my poor daughter has been quite sick, and that\\ntroubles me sorely. There she is, and I said she woidd never come\\nIV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 RELATIVE PEONOUNS.\\nRelative Pronouns have their name from the fact that tbey\\nrelate or refer to some preceding noun or pronoun, which is\\ncalled their antecedent.\\nEx. II y a lien des personnes qui le savent, there are a great\\nmany persons who know it.\\nCe sont eux que nous blamons seuls, it is they alone\\nwhom we blame.\\nThe fundamental rule applying to the construction of all\\nrelative sentences is this\\nThere must be in French expressed the three parts of such a\\nsentence the antecedent, the relative pronoun, and its verb.\\nThese three parts must follow in the order mentioned. In\\nthe sentence, Voila Vhomme dont je park, there is the man I\\nam speaking of, Vhomme is the antecedent, dont the relative\\npronoun, and je park its verb. Thus the three parts are present,\\nand they follow each other in the prescribed order.\\nIn English, on the contrary, the three parts are not necessa-\\nrily required, one or the other being frequently omitted nor is\\nthe order in which they have to stand in French, by any means\\nalways observed. Hence arise the following different construc-\\ntions.\\n1. In English the antecedent may be omitted. Then it has\\nto be supplied in French by the proper form of the demonstra-\\ntive pronoun ce, etc., for things, celui, etc, for persons.\\nEx. What pleases me most is her modesty, ce (supplied) qui\\nme plait le mieux, Jest sa modestie.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0405.jp2"}, "406": {"fulltext": "124 OX THE FARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nI know what you want to say,/e sais re (supplied) que\\nVOUS voulez dire.\\nHere are all who will be present, voilli tous ceux (sup-\\nplied) qui seront presents.\\n2. In English the relative pronoun may be omitted. It has\\nto be supplied in French.\\nEx. Where is the book she had in her hand? Oil est U- line\\n(supplied) die tenait V la main\\nThese are the men you wanted to see, voilk lei homntes\\nque (supplied) vous vouliez voir.\\n8. In English the preposition governing the relative pronoun\\nmay be placed at the end of the sentence. In French it must\\nbe placed before the pronoun.\\nEx. Can yon guess what I am thinking of? Pouvcz-vous\\n(I, r j, us,\\nWho was the man you were Bpeaking m in the street I\\nt /it rhomtn i i mi\\ni. In English the relative pronoun may be separated from\\nthe antecedent by intervening words. In French the order of\\nwords _ them into immediate\\nsion.\\nEx. A vessel baa arrived which bronght me a letter, fifot\\nU irrivt un vaUttoM\\ni/ ll l In\\nA friend told me so, who had seen it himself, j\u00c2\u00a7\\nami qui I 1 avail t sesproprea /nt.r.\\nii the verb m.i\\\\ be separated from the relative\\npi. an tig words. In French it must he\\nin its proper place, immediate]) after the relative pronoun,\\nE Thia is il tli pri \u00c2\u00bbl al Brussels has told me, voila re\\nn a Jit U lit i.\\nw in ii yonr charming sister\\nuin. .-jLur ckarmanU,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0406.jp2"}, "407": {"fulltext": "PBOKOUNS. 125\\nThe only exception to this general rule is furnished by dont,\\nwhich is followed by its nominative, instead of by its verb,\\nalthough, when the following noun is in any other case, the\\nrule again applies.\\nEx. You whose kindness has been so great, vous dont les\\nbonles ont ete si grandes.\\nBut, You whose kindness I feel so deeply, vous dont je\\nsens tant les bonles.\\nI paid for the book whose cover I spoilt, fai payi le livre\\ndontfai gate la couverture.\\nIt must not be forgotten that qui, etc., cannot be used whenever\\nthe relative pronoun is subject to a preposition, but that in all\\nsuch cases lequel, etc., must be substituted.\\nEx. The monarch in whose States we were, le monarque dans\\nles etats duquel nous etions.\\nThe crime for which he is condemned, le crime pozir\\nlequel il a ete condamne.\\nExercise.\\nIf you cannot do it, the persons who are my true friends will obtain\\nfor me all the money I want, for my credit is what I rely on in this\\ncrisis. I know what would be the best medicine for you fresh air\\nand an abundance of exercise they are all I would prescribe for you.\\nI cannot remember against whom he spoke, but it was the best speech\\nI ever heard in my life. These men whose abominable crime has\\nbeen so severety punished, will not be allowed to re-enter society\\nwhich is not severity but simple j ustice. When he returned to this\\ncountry he went to see the mayor of the fortress from which he had\\nescaped, and spoke to all who had known him during his captivity.\\nThis has brought us at last a peace, the sweetness of which surpasses\\nall other pleasures, and for which we cannot be too grateful. You\\nwhose brilliant talents we all acknowledge, ought not, on that account,\\ncease to make the greatest efforts. Were you in the ship the main-\\nmast of which was struck by lightning and in which so many pas-\\nsengers were killed", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0407.jp2"}, "408": {"fulltext": "126 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nWhat is occasionally used in English before nouns, with\\ntl*e doable power of an adjective and a pronoun, as in the\\nphrase What money he had. In French it has to be rendered\\nas if it meant All the money.\\nEx. What clothes they had left him were wet, tons Its vile-\\nmenis qiCon lux avail lainsis, etaient mouilles.\\nGive him what money he may want, donnez-lui tout\\nV argent qu il luifaudra.\\nas relative pronoun, can be used only as indirect\\nobject, consequently it will be always accompanied by a prepo-\\nsition.\\nEx. La chose a ravare pense Ic mains, the thing of which\\nsera think least\\nI rnns parler, this is what I\\nwanted to -peak t. yon about\\nU ait jilnx t rrit, there is nothing\\nabonf which more baa been ritten.\\nis not need, bat its place is supplied\\nI\\nDit a ni- toil Vautt ur, there is nothing of\\nGo I is ii .i tin- author.\\nised relatively, but withoul nn antecedent, has the\\nand kindred\\ngive me something to writo\\nabout\\nhe is rich, In- has\\nrea.\u00c2\u00ab n lob\\nThe adv. tIi (from the Latin literally meaning, where,\\nitivc pronouns preceded bj a\\npreposition, but it- use i- united t definitions of time and\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2t la\\nmoment in which is a step towards death,\\n1 i oH nuquit Afvliert, this is the hou\\nwhich Kloliera was born.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0408.jp2"}, "409": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 127\\nOil admits of the two prepositions de and par.\\nEx. Le per d d oii vous ni uvez sauve fat terrible, the danger\\nfrom which you have rescued me was a terrible one.\\nLes mot/ens par oil cet intrigant est arrive a la fortune,\\nthe means by which this intriguer has been so forlunate.\\nExercise.\\nThe city in which he arrived was full of sympathizing friends, and\\nthe dangers through which he had passed endeared them to him\\nstill more. He was received with shouts, and the house in which he\\ntook his lodgings was surrounded from morning till night by en-\\nthusiastic crowds. Happy is he who, content with his humble fate,\\nlives in the obscure condition in which Heaven has concealed hini!\\nHe woidd not tell us the country from which he came, and although\\nwe were sure enough that he was a foreigner, we could not tell where\\nhe was born. Tell me what you are thinking of and I will tell you\\nwhat was in my thoughts. Henry IV., to whose kindness of heart so\\nmuch praise has been given, was in reality a very selfish man. The\\ndiseases of the soul are the most dangerous we ought to work at\\ncuring them still, this is what we rarely think of. We have always\\nsomething to amuse ourselves with and when that fails us, we go out\\ninto the streets, and there is no lack of oddities there. There is\\nnothing of which we know less than the true state of our neighbor s\\nheart. Time would fail us to tell you all the dangers through which\\nwe have passed and all the difficulties from which Providence has\\nrescued us during our last journey.\\nV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ABSOLUTE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.\\nThe same pronouns serve in English as relative and as interro-\\ngative pronouns, the only difference being that in the former\\ncapacity they have an antecedent to which they relate, while\\nin the latter they arc used without an antecedent, so that they\\nare called interrogative, when they are used in questions.\\nIn French the relative and the absolute pronouns resemble\\neach other, but there are certain striking differences in the use", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0409.jp2"}, "410": {"fulltext": "12?, ON THE PARTS OF A SEXTEXCE.\\nof both classes, which have been already stated in the First\\nPart of this Grammar. Thus qui, as an absolute pronoun, is\\naccusative as well as nominative, when referring to persons, and\\ncan never be used except as a relative pronoun. These\\nand similar points of importance must here be recalled.\\nQui, as an absolute pronoun, contains its antecedent in the\\nshape of a personal pronoun, which must be supplied in English.\\nEx. Qui veut purler de lout, souvent park an hazard, he who\\nwants to speak of every thing, often speaks at hap-\\nhazard.\\nLachi qui veut mourir, courogeux qui pad vivre, a coward\\nwho l?aotS t die, brave is he who can live on.\\nu an interrogative pronoun, may be subject or object\\nof the sentence, and thus answers lor the English who? or\\nwhom\\nEx. Q ti mrit eompatir aux mauz qu on a souffertsf Who can-\\nnot feel for the Bufferings which be has endured\\ni^i i- ehoiti pour compaction dt voyagef Whom\\nhave yon chosen for your travelling companion\\nrepeated, has in proverbial ami rimiliar expressions the\\nmanning ol hen.\\nurait qui riait, matt tout itaient emut, some went\\nand others laughed, but nil win- moved,\\nemployed absolutely, is also never used as the\\nnominative of a verb, for which is substituted, for the sake of\\nEx. w li.it made you come so late I Qu ett-ct qui vout afaii\\nWhat has pleased you besl (jiCst-,-, qui vout a plu le\\nin i\\nQue is need vti .y M accusative of a verb, for the EnglLj\\nwhat", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0410.jp2"}, "411": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 129\\nEx. Que voulut-il dire, en parlant si brusquement What did\\nhe mean by speaking so rudely\\nQue voulez-vous que je fasse pour lui What do you\\nwant me to do for him\\nQuoi, from the Latin quod, may be an absolute and an inter-\\nrogative pronoun. In the former capacity it is used either\\nalone or with a preposition.\\nEx. Elle chante mais je ne saurais vous dire quoi, she is sing-\\ning, but I cannot tell you what.\\nA quoi vous attendez-vous defdcheux? What unpleasant\\nevent do you expect\\nQuoi, followed by a comparative, has the meaning of What\\nis?\\nEx. Quoi de jilus conusant que de les voir jouer? What is\\nmore amusing than to see them play?\\nJe ne sais quoi is often used in French for the words A cer-\\ntain something.\\nEx. II y a dans cette affaire je ne sais quoi que je n entends pas,\\nthere is something in this matter which I do not un-\\nderstand.\\nExercise.\\nTo whom were you speaking when I saw you this morning I\\ncan tell you who it was, but I cannot tell you what we were speaking\\nof, for that was my friend s secret. He has always something mys-\\nterious about him, which I do not like, but this time it was an\\nimportant secret which he confided to me. What do you want and\\nwhat can I do for you Nothing, Sir, I thank you, for he who wishes\\nto be independent must learn to help himself. When the news of our\\ndelivery arrived, some cried out and others were silent, but the cause\\nof this different behavior was the same in all. What belongs to you\\nhere 1 Show it to me and I will send it to your house with \\\\vha,t\\nbelongs to your sister. Will that glass contain what is in this phial,\\nor must I send for a larger one Tell me whom you frequent and i", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0411.jp2"}, "412": {"fulltext": "130 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nwill tell who you are. Whom did you do that for I worked for\\ninyself, which is the true policy of a man who wants to make his\\nfortune.\\nLequel and its various forms can be used as interrogative\\npronouns only in the signification of Which of several I\\nEx. Lwjui lie de ces dt ux so u rs prifert --cons Which of these\\ntwo sisters do you like best\\nDe tous ces livres, lesquels sont les vttrest Among all\\nthese books, which are yours?\\nQnd and its forma have the same meaning when used in\\nreference to a pr mn; but when used in connection with a\\nnoun, they mean What kind of!\\nEx. Qurl est U vdtrt f Je voudrai voir. Which is yours?\\nI should like to Bee it.\\nQuel est eel hommet II n a pas Fair eomme il font.\\nWhat kind of a man is he? He does not look like a\\ngentleman.\\nQ ell* est tnusique que fentends de hint What\\nmusic is that I hear from afar\\nIt must be borne in mind, from what has been said in con-\\nwitfa the poMeesive pronoun, that the interrogative\\nform, Whose! is in French expressed by n qui when stand*\\nHe or whi ii follow* d bj\\nsur la route Whose is that\\nbeautiful bouse by the roadside\\nWhose do you say\\nBut when Whose! is u\u00c2\u00bbed without the verb To be, it n ren-\\ndered either by quel of ording to the construction\\nrequired.\\nEx. 1 know whose dttugl ter would suit him, js sais quells est\\nit JUL qui lui conviendrait.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0412.jp2"}, "413": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 131\\nCan you tell me whose portrait this is? Sauriez-vous\\nme dire quel est ce portrait\\nWhose ring La bague de qui\\nExercise.\\nWhat was it you wanted to tell me when we were interrupted\\nI have entirely forgotten what I intended to mention to you, but it\\nwas nothing very important or I would remember it now. Which of\\nthese two young ladies is his sister, the light-haired or the dark\\nhaired I can see which of them is the prettiest, but I cannot tell\\nwhich is the cleverest. What success has he had in his enterprise\\nWhose horses are these two bays which we have seen pass our house\\nseveral times to-day They are my cousin s, who is very fond of fine\\nhorses, and if you show him a number he will tell you at once which\\nare sound and which are not. What a wonderful tale and you hope\\nthat we or anybody else will believe it\\nVI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.\\nThere is a class of pronouns in French, whose special purpose\\nit is to designate persons and things, not individually but vaguely\\nand generally, and hence their name of indefinite pronouns.\\nThey differ in their use, inasmuch as some are never employed\\nin connection with a noun, but stand alone and are substitutes\\nfor nouns, whilst others are only found before nouns, and a third\\nclass are used sometimes with and sometimes without a noun.\\n1. Indefinite Pronouns used alone.\\nThe principal pronoun of this class is on, a word of frequent\\nuse and great importance in French. It is derived from the\\nLatin homo, now homme, and has passed through the various\\nshortenings of horn, on?, and on. This derivation is still very\\ninfluential, having the following practical effects\\nOn cannot be used for any agency but that of man, hence", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0413.jp2"}, "414": {"fulltext": "132 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nexcludes God, mechanical or indefinite agencies. It cannot be\\nsaid, on crea le monde, the world was created, because the agent\\nis not indefinite but known, and is not man, but God. Nor can\\nit be said, on pleuvail hier, there was rain yesterday, because\\nhere the agency, though indefinite, is not a personal one.\\nOn can only be used as a nominative, the subject of a sen-\\ntence, as it is derived from a nominative, and not, like all other\\nnouns, from an oblique c\\nOn has a way of its own to avoid the hiatus, which is every-\\nwhere else remedied by the insertion of a between two hyphens,\\nor the addition of an s to the first word ending in a vowel.\\nWith on, the remedy is to place an the article A, before it,\\nwhen it i. preceded by on or j i according to euphony.\\nEx. Si l n peui vivrt tranquility n doit se taire, if we wish\\nto live quietly, we must be discreet.\\nment, what is well\\ncoders! 1 i-. clearly expressed.\\nTin- same I i- also frequently placed before on when it begins a\\nthey come ami\\ngo and ootbJng is done.\\nBut, aa this is done for the sake of euphony, care must be\\nhad not t insert thifl when the sain. letter OCCUra already.\\nta repetition vronld I-- more offensive to the em- than the\\ni\\nK\\\\. I n\u00c2\u00ab.t want him to\\nDC troubled.\\nnil, i i. u ,-i i/ devait alter, he went where ho\\nwas told he ought to\\nIt has alreadj been explained in the l ir-t Part of this Oram*\\nmar. that cannol be translated literally into Kng\\nh word a- an indefinite personal pronoun. The\\nsubstitutes ;ir many, suofa a- people, men, body.\\nilly the passu e comti", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0414.jp2"}, "415": {"fulltext": "PEONOUNS. 133\\nEx. On rfest pas toujours mat Ire de soi, we are not always\\nmasters of ourselves.\\nOnfrappe a la parte, si je ne me trompe pas, somebody\\nknocks, if I am not mistaken.\\nCe qiton admire le plus rfest pas toujours ce qiCil y a de\\nmieux, what is most admired is not always the best.\\nWhen on is referred to in the same sentence, this can only\\nbe done by the reflexive pronoun se and sol, as le and lui would\\nbe too definite to correspond to the indefinite character of on.\\nEx. On pense toujours plus a soi qu a autrui, people always\\nthink more of themselves than of others.\\nOn s en est beaucoup emerveille a la cour, they have\\nwondered very much at it at court.\\nOn is naturally masculine singular; nevertheless, when it so\\nevidently refers to women or to a plural as to leave no doubt\\non the mind, it may be accompanied by an adjective or parti-\\nciple in the feminine or the plural.\\nEx. Ah, Madame, on vCest pas toujours jeune et jolie, ah,\\nMadam, people (you) are not always young and\\npretty.\\nOn n est pas des esclaves pour etre si maltraites, we are\\nnot slaves to be so badly treated.\\nOn must be repeated before every verb for which it serves\\nas subject.\\nEx. On le loue, on le menace et on n obtient rien, he is praised,\\nhe is threatened, and nothing is gained by it.\\nOn may be placed before every kind of verb, except imper-\\nverbs, because their agency is not that of man.\\nEx. On aime et Von est aime, we love and we are loved.\\nOn tombe dans de mauvaises habitudes et on s en repent,\\npeople fall into bad habits and repent.\\nOn couvient qu on s est trompe, they admit that they have\\nbeen mistaken.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0415.jp2"}, "416": {"fulltext": "134 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nWhen on occurs twice in the same sentence it must necessa-\\nrily refer to the same subject, or the construction would bo\\nincorrect. It cannot be said, on dit qu oa a pris la ville, because\\nthe subject of dit is not the same as that of a pris. It must be\\nexpressed thus on dit que la ville a ete prise, they say that the\\ncity has been taken.\\nAlthough or may be translated by on?, it cannot be used for\\nthe English one, followed by a relative pronoun. This must be\\ntranslated, when indefinite, by quelqu^un, and when definite by\\ncclui.\\nEx. I know one who would do it,/e sais quclquun qui pour-\\nrail le /aire.\\nOne who COnld say so would say anything, cclui qui\\ndirait c-ld, dirait tout ce qu on voudruit.\\nOn is frequently used in conversation to designate persom\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2it, either the speaker himself or the person Bpokcn to.\\nThis i- especially done when ironical politeness or downright\\nrudeness is to conveyed and yet the directness of the personal\\npronoun i to\\nqu on pourrail me reprendre, you are\\nthat you could reprove me.\\nOn at infinimeni oblige, Monsieur, 1 am infinitely\\noblig Ironical.)\\nVice can only be ovemotne l y fleeing from it. People often think\\nthai men irho look benevolent rod receive everybody with a smile,\\nare very kind, but they ai I thai thewarkad\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2..mi end, inn unfortunately the last news by the telegraph is\\no hopeful, and it i- ai l now, thai the war will recommence soon.\\nThey ought to have rewarded this greai general by giving hira an\\ntiling upon him i enakm, for be i- poor and he ba\\nhi health la the service of 1 i country. What \u00c2\u00ablo people think of hi*\\nla t work, do tin-, admin it aa lunch as his format writings, or d\u00c2\u00ab", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0416.jp2"}, "417": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 135\\nthey say it is inferior I do not know what has been done for him, but\\nI know that something has been given to him, either an estate or a\\nlarge sum of money. It is a maxim of French philosophers that men\\ndo not love those to whom they owe much, because gratitude is the\\nheaviest burden that can oppress men. What a sad sentiment If we\\nwish to live quietly we must learn to despise the talk of fools, the\\nhatred of the envious and the insolence of the rich. Six she said with\\na mocking courtesy, I am your humble servant, and I will not trouble\\nyou any more. Paris is an admirable place a hundred things happen\\nthere every day which are unknown in the provinces and admired\\neven in the great capital.\\nQuelqu un, from the Latin qualis and unus, is used absolute-\\nly, i. e. without reference to any noun, and then occurs only in\\nthe masculine singular and plural (quelques-uns), for persons.\\nEx. Quelqu un a dit que Vdme du monde est le soleil, some-\\nbody has said the sun is the soul of the world.\\nQuelques-uns Jen sont deja alles, some have already left.\\nIn this sense it can only be used as subject of a verb and\\nwhen Somebody is to be translated as object of a verb, the\\nFrench substitute for it quelques personnes.\\nEx. I have spoken to some, fat parle a quelques personnes.\\nThat may surprise some, it has not surprised me, cela\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2pent surprendre quelques personnes, il ne m\\\\i pas sur~\\npris, moi.\\nQuelqu un will be translated by Any or Anybody, in interro-\\ngative sentences. In this case it must be treated, when the\\nsubject of the sentence, like a noun, and repeated after the verb\\nin the form of the proper pronoun.\\nEx. ISavez-vous dit a quelqu un Have you told anybody\\nso?\\nQuelqu un est-il venu pendant mon absence Has anybody\\nbeen here during my absence\\nQuelqu un cannot be used in connection with a negation, in\\nwhich case personne must be substituted.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0417.jp2"}, "418": {"fulltext": "J 36 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. I have not mentioned it to anybody, je ne I ai mention-\\nne dpereonne.\\nAnybody, standing alone in English, and meaning, that there is\\nno choice, is rendered in French by riimporte qui.\\nEx. As for me, you may tell it to anybody, quant d moi, vow\\npourrez I dire a n impai I\\nQuelqu un, also, represents the English one, followed by a\\nrelative pronoun.\\nEx. Je \u00c2\u00bbe saurais estimer quelqu un qui agirait ainsi, I could\\nnot esteem one who could act so.\\nWhen tiiis pronoun is referred to in the same sentence, this\\nis done by the reflexive pronoun a 01\\nEx. i quelqu un qui ne penm qu h mm, that is some one\\nwho thinks only of himself.\\nmebody lias made\\na mistake bj going thi\\nQuelqu un may be, secondly, used relatively, i. e. with refer-\\nto a DOUn, and in that CSS* ii has a feminine as wvll as a\\ndine, and relates to things as well as to persons, but the\\nda or tilings must be either mentioned in the same sen*\\nted by en.\\n1 1 you\\nim 1 1 1 of these gontlenm\\ni avoir quelquet-unet,\\nH.,\\\\ o you ve 1 have some.\\nWhen Hccompaniod by an ad, ju un requires the\\naddition of\\nN ome fresh\\nin contradiction to\\nn aueun\\nn a me", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0418.jp2"}, "419": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 187\\nSome, repeated, is not translated by quelqu un, but in the fol\\nlowing manner\\nEx. Some were good and some were bad, les uns etaient bans,\\nles autres etaient mauoais.\\nChacun, from the Latin quisque unus, is like quelqiCun used\\nabsolutely, instead of a noun, or relatively, with reference to a\\nnoun. In the former case it means everybody or every one,\\nand occurs only in the masculine.\\nEx. Chacun croit avoir le sens commun, everybody thinks ho\\nhas common sense.\\nJ ai paye chacun de mes creanciers, I have paid every one\\nof my creditors.\\nAs a relative pronoun chacun occurs in the feminine also and\\nhas a distributive meaning, corresponding to the English each.\\nEx. Regardez separement chacune de ces medailles, look at each\\nof these medals separately.\\nChacun de. nous prendra son parti, each one of us will\\ndecide for himself.\\nThere is some difficulty in deciding when chacun is to be\\nrepresented by the singular pronoun son, sa and ses, or by the\\nplural pronoun leur. The decision depends entirely upon the\\nmeaning to be conveyed if the possessive pronoun refers to\\neach, individually, son must be used if it refers to each and all,\\ncollectively, leur must be used.\\nEx. J^ai paye ces hommes, a chacun sa part, I have paid these\\nmen, to each one his share.\\nLes langues ont, chacune, leur bizarrerie, languages have,\\neach one, their peculiarity.\\nSome additional aid may be obtained from the fact that son\\nis invariably employed when chacun is placed after I he direct\\nobject of the verb, because in all such cases the latter has a dis-\\ntributive meaning, whilst leur will be used when chacun precedes\\nthe direct object.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0419.jp2"}, "420": {"fulltext": "13S OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. iZs ont donne leur avis, chacun selon ses vues, they have\\ngiven their opinion, each one according to his views.\\nlis out rempli chacun leur devoir, they have done their\\nduty, each one of them.\\nChacun may he represented in the same sentence by il, but\\nif reflexive, se and sot only can be used.\\nEx. Chacun pense quil le t ait le micux, everybody thinks he\\nknows best.\\nDans ces cas-la, chacun ve pense qua soi, in such cases\\neverybody thinks but of himself.\\nUn chacun anil t t chacun are antiquated expressions, occur-\\nrinu r in ol l.-r authors. Inn not admissible now.\\n.-wry one of us has\\nDisown opinion.\\nwhich is also need as a noun, is employed as as\\nindefinite pronoun in the sense of anybody. It becomes ncga*\\nlive, meaning nobody, only when accompanied l\\nEx. Pertontu matin t lias anybody been\\nhere this morning I\\nHoint ji n ai vu pertonne t no, Sir;\\n.il nobody.\\n1 by an adjective requires, like all pronouns,\\nthe pn\\nEx. D tu eonnaU pertonne tTheureux^ in thai\\nknow nobody w ln is happy.\\nfrom the Latin quia and cunque, means whoever,\\nwhir but \u00c2\u00ab:ui be used with n erence to pel\\nonly. It lias n plural, but it may be used with reference to\\nfeminine nouns, if they are mentioned in the same sentence.\\nEx. Q whoever nptlla\\nbun\\nQuiconq w Inch\\never be bold enough.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0420.jp2"}, "421": {"fulltext": "PEONOTJNS. 131\\nWhichever, etc., applied to things, are rendered in French by\\nthe demonstrative pronoun.\\nEx. Take whichever you want, prenez celui qui vous con\\nvicndra.\\nRien, from the Latin accusative rem, means any thing, and\\nbecomes negative, with the meaning of nothing, only when ac-\\ncompanied by ne.\\nEx. II Va fait sans rien dire, he did it without saying any\\nthing.\\nRien de plus facheux est-il jamais arrive? Has anything\\nmore provoking ever happened\\nJe rien suis rien el je ne veux rien savoir, I know nothing\\nof it and wish to know nothing.\\nRien is one of the few words which, being the direct object\\nof a verb, may be placed before the infinitive, and, for the pur-\\npose of great emphasis, even before the participle past.\\nEx. ne vautrien, il ne sail rien f aire, he is good for nothing,\\nhe cannot do any thing.\\nJe vous assure solennellement que je ne lui ai rien dit,\\nI assure you solemnly, I have told him nothing at all.\\nExercise.\\nSomebody told me that you left town and were living in the coun-\\ntry, but I hear so many stories now-a-days, that I have almost deter-\\nmined not to believe anybody. Had you spoken to anybody of your\\nplans, for they seem to be known by everybody I shall never be\\nable to trust one who was willing to betray his country when it was\\nin danger. Whoever expects a certain misfortune may already be con-\\nsidered as unhappy. He offered this reward to any one who would\\ndiscover the author of that atrocious murder, but nobody has yet\\nannounced Limself to claim the money. Has anyone ever seriously\\ndoubted the existence of God These flowers are very pretty, but\\nsome of them have thorns which hurt my hand. Several ladies had\\npromised to come, but some sent an excuse and others stayed away\\nwithout saying any thing. Try each one of your friends separately", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0421.jp2"}, "422": {"fulltext": "140 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nand you will see how very few really sincere ones there are. They\\nbrought their offerings to the temple, each one according to his means\\nunl his piety. Caesar and Pompey had each their merit, hut they\\nwere different merits. Did you find any thing remarkable in the\\nworks of that author? He left us without saying any thing, and con-\\nsequently nothing can be done to help him.\\n2. Indefinite Pronouns, which are always joined to a Noun.\\nQuelque, from the Latin qualisque, and its plural quelques,\\ncorrespond to the English Some, in the sense of a small quan-\\ntity, in the singular, and a small number, in the plural.\\nelides ita final only before UTl and auiir, making\\ni .l itr, somebody else.\\nJSiX, II doit avoir quelque passion secrete^ lie must have some\\ni I passion.\\nQ u \\\\quet crimes toujours precedent lesgrandt criines,6ome\\ncrimes always precede great Crimea.\\nQuelq well distinguished from the partitive\\narticle, which always expresses a part of a whole, whilst quelque\\nmeans only one out of a number, or Some in contradistinction\\nt None.\\nEx. V tans doutt quelque argent, yon will certainly\\nhave some money.\\nyaura ru obligeante, there will\\nperhaps be some raon.\\n_. like quelqu* Un y always distinctly Some, in\\nbe used negatively, except in\\nns. Aueun is used for Some in negative sentences.\\nbrave homuu f Mi^lit there not\\nItli tli noun chose, thin\\n.line.\\n1 have something\\nto show yon.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0422.jp2"}, "423": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 141\\nChrtque holds the same relation to chacun that quefque holds\\nto qiulqiCun, only it has of course no plural, as it means Each or\\nEvery.\\nEx. Chaque passion parle un different langage, every passion\\nspeaks a different language.\\nA chaque jour suffit sa peine, each day has its own\\ntroubles.\\nQuelconque, from the Latin qualiscunque, corresponds to\\nthe English Whatever (it may be), and occurs only after a\\nnoun.\\nEx. II rHy a chose quelconque qui puisse Vy obliger, there is\\nnothing whatever that could induce him.\\nUn homme quelconque auruit mieux fait, any man what-\\nsoever would have done better.\\nIn English, Any is often substituted for Whatever, and must\\nthen be translated by the same word.\\nEx. Vous pouvez me donner un Here quelconque, you may give\\nme any book.\\nIn mathematics, quelconque is used in the plural.\\nEx. Deux points quelconques etant donnes, any two points being\\ngiven.\\nCertain becomes a pronoun only in the sense of Some, and\\nmay in that case be preceded by the indefinite article.\\nEx. Cerlaines personnes nous en oni averti, some persons\\nhave warned us against it.\\nUn certain homme est venu nous le dire, a certain (some)\\nman came and told us so.\\nExercise.\\nSome ancient authors have maintained that doctrine, but in our\\nday it has long since been abandoned. Every age has its pleasure,\\nevery condition its charms good follows evil, and smiles follow tears.\\nWe went to see a certain person, who had assured us that he could euro", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0423.jp2"}, "424": {"fulltext": "142 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nus of this disease, bat we found him to be an impostor. There is\\nalways some mystery about his movemeuts, and his enemies intimate\\nthat he prefers it, because it gives him apparently a little more im-\\nportance. If we could find some house that would suit us in your\\nneighborhood we would take it immediately, but so far we have not\\nbeen able to find any. If I were you, I would take any house rather\\nthan to board with my wife and children; it is the saddest way\\nof living I know, to have no home. He told me, with tears in his\\neyes, that after having paid all his creditors, there would not be\\nleft him any thing whatever, but somebody else assured me that he\\nwas not quite so destitute.\\n3. Indefinite Pronouns used with or without a Noun.\\nAutre, from the Latin alio; corresponds to the English Other,\\nand pre ins it qualifies, bat follows other indefinite\\nprono\\nEx. uf croyaii pas qu U y dit un autre monde, he did not\\nbelieve there was another world.\\nUfaxidra lui donner quelqu 1 in*, you will have\\ne him some other medicine.\\nu mil ait, Dothing else would suit me.\\nIt is, properly ppeaking, a genuine pronoun only when it is\\nnot accompanied by a noun, bnt acta as a substitute.\\nEx. Un autre ne vous parlerait pas tri franchement, anybody\\nelse would not speal ly to you.\\nAnoth ly translated by another.\\nEx. Xoncaii give me aow another om m en donner\\ntun fre.\\nIt hai n mentioned t lint the plan] form autre* is\\nd added to the pronouns nous and vous, when a distinction\\nliahed by natfamalitj a t the like.\\nEx. i i you Englishmen\\nknow nothing i that\\ninn, wo are\\nuat*l to that, wi who uri phyatolaaa", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0424.jp2"}, "425": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 1-13\\nAutre chose, like quelque chose, is treated as a masculine.\\nEx. Consolez-vous; autre chose vous sera accord e, console your-\\nself, something else will be granted you.\\nLun Vautre represents the English One another or Each\\nother, and may be used in both numbers and genders either\\njointly or separately.\\nEx. II se ha issent les uns les autres, they hate each other.\\nII donne a Pun ce qu il retire a Vautre, he grants to one\\nwhat he takes from the other.\\nIt must be borne in mind, that in English the preposition is\\nplaced before Each other or One another, whilst in French it\\nmust be placed between Pun and Vautre.\\nEx. They always speak badly of each other, Us mediseni\\ntoujours Pun de P autre.\\nWhat a pity to see them unchained against each other\\nQuelle pitie que de les voir dechaines les uns contre les\\nautre s I\\nAnother, when it means One more, must be translated by\\nencore un.\\nEx. I will lend you another hundred, if you want it, je vous\\npreterai encore une centaine, s il le faut.\\nL un et Vautre, represents the English Both, when united,\\nand requires the verb to be used in the plural.\\nEx. L un et Vautre rapportent les memes cir Constances, they\\nboth report the same facts.\\nWhen they are subject to a preposition, the latter must be\\nrepeated before each part.\\nEx. J ai satisfait a Pune et d Pautre objection, I have met\\nboth objections.\\nOn ne se sert c/ubre egalement de Pane et de Pautre main.,\\nwe rarely use both hands alike.\\nWhen they are joined to a noun, the latter remains singular,\\nf\u00c2\u00bb]th ough it has a plural meaning.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0425.jp2"}, "426": {"fulltext": "144 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Fun et f autre climat lui conviennent pru, both climates\\ndo not suit hira well.\\nAutrui, from the Latin altcri, is indeclinable, and applicable to\\nmen and women only, when they are taken in a general sense.\\nThe word is not used except as an indirect object, preceded by\\nprepositions.\\nEx. Attendez T autrui ce que vousfaites a autrui, expect from\\nothers what you do unto others.\\nNous sommes prompts a mprendre hs fautes tfautmi, we\\narc quick in blaming the faults of others.\\nFul, aucun and pas un represent the English No or None, and\\nhave, generally, the Bame meaning; still, there are certain differ-\\nences to be noticed in the use which is made of these three\\np^iouns.\\nNul ,nd its feminine nullc is most frequently placed before\\nnones, although rttiJ is the only 01 f these pronouns which\\nthe subject of a k without accompanying\\na noun.\\nEx. Nul komrm mgiml, no man is free\\nfrom hereditary sin.\\nilh part son honheursurla tern,\\nman finds hia bappineai nowhere on earth.\\nD0 one is satisfied with\\nbis l t.\\nin the plural only in order to express null, of no\\nKn 7 nullet, all these proceedings\\namoanl to noA\\nf,,,m the Latin a S\u00c2\u00bbtive meaning\\nonly when accorafanied by ne t and then takes the pis\\nEx. Aucun hommt a-t-il jamais fait mieuxt Has any man", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0426.jp2"}, "427": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 145\\nJe doute qu il y ait aucun auteur sans defaut, I doubt if\\nthere be any author without defect.\\nJe nejoue d 1 aucun instrument, I play on no instrument.\\nAucun may also be used in the plural when it accompanies\\nnouns which occur in the plural only.\\nEx. II rHa fait aucuns preparatifs pour son voyage, he has\\nmade no preparation for his journey.\\nPas un and pas une is the strongest of these negative pro-\\nnouns, meaning distinctly not one. It is used without a noun\\nonly in familiar style.\\nEx. II n y a pas une seule personne qui le sache, there is not a\\nsingle person who knows it.\\nH est aussi savant que pas un (familiar), he is as learned\\nas any one.\\nExercise.\\nWhen he had finished the account of his adventures in the Pyrenees,\\nthe boys who had listened very attentively, said Tell us something\\nelse now. There is not one of these books which I have not read, but\\nno book could ever keep me awake, when night fell. Is there any one\\nof all the painters who has better understood what artists call the\\nclair-obscur Do not trouble yourself with the affairs of others, you\\nhave enough to do to save your own little fortune. Here are my\\nfather and my mother I have seen them both only once during the\\nlast year, and they themselves have not seen each other for the same\\ntime. People ought not to slander each other that is one of the\\nmeanest wrongs which they can commit, because it benefits no one\\nand always does much harm. These two nations have fought against\\neach other for many generations, but now they are good friends, and\\nhave learnt, both, to value the power of such a union. He has spared\\nno expense in making my sister comfortable, and when she was sick\\nhe did all for her that the most devoted husband could have done.\\nMeme, from the Latin metipsissimus (Italian medesimo,\\nSpanish mismo, French mime), is an adjective, with the mean-", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0427.jp2"}, "428": {"fulltext": "146 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\ning of Same, an adverb with the meaning of Even, and a pronoun\\nonly when it stands instead of a noun or is placed after it in the\\nsignification of Even.\\nEx. Pierre et Cephas Jest le mime, Peter and Cephas are the\\nsame.\\nVos droits et les miens sont les mimes, your rights and\\nmine are the same.\\nLe roi mime n oserait pas le /aire, even the king would\\nnot dare do it.\\nThe conjunctions As and That, used after The same, are in\\nFrench expressed alike by que.\\nEx. Is this the same man that I saw yesterday? Est-ce le\\nmime komme quefai vu hierf\\nRich men have the :mie end a^ poor men, les riches out\\nla in mi fin urn lis pauvres.\\nThe same as, when it means Lik. is translated by comme before\\nnouns and The game, when it stands alone, l y\\nEx. II\u00c2\u00ab- treats me die same as Ids brother, U traite eomme\\nton j,\\nHe speaks and act.s tin-\\nTil, from the Latin talis, represents the English Such, but is\\nnot used like the latter with the indefinite article after it, hut\\ntakes it before it. In the plural it requires the partitive article\\ndr.\\nEx. it possible that such man ean auoceed I BstM pos-\\nsible ,jii nii til homme puistt revestr/\\nSuch persons never know wbal they ought to do,de telle*\\npersonnel n tavent jamais a qu U/autj\\nSuch a, in interjections, cannot expressed by bnt l v\\nthe adverb si before the adjective.\\nEx. She is siwh a beautiful w man C tst line si bills fimwe\\nlie has told as such consoling words] wms a dU dot", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0428.jp2"}, "429": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 147\\nSuch, before adjectives and followed by As, and consequently\\nexpressing a comparison, is translated not by tel, but like other\\ncomparisons.\\nEx. If I were in such a good condition as he, si moi, fetais\\ndans une si bonne position comme lui.\\nSuch, before nouns and followed by As, is translated by teh\\nplaced after the noun.\\nEx. Such animals as this are dangerous, les animaux tels que\\ncelui-ci sont dangereux.\\nSuch as, is occasionally used in English with the meaning of\\nThose who, and must in that case be translated like the latter\\nphrase.\\nEx. Avoid such as may tempt you, evitez ceux qui peuvent vous\\ntenter.\\nTel is employed in proverbial expressions, without noun or\\narticle, to represent the English Many a one, in similar expres-\\nsions.\\nEx. Tel seme qui ne recueille pas, many a one sows who does\\nnot reap.\\nTel rit qui pleurera, many a one laughs who is going to\\nweep.\\nPlusieurs, which has no singular and means Several or Many,\\ncan be used without a noun only as subject to a verb in all\\nother relations it must be accompanied by a noun.\\nEx. Plusieurs se sont trompes en voulant tromper les auires,\\nmany have deceived themselves, when they wished to\\ndeceive others.\\nOn le dit ainsi dans plusieurs journaux, it is sai I so in\\nseveral papers.\\nTout, from the Latin totus, which makes its plural in tons,\\nhas a variety of special significations, of which the following are\\nthe most important\\nTout, by itself, represents every thing or all things.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0429.jp2"}, "430": {"fulltext": "US OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Tout tombe, tout peril autour de nous, all things foil and\\nperish around us.\\nTout etait adore dans un Steele pa icn, every thing was\\nworshipped in a pagan age.\\nIn this signification it may, like rien, be placed before the\\ninfinitive and the participle past of the verb of which it is the\\ndirect object.\\nEx. Quand il Fa vu il lui a tout avoue, when he saw him lie\\nconfessed to him every thing.\\nMuintenant, cependant, il ne veut pas tout dire, now, how-\\never, he will not tell all (every thin-).\\nIt must not be forgotten that when tout is followed by the\\nrelative pronoun, the antecedent in the form of ce must bo\\nsupplied.\\nEx. All I kn.-w of it is this, tout qm J saie eet ceci.\\nlsthatailtli.it embarrasses you 1 Est-ee la tout ce qui\\nrepresents everybody or all, and may be\\nused instead of the personal pronouns as well as in addition to\\nthrill.\\nEx. Tout e en ollaient quand la cirimonie nit fair, they all\\nwent away when the c. \u00e2\u0096\u00a0ivin..n\\\\ \\\\\\\\a- over.\\neni tout dtt tannes, annul bateau ft voile t\\nthr\\\\ all shed tears when tie vessel tailed.\\n1 by the relative pronoun, requires\\nthe addition of an antecedent\\nEx. I bave i .ill who were there when it happened, fai en\\nI tela arriva.\\nWhen the English All refers not indefinitely t all, but bo all\\nof a home, a I of a society, etc., it is\\ntranslated by ton\\nEx. 11 body at home? Comment H portt tout U\\nmoudt h I VOUi", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0430.jp2"}, "431": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 149\\nHave they all come? Est-ce que tout le monde est\\narrive\\nTout, before nouns, has a collective meaning, with the sig-\\nnification of The whole or All the, when it takes the article be-\\ntween itself and the noun.\\nEx. Tout Vhomme ne meurt pas, the whole of man does not\\ndie.\\nOn ne peut jamais voir tous les corps celestes, we can\\nnever see all the celestial bodies.\\nII a mange toute une fortune, he has spent a whole\\nfortune.\\nTout, before nouns, has a distributive meaning, with the\\nsignification of Each or Every, when it takes no article but pre-\\ncedes the noun immediately.\\nEx. Tout citoyen doit servir son pays, every citizen must\\nserve his country.\\nTout homme qui aime la verite en eat Hesse, every man\\nwho loves truth is offended by it.\\nWhen tout thus qualifies the name of a city, it remains mas-\\nculine, though the latter may be feminine.\\nEx. Tout Venue y etait, all Venice was there.\\nWhen tout qualifies a personal pronoun, subject or object of\\na verb, it is placed after the latter.\\nEx. They all speak at once, Us parlent tous a lafois.\\nIt appears that they have broken them all, il parait quHl\\nles ont brisees toutes.\\nAll, is in English often followed by the preposition of, before\\nnouns or pronouns. This is not used in French, and tous is\\nplaced after the pronoun.\\nEx. Are all of these men to follow us Tous ces liommes nous\\nsuicront-ils\\nAll of you must do your duty, tous decree fair e tous voire\\ndevoir.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0431.jp2"}, "432": {"fulltext": "150 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nTous and toutes in definitions of time have the meaning of\\nEach or Every, with even greater force than chaque.\\nEx. Je le vols tous les matins qui se promene, I see him every\\nmorning taking a walk.\\nH va nous V envoy er toutes les quatre semaines, he is going\\nto send it to us every four weeks.\\nTous and toutes, followed by the adverb tant, has the special\\nmeaning of As many as.\\nEx est muttre absolu dc tous taut que nous sommes, he is\\nabsolute master of us all (as many as we are).\\nOn les a chassis tons taut quHls furent, they have been\\ndriven off, every one of them.\\nBxXBCISB,\\nDo you know such a person 1 1 have never heard even such a\\nname, and know nothing of it Bnch people always Imagine that\\nthey arc right and everybody else is wrong; [dislike them even more\\nthan really disagrei able peopla Several ladies had come to our house\\nand were waiting Bar my sister when theaccidenl befell her, which,\\non the same day, deprived me and yon of a beloved relative. Be Is\\nsuch a learned man thai I would have thought him the beet\\nto till thai chair, bn1 they have cl m i nother one. [f I had been In\\nsuch s dangerous position, I would n t have known how t\u00c2\u00ab help my-\\nand it li even likely thai I would have perished miserably.\\nEv ry good citizen musl serve his country, the Boldiei with Ids blood,\\nthe priest with his seal All novelties in poinl of religion are dan-\\ngerous, but they ought not to be condemned too hastily; onto\\ntrarv, we ougp.t to try them all. and perhaps something pxxl may\\nbom the frraminatJim Any other pine- but a throne seems\\nunworthy of her. Such is the loftiness of her mind and the majesty f\\nher appearance That liberty has it-* limits, as well as every other\\nliberty. The wholi was spent in singing and dancing, and\\nthey tell me they do this every evening far a week I", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0432.jp2"}, "433": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS. 15 1\\n4. Indefinite Pronouns followed by Que.\\nA number of these indefinite pronouns are only used in con-\\nnection with a verb with which they are united by means of\\nthe conjunction que. They express, with one exception, the\\nEnglish word Ever, and as this is naturally suggestive, not of\\npositive facts, but of contingencies, they are followed by the\\nsubjunctive mood. The following are the most important of\\nthis class.\\nQui que ce soit, whoever, or anybody, any one.\\nEx. Faites entrer qui que ce soit qui me demande, admit any\\none who may ask for me.\\nQui que ce soit a qui Von donne, on s en plaindra, to\\nwhomever it may be given, people will complain.\\nQuoi que ce soit, whatever, or any thing.\\nQuoi que ce soit qu on dise de moi, taisez-vous, whatever\\nthey may say of me, keep silence.\\nQuel que soit, with its feminine and plural forms, whoever\\nor whatever.\\nEx. Quel que soit le resultat, nous y consentons, whatever the\\nresult may be, we agree to it.\\nJe le dirai a ces dames quelles qu elles soient, I will tell it\\nthese ladies, whoever they may be.\\nQuelque que, with its plural quelques que, is used with a\\nnoun between the two parts, and then means Whatever.\\nEx. Quelques talents quHl ait, il a pas de genie, whatever\\ntalents he may have, he has no genius.\\nQuelque que, with an adjective between the two parts, has\\nShe meaning of However.\\nEx. Quelque grands que soient ces talents, il en abuse, how-\\never great his talents may be, he makes a bad use of\\nthem.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0433.jp2"}, "434": {"fulltext": "152 OS THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nTout qur, with an adjective betwen the two parts, means\\nalso However, but it is the only one of these indefinite pronouns\\nwhich is followed by the verb in the indicative mood, as it\\nalways expresses a fact, and not a contingency.\\nEx. Tout eloquent quHl eat, il ne convainc pas, eloquent as he\\nis, he does not convince.\\nJe Pai vu tribucher, tout savant qu il est, I have seen him\\nstumble, however learned he is.\\nIt must be noted that qui que ce soil and similar terms may,\\nof course, be followed by the past tense also.\\nEx. Qui que ce ful qui l il refasa toujours, who-\\nmigbt a k for him, he always concealed himself.\\nQuoiqw e franchement, whatever\\nyou may b it frankly.\\nWhatever, al the end of a sentence, must In French have its\\nproper verb supplied.\\nEx. I will grant yon any favor whatever, je D0ttf (iC -oni mi\\nThe same expression In French answers forthe English Bams\\n.r other.\\nEx. i or other, do\\nThe iswera Soar the English Ever so,\\nfollowed by an adji\\nEx. I will accept it ev r bumble, face\\nsuit.\\nA wnmnn, what may bring to bar busban.i s\\nhouse, *\u00c2\u00bb.ii ruin- it. if ahe Introduces there extravagance for which\\ni w. v. r powerful they may l..-, I do not fear\\ntli- \u00e2\u0096\u00a0in. for I have the right on my aide, an.]. In the end, that must\\nalways oonqtu r. Whatev r ii may be they ask of yon, promise them\\nlain, ut lb.- mill.- time, that you cunuu;", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0434.jp2"}, "435": {"fulltext": "VERES. 153\\nthing whatever without the consent of your father. Whoever he\\nmay be, he ought not to have acted thus for, no man can do wrong,\\nwho has a conscience, without repenting it. Frivolous as she is, I\\ncan hardly think she would have treated her lovtr so badly, for\\nthere is dishonesty in breaking her solemn word. Do not fear the\\nempty power of men however powerful they may be, they are what\\nwe are. Whatever mortals may be, we must live among them, and a\\nfastidious man is unhappy through himself. This is a universal law,\\nand applies to all men I except from it nobody, whatever he be or\\ncan be. We ought never to speak evil of anybody whatever in his\\nabsence. Whatever merit we may ]jave, we cannot, unless we possess\\nluck and protection at court, succeed in any thing whatsoever. We\\nshall do our duty, whatever you may say to the contrary and if we\\nreceive no other reward, we shall be content with the consciousness\\nof having done what we ought to have done.\\nCHAPTER V.\\nVERBS.\\nThe Verb has its name in French as in English from its im-\\nportance in a sentence it is verbum, the Word, by eminence.\\nFor nouns simply name a person or an object, but do not con-\\nvey a thought it is only when we say something of this person\\nor object, when we use a verb, that an idea is communicated\\nfrom one person to another. A sentence, therefore, may consist\\nof a noun and a verb only, and will already fulfil the purposes\\nof language.\\nThe principal purpose of the verb is to affirm souething, and\\nto qualify this affirmation by designating person, number, time\\nand mood. These four qualities of the verb are the cause of its\\nvarious forms, and constitute what is common .y called their\\nconjugation.\\nThere are three Persons in the verb the first, or that of the\\nspeaker the second, or that of the person spoken to aud the", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0435.jp2"}, "436": {"fulltext": "154 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthird, or that of the person spoken of. They are designated by\\ndifferent endings of the verb, and by the personal pronouns\\nplaced before it.\\nThere are two Numbers in the verb, as in the noun, the\\nsingular and the plural, designated also by different endings of\\nthe verb and by the personal pronouns.\\nThere are two classes of Tenses, to express time viz., simpie\\ntenses, which are made from the root of the verb, as it is found\\nin the infinitive after cutting off the infinitive termination and\\ncompound tenses, which are Termed by the aid of one of the\\ntwo auxiliary verbs, avoir or etre, with the participle past of\\nthe verb.\\nThere are four .Vn\u00c2\u00bb ls in the verb, to express the mood or\\nmanner of the action of the veib the Indicative, for all that is\\npositively asserted the Subjunctive, for what is mentioned only\\nas contingent; the Conditional, tor actions subject to conditions;\\nand the Imperative, for that which is ordered.\\nI he Infinitive, which is often called a mood, is in reality\\nnothing hut the name of the Verb.\\nDIFFKRENT CLASSES OF VEHBS.\\nY.-rhs are divided into different classes, according to the\\nnature ol their signification.\\nAel an action which baa or may have a\\ndirect object. Tie an i as Buch by the power they\\njvetqu un v y/ /y/r chose after the first per-\\nion of the present indicative. Thus chanter ia an active verb,\\nbecause we can lelqm cho8e t 1 sine; some*\\nthin-: because we can say, Jt c\u00c2\u00abus, U- qttelqvi un i\\n1 comfort somebody^ but marcher is not an active verb, be-\\nwe cannol quelqu un v ouelque chose,\\n1 march somebody or something.\\nict of the verb undergoes", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0436.jp2"}, "437": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 1 55\\nits action and is its own direct object. Je suis console, I am\\ncomforted, expresses that 7, the subject, undergo comforting-,\\nand am, therefore, the object of the action of comforting.\\nProperly speaking, there are no passive verbs in French, be-\\ncause it has no power to make a verb passive by simply\\nchanging its form, as was the case in Latin, where amare became\\npassive by being changed into amari, and amo by becoming\\namor. There are, therefore, various ways by which the French\\nendeavors to supply the loss of the Latin passive, of which the\\nfollowing are the most important:\\nVerbs are made passive\\n1. By the use of etre with their participle past. Thus the\\nverb proteger, to protect, is used actively in\\nLa loi protege tous les citoyens, the law protects all citizens,\\nand passively in\\nTous les citoyens sont proteges par la loi, all citizens are pro-\\ntected by the law.\\nThis mode of forming a passive is admissible only with active\\nverbs, in cases where a real action has taken place the only\\nexception being the verb obeir, to obey, which, though a neuter\\nverb, may be used passively II est obei, he is obeyed.\\n2. By the use of the reflexive pronoun se with the third per-\\nson, in all cases where other than active verbs are employed, or\\nwhere no real action takes place.\\nEx. Le ble comment se vend-il maintenant How is wheat\\nsold now-a-days\\nDe tels evenements ne se repetent pas, such events are not\\n3. By the use of the indefinite personal pronoun on, when\\nthe agent of the action of the verb is either unknown or pur-\\nposely left undecided.\\nEx. On lit que le cholera iCy est pas, it is said that the\\ncholera is not there.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0437.jp2"}, "438": {"fulltext": "15G ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nOn craint la guerre qu .nd die vient de cesser, war is\\nfeared, when it has just ceased.\\nNeuter Verbs express either an action which has no direct\\nobject, though it may have an indirect object with which it is\\nconnected by a preposition, or a mere state or condition. Thus\\nvenir, to come, expresses an action, but one which cannot have\\na direct object, as we cannot say venir quelquun or quelque\\nchose, to come somebody or something, though \u00e2\u0096\u00a0we may say\\nvenir de la ville, to come from town. Thus dormir, to sleep, is\\na neuter verb, because it expresses no action at all, but simply a\\nstate, in which man may be.\\nPronominal Ferbs are ail those which are accompanied in the\\ninfinitive by the reflexive pronoun \u00c2\u00abr, and in all other parts of\\ntheir conjugation by two personal pronouns. They are\\nBeflexive verbs, when the action of the verb reacts upon the\\nsubject in tin.- case, Is translated bj one s self, and the second\\npronoun by myself, thys I\\nEx. faut we must conquer\\nourselves, if we esteem\\nReciprocal rbs, when the action of the verb reacts mutually\\nupon subject and object S V, in this case, is translated by Each\\nother, and bo i- the second pronoun.\\nEx. lis allaient A et i they went to light\\neach other, and they killed each other.\\nPronominal r rbs proper, when thej are pronominal only in\\na and not BO in I. and the BOCOttd\\nm i main untrenslate 1 English.\\n1a. SlU m repent -he repents .-ill sho\\nha- done.\\nII fUghl to mistrust\\nthose people.\\nIt must ie. t in He- pronoi\\nminal, and take the a the infinitj od pro", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0438.jp2"}, "439": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 157\\nnoun in the whole conjugation, when the personal pronouns are\\nsubstituted for possessive pronouns. They are then conj ugated\\nwith etre, like all pronominal verbs without exception.\\nEx. Elle est allee se laver les mains, she has gone to wash her\\nhands.\\nJe me suis casse lajamhe en sautant, I have broken my leg\\nby jumping.\\nImpersonal Verbs express an action, the subject of which is\\nnot a person, but a vague, indefinite agency. They are used\\nonly in the third person singular, and the pronoun il, which\\nserves as subject, corresponds to the English It or There.\\nEx. II convient que vous suivies ses conseils, it is proper for you\\nto follow his advice.\\nII y a un charme inconcevable dans sa voix, there is an\\nincomprehensible charm in her voice.\\nEvery thing that concerns the form of the verb has already\\nbeen mentioned in the First Part of this Grammar. It is only\\non the use of the verb, in connection with other words, that\\nadditional rules will be given here.\\nTHE VERB AND ITS SUBJECT.\\nThe subject of the verb is either a noun or a pronoun, and is\\nascertained by asking Who with the aid of the verb. In the\\nsentence, la philosophie triomphe de tous les maux, philosophy\\ntriumphs over all evils, the question, Who triumphs will give\\nthe answer philosophy; and this noun is therefore the subject.\\nThe rule which directs the form of the verb in this relation is\\nsimply this\\nThe verb agrees with its subject in number and person.\\nEx. La religion veille sur les crimes secrets, les lois veillent sur\\nles crimes publics, religion guards against secret crimes,\\nthe laws against public crimes.\\nWhen a verb has two or more subjects it is put in the", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0439.jp2"}, "440": {"fulltext": "15S OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nplural, provided the subjects are not either synonymous or\\nfinally summed up in oue as the most important.\\nEx. Lui et elle viendront a la campagne avec nous, he and she\\nwill come with us to the country.\\nBut:\\nSon courage, son intrepldite, etonnait tons, his courage,\\nhis intrepidity, amazed all.\\nUne parole, un sourire, un seul regard suffit, a word, a\\nsmile, a single look is enough.\\nWhen a verb has several subjects of different persons, the\\nso-called rule of grammatical precedence applies, i. e., the first\\nperson prevails over the second, and the second over the third.\\nEx. Vous el i/ i nous sommes contents de noire sort, you and\\nI are satisfied with our fate\\nVous t lui vous saves la chose, you and he know the\\nthing.\\nWhen a verb has several Bubjects connected by tra, or, the\\nverb will be in the singular, when the nouns exclude one\\nanother, and in the plural, when they are represented as acting\\nboth, though alternately.\\nK\\\\. I est i a dit r /n, it is Cicero\\nor 1 temostheoes who baa said so.\\nmart eoni i time or death are\\nour remed\\nWhen the two subjects an different persons, the \\\\crl must\\nalways be in the plural.\\nK\\\\. Cest lui ii moi qui devrons U /aire, it is be or I who\\nwill have to do it.\\nI die, you or she are mis-\\ntaken.\\ncue rule applies to several subjects connected by\\nbe verb will be in the singular if\\nthe two nouns exclude each other, and in the plural when they\\nare juinl of the verb.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0440.jp2"}, "441": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 159\\nEx. Ni Vun ni V autre rCest mon pere, neither of the two is\\nmy father.\\nNi la douceur ni la force ne Vebranlerent, neither gentle-\\nness nor violence moved him.\\nWhen the two subjects are different persons, the verb must\\nhere also be in the plural.\\nEx. Ni lui ni moi ne so?nmes coupables, neither he nor I are\\nguilty.\\nThe verb etre placed between two nouns of different number,\\nis always put in the plural, but if the first should be in the\\nsingular, it requires the addition of ce.\\nEx. Ses enfants sont la seule consolation qui lui reste, her\\nchildren are the only comfort that remains to her.\\nSon seul orgueil ce sont ces enfants, his only pride are his\\nchildren.\\nWhen the subject of a verb is un, one, followed by a genitive\\nplural, the verb is singular, when it refers distinctly to un, and\\nplural, when it refers in like manner to the plural. The mean-\\ning of the sentence alone determines, therefore, the form of the\\nverb.\\nEx. Eat-ce un des soldats qui a fait cela Is it one of the\\nsoldiers who has done this\\nEst-ce un des soldats qui se sont si bien battus Is this\\none of the soldiers who have fought so well\\nPlus d\\\\in, more than one, is always followed by the singular,\\nin spite of its plural meaning, unless it should be repeated.\\nEx. Plus d un ami m en avait averti, more than one friend\\nhad warned me.\\nExercise.\\nYour father and mother have promised to take tea with us to-nighc,\\nwill you and your sister do ns the favor to come with them Youth\\nand inexperience expose us to many mistakes and consequently to", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0441.jp2"}, "442": {"fulltext": "1G0 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nmuch suffering. The merchant, the workman, the priest, the soldier,\\nare all alike members of the State. A single word, a sigh, a glance\\nmay betray you. When you speak of such a sacrifice, you must not\\nforget that your interest, your honor, God, demands it of you, and you\\nought not to hesitate. Into whatever part of the known earth the\\ntempest or the wrath of some hostile god may have thrown him, I\\nshall know how to rescue him from it. It is thou or I who has done\\nthis who shall decide between us? Either the kiug himself or his\\nminister will be held responsible for this fearful outrage against law\\nand justice but the process will be so tedious, that neither you nor\\nI will probably see the end of it. When I left the prison, my clothes,\\nmy papers, every thing was returned to me, and I found that all was\\nin perfect order. This is one of the tilings I valued least, and yet it is\\nalso one of the things that have most contributed to my happiness.\\nWhen a collective noun is the subject of a verb, its agree-\\npende upon the precise nature of the collective, and the\\ng rul a mosl 1\\nben the collective noun consists of a single word, the verb\\nwith it in form, without regard to its meaning.\\nEx, comiti fina* truit, the finance commit-\\ntee has been instructed.\\nLe peuple Ca i idt acclamation, the people have\\ndecided it by acclamation.\\nWhen the collective noun is followed by dt with another\\nnoun, the verb will agree itli that pari of it to which it lias\\nmore sj i nee.\\nEx. iparl nondt m t en toucit pa*, the majority of\\nthe world does not mind it.\\nJit celaf a number of people have\\nsaid\\nGrammarians gen between collective!\\ngeneral, which designate the totality of persons or things\\nof. a- an army, n p fl t, and collectiv pai t-\\nitive, which d nly a partial an indefinite", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0442.jp2"}, "443": {"fulltext": "VERlS. 101\\n(but .ifct the total) number of such persons or things, as a\\nmajority, a number, a crowd. The former are invariably\\naccompanied by the definite article or an adjective, which\\npoints them out as collectives general, while the latter are only\\npreceded by the indefinite article, with the exception of la\\nplupart, the majority. In this connection the following rule\\napplies\\nVerbs agree with the first word of collectives general, and\\nwith the second of collectives partitive.\\nEx. La pluralite des moxtres n est pas bonne, the majority of\\nmasters are not good.\\nLa plupart des a,nimaux ont plus d agiliti que Vhomme,\\nmost animals have more agility than man.\\nIt must not be overlooked, however, that some collectives\\nmay be used in both senses, as general and as partitive, but\\nthey will always indicate this by the article which precedes\\nthem.\\nEx. line bande de voleurs ont pille le village, a band of robbers\\nhave plundered the village.\\nLa bande de voleurs, qui Va fait, a disparu, the band of\\nrobbers who did it has disappeared.\\nAdverbs of quantity, followed by a plural, determine the\\nnumber of the verb by precisely the same rule.\\nEx. Beuucoup d eux jouent au lieu d etudier, many of them\\nplay instead of studying.\\nCe peu de mots suffit pour ranimer Varmee, these few\\nwords sufficed to encourage the army.\\nExercise.\\nBy the valor of Bichard and those knights who emulated his braveiy,\\nthe army of the Infidels was entirely destroyed, and the road to Jerusa-\\nlem was open. They quote a number of words spoken by Spartan\\nwomen, that show remarkable courage and strength. I cannot think", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0443.jp2"}, "444": {"fulltext": "162 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthat the majority of members can be so corrupt as to agree to such a\\nmeasure, -which will only benefit themselves and cost the country\\nlarge sums. The majority of men remember much better the services\\nthey have rendered than those they have received from others. Few\\nprinces, in history, have earned the same character of kindness as\\nHenry IV., and yet he deserved it perhaps less than most of his ances-\\ntors. A troop of mountaineers held possession of the pass, and\\nalthough a perfect hail of balls fell upon them, they stood their\\nground. A number of men live from day to day as if they were im-\\nmortal, and apparently never think of the world to come. How many\\npersona have bought tickets in the lottery with the hope of obtaining\\neome large prize, and how few have ever seen their hopes realized!\\nThe Committee, it is mid, cannot agree, and the matter will bo\\nr. ported back to the ft\\nPLACE OF THE SUBJECT.\\nThe legitimate place of the subject of a verb is before it,\\nin questions, which are expressed by placing it after the\\nverb. It baa already been Biated that, it the Bubject of a qucs-\\ntion is a oonn, it is placed a! the head of the sentence, and then\\ni-i peated in the form of the proper pronoun after the verb.\\nHunt la \\\\fanti t Is\\nthis woman really the mother of these children I\\nthai if tip tion is a pronoun, it must be\\ni by a hyphen the verb, and avoid the hiatus by the\\ninsertion of t, and the immediate succession of two mute e*a by\\nBrat\\nEx, .1 lit n une lelU cko Baa Bnch a thing ever\\nhe. 11\\nr, even if I were t\u00c2\u00ab he\\n\u00c2\u00abhi\\\\ en away, 1 ill speak.\\nThe manna* in which the French exp ress an emphatic r..u-\\nditiiin. like thai f the lasl example, by placing the pronouns\\nafter, the w has been hilly explained\\nuu i inns.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0444.jp2"}, "445": {"fulltext": "verbs. 11;?,\\nThe subject is, however, occasionally p.iced after the verb\\nfor special purposes, of which the following are the principal\\ninstances\\nIncidental sentences, showing that the words of another are\\nquoted, are formed by placing the subject after the verb.\\nEx. Tous les homines sont fous, a dit Boileau, all men are\\nmad, Boileau has said.\\nEh bien, repeta-t-il, pourquoi ne venez-vous pas Well,\\nhe repeated, why don t you come\\nAfter certain adverbs, taken in an idiomatic sense, like ad-\\nverbs of place, of manner or conclusion, which, for that purpose,\\nare placed at the head of the sentence, the subject is placed after\\nthe verb.\\nEx. lei repose la Sainte Cecile, here lies St. Cecilia.\\nAinsi se termina cette fdcheuse affaire, thus ended this dis\\nagreeable business.\\nEn vain le lui a-t-on offer t deux/ois, in vain they have\\noffered it to him twice.\\nSentences expressive of a strong wish employ for that pur-\\npose the subjunctive mood, followed by the subject.\\nEx. Puissent tons les peuples aimer la paix Oh that all\\nnations would love peace\\nIn relative constructions, as has been stated under the head\\nof relative pronouns, the subject follows the verb, because the\\nverb is obliged to follow immediately the relative pronoun.\\nEx. Les conseils que nous donnent nos amis, the advice our\\nfriends give us.\\nJe ferai ce que m a dit votre frere, I shall do what your\\nbrother told me.\\nIt must be borne in mind here, that when the verb is mono-\\nsyllabic, or the construction is in any manner likely to become\\ninvolved, as in negative questions, the simple interrogative form", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0445.jp2"}, "446": {"fulltext": "164 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nis not used in French, but the question is asked by means of\\nest-ce que\\nEx. Est-ce que je dors ou est-ce que je rem t Am I asleep or\\ndreaming\\nEstrce que V agent ne Vaurait pas fait Could not the agent\\nhave done it\\nExercise.\\nEven if Caesar had not passed the Rubicon, he would probably have\\nen led as he did, for his ambition would have led him to the same\\nmeasures, although it might have been by a different way. Per-\\nhaps the doctor was not at home, when your Bervant was there, or\\nperhaps he was fast asleep and did not hear the bell. In vain did we\\ntry to shake his resolution lie was linn, and finally asked us not to\\nto him any more about it thus ended our interview. We hear\\nwhich those give us who know how to flatter oar\\nIS, but we shut our ears to thai which our true friends s\\nto us. Does Buch mi answer offend you, or have you sufficient courage\\nto hear the truth 1 Will business be better next winter? Perhaps it\\nwill i 1 have laid in a large stock of merchandise, and\\nto buy even more. If 1 can obtain more money. His last\\nwords wire: Ma;, in j i ur enterprise; yon il always\\nhave my beat wish.- for youi i i u will do, he said, what\\nyour lather, whose memory yon cannol honor too much, has told you,\\nand Mm will never beat fault. It Is said he discovered byanacd-\\nhat the greatest pi ith all their learning and their\\nres arch, had not found out.\\nTin: ii.ack Off i J I k 01\\nThe legittmal the object of the verbis after it, when\\nin ..r i verb; ami immediately before it. when it is a\\npronoun. Thi on the place of personal pronouns,\\nwhen they are i i r t or indirect objects of the verb, mnst here,\\nbe borne in mind.\\nEx.\\nold age, for yon also will he old.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0446.jp2"}, "447": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 165\\nLa religion seule peat /aire supporter de telles in/or tunes,\\nreligion alone can make us bear such misfortunes.\\nLes yeux de Vamitie se trompent rarement, the eyes of\\nfriendship are rarely deceived.\\nActive Verbs alone have a direct object, and only one if\\nthey have a second object, that can only be an indirect one.\\nHence, when an active verb has for its direct object a verb, the\\nnoun or pronoun, which is also connected with it, must neces-\\nsarily be an indirect object.\\nEx. Je lui ai entendu chanter cela souvent, I have often heard\\nhim sing that.\\nChanter,here, is the direct object, consequently Him must be\\ntranslated by lui.\\nII a donne le meilleur avis a cet homme, he has given this\\nman the best advice.\\nPassive Verbs have an indirect object by means of the pre-\\npositions de or par the former is used when the action of the\\nverb is of a moral or mental nature, the latter, when it applies\\nto physical agencies.\\nEx. Elle est aimee de tout le monde, she is beloved by every-\\nbody.\\nH a ete vaincu par un nombre superieur, he has been\\nbeaten by superior numbers.\\nNeuter Verbs have no object at all, when they express a\\nmere state or condition, although they may be followed by a\\nword which has the appearance of an object, whilst it is in\\nreality but a repetition of their own meaning.\\nEx. Malgre les soins des medecins elle languit toujour s, in\\nspite of the care of the physicians she is still lan-\\nguishing.\\nDormir le sommeil des justes, to sleep the sleep of the\\njust.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0447.jp2"}, "448": {"fulltext": "166 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nOtbe) neuter verbs have an indirect object, with which they\\nare connected by different prepositions.\\nEx. Les exces de tous les genres nuisent a la sanlc, excess of\\nevery kind is injurious to health.\\nII ne faut jamais medire de son voisin, we must never\\nspeak ill of our neighbor.\\nPronominal verbs have for their object the personal pronoun\\nwith which they are connected. This may be the direct or the\\nindirect object, a difference which does not appear in the infin-\\nitive, where all such verbs have se, but in the conjugation.\\nEx. JEst-ce quHl s esi iearti Ju chemin droit P (aeons.) Ila.s be\\nlost the right road?\\nOn i touvent trap turd, (dat.) We reproach our-\\nselves often too late.\\nmil verba bave only an indii t object.\\nEx. Ii is aider, it is proper fbt\\nyour brother to assist you.\\nThe only case in which the object is placed before its wrl is\\nin questions, when the object is connected with an interrogative\\npronoun or adverb of quantity.\\nEx. Qut I voulez-vous gueje vou* d m,r f What l k lo\\nii want me to give you I\\nHow many of\\nthese children go to your bcI\\nIf, in any Other 19886, nnpha-is or any other motive should\\ninduce us to place the object before the verb, it must be\\nrepeated in it- proper place with the verb, as a personal\\npronoun.\\nEx. That I knew before yon told me of \\\\t,cela,jt feasant*\\nonntt i/ii rous n\\nTbeM pictures I know, those 1 have never seen before,\\nU% connais, quant a ceux-ia, jc he let\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2int.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0448.jp2"}, "449": {"fulltext": "167\\nWhen two verbs have one and the same direct object, it is\\nfrequently though not necessarily placed after the first verb\\nand repeated in the form of a pronoun with the second.\\nEx. Les voleurs pillerent et brulerent la maison, the robbers\\nplundered and burnt the house.\\nJ ai ecrit la lettre et je Vai envoy ee, I have written and\\nsent the letter.\\nExercise.\\nHe has recommended this young man to study at some German\\nuniversity, because they teach students there to speak Latin. How\\nmuch money did you give him 1 I gave your friend all I had about\\nme, which was not much, but I promised him more, if he should want\\nit. Those men I once saw on a steamboat in the United States, but I\\nhave never seen them again since. He struck and broke the pitcher,\\nwhilst he was so much excited that he did not know what he was\\ndoing. The first operation of the kind was made on Louis XIV. by a\\ncelebrated surgeon, whose fame has come down to our day. An\\nignorant and proud young man is despised by all who know him, and\\nis rarely beloved even by his nearest friends. Gunpowder was invented\\niu Germany by a shoemaker, if we may believe the legend, and shells\\nby a bishop of the same country. When I asked him if he was happy\\nnow, he replied very gruffly That you know as well as I I shall give\\nyou no answer.\\nTHE TENSES AND MOODS OF THE VERB.\\nI. THE INFINITIVE.\\nThe Infinitive, giving simply the meaning of the verb, is to\\nall intents and purposes a noun, which names the verb. Its\\ngeneral nature is the same as in English, except that it is not\\naccompanied in French by a particle, corresponding to the\\nEnglish To. The latter is required in English to mark words,\\nwhich are otherwise perfectly like nouns, as verbs, like The\\nlove and To love, The sleep and To sleep. In French, verbs", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0449.jp2"}, "450": {"fulltext": "16S ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nhaving a peculiar form need no such mark of distinction, and\\nhence the English to is translated only when it has the sig-\\nnification of In order to, or a similar one.\\nEx. He would like to please you in every thing, il voudrait\\nvous plaire en tout.\\nHe did it to please yon, il Va fait pour vous plaire.\\nThe infinitive is so truly a noun, as the name of the verb,\\nthat it may be used with the definite and indefinite article.\\nEx. Ce ritst pas la vwrt que je crains, Jest It mourir, it is\\nnot death I fear, it is dying.\\nLa paix devieni necessairc, comme le manger et le boire,\\npeace becomes necessary, like eating and drinking.\\nThere are, however, peculiar purposes for which the infinitive\\nis used in French differently from the English usage, of which\\nthe following cases are the moat important,\\nThe infinitive, Bimply, IB OSed alter all verbs of motion, instead\\nof the English conjunction And or the parti. le To.\\nEx 1 wenl to Bee him, but he uh- cot at home, fallai U voir,\\nlui.\\nGo and look for the doctor, wherever he may be, oWes\\nc/nrr/ttr I /in ill it ii. partout i-u il putt i tic.\\nTin infinitive, simply, is also used for the second of two verbs\\nfollowing each other immediately in the same tense.\\nEl. 1 thought I law yOQ in that stole,/ croyau runs ran-\\ndans c magarin.\\nThey imagined they had lost every thing by his failure,\\n\\\\U i dans 8a banque-\\nThe infinitive is used after all prepositions but one, instead of\\nthe participle presi nt in Englishi\\nEx. Without Baying a word he went away, mum dire mut ii\\nalia.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0450.jp2"}, "451": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 169\\nHe never returned after having said farewell, il ne revint\\njamais apres avoir dit adieu.\\nThe preposition en alone is used with the participle present\\nin the sense of By or While.\\nEx. He has succeeded only by working day and night, il n a\\nreussi qu en travaillant jour et nuit.\\nShe fell asleep while reading the new novel, elle s endor-\\nmit en lisant le nouveuu roman.\\nThe English preposition In is not translated by en, but by a\\nwith the infinitive.\\nEx. Je passe mon temps a lire et a ecrire, I spend my time in\\nreading and writing.\\nThe infinitive with de is used for a verb which is the imme-\\ndiate object of another verb, instead of the English participle\\npresent.\\nEx. Have you done reading this paper Avez-vvus fini de\\nlire ce journal?\\nShe will try pleasing you better next time, elle essayera\\nde vous plaire mieu.c la prochaine fois\\nThe English a, sometimes placed before such participles,\\nremains, of course, untranslated in French.\\nEx. He has gone a-shooting to-day, il est alle cliasser aujour-\\nd hui.\\nWhen they saw him they burst out a-laughing, quand Us\\nle virent Us eclaterent de rire.\\nThe infinitive, simply, is used for English participles that are\\nused as nouns, unless a French noun should express the same\\nidea.\\nEx. That is to say seeing is believing, Jest comme qui dira.it\\nvoir Jest croire.\\n1 am surprised to hear you do not like dancing, je suis\\nsurpris d apprendre que vous n aimez pas la danse.\\nThe infinitive, preceded by etre a, has the power of the\\npassive verb in English.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0451.jp2"}, "452": {"fulltext": "170 ON THE FAKTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Cette maison est a loner de suite, this house is to be rented\\nout at once.\\nCes pauvres orphelins sont beaueoup a plaindre, these poor\\norphans are much to be pitied.\\nIn placards and notices of every kind, the verb Hrt is often\\nomitted. Hence a louer, or a vendre, means simply. For rent, or\\nFor sale, and d continue); at the end of a fragment of a story. To\\nbe continued.\\nThe infinitive is occasionally, by ellipsis, placed directly after\\nadverbs interrogative.\\nEx. Comment f aire eela sans aide et sans argent? How can\\nthis be done without help and without money?\\nThe infinitive is used instead of the English participle present,\\nwhich qualifies the direct object of a preceding verb.\\nEx. I have Been your l n ther painting, fax vu peindre votre\\nI have also heard him Binging in a low voice, je few\\nWhen the participle proBoul belongs t\u00c2\u00ab b verb expressing nn\\naction, it i preferable to translate it by the relative pronoun qui\\nwiiii the proper\\nEx. I have net her walking La the street,,/ qui\\nTli.v have detected him hiding the stolen money, Us Vont\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0I BOii.\\nThe Bngtiah participle present, used as a noun, may be\\naccompanied by a i- ire pronoun, as in the phrase, M\\\\\\ng so. This is utterly out of the question, and expressions of\\nthis kind must be entirely changed, so as to I in conformity\\na itfa the rales above given,\\nEx. The reason of my saying bo was this, raison pourquoi\\nje Cat dit /ill r,ri.\\nrefusing to work, thai docs not matter, quant", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0452.jp2"}, "453": {"fulltext": "171\\nThe English participle present, used as a noun, may also\\nenter into the composition of compound nouns. This is im-\\npossible in French, and the participle must be rendered by a\\nnoun or a verb in the infinitive.\\nEx. Where can I find the dancing-master Ou pourrais-je\\ntrouver le maitre de dame?\\nI have mislaid my writing-paper, fai deplace mon papier\\na ecrire.\\nIt must not be forgotten that the participle present cannot, as\\nin English, be used with the verb etre, but that, instead, the\\nsimple verb is employed.\\nEx. He was reading when I saw him, il limit quandje le vis.\\nThe table at which I was sitting was a round one, la table\\noibjefus assis, etait ronde.\\nExercise.\\nI thought I knew every thing until I became his pupil, and then I\\nfound I had only commenced learning. He did it for the purpose oi\\npleasing me, but he did not succeed, for I had expected hearing him\\nsing, and he would not do that. Eating, drinking and sleeping is all\\nshe has been doing this week, for she is too weak still for walking, or\\neven for riding out. He has gone and paid all his debts with the\\nmoney you gave him for having saved your plate during the fire.\\nThis little girl took great pains in knitting for her grandmother, but\\nshe did not understand sewing it up, and it all resulted in nothing. If\\nyou find any difficulty in doing this for me, you must not give your-\\nself any unnecessary trouble. I can easily find somebody else, who\\nwould like undertaking it for me. We could see the soldiers marching\\nup and down the square, but we were too far to hear the music. You\\nare always taking pleasure in teasing her but she is very gentle, and\\nyesterday, while going to church, she praised you for your good\\nbehavior. Tou write so badly, you ought to take a good writing-\\nmaster and practise writing every day.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0453.jp2"}, "454": {"fulltext": "172 OX THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nII. THE PRESENT TENSE.\\nThe present is used as in English to denote an action which\\ni- now xoino; on, or one which is immediately to follow or for\\nwhich preparations are being made.\\nEx. Dans ce moment je suis encore incertain, at this moment\\nI am yet undecided.\\nVoust snvez queje vats en France avec mon pere, you know\\nI am jjoing to France with my father.\\nBut, when the futnre is not of this immediate nature, the\\nfuture must be used in French for the English present.\\nEx. I mil tell him so, when 1 aee him, je le lui dirai quand\\nje le verrai.\\nThe present ie used instead of the English future after the\\ninction at, if, and is the only tense, besides the imperfect,\\nwhich can be used after\\nEx. I will pay him well if he will do it,je A payerai bien $*U\\nI, fait.\\nThe pre*en1 is ased in historical writing or in oratorical and\\nvery animated Btyle, instead of the pasl tense, for the purpose\\nater liveliness and emph\\nttent sur Vennemi,\\nadvances; his troops throw themselves upon the\\nmy.\\nmalheureux! II fenfuir, il est troptardf The\\nunhappy man Be wants to Bee it ia too late\\na which express a futun like when, while, as\\n.and others, which express a pasl like after,\\nare frequently used in English with the presont\\ni .h is more precise in these cases and requires\\nlively the past or the future after them.\\nEx. When he comes back, be will dine al once, quand il ren-\\nin i", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0454.jp2"}, "455": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 173\\nI will tell him as soon as I see him,/*? le lui dirai aussi-\\ntot que je le verrui.\\nHe always sleeps after he dines, il dort toujours apres\\navoir dine.\\nExercise.\\nHe loves peace, lie blames all extremes, and enjoys the happy\\nchanges which take place under his benevolent rale. My friends are\\nall ready the boat is at the landing let us bid farewell, and we will\\nstart as soon as you have done weeping. I shall certainly punish him\\nif he does it again, for it is a bad habit, which must be overcome at\\nonce or it becomes his master. Will you be very glad when she be\\ncomes your brother s wife I do not know yet, for I have never seen\\nher but I will tell you frankly how I like her after I have made her\\nacquaintance. Do not leave this place till he tells you to do so it is\\nvery important that somebody should be here to receive visitors in\\nhis absence. You can take a walk along the shore while I am re-\\nmaining by the boat to see that nobody steals the oars and our\\nclothes. If you will allow me to go away for a few minutes, I shall\\nbe very much obliged to you. It is not, necessary for you to coma\\nback till I am ready to accompany you.\\nIII. THE PAST TENSES.\\nThe French verb has three past tenses, which represent the\\nmeaning of the English two past tenses; hence, there arises\\nsome difficulty in knowing exactly which of the three to employ.\\nFortunately, the rules in French are very positive, and at the\\nsame time very clear, so that very little attention suffices to\\nacquire the tact necessary for their use. Of these three tenses,\\ntwo are simple the imperfect and the preterit definite and\\none is compound, the preterit indefinite.\\nThe Imperfect has its name from the fact that it refers to a\\npast action, the time of which is purposely left undecided in\\nitself, imperfect, but measured only by another action, begin-\\nning or ending at the same time.\\nEx. J pensais a vous quand vous etes entre, I was thinking\\nof you when you came in.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0455.jp2"}, "456": {"fulltext": "174 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTEXCE.\\nElle dormait profondiment, quand je cessai de lire, she\\nslept profoundly when I stopped reading.\\nIt is generally, though not necessarily, expressed in English\\nby the verb To be, with the participle present.\\nIts principal purposes are to express an action, which is\\ncontinued for a long time, and this is generally expressed iu\\nEnglish by I was, with the participle present.\\nEx. I was living ten years in that house, je vivais dix ans\\ndans cette maison.\\n1 loved her so much, when she was with us! Je 1 aimais\\ntaut quand elle 6ta.it urn- nous/\\nOr an action frequently repeated, and this is generally expressed\\nby I u-\\nEx. Formerly I osed to read very little, autrefois je ne lisaia\\nThey used t come to see us every Sunday, Us venaient\\nDimanchta.\\nThe imperii B, thirdly, any past action, which is\\nBigoated definitely by any expression of time.\\nEx. fl teurs, we were victorious (so Gar).\\ni, ir itait un des plus grandu hommes, Ceesar was one\\nof the greatesl men.\\n1 did net know thai i bofore).\\nas has already been Btated, the only tense\\nwhich can I r if. tor anj English tense except the\\nEx. be w to come to-morrow, it would he too late, s*U\\ntrop tard.\\nI I do it. if he should insist upon i s U\\nitt bas it- name from the fact that it\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ion, the time of which i^ well determined by\\nfinition of time, and be ipsed.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0456.jp2"}, "457": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 175\\nEx. Nous y alldmes kier, we went there yesterday.\\nCest le mhne jour oil naquit Moliere, that is the same\\nday on which Moliere was born.\\nThe principal purposes of this tense are to express actions\\nwhich have ended completely, and hence it is the historical\\ntense of the French.\\nEx. Cette balaillefut livree en 1812, this battle was fought in\\n1812.\\nCet infortune roi expia ses crimes sur V echafaud, that most\\nunfortunate king expiated his crimes on the scaffold.\\nIt cannot, therefore, be used for actions accompanied by\\nwords, like This year, this week, etc., because these periods of\\ntime have not yet completely elapsed nor can it state what\\nhas been done to-day.\\nThe preterit definite is, secondly, used to express all past\\nactions accompanied by a definition of time, as the date, etc.\\nEx. Je rCy arrival que le quinze Juin, I only arrived there\\nthe fifteenth of June.\\nII me le dit unjour que nous fumes ensemble, he told me\\nso one day when we were together.\\nThe Preterit Indefinite has its name from the fact that it\\nrefers to a past action, the time of which is not yet com-\\npletely elapsed, although the action itself has come to an end-\\nHence, this is the tense which expresses, all actions accom-\\npanied by words like This year, this month, to-day, etc.\\nEx. L avez-vous rencontree ce matin Did you meet her this\\nmorning\\ntPai eu la fievre deux fois cette annee, I had the fever twice\\nthis year.\\nIt is used, secondly, to express past actions, the effects ol\\nwhich have not yet entirely passed away, or are at least repre\\nsented as still continuino-.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0457.jp2"}, "458": {"fulltext": "176 OX THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Auez-votts conclu voire marchi uvec cet komme? Did you\\nclose your bargain with this man\\nLes Grecs nous ont donne les Beaux Arts, the Greeks\\nLave given us the Fine Arts.\\nHence, past tenses accompanied by adverbs, like Always,\\noften, never, etc., will be expressed by the preterit indefinite,\\nbecause these adverbs extend the action indefinitely.\\nEx. tPai toujour* craint qu il n y en suit uiusi, I always feared it\\n11 light be SO.\\nII riajam m voulu nous avouer son crime, he never would\\nacknowledge his crime.\\nExercise.\\nW liilr-t we were at dinner, a band of musicians came into the room\\nthey played for Beveral hoars, until tin- time for the evening concert,\\nwhen they left the hotel Louis XL was a wise, bat a wicked king\\noodone; he suffered all his life\\nfrom jealousy and (ear of being murdered. We used to sit on that\\n1m neb and look upon the lake every evening last Bummer; we always\\n:i u any other in this neighborhoodL Tin\\neighteenth of June it lasted for ten hours\\nthe Gate the conflict changed, and finally our troops\\na brillianl victory. Did you see him this morning going to\\nimbler with its fresh and pure water tor his\\nin to-day, I Ut I saw him yesterday\\nirejAslted the beautiful castle at Pau, they showed\\nroom, an\u00c2\u00abl the servant said, with an air of great solemnity;\\n1 1 1 1 ry IV was born I Wealways hoped he would come\\n\u00e2\u0080\u009e\u00e2\u0080\u009e,l i him. but whilst were ezpecting him\\nto this country late lust\\nr to the littk (arm of bis son In-\\ns playii\\nI called her husband he\\nthai time we have not played\\na- long as I\\nfound thai", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0458.jp2"}, "459": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 177\\nwas no limit to his extravagance, he ceased supplying him with\\nmoney. If I were in his place, I would not think of it any more\\nthe money is lost, and it is of no avail to regret such losses. If it\\nshould be found again, even that would not make much difference,\\nfor the money was not his. When we reached the gate of the city,\\nwhich used to he open during the whole night, we found it shut, to\\nour surprise and as the watchman was sleeping, we did not rouse him\\nfor half an hour, during which we stood in the rain, wet and\\nshivering.\\nCOMPOUND PAST TENSES.\\nThe Pluperfect, formed of the imperfect of auxiliary verbs\\nwith the participle past, is used in precisely the same manner\\nas the imperfect itself, only with regard to a past action, which\\nprecedes another past action.\\nEx. tPavais dejeune, quand vous vintes me demander, I had\\nbreakfasted when yon came for me.\\nThe action of breakfasting, here, is represented not only as\\npast in itself, but as past previously to the other past action of\\nyour coming. This second action, however, need not be\\nspecially expressed it may be represented by a definition of\\ntime.\\nEx. II avail fini son ouvrage a minuit, he had finished his\\nwork at midnight.\\nThe pluperfect is employed, also, like the imperfect, for\\nactions accompanied in English by t ^e words Used to.\\nEx. I used to read as soon as I had dined, je lisais aussitot\\nque f avals dine.\\nIt is, likewise, employed after si, if, because that conjunction\\ncannot be used with any other past tense but the imperfect, and\\nthe pluperfect contains the imperfect of the auxiliary verbs.\\nEx. S il n J a.vait pas fait cela, il aurait ete perdu, if he had\\nnot done that he would have been lost.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0459.jp2"}, "460": {"fulltext": "ITS OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nModern writers are disposed occasionally to substitute the\\nsubjunctive of the preterit anterior for the pluperfect, but it\\nremains to be seen whether this elegant though bold form of ex-\\npression will be adopted by standard authors.\\nEx. S il cut ete le chef, il y aura it peut-itre rt medie, if he had\\nbeen the commander, he might have mended it.\\nThe Preterit Anterior, formed of the preterit definite of\\nauxiliary verbs with the participle past, partakes again of the\\nnature of the simple preterit and expresses a past action, which\\nis immediate); followed by another past action, so that it is\\nfully classed and marked as Bach by the second action, to which\\nil is anterior.\\nEx. Quand feus reconnu mon erreur, fen fus honteux, when\\nI had seen my trior. J was ashamed of it\\nIt will, likewise, be used whenever the time of the past\\nis determined a definition of time, or words like bim-\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0i Ir billet de ma soeur, I bad Boon read mv\\ni\\nVeut renversi en hu instant, having\\nonce seised him. be bad overthrown him in an instant,\\nit imi-t t\u00c2\u00bb i such conjunction!\\npress immediate, definite action, as quand, when aussittt que,\\nm the time that, etc\\n,i m en allai, as soon as 1 bad\\nfinished it. I wenl away.\\nBS 1 had\\naim.\\ni Indefinite, mentioned by some\\nformed from the preterit indefinite f the\\nauxin. ii the partici| such rare occurrence\\nthat it h: not been specially mentioned. Foreigners do better to\\navoid or the Infinitive U\\nable in all c", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0460.jp2"}, "461": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 179\\nEx. Je Vai vu apres que j ai eu deje ne ce matin, I saw liim\\nafter I had breakfasted this morning.\\nOr, Je Vai vu apres inon deje-dner ce matin.\\nExercise.\\nAs soon as I had heard of your misfortune, I took all the necessary\\nmeasures to come to your aid and when I had told my wife of my\\nintentions, I went to the depot and took the cars. He was not satis-\\nfied with the picture, but, after he had changed the sketch several\\ntimes, he gave it up in despair. We only stopped when we had\\nwalked half-way, because we saw that we would not have arrived\\nthere before sunset, even if we had started before noon. When he\\nhad taken a hearty meal, at dinner or at supper, he used to sleep and\\nthat habit injured his health so much, that he died before he had\\nreached the age of sixty. It was a great disappointment to the crowd\\nof curious people, who had gone to see the review when they reached\\nthe place they found that they had come too late, and that the troops\\nhad all returned to the barracks. When I was the first time in\\nRome, nothing had made a greater impression upon me than the\\nPope and the ceremonies of the Roman Church when I was there\\nlast year, the charm had lost its power, for I had become another\\nman. As soon as the matter had been reported to the police, they\\nhad gone to work to find out the thieves and hence, while you had as\\nyet heard nothing of the robbery, the criminals were already in\\nprison.\\nV. FUTURE AND CONDITIONAL.\\nThe Future simply expresses an action which is still to take\\nplace, as in English, and represents, therefore, the English\\nexpression I am going to occasionally.\\nEx. JVos corps resusciteront au jour dernier, our bodies will\\narise on the last day.\\nII ne vous reconnaitra pas sous ce decfuisement, he will\\nnot recognize you in that disguise.\\nIt is employed als as a mild form of the imperative.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0461.jp2"}, "462": {"fulltext": "180 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Vans remercierez ce monsieur qui a tan* fait pour vous,\\nyou will thank that gentleman, who has done so much\\nfor you.\\nIt is occasionally placed at the head of a sentence, before the\\nsubject, to convey a peculiar emphasis urged with doubt.\\nEx. Croira qui voudra ce conte, moije ne le peux pas, let those\\nwho choose, believe this story, I cannot.\\nThe Future Anterior, formed of the future of the auxiliary\\nverb with the participle past, expresses a future action which\\nwill precede another future action.\\nEx. Qtumd ft xemi r6iabli,firai vous voir, when I am well\\nagain, I will come and see yon.\\nJ tiurui tout /ait t quand vous rentrerez, 1 shall have done\\nevery thing, when yon come hack.\\nIt has been mentioned already with the remarks on the\\nthat the future must in French be used instead of the\\nEnglish present, after conjunctions which have a future mean-\\nEx, lui dirai aussitdt gwje h verrai, I will tell him so,\\nas soon as I Bee him.\\nqu il mini iU eli,- iimis, he\\nwill certainly come after he has been at our house.\\nIt must be borne In mind, here, thai the English verba Will\\nnnd Shrill arc used, now as Independent verbs ami now as aux-\\niliaries, to fam the future. In the latter case, the; are, of coarse,\\nsimply translated by the French future; in the former case they\\nbe rendered by tie verbs voutoir and d\\nwill come\\nA.-k aim if lie will come r not, Vi nnir\\nIt shall t\\ntU a r.\\nShall it be done ire", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0462.jp2"}, "463": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 181\\nExercise.\\nI beg you, do what you can to keep him from going away now, for,\\nif he does so, he will surely lose the best opportunity he has ever had\\nof distinguishing himself. Let those who choose believe the historians\\nwho give this account of the great Alexander they give us nothing\\nbut fictions. What will he do if he lose his place he has no fortune\\nand he will have to work for his living. When the doctor Ipft us he\\nsaid to the nurse, You will give her her medicine every two hours\\nand you will watch her sleep carefully, so that she is not disturbed by\\nany noise. If she sleeps through the night, she will escape the danger,\\nand her life is saved. 1 had no money about me, and told him I will\\npay your bill when you bring it to my house I shall be at home after\\nI have dined at the Club, and I shall not leave the house again until\\nto-morrow. He will have accomplished a great deed if he succeeds in\\nthis enterprise it will be recorded in history as one of the most\\ndaring things that have ever been undertaken by man.\\nThe Conditional expresses an action dependent on a con-\\ndition.\\nEx. JVous se?ions bien contents si nous en avions autant, we\\nwould be well pleased if we had as much.\\nThis condition, however, is not always expressed by si, if, or\\nat all, but may be understood.\\nEx. Dites-lui que je le vermis avec plaisir, mais que je suis\\nmalade, tell him 1 would see him with pleasure, but\\nthat I am sick.\\nJe serais fache de le trouver malade, I should be sorry to\\nfind him sick.\\nPourriez-vous le croire coupable d un tel forfait Could\\nyou think him guilty of such a crime\\nThe Conditional Anterior, formed of the conditional of the\\nauxiliary verb and the participle past, expresses an action thus\\ndependent, and preceding a condition.\\nEx. iTaurais fini si Von ne in!avait interrompu, I would have\\nfinished, if I had not been interrupted.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0463.jp2"}, "464": {"fulltext": "182 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nQue serait-il arrive s il detail pas venu What would\\nhave happened if he had not come\\nInstead of this form of the past conditional, French authors\\nfrequently employ the subjunctive of the past, with the par-\\nticiple past, but the use of this form belongs more to elevated\\nthan to conversational style.\\nEx. l m e t era, il me fentreprise, if he had\\nbelieved me, he would have abandoned the enter-\\nprise.\\nThe French conditional can never be used, as in English, after\\nsi, if, but in its place the imperfect must be employed.\\nEx If he Bhould say yes, I would be delighted, s il tUtait que\\nI would prefer thai you should read the letter yourself; it was\\naddressed to you, nnd If 1 were to re:.d it. your IYi. ml might 1m dis-\\ni iid you do if he wi on alone In a dark\\nroom, after havin ry I would not be much\\nfor I have ii l my paiv.n\\nI would have told you bo before, if\\nyou l; ;e, but you that you would not have\\npaid an] attention to my words, Ifl had then spoken to yon. Would\\nhim of such vices, who had the appearance\\nmoat vinoons and honorable man f [am sure thai [would never\\nhave ly had told me bo but now, naving seen it\\nwith any longer. If 1 could\\nr for a few minut* I would b for 1 have d\\nhear for two years, and i: won\\niiry without Baying her.\\nVI. TltK IMl i RAT1VE\\nThe Tmper the meaning of the verb in the\\nin. mm ling, entreating i permitting.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0464.jp2"}, "465": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 183\\nEx. Allez de suite chercher le medecin, go immediately for the\\ndoctor.\\nVeuillcz agreer mes kommages, accept my respects.\\nFaites ce que vous voudrez, il importe peu, do what you\\nlike, it matters little.\\nThe French imperative expresses no pronoun as nominative,\\nas is sometimes done in English.\\nEx. Let us be prudent and we shall escape, soy oris sages et\\nnous en eckapperons.\\nThe first person singular is never used, because man does not\\ncommand himself in an audible tone he wills, and without con-\\nveying his will to himself, he acts. On the stage, however, and\\nin poetry, where his thoughts are clad in words, the first person\\nplural is used in monologues.\\nEx. Allans, vaincons nos passions Up, let me overcome my\\npassions.\\nThe third person of the imperative is borrowed from the\\nsubjunctive of the present, and hence is always preceded by the\\nconjunction que, as the first part of the sentence, je veux, and\\nthe like, is understood.\\nEx. Qu il s en aille de suite ou je le chasserai, let him go\\naway instantly or I shall drive him off.\\nQuHls ne le /assent plus s 7 il veulent que je leur pardonne,\\nlet them not do it again, if they wish to be forgiven.\\nVII. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nThe Subjunctive mood has its name from the fact that in form\\nand in meaning it is always subjoined, subordinate to another\\nidea for it never expresses any thing, that is, any positive action,\\nlike the indicative, but something that maj be, a contingent\\naction. Now, what is contingent, depends upon something\\nelse, and this is the principal part of the proposition, of which", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0465.jp2"}, "466": {"fulltext": "184 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nthe verb in the subjunctive forms the subordinate part. The\\ntwo parts of the proposition must, like any two verbs, which\\nexpress distinct ideas and yet are brought into connection with\\neach other, be united by the conjunction que; and hence it\\ncomes that the subjunctive is never found in French unaccom-\\npanied by a conjunction. It would, however, be a grave error\\nto imagine that this conjunction governs the subjunctive it is\\nthe meaning given to the verb alone, which determines whether\\nit is to be used in the indicative or subjunctive mood, and the\\nsame conjunction may, therefore, be followed by either.\\nEx. Je doute j t il soit venu aujourcFkui, I doubt whether he\\ncame to-day.\\nest venu avjourcCkui, I know he did come\\nto-day.\\nThe general rule for the ose of the Bubjunctive mood is\\namply, that it must 1 employed whenever the meaning of the\\nverb ia not positive but contingent, and consequently dependent\\non another part of the proposition.\\nThe tense of the Bubjunctive t be used is determined by the\\n9 ience of rena a, which has reference to\\nthe manner in which the tenses follow each other in the two\\nparts of the proposition. The principal part will contain the\\nindicative, which has five tenses; the subordinate part, the\\nsubjunctive, which has only two tenses, the present and the\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2y of precisely attributing the latter two\\nb former five. The rule i- this: The present and future\\nof tie in stive i the present;\\nand the conditional of the indicative are\\nthe Bubjunctive of the\\nj Yen have t il it.\\n[1 i will have to do it.\\ni You had to do it.\\nl\\nI JToa have had to do it,\\n.1.1 b*Tf tO dO It", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0466.jp2"}, "467": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 185\\nThe general principle which determines the use of the sub-\\njunctive mood produces the following practical results\\n1. Verbs expressive of a wish, from the gentlest desire to the\\npositive command, and verbs expressive of fear or doubt, are\\nfollowed by the subjunctive, because whatever is wished,\\nordered, feared or doubted is not represented as actually being\\nthe case, but only as a thing that may or may not be, according\\nas the wish, fear or doubt is realized or not.\\nEx. Tu veux qu en la faveur on croie V impossible, thou wilt\\nhave us believe the impossible for thy sake.\\nJ at lends lous les moments qu il vienne, I expect him to\\ncome any moment.\\nII avait peur que je ne m en ullasse de suite, he was afraid\\nI would go away at once.\\nDoutes-vous qu il y ait un Dieu Do you doubt that\\nthere is a God\\nE\\\\*en some of these verbs, however, may be followed by the\\nindicative, as e. g., the verbs, arreter, to enact, commander, to\\ncommand, exiger, to require, etc., when they are used in laws of\\nthe country or orders of the Government, because then they\\nadmit of no contingency, but state what must positively be\\ndone.\\nEx. Arrete que la cour s assemblera demain, it is enacted that\\nthe court will meet to-morrow.\\n2. Verbs expressive of what exists only in our mind, as pen-\\nser, to think, soutenir, to maintain, soupconner, to suspect,\\nesperer, to hope, parier, to bet, s imaginer, to imagine, and all\\nwith similar meaning, are followed by the subjunctive, because\\nwhat we only think, imagine, suspect, etc., is likewise represented\\nnot as actual but only as possible.\\nEx. Pensez-vous qu il soil deja sorti Do you think he has\\nalready gone ou", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0467.jp2"}, "468": {"fulltext": "L86 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nUs s ijnaginent que tons soient mediants comme eux, they\\nfancy everybody is as wicked as they.\\nJe ne crois pas qiCil Va.it dit, I do not think he said so.\\nBut, whenever these same verbs are employed to state our\\nconviction or some positive fact, they must be followed by the\\nindicative.\\nEx. Je pense que vous avez appris cela bien, I think you have\\n(positively) learnt this well.\\nSongez qu on nut vous perdre et ne ntgligez ricn, think\\nthat they want to ruin you, anil neglect nothing.\\nJe cmis qu il y a an Dim qui i/i\\\\i a Y, I believe that\\nthere is a God who has created me.\\n3. Impersonal verb? which express duty, satisfaction, etc., and\\nthe verb itre used impersonally before adjectives of similar\\nmeaning; arc followed by the subjunctive.\\nit is Impor-\\ntant he should be informed ofil Becretly.\\npo dble q tilli ne soit las j, une, it is possible she\\nmay be no longer yo i\\ni lit it was sad slie\\nshould hare been left thus.\\nBut if these impersonal verba or the adjective after itrc have\\ntive meaning, the indicative will here also be\\nEx. it appears h did come\\nafter all.\\n11 est plus riche, it i evident he is do\\nlonger rich.\\n(ten happens that\\nmistakun.\\nationa, an 1 are. in accordance", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0468.jp2"}, "469": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 187\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2wilh these, followed either by the indicative or the subjunctive^\\nThe principal verbs of this class are\\nAttentive que, to wait until,\\nentendre, to require,\\npvetendve, to expect,\\nsupposer, to suppose,\\nsembler, to seem (and not to be),\\nattentive, to expect,\\nentendre, to hear, understand,\\npretendre, to maintain,\\nsupposer, to admit,\\nRemoter, to seem (and to be so), _\\nwith the subjunctive.\\nwith the indicative.\\nEx. II senible que ce mat soit sans remede, it looks as if this dis-\\nease is incurable.\\nIt semble qu elle a vraiment epouse cet homme, it seems sho\\nhas actually married that man.\\nAttendez qu il vienne et je vous presenterai, wait till he\\ncomes and I will introduce you.\\nX attends qu il est mort hier, I expect he did die yesterday.\\n4. Relative superlatives, which state the highest degree of a\\nquality, not as it is absolutely, but relatively to what may be,\\nwords of the same meaning, as premie?; principal, unique, seul,\\netc., and indefinite pronouns followed by a relative pronoun,\\nrequire the subjunctive after them, because of the vague and\\nindefinite meaning which they necessarily give to that part of\\nthe proposition.\\nEx. Cest la plus belle femme que faie jamais vue, she is the\\nfinest woman I have ever seen.\\nLe scul homme qui soit plus grand que sa reputation, the\\nonly man who is greater than his reputation.\\nJe voudrais voiv quelqu un qui put mieux faive, I should\\nlike to see any one who could do better.\\nII y a peu de gens qui en sachent autant, there are few\\npeople who know as much.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0469.jp2"}, "470": {"fulltext": "1SS OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nBut here, also, the meaning may be a positive one, and then\\nthe indicative is required.\\nEx. Peu de gens qui font essuye ont rcussi, few who have\\ntried it have succeeded.\\nJ ai vu quelqu un qui le connait de vue, I have seen\\nsomebody who knows him by sight.\\n5. Verbs expressive of tear, from mere apprehension to\\ntrembling, etc., and of denial of any kind, are not only followed\\nby the verb in the subjunctive mood, but the verb must also be\\npreceded by the negative particle ne.\\nEx. Ell nil qu elle m Petit vu Ater, Bhe denies having seen\\nhim yesterday.\\nera ru tie soit venu trap tard, I fear they have\\ncome too late.\\ni\\\\~- *ut pas Dieu ru vous punis e Do you\\nnot tremble lest G misb yoa\\n11 ii followed by n\\ni do not rear that lie will\\nflee.\\nThe V( er, t prevent, iviter, to avoid, and prtndrt\\nga /(A, t take care, are likewise followed by the Bubjunctivo\\nwiili n\\nrCailU trop ri:,, be will prevent their\\nPn m tombiezlhl Take care not to\\nfull there,\\nG. There are, finally, certain conjunctions which are followed\\nby tin- subjunctive, not from any power of their own t v ru\\nthat mood, as it i- often erroneously expressed, hut from the\\nthat their m apply only contingent\\ni although,\\ni ided that. u that, U main", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0470.jp2"}, "471": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 189\\nEx. Avant que V empire eprouvat sa puissance, before the\\nEmpire felt his power.\\nPourvu qiCil ne le sache 2 )as t H nefera rien, provided that\\nhe does not know it, he will do nothing.\\nA moins que vous ne preferiez rester id, unless you should\\nprefer staying here.\\nIt will have been seen, from all the examples given, that the\\nconstruction of the subjunctive in French differs essentially\\nfrom that in English. In the former, the connection or\\nthe two parts of the proposition by que is the rule in the\\nlatter, the infinitive or the participle present can be substituted.\\nThus, for the phrase, Je rHaime pas qu il vienne ici, the English\\nmay be I do not like it that he comes here, or, I do not like\\nhim to come here, or, I do not like his coming here.\\nThe general rule on the subject is, that, with the limited ex-\\nceptions which will be mentioned hereafter, all such construc-\\ntions must be rendered in French by means of que and the\\nsubjunctive.\\nEx. I was afraid of his betraying his secret, favais peur qu il\\nne reoelat son secret.\\nWould you wish him to be presented to you Voudriez-\\nvous qiCon vous le presentdt\\nBut the infinitive may be used in French also\\n1. When the subject of the two verbs in the two parts of\\nthe proposition is one and the same.\\nEx. II veut avoir raison contre tout le moiide, he wants to be\\nright against everybody.\\nII a consenti a abandonner le proces, he has consented to\\nabandon the lawsuit.\\nVerbs which take ne after them before the subjunctive, do not.\\nadd it before the infinitive.\\nEx. 11 craignait toujours de tomber, he was always afraid of\\nfaJline;.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0471.jp2"}, "472": {"fulltext": "190 0!N THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\n2. Yerbs expressing command, consent, or obligation, in\\nPersonal verbs, and etre with an adjective, may, in simpl\\n)hrases, be followed by the infinitive with de.\\nEx. Ltd permeltrez-vous d y aller Will you permit him to\\ngo there\\nOn r a force de se taire, they have compelled him to keep\\nquiet.\\nII est doux de rentrer ckez sol, it is pleasant to return\\nhome.\\nWhen que with the subjunctive is followed by another que, as\\nin comparisons* the last que must have de after it.\\nEx. Jltoudraii miew qu i dt rester aeee die,\\nit would better for you to leave than to stay with her.\\n3. Bome of those conjunctions which were mentioned before\\na apt to be followed by the subjunctive, like avani que, a fin\\nque, a moh and loin que, may also\\nbe followed by the infinitive with de, and pour, for, and 8am,\\nwithout, or by the infinitive without de, whenever the subject of\\nthe two parts of the proposition, which they connect, is the\\nEx. J m tow diraiava I ptitter ces lieuz, I will tell you\\nbefore leaving hi\\nr i fail turtout afin de plain h see parents, he did it\\nmainly in ord.r to please his parents.\\nlee eoldate, he hid it to\\nkeep it from the boWw\\ntthoraused with ru before the aubjuno-\\nti\\\\e, whi n 1 1 i r. setion which la ye! aneertaln.\\noei tain), it ought\\nto i,.-i- i.. d done before he dl\\nIt ought to be\\ndone 1). fore he could come.\\nfollowed by a verb, la translated by juequ d a que, and\\ntiveibr contingi at, the Indicative fox i", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0472.jp2"}, "473": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 191\\nEx. J ai cause avec elle jusqu d ce qu elle s endormit, I talked\\nto her until she fell asleep.\\n11 promit d attentive jusqu d ce qu ilfut ventre, he promised\\nto wait until he should come back.\\nWhen two verbs succeed each other, subject to the same\\nconjunction, the latter must be repeated before the second verb,\\nbut only in the form of que, which also takes the place oi si, if,\\nto b.e thus repeated.\\nEx. II seva assez pourvu qu il vienne et qu il vous voie, it will\\nbe enough, so he comes and sees you.\\nSi Van vient et qu on me demande, if anybody comes and\\nasks for me.\\nThere are, finally, a few cases in French, in which the general\\nrule that the subjunctive always forms the secondary dependent\\npart of a proposition, seems to be disregarded. With one ex-\\nception such constructions are elliptical, and therefore only in\\nappearance different from the general form. They are the fol-\\nlowing.\\n1. The imperative and emphatic wish is expressed by que\\nwith the subjunctive, the word of command or wish being\\nomitted but understood.\\nEx. (Je veux) Que chacun veste a sa place Let everybody\\nremain in his seat\\nQue Dieu vous pardonne, la Justice ne le peut pas f may\\nGod pardon you, Justice cannot pardon you.\\n2. In a few proverbial or technical expressions, not only the\\nreceding verb, but even que is by ellipsis omitted.\\nEx. Vive VEmpereur! Vive le. pvince imperial Long live\\nthe Emperor Long life to the Imperial Prince\\nFais ton devoir 7 arrive que voudra Do your duty, hap-\\npen what may\\nThe use of the subjunctive of certain verbs instead of the con-\\nditional construction with si, f, has already been explained.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0473.jp2"}, "474": {"fulltext": "192 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\n3. The only true exception to the general rule is the first\\nperson of the subjunctive present of the verb savoir, to know,\\nwhich is used without being preceded by or dependent on a\\nprevious verb.\\nEx. Sera-t-il ici Pas que je cache. Will he be here? Not\\nthat I know.\\nJe ne xoeke rien qui me ptatrait mieuz que cela, I know\\nnothing that would please me better than that.\\nJe te sacks que cc general qui puisse la commander^ I\\nknow but. this one general who could command it.\\nExercise,\\nTin- soldiers cried out, with on, voice Permit us to die before your\\nfighting for your glory and your name Do you really wish me\\nto Bee and to avoid you hereafter? Wo had Intended to have a\\nii- pic-nic this afternoon, but tin rain prevented our going to\\nthe ion -t, where it was tin- intention that all should collect 1 prefer\\nthat he Bhould be unhappy rather than tlial h should commit so\\na wrong He is astonished that people should have been able\\nto Uve m such times, and to sufi r as much as these unfortunate beings\\nhave suffered during t!i\u00c2\u00bb war. Do you think that in creating n repub-\\nlic of bees, God would not Instruct k m:;s to rule with gentleness and\\npubji i bb? Do you ons of you\\nrobbed you of your money, or did you not rather\\nthin!. bborhood? He doubted that It\\nbut when we awo ht we heard\\nI do not mean you to make any\\nmy account, or to send ami l w- i me It i*\\nit at nil than to do it by halves, Sir,\\naudio\\nther\\nbe\\nken when you imi r\\nyour friends in tin-\\nanller havi", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0474.jp2"}, "475": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 103\\nrequired a large sum of money. It looks as if he had foreseen all the\\ndifficulties, for he had made his will and desired it to he deposited in\\nhank. He was the most learned man Russia had ever produced, and\\nhe received all the honors which were due only to the man who then\\nshed such lustre upon a half barbarous nation. There are few people\\nwho know how to enjoy themselves in a simple, unpretending way\\nmost of the amusements which we enjoy, cost more than they are\\nworth. Let all the men step on one side and all the women remain on\\nthe other side then let them advance, one by one, and receive their\\nwages. This was done, so that there might be no confusion, for the\\ncrowd was very large, and it was feared some tumult might arise amid\\nso great an assemblage; but all went off better than had been\\nexpected. He denies ever having taken opium for such purposes,\\nbut he admits having been forced to eat large quantities, when he\\nwas sick and in the hands of a poor physician. I am not afraid that\\nhe will escape from jail, for he is far too anxious that he should be\\ntried and his innocence be established.\\nThis prevented our going abroad for this year, but we hope, if no\\nmisfortune overtakes us, that another year will see us all assembled\\nat the paternal hearth of our native land. Take care not to forget\\nthe letters which must be written before the mail leaves if I were\\nyou, I would not wait until there is but half an hour s time before its\\nclose. I hope we shall be safe before the tempest breaks out, for the\\nboat is fast, and the little port, for which we are all bound, only a few\\nmiles distant. I will give him the money he wants, provided he will\\npromise me to repay it before he goes away. Be it that there really\\nwas not enough or that they had not the good-will to be liberal, they\\ngave us very little. Were you not afraid of her succumbing to the\\nviolence of the attack, especially as there was no doctor to whom you\\ncould apply at once for assistance I must confess, I was afraid she\\nmight die at any moment, but I also knew that her life was in God s\\nhands, and thus my mind was less disturbed.\\nWould he wish me to come instantly asked the man and when\\nhe understood that he was wanted on the spot, he did not even say\\ngood-bye to his family, but went with the messenger, that he might\\nsee and relieve the sufferer. When the kin r saw the reluctance of his", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0475.jp2"}, "476": {"fulltext": "194 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nministers to sign the proclamation, he said in an angry tone I\\nwill he obeyed and after that all resistance was in vain. Louis XI.\\nalways feared to be murdered by poison or by the dagger, and sur-\\nrounded himself with guards on all sides but his one great enemy,\\nDeath, found him when he least expected him. It is odd to see the\\nfather and the son together they resemble each other so closely, and\\nthe former looks so young and the latter so old, that it seems as if\\nthey were brothers rather. You must tell me your secret before leav-\\ning my room, for I burn to know it, and I will not let you go until\\nyou have told me all. Unless he should spend all his mouey and be\\nreduced to poverty, ho will never consent to his father s conditions,\\nf r 1 do not know anybody who is more obstinate than he. When\\nthey asked him if anybody had been at the house, he answered in a\\nvery rude manner, Nobody, that I know of, and went away.\\nVIII. THE PARTICIPLE PKK.SENT.\\nThe Participle Present presents some difficulties on account\\nof its double nature. B8 a part oi the verb from which it derives\\nits form, its meaning and its regimen, and as an adjective, the\\nfunctions of which it performs by expressing a quality. To do\\nthis, the participle present, which invariably en. Is in ant, as-\\nsumes a feminine form in mate e and a plural form in\\nTin- general rule on the use of this participle is this:\\nThe participle present u declined, when it serves as an ad-\\njective, bo a t agree in gender and number with the noun it\\nqualifies: it is Kit unchanged when it serves as a verb.\\nIn order t know when it is an adjective and when a verb,\\nit need only he inquired if ii express a quality, and then it is\\nthe former or if it express an action and have an object, and\\nthen it is a verb.\\nEx.J aiVM D mvt rrttr dome rh innanlr, have often 6Ccn\\nthis charming lady (quality).\\nJ^ni vu souvefft cette dame eharment t \u00c2\u00bbii uncereU faction),\\nI bav this lady charming a whole crowd.\\nUne ceintun brillontedt pit i belt shining\\nwith precious stoa a", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0476.jp2"}, "477": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 195\\nIt must not be forgotten that participles as adjectives are sub-\\nject to a special rule as to their place, and invariably follow the\\nnoun they qualify.\\nSeveral rules requiring the English participle present to be\\nchanged into the infinitive or a relative pronoun and verb, in\\nFrench, have been mentioned with the rules on the use of the\\ninfinitive.\\nThe participle present of avoir and etre is invariable, because\\nayant and etant cannot, from their signification, be used as\\nadjectives to express a quality.\\nEx. Ces homines ayant les memes travaux s l ent7 ,1 aident, these\\nmen having the same work to do, help each other.\\nMes sceurs etant absentes ne le virent pas, my sisters being\\nabsent, did not see it.\\nIt must be borne in mind here that the participle present\\nmay be the object of another verb, whenever it expresses action\\nand consequently has an object.\\nEx. J ai vu mon frere plus d une fois lisant Horace, I have\\nseen my brother more than once reading Horace.\\nOn le voit de temps en temps se promenant la-bas, he is\\noccasionally seen walking down there.\\nBut by placing en before the participle, it becomes referable\\nto the subject of the sentence.\\nEx. J ai vu mon frere en lisant Horace, while I was reading\\nHorace, I saw my brother.\\nII le voit de temps en temps en se promenant, he sees him\\noccasionally, when he takes a walk.\\nExercise.\\nThis kind lady was obliging all the unfortunate refugees by her\\ngifts and her kindness of every kind, and they all declared her the\\n*most charming lady they had ever known. When we arrived on the\\nbattle-field we heard all around us the shells exploding with a terrible\\ncrash, and a cannon-ball, falling on his aid, killed him on the spot.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0477.jp2"}, "478": {"fulltext": "196 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThese ladies uttered piercing cries when the men broke open the door,\\nand two fell fainting on the ground. Was it not a pleasant sight to\\nhis eyes to see the widow of his enemy falling on her knees and\\nweeping before him We heard these distressing words with sincere\\ngrief, and they fell like burning sparks upon our hearts. He possesses\\nthe rare art of instructing his pupils while amusing them, and I have\\nseen them writing their exercises without being bored. She looked\\nat him with withering scorn, and then said to him in a threatening\\nvoice Never show yourself in my presence again, if you wish to save\\nyour life.\\nIX. THK PAKIICII LE PAST.\\nThe Participle Past, which ends in i ami u, s or t, serves\\nlikewise both purposes, as a verb and as an adjective, and\\nvaries accordingly in its form, making a feminine and a plural\\nin the former capacity, and remaining unchanged in the latter.\\nIt i used in the following ways\\n1. The participle past may occnr without an auxiliary verb\\nih an adjective to qualify a noun, and then it has to agree with\\n1 number.\\nEx. Qut truiti How\\nmany walls razed! How many towns taken by storm!\\nJc ID them all\\ndi ad or wounded.\\nIt may, also, occur without an am w adverb, in\\nWhich Bate it remains, of COUne, unchanged and precedes the\\nnoun.\\nKx. r \u00c2\u00bbv joint un billet (Telle, you will find\\nosed a note from her.\\nY i n nt, considering the\\ncircumstances they have done well.\\nEx epl yon and\\n1, they bave a, I left.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0478.jp2"}, "479": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 197\\n2. The participle past may occur in connection with the\\nverb tre, in which case it will invariably agree with its subject.\\nThis may be the case\\nIn passive verbs:\\nEx. Nous serous tous charmes de vous voir, we shall all bo\\ndelighted to see you.\\nLa vertu timide est souvent opprimee, timid virtue is often\\noppressed.\\nIn neuter verbs, the compound tenses of which are made\\nwith the auxiliary verb etre.\\nEx. Nous sotnmes venus vous feliciter de votre succes, we have\\ncome to congratulate you on your success.\\nTous les arts sont ties a Vombre de la paix, all the arts\\nwere born under the shadow of peace.\\nIn pronominal verbs, the compound tenses of which are\\ninvariably made by the aid of the auxiliary verb Ure.\\nEx. Elle iest tue un peu trop longtemps, she has kept silence\\na little too long.\\nlis se seraient tues si on ne les avaient pas empeches,\\nthey would have killed each other, if they had not\\nbeen prevented.\\nElle s est trompee en voulant tromper les autres, she\\ndeceived herself while trying to deceive others.\\nIt must, however, be borne in mind that the object of some\\npronominal verbs is not a direct but an indirect object, in which\\ncase the participle past remains unchanged.\\nEx. lis se sont parle (Tun a V autre) toute une heure, they\\nhave spoken with one another a whole hour.\\nCes deux rois se sont succede de suite, these two kings\\nfollowed each other directly.\\nThe same rule applies to verbs which become pronominal\\nonly by the substitution of the personal for the possessive\\npronouns.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0479.jp2"}, "480": {"fulltext": "198 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Elk s est brkle la main et le bras, she burnt her hand\\nand her arm.\\nEst-ce que vous vous etes lave les mains? Did you wash\\nyour hands\\nThe same rule applies to the past tenses of verbs made,\\npassive by the addition of the pronoun se.\\nEx. II scsl assemble une foule de gens armes, a crowd of\\narmed men has been gathered together.\\n77 s\\\\st trance di.r homines de tues, there have been found\\nten men who were killed.\\n3. The participle past may occur in connection with the verb\\navoir, in which case it will agree only with the direct object,\\nthat precedes it.\\nIf the object is an indirect one, the participle remains\\nunchanged.\\nEx. On l tr a dii tout et qu on apu dire, they have been told\\nall that could be told.\\nIf there 18 DO Objecl at all, the participle remains unchanged.\\ndormi j\u00c2\u00bb U, there had been\\nh talk and little Bleep.\\nIf the direct object follows the participle, it remains un-\\nchanged.\\nv i she has seen all\\npeople who admire bar.\\nin object, and that object is\\nthe verb, the participle will agree\\nwith it in gender and Dumber.\\nEx. Doi\\nmi- the apples you have promised\\nwhich thus precedes the participle past,\\nma\\\\ I\\nA noun, accompanied by an interrogative adverb,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0480.jp2"}, "481": {"fulltext": "VEKBS. 199\\nEx. Combien de livres lui avez-vous donnes 2 How many\\nbooks have you given him\\nQuelle dame a-t-il saluee en passant Which lady did he\\nspeak to in passing\\nA relative pronoun, relating to its antecedent.\\nEx. Les livres que vous m avez vendus sont venus, the books\\nyou sold me have come.\\nVoid Vetoffe que fai achetee pour vous, this is the\\nmaterial I have bought for you.\\nA personal pronoun, preceding the auxiliary verb.\\nEx. Ou sont ces dames et qui les a accompagnees Where are\\nthose ladies, and who accompanied them\\nJ ai vu cette tragedie et je Vai admiree, I have seen that\\ntragedy and I have admired it.\\nVous avez Men fait, Messieurs, et on vous a hues, you\\nhave done well, Gentlemen, and you have been praised.\\nThe participle past of etre remains always unchanged.\\nEx. Les liommes qui ont ete id, n y sont plus, the men who were\\nhere, are no longer here.\\nExekcise.\\nThe United States are the greatest republic in the world, and\\nKussia is the largest empire. He cherishes ill-founded prejudices, and\\nhence his life is a continuous series of disappointments and of-\\nfended feelings. Considering his youth and his inexperience, he has\\novercome the difficulties of this unexpected adventure with great tact.\\nI send you these lines to inform you of her arrival, and enclosed you\\nwill find the money required to come here. The best speeches have\\never been those which the heart has dictated. My friends were very\\nhappy to hear the news which the messenger brought they had\\nbelieved their brother dead, and now they heard that the wounds\\nwhich he had received were not fatal. How many young men have\\nlost the best years of their life, because they had no friends who could\\nhave given them good advice We have seen you often, when you\\ndid not think that we were near and we have heard you, when you", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0481.jp2"}, "482": {"fulltext": "200 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nimagined you were quite alone. These young ladies ventured too far,\\nand they have been severely punished for their temerity, for the men\\nin the house which they had passed rushed out and ran after them,\\nuntil their friends, who had seen them at a distance, came to their\\nrescue. It was said of this remarkable man, that he had created the\\nlanguage, which he alone had spoken. She has saved herself from\\nthis danger, but she has injured herself in the estimation of many\\npeople.\\nThe participle past, with a direct object before it, is some-\\ntimes followed by an infinitive, and then the question may arise,\\nwhether the object is that of ihe first verb or of the infinitive?\\nIn this case the nature of the first verb must, be ascertained:\\nif it is an active verb, the object will be. its own, and then the\\nparticiple past will, ac lie, agree with it in number\\nand gender; if it is a neuter verb, then the direct object must\\ng to the following infinitive, and therefore the\\nparticiple past will remain unchanged.\\nEx. La danu gut fat entendut chanter, the lady I have heard\\nI r, these are the\\nks which you seemed to wish for.\\nIt may. however, happen that both verbs, that in the parti-\\nI ast and the fo lowing infinitive, are active verbs, In that\\nirefullv inquire to which of the two the direct\\nobject properlj belongs, and accordingly modify or not modify\\nthe participle past,\\ni the lady 1 have heard\\nI heard the lady nngi\\nentendu chanter, the melodies I heard\\nJ 1 heard BUI\\nA em come.\\nmay be used in two ways,\\nsimply determined by the agreement or uon agreement of the\\nparticiple p", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0482.jp2"}, "483": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 2i 1\\nEx. Je les ai vu peindre, I have seen them paint (being\\npainted).\\nJe les ai vus peindre, I have seen them paint (painting).\\nOn les a laisses piller, they have let them rob.\\nOn les a laisse piller, they have let them be robbed.\\nThe verb f aire is the only one which forms an apparent excep-\\ntion to this rule, as it never varies but this arises not from any\\nanomaly, but from the fact that it is considered as part of the fol-\\nlowing infinitive, with which it forms but one word.\\nEx. On les a tousfait venir ici, they have made them all come\\nhere.\\nLes tables que j avais fait f aire dans cette title, the tables I\\nhad ordered in that city.\\nA participle past which has two or more direct objects pre-\\nceding it, will agree with both, in the plural, if its meaning\\napplies clearly to both, or it will remain unchanged if it refers\\nbut to one.\\nEx. Cest votre interet plutot que votre ambition qu il a consulte,\\nit is your interest rather than your ambition which he\\nhas consulted.\\nCetait sa femme et sa sceur qu il a acccmpagnees, it was\\nhis wife and his sister whom he accompanied.\\nThe same distinction must be made, whenever the direct-\\nobject preceding a participle past is an adverb or other expres-\\nsion of quantity followed by de with a plural noun.\\nEx. Que de maux ce pauvre homme a soufferts! How many\\nills this poor man has endured\\nCe fat le plus grand nombre des revoltes qu on a fusile,\\nit was the greater number of the rebels they have shot.\\nThe conj unction que is not unfrequently used instead of a rela-\\ntive pronoun preceded by a preposition in such cases it is not a\\ngenuine direct object, however much it may have the appearance,\\nand hence the participle past will remain xinchanged.\\nEx. Les jours qu il a vecu, the days (during) which he has\\nlived.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0483.jp2"}, "484": {"fulltext": "202 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nThese books, which I have often seen you read -with such interest,\\nare the same which I heard read aloud last winter in my brothers\\nfamily. I saw her paint that portrait myself, and now she denies\\nthat it is her work. These melodies were those which the Swiss\\nsoldiers had heard sung in their mountains they made them so\\nhomesick, that an order was given prohibiting their being played by\\nthe band. What civil war has this great man kindled, and when\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0was it terminated by hh death? That is a part of ancient history\\nwhich I have not read for a long time, and I have forgotten the events\\nwhich you have mentioned. We travelled very far that day, but\\ntowards noon the horses refused to work well, and I did not know to\\nwhat cause I could ascribe this until I found out that the driver had\\nnot ht them eat enough in the morning. The services which he had\\nrendered the minis-, r vrere so great, that the latter did not know\\nhow to reward them thus the pK,r man has received neither money\\nih T Office, How many duties have you neglected, and how many\\ntimes have I told you bo, bul you would never listen to the warnings\\nwhich you have received from so many friends I\\nENGLISH Atxii.i uuks OF Moon in FRKKGH.\\nThen a Ki gKafa verba which are frequently called\\nauxiliaries m 1. because, unlike the two auxiliary verbs. To\\nhave and To he, they do not help to form tenses, bul to express\\nmoods in which the action of the verb may be\\nSuch ate the rerba, I may, I will, I shall, I must,\\n1 metimea rendered in French by a\\nand at other times they ate translated literally, as baa\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2v been explained i- tl ase of tin- imperative mood, which\\nmed, in French, from the veil, directly, while in English\\nI To ht. We propose to state here the\\nrules which dct i mine the i. rerbs.\\nThe v\u00c2\u00abi 1. /i.e. av an independent verb, corresponds to the\\nEnglish verb, \u00c2\u00bbnly to physical ability,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0484.jp2"}, "485": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 203\\nwhile savoir has to be employed whenever moral or mental\\nability is to be expressed.\\nEx. Lltomnie le plus fort ne pent lever cefardeau, the strongest\\nman cannot take up this load.\\nVhomme le plus savant ne sail dechiffrer ces signes, the\\nmost learned man cannot decipher these signs.\\nPouvez-vous marcher Can you (are you strong enough\\nto) walk.\\nJSavez-vous danser Can you (do you know how to)\\ndance\\nAs an auxiliary verb, pouvoir corresponds to the English\\nverbs I can and I may, and their past tenses, could and might.\\nEx. Je veux et jc peux /aire tout autant, I will and I can do\\nquite as much.\\nPuis-je aller le voir demain soir May I go and see him\\nto-morrow night?\\nWhen used negatively, pouvoir means only I can if it is to\\nmean I may, the negation must be added to the following\\ninfinitive.\\nEx. Je ne peux pas marcher si vite, I cannot walk so fast.\\nJ e peux ne pas le/aire, sije le prefer e, I may not do it, if\\nI prefer.\\nI could, is in English used for two purposes it is either the\\npast tense of I can, and then must be translated by the corres-\\nponding tense of pouvoir or it is the conditional, and then it\\nwill be translated by the French conditional.\\nEx. I could do it formerly, but I am too weak no\\\\v,je pouvais\\nle/aire autrefois, maisje suis trop faible maintenant.\\nI never could tell him the whole truth, je n^ai jamais\\npu lui dire toute la verite.\\nI could do it if I chose, je pourrais le /aire si je le pre-\\nferais.\\nI might, is never a past tense in English, but only used as the", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0485.jp2"}, "486": {"fulltext": "20 i ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nconditional form, and hence it is always translated by tlie\\nconditional of pouvoir.\\nEx. I might go to-morrow if you were ready, je pourraia\\n2 artir demain, si cons etiez pret.\\nI can liave been, is translated simply by the preterit indefinite\\nof pouvoir; and I could, and I might have been, by the\\nconditional of the past\\nEx. How can you have been so careless! Comment arez-vous\\npu itre si nigligent\\nI could have been hero before you, if I had made haste,\\nfaurais pu 6tn ici avant vous, sij( m itais dtperke\\nThey might have been kinder t us, ils auraientpu itre\\nj, Ins affable* enven nous.\\nFrench authors Bay indifferently j peuxatjepuis, but iu Inter\\nrogative sentences pui*j alone is oaed\\nI .x. P i m t May I n\u00c2\u00ab t read (be excused from\\nreadii\\nTin y may say what tiny choose, I cannot believe it, for they hnvo\\ntold me an ontrnth once, and after thai l can give them credil no\\n1 \u00c2\u00abiiir r. M:i\\\\ vre put ii oox shawls and hats, and take a walk in the\\ngarden 1 n can l it. If yon M i think it is too damp, and that\\nyou mJghl take .iM by exposing yourself. May yen know one day\\nwhat tender love she bore yon th knowledge t it will be a great\\nconsolation to yon, If ever trouble should come to sadden you l could\\nhave embraced him, bo great was my joy when I saw him again. Can\\nyou t\u00c2\u00ab-!l me wh tin- twelve Cesears were l used to be able to recite\\nthem all, hut it i bo long since I have read tlnir history that I cannot\\nnow promise yon to tell them in order. I believe be could have done\\nthat and more also, it the time had been given t him but it may\\nbe asked, If anybody cottd have succeeded in bo little time They\\ncould easily tell yon all about this man, and his interets, if they wen*\\nto 1 m but they are very 1 screel persons, an I they may\\nthink that they have do right t. betray hi secrete.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0486.jp2"}, "487": {"fulltext": "205\\nVouloir.\\nThe verb vouloir, as an independent verb, corresponds to the\\nEnglish verb To be willing.\\nEx. Elle ri a pas voulu meme m ecouter, she was not even\\nwilling to listen to rue.\\nIn its imperative form, second person plural, it has the mean-\\ning of the English word Please, or similar expressions.\\nEx. Veuillez me passer le sel, please pass the salt.\\nVeuillez Men me dire oil demeure le cure, be so kind as to\\ntell me where the priest lives.\\nIt has occasionally the same meaning when used interroga-\\ntively and accompanied by bien.\\nEx. Voulez-vous bien lui preter vos secours? Please lend him\\nyour assistance.\\nIt must not be forgotten that vouloir is, as has already been\\nstated, an active verb in French, and consequently does not\\nrequire the additional verb To have, as in English, where it is\\nintransitive.\\nEx. Will you have some coffee or some tea Voulez-vous du\\ncafe ou da the\\nAs an auxiliary verb, the English I will is used to form the\\nfuture hence attention must be had to distinguish between I\\nwill, as an independent verb expressing volition or readiness,\\nand I will, as an auxiliary verb forming the future.\\nEx. He will meddle with things which do not concern him,\\nil veut se meler a des choses qui ne le reyardent pas.\\nHe will give you all you ask of him, il vous dormers,\\ntout ce que vous lui demanderez.\\nThe past tense, I would, is used in the same manner both\\nas the past of I will, and as the conditional mood, and must be\\ntranslated accordingly.\\nEx. I would come and see you, but I could not, je voulais\\naller vous voir, mais je ne le pouvais pas.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0487.jp2"}, "488": {"fulltext": "2 I S OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nI would go and see you, if I could, firais vous voir, si je\\nlepouvais.\\nShe never would speak to rue about her lovers, elle w a\\njamais voulu me purler de ses amunts,\\nI wish, is frequently substituted for I would, in English,\\nand is in such cases translated by the past conditional of\\nvouloir.\\nEx. I wish he had never come to this place, faurais voulu\\nqu il ne Jut jamais venu en ces lieux.\\nI will have and I would have, followed by personal pronouns\\nin English, are translated by vouloir simply.\\nEx. 1 will have yon know. Sir, that I am master here, jeveux\\ntjur 9ou$ sachiee, Monsieur, que i je suit mattrt ici.\\n1 would not have you do that for all the world, je ne\\nvous fissiet cela pour tout an mvndt,\\nVouloir, in the conditional mood and after si, if, has often\\nthe meaning of the English \\\\erl Like.\\nEx. J t voudrais vous voir quand nuts dansez, I should like to\\nj ou, w ben you dance.\\nA* voulet, we will go together,\\nif you like.\\nVouloir in the conditional represents, finally, the English\\nI wish, followed by would or could.\\nEx. 1 wish you would not Bpeak so loud,y\u00c2\u00ab voudrais que sew\\ni arlatsiet pat \u00c2\u00a7i haul*\\nII. Irishes be were at home, il voudrait itre chet lui.\\nExi Rl l-K.\\nWill you go with us. nrdoyon prefer going there al ne w. will\\nwait for you until one o clock, and if yon do not eonie then, we will\\nade that you would rather not have oar company. They would\\nd i it with pleasure, I am sure of It, If you were t tell them\\nwas lor u .si k lady Make hsstfl and bring the carriage up,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0488.jp2"}, "489": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 207\\nfor I should like to reach there before it is quite dark, and the days\\nare short at this season of the year. He said, with an air of injured\\ninnocence I would have you know, Gentlemen, that I am an honest\\nman, and that I will not do a thing which such a man is ashamed of\\ndoing. He wishes me to accompany him to Europe next year, and I\\nam willing to go, but I fear I shall not have money enough to pay the\\nexpenses. What will she have for her supper to-day Let us know\\nsoon and tell us also, how many dishes you will have for dinner to-\\nmorrow. I should like very much to buy this picture, but it is very\\ncostly and it will require an expensive frame.\\nDevoir.\\nDevoir represents a number of English expressions conveying\\nthe idea of duty or obligation; but it is limited to moral\\nobligations, physical necessity, and such duty as admits of no\\nchoice being expressed by falloir. It answers, therefore, for the\\nEnglish.\\nTo be, followed by To and a verb.\\nEx. He was to be here, but he has not come, il devait etre ici,\\nmais il iJest pas venu.\\nShe is to sing to-night her favorite song, elle doit chanter\\nce soir sa chanson favorite.\\nOught to, followed by a verb, when it is commonly employed\\nin the conditional mood.\\nEx. You ought to see him when he is a little excited, vous\\ndevriez le voir quand il est un peu excite.\\nThey ought to have been here long before us, Us auraient\\ndu etre ici beaticoup avant nous.\\nShould, followed by a verb, when it expresses a duty in this\\ncase, also, it is used in the conditional mood.\\nEx. These men should be made to do their duty, on devrait\\nforcer ces gens a f aire leur devoir.\\nHe should not have been allowed to leave so soon, on\\nrH await pas dit, lui permettre de partir si tot.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0489.jp2"}, "490": {"fulltext": "208 ON THE FARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nI shall, etc., is never expressed by devoir except in interrog-\\native sentences; otherwise the future alone is used.\\nEx. I shall have lost half my fortune before this is over,\\nfaurai perdu la moitie de ma fortune, avant que ccla\\nt er a jiui.\\nShall I tell you what I think of it Dois-je vous dire ce\\nque fen pense?\\nWhat shall I do, if that should happen Que dois-je\\nfaire st cela arrivait\\nThe past tenses of the verb devoir have a double meaning.\\nThey represent either simply the verb, I was to, etc., or they\\nexpress the conviction that the action of the verb following\\nbaa really taken place.\\nEx EUa del i i U Ini dire, nuiis tlli oublit, site was to tell\\nhim bo, bat Bhe has forgotten it.\\nElk a demi endormi quand je U lui die, she\\nmast have been half asleep, when 1 told her so,\\nD I-,... may, in the third person singular, be pre-\\nceded by ili\u00c2\u00ab- demonstrative prononn ce.\\nBx. jt aooireu u kier m atant Mer, that must have\\nhappened yi sterday ox the day before,\\nBelated already, in the subjunctive of the past\\nused interrogatively to mark a conditional\\nsentence.\\neven if he should be\\nhurt by it. I ill t H him I\\nfaint A faire, you must do it,\\nshould you lose every thing.\\nought to have been ashamed of your violence, for a man of\\nV(Ylir have more control over h Bhe should\\nbe more careful of her health, for it Is already delicate, sad if she\\ns ordinary preeaut ons, she will have to suffer much f. r her", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0490.jp2"}, "491": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 20S\\ncarelessness. They must be men of note, for everybody salutes them\\nand the greatest honors are shown them wherever they appear. I\\nought to know them, for I am sure I have seen their faces, but I can-\\nnot recollect who they may be. Even if they were to be our masters,\\nwe could never be made to love them, although we might learn to\\nobey them. These books must have suffered very much on their\\nvoyage across the ocean, for they are all more or less mouldy, and\\nsome are entirely spoiled they ought to have been cleaned and dried\\nas soon as the vessel came into port. Shall I tell him to bring you\\nthe wine, or will you tell him yourself?\\nLaisser.\\nThe verb laisser answers the purpose of translating the Eng-\\nlish verb To let, when it has the meaning of, To give permission,\\nto allow.\\nEx. Will you let us go out this evening Nous luisserez-\\nvous surtir ce soir\\nLet me out, or I shall be stifled in this room, laissez-moi\\nsortir, ou f etouffe dans cette salle.\\nBut it must be remembered that the English verb To let, is\\nmade use of, also, to form the imperative mood. In that case\\nit is not translated at all into French, the imperative itself\\nanswering the purpose there.\\nEx. Let us go at once, or we shall be too late, allons de suite,\\nou nous serous en retard.\\nLet him do it if he chooses I do not care, qu il le fasse\\ns il le veut moi, je ne nCen soucie pas.\\nLet them go (wish), qu il s en aillent let them go (leave),\\nlaissez-les partir. Laisser, being an active verb in French, does\\nnot require the addition of the auxiliary verb To have, which is\\nnecessary in English, where To let is intransitive.\\nEx. I will let you have what you want for the same price, je\\nvous laisserai ce qu il vowsfaut, pour le meme prix.\\nLaisser is not the proper verb to translate To let, when it is", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0491.jp2"}, "492": {"fulltext": "210 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nfollowed by a double object, a verb and a pronoun. In such\\ncases it is better to change the construction.\\nEx. I cannot let him ill-treat you so, je ne peux lui permettre\\nde vons maltraitcr ainsi.\\nDo not let him read so much at night, ne lui permettez\\njmzs de lire tant le soir.\\nExercise.\\nLet me tell you what I have seen first, and then you can tell me\\nyour adventures, if you have anything: to tell. Let us go now, before\\nthe moon is too low; the night is culm and cool, and a walk around\\nthe Ink.- will be delightful Le1 hex go out, if she cannot stay in any\\nlonger; I do not like to force her todo what is so unpleasant to her,\\nluit she ought to let me tell her, thai her conduct is not that of a nioe\\ngirl, and thai I am much distressed on that account. Leave me, and\\ndo not BBJ any thing more about this Bad affair; it has given me pain\\nenough, and has not lei me deep for several nights, Let him come\\nout, if he dares, and say all; I can only gain by the truth being made\\nknown. Friends, 1st us honor his memory, and let us never forget\\nwhat we owe to his honest and Btrennoos efforts t advance the good\\ncause and to overcome all the difficulties which were in our way.\\nFailoir.\\nThe verb failoir French, .-ill the English words\\nwhi.h convey the idea of absolute necessity, physical force,\\nand unavoidable obligation, as tar as these expressfona are not\\ntranslated by devoir, in thia signification it has a double con-\\nstruction: it may either be followed by que with the subjunc-\\ntive mood\\nEx n faui que row Kites plus haut, you must read louder,\\n11 fallait U ought to have\\ncome this mornii\\nJlf.nnlm ju\\\\1 C die, he Will have to go away\\nwith her,", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0492.jp2"}, "493": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 2 1 1\\nII faudrait que cette mesure Jut prise de suite, it would be\\nproper to take that measure at once\\nor it may be used with a personal pronoun as its indirect\\nobject, and be followed by the infinitivo of the verb.\\nEx. II nous faut travailler jour et nuit, we have to work\\nday and night.\\nH luifaudra s en passer pour quelque temps, he will have\\nto do without it for some time.\\nII leur faudrait en etre bien contents, they ought to be\\nwell pleased with it.\\nFalloir has also the meaning of the English verb To want,\\nwhen it is thus used with the personal pronoun and in that case,\\nthe object of the want, a noun, may be used after it instead of\\na verb.\\nEx. I want a new hat and a pair of gloves, il me faut un\\nchapeau neufet une paire de gants.\\nHe wanted more money than he had, to succeed, il lui\\nfallut plus d argent quHl n avait pour reussir.\\nFalloir may be used with the infinitive after it and no\\npronoun, if the necessity applies to the person spoken to or is\\ngeneral.\\nEx. II faut mourir tot ou tard, we must all die sooner or\\nlater.\\nMon ami, il faut le faire, coute que coute, my friend, you\\nmust do it, cost what it may.\\nFalloir is, finally, used quite alone but then, being an active\\nverb, it requires the addition of le, as every active verb in\\nFrench must have its object expressed.\\nEx. J 1 en suis bien f ache, mais il le faut, I am sorry for it, but\\nit must be.\\nEst-ce quHl le faut absolument Is it absolutely neces-\\nsary", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0493.jp2"}, "494": {"fulltext": "212 ON THE PAETS OF A SENTENCE.\\nExercise.\\nWe must learn to obey others before we can hope to be able to\\ncommand. You ought not to have done that, for you knew that it\\nmust distress your parents and the commandment tells us that we\\nnm.-t honor father and mother. Csesar had to conquer a number of\\npowerful tribes before he could reach the Rhine, and then he had to\\nencounter even larger armies than those of the Swiss. What must they\\ndo if they should find that they have not money enough to make all the\\npurchases which you have ordered? They will have to come back\\nand postpone their plans until Borne future day, when money is more\\nabundant. The pool child wants a thick warm cloak for these\\nwintry days she also wants a pair of thick shoes. We must work,\\nif we want to eat, and he who does not sow must not expect to reap,\\nLet us do it, since it is necessary, and let us do it cheerfully. You\\nmost have been very careless in walking through the streets, or you\\nwould not have soiled your dresses BO much; you must learn to bo\\nmore careful bereal\\nIDIOMATIC D8B MK VKltUS.\\nEvery ration baa its own peculiar expressions, as every\\nindividual is well known to bave certain turns of phrases and\\ncertain expressions, which he uses by preference, and which\\ndistinguish his conversation from that of others. Such expres-\\nwhich are peculiar to one language, and therefore cannot\\nbe translated literally into another language, are called Idioms.\\nwhen an Englishman the Frenchman is eke*\\nand the German tu Il\u00c2\u00ab is (in the bouse). 8uch idiomatic\\nphrases occur, of course, with all par ol Bpeecb, but principally\\nwith verbs, and hence the expediency of hero giving the most\\nimpoi ts ted with thia class of words.\\nThe verb ovo/r, to have, is in French used with a large Dum-\\nber of nouns, so at to form a compound verb, expressing but", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0494.jp2"}, "495": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 213\\none idea. The majority of these expressions are in English\\nexpressed by the verb To be, with an adjective e. g.\\nAvoir appetit,\\n/aim,\\nTo be hungry.\\ndes affaires, busy.\\nchaud, warm.\\nfroid, cold.\\nhonte, ashamed.\\npeur, afraid.\\nraison, right.\\ntort, wrong.\\nsoif, thirsty.\\nsommeil, sleepy.\\nBut with this additional peculiarity, that these verbs can be\\nused only with reference to living beings, while etre is used, in\\nFrench as in English, when they are applied to inanimate\\nobjects.\\nEx. II a. toujours trop chaud ou trop froid, he is always\\neither too warm or too cold.\\nCette cave est toujours froide, meme en eU this cave is\\nalways cold, even in summer.\\nIf the place where heat or cold are felt is mentioned, the\\nnoun is preceded by the preposition a.\\nEx. J^ai froid aux pieds et je ne puis pas les rechaujfer, my\\nfeet are cold, and I cannot get them warm again.\\nWhen the English adjective is qualified by the adverb Very,\\nits place is supplied in French by bien or by grand.\\nEx. II avait bien faim quand il arriva ici, he was very hungry\\nwhen he reached here.\\nElle avait grand 1 peur que je ne Voubliasse, she was very\\nmuch afraid I would forget her.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0495.jp2"}, "496": {"fulltext": "214 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nAvoir is also used with nouns to express Age and Measure,\\nwhere in English the verb To be, with an adjective, is employed.\\nEx. Quoad est-ce qu elle aura dix ans When will she be\\nten years old\\nCet humme a au mains six pieds de hauteur, that man is\\nat least six feet high.\\nAvoir mal, followed by the preposition a before its noun,\\nexpresses all the English words for Pain, ache, sore, etc.\\nEx. iPai eti mal a la tele depuis le matin, my head has ached\\nsince this morning.\\nJe ne peux pas marcher, fai mal au pied, I cannot walk,\\nmy foot is sore.\\nmal n t CO UT has the peculiar signification of being sick\\nat the stomach. To Buffer pain in the heart is avoir des douleurt\\nan\\nKn.li-h c om p ou nd nouns, containing the word ache, are in\\nFrench made wit a the same word mal, followed by t he preposition\\nde.\\nit autei fort que jamais, my toothache is\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0a bad as ever.\\nWhen this Qualified by an adjective, it requires the\\nIndi finite article before it.\\natrocs, this wine has given\\nne- 1 ache.\\n.1 air has tii,- various meanings of\u00e2\u0080\u0094 To look, when it is\\nfollowed by no adjective or adverb, and To look like, or. Look\\ned bj the preposition de. In tbo first case, tlio\\nsains mescaline, when it refers to moral qualities,\\nbut agrees with the person it refers to, when it expresses physi-\\ncal qua\\nEx. this man looks benign,\\nu a Pair petite quand ell this woman\\nlooks small when she is seated.\\nI palais, this house looks\\nrati", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0496.jp2"}, "497": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 215\\nLe temps a Fair de vouloir s eclair cir, the weather looks\\nas if it would clear up.\\nAvoir without any object but parts of dress, means To have on.\\nEx. Est, ce qu elle avait sa robe neuve quand vous la vites?\\nDid she have her new dress on when you saw her\\nAvoir, followed by parts of the body which are qualified by\\nan adjective, requires the definite article before them instead of\\nthe possessive pronoun, which is used in English.\\nEx. Elle a tovjours les mains froides, her hands are always cold.\\nJl se trouva qu il n eut que les doigts brules, it turned out\\nthat only his fingers were burnt.\\nWhen the adjective, bj special rule, precedes the noun, the\\nindefinite article is used in French as in English.\\nEx. Elle avait unefort petite main et de belles dents, she had a\\nvery small hand and fine teeth.\\nAvoir beau, followed by an infinitive, expresses the English\\nphrase, To do a thing in vain. It can, however, never be used\\nnegatiyely.\\nEx. II eut beau me prier, je n ai pas cede, he tried in vain to\\nbeg, I did not yield.\\nVous avez beau crier, il tHy a personne qui vous entende,\\nyou cry in vain, there is nobody here who can hear you.\\nAvoir, preceded by the pronoun y, is used for a great variety\\nof expressions, which are translated in the most varied way in\\nEnglish. The most ordinary use made of il y a, etc., is to\\ntranslate the English There is and There are, as has already\\nbeen explained.\\nII y a is sometimes, though rarely, followed by a noun with-\\nout an article, with which it forms a compound verb.\\nEx. II y eut apparence comme s il a.llait neiger, it looked as if\\nit were going to snow.\\nEst-ce qu il rCy a p as moyen de le sauver Is there no\\nway of saving him", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0497.jp2"}, "498": {"fulltext": "216 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThe two principal purposes, however, for which il y a, etc.,\\narc used is to express Time and Distance.\\nWhen applied to expressions of time, il y a answers for all\\nthe various English phrases used for the purpose as, It is, since,\\nago, etc.\\nEx. It is now five years that I have not seen him, il y a\\nmaiutenant cinq ans que je ne Paipai cu.\\nI heard this news two days ago, fai appris atte nouvdle\\nil y a deux jours.\\nThat must have happened six weeks since, cela doit\\netre arrive il y a six seinaines.\\nThe proper tense to be used alter il y a depends entirely\\nupon the general rules which determine the choice between\\nIt will lie the present, when the action still continues;\\nthe imperfect, when the action is represented as going on, con-\\ntinuing at the past time; the preterit definite, when it took\\nplace but once and the preterit indefinite, when the action\\nI to the present time.\\nJ... tien y n-t-il gut trez ieit How long have\\n_\\\\..u been living here I\\nJ I y a deux air* .vc Hive, it is two yeai\\n1 was j our pnpil.\\nu ij a gut tit moit que /arrival ici, it is only six months\\nsine.- 1 came here.\\ny a an an que fai quitti ma ]*iliir, it is a year since I\\nleft my country,\\ny -lore the following verb,\\nr the W t i. -n of that verb has ceased to take place, alter\\nhabitual occurrence.\\nru Vat c\u00c2\u00ab, it will be\\nI -:ih him.\\nlatcd otherwise than by the cod", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0498.jp2"}, "499": {"fulltext": "VEEBS. 21.7\\nEx. 11 y aura liuit jours que vous n avez ete id, it will be a\\nweek since you were here.\\nWhen applied to the measurement of distances, il y a is fol-\\nlowed simply by the measure itself.\\nEx. II y a cent lieues d ici a la capitqle, it is a hundred miles\\nfrom here to the capital.\\nCombien y a-t-il da village d Veglise How far is it from\\nthe village to the church\\nExercise.\\nIt was, I believe, two years ago when I first had the pleasure of\\nmeeting with you at the Springs. How old are you now I am only\\nsixteen, but I look older than I am, because I have been very sick\\nseveral weeks ago, and I have not quite recovered my strength. How\\nlong is it since you spoke for the first time in public It must have\\nbeen thirty years ago, for it was then I commenced my public career,\\nand I remember well, I was very much afraid I would not succeed.\\nIt is the lot of the poor to be always hungry and thirsty but they\\nhave no cause to be ashamed of it, if their poverty is not the effect of\\ntheir vices. I had a new coat on, and therefore I did not wish to ex-\\npose myself to the rain, and I told you before we started that it looked\\nas if it were going to rain. He was only four feet high, when he was\\ntwelve years old, but he has grown very rapidly since he was placed\\nunder your care six years ago. There is no reason why he should\\nalways be right and you always wrong, but there are many people\\nin the world who imagine that they cannot be wrong. She has a\\nhigh forehead and a prominent nose, but her eyes are not handsome,\\nand her mouth is too large. Can you tell me, my friend, how far it is\\nfrom here to the next inn I can tell you the exact distance it v\\nsix miles and a half.\\nEtre.\\nThe verb Ure also, like avoir, is used with a large number of\\nnouns in such intimate connection as to form with them com-\\npound verbs, which express but one idea.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0499.jp2"}, "500": {"fulltext": "218 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. Je suis en peine de votes voir souffrir, I am distressed to\\nsee you suffer.\\nEst-ce que vous serez a meme de /aire ccla tout seul? Will\\nyou be able to do that quite alone\\nElle etait debout quand je lui parlai, she was standing\\nwhen I spoke to her.\\nY itre has the idiomatic meaning of being there, in a figura-\\ntive Sense viz., to understand a matter of which we speak;\\nthough y etre may also literally mean to be there viz., at\\nhome.\\nEx. MaintenaiU que vous parlez net, fy suis, now that you\\nspeak clearly, 1 understand it.\\nMadamt votn inert y est ell* N n, Monsieur, elle a y est\\npas, is your mother at hum she is not.\\nEn it re means to be of the company, to be one of a set; and\\nin a narrative, to have left off.\\nEx. NoUS allonS ii la We are going to\\nhunt, will you go with ue\\nUores nt In a, tine reliure, mats its tCen tont j i-*,\\nbooks have the same binding, but tli -y do no*\\nEh f ii a, met enf ants ou n itions-nous hier soirt Well,\\nchildren, where did we break off last night\\nIt will be remembered that ftn d means to belong to, and\\nHiati ls Instead oi To be, with th ronoon in Kn^lisli.\\nThis is my I .xik. and that la my brother s, (feet men Here,\\nThe preterit indefinite ofsVn is frequently need instead of the\\nsame tense of die verbator, whenever it means to bavegone\\nand t\u00c2\u00ab have retained again.\\nEx. lb lias gone to chnrch and will not bark till dinner,\\ni (A retour que pour Is", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0500.jp2"}, "501": {"fulltext": "VEKBS. 2 1 9\\nHe has gone to church and returned an hour ago, il a\\nete a Veglise et il est ventre il y a une heure.\\nThe English auxiliary verbs To have and To be, as well as\\nthe so-called auxiliaries of mood, I will, I can, I may, etc., all\\nof which are active verbs in French and there require the\\naddition of a direct object, are very frequently used alone, to\\nexpress assent, dissent, surprise or mere emphasis, in order to\\nkeep up the conversation. Thus in English it is said You are\\na little afraid, are you not Give me that book, will you\\nThese expressions are inadmissible in French, and some other\\nmeans must be sought for to produce the same effect. The\\nfollowing are the most frequently employed\\nWhen the auxiliaries are used merely to express assent or\\ndissent, the adverbs oui and non, certainement or point du tout\\nsupply their place.\\nEx. Are you the man I sent for? I am. Est-ce que vous etes\\nVhomme que fai envoy e chercher Oui, Monsieur\\nWill you do it No, I will not, voulez-vous le /aire\\nNon, Monsieur.\\nWhen the auxiliaries are used interrogatively, merely to\\nrepeat the question, as it were, n! est-ce pas is used in French.\\nEx. Vous etes le maitre d hotel, n est-ce pas? You are the\\nhead steward, are you not\\nlis sont tous partis ce matin, n est-ce pas? They all left\\nthis morning, did they not\\nWhen the auxiliaries are thus used after another verb to\\nascertain the action of other persons, the simple personal pro-\\nnoun, wiih et before it, is used in French.\\nEx. Nous avons dine, et vous? We have dined, have you\\nElle a promis de venir, et lui She has promised to come,\\nwill he?\\nWhen the auxiliary verb To do is employed in repetition of\\nother verbs, the latter must in French be repeated themselves.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0501.jp2"}, "502": {"fulltext": "220 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. I see it pretty clearly, do you Afoi, je le vois assez\\ncbiirement, le voyez-vous\\nI believe it, do not you Moi je le crois, ne le croyez-vous\\npas\\nDoes she go to church now I believe she does, est-ce\\nquelle va a Veglise maintenant Je crois qu elle y va.\\nWhen the auxiliary verb To be is used ellipticallv, without\\nthe adverb which ought to be used with it, the latter must be\\nsupplied in French.\\nEx. Is your sister here? Yes she is, est-ce que voire socur est\\nieif Oai, (lie est ici.\\nHave you been there recently No, I have not, est-ce\\nque vous y \\\\ment? Iion,je \u00c2\u00bb*y ai pas ilk.\\nFait*.\\nThe rerb To do or To make, also forms a very large\\nnumber of compound verba, by being joined immediately to a\\nnoun, most of which are represented in English by simple\\nverb*. Such are, for instance,\\nj ire in a I\\nTo hurt.\\npardon.\\npart,\\ninform.\\nshave.\\nA/\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2art.\\nbe creditable.\\n14 d4\u00c2\u00bbhomtew t\\ndisgrace.\\ntort.\\nwrong.\\nshow.\\ntemr,\\nhand.\\nI M,\\neateem\\nEx. TV t \\\\st /nit in il U l i poitrint /r sa chute, he has hurt\\nbis chest bv his tall.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0502.jp2"}, "503": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 221\\nPrenez-donc garde, vous me faites mal au bras, but take\\ncare, you hurt my arm.\\nEst-ce qiCon ne va pas luifaire grace? Is he not to be\\npardoned\\nJe vous ferai voir ce que peutfaire un honnete homme, 1\\nwill show you what an honest man can do.\\nFaire may also be followed by another verb in the infinitive\\nand form with it a compound verb; in which case it is likewise\\ngenerally represented by a simple verb in English. Such are,\\nfor instance,\\nmade).\\nFaire faire,\\nTo order (to\\nsortir,\\nturn out.\\nvenir,\\nsend for.\\npayer,\\ncharge.\\nentrer,\\nadmit.\\nbouillir,\\nboil.\\nfrire,\\nfry.\\nperir,\\nkill.\\nEx. Oil avez-vous fait faire cette belle robe? Where did you\\nhave that beautiful dress made\\nII aurait fallu faire venir le medecin a Vinstant merne,\\nthe doctor ought to have been sent for at once.\\nAussitot que le courrier arrive, faites entrer, as soon as\\nthe courier comes, send him in.\\nJVe faire que literally, to do nothing but serves in French\\nto translate the English adverb Only, when it qualifies a verb.\\nEx. Je rHai fait que Ventrevoir dans la rue, I only caught a\\nglimpse of her in the street.\\nII ne fit qu y toucher et Vobus eclata, he only touched it\\nand the shell exploded.\\nFaire, placed before an infinitive, which does not serve to\\nform a compound verb gives to the second verb a passive\\nsio-nification.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0503.jp2"}, "504": {"fulltext": "222 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. II a fait copier ce beau tableau, lie has had this beautiful\\npicture copied.\\nOn /era blanckir les murailles et peindre les boiseries, they\\nwill have the walls whitewashed and the wood-work\\npainted.\\nSuire, followed by an adjective, expresses an effort to repre-\\nsent the quality conveyed by the latter.\\nEx. Faites-donc Pavare, on n y croit pas, don t pretend to bo\\nmiserly, we don t believe it.\\nII fail It savant, mais il est at ne peut lt s ignorant, he\\npretend- to be learned, but he is ever s ignorant\\nFaire, used impersonally, is the universal verb for all expres-\\nsions referring to the Btate of the weather and its effects.\\nEx. .1 midi il jit chami, maintenani il fait frotd t at noon it\\nwarm, now it is cold.\\nI .-urlir, il fait Imp crotti, you will\\nnot be able t go out, it is too muddy.\\n11 f.i, i beau temps, Hair I tee, it is fine weather, dear and\\nDo you pretend n be attended or are you really sot [should be\\nsorry u have hurt your feelings when 1 was only jesting. Fon will\\norder a round table to be made, around which twelve pi nans iu be\\nI you will have it polished and sent home before l return. It\\n(his morning, bul it has been cold sad windy since,\\nak the roads must be dry now. He courted several ladies\\ntime, and the eonsequenoe wss that be did not win the\\nirered 1 i faithl.\\nthey would n \u00c2\u00bbt pardon him any mm-.-; they i -lt t leeply bow mnch\\ni wronged them. It i- the custom In Prance, when nn Impor\\ntnily, to inform all the friends of it by not\\nby an Bdvertisement in the newspapers. Send for tin- a i\\nhim what yon want\\nwill b is ua", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0504.jp2"}, "505": {"fulltext": "VERBS. 223\\nhonest man, he will not charge you more than a fair price. I Lave\\nonly met him, I cannot say, therefore, that I am acquainted with him,\\nout I should like very much to be presented to him. The cook asked\\nme if she should boil or fry the meat for dinner, and I could not tell\\nher what she ought to do.\\nAller and Venir.\\nThe French use the two verbs aller, to go, and venir, to come,\\nto express an immediate future and an immediate past, the\\nformer corresponding in a general way to the English phrase,\\nI am going to; the latter to the English phrase, I had just.\\nThus, the future itself becomes limited to any indefinite, future\\ntime whilst the use of aller implies that the future action is\\nto take place immediately. In like manner, the past tense\\nrepresents the past but vaguely, but the use of venir implies\\nthat it has elapsed but this very moment.\\nEx. Je vais lui ecrire un petit mot tout a, Vheure, I shall write\\nhim a few words instantly.\\nII nous a dit quHl va sortir, he has told us that he is\\ngoing out.\\nNous venons de rentrer et nous y serons de suite, we have\\nbut just come in, and we shall be there directly.\\nlis venaient de s endormir quand on les appela, they had\\njust fallen asleep, when they were called.\\nAller is also used in French to express the English To be, in\\nreference to health or to business. Hence the familiar phrases\\nComment ca va-t-il? Merci, ca va bien. How are you?\\nThank you, I am pretty well.\\nEt comment vont les affaires? Comme ci, comme ga.\\nAnd how is business So, so.\\nII va mieu.r. ce matin depuis quCon la saigne, he is better\\nthis morning since he has been bled.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0505.jp2"}, "506": {"fulltext": "224 on the parts of a p^tence.\\nAller, when used in connection with parts of dress, means To\\nbecome.\\nEx. Trouvez-vous que cette robe me va bien Do you think\\nthis dress is becoming to me\\nExercise.\\nWe had just dined when the ladies arrived, and fortunately there\\nwas enough left to provide for them but we sent at once for the\\ncook, and told him he must fry some chicken and boil some potatoes,\\nbecause all the ladies liked that dish. When will you let me see that\\nnote? 1 will show it to you this instant, if you will promise me,\\nsolemnly, never to tell anybody that yon have read it. Are you going\\nto write to your sister to-day, or must I do it for you 1 shall do it\\ndirectly, in order not to give you BO much trouble, for you have already\\nbeen very kind in rendering me many services, and you have bat\\njasl now placed me under new obligations by lending me so large a\\nBum ot money. Does her new bat become her as well aa the one 1\\nliked so much, when 1 saw hex for the first time? 1 cannol tell, for 1\\nthink that no hat Ifl rally becoming to her she is by far handsomest\\nwhen she has nothing on her head. What dress had she on when\\nyon sat* her first I do nol remember that, hut it must bare been a\\nvery simple one, (brake had been very sick, and she was not\\nw, l| th.n. Hon Is yiir patto a1 this morning? 1 am sorry to say lie\\nl. I hope very certainly\\nthat he \\\\ih escape with hi.- lite.\\n(MI A PTER V I\\nADVERBS\\nAdverbs, which originally bad their names from the bet\\nthat they principally served to qualify verba, as adjectives\\nqualify nouns, may qualify adjectives or another\\nadverb as well Thej express a manner or a circumstance, and\\nvary, therefore, in kind as mnoh as the latter vary.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0506.jp2"}, "507": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 225\\nEx. Ce roi etalt vraiment digne d etre assis sur un tronc, this\\nking was truly worthy of being seated on a throne.\\nII etait continuellement occupe des soins du gouvemement,\\nhe was unceasingly engaged in the cares of govern-\\nment.\\nSon nom vivra etemellement, his name will live forever.\\nThis power to qualify various words is, however, not the\\nsame with all adverbs. Thus, tris, si, aussi, and tout can\\nmodify only adjectives, participles and adverbs, and not verbs,\\nwhile du moins, au moins, au plus, and davantage modify only\\nverbs, and tout a fait only participles.\\nEx. Je Vai connu plus longtemps que vous, I have known him\\nlonger than you.\\nII n auruit pu desirer davantage, he could not have wished\\nfor more.\\nEst-ce que vraiment il est tout a fait gate? Is it really\\naltogether spoiled\\nAdverbs have generally a meaning complete in themselves\\nptill, there are a few which, to complete their signification,\\nrequire the addition of a regimen preceded by a preposition.\\nEx. II salt toujours parler convenablement au sujet, he knows\\nalways how to speak appropriately.\\nIlfaut aimer Dieu preferablement a tout, we ought to\\nlove God before all things.\\nII ne peut pas vivre confvrmement a son etat, he cannot\\nlive in accordance with his rank.\\nAdverbs of quantity, being considered like nouns, require\\nthe preposition de except lien, which is followed by the partitive\\narticle.\\nEx. Elle avuit infiniment d esprit, she was extremely witty.\\nEst-ce qu il y aura bien du monde a cettefete? Will there\\nbe a great many people at that party\\nAdverbs ending in ment the rules on their formation have", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0507.jp2"}, "508": {"fulltext": "226 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nbeen given in the First Part of this Grammar have this pe-\\nculiarity that they always express the mood or manner, and\\nconsequently may form comparatives and superlatives, precisely\\nas the adjectives from which they are derived.\\nEx. 7/ a parle plus vivement que jamais auparavant, he spoke\\nin a more lively manner than ever before.\\nLa robe fat fade le plus Uigamment du monde, the dress\\nwas made in the most elegant manner.\\nBien, well, ma/, badly, and pen, little, are the only adverbs\\nwhich form the comparative degrees anomalously, making\\nmieux, better, and le mieux, best.\\nw o rse, and le p it, worst\\nmoins y less, and U rnouu, least\\nEx. JSlU est le m u us miee quand tilt tat le moins parte, she\\ni best dressed when she is least adorned\\nj n m plait le mieux m tux, e eet lew modeetie, what\\nI like best in them is their modesty.\\nT6t makes a double comparative, plus tdt for sooner, and\\nplutdi for lather.\\nI ii vttiir plu yOO ought to\\nhave come sooner than the other.-.\\nits pluttl 7 ner met plana, I would\\nrather die than give 1 1 j my\\nT t alone, i hardly ever used now, though t t n t.ini answers.\\nfor tli MMC r luter.\\nipletive, t j\\nand emphasis to the verb, as in the oso made ofveuillea Lim, as\\nsined.\\nEx. T nt I VOulexpoa, I see (indeed) that\\nyon do not wish it.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0508.jp2"}, "509": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 257\\nPLACE OF ADVERBS.\\nThe adverb is placed immediately after the verb it qualifies,\\nif the latter is used in a simple tense but, in compound tenses,\\nit may be placed between the auxiliary and the participle\\npast.\\nEx. II dit franchement tout ce qu il pense, he tells all he thinks\\nopenly.\\nSavez-vous sHl a parfaitement reussi Do you know if\\nhe has succeeded entirely\\nEie/r, yesterday, may be placed before the verb or after it, but\\ncan never stand between the auxiliary and the participle.\\nEx. Hier nous y alldmes or, Nous y alldmes 7iier, we went there\\nyesterday.\\nCompound adverbs, however, consisting of adverbs with a\\nregimen or nouns preceded by prepositions, cannot be placed\\nbefore the auxiliary and participle.\\nEx. Celui quijuge a la hate juge au kasard, those who judge\\nrashly judge at haphazard.\\nThe adverbs bien, mal, mieux, pis, and a few others of like\\ncharacter, are always placed between the auxiliary and the\\nparticiple, and may also stand before as well as after the\\ninfinitive which they qualify.\\nEx. Vous avez mal fait en le lui disant, you have done wrong\\nby telling him.\\nPartoutfai ete mieux repu que je n 1 avals espere, every-\\nwhere I have been better received than I expected.\\nLe plus grand bonheur est de bien /aire son devoir, the\\ngreatest happiness is to do one s duty well.\\nAdverbs generally are not repeated before every word they\\nquality, with the exception of si, aussl, plus and autant, which\\nrequire to be thus repeated.\\nEx. II a ete si bon, si sage, qu il n a pas son pareil, he was so\\nwise and good, that the like of him did not exist.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0509.jp2"}, "510": {"fulltext": "228 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nLane est aussi humble, aussi patient, que le cheval est fie r\\net impetueur, the ass is as humble and patient as the\\nhorse is proud and impetuous.\\nA few adverbs can, in negative constructions, be placed\\nbefore pas or point and done, therefore, must be so placed.\\nEx. Vous ne ni avez done pas obeU Then you have not\\nobeyed me\\nSi, aussi, tant and autant.\\nSi and aussi mean both so or as, and tant and autant mean\\nboth so or as much and as many but the forma aussi and autant\\ncan only be used in comparisons, while n and tant serve mainly\\nin exclamations and negative sentences.\\nEx. Get ptainrs s tranquilles, these pleas-\\nures are as pure as they are quiet.\\nJ\\\\i in- Horace autant qui je V admire, 1 love Elorace as\\nnuieh as I admire him.\\nLet gent riehet eont-Ue n heureuxt Are the rich so very\\nhappy I\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ia J, Vai tant aimie/ When\\nshe v rimed 1 loved her bo dearly\\nAutant mi by b tug placed utter tho\\nadjective it qualii\\nEl. in this quiiiu\\nratal\\nSo, h :i t be translated by ti, but its\\nplaee is Bupplii\\nrtonne, lie is\\nalways bo busy tha obody.\\nSi ezolndea all superlative after it, with\\nthe exception of bien. which may he used between n and\\nparticiple past\\nkind that everybody love\u00c2\u00ab her, tile Mi si\\na, iii. M tOUt i BR", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0510.jp2"}, "511": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 229\\nThis work is so well done that it praises its master, cet\\nouvrage est si bien fait qyCil loue le maitre.\\nIn negative comparisons aussi cannot very well be used, when\\nit has the meaning of Not any more, and its place is then\\nsupplied by non ptlus.\\nEx. II rCa pas montre non plus un grand courage, he also has\\nnot shown much courage.\\nVous rCavez pas reussi, ni moi non 2^1 us, you have not\\nsucceeded, nor I either.\\nExercise.\\nHe had lent me about a thousand dollars, and I have not returned\\nmore than half of it but it has not been in my power, or I -would have\\nrepaid more. She is as lovely as she is beautiful and that is a very\\nrare combination, for the body is not always as much gifted as the\\nmind. He is so simple a man that he never suspects anybody, and he\\ngives to the bad as much credit for what they say as to the good. He\\nwas so very busy yesterday that I would have done wrong to inter-\\nrupt him then, but I hope I shall be able to see him to-day. When he\\nhad well dined he felt in such good-humor, that he would grant\\nfavors to as many as came to ask. You spoil your children, for I have\\nobserved that the worse they are the more you indulge them, merely\\nfor the purpose of avoiding the trouble it would give you to correct\\nthem. Even when she is most happy she has a sad look in her eyes,\\nand she appears troubled when she is least thoughtful. Friendship is\\nso precious a thing that it ought not to be lavished it ought to be\\ncherished as much as the most precious good we possess. He was so\\nvery benevolent, that he gave away the little money he owned, and\\neven distributed his clothes among the poor.\\nBeaucoup and bien.\\nBeaucoup, from the Latin bella copia, and bien, from the Latin\\nbene, differ but little in meaning, bien being only a strengthened\\nbeaveovp. They both represent the English plural as well as", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0511.jp2"}, "512": {"fulltext": "230 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\ns ngular, meaning Much and many, a great deal and a great\\nmany. They differ, however, essentially in their regimen,\\nbeuucoup being always followed by de, ban by the partitive\\narticle.\\nEx. Beaucoup de gens Font vu el entcndu, many people havo\\nseen and heard it.\\nJe Vai entendu dire a bum des gens, I have heard a great\\nmany people say so.\\nThe English phrase Many a, is translated without the indefinite\\nan\\nEx. Beauc ip deft mimx s y sont tromp S, many a -woman has\\nbeen deceived by thai\\nBeaucoup, when used with a comparative, may be placed\\neither before it, r, connected by the preposition de, after it,\\nwhen it corresponds to the English By far.\\nEx. I lueoup plus savant que lui or, Voue Utt\\n1. 1, i beaucoup, you are far more\\nlearned than fa\\nIt may also 1 placed between the auxiliary and the past\\nparticiple, when it i- used emphatically.\\n.1 would have liked it very\\nmuch.\\nVorj well, is translated simply 1\\nI like him very well, je Palme b Stti\\nJl k expresses the English\\nl ;ir !r..m it.\\nPi v,, U\\ntliink von have paid me Ear from it.\\n1 far Erom\\n,|.|._\\\\.\\nIts comparative plus is used, like moin* and n\\ntitiuii to express b comparison, corresponding t the Engli-h", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0512.jp2"}, "513": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 20 J\\nThe more the more, etc. in which case it must be followed\\nby the verb directly, and not, as in English, by the adjective.\\nEx. Plus on en voit plus on Vadmire, the more one sees of it\\nthe more one admires it.\\nPlus il grandit plus il devient laid, the more he grows\\nthe uglier he becomes.\\nINTERROGATIVE ADVERBS.\\nThe English adverb How is translated into French by a great\\nvariety of forms, according to the meaning it may happen to\\nhave or the words with which it is connected.\\nHow, inquiring the manner, etc., is translated by comment.\\nEx. Comment vous Hes-vous parte depuis? How have you\\nbeen since?\\nVoulez-vous savoir comment on doit fairc? Do you wish\\nto know how to do it\\nComme, on the contrary, does not refer to the manner so\\nmuch, but simply serves to connect two verbs.\\nEx. Voyez comme il travaille See how (much) he works!\\nHow, in exclamations, is translated by que, which, followed\\nby de, means also How much and How many\\nEx. Que cette parole me doit tre douce! How sweet that\\nword ought to be to me\\nQuelle est jolie en depit de son age How pretty she is\\nin spite of her age\\nQue de batailles gagnees et que de villes prises! How\\nmany battles won, and how many cities taken\\nIt will be seen, from these examples, that in French the\\ninterrogative adverb comment or que cannot, as in English, be\\nfollowed immediately by an adjective or adverb, but requires\\nthat the verb should come immediately after it.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0513.jp2"}, "514": {"fulltext": "232 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nEx. I cannot tell yon bow old she is, je ne saurais i\\\\us dire\\nquel est son Age.\\nHow few men are really happy Quil y a peu dliommes\\nqui sont vraimcnt heureux!\\nHow so is translated by comment crtctf\\nQuand, which can be used relatively as a conjunction, as\\nwell as interrogatively as an adverb, means not only When?\\nbut, with the conditional, also Even it in which case it is often\\naccompanied by vieme.\\nEx. Qnuitd piendree-vous me voir a la campagne t When will\\nyou come and see me in the country\\nQuand vous me ha iriez, je in me plaindrais pas, even if\\nyon should hate me, I would not complain.\\nJe le/erai quand mime U m couterait l i vie i I wili do it\\neven thongfa it should coat me my life.\\nPourquoi repreaenta the English Why, wherefore, and what,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2with for at the end v( tl.\\nEx, urq dii hier t Why did yon\\noof tell ii. i\\\\\\ni il fait t Could you\\ntell me what be did it I\\nitivr questions, Why is frequently rendered by pu \u00c2\u00bbr.\\ntt Why did you not tell mel\\nwen many soldi) n who l i l much more genine, hut I havo\\n11 one who had mora true courage than your Mend. That\\nwhy I esteemed bin ao much; and I may add that I like him alao\\nmuch, although I hara asen him but little. She la \u00c2\u00bbery fur from\\nshe intenda going to\\ni eat deal of money,\\nand she fhlnki there before he dies. When was.\\nlit, in which yonr jrounger brother feD 1", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0514.jp2"}, "515": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 233\\nelder brother who died there and I do not see why you ask me such\\na question at all. How long will be your stay in this city, or have\\nyou not yet decided how many days you will spend here 1 How full\\nof wisdom these verses are They surprise me every time I read\\nthem and even if they were not the work of so famous an author,\\nthey would not fail to be admired wherever they are read. Why did\\nyou not tell her so She would have understood it perfectly, and you\\nwould not feel the remorse that now troubles your conscience. The\\nmore I see of them the less I like them they are not like those\\npeople who gain your esteem the better you learn to know them.\\nNEGATIVE ADVERBS.\\nThe simple negation in French is non, which corresponds to\\nthe English No, and can never be used with a verb. It may,\\nhowever, be placed before settlement, only, when followed by\\nque, and it may follow certain verbs, like oui, when connected\\nwith them by que.\\nEx. Non, Madame, je rHy consentirai jamais, no, Madam, I will\\nnever consent to it.\\nElle est non seulement vieille, mais laide, she is not only\\nold, but ugly.\\nE\u00c2\u00abt-ce que vraiment il a dit que non Did he really\\nsay no\\nAll other negative adverbs require the addition of ne in its\\nproper place before the verb, because they are all taken from\\nLatin nouns, which in themselves have no negative signification.\\nThus, pas comes from the Latin passus, and point from punclum\\nrien from rem, and jamais from jam mar/is.\\nIt has already been mentioned that the particle ne is re-\\nquired whether the negative adverb precede or follow the verb.\\nEx Jamais la fortune n afait autant pour un homme, never\\nhas fortune done as much for a man.\\nRien ne me plairait mieux que de vous y voir, nothing\\nwould please me better than to see you there.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0515.jp2"}, "516": {"fulltext": "234 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nAucune de ces dames ne vous a reconnn, not one of these\\nladies has recognized you.\\nPas and point both represent the English Not, but the latter\\nis the stronger, approaching the meaning of the English Not at\\nall, or when there is a distinction made between the quantity and\\nthe whole material, in which case point applies to the former\\nand pan to the latter.\\nEx. Vous vous irompez, il n\\\\t point reussi, you are mistaken,\\nhe has not at all succeeded.\\nJe ne prendrai point de the\\\\jc n\\\\n prends pas, I will take\\nno tea, I do not drink tea.\\nPai may be used without ne for the English Not, before\\nadjectives or adverbs; and point is used without ne, but fol-\\nlowed by like an adverb of quality, for the English No, be-\\nfore noun-.\\nBow is the coffee I Not very good. Comment est lee\\nNo tax ai L no i to 1 Point de taxes et point de vitot\\nOn the other hand, pas and point are omitted and ne alone\\ncpress the negative, when tl stent given t the\\nJficiently clearly expressed by another\\nWO!tl.\\nEx. rlira d he will nol go out for a week.\\n,1 ),\\\\i dit mot, daring all this time\\nhe bat word.\\nt/outte, I assure you, 1 cannot\\nit 1 do H t understand it at all).\\nThey are also omitted after the verbs oser, to dare,\\nhen there i id emphasis on the\\nion.\\nr, he will never in his\\nlife d :i it.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0516.jp2"}, "517": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 235\\nElle n a cessS de me tourmenter, she has plagued me in-\\ncessantly.\\nJe ne saurais vous dire combien je vous plains, I cannot\\ntell you how much I pity you.\\nThey are, finally, omitted after qui in exclamations.\\nEx. Qui ne serait touche par un tel spectacle Who would\\nnot be moved by such a sight\\nPoint, with the infinitive, may be placed before or after it.\\nEx. Pour ne point souffrir or, Pour ne souffrir point, in\\norder not to suffer at all.\\nQue, with the negative ne, has the meaning of the English\\nOnly, when it qualifies a verb, and que must precede the word\\nto be limited.\\nEx. Vous n avez qu a dire et vous Vaurez, you have only to\\nsay so, and you shall have it.\\nJe ne veux sortir que pour une demi-heure, I only want to\\ngo out for half an hour.\\nII n ai?ne que moi, he loves me only.\\nWhen Only expresses a sufficiency, it is rendered by seulement.\\nEx. Sifetais seulement major, je serais content, if I were only a\\nmajor, I would be content.\\nGuere, with the negative ne, represents the English Scarcely\\nor Hardly, in connection with a verb.\\nEx. Je ne Vaurais guere reconnu, sHl ne rrfavait parle, I would\\nhave scarcely recognized him, if he had not spoken to\\nme.\\nII rfy a guere d autres gens dans ce pays, there are hardly\\nany other people in this country.\\nThe numerous cases in which ne alone is used, without\\ngiving a negative meaning to the verb, have already been men-\\ntioned in connection with the different classes of words which\\nrequire it, as comparatives, verbs of doubt and fear, etc.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0517.jp2"}, "518": {"fulltext": "236 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nPlus, with the negative ne, has the meaning of No more\\nand Xo longer, when the latter does not literally mean Not a\\nlonger time, in which case it would have to be translated plus\\nlongtemps.\\nEx. Dites-moi adieu, vous ne me reverrez plus, tell me good\\nbye, you will never see me again.\\nJe ne peux plus, mes forces sonl epuisees, I can do it no\\nlonger, my strength is exhausted.\\nVous tCauriez j\u00c2\u00bbt$ i/u marcher j lus longtemps you ought\\nnot to have walked any longer.\\nNot airain, can never be represented in French by pas encore,\\nas foreigners are apt to do the simple plus expressing the words\\nPat i won means Not yet\\nEx. Jt in- 1 iii pat tneon t reparaUra plus, I have\\nnot Been it, and it will nut appeal again.\\nEi an adverb of quantity, and means\\nSome mora.\\nEx. Vow VargetUt You want some more\\nmoney\\nExKHClSK.\\nI can never believe those who haw once told me a (ktoehood, and\\nnothing will persuade me that a man who ace, may not do\\nit again, hi d it suits him. fcfy pati nt Is not bq well to day he was\\nmorning than he has yel been, and I doubt that he oan\\nrecover, I oonld hardly believe thai he would commit so bass an\\naction nobodg I him of being a mean man. and it\\nwould surprise me rerymuob if it should be discovered, after all, that\\nhf has dece i ved everybody so long, I believe you will Bnd at the\\ntrial, which has only commenced yet, that the facts arc not only\\nproved, but supported by the Btrongeel evidence. Several w\\n|y, ami they have proved every thing,\\nwhile hil tablish his innocence.\\nI know that at d listen to the Bosptoiona, nor\\n[either, and II Ij the reports in the oewi\\nturned from Burope he is more conceited than he ever was,\\nand it will require much time to make him come hack tohisg i", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0518.jp2"}, "519": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 237\\nNo Pope was the cry of the early reformers but afterwards that\\nwas not enough, and numerous other demands of a similar kind were\\nmade, until it began to be feared that nothing of the Holy Church\\nwould survive. Do not send for any wine I do not drink any. and\\nyour water is so pure and fresh, that I shall be perfectly content.\\nCHAPTER VII.\\nPREPOSITIONS.\\nPrepositions have their name from the fact that they are\\ninvariably placed before the noun, pronoun, or verb to which\\nthey belong. Their general purpose is to represent the relations\\nexisting between two words in the same sentence. Hence\\nthey can neither be used by themselves nor placed at the end\\nof the sentence, as is done in English.\\nEx. I cannot tell you, I was not near, je ne saurais vous le\\ndire,je n* etuis pas pres de Id.\\nWhat was it he spoke of? Qu est-ce que c etait de quoi\\nil parla\\nA number of so-called prepositions, however, are, in French\\nas in English, adverbs also, and in that capacity they may be\\nused without a regimen.\\nEx. D abord on a pris le the, et apres, on a danse, first they\\nthey took tea, and then they danced.\\nIt must be borne in mind that simple prepositions are placed\\nimmediately before the noun, while compound prepositions\\nrequire another preposition\\nDe, when they consist already of a preposition and a noun\\na, when they express a tendency or an aim.\\nEx On ne le voit jamais sans manteau, he is never seen with*\\nout a cloak.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0519.jp2"}, "520": {"fulltext": "23S OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nOn Fa fait President au lieu de son pere, he has been\\nmade President instead of bis father.\\nFt s est hasarde jusqu aux injures, he has ventured even\\nupon insults.\\nOther prepositions can have a second preposition for their\\nregimen; thus de may be used before apres, entre, avec, ekes\\npres and aupres.\\nEx. Ces personnes sont trades d apres nature, these characters\\narc drawn from nature.\\n77 en t pt u d*t ntre i ux jni raiment, there are few among\\nthem who love him.\\nLes homines pres de mourir se montrent ttls qirils sont,\\nmen about to die show themselves as they are.\\nHore\\\\ outside, may be used familiarly without the additional\\nproposition de, which it generally requires.\\nEx. lis demeuraient longtemps kore lc la ville, they lived a\\nlong time outride of tin.- town.\\nhoWUM est foot hor* Ixirnirc, this man has lodg-\\nle the city-walls.\\nThe prepositions de, and en must be repeated before every\\nnoun, pronoun or verb which is their regimen.\\nEx, I general fui eombU cThonneur et de gloire, this general\\nwas overwhelmed with honor and glory.\\ndnii la et aux midecine, he owes his life to\\n....1 and\\nII tra/iq he deals wholesale and\\nretail.\\nAll other preposition! are repeated only when the two regi-\\nmens which they govern have an oppo m- or widely different\\nmeaning.\\nus lea maim de A/ Providence^ under\\nthe c\\\\ e and in the hands of Provkl", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0520.jp2"}, "521": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 239\\nJVos devoirs envers Dieu et envers la patrie, our duty to\\nGod and our country.\\nII passe sa vie dans la mollesse et Voisivete, lie spends his\\nlife in effeminacy and idleness.\\nSPECIAL REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS.\\nAvant and devant mean both Before, but the former relates\\nonly to time and rank, the latter only to place.\\nEx. JVous irons avant vous, si vous le voulez, we will go first,\\nif you wish it.\\nPrenez place devant moi, s il vous plait, take a seat before\\nme, if you please.\\nBefore a verb in the infinitive, avant ought to be followed by\\nque de, although modern authors frequently employ avant que\\nonly.\\nEx. Avant que a ecrire ilfaut apprendre a penser, before writing\\nwe must learn to think.\\nChez, from the Latin casa, retains from its origin the idiom-\\natic meaning of the English, At the house of, or At, followed\\nby a person s name in the possessive case.\\nEx. Je ne vous ai jamais vu chez moi, I have never seen you\\nat my house.\\nMais je vous ai rencontre bien des fois chez le docteur,\\nbut I have met you very often at the doctor s.\\nHence chez, with personal pronouns especially, expresses the\\nEnglish word Home, for which there is no other equivalent iu\\nFrench.\\nEx. Est-ce que vous serez chez vous ce soir? Will you be at\\nhome to-night\\nMadame la Comtesse est-elle chez elle Is the Countess\\nat home\\nApres avoir ecrit les lettres vous pouvez aller chez vous,\\nafter having written the letters you can go home.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0521.jp2"}, "522": {"fulltext": "2-iO ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nDans and en have both the same signification, in but en\\nexpresses it in a vague and general sense, and hence is not\\naccompanied by the article, except in a few technical terms,\\nwhilst dans has always the meaning of Into or Within, and is\\ninvariably accompanied by the article.\\nEx. En tous temps, en tous lieur, la vertu est sublime, at all\\ntimes, in all places, virtue is sublime.\\na vicu dix ans en Italic sans apprendre Cltalien, he has\\nlived ten years in Italy without learning Italian.\\nMa sorur etait dans sa chambre, my sister was in her\\nroom.\\nISentu/iti a m ir -lti: tea troupes dans Paris, the enemy\\nhas marched his troops into Paris.\\nCela eat arrive on en Jain ou en JailUt, that happened\\neither in June or in July.\\nDemain, noua entrerona dona le moia de Juin, to-morrow\\nwe shall enter into the month of June.\\nFrom thi peculiarity i the fact that it serves, h\\nconnection with a camber of nouns, to form adverbial expres-\\nsions, signifying a manner of doing or being.\\nK\\\\. i iju illi toil in bonne I do not think\\nshu i- in g 1 health.\\n(ja i mil eette chanson en muaiqut t Who has\\nset thi- song to m\\nr,n i, bfWteillett Do vou prefer bottled\\nwine\\nThe fen cases in which m i followed by the article are the\\ning\\nEn or in Vat a in the year\\n01 i n hi in the absence nnd in the\\nEi fair, in the air;\\n/,V n these terms;\\nmote, in these words", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0522.jp2"}, "523": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 24-1\\nand in the titles Maitre es (instead of en les) Arts, Master of\\nArts, and Docteur es Sciences, Doctor of Sciences.\\nWhen dans and en are employed in definitions of time, they\\nhave an entirely different signification dans expresses the\\ntime between now and the beginning of an action, en means the\\ntime between the beginning and the end of the action.\\nEx. II arrivera ici dans trois jours, he will reach here three\\ndays hence.\\nII arrivera la en trois jours, it will take him three days\\nto get there.\\nEn has also the peculiar meaning of like, in the manner of, in\\nthe character of.\\nEx. II me traite en frere plutot qu en maitre, he treats me\\nrather like a brother than like a master.\\nDans toute cette affaire il a agi en honnete homme, in this\\nwhole affair he has acted like an honest man.\\nJElle etait deguisee en dame du Moyen-Age, she was dressed\\nin the character of a lady of the Middle Ages.\\nThe English in, before the word Manner, and whenever with\\ncan be substituted for it, is not translated by en, but by de.\\nEx. In this manner we shall never come to an end of it, de cette\\nmaniere nous n en viendrons jamais a bout.\\nShe said to him in a tender voice, elie lui dit d une voix\\ntendre.\\nNever in my life, and Nothing in the world, are in like manner\\ntranslated by jamais de ma me, and Hen au monde.\\nDessas, dessous (pronounced as if the first e was mute), above\\nand below, dedans and dehors, within and without, belong to\\nthat class of prepositions which may also be used as adverbs.\\nThe difference can be easily ascertained, as they will have a\\nregimen when they are used as prepositions, and stand alone as\\nadverbs.\\nEx. Je Vai chcrche dessus et dessous. la table, I have looked for\\nit on the table and under it.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0523.jp2"}, "524": {"fulltext": "242 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nest moitie dedans, ?uoitie dehors, he is half inside and\\nhalf outside.\\nElle est allee dehors voir s il y a qnelqiCun, she has gone\\nout to see if there is anybody there.\\nThey may be preceded by one of the following prepositions\\ndc, a and pur in which case they are followed by de.\\nEx. II ceut toujours tfelever au-dessus de ses igaux, he always\\nwants to rise above his equals.\\nest riche, U est jeune, et par de?sus de cela il est beau,\\nhe is young, he is rich, and besides that he is hand-\\nso in e.\\nEziroisr.\\nWho was that woman w] I before you at the theatre\\nlast night She had oome there half an hoar before you. and seemed\\nlent to see yon oome. I will lex you know before writing\\nto her, that you can tell me i me to communicate to\\nher, in ease you Bhould not write to li r yourself before that time.\\nShe is still, 1 think, at her uncle s, l\u00c2\u00bbui after a month or two she told\\nme she would gpo hack to her aunt s, where h is perfectly at home.\\nThey are not at home at this hour, the s rvam Bays, but they will\\nreturn a few minutes before dinner. Had she gone Into the house\\nwhen you saw her this morning, or was she BtUl walking In the\\ngarden, and gathering flowers for a bonquel e born either\\nrmanyor In Holland, bn1 theyspenl nearly their whole life in\\nthe I In rain did he try to gain his ear; he would not\\nlisten to him t r a mora at, and after a little while h went back, and\\nlocked himself In his study- yen i inn\\nthe basket, put some of them upon it, and wDl and room\\nnost invariably used with another preposi-\\nboa after it. which, wjlfa a We may say,\\nIn will pin\\nhell.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0524.jp2"}, "525": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 243\\nL eau lui monta jusque par dessus la tete, the watei rose\\nas high as above her head.\\nJ aime ses talents, ses vertus et jusqu a ses defauts, I love\\nhis talents, his virtues and even his faults.\\nPoets take the liberty of adding an s to jusque whenever it\\nsuits their metre to make two syllables of the word.\\nEx. Vous la louez, Madame, jusques au del, you praise her,\\nMartam, to the skies.\\nIt has already been stated that jusque, used as a conjunction\\nbefore verbs, requires the additional ce que.\\nEx. Attendee jusqu a ce que faurai fini ma lettre, wait until I\\nhave finished my letter.\\nSans, without, has two peculiarities it is used without an\\narticle, unless there is special emphasis on the article, and it\\nmay be followed either by ni or by et, in spite of its negative\\nsignification but with et, it must be repeated before each noun\\nEx. Sans crainte ni pudeur, sans force ni vertu, without fear\\nor shame, without power or virtue.\\nElle y est allee sans pere et sans mari, she went there\\nwithout father and husband.\\nSans la crainte de Voffenser, je Vaurais fait, without the\\nfear of offending him, I would have done it.\\nWhen followed by a verb, sans requires an additional que,\\nunless it be .in the infinitive, which being a noun requires no\\nconjunction.\\nEx. Sans que la France meritdt de reproches, without France s\\ndeserving any reproach.\\nJl boit du vin sans y mettre de Veau, he drinks wine\\nwithout putting any water into it.\\nAvec, also, omits the article, but only Avhen it stands before\\nnouns expressive of moral qualities, with which it forms an\\nadverb.\\nEx. B ne poitrra s en tirer avec honneur, he will not be able to\\nget out of it honorably.", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0525.jp2"}, "526": {"fulltext": "244: ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nOn petit (outfaire aiec de Vargent, one can do every thing\\nwith money.\\nPar, also, can be used -without an article iu adverbial expres-\\nsions, and when it is followed by a noun taken in a partitive\\nsense.\\nEx. On fait plus pur la douceur que par la force, one can do\\nmore by gentleness than by violence.\\nll voulut mi prendre par force, he wanted to take it\\nforcibly from me.\\nCtx pauvrea gens rnouraient /aim par miUi e r t these\\npoor people starved to death by the thousand.\\nDe, a and p ur are the three principal prepositions in use\\nwith the infinitive of verba, and present some difficulty in their\\nuse, as they do not always correspond to like expressions in\\nEnglish. It lias already been explained, that the English word\\nto is by no mean.- always a preposition, but roost frequently\\nnothing more than a nine sign of the verbal character of the\\nverb-word, when it remains, of course, untranslated. Never-\\ntheless, it baa also the meanings of In order to, For the purpose\\nof, and in BUCh cases it baa to be translated by the proper\\npreposition in French,\\nrepi the sense of In order to, and is also\\nneed after all expressions, noun-, adjectives or adverbs, which\\nconvey the idea of sufficiency.\\nEx. Silt pour vou8 /aire pktitir, she has done\\npleasure.\\ntela snjnit pour U payer/ Is thai enough to\\npay him\\nII Hi asm Bitty rfait celt* bivue t be is simple\\nenough to have made that blonder.\\n.1 expresses always more or less distinctly the end or purpose,\\nan 1 frequently, as ha- been stated elsewhere, gives a passive\\nsignification to Be verb it pn\\ni; v bon a manger ou a quoi tert-ilt Is this\\n..i bal i- it good for", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0526.jp2"}, "527": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS.\\n245\\nC est une chose qui est beaucoup a craindre, that is a thing\\nmuch to be feared.\\nIt is also used after words with a superlative meaning.\\nEx. Je crois que fetais le premier a vous le dire, I believe T\\nwas the first to tell you.\\nDe is used in all other cases not thus provided for, except\\nafter verbs which are used without any preposition, like verbs\\nof motion, etc.\\nEx. Elle est impatiente de revoir set patrie, she is impatient to\\nsee her country again.\\nII est notre devoir de venir a son secours, it is our duty\\nto come to his aid.\\nWhen an infinitive is tbe object of another verb, de is placed\\nbefore it as direct object, and a, when it is the indirect object.\\nEx. H ne ml a pas etc permis de la revoir, I have not been per-\\nmitted to see her again.\\nJe Vai invite a venir nous voir, I have invited him to come\\nand see us.\\nAs a matter of reference, lists of those verbs are given here,\\nwhich require either no prp.nosition at all before an infinitive\\nor such as differ from those used in Eno-lish.\\nVERBS USED\\nWITHOUT PREPOSITION.\\nAffirmer\\nto affirm\\ndaigner\\nto deign\\naimer mieux\\nto prefer\\ndeclarer\\nto declare\\nalter\\nto go\\ndeposer\\nto bear witi\\napercevoir\\nto perceive\\ndesirer\\nto wish\\nassurer\\nto assure\\ndevoir\\nto owe\\navouer\\nto confess\\necouter\\nto listen to\\ncompter\\nto intend\\nentendre\\nto hear\\nconfesser\\nto confess\\nenvover\\nto send\\nconsiderer\\nto behold\\nipier\\nto spy\\ncourir\\nto run\\nesperer\\nto hope\\neroire\\nto believe\\nfaire\\nto make", "height": "2801", "width": "1695", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0527.jp2"}, "528": {"fulltext": "246\\nON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nfalloir\\nftimagin i\\nluisser\\nmener\\nnier\\nvbsercer\\noser\\nemir\\nparaUre\\npenser\\nr tt ndre\\n8 ilJJU\\nde\\nmet de\\nto be necessary\\nto imagine\\nto allow, to suffer\\nto lead\\nto deny\\nt observe\\nto dare\\nto hear\\nto appear\\nto imagine\\nto be al le\\nto pretend\\nto prefer\\nt pro!\\nto pub!\\nto remember\\nrapport* r\\nreconnoitre\\nregarder\\nretourner\\nre emir\\ni coir\\naembl r\\neentir\\n8 nh liter\\naoutenir\\ntemoigner\\nse trotie.r\\ntoloir tnit nx\\nm n ir\\nroir\\nvouiotr\\nto report\\nto acknowledge\\nto look at\\nto return\\nto ccme back\\nto know\\nto seem\\nto feel\\nto wish\\nto maintain\\nto testify\\nto bappen to be\\nto be I) tier\\nto come\\nto see\\nto be willing\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2wnu it BBQjOIBfl de BSFOKB .VN INFINITIVE.\\nto accuse of ft\\nto grieve at de\\nto leave off\\ngrieved at t dSeetpfn r th-\\nru warn\\nto take into one s d. t \u00e2\u0096\u00a0urn, r dt\\ni bead im t de\\nnir de\\nto blame\\nf.-r\\nto char\\nreal\\nt.i 000\\nun-\\nto cball\\nto m.i v\\noff sc f\\nr de\\nl\\nto deepair\\nto rave at\\nto dissuade\\nminue\\nto deny\\nt0 forbear\\nuado\\nto doabl\\nto endeavor\\nto baatea\\nt.i be vexed at\\nto be frightens 1\\nat\\n!l\\nat\\natulate\\n!t0 llatt. r\\nself", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0528.jp2"}, "529": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS.\\n247\\nfrimir de\\ngemir de\\ngener de\\ngronder de\\nhair de\\nse hasarder de\\nse hater de\\ns indigner de\\njouir de\\nlower de\\nmanquer de\\nmenacer de\\nse passer de\\nse piquer de\\nplaindre de\\nto shudder at\\nto lament\\nto constrain\\nto scold for\\nto hate for\\nto venture\\nto hasten\\nto be exasperat-\\ned at\\nto enjoy\\nto praise for\\nto fail\\nto threaten\\nto do without\\nto pride in\\nto pity for\\nprendre garde de to take care not soupgonner de\\nprescrire de to prescribe se souvenir de\\npresser de to urge\\nse presser de to hasten\\npresumer de to conjecture\\nprier de to desire\\nprotester de to protest\\nAnd all other verbs corresponding to English verbs which are\\nfollowed by the prepositions of, from, with or about.\\npunir de\\nse rebwter de\\nse rejouir de\\nremercier de\\nrendre grace de\\nse repentir de\\nreprendre de\\nreprimander de\\nse ressouvenir de\\nrire de\\nrougir de\\nse scandaliser de\\nsommer de\\nse soucier de\\nsoufrir de\\nsuffire de (im-\\npersonal)\\nsupplier de\\ntrembler de\\nto punish\\nito be discouraged\\nat\\nto rejoice at\\nto thank for\\nto repent\\nto chide for\\nto remember\\nto laugh at\\nto blush at\\nto be offended at\\nto summon\\nto care for\\nto suffer\\nto suspect\\nto remember\\nto suffice\\nto entreat\\nto tremble\\nVERBS WHICH REQUIRE a BEFORE AN INFINITIVE.\\nAboutir d\\naider d\\naimer d\\napprendre d\\navoir d\\navoir peine d\\nbalancer d\\nc-hereher d\\nconcourir d\\ncondescendre d\\nto end in\\nto help in\\nto like\\nto learn\\nto have\\nto be hardly able\\nto hesitate\\nto try\\nto co-operate in\\nto condescend to\\nconsister d\\nconspirer d\\ncontribuer d\\nco titer d\\ndemander a\\ndemeurer d\\ndisposer d\\ndonner d\\nengager d\\nto consist of\\nto agree together\\nto contribute to\\nto cost\\nto ask\\nto put too much\\ntime in\\nto prepare\\nto give\\nto prevail upon", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0529.jp2"}, "530": {"fulltext": "24S\\nON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nenlutrdir d\\nenseigner d\\netre d\\ne. wetter d\\nr d\\nre a\\nr d\\na\\nto encourage\\nto teach (a pres-\\nent participle)\\nto be (as explain-\\n~l ed page 114.)\\nto excel in\\nto excite\\nto exhort\\nto hesitate\\n/m to\\nto show\\nto succeed in\\nto think of\\nin\\nt in\\nto take pleasure in\\nporter a\\na\\nft rvir d\\nttrder d\\ni d\\nprendre garde d\\nr d\\nripnrjni r d\\nt. \u00e2\u0080\u009eir d\\ntravail\\nto lead\\nto succeed in\\nto serve\\nto think of\\nto long for\\nto tend\\nto urge\\nto take care\\nto invite\\nto renounce\\nto be repugnant\\nto insist\\nto work at\\nto aim at\\nI i M TH08H\\nl.isil\\nto praifi\\nto grieve tor to slander\\nto hum rust\\nto gi\\nto pride in\\nto profit by\\ni to bi\\nat\\nto thank for\\ncant\\nto remember\\nto In\\nr at to blnsfa at\\nupon\\nd to be offended ut\\nt informer dc to inquire af rveai\\ntoenjo; r ir de", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0530.jp2"}, "531": {"fulltext": "PREPC\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00baSITIONS.\\n249\\nse saucier tie\\nto care for\\nrto call, to give tlie\\nsouffrir de\\nto suffer by\\ntraiter de\\ntitle of\\nse souvenir de\\nto remember\\nuser de\\nto use\\nsubsister de\\nto live upon\\nAboutir d\\nto end in\\npourvoir d\\nto provide for\\ncompatir d\\nto sympathize with preluder d\\nto prelude\\ncontrevenir d\\nto infringe\\nprendre garde\\nd to take care of\\nconvenir d\\nto suit\\nproceder d\\nto set about\\ndeplaire d\\nto displease\\nremedier a\\nto remedy\\nderoger d\\nto derogate from\\nresister d\\nto resist\\ndesobeir d\\nto disobey\\nressembler d\\nto look like\\necliapper d\\nto escape from\\nsonger d\\nto think of\\nexcetter d\\nto excel in\\nsubvenir d\\nto relieve\\nmanquer d\\nto fail in\\nsucceder d\\nto succeed\\nnuire d\\nto prejudice\\nsuffire d\\nto be sufficient for\\nobeir d\\nto obey\\nsurvivre d\\nto survive\\nobi ur d\\nto obviate\\ntenir d\\nnot to give up\\npardonner a\\nto pardon\\ntirer d\\nto shoot, to fire at\\nparvenir a\\nto attain\\niravaiUer d\\nto work about\\npenser d\\nto think of\\nviser d\\nto aim at\\nplaire d\\nto please\\nThe following verbs may be used with or without the pre-\\nposition a before nouns and pronouns.\\napplaudir to applaud persuader to persuade\\ninsulter to insult satisfaire to satisfy\\nA few others are used with de or with h, according to the\\nmeaning which is given to them.\\nExercise.\\nWe would have prevented them from doing that, but we came too\\nlate, and when we tried to persuade them to desist, they replied, that\\nit was no longer in their power to undo their work. Why do you not\\nteach your children to speak French it is useful to know at least one\\nother language besides our own, and it helps much in learning to", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0531.jp2"}, "532": {"fulltext": "250 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nunderstand the latter. She has been trying to imitate the voice of\\nthat celebrate! singer, ever since she heard her sing in London but\\nin vain, for her voice is not strong enough to do what the other did\\nwithout making an effort. Would it not l e better for you and your\\nchildren to lay up some money, so that, when you begin to grow old,\\nyou may feel secure against want I would advise you earnestly to\\nfollow his counsel, and to do what you want to do at once, fur delay\\nis seldom useful in bringing better knowledge. His wife was a\\ncharming woman she was beloved and esteemed by all who knew her,\\nwhilst he was detested, and finally killed, by one whom he had instilled\\ngrievously, in a dueL You say yon are in want of money enough to\\ngo on with your enterprise i will think of it whilst going to town,\\nand when I return 1 will let you know what I have determined to do\\nfin v. i. If yon can do without your new dresses, it would be better\\nfar yoo I want all the money you bave to pay the doctor s\\nbill, and to provide for the winter. Sin- has survived all In r relations\\nand even her grandchildren: i; entirely alone, bat\\nshe bears it very v/efl, and does not complain of her lot. If it suit*\\n_vi\u00c2\u00bbu. 1 wish yon would come aud dine with us to-morrow; we have\\nVOU will enjoy, I am sure, and you will\\nthank ns for bavins Invited yon to met I\\nCHAPTEB VIII.\\nIONS.\\nConinnctioi r name from the fact that they serve\\nto join\\nt i,,. v ,l,, til OQghtS, nor the\\nthoughts thei important on that\\na. count. Their principal purp* manner in\\nother, and thai, in\\nje, to build up tli. from i,s different\\nConjunctions, according to thi ir form, are stinpfe. when they\\ntea no other poi", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0532.jp2"}, "533": {"fulltext": "CONJUNCTIONS. 251\\net, ou, ni, mais, si, car, etc. Some of these arc 11 ore precisely\\nused in French than in English. Thus in English for serves aa\\na preposition as well as a conjunction, while in French each\\nhas a separate form.\\nEx. He has done it for your satisfaction and mine, U Vafait\\npour votre satisfaction et la mienne.\\nHe has done it, for you wished it, il Pa fait car vous le\\ndesiriez.\\nThe English then sometimes refers to time, meaning at that\\ntime, and sometimes to a conclusion, meaning therefore the\\nFrench has again one form for the adverb and another for the\\nconjunction.\\nEx. It was then that he lost his right arm, c etait alors qu il\\nperdit le bras droit.\\nIt was then your sister whom you took for me Cetait\\ndone votre sceur que vous prites pour moi\\nCompound conjunctions consist of several words taken from\\nother parts of speech, and have only this in common that, with\\nvery few exceptions, like par consequent, etc., they are invariably\\nconnected with que. Such are puisque, parceque, a moins que,\\npourvu que, etc.\\nConjunctions, according to their signification, differ as much\\nas the manner of thinking may differ in the human mind,\\nlimited only by the permanent and fixed laws of Logic.\\nIt will be borne in mind, here, that in French a conjunction\\nat least que is absolutely necessary, whenever two verbs are\\nplaced in connection with each other. This is not the case in\\nEnglish, where the two verbs, and consequently two distinct\\nideas, may be simply placed side by side, without a conjunction,\\nand it is left to the mind to supply the nature of the connec-\\ntion.\\nEx. I know you tell me the truth and nothing more,^ sais\\nque vous me dites la verite et rien de plus.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0533.jp2"}, "534": {"fulltext": "252 UN THE PABTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nHe said he would come to take leave, il dit qvfil vien-\\ndrait prendre conn*..\\nWhen she heard he had gone she burst into tears, quand\\nelle apprlt qu ilfut parti tile cclata en larmes.\\nIt has also been stated that certain conjunctions require the\\njo. lowing verb to be in the subjunctive mood, from the peculiar\\nmeaning which attaches to them.\\nEx. -1 mains que rous ne soyez bicn riche, unless you should\\nbe extremely rich.\\nJ ii consent pourvu quil le/asse lui-mime, I agree to it\\nprovided he does it himself.\\nThe conjunctions ok, ni and ntrit, arc frequently repeated\\nbefore two parts of i which are represented as\\nunited i other.\\nEx. Ei U ei h pentit t both rather and\\nson have been i\\nSoil be it from contempt\\nor from i ored bim.\\nMli.r COnjunctiOl a i, bol only in the\\nform of which thos i an ei.\\nEx, when I saw\\ncroyaieptu, as he\\nmaintained it and 1 did not believe it.\\nSU tn d e j e u j suit pat, if he\\nam noi in.\\nei poinl a tile, it is to you I\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2peak, i ber.\\nA Dumb* r j also need as conj\\nEx. Ji tans ct pie\\\\ I i.i\\nwarn bim. so that he may not fall into tli.it snare.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0534.jp2"}, "535": {"fulltext": "CONJUNCTIONS. 253\\nII cat parti sans que per Sonne Vait vu, he is gone without\\nbeing seen by any one.\\nII etait embarrasse avant qu il n eut commence, he was\\nembarrassed before he had commenced.\\nThey may also be used with the infinitive, except jusque.\\nEx. On Va puni pour avoir parle trop franchcment, he has\\nbeen punished for having spoken too freely.\\nPensez avant de parler et vous parlerez mieux, think before\\nyou speak, and you will speak better.\\nThe different tenses which are required after certain conjunc-\\ntions, as the present and imperfect after si, if, have been\\nmentioned in their appropriate places and need not be repeated\\nhere.\\nQue frequently stands for parceque, because, after c est and\\nthe. other tenses of etre with ce.\\nEx. Cest que vous m avez trop taquine, it is because you have\\nteased me too much.\\nPourquoi s en va-t-il Cest qu il va se coucher, why\\ndoes he go away Because he is going to bed.\\nPuisque is in rare cases, and lorsque more frequently, sepa-\\nrated so that que follows meme or another adverb, which may\\nbe placed between.\\nEx. Lors meme que cela en serait ainsi, even if that should\\nbe so.\\nQue, as a conjunction, produces numerous idiomatic expres-\\nsions, of which the following are the most important.\\nQue is placed before a noun, which is compared to another\\nword at the beginning of the sentence, preceded by c est, for the\\nsake of greater emphasis.\\nEx. C est un fieau terrible que la guerre, war is a terrible\\nscourge.\\nCe sont des droles de personnes que vos amis, your friends\\nare very queer people.", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0535.jp2"}, "536": {"fulltext": "254 OX THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nThe same construction is constantly used in questions.\\nEx. Qu est-ce que ce billet? What note is this\\nQu est-ce que ?est que lea idem innees What are innate\\nideas\\nQu est-ce que cela veut dire What does that mean\\nIn this case, Jest is frequently repeated.\\nEx. Qu est-ce que Seat que cette etoile What is that star\\nQ Sest-ce q te e est que cela t What is that\\nQue is used for the relative after definitions of time.\\nEx. Le jour qu il naquit, sa mire mourul, on the lav on\\nwhich he was born, his mother died.\\ny a di am que m Cut vue, it is two years since 1\\nsaw her (during which I have Dot seen her).\\nQ u;, after the imperative, stands instead of pour que or jusque.\\nEx. A} on ami, qut trie, come nearer,\\nfriend, so that 1 can speak t- you.\\nWait until he comes.\\nuadfl instead of puisque.\\nJ x point t What\\ni* the matter with you that you do t t ea1\\nin exclamations, i need as a substitute for the veil, itr,\\\\\\nI by i ii.\\nW li:it a splendid\\nity that lady i-\\nWhat a fool that man is!\\nami MM que.\\nin phrases like the fallen\\nthis will not end utiles\\nIn- C\\nu lui il m soil venu, she will be gono\\nbefore he has i o\\n11 cannot go out with-\\nout catching", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0536.jp2"}, "537": {"fulltext": "INTERJECTIONS. 255\\nCHAPTER IX.\\nINTERJECTIONS.\\nInterjections have their name from the fact that they arc\\nthrown in, as it were, between other words for the purpose of\\ngiving expression, not to our thoughts, like other words, but to\\nour feelings. They are naturally mere particles of words or\\nappeals to higher beings, indeclinable because they have no\\nrelation whatever to other words, and most liable, of all parts of\\nspeech, to be mutilated and corrupted by the effect of strong-\\nfeelings, under which alone they are used.\\nGrief is expressed by ah aie ouf I ahif kef helasf\\nEx. Ah! que cela me fait mail Oh, how that hurts!\\nOuf,je n\\\\j puis plus J etouffe! Oh! I cannot stand\\nit any longer. I am stifled\\nHelas II est mart, et nous sommes orphelins Alas\\nhe is dead, and we are orphans.\\nJoy is expressed by ah bon\\nEx. Ah que je suis heureux de vous revoir Ah! how happy\\nI am to see you again\\nFear is expressed by all hi\\nEx. Hi Qu ai-je fait Je Vai casse Alas what have\\nI done I have broken it\\nDisgust is expressed hjfi!fi done\\nEx. Fi done Vous ne devriez pas faire cela Fie You\\nought not to do that.\\nEncouragement is expressed by ho pet ca allons\\nEx. Ho! AVattaque! Vous allez vaincre Up! Attack\\nthem You will be victorious", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0537.jp2"}, "538": {"fulltext": "256 ON THE PARTS OF A SENTENCE.\\nWarning is expressed by kola/ keinf oh!\\nEx. Hola Prenez garde! Vous allez tomber Lookout!\\nTake care You will fall\\nSilencing is expressed by chut! st\\nEx. Chut! Ne parlez pas si haut Hush! Don t speak so\\nloud!\\nAmong the compound interjections are those appeals to\\nGod, etc., which have been mentioned, like Grand Dieu\\nDieu de dieu! Sainte Vierge! and those words which, in\\ncertain combinations, are used as interjections, as ton beau/\\ngently alkmsferme be linn doucement, not so fast, etc.\\nr :l k B i\\niPJel?", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0538.jp2"}, "539": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2779", "width": "1713", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0539.jp2"}, "540": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0540.jp2"}, "541": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0541.jp2"}, "542": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0542.jp2"}, "543": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2784", "width": "1741", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0543.jp2"}, "544": {"fulltext": "", "height": "2927", "width": "1913", "jp2-path": "grammaroffrenchl00sche_0544.jp2"}}